IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


^ 


1.0 


I.I 


11.25 


11= 

U    ill  1.6 


V] 


^;. 


W'  .<^ 


/^ 


^^yw-^ 


7 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  weST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  872-4503 


is  ! 


J 


6^ 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions 


Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


1980 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  bibiiocaphiques 


The  institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  6t6  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-Atre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique.  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  mdthode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiqu^s  ci-dessous. 


D 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


□   Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 


I      I    Covers  damaged/ 


Couverture  endommagde 


D 


Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagdes 


D 


Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaurie  et/ou  peiiiculie 


□   Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restaur^es  et/ou  pellicul6es 


I      I   Cover  title  missing/ 


Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 


□    Coloured  maps/ 
Cartes  gdographiques  en  couleur 


D 

D 


Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 

Coloured  plates  and/or  Illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 


0 

D 


Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 
Pages  d6color6es.  tachetdes  ou  piqu6es 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  ddtachdes 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality  of  print  varies/ 
Qualltd  in^gaie  de  I'impression 


0 


Bound  with  other  material/ 
Reiid  avec  d'autres  documents 


□    Includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  materiel  suppldmentaire 


D 


D 


Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

La  reliure  serrde  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  intdrieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajouties 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte, 
mais.  lorsque  cela  6tait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  6t6  fiimdes. 


I     I    Only  edition  available/ 


D 


Seule  Edition  disponible 

Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  6t6  film6es  d  nouveau  de  fa^on  i 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


□    Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  suppl^mentaires: 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film6  au  taux  de  reduction  indiqui  ci-dessous. 


10X 

14X 

18X 

22X 

26X 

30X 

y 

12X 


16X 


20X 


24X 


28X 


32X 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

MoritMt  Library 
University  of  Ottawa 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  Iceeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


L'exemplaire  f  iimi  f  ut  reproduit  grflce  A  la 
ginArosit*  de: 

Bibliothique  Moriuat 
Univarsitt  d'Ottawa 

Les  images  suivantes  ont  At6  reproduites  avec  ie 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettetA  de  l'exemplaire  film*,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  bacic  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimte  sont  filmte  en  commengant 
par  Ie  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
derniire  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration.  soit  par  Ie  second 
plat,  selon  ie  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  filmis  en  commen^ant  par  la 
premiAre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  nr'  :rofiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  —^>( meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 


Un  des  symboies  suivants  appara?tra  sur  la 
dernlAre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  Ie 
cas:  Ie  symbols  — ►  signifie  "A  SUIVRE".  ie 
symbols  V  signifie  "FIN". 


Nfrp^.  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
di    arenf  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entire!*-  it.  .iuded  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  th9  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  Atre 
fiimis  A  des  taux  de  reduction  diff^rents. 
Lorsque  ie  document  est  trop  grand  pour  Atre 
reproduit  en  un  seui  cliche,  ii  est  film*  A  partir 
de  I'angle  supArieur  gauche,  de  gauche  d  droite. 
et  de  haut  en  bas.  en  prenant  Ie  nombre 
d'images  nAcessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  mAthode. 


1    1    ■ 

2 

3 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

THI 


Mi 


V  r  ^^ '"  -J 


SMITHSONIAN   INSTITUTION. 

UNITED     STATES    NATIONAL    MUSEUM. 


THE   GRAPHIC    ART    OF    THE    ESKIMOS. 


m 


WALTER  JAMES   HOFFMAN,  M.  D., 

Honorary  Curator,  Ethnological  Museum,  Catholic  Univtrsity  of  Americay 

Wathington,  D.  C. 


Prom  the  Report  of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum  for  1895,  pages  739-968, 
with  eighty-two  plates. 


BIBUOTHECA 


WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT   PRINTING  OFFICE. 
'897.. 


7? 

/  2  f  7 


n 


THE  GRAPHIC  ART  OF  THE  ESKIMOS. 

BASED  UPON  THE  COLLECTIONS  IN  THE  NATIONAL  MUSEUM. 

HY 

AVAT^TER   JAMES    HOFFMAN,  M.  J>., 

Honorary  Curator,  Ethnological  Mmeum,  Catholic  Vnirvraity  of  Amerim, 

Waahinijton,  D.  C. 


739 


|trodn 

Oeo 
Sub 
Pop 
Ear 
Sbel 
Prel 

iviron 
Hab 
Orni 

rt  facil 
Art 
Mat 


Insti 
Port 
Repr 
Deco 
1 
1 
1 
I 
*ictogra] 


'ictograj 
Indiv 
Hunt 
Trav« 
Comb 

Ideograp] 
Pictoi 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


Itrodnotion 749 

^o  Eskimo 752 

Geogrnpbic  distribution 752 

Subtribes  or  settlements 755 

Population 757 

Early  explorations 758 

Shell  heaps  in  the  Alentian  Islands 761 

Prehistoric  art 762 

Eskimo  and  cave-men 763 

ivironment 765 

Habitiitions 765 

Ornitments,  labrets 766 

pt  facility 767 

Art  in  general 767 

MaterialH  employed 773 

Ivory 773 

Horn 776 

Hone 777 

Wood 777 

Metals 781 

Skins  of  animals 781 

Tattooing 781 

Instruments  and  colors 782 

Portrayal  of  natural  and  other  objects 790 

Representation  by  synecdoche 798 

Decoration  and  ornamentation 800 

Decoration  consisting  chiefly  of  lines,  dots,  and  zigzags 800 

Decoration  consisting  chiefly  of  circles 800 

Decoration  of  perscmal  ornaments,  utensils,  etc 833 

De<-oration  of  animal  carvings 839 

'ictographs  of  domestic  avocations 843 

of  habitations  and  conveyance 8't3 

of  utensils  and  weapons 852 

of  preparation  of  food 853 

of  pastimes  and  games 856 

Mctographic  records 872 

Individual  exploits 872 

Hunting  and  fishing 884 

Travel  and  geographic  features 897 

Combat 901 

geography 902 

Pictographs  of  gesture  signs  and  signals 908 

741 


742 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Shanianisiii HI: 

Mythto  auiiiials t)l; 

CereuiunittlH Dlj  IJ 

"  individual 9:1 

Votive  oJl'eringH  and  mortuary 91  I 

Conventionalizing 9:'> 

Compariaon 9H> 

Appendix 94" 

Geuture  HiguH  of  KHkinio 94' 

Specimens  referred  to  in  present  paper 9r»' 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


136. 
137. 
[38. 

39. 
140. 

41. 

42. 

43. 


PI.,\TKS. 

FiutiiiK  |Hiitn. 

Mapof  Alanka 755 

NomikHe'nor,  a  Kavia'gmiiit  luuii 7n(i 

Kukii'nk,  a  Kavia'gniiiit  man 75(i 

NerluiiK'iiur,  u  Kavia'giiiiiit  ){irl 75<> 

T'luilina,  a  man  of  NuwTik 75({ 

Pnka,  a  young  man  of  lltkiawiu 756 

Arrow  Htraightenern 7t)5 

Arrow  straightenerH 765 

Tblinkit  neck  ornaments 76y 

Kolgncv  Sunioye«l  walriiH  hnnturs 772 

Walrns  ( RoHmaniH  obenua,  Iltigor) 774 

Reindeer  or  Woodland  Carilton  ( liaiii/ifer  taratidua  caribou,  Kerr) 776 

Weaving  utenHils  of  horn 777 

Hunting  records  of  horn 777 

Nbti ve  knives 777 

Dancing  mask  of  wood 777 

8a WH  for  cutting  ivory 783 

ll(»iie  skin  dressr^rs 7K4 

Various  forms  of  gravers 785 

Ivory  pipoHtem  showing  right  and  left  sides 71H) 

Carved  drill  bows  and  bag  hiindloH 7!)2 

Carved  drill  bows  and  bag  humlles 792 

Utensils  of  bono  and  horn 79;i 

Carved  ivory  bows  and  bodkins 793 

Boxes  of  bone  and  tusk 793 

Seal  drags  an«l  bag  handle 7JW 

Native  model  of  kaiak.     Alaska 79(5 

Native  model  of  umiak.     Alaska 797 

Spear  rest.    Point  Barrow 798 

Bone  box  for  shell  money.     Hftpa  Tndiaiis 802 

Handles  bearing  primary  forms  of  decorations 805 

Derorated  ornaments 805 

Wooden  tablet.     Paipuan  oriiamcntatioii 805 

Wooden  boxes  and  case  for  fishing  tackle 806 

Decorated  utensils  used  by  women 808 

Ornamented  kantag  handles 809 

Ornamented  drill  bows 810 

Ornamented  kantag  handles 810 

Bag  handles 810 

Records  from  bag  handles 811 

Ornamented  utensils 812 

Ornamented  utensils 813 

Ornamented  carvings'    Africa  and  Alaska 815 

743 


744 


KKPORT  OF   NATIONAL   MUHEUBI,  1K96. 


44.  Knife  shottth.    Tangiera,  Morut'co 8UI 

45.  Koiniin  lani]).     Carthago 8lti 

46.  BritUii  imitutioii  of  Mnoedoiiiuii  Htiittir 8'J() 

47.  CoiiiHof  Hritoua  ami  Gaiila SiiH 

48.  Ornamented  iTory  Jewelry Su" 

49.  Decorated  omanientH  and  utenHile 82» 

60.  Ivory  biiokloa  and  pendants 8-'i< 

51.  Ivory  biioklea  or  toggles 8l'^ 

52.  Hniitt'  tuhei  and  needloraaeH 8:.'9 

63.  Decorated  hunting  hat.     Kutniui  iHiand,  Alaska SX> 

64.  Hat  ornainents  of  lioue 8<'!ti 

55.  Ornamented  bug  handles 84<i 

66.  Ornamented  animal  etligies 840 

67.  Decorated  animal  forms 841 

58.  Decorated  ntensils 8-L' 

59.  Keoords  on  drill  bowM 844 

60.  Kecords  of  domustio  avocations 84 1 

61.  Decorated  ivory  ]»ip« 854 

62.  Decorated  ivory  pipe STiX 

63.  Decorated  itipestem 85:t 

64.  Drill  bows  bearing  records 861 

65.  Ornamented  cylindrical  cases STm 

66.  Records  on  ivory  and  bone 8<)(! 

67.  Records  of  daily  avocations 8(ki 

68.  Kecords  on  ivory  rods 87H 

69.  Records  on  ivory  rods 881 

70.  Whale  and  seal  hunting  records 81t' 

71.  Decorated  ivory  ]>ipestem  uud  bowl 8!t7 

72.  Mythic  bird  and  whale  on  harpoon  rest 91:' 

73.  Records  of  Hhamanistic  ceremonials 9i:< 

74.  Shumanistic  ceremonials 9ir> 

75.  Petroglyphs  ut  HohuslUn,  Sweden 931 

76.  I*etro>;lyphs  at  Bohiisliin,  Sweden 931 

77.  Various  forms  of  concentric  circles 931! 

78.  Page  from  whaleman's  log  book 93."! 

79.  Whaler's  record  of  sighting  whales 93tl 

80.  Eskimo  carvings  of  whiile  tails 93(1 

81.  "History  of  u  year  of  the  Chukch" 938 

82.  Samoyed  reindeer  teams 94 1 

TEXT  FIGURES. 

Page 

1.  Wooden  buzz  toy 77x 

2.  Woo«len  mask 77.'< 

3.  Dancing  gorget  of  wood 77M 

4.  Dancing  gorget  of  wood 78<i 

5.  Bone-pointed  drill.     Point  Barrow 78s 

6.  Iron-pointed  drill.     Point  Barrow 78^ 

7.  Mouthpiece  for  holding  drill 78.' 

8.  Mouthpiece  without  wings 78!' 

9.  Herd  of  reindeer 791 

10.  Herd  of  reindeer 791 

11.  Herd  of  startled  deer 791 

12.  Herd  of  startled  deer 791 

13.  Herd  of  reindeer .' 79:J 

14.  Bird im 


GRAPHIC  ART  OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


745 


m 


Keindoer ^^ 

Reindeer "^ 

Reindeer f^ 

Reindeer.    Point  Itiirruw 794 

Reindeer.     Norton  Sonnd 794 

Reindeer.     Kotxebue  Boond 795 

Reindeer.     Kotzebue  Sound 796 

Reindeer 796 

Wolf 795 

I'orcnpluo 795 

I  Ionian  form 796 

Two  men  in  clone  enibraco 795 

Variants  of  the  hnniiin  form 796 

Varionti  forniM  of  vobhcIm 796 

Whiilin^  HhipH  near  pine-covered  ahore 797 

Hchooner 797 

Hternwkeel  nteainboat 797 

Umialc 797 

Plflkimo  hnnter  and  herd  of  r«*indeor 798 

Nati\'es  urni<!d  with  jjuhh 811 

Seal  head,  ithowinK  teeth 812 

Seal  tooth  pattern 812 

Tool  of  ttntl«'r8 813 

(Sold  boat  from  Nors,  Deiiuuirk 825 

Sanioyed  ornament  of  metal 826 

Snow  shovels 83;< 

Decorated  ivory  carving 834 

Twister  lor  worl\ing  sinew  bacl^in^ 835 

Dipptfr  of  fossil  ivory 835 

Large  knife,  with  ornamented  handle 836 

,  Chisel,  with  decorated  handle 836 

Seal  dart 836 

Tool  bog  of  wolverine  skin 838 

Etching  of  pndendiini 841 

Dwelling  from  Chuckche  year  record 843 

Winter  habitation ;  wood  chopper  at  work 844 

White  men's  habitations 844 

Native  model  of  kaiak 846 

Kaiak 847 

Kaiak 847 

Kaiak 847 

Umiak;  P<iint  Barrow 847 

Umiak 848 

Umiak 848 

Umiak  pursuing  whale 848 

Umiak 849 

Umiak  with  four  hunters 849 

Umiak 849 

Railed  sledge 850 

Flat  sledge 850 

Small  sledge 8R0 

Native  drawing  of  sledge 861 

Sledge 1 851 

Mending  net 852 

Splitting  wood 852 


746 


REPORT    OP   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


l>aga 

70.  Picking  oerries 863 

7i.  Cuttiug  up  wiilrus 863 

72.  Cutting  up  rcindfcr 863 

73.  Cutting  ui»  roimleer 8<j3 

74.  Catching  linh 864 

75.  Catching  seai  tlirongh  the  ic« SCA 

76.  Spearing  Bcal 8<54 

77.  Spearing  seiil 8»U 

78.  Curing  Imh WU 

7J).  Engniving  on  bono Wm 

80.  Athl«'ti(!  sportH 86X 

«1.  Athletic  H|iortH 86M 

82.  Native  niiiking  1m»w 868 

83.  Natives  wrestling m9 

81.  Footl.all 869 

85.  <Janibling , 869 

8(5.  Smoking  pipe 869 

87.  I  )ance 870 

88.  I )an<e  and  feast 870 

89.  Natives  visiting  whalers 871 

90.  Whalers  and  visiting  natives 871 

91.  Records  carvitl  on  ivory 873 

92.  Native  throwing  harpoon 874 

93.  Shooting  reindeer 874 

94.  Shooting  reindeer 874 

95.  Hunting  deer 874 

96.  Hunters  after  a  reindeer 875 

97.  Hunter  approaching  walrus 875 

98.  Hunting  sconi  engraved  on  ivory 875 

9!).  Hunting  srore  engraved  on  ivory 876 

100.  Arrow  straightener 877 

101.  Record  of  hunt 880 

102.  Hunting  score  engraved  on  ivory 881 

103.  Hunting  score  engraved  on  i\  ory 882 

104.  Rival  whale  hunters 885 

105.  Whale  hunt 887 

10<5.  Whale  hunters 890 

107.  Ivory  curving  hearing  pictographs 890 

108.  Fishing  near  the  village 891 

109.  Fishing  with  hook  and  line 892 

1 10.  Seal  drag 892 

111.  Seal-skin  tloat 893 

112.  A  walrus  hunt 894 

113.  Alaskan  notice  of  direction 897 

114.  Alaskan  notice  of  direction 897 

115.  Alaskan  notice  of  distress 900 

116.  Alaskan  departure  to  relieve  distress 900 

117.  Walrus  hunter  attacked 901 

118.  Quarrel  over  game 901 

119.  Attack  ou  village 902 

120.  Human  tigures  making  gestures 903 

121.  Signal  of  discovery !(03 

122.  Hunting  signal JK)4 

123.  Signal  used  hy  whalers 904 

124.  Alaskttu  notice  of  hunt JK)4 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


747 


Faga              'Wm 

863              .|H 

125. 

863            H 

126. 

863           ^H 

127. 

8()3           ^H 

128. 

864             'S 

129. 

864          aB 

i:w. 

^H 

131. 

^H 

132. 

wu          ^B 

13:^. 

84>r>          t« 

134. 

868             JB 

13.''.. 

868             ^^B 

136. 

868            JB 

137. 

869            "IB 

138. 

869            im 

139. 

869            iiiB 

140. 

869           i^B 

141. 

870           ^1 

142. 

870               ^ 

143. 

871           ^Wm 

144. 

871             'm 

14.^.. 

873             JH 

146. 

874             ^^B 

147. 

874              9 

148. 

874              JB 

149. 

874              :B| 

150. 

87ij             ;^H 

l.'il. 

87')             Bb 

152. 

87ri              ^K 

153. 

87*i               B 

154. 

877               B 

880             ^ 

881           :« 

882             fl[ 

885            JB 

j|H 

890           I^B 

^B 

^B 

^B 

892           IH 

^1 

^B 

^1 

^H 

900          ^B 

900         ;fl 

<K)1            ^ 

901             B 

902             fl 

903          .9 

!H)3          '^^1 

904           fl 

904           Wk 

(HU            B 

Alaskan  notice  of  departure 905 

AlaHkan  notice  of  bunt 905 

Notice  of  departure,  direction,  and  n-rujjt' 906 

Starving  hunters 907 

Starving  hunters 907 

Iluuting  8<!eno 907 

Signal  of  distress  and  want JH)8 

Notice  of  departure  to  visit  neighlioring  village 909 

Native  speaking  to  dog 910 

Shore  line  «)r  water  murks 910 

A  eaj.tive  whale 910 

Mythi<-  serpents 913 

Mythic  animal  devouring  niiti ve 913 

Mythic  animal 913 

Mythic  creatures 914 

Ceremonial  dance 915 

Shamanistic  <erenionial 918 

Shaman  curing  a  sick  man  in  the  ceremonial  structure 920 

Shiinian  making  incantations 923 

Shamistic  ceremony 923 

Shaman  exonising  demon 924 

Votive  ottering 927 

Inscription  on  grave  post 927 

Inscription  on  grave  post 928 

Village  and  hurial  grounds 928 

Swimming  seals y29 

Habitation y;^ 

Haliitation 930 

Conventional  hearskins 932 

Whale  Ihikes,  ('ape  Nome 937 


TH1-:  r.RAPHIC  ART  OP  THP.  liSKIMOS. 


By  Wai.tkk  Jamkh  Hokkman,  M.   D., 
Honorary   Curator.  Elhnoloij'wal    Mutium,  Catholic    I'tiivernity  of  Amerim,   Watthing- 

ton,  />.  C. 


INTRODUCTION. 

In  the  selection  of  ai)proi)riate  inaterijils  upon  which  to  inscribe 
his  thouglits,  primitive  man  was  jjoverned  to  a  great  extent  by  his 
environment. 

In  a  country  abounding  in  rocks  and  clifts,  it  was  but  natural  for 
him  to  portray  upon  a  smooth  conspicuous  surface  the  record  of  an 
exploit,  or  a  character  to  direct  his  companions  on  the  right  trail  or 
to  a  convenient  camping  place.  In  that  portion  of  the  West  known 
as  the  "  (rreat  Plains,"  rock  pictures  are  of  seldom  occurrence.  The 
numerous  tribes  of  many  dift'erent  languages  were  hunters  of  the 
buft'alo,  and  in  their  frequent  movements  from  jjlace  to  ])lace  found 
the  skin  of  that  animal,  as  well  as  tliat  of  the  deer,  the  most  con- 
venient. Along  the  shores  of  the  (ireat  Lakes,  where  the  white  birch 
is  of  frequent  occurrence,  the  Indians  employ  the  bark  of  this  tree  for 
their  mnemonic  and  other  records.  The  bark,  when  fresh,  is  tough, 
and  retains  permanently  the  slightest  markings  indented  or  incised 
upon  it  by  means  of  a  sharply  pointed  bone  or  nail. 

Various  Indian  tribes  employ,  also,  other  substances,  such  as  bone, 
wood,  and  various  arrangements  of  shell  beads,  as  well  as  feathers  and 
textile  substances,  to  convey  special  forms  of  information.' 

The  Innuit  or  Eskimo  of  Alaska  utilize  the  tusks  of  the  walrus,  and 
in  occasional  instances  the  horns  of  the  reindeer.  The  tusks  are  cut 
longitudinally  into  rods,  upon  the  faces  of  which  delicate  engravings 
or  etchings  are  made,  the  depressions  or  incisions  thus  produced  being 
filled  with  black  or  some  other  <'olor  so  as  to  heighten  the  effect. 

The  Eskimo  of  (rreenland,  Labrador,  and  tlu^  remaining  portions  of 
the  Arctic  regions  east  of  the  delta  of  the  Mackenzie  River,  use  Hat 
pieces  of  wood  upon  which  to  exercise  their  more  primitive  skill  at  art 
ornamentation.  Although  ivory  is  abundant  in  some  i)ortions  of  the 
Melville  Peninsula,  yet  it  appears  generally  absent  in  the  collections 
from  that  region. 


'  For  (lutailH  and  history  of  pictography,  aee  the  writer's  "  Beginnings  of  Writing." 

D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  New  York,  1895. 

749 


•SSaMta^Hlaii^ 


HB^jUB^teSAittli 


750 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


While  the  accompanyiug  paper  is  based  chiefly  upon  the  <;ollection 
in  tlie  rnite<l  States  National  Ariiseuin,  quite  a  number  of  valuable 
data  were  found  in  the  interesting  collection  of  ivory  records  in  the 
museum  of  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company  in  San  Francisco,  Cali- 
fornia. 

In  addition  to  these  two  sources  of  information,  the  writer  was  so 
fortunate  as  to  have  the  services  in  San  Francisco  of  a  native  Alaskan 
half  caste,  who  had  for  a  number  of  years  been  in  the  employ  of  the 
Commercial  Company.  This  man  had  spent  most  of  his  life  in  travel- 
ing among  the  various  settlements  of  southern  Alaska,  chieHy  for  the 
pur]K)se  of  securing  furs  and  peltries  in  exchange  for  goods  desired  by 
the  natives.  Vladimir  Naomoft",  in  addition  to  his  tliorough  familiarity 
with  the  Russian  and  English  language,  was  fluent  in  five  or  six  native 
dialects.  His  keen  observation  of  the  habits  of  the  people  of  the  main- 
land, and  their  vari«ms  methods  of  conveying  information  by  recording 
on  difterent  materials  their  thoughts,  enabled  him  to  interpret  with  ease 
the  numerous  records  in  the  museum  referred  to;  and  he  also  prepared  a 
number  of  sketches  in  imitation  of  records  Avhich  he  had  observed,  and 
wliichhe  had  been  instructed  to  prepare  and  deposit  at  habitations  at 
which  he  had  called  during  the  absence  of  the  regular  occupants  or 
owners. 

The  primary  studies  relating  to  the  subject  of  the  interpretation  of 
pictographs  were  begun  by  the  writer  in  1871;  and  but  limited  prog- 
ress was  made  until  the  year  1.S79,  wlien  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology  was 
organized  and  furnished  the  facility  necessary  to  otticially  conduct 
investigations  among  the  various  Indian  tribes  of  the  United  States 
and  British  (3olumbia,  and  to  visit  nearly  all  known  pictographs  and 
petroglyphs  in  order  to  make  personal  investigations,  comparisons, 
and  to  secure  tracings  and  sketches  thereof. 

In  addition  to  these  researches  in  pictography,  the  gesture  language 
of  the  various  tribes  was  aiso  studied,  the  latter  frequently  aiding  very 
materially  in  interpreting  obscure  (characters,  and  attempts  at  the 
graphi(5  portrayal  of  gestures  and  subjective  ideas.' 

The  collection  of  gesture  signs  obtained  from  Vladimir  Naomoft',  and 
subsequently  verified,  to  a  great  extent,  by  a  Mahlemut  native  from 
St.  Michael's,  is  appended  hereto,'^  in  connection  with  the  list  of  objects 
in  the  National  Museum,  to  which  si)ecia1  reference  is  made. 

These  gesture  signs  are  of  importance  in  the  study  and  interpreta- 
tion of  many  of  the  Eskimo  records. 

Many  of  these  gesture  signs  are  natural,  and  intelligible  to  most 
people  who  are  known,  on  account  of  peculiar  linguistic  position,  to 
have  knowledge  of  this  mode  of  communication  because  of  their 

'  For  names  aiul  number  of  tribes  visited,  see  Salisban  Bibliography.  J.  ('.  Pilling. 
Washington,  D.  C.  [bulletin  of  the  Hiireaii  of  Ethnology]  un«ler  caption  Hoffman, 
W.  J. 

"Collected  by  the  writ*!r  in  1882,  and  deposited  in  the  manuscript  collections  of  the 
finreau  of  Ethnology. 


to 


ORAPHIC    ART   OF    THE    ESKIMOS. 


751 


inability  to  cimipreheiid  the  oral  speech  of  suiTouiuliiifj  tribes.  Other 
gestures  were  peculiar  to  these  natives  because  of  tlie  uni^pie  resources 
of  their  peculiar  eiivironnient;  an«l  others  ajjain  were  hijjhly  interest- 
ing because  of  the  concept  beinj;  hidden  in  some  old  custom,  shaman 
istic  ceremonial,  or  individual  practice  of  the  person  having  recourse 
to  a  i)articular  idea. 

In  a  number  of  the  records  will  be  observed  outlines  of  the  hunum 
ligure,  with  hands  and  arms,  and  sometimes  the  lower  extremities,  in 
curi<ms  an<l  api)arently  unnatural  positions.  Such  portrayals  are 
attempts  at  illustrating  gesture  signs  pictorially,  and  subjertive  ideas 
are  thus  indi<-ated— a  step  very  much  in  advance  of  the  ordinary  sys- 
tem of  pictography  as  known  to  and  practiced  by  most  of  the  Indian 
tribes. 

It  is  obvit)Us,  therefore,  that  in  order  to  fully  compreliend  the  inten- 
tion of  a  pictographic  re<;ord,  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  artist's  needs, 
his  environment  and  resources,  his  beliefs  and  shamanistic  observ- 
ances, and  as  much  of  tlie  gesture  language  as  may  be  obtainable. 

From  a  careful  stmly  of  the  pietographs  of  the  several  Indian  tribes 
and  the  numerous  i)etroglyi>hs  and  painted  records  scattered  over 
various  portions  of  the  United  States,  it  is  safe  to  assert  that  a  com 
parison  of  tliese  with  the  various  artistic  materials  of  the  Eskimo  show 
the  latter  to  be  vastly  sui)erior  to  the  preceding,  especially  in  faithful 
reprodu(;tion  of  animal  forms  and  delicacy  of  artistic  execution. 

The  portrayal  of  the  reindeer,  in  particular,  serves  as  an  illustration 
of  the  manner  in  which  the  Eskimo  are  ch>se  observers  as  to  anatomi- 
cal peculiarities,  as  well  as  in  catching  the  expression  indicated  in 
various  attitudes  assunu'd  by  these  animals  in  grazing,  rising,  running, 
and  in  the  positions  assumed  to  denote  alarm,  fear,  etc. 

In  the  i)ortrayal  of  whales  the  Eskimo  artist  is  also  careful  as  to 
specific  anatomical  features.  The  i)eculiar  elevation  at  the  spout  or 
blowhole  of  the  "bowhea<l"  is  especially  indicated,  and  is  character 
istic  of  the  species,  as  that  jtart  of  the  mammal  is  used  to  raise  an«l 
keep  open  the  elastic  "granular"  salt  ice  for  breathing  holes  or  for 
spcmting. 

The  smaller  whale,  designated  also  as  the  California  gray,  the  "mus- 
sel digger,''  or  "devilfish,"  is  likewise  speeific^ally  indi(;ated  by  a  more 
pointed  head  and  sharp  flukes,  and  1  (^an  (mly  vaU  attention  to  the 
8harj>  flukes  and  conspieuous  fins  of  the  "killer"  to  illustrate  the 
result  of  observation  given  to  it  by  the  native  artist  in  endeavoring 
to  show  graphically  the  i)art  which,  to  him,  is  a  specific  identificati(»n 
of  the  animal. 

In  a  few  illu>stration8  the  walrus  is  very  carefully  engraved,  and 
although  the  native  result  may  appear  uncouth  and  cumbersome,  yet  a 
comparison  of  the  etchings  with  the  illustration  of  that  animal  will  at 
once  serve  to  show  strikingly  careful  imitation  of  the  original  subject. 
As  to  the  portrayal  of  various  other  animal  forms,  they  are,  generally, 


752 


REPORT    OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1896. 


BUtticieiitly  true  to  nature  to  admit  of  ready  identification.  The  imita- 
tion of  the  specific  construction  of  the  kaiak  and  the  umiak  is  usually 
excellent,  as  also  the  various  forms  of  dog  sledges  peculiar  to  certain 
localities  in  Alaska  and  faithfully  represented  in  a  number  of  etchings. 
For  the  purpose  of  further  comparison  between  the  Eskimo  portrayal 
and  the  manufactured  vehicle,  several  illustrations  of  the  latter  are 
reproduced  in  figures. 

The  Eskimo  is  not  an  expert  in  portraying  the  human  form.  It  is 
certain  that  in  various  instances  man  is  indicated  by  linear  outlines  or 
incisions  very  much  in  imitation  of  that  of  the  Shoshonian  tribes,  the 
head  being  a  mere  circular  spot,  from  which  is  suspended  a  line  ter- 
minating below  in  two  legs,  and  beneath  the  head  being  attached  two 
lateral  lines  for  arms.  These  extremities  may  be  drawn  in  various 
attitudes,  but  apart  from  the  attitude  no  further  notice  would  be  given 
to  them.  This  forms  a  marked  contrast  as  compared  with  the  same 
idea  as  portr.ayed  by  various  Algonkian  tribes,  notably  so  the  Ojibwa, 
who  devote  much  artistic  attention  to  tbe  head,  dress,  iind  ornaments 
v*i  the  character  intended  to  represent  a  human  being. 

The  peculiarity  of  Eskimo  graphic  art  as  compared  with  that  of 
other  peoples  will  be  treated  of  farther  on.  The  subject  forms  the  basis 
of  the  present  p.iper,  and  was  made  possible  through  the  courtesy  of 
Doctor  G.  Krown  Goode,  Director  in  charge  of  the  United  States 
National  Museum,  and  my  indebtedness  to  Professor  O.  T.  JVIason, 
Curator  of  Ethnology,  is  hereby  gratefully  acknowledged  for  his  val- 
uable suggestions  and  for  placing  at  my  disposal  every  facility  for  the 
careful  examination  of  specimens  in  his  custody,  not  all  of  which,  how- 
ever, were  deemed  of  sufticient  importance  to  illustrate,  as  such  a  pro- 
cedure would  have  resulted  in  considerable  duplication. 

THE    ESKIMO. 
(JEOGRAPHIC!   DISTBIllTTTTON. 

The  Eskimauan,  or  Innuit,'  linguistic  family  occupies  the  greater 
portion  of  the  coast  of  Arctic  America,  Greenland,  the  Aleutian 
Islands,  and  a  small  area  of  the  Chukche  Peninsula  of  Siberia.  The 
extreme  points  are  about  3,200  miles  apart,  though  to  follow  the  shores 
would  necessitate  a  journey  of  5,000  miles. 

The  interior  portions  of  the  continent  are  occupied  by  various  Indian 
tribes,  belonging  to  several  conspicuous  linguistic  families,  but  the 
Eskimo,  under  various  designatioiis,  have  always  apparently  confined 
themselves  to  the  seashore  and  the  country  adjacent  thereto,  not 
exceeding  50  miles  inland,  except  in  following  various  river  courses  in 
pursuit  of  game. 

The  easternmost  branch  of  the  Eskimo  is  that  represented  by  natives 


'  Although  the  term  Innuit  is  frequently  enjployed,  and  may  be  linguisticafly 
proper,  the  writer  employs  the  more  popular  term,  viz :  Eskimo, 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP   THE   E8KIM08. 


753 


he  imita- 
8  usually 

0  certain 
etcliings. 
l>ortrayal 
latter  are 

•in.  It  is 
utlines  or 
Tibea,  the 

1  line  ter- 
u;hed  two 
n  various 
tl  be  given 

the  same 
le  Ojibwa, 
)rnanients 

th  that  of 
K  the  basis 
iourtesy  of 
;ed  States 
T.  Mason, 
pr  his  val- 
ity  for  the 
hich,  how- 
uch  a  pro- 


le  greater 
Aleutian 
eria.  The 
the  shores 

)U8  Indian 
but  the 
y  confined 
ereto,  not 
(!ourse8  in 

by  natives 
uguistioall.v 


along  the  north  and  east  coast  of  (irecnland,  two  families  being  met 
with  by  Captain  Clavering  in  1823,  north  of  7P  30'.  Captain  Holm 
recently  found  them  on  t\\v  southeast  coast  betMcen  O.j'^aml  00^  north 
latitude.  These  are  said  to  profess  ignorance  of  any  natives  north 
of  them.  On  the  west  coast  of  (ireenlan<l  tliey  extend  to  about  74° 
north  latitude.  General  (Jreely  found  indications  of  permanent  settle- 
ments in  (Irinnell  Land,  near  Fort  Conger,  at  81"^  44'  nortli  latitude. 
IMr.  Henry  G.  IJryant,  in  his  "Notes on  the  most  nortliern  lOslvimos,"* 
says : 

Ah  is  well  known,  tlio  most  northern  Kskiinos  wore  first  viHited  liy  Sir  .John  liosH 
in  1818,  and  lie  first  applit-il  to  them  the  term  "Arctic  Highlanders."  As  the  appro- 
priatcni!S8  of  tliirt  ap])ellation  sccniH  qnite  (|iicstionu1tle  as  applied  to  a  tribe  living 
wholly  on  the  seacoast,  I  have  preferred  to  nse  the  term  "most  northern  Kskimos," 
as  being  more  descriptive  and  ap])ro]iriate  in  its  character.  This  tribe  inhal>itsthat 
rugged  strip  of  indented  coast  in  northwt'st  (Sreeuland  which  extends  for  about 
')'tO  miles  from  Cape  York  to  a  point  somewhat  south  of  the  southern  edge  of  the 
llnmboldt  glacier.  It  is  a  fact  well  known  that  thi;  impassible  i<'e  walls  which  occur 
at  both  of  these  points  have  thus  far  served  as  cfiectual  barriers  to  any  exten«led 
migrations  of  this  tribe.  It  is  owing  to  this  enforced  isolation  that  at  this  late  day 
we  find  here  the  most  typical  of  the  Kskimo  family  gronj>s — a  primitive  trilte  who 
are  but  Just  »'merging  from  the  Stone  Age,  whose  members  still  dress  in  skins,  eat 
raw  llesh,  and  pursue  their  game  with  the  same  sort  of  rinle  weapons  that  their 
forefathers  used  in  preiiistoric  times. 

Doctor  Kane,  in  1855,  noted  this  tribe  as  niunbering  140,  while 
]\Ir.  Bryant  remarks  that  Lieutenant  I'eary  jilaces  the  census  at  fully 
L'oO. 

On  the  Labrador  Coast  the  Eskimo  extend  southward  to  Hamilton 
Inlt't  at  about  55^3  .{C,  north  latitude,  though  it  is  not  so  long  since 
tliey  were  located  at  the  Straits  of  Belle  Isle. 

On  the  east  coast  of  Hudson  IJay  these  natives  reach  southward  to 
James  liay;  while  northward  it  is  on  Kllsnu're  Land  and  around  Jones 
Sound  that  Doctors  lioas  and  Kessels  i)lace  the  northernmost  groups 
of  the  nnddle  Eskimo.  Several  of  the  northern  ArctitJ  islands  present 
evidence  of  former  occupancy,  but  for  some  unknown  cause  the  natives 
migrated  thence.  The  western  part  of  the  central  region  of  the  con- 
tinent seems  unoccupied,  and  from  the  Mackenzie  Avestward  the  coast 
seems  to  have  no  permanent  villages  between  Herschel  Island  and 
Point  Bsirrow.  This  strip  of  country  is  no  doubt  hunt«'d  over  in  sum- 
mer, as  the  natives  of  the  latter  locality  do  not  i)enetrate  far  into  the 
interior  for  game. 

The  Alaskan  Coast  from  Point  Barrow  to  the  Copper  Kiver  on  the 
south  is  practically  occupied  by  Eskimo  of  various  villages  or  bands, 
as  will  hereafter  be  more  fully  described. 

The  Aleutian  Islands  are  occupied  to  a  certain  extent  by  a  branch 
of  the  .same  linguistic  family,  though  the  dialects  are  unintelligible 
to  Ihe  liskimo  proper.    Their  distribution  has  been  very  materially 


'  li'cprinted  from  Report  of  the  Sixth  Internatioual  Geographical  Congress,  held 
nt  I.cindon,  18115,  p.  3. 

>'AT  Mus  05 48 


mm 


r 


754 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


changed  since  the  advent  of  the  Bussians  and  t\ie  establishment  of  the 
fur  trade,  and  at  present  they  are  located  principally  on  a  few  of  the 
largest  islands  only. 

On  the  Asiatic  Hide  this  family  is  represented  by  the  Yfiit,  who  are 
distinct  from  the  Ghukche,  or  Ttiski  of  authors,  who  are  of  Asiatic 
origin,  and  of  a  distinct  linguistic  group.  The  Yfiit  are  also  a  coast 
people,  and,  according  to  Mr.  Dall,  are  comparatively  recent  arrivals 
from  the  American  side.  Between  the  Siberian  and  the  Alaskan 
coasts  are  the  Diomede  Islands,  a  convenient  stopping  place  for  voy- 
agers between  the  two  continental  points  above  mentioned.  At  these 
islands  Simeon  Deshueff',  in  1048,  found  natives  wearing  labrets  who 
were  at  war  with  the  Tuski.  Similar  reports  were  made  by  Shestakoff, 
in  1730.  Peter  Popoft",  who  visited  the  Asiatic  mainland  about  1711 
for  the  purpose  of  collecting  tribute  from  the  Chukche,  describes  the 
habitations  and  remarks  that  ''he  found  among  the  Tuski  ten  of  the 
islanders  wearing  labrets,  who  had  been  taken  prisoners  of  war."' 

Mr.  DalP  observes  that  the  Tuski  do  not  wear  labrets,  which 
distinguishing  feature,  compared  witli  the  Chukche,  was  noticed  by 
D6shneft',  as  well  as  all  subsequent  voyagers.  Both  sexes  tattoo,  not 
only  over  the  face  but  all  over  the  body.  The  women  in  probably  all 
instances  bear  tattooed  vertical  lines  on  the  chin,  a  practice  which  is 
not  followed  by  the  men.  An  illustration  of  tattooing  upon  the  chin 
of  a  Port  Clarence  woman  is  given  elsewhere. 

Concerning  the  representatives  of  the  Eskimo  upon  the  Asiatic  side 
of  Bering  Strait,  the  following  remarks  are  reproduced  from  the  memo- 
randa concerning  "the  Arctic  Eskimos  in  Alaska  and  Siberia,"  by 
John  W.  Kelly ,^  interpreter,  who  says  of  the  ''Siberian  Eskimos:" 

Thero  aro  HettlcmentH  of  Eskimos  at  Cape  Tchaplin  (Indian  Point),  Plover  Bay, 
and  East  Cape.  How  long  they  have  been  there  and  how  tnnch  of  the  country  they 
have  occupied  can  only  be  conjectured.  Those  occupying  St.  Lawrence  Island,  Cape 
Tchaplin,  and  part  of  the  shores  of  Plovf  r  Bay,  on  the  mainland  of  Asia,  opposite 
St.  Lawrence  Island,  speak  a  dialect  nearer  like  that  of  Point  Barrow  or  the  Mac- 
kenzie River  than  the  dialects  of  the  Dioniedes  or  Kotzebue  Sound.  That  the 
Eskimos  of  Asia  have  been  there  a  great  mnny  years  is  a  certainty.  The  Deermen 
people,  whose  principal  support  is  domesticated  reindeer,  have  gradually  crowded 
out  the  Eskimo  or  Fishmen,  and  have  almost  absorbed  them  by  assimilation.  They 
wear  no  labrets,  and  in  dress  and  tattooing  are  the  same  as  the  Deermen.  That 
they  have  lived  in  underground  houses  is  abundantly  proved  by  the  ruins  at  Cape 
Tchaplin  of  old  Inits  which  have  been  framed  with  the  whole  jaws  of  whales.  Now 
they  live  in  huts  above  ground,  covered  with  walrus  hides.  They  are  built  in  the 
same  manner  as  those  of  the  Deermen,  who  use  a  covering  of  reindeer  robes.  From 
the  Deermen  they  have  also  learned  to  cremate  their  dead,  instead  of  scattering  the 
bodies  over  the  plain,  according  to  the  custom  of  the  American  Eskimos.  Like  the 
American  Eskimos,  they  deposit  the  personal  property  of  the  deceased  at  his  grave. 
If  he  was  a  great  hunter,  they  also  erect  a  monument  of  reindeer  antlers  over  his 


'  Quoted  from  W.  H.  Dall,  "Alaska  and  its  Resources."    Boston.     1870,  p.  376. 

"■  Idem,  p.  380. 

3  Published  in  the  Bureau  of  Education  Circularof  InformatiouNo.  2, 1890,  p.  8,  9. 


l!!!i 


L." 


It'^ 


Report  of  U,  S.  National  Muuum,  189& Hoffman 


I'  • 


160" 


170- 


180' 


170' 


'^^ 


%j 


160* 


170' 


180* 


170' 


Map  of  Alaska, 


Map  of  Alaska. 


«  ',  >  ■ 


GRAPHIC   ART  OK  THR   EBKIM08. 


755 


i;r»ve.     At  Kiwit  CapH,  Hiberia,  tlicro  in  a  traoe  or  the  Arctio  RaklinoM,  Ititt  iiilVoriuK 
fruni  their  iiniirviit  nt^iKhltortt,  th«  l)loi!i«<li<  pitnple. 

In  the  vicinity  of  KoMt  Ciipe  tlu«r«  »rt<  i»  (Vw  niinH  ol'  iiiMlfrKroiiml  hoiiHOM,  anil  li 
few  KNkiiiin  wonlH  am  Htill  iiM«tl  by  the  |M-oplo.  Twi'iity  iiiIIun  wcMtwanl  from  ('a|>e 
Tohaplin  ix  IMoTor  Itay,  wliere  both  thv  Kiiltinio  ami  lienrim-n  hinguagt*  in  upokou, 
but  ttie  Haltimu  iH  on  a  rapiii  dmtline. 

SUnTBinKS  OH   SETTLKMKNTS. 

The  Kskiino  of  littonil  AliiHka  arn  diviiled  into  a  ronHidorablo  iiiiiii- 
ber  of  };eoKra])hi('  «liviHioii8,  popularly  deMi^natud  as  tribett,  and  arc 
hero  bric'Hy  enuiiHMab'd  cldeHy  according  to  VV.  11.  I )»!!'«  arrangement, 
his  orthography  being  generally  maintained. 

The  aci'onrpanying  map  of  Ahiskan  and  AHiath;  coasts  will  serve  to 
further  aid  in  locating  the  points  ocitupied  by  the  various  native  settle- 
ments below  ennnierat«>d.     Plate  1. 

Tlie  Aleutians,  pvoiwrly  so  caUed,  are  divided  intt)  two  tribes,  the 
Atkans  and  Unalishkans.  The  former  belong  to  the  western  part  of 
the  archii>eIago,  and  tlie  latter  were  originally  confined  to  tlie  eastern 
portion.  The  original  name  of  tliesc  pe^iple  signitied,  a('<;ording  t^ 
Humboldt,  "People  of  the  Kast,"  and  they  have  been  regarded  as 
having  originally  c<»me  from  tlie  continent,  a  raference  to  which  theory 
will  be  made  further  on. 

The  Kgali'ikmut  |=Aigaluxannutl'  is  the  southernmost  tribe,  begin- 
ning nearly  at  the  mouth  of  the  ( -opper  Kiver  and  extend  westward  to 
h-y  Hay.  Some  of  the  eastern  bands  have  become  nuxed  by  inter- 
marriage with  the  Thiinkit.  "The  Chugiichmuts  occupy  the  shores 
and  islands  of  Chugach  (rulf,  and  the  southwest  coasts  of  the  i>enin- 
sula  of  Keniii."  They  are  few  in  number,  compared  with  the  large 
extent  of  country  they  occupy. 

The  Kaniagmuts  occupy  the  island  of  Kadiak  and  the  greater  por- 
tion of  the  peninsula  of  Aliaska.  This  is  i)robably  the  most  popular  of 
all  the  Kskimo  tribes.  They  extend  from  Lliamna  Lake  to  1.59°  west 
longitude. 

The  Oglemuts  occupy  the  Aliaska  i)eninsula  along  the  northern  (ioast, 
from  irt\P  west  longitude  to  the  head  of  Bristol  Kay,  and  along  the 
north  shore  of  that  bay  to  Point  Titolin. 

The  Kiateciamlut  inhabit  the  coast  from  near  the  m<mth  of  Nushergak 
liiver  westward  to  Cape  Newenhain.  They  are  the  Nushergagmuts  of 
Dall,  who  remarks  of  them  as  particularly  excelling  in  carving  ivory, 
and  that  most  of  their  weapons  and  tools  are  made  of  this  material. 

The  Kuskwogmuts  "inhabit  both  shores  of  Kuskoquim  Hay,  and 
some  little  distance  up  that  river." 

Tiie  Agulmuts  extend  "  from  near  Cape  Avenott"  nearly  to  Cape 
Komanzotf.  There  are  also  a  number  of  settlements  of  the  same  tribe 
on  the  island  of  Nunivak." 

'  All  words,  or  remarks,  within  brackets  are  added  by  the  present  writer. 


756 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Tlie  Magemuts  "  inhabit  the  vicinity  of  Ciijte  Koiiii'mzoff,  and  reach 
nearly  to  the  nioutlt  of  the  Yukon.  They  resemble  their  southern 
neighbors  nion;  than  they  do  those  to  the  north  of  them.  The  women 
wear  labrets.    The  name  Magemut  signifies  ' Mink  people.'" 

The  Kk('»gmuts  "  inhabit  the  Yukon  delta  from  Kipniuk  to  Pastolik, 
and  ascend  the  river  as  far  as  Mauki,  some  distance  above  the  mission- 
Those  who  inhabit  the  Kwikhpak  slough  call  themselves  KwikhpJigmut, 
a  name  sometimes  ajiplied  to  the  whole  tribe."  A  ])eculiarity  "  in  many 
of  them  is  the  extreme  hairiness  of  their  persons.  Many  of  tliem  have 
very  strong  bhurk  beards  and  haiiy  bodies." 

The  IJnaligmnts,  or  Cnaleet,  "occupy  the  coast  from  Pastolik  to 
Shaktolik."    They  have  also  been  designated  as  the  Aziagmut. 

The  Mahlemuts  "occupy  the  coast  of  Norton  Sound  and  IJay  north 
of  Shaktolik  and  the  neck  of  the  Kavidk  Peninsula  to  Selawik  Lfike. 
Their  most  eastern  village  is  Attenmnt,  and  their  western  boundary 
the  river  which  flows  northward  into  Spavariefl'  Bay,  Kotzebue  Sound." 

The  Kavis'igmiutd  occupy  the  Kaviak  Peninsula  and  Sledge  or  Aziak 
Island.  "  Many  of  them  pass  the  winter  in  the  southern  part  of  Nor- 
ton Sound,  and  there  is  a  large  Kaviak  village  at  Unalaklik.  *  ♦  * 
Their  principal  villages  are  Nookmut,  at  Port  Clarence,  and  Knik- 
Tagmut,  on  Golofnina  Bay." 

The  portrait  of  a  Kaviagmiut  man,  aged  3.'>  years,  is  given  in  plate  2. 
He  is  a  very  intelligent  native,  and  is  a  clever  artisan.  Another  type 
of  the  same  tribe  is  shown  in  the  person  of  Suku'ut,  aged  LT)  years, 
from  the  same  locality,  plate  '>.  An  interesting  illustration  of  a  girl 
aged  17  years  is  i)resented  in  plate  4.  She  has  a  remarkably  dear  skin, 
pink  cheeks,  and  bears  upon  her  chin  the  usual  pattern  of  tattooed 
lines,  extending  downward  from  the  mouth. 

In  i)late  ">  is  reproduced  the  portrait  of  an  inhabitant  of  the  village 
of  Nuwilk,  at  Point  Harrow.  The  features  are  very  much  less  pleasing 
than  those  shown  in  the  i)receding  figures.  Plate  6  represents  a  young 
man  from  the  village  of  Utkiavwifi.' 

The  Oke  ogmuts  are  essentially  the  same  as  the  preceding,  but  the 
name  is  applied  "by  the  Innuit  to  the  small  and  energetic  tribe  who 
inhabit  the  islands  by  Bering  Strait.  They  carry  on  the  trade  between 
the  two  continents,  and  visit  the  island  of  St.  Michael  every  year  for 
the  purpose.  I  have  also  heard  the  same  name  applied  to  the  inhab- 
itants of  St.  Lawrence  Island." 

The  Eskimo  of  the  Point  Barrow  region  are  located,  according  to  Mr. 
Murdoch,*  in  the  villages  of  Nuwuk  and  Utkiavwin.  Nuwfik  signifies 
"the  Point,"  sind  is  a  slightly  elevated  knoll  at  the  extremity  of  Point 
Barrow,  in  latitude  71°  23'  north,  longitude  l~AP  17'  west.  Utkiavwifi 
signifies  "  the  Olift's,"  is  11  miles  west  from  Nuwuk,  at  Capa  Smyth, 
and  is  also  a  high  ridge.    The  nearest  neighbors  to  the  east  are  those 

'  These  two  portraits  are  reprodiuied  from  the  Niuth  Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau 
of  Kthnolo^y  for  1887-88,  1892,  figs.  1  and  4. 
-Ideni,p.26. 


I 


I 


Report  of  U    S   Nitinra    Museum,   1  flQ5,    -Hof'-nan. 


Plate  2. 


*     * 
Kiiik- 


•« 


NOMIKSE'NER,   A  KaVIAGMIUT  MaN. 


'ill 


■^ 


Rpport  o*  U.  S   Natinna'  Museum.   1895  — H.)(*man. 


Plate  3. 


SUK'UUK,  A  KaVIAGMIUT  MAN. 


Report  of  U,  S.  Natior.ai  Museum,  1895  -  Huffman 


Plate  4. 


i 


Nerlung'ner,  a  Kaviagmiut  Girl. 


SSSSjI^MSK^MJiB 


r 


W-4 


m 


Report  of  U,  S   National  Museum.  1  8'i5  —Ho'fman. 


Plate  5. 


'  ' . — -^^■^ ' — 

"  ■    ■■    ■        "■    '  ■,  -v 

•              -- 

.  "            .         .  '■'■■      ■TT^^      ' 

■'l'.^->-''>.~<-i''-.'..'  - 

?,_. 

' 

^i    . 

H^^H 

%  K  %     -^'-^  ■ 

M          ^^• 

'(•il^              ^ 

%■    '- 

1 

'  w  1 

7^^ 

1 — !iIL_l_ — iM 

Unalina,  a  Man  of  Nuwuk. 


I II I  T,ii^,iuttt^mmimmfkiiiiimmamimMiiiaBmmmigUtSi 


w! 


m 


1^  '> 


Report  of   U    S.  National  Museum,   I  8'i5.- Hoffman. 


Plate  6. 


PuKA,  A  Young  Man  of  Utkiawin. 


i 


1/ 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP   THE    ESKIMOS. 


757 


I 


I 


4m 


f 


at  HorHcJiel  Isliuul,  or  Demarcation  I'oiiit,  and  on  the  west  ut  a  Hinall 
villaj-e  between  I'oint  llelelier  an«l  VVsiiiiriglit  Inlet.  The  native.s  of 
tliese  vilhijjes  are  so  <'lo8ely  connected,  says  Mr.  Muidocli,  ''that  they 
are  sometimes  spoken  of  i'olh'ctively  as  Bidi'inifiniinni''  (  =  Hidarnnmiut). 
"At  ailistance  np  the  river,  which  Hows  into  Wainri},'ht  Inh't,  live  the 
Knnminn,  'the  people  who  live  on  the  river.'  These  appear  to  be 
closely  related  to  the  llrst  villajje  below  NVainrijfht  Inlet,  which  is 
named  Kilanwitawin." ' 

The  ]>eople  at  Point  Hope,  iu'.cordinj;  to  Mr.  Mnrdoch,  are  known  as 
the  Tikera'fimiun,  "inhabitants  of  the  foretin};«'r  (Point  Hope)." 

The  natives  alonj;  the  coast  east  of  Point  Barrow  to  and  beyond  the 
Mackenzie  are  often  spoken  of  by  the  Hiulson  liay  traders  as  the  Mac- 
kenzie Uiver  liskimo.  They  appear  to  be  identical  with  those  described 
by  Father  I'etitot  as  the  Ta/j<'o/jment  |=Ta,\XM>,'"^'"tJ  <livision  of  the 
Tchi^lit,  and  are  termed  by  Murdoch  the  Kupfinminn,  and  inhabit  the 
perman«'nt  viUaj^es  at  the  "  western  moutii  of  the  Mackenzie,  at  8hin{<;le 
I'oint  and  Point  Sabine,  with  an  outlyinji"  villai^e,  supposed  to  be 
deserted,  at  Point  Kay."  Still  another  tribe  is  loiiated  at  Anderson 
Kiver  and  Cape  IJatharst,  not  considered  by  Petitot  as  the  above 
named,  as  he  applies  tiie  name  K/jagmalit.  Sir  .lolin  Ki(;har(ls<Hi,  the 
ttrst  to  meet  with  them  [liSiiOJ,  ('alls  them  "  Kette-jfarra'-oot." ^ 

rOPULATION. 

With  reference  to  the  population  of  the  Eskimo  of  the  several  divi- 
sions, only  approximate  lij^nres  can  be  given.  The  (rreenland  group, 
consisting  of  seventeen  villages  on  the  east  coast,  are  stated  by  Holm, 
in  1.S84-8."),  to  nund)er  about  ooO,  while  on  the  west  coast  tlu^  "nussion 
Eskimo"  numbered  10,122  in  188(5,  and  the  northern  Greenh.nd  Eskimo, 
or  Arctic  Highlanders  of  Itoss,  number  about  200. 

Doctor  Boas  estimates  the  "Central  ov  Batlin  Land  Eskimo"  at 
about  1,100. 

The  natives  along  the  coast  in  Labrador  are  stated  by  Kink,  Packard, 
and  others,  to  number  about  2,000  souls.' 

The  Alaskan  Eskimo,  comprising  those  of  the  mainland,  as  well  as 
the  few  (40?)  upon  Little  Diomede  Island,  together  with  those  on  St. 
Lawrence  Island  and  the  Aleutian  Islanders,  are  estimated  by  Dall 
ami  others  at  about  20,000.' 

This,  ex(ei>ting  the  Siberian  tribe,  makes  a  total  of  about  .'H,000 
Eskimo.  What  the  former  ]>opulation,  before  the  introduction  of  liquor 
and  social  vices,  may  have  been  it  is  impossible  to  conjecture.  It  is 
stated  by  one  author  (Dall)  that  the  Aleutians  formerly  were  estimated 
at  20,000,  but  recently  numbere<l  only  1,.~)00,  which  figure  has  also  been 
given  by  others,  though  according  to  a  still  later  estimate  these 
islanders  were  put  down  at  2,200. 


'  Ninth  Aiiuiial  Report  of  the  Biiroau  of  Ethnology  for  1887-88,  18!»2,  pp.  43,  44. 
*P>ankliii'8  Narrative  of  a  Second  Expedition  to  the  Shores  of  the  l*«»lar  Sea  in  the 
years  1825, 1826.  and  1827.     London,  1828,  p.  203. 
'Sixth  Annual  Report  of  the  Hureaii  of  Ethnology  for  1884-8."»,  1888,  p.42G. 


wBJBi 


768 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1«»5. 


EAUI.V  KXI'LOKATIONS. 

Kor  rcusoiiH  which  will  hereafter  become  evident,  it  Ih  iieceHaary  to 
refer  brielly  to  the  Hcvenil  exploriitioiiH  iiiude  to  I'usterii  Silieria,  and 
later  to  the  Ainerleaii  inainlaiid.  In  the  following;  historical  references 
I  use  freely  Mr.  Dall's  remarks,  iniblished  in  his  work,  '^Alaska  au<l 
its  Itesonrees,"  of  which  note  has  before  been  made. 

In  tlie  year  lOKi,  the  Knssians,  under  Isai  l^natief,  pushed  their 
exphnations  to  the  east  of  the  Kolyma  Hiver,  the  mouth  of  which  is  at 
about  latitude  iW)'^  W  nortli  and  longitude  101'^  ',W  east,  and  obtained 
by  barter  from  some  Chuki^he  specimens  of  walrus  ivory.  In  the  foliow- 
intf  year,  H»t7,  four  snuill  vessels  sailed  eastward  of  Kolynni,  the  party 
being  under  the  connnand  of  a  Cossack,  named  Kidn'on  Ih'shnet)'.  The 
object  of  this  expedition  was  to  reach  the  Anadyr  lliver,  of  which  vague 
reports  had  l)een  received,  Otiu'r  explorers  followed,  but  it  was  not 
until  1(»4S  that  the  northeast  coast  of  Asia  Mas  passed  and  Bering  8ea 
entered. 

Various  explorers  continued,  from  year  to  year,  to  visit  dillerent  por- 
tions of  the  <u>ast  of  Kamchatka,  but  it  was  not  until  .711  that  a  Cos- 
sack, named  Peter  Iliunsen  Popolf,  arrived  at  Kast  Cape  with  the 
intention  of  collecting  tribute  from  the  Chukche.  Tiie  visit  i)roved 
fruitless,  but  I'opotf  retiuned  with  an  acu'cmnt  of  the  Diomede  Island- 
ers and  the  (*liukche  account  of  a  continent  which  lay  to  the  east  and 
beyond  these  islands. 

On  account  of  the  interest  manifested  in  these  discoveries,  scientific 
men  succeeded  in  obtaining  tiie  attention  of  Peter  the  Great,  and 
instru('tions  for  an  exi)edition  were  delivered  to  Admiral  Aj^rsixin.  A 
few  days  later  the  Emperor  died,  but  the  Empress,  in  order  to  fulfill  the 
wishes  of  the  deceased  monarch,  ordered  the  execution  of  the  instruc- 
tions, and  Captain  Vitus  Bering  was  nominated  to  command  the  expe- 
dition. Although  the  original  plan  was  formulated  in  1725,  it  was  not 
until  1727  that  Bering  and  his  companions  left  St.  Petersburg.  He 
sailed  past  what  is  now  known  as  St.  Lawrence  Island,  through  Bering 
Strait,  and,  thnsi)ri>vingtlie  separation  of  Asia  and  America,  returned 
to  the  Kanu'-hatka  Kiveron  the  2()th  of  Sejiteinber  witlu)ut  having  seen 
either  the  Diomede  Islands  or  the  American  Coast.  He  returned  to 
St.  I'etersburg  in  1730,  but  again  went  on  a  voyage  of  discovery  and 
landed  on  Bering  Ishind,  where  he  die<l  December  8, 1741. 

In  tlie  meantime  various  other  navigators  and  explorers  had  been 
making  considerable  progress  in  exploring  the  shores  of  Kamchatka 
and  approaching  the  American  Coast.  In  1731 1'avlutski  reached  Cape 
Serd/eKiiman,  in  the  hope  of  securing  from  the  Chukche  some  tribute. 
This  resulted  in  failure,  and  in  the  interim  Gwosdeff  sailed  to  the 
Chukche  Coast;  a  gale  drove  him  eastward,  "where  they  found  an 
island,  and  beyond  it  the  shores  of  the  continent  of  America.  They  met 
a  native  in  a  Kyak,  and  sailed  two  days  along  the  coast  without  being 


4* 


ORAPHIC    ART   OF   TIIK    ESKIMOS. 


759 


nblo  to  land.  A  storm  cuiih;  up  aii«l  tl!t',\  loturiKMl  to  Kuiiicluitku. 
TliiH  conipletrd  tliu  explumtioii  of  Hcriii;;  Htrait,  whicli  hud  beuii  com- 
menced by  Dt'sliiielT'  and  liis  cornpiinions."' 

It  was  not  until  .luly,  17H,  that  Cliuikun"  arrived  olV  tlie  American 
Coast,  near  ('ross  Simiid.  lloafs  wore  sent  tlicrc  upon  two  occasion h, 
and  scv(>ral  (biys  later  two  canoes,  tilled  with  natives,  came  near  the 
ship,  but  imnu'diately  lied  to  the  shore.  \  inious  islands  w«Me  seen  by 
Chirikoft'  on  his  return  to  Kamciuitka.  Duiinpf  this  visit  21  men  were 
lost,  de  la  ('roycre,  the  naturalist,  dyinj;  ol"  scurvy. 

Kerin^  saw  laml  (>n  duly  2,  and  anchored  near  an  island  two  days 
later. 

I'iUnlian  Ihissott'  discovered  the  island  of  Attn,  the  westernmost  of 
the  Aleutian  j;roup,'in  17ir>.  (llotloH'  discovered  the  island  of  Kadiak, 
or  Kaniay:  as  it  was  desi^iiiited  by  some  of  tlu'  natives,  in  duly,  \7Chi. 
These  islanders  were  less  disposed  to  friendliness  and  pive  frequent 
evi<lences  of  hostility. 

About  17<>1  liieutenant  l<ynd  was  put  in  <-onnnand  of  an  expedition 
which  was  orfjani/ed  under  the  dire<'ti»»n  of  the  impress  ('atherine. 
lie  did  not  leave  Kamchatka  until  17(>7,  sailing  from  Ochotsk  toward 
Bering  Strait,  i)assing  Ht.  Matthew  iind  St.  Lawrence  islands,  saw 
Diomede  Islan<l,  and  finally  landed  on  the  AnuM-ican  <*oast  south  of 
Cape  Priui'e  of  Wales.  Further  explorations  of  the  peninsula  of 
Alaska  wiis  made  by  Krenit/in  in  17(»H. 

Cook  entered  IJering  Strait  in  August,  177.S,  und,  on  his  return.from 
a  voyage  northward,  explored  Norton  Souiul  and  Hay.  On  October  .'J 
he  again  touched  at  Ilnalashka,  sailed  feu-  the  Siindwich  Islands,  where 
he  was  killed  by  the  natives  in  1771). 

As  early  as  17.SS,  Mares  and  Douglas,  supercargoes,  sailed  from 
Macas  to  Nootka  and  to  Cooks  Inlet.  The  Spanish  <rlaimed  the  right 
to  sail  the  I'acitic  on  the  northwest  coast  of  America. 

In  1701  Billings  and  SarVchett"  visited  I'nalashka,  St.  Paul,  St.  Law- 
rem*e,  Aziak,  and  the  DionuMles;  also  touched  on  the  Ameriiran  Coast 
near  Cape  Prince  cf  Wales,  and  then  an(diored  in  St.  Lawrence  Bay 
on  the  Asiatic  side. 

lu  1703  the  Empress  of  IJussia  issued  an  ukas«5  authorizing  the 
introduction  of  missionaries  int()  the  American  colonies,  and  to  the 
works  of  these  patient  laborers  we  are  indebted  for  many  interesting 
and  valuable  facts  respecting  the  history  of  the  (iustoms  and  manners 
of  that  time.  It  is  singular,  however,  that  although  their  accounts 
often  appear  unusually  concise  and  comprehensive,  the  practice  of 
engraving  upon  ivoiy  and  bone,  seems  to  have  been  entirely  over- 
h)oked,  or  more  likely  may  not  have  been  in  vogue  among  them.  This 
subject,  however,  will  be  further  treated  elsewhere. 

The  natives  of  Boint  Barrow  are  said  never  to  have  seen  a  white 
man  until  the  year  1820,  when  the  barge  of  the  lilossom,  under  Captain 


'Dall.     "Alaska  and  its  inhabitants,"  p.  299. 


7G0 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Boechey,  visited  their  coast.  Tliey  had,  liowever,  received  from  south- 
ern neiglibors  articles  of  European  manufacture  introduced  by  the 
Eussians,  sucli  as  tobacco,  copper,  aud  other  articles,  some  of  which 
were  obtained,  a<!c<)rding  to  Murdoch's  statement,'  by  way  of  the 
Diomede  Islands  and  Siberia. 

Visits  by  other  navigators  were  made  at  long  intervals,  and  it  was 
not  till  1854  that  the  first  whaling  vessel  came  to  the  Point. 

Although  tlie  Point  Barrow  natives  are  provided  with  firearms,  they 
would  be  unable,  by  means  of  these  alone,  to  obtain  any  seals,  "  as 
their  own  appliances  for  sealing  are  much  better  than  any  civilized  con- 
trivances." '  Mr.  Murdoch,  whom  1  have  here  ([uoted,  states  furthermore 
that  "all  are  now  rich  in  iron,  civilized  tools,  canvas  and  wreck  wood, 
and  in  this  respect  their  condition  is  improved."  Nevertheless,  in  so  far 
as  the  griii)hic  art  is  <*oncerned,  they  api)ear  to  be  considerably  behind 
the  natives  of  Bristcd  I>ay  and  Xorton  Sound. 

The  eminent  Danish  anti«piarian.  Doctor  Henry  Rink,' in  his  remarks 
on  the  probable  origin  of  the  Eskimo,  speaks  of  their  former  location 
in  Greenl.and  as  follows : 

Act'ordiug  to  the  sajtaa  of  the  Icelander,  they  were  already  met  with  on  the  east 
coast  of  Greenhind  about  the  year  1000,  and  almost  at  the  same  time  on  the  east  coast 
of  the  American  continent.  IJetween  the  years  1000  and  1800,  they  do  not  seem  to 
have  occui)ied  the  land  south  of  (i5^  norih  latitude,  on  the  west  coast  of  (Jreeuiand, 
where  the  Scaudina\'ian  colonies  were  then  situated.  Ihit  the  colonists  seem  to 
have  been  aware  of  their  existence  in  higher  latitudes  anil  to  have  lived  in  fear  of 
an  attut'k  by  them,  since,  in  the  year  12*)(),  an  expedititm  was  sent  out  for  the  pur 
pose  of  oxi)loring  the  abodes  of  the  Skra-lings,  as  they  were  called  by  the  colonists. 
In  11^79  the  northernmost  settlement  was  attacked  by  them,  eighteen  men  beiiig 
killed  and  two  t)oy8  carried  oil'  as  prisoners.  About  the  year  1450  the  last  accounts 
were  received  from  the  colonies,  and  the  way  to  Greeulaml  was  entirely  forgotten 
in  the  northern  country. 

Doctor  Kink  says  that  the  P^skimos  of  southern  Greenland  present 
features  indicating  "mixed  descent  from  Scandinavians  and  Eskimo," 
the  former,  however,  not  having  left  any  sign  of  influence  of  their  cul- 
ture or  nationality  upon  the  present  natives. 

In  1585  Greenland  was  discovered  anew,  by  .John  Davis,  who  found 
it  iidiabited  exclusively  by  Eskimo. 

In  the  w^ork  before  cited,'  Doctor  Henry  Kink  remarks: 

Kecent  investigations  have  revealed  ditVerences  between  the  Eskimo  tribes  which 
indicate  that,  after  ha'ving  taken  their  lirst  step  to  being  an  exclusively  maritime 
people,  they  have  still  during  their  migrations  been  subjected  to  farther  develoji- 
ment  in  the  same  direction,  aiming  at  adajitiug  them  especially  for  the  Arctic  coasts 
as  their  pro])er  home.  The  farther  we  go  back  toward  tiieir  supposed  original 
country,  the  nu)re  of  what  may  be  ctmsidered  their  original  habits  we  lind  still  pre- 
served. In  the  general  history  of  culture  these  variations  must  certainly  appear 
trilling,  but  still  I  believe  that  a  closer  examination  of  them  will  throw  light  on  the 
question  how  the  most  desolate  and  deterring  regions  of  the  globe  could  beconie 


'Ninth  Annual  Keport  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology  for  1887-88,  18S»2,  p. 53. 
-The  Eskimo  Tribes.    Copenhagen  and  l^oudon.     1887. 
"Idem,  pp.  3-5. 


i 


h 


ib 


4m 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


761 


peopled.  The  solution  of  this  problem  is  facilitated  by  the  fact  that  the  whole 
E»kiiiio  nation  lias  be»Mi  lews  exposed  to  that  contact  with  other  pcoph'S  which  else- 
where renders  HUth  investigations  more  complicated.  These  variations  are  among 
tiie  Eslvimo  more  exclusively  due  to  natural  inliuences  to  whidi  th<^  wa'-derers  were 
exposed  during  their  (.trnggle  ior  existence,  and  which  partly  gave  rise  to  new  inven- 
tions, partly  led  only  to  the  abolisiiinent  of  former  habits.  In  some  instances  also 
the.se  external  influences  evidently  occasioned  decay  where  the  severity  of  tlie 
clinuite  in  connection  with  the  isolation  and  the  fewness  of  inhabitants  almost 
exceeded  the  botnuls  of  human  endurance. 

Doctor  Rink  endeavors  to  show  from  this  point  of  view  ''the  peculiar- 
ities of  the  tribes  in  the  dittereiit  domains  of  culture  a^ree  with  the 
8U])position  that  the  orijjinal  Kskiuio  inhabited  the  interior  of  Alaska; 
that  apart  from  the  true  Eskimo  a  side  branch  of  them  in  the  farthest 
remote  i>eriod  pcople«l  the  Aleutian  Islands,  whereas  people  of  the 
principal  race  lator  settled  at  the  river  mouths,  spreading;-  north- 
ward aloiifjf  Uering  Strait  and,  hiving  off  some  colonies  to  the  opposite 
shore,  proceeded  around  Point  Barrow  to  tlie  east,  the  Mackenzie  l^iver, 
over  tlic  central  regions  or  Arctic  Archipelago,  and  tinally  to  Labrador 
and  Greenland.  This  dispersion  may  have  taken  thou.sauds  of  years; 
they  can  only  have  i>roceeded  in  small  bands,  very  nuu-h  as  still  they 
are  used  to  move  about  during  certain  .seasons.  Their  only  way  of 
procuring  subsistence  in  the  vast  de.serta  tliey  i)as8ed  over,  exclude<l 
the  i)Ossibility  of  national  migrations  on  a  larger  scale.  While  in  this 
way  they  continued  to  di.scover  new  countries,  some  families  were 
induced  to  go  farther;  others  remained  and  finally  gave  rise  to  the 
present  scs  "^tcrcd  settlements.  But,  in  proposing  this  hypothesis,  I  con- 
sider it  a  .  latter  of  course  that  Alaska  as  the  original  home  of  the 
Kskimo  is  not  to  be  taken  in  the  strictest  sense,  absolutely  excluding 
adjacent  parts  of  the  continent  toward  the  east.  But  as  to  the  other 
theory,  that  tlie  Eskimo  should  have  emigrated  from  Asia  by  way  of 
Bering  Strait  and  fouml  the  Indian  territory  already  occupied  by  the 
.same  natives  as  now,  this  objection  must  be  separately  taken  into  con- 
sideration in  connection  with  the  facts  bearing  in  favor  of  the  former.'' 


d« 


SHELL   HEAPS   IN   THE    ALEITIAN   ISLANDS. 

The  only  important  researches  regarding  prehistoric  renniins  in 
Alaska  and  the  Aleutian  Islands  are  those  of  Mr.  Dall.'  He  remarks 
that  the  ''shell  heaps  are  found  on  nearly  all  the  islands  of  the 
Aleutian  group.  They  are  m(>st  abuiulant  and  extensive  in  the 
islands  east  of  Tnalashka,  and  on  the  few  islands  from  Amchitka  east- 
ward, which  are  less  high  and  rugged  than  the  others,  or  on  those 
where  the  greater  amount  of  level  land  is  to  be  found.  The  two  neces 
saries  for  a  settlement  appear  to  have  been  a  stream  of  water  or  a 
spring,  and  a  place  where  canoes  could  land  with  safety  in  rough 

'On  succession  in  the  shell  heaps  of  the  Aleutian  Islands.    Contributions  to  N«»rth 
Americaa  Ethnology,  I,  1877,  p.  i:i. 


762 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


weather.    Where  these  are  botli  wanting,  shell  heaps  are  never  found, 
and  rarely  when  either  is  absent." 

From  cart^f'ul  examinations  made  by  Mr.  Dall,  he  deems  it  proba- 
ble that  the  islands  "were  populated  at  a  very  distant  ])eriod;  that  the 
population  entered  the  chain  from  the  eastward ;  that  they  were,  when 
first  settled  on  the  islands,  in  a  very  different  condition  from  that  in 
whidi  tliey  were  found  by  the  first  civilized  trjivelers,"  etc.  It  is 
furthermore  suggested  by  this  writer  that  there  was  a  later  wave  of 
population;  that  the  former  people  "were  more  similar  to  the  lowest 
grades  of  Innuit  (so  called  Eskimo)  tlian  to  the  Aleuts  of  the  historic 
period,"  and  that  tlie  stratification  of  the  shell  heaps  shows  a  tolerably 
uniform  division  into  three  stages,  (;haracterized  by  the  fo«>d  which 
formed  their  staple  of  subsistence  and  by  the  weai)ons  for  obtaining 
as  well  as  the  utensils  for  preparing  the  food. 

The  stages  are — 

I.  The  littoral  period,  represented  by  the  Echinus  layer. 
II.  The  fishing  period,  represented  by  the  Fishbone  layer. 

III.  The  hunting  period,  represented  by  the  Mammalian  layer. 

In  concluding  his  impressions  respecting  the  shell  heaps,  the  author 
concludes  by  saying  "that  those  strata  correspond  approximately  to 
actual  stages  in  the  development  of  the  i>opulation  which  formed  them, 
so  that  their  contents  may  approximately,  within  limits,  be  taken  as 
indicative  of  tlie  condition  of  that  population  at  the  times  when  the 
respective  strata  were  being  deposited." 


vSt 


i. 


*m 


PREHISTOEIO    ART. 

With  reference  to  specimens  of  art  or  ornament,  Mr.  Dall'  remarks: 

Tht*  exjiresKioii  ol"  nstliotic  feeling,  a^  iudicated  by  attempts  at  ornamentation  of 
utensils  or  weapons  or  by  the  fabrication  of  articleu  which  serve  only  lor  purposes 
of  adornment,  is  remarkably  absent  in  the  contents  of  the  shell  heaps.  As  a  whole, 
this  feeling  became  ileveloped  only  at  the  period  directly  anterior  t<»  the  historic 
period.  It  was  <loubtless  exhibited  in  numerous  ways,  of  which  no  ])re8ervation 
was  possible,  so  that  the  early  record,  even  for  a  considerable  period,  would  be  very 
incomplete.  We  know  that  great  taste  and  delicate  handiwork  were  expended  on 
articles  of  clothing  and  manufactures  of  grass  liber,  which  wotild  be  entirely 
destroyed  in  the  shell  heajis,  an<l  of  which  only  fragmentary  remains  have  been 
preserved  on  the  mummies  found  in  the  latest  2)roliistoric  burial  caves  and  rock 
shelters.     »     »     » 

There  are  some  articles  used  on  the  kyak  which  are  usually  made  of  bono,  and 
often  preserved  in  the  up|)er  mamnuilian  stratum,  and  upon  which  some  attempts  at 
ornamentati(m  were  bestowed.  These  are  little  pieces  of  bone  or  ivory,  in  general 
shape  resembling  a  kneeling  iigure,  with  one  or  two  holes,  through  which  cords  aie 
passed.  *  *  "  The  latter  were  in  some  cases  carved  to  represent  ligiires  of  ani- 
mals. Another  species  of  onuimentation  is  elsewhere  alluded  to  in  the  tlat  thin 
St rijis  of  bone  which  were  fastened  to  the  wooden  visor  worn  in  hunting.  These 
were  fre(|uently  ornamented  with  typically  Innuit  patterns  of  parallel  lines,  dots, 
concentric  circles,  with  zigzag  markings  between  them  iind  radiating  lines.     All 

>  On  succession  in  the  shell  heaps  of  the  Aleutian  Islands,  in  Contributions  to  North 
Aiuerioau  Ethnology,  I,  1877,  p.  43. 


»Mi 


GRAPHIC  ART  OP  THE  ESKIMOS. 


763 


',  and 

)t8  Ut 

iiicral 
Is  .'lie 
aiii- 
tliin 
These 
duts, 
All 


m*» 


these  were  in  black,  on  the  white  basis  of  the  bone  or  ivory.  *  '  *  The  mark- 
ings can  Bfldom  be  accurately  described  as  marks  of  ownership.  I  have  never  seen 
any  defmite  mark  or  ornament  of  tliis  nature  amon^  the  Aleuts  or  Western  Innuits. 
They  readily  reco};;ni/.e  their  own  utensils  or  weapons  without  any  such  aid,  and  I 
believe  the  theory  of  "  marks  of  ownersliip,"  "batons  of  command,"  and  such  like, 
has  been  stretched  far  beyond  the  point  of  entlurance  or  accuracy,  at  least  among 
writers  on  the  Innuit.  Drawings,  «^ugravings  on  bone  or  wood,  and  pictures  of  any 
kind,  so  far  as  I  have  observed,  are  all  subseijuent  to  the  period  (•overe<l  by  the 
shell  heap  deposit.  They  are  invariably  quite  nio«u-rn,  though  the  taste  for  them 
is  now  widely  spread  among  the  Innuit,  esiwicially  those  of  the  regions  where  ivory 
is  readily  procured.  The  coloration  of  wooden  articles  with  native  pigments  is  of 
ancient  origin,  but  all  the  more  elaborate  instances  that  liave  come  to  my  knowledge 
have  marks  of  comparatively  recent  origin.  • 

ESKIMO   AND   CAVK   MEN   OF   FRANCE. 

In  his  "Alaska  and  its  Resources,"  Mr.  Dall  presents  several  illus- 
trations of  drawings  on  bone,  very  ordinary  sjiecimens  and  limited 
to  poorly  executed  figures  of  men  hunting.  These  are  given  merely 
to  indicate  to  the  reader  the  general  appearance  of  the  etching  of  the 
Eskimo.  It  is  related  in  this  connection,  however,  that  these  drawings 
are  analogous  to  those  discovered  in  France  in  the  caves  of  Dordogne. 
The  numerous  specimens  of  jjrehistoric  art,  both  incised  and  carved, 
which  have  been  given  by  IVIessrs.  Lartet  and  (^^hristy  in  their  work 
entitled  Reliquia-  Aquitanica','  are  familiar  lo  most  arclueologists,  so 
that  no  reproduction  of  ])Iates  or  illustrations  is  deemed  necessary  in 
the  present  instance. 

Mr.  W.  Boyd  Dawkins,^  an  acknowledged  authority  on  the  antiquity 
of  man  in  FiUrope,  remarks  at  length  upon  the  ])ossible  and  in  fact 
probable  identift<'ation  between  the  cave  men  and  the  Eskimo.  In  his 
conclusions  upon  (;onq)arisons  between  the  respective  arts,  forms  of 
weajwns,  apparently  similar  modes  of  living,  etc.,  he  says: 

On  passing  in  review  the  manners  and  customs  of  all  the  savage  tribes  known  to 
modern  ethnology,  thc^re  is  only  one  people  with  whom  the  cave  men  are  intimately 
connected  in  their  manners  and  customs,  in  their  art,  and  in  their  implements  an<l 
weapons.  The  Kskimo  rai|ge  at  the  present  time  from  Greenland  on  the  east  along 
the  shores  of  tlie  Arctic  Sea  as  iar  to  the  west  as  the  Straits  of  Bering,  inhabiting  a 
narrow  littoral  strip  of  country,  and  living  by  hunting,  fishing,  and  lowling.  The 
most  astonishing  bond  of  uijion  between  the  cave  men  and  the  llsliinio  is  the  art  of 
representing  animals.  .Inst  as  the  former  <'ngraved  liisons.  horses,  mammoths,  and 
other  creatures  familiar  to  them,  so  do  the  latter  represent  the  animals  upon  wliich 
they  <lepend  for  food.  On  the  im]ilenients  of  the  one  you  see  the  liuntingof  the  urns 
and  tlie  horse  depleted  in  the  same  way  as  the  killing  of  the  reindeer  and  walrus  on 
the  implements  of  the  other.  •  *  *  ^vil  these  points  of  eouneetion  between  the 
cave  men  and  the  Eskimo  ean.  in  my  oi>inion,  be  explained  only  on  tlie  hypothesis 
that  they  belong  to  the  same  race.  To  the  objection  that  savage  tribes  living  under 
the  same  eonditions  might  independently  invent  the  same  implements,  and  that 
therefore  the  correspondence  in  the  question  does  not  necessarily  imply  a  unity  of 
race,  the  answer  nmy  bo  made  that  ther«f  are  no  savage  trilies  known  which  use  the 
same  set  of  implements  without  being  connected  by  blood.     The  ruder  and  more 


'  London,  1875,  pp.  204.     PI.  87.    Three  ma^is  and  132  woodcuts. 
^" Early  Man  in  Britain, "  1880,  p.  233. 


(Quarto. 


■a£B8 


764 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


conimon  instramentB,  such  as  flakes,  and  in  a  lesser  degree  scrapers,  are  of  little  value 
in  classification;  but  where  a  whole  set  agrees,  intended  for  various  use,  and  some  of 
them  rising  above  the  most  common  wants  of  savage  life,  tlie  argument  as  to  race  is 
of  considerable  weight.  It  is  still  further  strengthened  by  the  identity  of  art.  The 
articles  found  in  the  caves  of  Britain.  Belgium,  France,  or  Switzerland  di tier  scarcely 
more  from  those  used  in  west  '^ieorgia  than  the  latter  from  those  of  Greenland  or 
Melvilli)  Peninsula. 

From  these  considerations  it  may  bo  gaihored  that  the  Eskimos  are  probably  the 
representatives  of  the  cave  men,  and  i)rotccted  wiMiin  the  Arctic  Ciri'lo  from  those 
causes  by  which  they  have  been  driven  from  ICurope  and  Asia.  They  stand  at  the 
present  day  wholly  apart  from  all  other  living  races,  and  are  cut  oil"  from  all  both 
by  the  philologcr  and  the  craniologist.  rnacciist(»med  to  war  tiiemselvea,  they  were 
probably  driven  from  Europe  and  Asia  by  other  tribes  in  the  same  manner  as  within 
the  last  century  they  have  been  driven  farther  north  by  the  attacks  of  the  Red 
Indian. 

The  theory  that  the  peoples  of  the  circumpolar  regions  might  be  the 
descendauts  of  the  ancient  cave  dwellers  of  France  has  been  enter- 
tained not  only  by  Mr.  Dawkins,  Among  other  arguments  employed 
are  (1)  the  apparent  similarity  of  environment,  and  that  as  the  south- 
ernmost margins  of  the  receding  ice,  in  glacial  times,  slowly  moved 
northward,  the  ancient  cave  people  continued  their  migration  in  that 
direction  until  their  present  location  was  reached;  (2)  the  general 
resemblance  in  the  carved  weapons  and  utensils  of  reindeer  horn,  and 
also  some  of  the  portrayals  of  animal  forms  which  occur  thereon. 

From  evidence  based  upon  investigations  by  Doctor  Kink,  and  the 
archsvologic  indications  noted  by  Mr.  Dall  and  others,  the  Eskimo 
are  believed  to  have  become  a  littoral  people  in  Anierica  by  expulsion 
from  some  interior  regions  of  N^orth  America,  such  expulsion  having 
been  brought  about  through  the  northward  expansion  of  the  Athabas- 
can tribes  toward  the  northwest  and  the  Algonkian  tribes  toward  the 
northeast.  Even  within  historic  times  the  Eskimo  o('cui)ied  a  much 
more  extensive  coast  line  southward  on  the  Atlantic  than  at  present, 
and  it  is  impossible  to  conjecture  what  may  not  have  been  the  southern 
limits,  in  prehistoric  times,  with  reference  to  the  tirst  theory  above 
named. 

It  is  believed  by  some  geologists  that  as  the  glaciers  of  western 
Europe  gradually  receded,  the  dirfiction  of  migration  of  the  prehistoric 
people  was  toward  the  British  Isles,  the  Scamlinavian  Peninsula,  and 
Lapland.  The  theory  of  their  passage  across  to  Greenland  does  not 
appear  to  be  supported  by  any  prehistoric  remains,  such  as  one  would 
hope  to  discover  after  the  recovery  of  the  great  amount  of  excellent 
material  indicating  a  peculiar  advancement  in  the  arts  of  fashioning 
weajwns  and  utensils  of  ivory  and  horn.  Neither  does  there  survive 
anything  in  (Ireenland  but  the  simplest  type  of  artistic  decoration  on 
ivory  or  bone,  such  as  lines,  dots,  etc.,  which  is  characteristic  of  the 
Eskimo  everywhere,  excepting  in  Alaska,  where  the  greater  develop- 
ment was  due  to  other  causes,  which  will  be  mentioned  farther  on. 

Neither  is  there  apparent  evidence  that  the  Eskimo  came  across 
Bering  Strait,  as  the  survivors  of  the  ancient  cave  men  of  Europe. 


I 


ire  of  little  value 

I  use,  and  some  of 
(lent  ns  to  race  is 
tity  of  art.  Tlie 
ad  differ  scarcely 
of  Greenland  or 

iire  probably  the 
!ir<'le  from  those 
liey  stand  at  the 
If  from  all  both 
lelvea,  they  were 
lanner  as  within 
icks  of  the  Red 

might  be  the 
8  been  eiiter- 
tits  employed 
as  tlie  south- 
ilowly  moved 
cation  in  that 

the  general 
ser  horn,  ami 
hereon, 
tink,  iiud  the 

the  Eski.To 
by  expulsion 
Ision  having 
:he  Athabas- 
^  toward  the 
i)ied  a  much 

II  at  present, 
the  southern 
lieory  above 

of  western 
«  prehistoric 
tiinsula,  and 
nd  does  not 
s  one  would 
of  excellent 
'  fashioning 
lere  survive 
Jcoration  on 
istic  of  the 
ter  develop- 
iher  on. 
ame  across 
Europe. 


Report  of  U    S.  National  Museum,  1895      Hof'man 


Plate  7. 


Arrow  Straiqhteners. 


Plate  7. 


^■: 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    7. 


I 


3 


Fig.    1.   AKROW   and   Sl'EAl!   STKAKillTENKK. 

(Cat.N.,.44mi-.S.X.M.     From  Ca,,..  Xom,.,  Alnska.     (•oIlert...n.v  K  W  N.-ho,,  ) 
I*  Iff.  2.    AKROW   AND  Sl-KAR   STltAKiUTKXKR. 

Ki.r    •.     ,    <''"-^'°-*^'«»'l'-«-^'^'-    S"-<lS«  or  Aziakl.sl..„,l,  Alaska.     C.,ll..H..a  l.v  K  W  VeUon 
l-if?.  .1  Arrow  and  Spkais  Straigiitenkr.  ^^.Nels.m 

(••at.  No.  44745,  V.  S.  X.  M.     S^go  l.slan.l,  Alaska.     ( ■„lle,„.,I  l.v  K.  W.  NVlso,,., 


Raporl  of  U    S  NstionsI  Muieum,  1095.— HoMfnin. 


Plate  8. 


5      ;' 

•i      1 


Arrow  Straiqhteners. 


Plate  8. 


EXPLANATION    OF    plat 


E    8. 


^'•W.   I.    Ahroh-   aNI.   Spevk    St., 


C'ai.  \(,  n-r    • ""■^Kwi  _ ,^ 

Fife'.  2.   Akh„w  AXn  Spk  [^  L^'"     ^•'■"""■''"  J«lan,l8,  AI„8k„      (■  M 

■     •'••>-.M.     C.ij,,.  J»,„.|,..    \..,  .„     ,,  „ 


1 


nUAIMIU;    AUT   OF   TIIK    KHKIM08. 


76r> 


With  rojfiml  to  the  stM-oml  tlu'ory,  it  would  hv  stninffv  imlord  if 
tliere  w«Me  not  Home  p-iu'ial  similiiiitieM  lu'tMoen  tlio  w«>a|>oiis  and 
ntcnHils  of  two  distinct  nnciviii/ed  |><>o|d4>s  when  liotli  nHt>d  tlie  sanio 
materials — rrindeer  liorn — for  snrli  articles;  and,  I'nrtliermoie,  tlio 
attempted  p<»rtrayal  of  animalsof  lilvc  ;r«'nera  wonid  luitnrally  prodiuru 
results  of  very  j^eneral  likeness. 

I'Mnally,  it  Inis  been  sn;;'^^>sted,  and  tiie  burden  of  proof  appears  to 
indicate,  that  th«;  development  of  ])ictof;raphic  art  ainon^  the  Alaskan 
I'iSkimo  vas  attributable  to  their  ('ontai't  with  tht^  Russians;  and  that, 
althouj;h  these  natives  preserved  a  limited  de^re4i  of  i'ultnre  as  to 
decoratip)?  by  simple  lines  and  dots  their  weaptuis  and  a  few  other  arti- 
cles of  daily  use,  yet  the  objective  representation  of  any  animate  or 
other  Ibrms  is  believed  to  hav«'  Ikhmi  adopted  sincui  the  earliest  visits  of 
civilized   nan  to  the  Alaskan  doast. 

Several  Alaskan  utensils,  howevtM-,  used  as  arrow  and  spear  strai);ht- 
eners  are  here  illustrated  in  plate  7,  lij^s.  1,  2,  and  .{,  ami  plate  H,  (If^s. 
liand'S,  and  are  apparently  similar  to  s<nne  lik<>  renmins  from  tluM-aveH 
of  Francii  tij;nred  by  Messrs.  Lartet  and  ('hristy. 

Upon  <'h>ser  examimition  it  will  be  observed  that  lMisi<les  the  simi- 
larity of  form,  due  chielly  to  the  reason  that  both  types  are  of  sinnlar 
materials,  the  representation  of  animal  forms  by  en^ravin^,  or  im-ision, 
appears  to  belong;  to  a  ditl'erent  school  of  artistic  work,  if  su(;li  a  term 
may  here  be  employed;  a  <'skct(diy''  outlines  of  an  animal  fre(|uently 
('onsistin^  of  but  a  few  suj^ffjestive  incisions  here  and  there,  as  in  very 
modern  inneteentli  t-entury  ait  "oik,  produciu}?  an  vnWt  in  several 
instances  as  the  reimleer  tigure<l  oy  Ijartet  and  Christy  in  tlu'ir  work 
before  <!ited,  which  artistic  prodiuts  ajipear  "too  artistic"  for  the 
culture  status  of  cave  men  siudi  as  aic  portrayed  in  the  deductions  of 
the  {i^entlenuMi  above  quoted  by  W.  lioyd  Dawkins  and  others  who 
have  followed  up  the  same  theme.  The  work  of  the  cave  untn  is  appar- 
ently vastly  superioi-  in  one  r«5spe«',t  to  that  of  the  Eskimo,  and  ajjain 
fnun  another  aspect  inferior  to  it — inferior  in  vaiious  ways,  as  will  b«) 
learned  by  a  i)erusal  of  the  results  attaintMl  by  the  lOskimo  in  the  rep- 
resentation of  both  objective  and  subjective  ideas,  as  well  as  an 
advancen)ent  towanl  conventionalization  beyond  that  practiced  by  peo- 
ples who  are  apparently  further  advaui^ed  in  other  respects. 

ENVIRONMENT. 

So  many  narratives  relating  to  the  life  and  social  <'(mditi«ms  of  the 
Eskinu),  as  well  as  to  the  toimgraphic  pec;idiarities  of  the  countries 
occupied  by  the  various  subdivisicms  of  this  people,  have  been  pub- 
lished at  various  times  and  by  various  authorities,  that  anything 
further  in  this  connection  would  be  supertluous,  especially  in  a  paper 
devoted  more  particularly  to  the  graphic  arts. 

The  habitations  and  clothing,  such  as  are  required  in  an  unusually 
inhospitable  climate,  are  both  illustrated  in  the  native  pictography. 


'■'-■■-^ ,..■—.... 


706 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


}    . 


\ 


The  forms  of  habitations  are  more  parti(;ularly  referred  to  elsewhere, 
and  various  native  representations  are  reproduced  for  the  sake  of  com- 
parison both  as  to  artistic  merit  as  well  as  indicatin};  personal  or  tribal 
variations  dependent  on  <;limatic  requirements. 

The  styles  of  clotliin;^  are  not  often  referred  to  in  Eskimo  etchings, 
tattooinj;  and  labrets  being  sometimes  indicated  in  carvinj^fs,  as  well 
as  in  incised  characters.  Some  interesting  carvings,  with  deli(*ate 
artistit;  touches  to  accentuate  the  effects  of  tattooing,  are  given  else- 
where. 

ORNAMENTS   AND   LABRETS. 

In  some  of  the  etchings  are  portrayed  the  outlines  of  human  figures — 
in  various  attitudes,  though  especially  as  if  in  the  act  of  dancing — to  the 
rear  portion  of  the  body  of  which  are  attached  little  tail-like  append 
ages  resembling  tails  of  au'mals. 

This  may  be  exi)lain«'d  by  quoting  Captain  lieechey,'  as  in  his  refer- 
en<^e  to  the  natives  found  northward  of  Cape  I'rince  of  Wales,  within 
4i  miles  of  Schismareff  Inlet,  he  states  that,  in  addition  to  certain 
described  articles  of  clothing,  "they  have  breeches  and  boots,  the 
former  mad  of  deer's  hide,  the  latter  of  seal's  skin,  both  of  which 
have  drawing  strings  at  the  upper  part  made  of  seahorse  hide.  To 
the  end  of  that  which  goes  ruiind  the  waist  they  attach  a  tuft  of  hair, 
the  wing  of  a  bird,  or  sometimes  a  fox's  tail,  which,  dangling  behind 
as  they  walk,  gives  tliem  a  ridiculous  appearance,  and  may  probably 
have  occasioned  the  leport  of  the  Tschutschi,  recorded  in  Muller,  that 
the  people  of  this  <!ountry  have  '  tails  like  dogs.' " 

Among  the  trimmings  and  ornaments  attached  to  the  clothing  the 
Point  Harrow  l^skimo^  also  attach  at  the  back  the  tail  of  an  animal, 
usually  a  wolverine's,  "^'ery  seldom  a  wolf's  tail  is  worn,  but  nearly 
all,  even  the  boys,  have  wolverine  tails,  which  are  always  saved  for  this 
pur)»ose  and  used  for  no  other.  Tlie  habit  among  the  i'jskimo  of  western 
America  of  wearing  a  tail  at  the  girdle  has  been  noticed  by  many 
travelers,  and  prevails  at  least  as  far  as  the  Anderson  River,"  where  it 
was  noticed  by  Father  Petitot,  who,  in  describing  the  diess  of  the 
"chief,"  remarks  "par  derriere  il  portait  aux  reius  une  (jueue  epaisse 
et  ondoyante  de  renard  noir."  ' 

Captain  P>eechey'  first  observed  lip  ornaments  at  Schismaeff  Inlet,  a 
short  distance  north  of  Cape-  l*rin(!e  of  Wales,  and  thence  northward 
to  Point  Barrow,  seemingly  a  common  practice  along  this  coast.  "  Tiiese 
ornaments  consist  of  pieces  of  ivorj',  stone,  or  glass,  forme«l  with  a 
double  head,  like  a  sleeve  button,  one  part  of  which  is  thrust  through 
a  hole  bored  in  the  under  lip.  Two  of  these  holes  are  cut  in  a  slanting 
direction  about  half  an  inch  below  the  corners  of  the  mouth.    The 


'  Narrative  «>f  a  Voyage  to  the  Pacific  and  Beriug'H  Strait,  London,  I,  1831,  p.  248. 
"Ninth  Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology,  1887-88, 1892,  p.  138. 
''Monograpbie,  p.  xiv. 
••Idem,  p. 249. 


I 


GRAPHIC   ART    OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


767 


incision  is  made  when  about  the  ag<^  of  imbeity,  and  is  at  first  the  size 
of  a  quill.  As  they  fjrow  older,  the  natives  enlarjj:e  the  orifice,  and 
increase  the  size  of  the  ornament  accordingly,  that  it  may  hold  its 
place.  In  adults  this  orifice  is  about  half  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  will, 
if  required,  distend  to  threecjuarters  of  an  inch."  The  same  practice 
in  every  respect  is  also  observed  at  CliMnisso  Island,'  a  short  distance 
from  the  above  locality,  and  further  reference  concerning  the  natives  is 
quoted  from  the  same  authority  as  follows:  ''They  readily  disengaged 
these  lip  ornaments  fr<mi  their  lii)s,  sold  them,  without  minding  the 
least  inconvenience  of  the  saliva  that  llowed  through  the  badly  cica- 
triced  orifice  over  the  (^hin;  but  rather  laughed  when  some  of  us 
betrayed  disgust  at  the  spectacle,  thrusting  their  tongues  through  the 
hole  and  winking  their  eyes." 


the 

aisse 


248. 


ART    FACILITY. 

Mr.  Alfred  C  Iladdon,  in  his  admirable  work  on  "  Evolution  in  Art,"- 
remarks  of  the  early  methods  of  conveying  information  between  one 
man  and  another,  where  oral  or  gesture  language  are  impossible,  that 
pictorial  delineation  must  be  resorted  to;  .and  further,  that  "in'obably 
one  of  the  earliest  of  this  needs  was  that  of  indu-ating  ownership,  and 
it  maybe  that  many  devices  in  primitive  implements  and  utensils  have 
this  as  one  reason  for  their  existence,  although  the  nature  of  tl;e  orna- 
mentation may  be  owing  to  (piite  a  different  reason." 

It  is  not  of  rare  occurrence  to  find  upon  the  arrows  and  other  ])08- 
sessious  of  our  native  Indian  tribes  various  marks  by  means  of  which 
individual  property  may  be  identified;  and  among  some  of  the  i)ueblo 
Indians  decorated  pottery  bears  ''maker's  marks"  in  such  manner  that, 
although  the  tribe  at  large  nuiy  not  recogni/e  the  maker  of  any  ])ar- 
ticular  decorated  vessel,  yet  such  a  spetdmeu  will  at  once  be  identified 
as  originating  in,  or  with,  a  certain  family,  and  when  application  is 
made  at  the  designated  abode,  the  individual  will  there  be  pointed 
out,  or  named  if  absent. 

It  seems  possible  that  the  various  markings  upon  the  weapons  from 
the  Alaskan  shell  heaps  may  have  served  as  "property  marks,"  and  it 
would  appear,  also,  to  have  been  found  expedient  tor  the  native  sea- 
going hunters  to  devise  and  adopt  some  sort  of  a  system  by  means  of 
which  they  might  be  enabled  to  identify  and  recover  any  stray  or  fioat- 
ing  weapon,  or  the  animal  in  wliich  such  weapon  migiit  be  f(mn<l,  or 
possibly  both. 

Mr.  Haddon  renuirks  that  "  the  beautifying  of  any  object  is  due  to 
impulses  which  are  common  to  all  men,  and  have  exist«'d  as  far  back  as 
tlie  period  when  men  inhabited  caves  and  hunted  the  reindeer  an<l 
mammoth  in  western  Europe." '    Ap);..! I'ltly  the  oldest  markings  thus 


•  Father  I'etitot,  Monograpliio,  p.  250. 

« "  Evohition  in  Art."     London,  18!»5,  i».  20:5. 

"Idem,  pp.  3,  4. 


768 


REPORT   OP    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


used  consisted  of  simple  lines  and  punctures  or  i)erfor{itions,  such  as 
are  found  at  i)resent  among  the  Greenland  and  Labrador  Eskimo, 
though  among  the  latter  small  carvings  are  also  beginning  to  be  more 
abundant. 

In  his  reference  to  the  Kaniags,  Mr.  Ivan  Petroff '  says  they  use 
whale  ppears  about  0  feet  in  length,  armed  with  slai/5  points.  '•  Ui)on 
the  i)oint  of  his  spear  each  hunter  carves  his  mark  to  enable  him  to 
claim  his  quarry." 

Mr.  L.  M.  Turner  informs  me  that  Eskimo  property  marks  are  unknown 
to  him,  although  each  hunter,  or  maker  of  weapons,  will  recognize  his 
own  workmanshi]),  as  well  as  that  of  others,  by  dilferent  jieculiarities 
of  individual  skill.  Among  the  sea-otter  hunters  of  the  Aleuts,  they 
do  have  marks  by  which  the  detachable  point  of  the  otter  spear  may 
be  known.  "This  point  is  often  copper,  obtained  from  copi)er  bolts  from 
a  Russian  vessel  long  ago  stranded  on  their  shore;  and  as  the  spear  is 
made  with  exquisite  skill,  the  point  is  also  delicate  and  of  particular 
i'orm,  so  that  a  difliculty  would  arise  as  to  whose  si)ear  point  strikes 
nearest  the  nose  of  the  creature.  In  its  struggles  the  point  is  torn 
loose  from  the  strong,  yet  slender,  sinew  line  holding  it  to  the  spear. 
Another  thrower  may  succeed  in  striking  it  and  capture  the  otter,  but 
he  whose  point  is  nearest  the  nose  may  <;laim  the  skin.  A  fair  degree 
of  liberality  is  usually  manifested  in  such  instances."^ 

The  residence  in  J'oint  Barrow  of  Mr.  Murdoch — extending  over  a 
period  of  perhaps  three  years — attbrded  him  ample  opportunity  to  study 
the  art  of  the  ]*iskimo  of  that  northernmost  extremity  of  Alaska.  In 
his  rei^ort  before  mentioned  he  remarks: 

The  artistic  sense  ai>peiir8  to  be  niucli  more  highly  developed  among  the  western 
Eskimo  than  among  those  of  the  east.  Among  the  latter,  decoration  appears  to  be 
applied  almost  solely  to  the  clothing,  while  tools  and  ntensils  aro  usually  left  plain, 
and  if  ornamented  are  only  adorned  with  carving  or  incised  lines.  West  of  the 
Mackenzie  Kiver,  and  especially  south  of  Bering  Strait,  Esliimo  decorative  art 
reaches  its  highest  develojmient,  as  shown  by  the  coUectiims  in  the  National  Museum. 
Not  only  is  everything  finished  with  the  utmost  care,  but  all  wooden  ob,je<ts  are 
gaily  painted  with  various  pigments,  and  all  articles  of  bone  and  ivory  are  covered 
with  ornamental  carvings  and  incised  lines  forming  couventional  patterns. 

There  are  in  the  collections  also  many  objects  tiiat  appear  to  have  been  made 
simply  for  the  pleasure  of  exercising  the  ingeiuiity  in  representing  natural  or  fanci 
fnl  objects,  and  aro  thus  purely  works  of  art.     *     *     *     As  would  naturally  ho 
expected,  art  at  Point  Harrow  occui)ies  a  somewhat  intermediate  position  between 
the  highly  developed  art  of  the  southwest  and  the  simpler  art  of  the  east.  *     * 

It  will  be  noticed  that  whenever  the  bono  or  ivory  jiarts  of  weai)ons  are  decorated, 
the  ornamentation  is  usually  in  the  form  of  incised  lines  colored  with  red  o(;her  or 
soot.  These  lines  rarely  represent  any  natural  objects,  but  generally  form  rather 
elegant  conventional  patterns,  most  commonly  doable  or  single  borders,  often  Joined 
by  obli<nie  cross  lines  or  fringed  with  short  pointed  j)arallel  lines.     "     *     * 

The  only  decorative  work  in  metal  is  to  be  seen  in  the  jiipes  and  their  accompany- 
ing picks  and  fire  steel.     *    »     * 


'Report  on  the  population,  industries,  and  resources  of  Alaska,  Tenth  Census, 
1880,  VIII,  p.  142. 
*  Personal  h'tter  of  date  of  May,  1896. 


ions,  such  an 
[lor  Eskimo, 
g  to  be  more 

ys  tliey  use 
its.  "  Ui)oii 
nable  him  to 

lire  unknown 
•ecognize  his 
lieculiarities 
Aleuts,  they 
r  spear  may 
er  bolts  from 
I  the  spear  is 
)f  particular 
)oint  strikes 
K)int  is  torn 
;o  tlie  spear, 
be  otter,  but 
L  fair  degree 

idinji:  over  a 
aity  to  study 
Alaska.     In 


ag  the  western 
I  .appears  to  be 
liilly  left  plain, 
West  of  the 
(lecor.itive  art 
Lional  Museum. 
«n  objects  are 
)ry  are  covered 
terns. 

ive  been  made 
itural  or  faiici 
I  naturally  1x5 
sition  between 
I  east.  *     * 

are  decorated, 
til  red  ocher  or 
ly  form  rather 
rs,  often  Joined 

eir  accompany- 


Tenth  Census, 


Report  of  U    S   National  Museunn,  1895.— Hoflman 


Plate  9. 


Thlinkit  Neck  Ornaments. 


m 

m 

i 
1 

EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    9. 

Pendants  of  Bone  Used  by  Shamans  for  Ornamenting  Necklace. 

(Cat.  Xi).  168;i71,  r.S.  N.  M.      llilinnit  IimUiiuh.     (Jolli'itlfil  l)y  Mi'iil.  1  i.  !•'.  Kiiimoiis.  T.  S,  N.) 


n  na- 


\ 


1 

e 
t 

t 
ii 


y 


GUAFHIC   ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


7fi9 


Mr.  Dull  remarks  that  the  forms  in  general  of  tlie  Kskimo  are  very 
miu'li  alike  throiijjhont  the  entire  area  occupied  by  this  jieople;  but  he 
continues  in  another  phiee,  "Similar  drawings  are  common  everywhere 
among  the  Innuit,  while  I  have  never  seen  among  the  Teuneh  tribes  of 
the  northwest  any  similar  speciniens  of  art.''' 

Since  tlie  time  of  ]\Ir.  Dall's  researclies  in  Alaska,  however,  vari- 
ous specimens  of  Thlinkit  art  designs  have  been  received  by  the 
National  Museum.  Several  of  these,  consisting  of  neck  ornaments,  are 
rei^roduced  in  plate  0,  flgs,  1  to  0,  and  bear  purely  Kskimo  forms  of 
ornamentation  obtained  through  the  medium  of  intertribal  traffic,  to 
whicli  other  reference  is  nuide  iu  connection  with  trade  routes  or  culture 
routes. 

The  ornamentation  of  utensils,  articles  of  personal  adornment,  an<l  of 
weapons  is  limited  among  the  l^'skimo  eastward  of  .Alaska  to  lines  and 
dots  in  various  combinations.  Carvings  occur  also,  small  figures,  both 
flat  and  in  imitation  of  the  animals  with  which  the  artist  is  familiar. 
The  engraving  upon  ivory  and  bone  for  the  jiurpose  of  recording  hunt- 
ing, fishing,  and  other  exploits  and  pursuits,  appears  to  be  entirely 
absent  iu  the  east,  being  confined  to  the  natives  of  ^Uaska,  the  Siberian 
Eskimo — the  Yuit — and  recently  copied  by  other  neighboring  peoples. 

In  the  vicinity  of  Chamisso  Island,  a  short  distance  above  Cape 
Prince  of  Wales,  Captain  Ueechey^  found  various  kinds  of  utensils, 
weapons,  and  other  manufactures  of  the  natives,  upon  some  of  which 
were  eugrav<.'d  various  objects,  to  which  he  refers  as  follows: 

Oil  tbo  ontsido  of  this  and  other  instruments  there  were  etched  ii  vaiiety  of  figures 
of  men,  beastH,  birds,  etc.,  with  a  truth  and  character  which  showed  the  art  to  be 
connnou  among  them.  Tlie  reiuileer  were  generally  in  herds.  In  one  jiictnre  they 
were  itursued  liy  a  mini  in  a  stooping  posture  in  snowsboes;  in  another  he  had 
approached  nearer  to  his  game,  and  was  in  the  act  of  drawing  his  bow.  A  third 
represented  the  manner  of  taking  seals  with  aii  inflated  skin  of  the  same  animal  as 
a  decoy;  it  was  placed  upon  the  ice,  and  not  far  from  it  was  a  man  lying  upon  his 
belly  with  a  harpoon  ready  to  strike  the  animal  when  it  should  make  its  ajipearance. 
Another  was  dragging  a  seal  home  u])Oii  a  small  sledge;  and  sc'vcrai  baidars  wore 
employed  bariiooning  whales  which  had  been  previously  shot  with  arrows;  and  thus, 
by  comparing  on<(  with  another,  a  little  history  was  obtained  which  gave  us  a  better 
insight  into  their  habits  than  could  be  elicited  fnmi  any  signs  or  iniitatiims. 

Mr.  John  Murdoch,'  in  quoting  Mr.  L.  M.  Turner  that  the  njitiv'cs  of 
Norton  Sound  keep  a  regular  rec(U'd  of  hunting  and  other  events 
engraved  upon  drill  bows,  remarks  that  "  we  did  not  learn  definitely 
that  such  was  the  rule  at  Point  Barrow,  but  we  have  one  bag  tiandle 
marked  with  whales,  which  we  were  told  indicated  the  number  killed  by 
the  owner.''  Several  specimens  are  then  referred  to  as  having  figures 
incised  upon  them,  coh)red  both  in  red  or  in  black,  together  witli  very 
small  illustrations  of  the  bow,  upon  which  the  figures  are  so  greatly 


'  Ninth  Annual  Report  of  the  Ibireau  of  Ethnology  for  1887-88,  189L',  p.  238. 
^  Idem,  p.  251.     (Visit  made  in  1826.) 
■'  Idem,  p.  177. 

NAT  MUS  95 41) 


i^ 


i 


I 


770 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


reduced  as  to  be  of  no  value  in  tlie  study  of  pietojfniphic;  representa- 
tion of  objects,  ideas,  or  jjestures. 
Mr.  Murdoch'  remarks  furthermore: 

The  only  thing  that  wo  haw  of  the  natnro  of  numerical  recorilH  were  the  nerieH  of 
animals  engraved  n])on  ivory,  already  alluded  to.  In  nioHt  canes  we  were  unable  to 
learn  whether  the  figures  really  represented  an  actual  reciord  or  not,  though  the  l)ag 
handle  already  tigiired  was  said  to  contain  the  actual  score  of  whales  killed  by  old 
Yfi'kslna.  The  custom  does  not  appear  to  be  ho  prevalent  as  at  Norton  Sound.  *  *  * 
With  one  exception  tliey  only  record  the  capture  of  whales  or  reindeer.  The  excep- 
tion *  *  *  presents  a  series  of  ten  bearded  seals.  The  reindeer  are  usually 
depicted  in  a  natural  attitude,  and  some  of  the  circumstances  of  the  hunt  are  usually 
represented.  For  instance,  a  man  is  tigured  aiming  with  a  bow  and  arrow  toward  a 
lino  of  reindeer,  indicating  that  such  a  numlier  were  taken  by  shooting,  while  a 
string  of  deer,  represented  without  legs  as  they  would  apj»ear  swimming,  followed 
by  a  rude  ligiire  of  a  man  in  a  kaiak,  means  that  so  many  were  lanced  in  the  water. 
Other  incidents  i»f  the  excursion  are  also  sometimes  represented.  On  these  records 
the  whole  is  always  represented  by  a  rutle  figure  of  the  tail  cut  off  at  the  "small," 
and  often  represented  as  hanging  from  a  horizontal  line. 

We  also  bronght  home  four  engraved  pieces  of  ivory,  which  are  nothing  else  than 
records  of  real  or  imaginary  8ccn(?s. 

The  above  remarks,  with  the  description  of  the  four  specimens  else- 
where reproduced,  comprise  about  all  the  attention  that  this  interesting 
subject  appears  to  have  received  during  a  three  years'  residence  at 
Point  Barrow  among  natives  who  surpass  almost  any  other  peoples  in 
North  ^Vmerica  in  the  graphic  arts. 

It  is  fortunate  that  the  National  Museum  has  in  its  possession  the 
rich  collections  made  by  Messrs.  Nelson  and  Turner,  both  of  whom 
appreciated  the  value  of  such  material  and  availed  themselves  of  the 
opportunity  of  securing  it,  as  well  as  inform.ation  pertaining  to  the 
interpretation  of  many  of  the  i)ictographic  ideas  shown. 

In  his  medical  and  anthropological  notes  relating  to  the  natives  of 
Alaska,  Doctor  Irving  C.  Rosse^  remarks: 

Some  I  have  met  with  show  a  degree  of  intelligence  and  appreciation  in  regard  to 
charts  and  pictures  scarcely  to  be  expected  from  such  a  source.  From  walrus  ivory 
they  sculpture  figures  of  birds,  quadrupeds,  marine  animals,  and  even  the  hnman 
form,  which  display  considerable  individuality  notwithstanding  their  crude  delinea- 
tion and  imperfect  detail.  *  *  *  Evidences  of  decoration  are  sometimes  seen  on 
their  canoes,  on  which  are  found  rude  pictures  of  walruses,  etc.,  and  they  have  a 
kind  of  picture  writing  by  means  of  which  they  commemorate  certain  events  in 
their  lives,  just  as  Sitting  Hull  has  done  in  an  autobiography  that  may  be  seen  at  the 
Army  Medical  ]N(useum. 

When  we  were  searching  for  the  missing  whales  ott'  the  Siberian  coast,  some 
natives  were  come  across  with  whom  we  were  unable  to  communicate  excejit  by 
signs,  and  wishing  to  let  them  know  the  object  of  our  visit,  a  ship  was  drawn  in  a 
notebook  and  shown  to  them  witli  accompanying  gesticulations,  which  they  quickly 
comprehended,  and  one  fellow,  taking  the  ])encil  and  note  book,  drew  correctly  a  pair 
of  reindeer  horses  on  the  ship's  jib  boom — a  fact  which  identified  beyond  doubt  the 
derelict  vessel  they  had  seen.     *     *     * 


'Ninth  Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology  for  1887-88,  185)2,  p.  361. 
'^Cruise  of  the  Revenue-Cutter  Corwin  in  Alaska  and  the  Northwest  Arctic  Ocean, 
in  1881.     Washington,  D.  C,  1883,  p.  37. 


OUAPHK;   AUT    of   the    ESKIMOS. 


771 


Hoiue 


4 


cean, 


TIio  above  named  author  furthermore  refers  to  natives  making;  pencil 
and  i>en  and-iuk  sketches,  one  in  particular  having  taught  lilmself  by 
copying  from  tlie  "  Illustrated  London  News."  These  sketches, "  though 
creditable  in  many  respects,  had  the  defects  of  many  Chinese  pictures, 
being  faulty  in  perspective."    Doctor  Itosse  concludes  by  saying: 

Ah  thuM-  tIruMrinKn  e<|uiil  those  in  Doctor  Rink'H  book,  done  by  (.imenluud  iirtistH,  I 
rryrct  my  inability  to  reproduce  them  hero.  As  evidences  of  culture,  they  show 
nKircadviinc^ement  than  the  cnrvin^M  of  Kn;;liHh  rustics  that  a  clergyman  has  caused 
to  be  placed  on  exhibition  at  the  Kensington  Slusouni. 

Doctor  Henry  Rink' says: 

The  art  exhibited  by  the  Alaska  Eskimo  in  ornamenting  their  weapons  and  uten- 
sils is  often  mentioned  in  travelers'  reports  from  the  time  when  they  were  first 
visited  by  l-^uropeans.  To  their  skill  in  curving  and  engraving,  we  must  Join  this 
taste  dis))layed  in  the  same  way  in  making  their  clothing.  Again,  when  we  pass 
from  Alaska  to  the  cast,  we  see  this  relish  for  the  tine  arts  declining,  and  in  western 
Greenland  proofs  of  it  have  been  rather  scarce.  But  the  latest  expedition  to  the 
east  const  of  this  country  has  discovered  that  a  small  isolated  tribe  here  in  the  vast 
deserts  of  the  extreme  cast  almost  rivals  the  Alaska  artists  with  respect  to  carving 
in  bone  and  ornamenting  their  weapons  and  utensils.  The  chief  difference  is,  that 
in  Alaska,  engravings  illustrating  human  life  and  the  animals  of  the  country  are  the 
most  popular  objects  of  the  artist,  whereas  the  cast  Greenlanders  excel  in  small 
reliefs  representing  for  the  most  part  animals  and  mythological  beings  grouped 
together  and  fastened  with  admirable  taste  and  care  to  the  surface  of  the  wooden 
implements. 

With  reference  to  the  arts  of  the  Eskimo  of  Greenland,  Docitor 
Henry  llink^  remarks: 

It  must  be  noticed  that  though  the  present  Greenlanders  appear  to  have  a  pretty 
fair  talent  for  drawing  and  writing,  scarcely  any  traces  of  the  arts  of  drawing  and 
sculpture  belonging  to  earlier  times  remain,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  small 
images  cut  out  in  wood  or  lione,  which  have  probably  served  children  as  play- 
things. The  western  Eskimo,  on  the  other  hand,  displayed  great  skill  in  carving 
bone  orn.iments,  principally  on  weapons  and  tools. 

Drawings  made  by  Greeidand  Eskimo  for  Doctor  Rink  greatly 
resemble  the  American  schoolboys'  efforts.  A  recent  produ(;tion  of 
precisely  like  character  in  almost  every  respect  is  from  the  island  of 
Kolguev,  and  reproduced  herewith  in  plate,  together  with  the  following 
explanation : 

Some  interesting  illustrations  of  Samoyed  drawings  are  given  by  Mr. 
Aubyn  Trevor- liatt ye  in  his  "Icebound  on  Kolguev,"  Westminster, 
181J5.  Kolguev  Island  lies  5()  miles  north  of  Arctic  Europe,  and  is  sep- 
arated from  the  continent  by  what  is  known  as  Barent's  Sea.  It  is 
about  midway,  in  distance,  between  Waygat  Island — immediately  south 
of  Xovaya  Zemblya — and  the  eastern  extremity  of  Lapland.  The 
Samoyeds  here  are  entirely  isolated,  from  the  fact  that  they  po.ssess  no 
boats  that  could  venture  50  miles  across  the  sea — an  interesting  cir 

>  "The  Eskimo  Tribes."    Copenhagen  and  London,  1887,  pp.  15,  16. 

^  "Tales  and  Traditions  of  the  Eskimo."    Edinburgh  and  London,  1875,  p. 69. 


r 


t 


j 

:  i 


772 


REPORT    OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1896. 


cuiiiBtance,  because  tliey  are  often,  from  various  supposed  or  accidental 
similarities  in  customs  and  manners,  coupled  with  the  Eskimo,  a  people 
with  whom  the  kayak  and  umiak  are  the  chief  methods  of  transportation. 

The  illustrations  represent  ordinary  pursuits,  and  appear  to  be  made 
upon  paper  by  means  of  a  pencil.  The  peculiarities  of  drawing  are 
very  much  of  the  same  character  as  the  Eskimo  sketches  obtained  by 
Doctor  Uink  in  Greenland.  One  example  will  suffice.  Plate  10  re|)re- 
sents  Samoyeds  killing  walrus.  The  black  dots  on  tlie  right  are  heads 
of  seals,  at  which  a  man,  lying  flat  upon  the  ice,  appears  to  bo  shooting. 
The  hunter  appears  as  if  placed  in  the  air,  though  in  reality  the  view 
seems  to  be  from  above — as  a  bird's-eye  view — the  figure  of  the  man 
corresponding,  in  this  particular,  to  like  portrayals  in  several  Eskimo 
engravings  on  ivory,  from  Alaska. 

Captain  Parry  mentions  having  charts  made  by  the  natives  of  Winter 
Island.  A  first  attempt  made  "  was  by  placing  several  sheets  of  paper 
before  Iligliuk,  and  roughly  drawing  on  a  large  scale  an  outline  of  the 
land  about  Kepulse  Bay  and  Lyon  Inlet,  and  terminating  at  our  present 
winter  quarters.  *  *  •  Iligliuk  was  not  long  in  comprehending 
what  we  desired,  and  with  a  pencil  continued  the  outline,  making  the 
Land  trend,  as  we  supposed,  to  the  northeastward.  Tlie  scale  being 
large,  it  was  necessary  when  she  canie  to  the  end  «»f  one  piece  of  paper 
to  tack  on  another,  till  at  length  she  had  filled  ten  or  twelve  sheets,  and 
had  completely  lost  sight  of  Winter  Island  *  *  *  at  the  other  end 
of  the  table.  The  idea  entertained  from  this  first  attempt  was  that  we 
should  find  the  coast  indented  by  several  inlets,  and  in  some  parts 
much  loaded  with  ice,  especially  at  one  strait  to  the  northward  of  her 
native  island,  Amitioke,  which  seemed  to  lead  in  a  direction  very  much 
to  the  westward.  Within  a  week  after  this,  several  other  charts  were 
drawn  by  the  natives  in  a  similar  way.  *  *  *  The  coast  was  here 
delineated  as  before,  on  a  very  large  scale,  but  much  more  in  detail, 
many  more  islands,  bays,  and  names  being  inserted.  It  was  observ- 
able, however,  that  no  two  charts  much  resembled  each  other,  and  that 
the  greater  number  of  them  still  less  resembled  the  truth  in  those  parts 
of  the  coast  with  which  we  were  well  acquainted."' 

An  interesting  illustration  of  a  Greenland  map  made  by  natives  of 
the  east  coast  is  given  by  Mr.  G.  Holm  in  his  Ethnographic  Sketch  of 
Angmagsalikerne.^  This  consists  of  three  blocks  of  wood,  along  the 
edges  of  which  are  cut  various  indentations  and  curves,  leaving  pro- 
jections, all  of  which  are  intended  to  portray  the  contour  of  the  shore 
lines  between  various  important  points  on  the  east  shore  of  Greenland. 
Channels,  capes,  islands,  and  other  topographic  features  are  apparently 
well  reproduced,  at  least  sufficiently  clear  to  permit  of  their  identifica- 
tion when  compared  with  a  large  chart  of  the  locality  referred  to. 

'"Tales  and  Traditioim  of  the  Eskimo,"  by  Doctor  Henry  Rink.  Edinburgh  and 
London,  1875,  pp.  162, 1(53. 

'^EthuologiskSkizzeaf  Augmag8alikerue(Si«rtrykafMeddelel8eromGr0nland,  X). 
Kj0benhavn.    1887.    8°. 


i      f 


i 


Report  .■)<   U,  S   Nitiona    Muieum    1895  _Hri"T.ar,, 


Plate  10. 


H 


ORAPHIC   ART   OF  THE    ESKIMOS. 


773 


Mr.  Alfred  (J.  Ihtddoii'  HuyH: 

All  litiiiiitn  luiniliwiii'k  Ih  NiiliJiMt  to  the  Hniiin  o|M<rntion  of  ftxternul  t'onum,  but  the 
iiiuteriitl  on  which  th«se  I'orct'H  iicl  is  uIho  inUnitely  vuritMl.  The  *liv(>rNo  rucea  iiinl 
peojile  of  iiiitnkiiiU  hiivi>  liiftbront  idt-uH  luul  ideulH,  iiiie*|<ia!  Hl<ill,  v»riri«l  niatoriiil  to 
wdik  ii|ioii,  aud  (liHHiiiiilar  toolH  to  work  with.  Kvorywhun^  th<«  eiivirouiiieiit  iit 
«lirt«ront.     '     •     • 

Tho  coucliision  thiit  forcoil  itHolt'  upon  nio  In  that  tho  tloconitivu  art  of  n  |ioo|tlo 
(looH  fo  a  curtain  extent  rotitict  tiieir  iliarauter.  A  poor,  niiK<<ra)iht  pcojile  liavo  |)oor 
iui*l  iniHeralile  art.  Kven  anioun;  mivage»4  leiHiiro  from  tho  fares  of  lif*<  {h  immtntial  for 
tlio  rulturtf  of  art.  It  iH  too  often  HiippoHotl  that  all  Havagos  are  la/y  and  have  au 
ahiiudanco  of  nparo  time,  hut  thiH  is  ))y  no  nieann  always  tho  cam;.  HavaKen  do  all 
that  itt  niM'eHHary  for  lifu;  anytliin<{  extra  In  for  ox<'itenient,  a-HtheticH,  or  religion; 
and  even  if  there  Ih  alMindance  of  time  for  th«>He  latter,  it  does  not  follow  that  there 
Ih  an  eijuivalent  Hiipertluity  of  energy. 

The  l!l.skiiuo  uro  »  peculiarly  lively  i»eople,  and  keenly  uppreciutu  any- 
thing  ludicrous.  Contrary  to  the  Indian  generally,  they  can  enjoy  a 
practical  joke  without  thought  of  resenting  «nch  if  personal.  Su<;h 
a  condition,  especially  when  there  is  an  abundance  of  food,  so  that 
unoccupied  time  may  be  utilized  for  social  enjoyment,  is  one  which  is 
apt  to  foster  pursuits  that  lend  {j^iatitieation  and  pleasure  to  the  sight 
and  stimulate  artistic  tendencies.  Shamanism  prevails  extensively  and 
ceremonials  are  frequent;  and  apart  from  this  there  are  numberless 
individual  instances  where  natives  consult  the  shaman  for  success  in 
almost  every  avocation,  and  also  for  the  exorcism  of  demons  from  the 
body  of  the  sick,  and  for  **■  hunter's  medicine,"  i.  e.,  securing  the  help 
of  a  shaman  that  game  may  be  directed  in  the  way  of  the  hunter.  It 
is  but  reasonable  to  presume,  therefore,  that  the  superstitions  and  cult 
beliefs  should,  to  a  certain  degree,  manifest  themselves  in  the  art,  as 
well  as  to  be  the  means  of  developing  a  symbolism  similar  in  degree  to 
that  found  among  other  peoples  living  under  similar  conditions  and 
surrounded  by  like  environment. 

The  possible  introduction  into  western  Alaska  of  articles  of  foreign 
art  or  workmanship  may  thus  have  ha<l  but  little  influence  upon  the 
native  Eskimo  in  adopting  new  designs  and  patterns,  with  which  he 
was  unfamiliar  and  the  signification  of  which  he  did  not  comprehend, 
but  it  may  have  suggested  to  him  a  simplification  of  approatshing  forms 
with  which  he  may  already  have  been  familiar. 

MATEIIIALS   EMPLOYED. 


IVOUY. 


The  material  generally  used  by  the  Eskimo  of  Alaska  is  walrus  ivory. 
This  is  both  durable  and  suflflciently  hard  to  retain  indefinitely,  with 
proper  care,  the  most  delicate  etcthings.  Its  white  or  cream  tint  forms 
a  delicate  background  for  any  colored  incisions,  and  in  instances  where 
from  age  or  otherwise  the  material  attains  a  yellow  or  orange  tint,  the 
black  etching-like  pictographs  are  really  improved  in  appearance. 


"Evolution  in  Art."    London,  1895,  pp.  7-9. 


i 


II 


i^       :. 


til  ji 


774 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


The  animal  wliicli  funiiHlics  this  material  is  represented  in  Plate  11, 
the  spec-imen  teehni(;ally  known  as  KosmaruH  o^^xn^,  llliger,  being  most 
abundant  in  Bristol  Hay. 

The  walrus  tusks  are  capable  of  softening  and  bending,  .according  to 
Ca])tain  llerendeen,  a  gentleman  of  considerable  experience  in  the 
region  under  discussion.  The  tusks  are  <livided  longitudinally,  one 
tusk  usually  furnishing  four  rods,  either  by  sawing  or  scraping  and  split- 
ting. The  process  described  below  by  Mr.  Lucian  M.  Turner,  us  pur- 
sued in  former  times  and  with  primitive  tools,  is  still  praiitically  the 
same,  though  accomplished  with  modern  tools  purchased  at  the  traders' 
or  obtained  from  whalers. 

During  his  i)rotracted  residence  in  southern  Alaska,  Mr.  Turner 
studied  carefully  the  customs  of  the  Kskinio,  and  for  special  instruction 
in  some  of  the  arts  the  natives  worked  in  his  presence,  thus  atibrding 
every  opportunity  desiied. 

In  response  to  my  in4|uiry  regarding  the  primitive  methods  of  pre- 
paring the  ivory  drill  bows,  an«l  their  subsequent  engraving  with 
pictographs,  the  following  communication  was  kindly  sent  to  me  by 
Mr.  Turner.'     He  says : 

The  abniulance  of  walrus  ivory  in  tlie  diiyH  prior  to  tlie  advent  of  Americans  (the 
Rnssians  did  not  encouraj^e  tho  use  of  lirearnis  l>y  the  natives  and  Htringently  jiro- 
hihited  tlie  sale  of  such  weaj)onn  t^xcept  in  greatly  favored  instances)  permitted  tlie 
Innuit  to  senire  the  hest  character  of  ivory  when  wanted;  lienc((  the  selection  of  a 
tusk  depended  entirely  upon  the  want  or  use  to  which  it  was  to  he  applied.  Later 
the  best  tusks  were  sold  and  the  inferior  (|ualities  retained,  as  is  well  shown  by  the 
comparison  of  the  older  and  the  more  recent  ini]deinents  created  from  that  material. 

The  tusk  selected  was  rudely  scratched  with  a  fragment  of  quart/,  or  other  sili- 
ceous stone,  along  the  length  of  the  tusk  until  the  shjirj)  edge  would  no  longer  deei)en 
the  groove;  the  other  three  sides  were  scratched  or  channeled  until  the  pieces  of 
tusk  could  be  separated.  Sometimes  this  was  done  by  pressure  of  the  hand,  or 
eflected  by  meana  of  a  kuifeblade-shaped  piece  of  wood,  on  which  was  struck  a  sharji 
blow,  and  so  skillfully  dealt  as  not  to  shatter  or  fracture  the  piece  intended  for  use. 
The  other  side,  or  slabs,  were  removed  in  a  similar  manner. 

The  piece  intended  for  drill  bow  or  other  use  was  now  scraped  -ubbed)  with  a 
fragment  of  freshly  broken  basalt,  in  which  the  cavities  formed  u..vlitioniil  cutting 
edges  and  aided  in  the  c<dlection  of  the  bone  dust.  When  this  was  explained  to  me, 
I  suggested  the  nsi-  of  water,  but  the  native  (Innuit)  smiled  and  continued  his 
work.  I  soon  saw  he  know  better  than  I  how  to  reduce  the  si/e  of  a  s(rip  of  walrus 
ivory.  This  attrition  of  the  surface  was  continued  until  the  anjiroximate  size  was 
reached.  The  h«des  or  perforations  in  the  ends  were  produced  by  means  of  stone 
drills  after  a  depression  had  been  nmde  by  an  angular  piece  of  stone,  any  stone 
capable  of  wearing  away  the  ivory  substance.  A  few  grains  of  sand  were  put  into 
th'.'  shallow  cavity  and  the  stone  drill  started  by  means  of  another  drill  or  by  a 
string  or  thong  similar  to  the  manner  in  making  lire. 

Various  sizes  of  stone  drills  were  made,  and  by  their  use  the  diti'orent  holes  were 
produced.  It  is  unusual  to  find  two  pt^forationsof  the  same  <liameter  in  any  object. 
These  8ton<'  drills  were  used  in  making  the  long  holes  in  ivory  objeits  of  all  kinds. 

The  linal  smoothing  of  the  surface  of  the  ivt»ry  ])iece  was  effected  by  rubbing  it 
against  a  line-grained  stone  or  in  the  hand  whert;  fine  sand  was  held;  lastly,  two 
pieces  of  ivory  were  rubbed  against  eitch  other  and  thus  a  polished  surface  produced. 

'  Letter  dated  1  Jecember  2(5,  1894. 


I 


«* 


\     t 


I 


lIlilMli  <B    I 


Report  of  U    S    Natmral  Museurr,   1895  — Hoffrran. 


Plate  11, 


rial. 

8ili- 

leejK'ii 

es  of 

(1,  or 

baip 

use. 


til  a 
ttinj; 

0  Die, 

1  liiH 
ilru8 

e  wuH 

8t<IIl« 

stone 
into 
liy  a 

were 
jjet't. 
intls. 

"K  it 
,  two 
iced. 


■\ 


T 


< 


1 


GRAPHIC  ART  OF  THE  ESKIMOS. 


775 


Tlu^  etching  was  done  with  sharp  edgos  of  fragments  of  (liut.  SoinotiiueH  thesu 
stone  fnigmeuts  were  skillfully  fastened  into  a  piece  of  wood  and  iise«l  as  gravers  or 
oven  as  lan(!ets.  In  later  years  files  and  saws  were  used  to  i-ut  the  ivory  into  the 
required  shape,  and  pieces  of  steel  were  used  to  make  the  holes.  Often  a  three- 
cornered  lile  was  the  instrument  u.*ed  to  make  the  holes. 

The  drill  liow  or  other  implement  or  utensil  was  not  produced  in  a  day  or  oven  in  a 
month,  as  these  articles  were  usually  created  for  personal  use.  I  have  km)wn  of 
such  articles  heing  taken  along  while  on  a  protracted  hunting  expedition  and  there 
worked  upon  to  while  away  the  oftentimes  tedious  hours  of  watching  game.  Again 
I  hav«'  known  when  a  native  had  recj nested  a  friend  to  etch  some  design,  and  in  their 
festivals,  conuuemorating  their  dead,  these  articles  were  often  pnisented  and  highly 
cherished  as  gilts.  Other  articles  of  ivory  often  passed  as  a  legacy  from  a  relative 
to  another,  and  highly  valued  by  the  owner. 

With  respect  to  the  walrus  ivory  and  antler,  both  of  which  are 
eniploj'ed  by  the  engraver  for  the  portrayal  of  various  tigures,  Mr. 
Turner  writes : ' 

You  will  observe  many  of  the  larger  objects  of  ivory  and  antler  liave  outer  or 
engraved  portions  of  herder  substance  than  the  inner  or  core  portion.  Von  will  ])er- 
ceive  that  in  bent  or  curved  aft'airs  the  outer  part  is  always  the  denser  portion  of 
the  material.  This  or  these  substances  warp  or  curve  because  of  their  unei|ual 
density  of  parts.  The  native  saw  that  heat  would  unshape  a  straight  piece  of  ivory 
or  antler,  and,  taking  advantage  of  what  the  sun  did,  he  laid  aside  the  piece  where 
it  would  become  moist,  and  then  placed  it  before  the  lire,  core  next  to  the  lire,  and 
warping  was  the  result. 

In  the  winter  the  heat  of  the  sun  v  is  not  sufldcient  to  produce  harm,  but  when  the 
warm  rays  began  to  heat  objects,  the  native  was  careful  to  put  his  ivory  or  bono 
implements  of  the  chase  in  the  shade  of  a  house  or  on  the  side  of  his  cache,  or  within 
a  plact!  where  heat  could  not  affect  it. 

I  never  saw  them  dip  any  such  object  in  hot  water  ok  try  to  bend  it  by  force. 

The  absence  of  graphic  art  among  the  Eskimo  of  Greenland,  Labra- 
dor, and  the  region  between  Hudson  Bay  and  the  Mackenzie  Kiver, 
can  not  entirely  be  attributed  to  the  lack  of  horn,  bone,  and  walrus 
ivory,  as  one  or  more  of  these  materials  appear  abundant  in  certain 
localities.  P>y  graphic  art  as  here  named  is  not  intended  the  ordinary 
ornamentation  by  means  of  lines,  dots,  etc.,  nor  the  sketi^hes  on  paper 
referred  to  by  Doctor  liink,  but  the  etchings  upon  the  several  materials 
by  means  of  gravers,  to  portray  graphically  records  of  hunting  exi)e 
ditioiis,  shamanistic  ceremonies,  and  other  subjects  of  which  numerous 
examples  are  here  given  passim.  The  great  supply  of  ivory  in  Alaska 
<'omes  from  near  Port  Muller,  in  Bristol  Bay,  and  the  more  northern 
coast  and  islands.  Mr.  Dall,  who  is  authority  for  this  statement,  adds, 
furthermore,  "that  the  amount  of  walrus  ivory  taken  annually  will 
average  1(>0,0(M>  i)ounds."^ 

Some  of  the  utensils  in  the  National  Museum  are  made  of  fossil  ivory; 
and  of  this  to  Mr.  Dall  remarks,  "that  it  is  not  uncoimnon  in  many 
parts  of  the  valleys  of  the  Yukon  and  Kuskoquim.  It  is  usually  fouml 
on  the  surface,  not  buried  as  iu  Siberia,  and  all  that  I  have  seen  has 
been  so  much  injured  by  the  weather  that  it  was  of  little  commer(;iaI 


'  Letter  dated  March  IH,  18JHi. 

""Alaska  and  its  Resources. "     Itoston,  1870,  p.  504. 


776 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895 


u 


value.  It  is  nsually  blackened,  split,  and  so  fragile  as  to  break  readily 
ill  pieces.  It  has  Jilso  been  found  on  the  shores  of  Kotzebue  Sound  and 
tlie  Arctic  coast." ' 

('aptain  William  Edward  Parry,^  durinj;'  his  secoiul  voyaj'e  for  the 
discovery  of  a  northwest  i)assa};e,  fountl  the  walrus  in  tolerable  abun- 
dance ill  latitude  08°  22'  21"  north,  and  longitude  (by  chronometer) 
Hio  5({'  5;-,"  west,  which  places  the  locality  on  the  east  coast  of  Mel- 
ville Peninsula.     lie  remarks: 

In  tho  coiirHf  of  this  day  tlio  walruses  becaiiio  more  and  luoro  numerons  every 
hour,  lyiiifj  in  larj;e  herds  upon  the  h)08o  pieces  of  drift  ice;  and  it  liaving  faUeii 
<'alm  at  I  p.  m.,  we  dispatdied  our  ))oat8  to  endeavor  to  kill  some  for  the  sake  of 
the  oil  which  they  afford.  On  approachinjj  the  ice,  our  peo])le  found  them  huddled 
dose  to,  and  even  lying  upon,  one  another,  in  separate  droves  of  from  twelve  to 
tiiirty,  the  whole  ntunber  near  the  boats  being  i>crhap8  about  two  hundred.  Most 
ol'  tlu'in  waited  (piietly  to  be  fired  at,  and  even  ;ifter  on(>  or  two  discharges  did  not 
seem  to  be  greatly  disturbed,  but  allowed  tlie  people  to  land  on  the  ice  near  them, 
and,  when  approaclied,  showed  an  evident  disposition  to  give  battle.  After  they  had 
got  into  the  water,  three  were  struck  with  harpoons  and  killed  from  the  boats. 
When  first  wounded,  they  became  (juite  furious,  and  one  which  had  been  struck 
from  Captain  -Lyon's  l)oat  made  a  resolute  .attack  upon  her  and  injured  several  of 
the  planks  with  its  enormous  tusks. 

The  author  above  cited  mentions,  furthermore,  the  occurrence  of 
reindeer  and  musk  ox,  both  spetries  of  animals  furnished  with  horns 
that  might  readily  furnish  excellent  materials  upon  which  to  inscribe 
pictorial  representations  of  exploits  or  events.  Great  abundance  ol 
the  former  are  killed  in  the  summer  time,  "partly  by  driving  them 
from  islands  or  narrow  necks  of  land  into  the  sea,  and  then  spearing 
them  from  their  canoes,  and  partly  by  shooting  them  from  behind 
heajisof  stones  raised  for  the  purpose  of  watching  them,  and  imitating 
their  ])eculiar  bellow  or  grunt.  Among  the  various  artifices  which  they 
employ  for  this  purpose,  one  of  the  most  ingenious  consists  in  two  men 
walking  directly  from  the  deer  they  wish  to  kill,  when  the  animal 
almost  always  follows  them.  ^Vs  soon  as  they  arrive  at  a  large  stone, 
one  of  the  men  hides  behind  it  with  his  bow,  Avhile  the  other,  ccmtinuiug 
to  walk  on,  soon  leads  the  deer  within  range  of  his  comi)anion\s  arrows. 
They  are  also  very  careful  to  keep  to  leeward  of  the  deer,  and  will 
scarcely  go  out  after  them  at  all  when  the  weather  is  calm.'' ' 

HORN. 

Quite  a  number  of  si>e(imens  of  Esk.mo  workmanshij),  upon  which 
both  simple  forms  of  ornamentation  and  pictographic  rec^ords  occur, 
consist  of  pieces  of  reindeer  horn,  obtained  from  the  IJarrenground 
caribou  or  reindeer,  shaped  into  the  form  desired  for  the  purpose.  In 
plate  12  is  reprodiu'ed  a  museum  group  of  Woodland  caribou  {Ilangifcr 

'"Alaska  and  its  Resources."     Moston,  1H70,  p.  17JI. 
Tlic  .Journal  of  a  second  voyage  for  the  discovery  of  a  nwrthwest  passage  from 
the  Athmtic  to  the  I'acilic.     London,  1821,  p.  220. 
'Idem,  pp.420,  12L 


Report  0*  U    S    National  Museum,  1895  -  HoHmarv 


Plate  12. 


Ilicl) 

jcm', 

Iniul 

In 

\ijer 


a. 
O 

u 

UJ 

a 

z 


troni 


''at 


\ 


I 


Report  of  U    S   National  Muteum,  1895.— Hoffman, 


Plate  13. 


I  u 


!':  i; 


ll! 


i 


Weavinq  Utensils  of  Horn. 


Plate  13. 


y 


' 


Report  of  U   S   National  Muteum,  1895 —Hoffman. 


Plate  14. 


r 


Hunting  Records  of  Horn. 


\  i 


14. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE 


14, 


'•'K.   1.    I'KTOUIUI'II    ON    J}(,M.;. 

(C'mI.  .Vo.  :;:i:!i,-,.  r.  S.  X.  .M.     \, 
i.U.  1'.    l.'KCOlil)   ON    lioxK. 

"lit.  \(i.  r.'!iL'T7.  r 


V 


lloii  Sill 


mil.     (■ 


ll<'l  liy  i;.  \\-.  \,,] 


son.) 


I' 


VifiH.  I- 


K.\NT.\(t   Oli    lUCKKT    H 

'al.X.i.  ;i77li;,  r.  s.  X.  M 


■^^^  N'.  M.     SI.  Mid 


latls.     (', 
A.VDi.i:  OF  Horn. 


ll'ClllI  liy  I,.  M.    I  I 


7.   Kant.\(;  H.andle 


Xoitlnrii  liartiilXort 


I'm.  X 


s  ov  Antm.; 


on  Siiiiiiil.     (• 


IIS.  ;i;i:!ii,  ."itiid!),  :i:;;;|^ 


Colk'Ollll  l,y  E.  w.  Xoli)„,i 


K. 
!iml  ;i:i;ilo. 


leit.'.l  l.y  K.  \V.N..lsiiti.) 


ii.-i|i(cliv..ly,  \\  s.  .\.  M.     X 


iTton    .s„i,,iil. 


Report  of  U  S  N, 


ational  Museum,  I895._HofffT,, 


Plate  15. 


Native  Knives 


Plate  15. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    15. 


1        [i    4 


l'i.;r.  1.  Dkcorated  Kyiw  Handlk 

""'■  ■■*"''"°'''  '■■  "•  '■"^  >'■   ,11"' •■    '  ■'•"■•■■>"l  <•>  E.  "■.  N..|,.„„,, 


m  li! 


11 


ii 


I 


M 


■J 


Kt 


^,: 


'I 


Report  of  U.  S.  National  Museum,  1895- HofJman. 


Plate  16. 


i  ;; 


i 


Dancing  Mask  of  Wood. 


Plate  16. 


I 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    16 
'''■.>.N..M.      Kii,ko.v».m.     Collated  by  E.W.NeU„n.) 


n 


<l 


GRAPHIC    ART   OP   THE    ESKIMOS. 


777 


(I 


tarauflus  carihou  Kimt),  a  variety  fouiMl  farther  south  than  the  Barren- 
{jrouiul  variety,  which  is  believed  to  be  the  one  best  known  to  the 
Alaskan  Eskimo.  Several  utensils  emph)ye<l  in  net  weavinj;- are  siiown 
in  )»lat«'  13,  tij^s.  I,  L',  3,  and  several  short,  stout  slabs  of  horn,  neatly 
oniainented  with  animals  and  short  re<'ord8  of  hunting  exploits,  are 
represented  in  plate  14,  ligs.  2-7. 

NO  speeimens  of  horn  of  either  tiie  mountain  sheep  or  the  mountain 
goat.  Itoth  of  wliich  are  emjdoyed  by  vari«)us  other  and  ivore  southern 
coast  tribes,  have  us  yet  been  found  in  tlie  colleetion  of  either  the 
National  .Museum,  or  that  of  the  Alaska  Connnereial  Company,  in  San 
Francisco,  California. 

BOXK. 

Another  article  very  often  met  wit  li,  inscribed  with  various  kinds  of 
ornamentation  and  pictorial  work,  consists  of  bone,  both  the  larger 
bones  of  the  legs  and  ribs  of  reindeer,  and  the  humerus  of  the  swan, 
the  latter  serving  as  tubes  for  needle  cases  or  snutt"  tubes.  Hpecimens 
are  shown  farther  on. 

A  small  piece  of  bone,  rudely  incised,  is  shown  herewith  in  plate  14, 
tig.  1. 

Some  ornamented  bone  knives  will  be  referred  to  under  the  special 
class  of  subjects  to  which  the  records  pertain.  Such  weapons  aie 
emi)loyed  in  skinning  and  sometimes  in  cutting  up  animals,  and  native 
portrayals  of  such  avocations  are  also  rei)roduced  in  several  illustra- 
tions. The  handles,  and  sometimes  the  blades  of  such  knives,  some 
with  steel  blades  used  in  working  and  fashioning  the  ivory  rods  and  bag 
handles,  are  decoi'ated  as  in  j>late  !.">,  tig.  1. 

WOOD. 

Wood  is  sometimes  used  for  various  articles,  such  as  boxes  for  tobacco, 
small  utensils  and  tools,  and  women's  trinkets.  These  are  freipiently 
incised,  but  the  ornantentation  is  limited  to  sim])le  figures  comj)osed  of 
straight  lines,  and  perhaps  dots. 

In  the  country  of  the  Magenuits — who  inhabited  the  vicinity  of  Cape 
Ivoiiianzotf  and  reach  nearly  to  the  mouth  of  the  Yukon  Kiver — wood  is 
rei)Oited  as  very  scarce,  and  is  an  article  of  trade.' 

Wood  is  sometimes  used  for  ornaments,  masks,  and  toys,  the  surface 
of  which  may  be  whitened,  aiul  upon  this  other  designs  are  i)ortrayed. 
Such  an  instance  is  shown  in  plate  Ki,  c<msisting  of  a  dancing  iiuisk. 

The(Jreenland  map,  before  mentioned,  may  also  be  noted  in  this  con- 
nection. 

The  only  other  examytles  in  the  C(»llections  of  the  National  Museum 
are  from  Toint  liarrow,  and  may  here  be  reproduced,  together  with  the 
descrii)tions  given  by  Mr.  Murdoch: 

This  consists  of  a  toy  obtained  in  Point  Barrow  and  deposited  in  the 

'"Alaska  and  its  licsourcfs."     Boston,  1880,  p.  407. 


778 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Nationul  Museum.     It  is  a  «*liild's  toy,  resiMiiblin^  what  American  boys 
would  <'ull  a  "bu/z"  toy,  and  wh'wh  wouhl  by  them  be  made  of  the 
v(mii(l  tin  top  of  a  slioeblackin^  box. 
The  si»ecimun  herewith  reproduead  in  tig.  1  is  of  pine  \\oo«l,  ratluM- 


k 


■■^-^ssas^^ 


Via;.  1. 

WOODEN  "lir/.Z  "  TDV.      I'DINT  llAliUDW . 


obloDft-  in  shape,  and  thrimjih  the  two  perforations  in  the  middle  are 
passed  the  ends  of  a  sinew  cord.  The  specimen  is  about  il.'i  inches  in 
length.  One  end  has  a  border  of  black  on  both  tjKes,  while  the  other 
has  a  similar  border  of  red.     The  middle  square,  1  inch  across,  is 


■n    i' 


Kiii 


WOODKN    MASK    AMI    l>A\('IN()    (lOHOET. 


ii 


*t 


also  in  red,  and  from  the  corners  are  lines  extending  out  to  the  respec 
five  corners  of  the  tablet.    The  conipartinents  thus  fornied  are  orna- 
mented with  tigures  (»f  various  objects.     On  the  left  end  face  of  the 
illustration  a  it*  a  goose;  the  next  at  the  toj)  is  a  nuin  with  one  liand 


GRAPHIC    ART   OP   THE   ESKIMOS. 


770 


elevated  and  the  other  apparently  ho  curved  as  to  pretend  to  touch 
himself,  indicating  that  he  is  conteniphiting  soniethin^orhasperfonneu 
some  deed;  the  third  space  contains  the  conventional  h{?nre  of  a 
whale's  tail  to  in<licatc  that  animal,  and  in  tiic  remaining  space,  at  the 
bottom,  is  a  whale  with  what  appears  to  denote  a  th)at  attadu'd  to  a 
harpoon  line. 

The  other  side  of  the  tablet,  that  bearing'  the  i-oid,  has  in  tln^  lelt 
hand  sj>ace  an  animal  probably  intend4>d  to  denote  a  wolf;  tiic  ui>per 
panel  has  within  it  a  deer,  the  horns  lieiu};-  turned  back,  whereas  to 
denote  the  reindeer  they  would  be  turned  forward;  the  next,  like  the 
first,  appears  to  be  a  wolf,  while  the  fourth  has  two  animals  seated 
upon  tiieir  haun<'hes,  facinj;  one  anotiier,  after  the  manner  of  doys, 
althongli  they  appear  to  closely  resemble  the  first  and  tliinl,  which  are 
believed  to  denote  wolves,  as  before  stated. 


ec 
la- 
le 
■nd 


'3fe2? 


K.VNClNd   OOUOKT  OK   WOllI);    FROM   POINT  HARROW. 


An  old  and  weatherworn  mask  from  Point  Barrow  is  shown  in  fig.  2. 
It  is  made  of  spruce  wood,  and  measures  7 A  inches  in  lenjjth.  It  is 
peculiar  in  having  the  outer  corners  of  the  eyes  somewhat  depressed, 
and  in  addition  to  the  mustache  and  imperial  has  u  broad  "wiialeman's 
mask  "  drawn  with  black  lead  across  tlie  eyes. 

M-  Af-  doch'  says  of  the  specimen  that  ^'this  mask  has  been  for  a 
long  .i.u;  fastened  to  an  ornamented  wooden  gorget,  and  appeared  to 
have  been  exposed  to  the  weather,  perhai)S  at  a  (cemetery.  Tiie  string 
is  made  of  unusually  stout  sinew  braid." 

A  decorated  gorget  is  shown  in  tig.  3.  It  is  from  Point  liarrow,  and 
Mr.  Murtioch'  describes  it  thus: 

It  18  made  of  spruce,  is  18.5  iiu-hes  loiijj,  iiiid  has  two  hcckets  of  stout  sinew  liraid, 
one  to  go  round  the  neck  and  the  other  round  the  Itody  nndcr  t ho,  wearer's  sirnis. 

'  Ninth  Annual  Report  of  the  Hiirean  of  i:thnolgy  for  1887-SS,  1S!J2,  pp.  Mu.  :iV,H, 
fig.  3(57. 
-  Idt  in,  p  370,  fig.  H72a. 


780 


REPORT  OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Tho  ilKiirnH  aro  all  itaintod  on  t\w  frout  ftuio.  Tn  the  initldh*  Ih  a  inuii  painTe<l  wiili  ro*I 
orliitr;  nil  tlio  rast  of  tli<«  ti^iiroB  avi'  liliick  jiihI  |ir<)))alil,v  ))aiiit<-<l  with  noot.  I'iuf 
man  with  Iuh  arnm  outHtn-tithttd  NtaiulH  on  a  ]ai'){o  whale,  ruprcHi-ntinl  aH  Hiioutiii^. 
Ilo  iiohlH  a  Mniall  whale  in  each  hand.  At  hin  ri^'ht  in  a  Nniall  croNH-shapHl  olijoct 
which  ]icrha|m  rn|)roscntH  a  bird,  then  a  man  facing  toward  the  lelt  and  darting  a 
har])oou  witli  both  liandH,  and  a  bear  facing  to  the  left.  On  the  left  of  the  red  man 
are  two  nmiaks  witii  iivc  men  in  each,  a  whale  nearly  ellaccd,  and  thn'e  of  thf  crow- 
Hhaped  objects  alr<  aily  mentione«l.  Kelow  tln^m  also,  freshly  drawn  with  a  hard, 
blnnt  lead  pencil  or  the  point  of  a  bullet,  are  a  whale,  an  umiak,  and  a  three- eorn<-red 
ub.jcct  the  natnn^  of  which  I  can  not  nnike  out. 

A  similar  j^oiget,  tVoiii  the  niiino  jjlace,  i.s  sliown  in  fifjf.  I,  uiid  appears 
to  liave  been  long  exposed  to  the  weather,  perhaps  at  a  (Hunetery,  as 
the  liguies  are  all  ettaced  except  in  tlie  niid<lle,  where  it  was  probably 
''covered  by  a  musk  as  in  fig.  2,  whieh  was  from  the  same  village." 


DAN'CINO   OOItOKT  UK   WOOD;    FUDM   I'dlNT   UAUkOW. 


n 


Mr.  Mnrdo(;li  says  of  this  that  "there  seems  to  have  been  a  red  bor 
der  on  the  serrated  edge.  In  the  middle  is  the  same  red  man  as  before 
standing  on  the  black  whale  and  holding  a  whale  in  each  hand.  At 
his  right  is  a  black  umiak  with  live  men  in  it,  and  at  his  left  a  partially 
eflacod  ligure  which  is  perhaps  another  boat."  The  strings  are  for 
se(;nring  the  gorget  to  the  dancer's  neck  and  body. 

Mr.  Murdoch'  remarks  of  the  human  figure  holding  the  whales: 
"This  umn  or  giant,  able  to  hold  out  a  whale,  appears  to  be  a  legend- 
ary character,  as  we  have  his  inuige  carved  in  ivory.     V\'e  unfortu- 


'  Ninth  Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology  for  1887-88,  1892,  p.  371. 


(JKAl'MIC    AHT   OF   THE    KSKIMOS. 


781 


y 

or 

s: 
1- 


a 


iiately  <li(l  not  succeed  in  Ictiniiii};  iinytliin^'  more  altoiit  liiiii,  oxcupt 
tliiit  Ills  iiiiine  (ii|»paiently)  wiis  '  Kikiimi^o.'" 

"Tlu's«>.  j;oijf(ft8  a|»p«'iii'  to  have  ji'oiie  out  ol  fashion,*'  continues  the 
above-named  author,  ''as  wo  sa\v  none  which  were  not  very  old,  or 
whi<'li  appeared  to  have  h«^en  used  recently.'*' 


MKTAI.8. 

Copper,  brass,  an<l  white  metal  (consistiii};'  of  bhx'k  tin,  lead,  etc.),  as 
well  as  an  ot-casional  specimen  uf  iron,  will  be  met  with  bearinj;'  rude 
desijiiis  in  ornamentation.  Very  little  is  done  also  in  silver,  esp(M'ially 
in  the  nmnufactnie  of  bra(!«'lets,  an  art  which  was  imported  from  tlu^ 
Thlinkit,  who,  in  turn,  oiuained  their  first  suf^j-estions  and  patterns 
from  the  Flaida  Indians.  Mr.  Murdoch  reports  the  i)ractice  of  en;;rav- 
iuK  iron  pipe  picks  and  Hint  steels  at  Point  Harrow. 

SKINS    OK    ANIMALS. 

Tanned  hides  of  walrus  are  sometinu's  used  for  purposes  where  a 
touch  here  or  there  of  ornamentation  seems  to  be  desired  by  the  native 
Eskimo. 

Keindeer  skin  ami  the  snuill  peltries  used  for  articles  of  clothing  are 
sometimes  decorate<l  with  desij;ns  in  color  by  means  of  small  wooden 
tools  resembliiif?  spoons,  of  whi(;h  the  back  of  the  bowl  is  cut  into  pat- 
terns, which  are  then  moistened  with  the  pigments  ov  stains,  and 
linally  imi)ress«'d  ui)on  the  skin  or  fabric.  This  process  is  very  like 
that  practiced  by  the  South  Sea  Islaiulers  in  decorating  some  forms  of 
tapa  cloth. 

TATTOOINa. 

The  human  skin  is  also  used  for  the  i)ortrayal  of  various  designs,  the 
practice  of  tattooing  varying  among  the  several  tribes  or  bands  of 
Eskimo  between  xVlaska  and  Greenland.  Plate  4  lepresents  a  Port 
Clarence  girl  with  typical  tattooing  upon  the  chin.  In  tlu^  femah;  the 
designs  are  usually  limited  to  such  vertical  l)ars  upon  the  chin.  On 
Plate  22,  fig.  7,  is  also  shown  tattooing  by  pictography  upon  a  <'arved 
face. 

Keferring  to  the  Kskimo  of  Melville  l*eninsula.  Captain  Parry ^ 
remtiiks: 

Among  tbfiir  personal  ornainonts  nnisfalsi)  l)o  reckoned  that  mode  of  marking  the 
hody  culled  tattooin^j,  which,  of  the  custom.s  not  essential  to  th(!  coiiilort  or  liappi- 
n CSS  of  mankind,  is  perhaps  the  most  extensively  practiced  throiijihout  tlic  world. 
Among  these  people  it  seems  to  ho  an  ornament  of  indispensable  imi)ortance  to  the 
women,  not  one  of  them  being  without  it.  The  operation  is  performed  about  the  age 
ot  ten  or  .sometimes  earlier  and  has  nothing  to  do  with  marriage,  except  that,  being 
considered  in  the  light  of  a  personal  charm,  it  may  serve  to  recommend  them  as 
wives.  The  i>arts  of  the  body  thus  marked  are  their  faces,  arms,  hands,  thighs,  and 
in  some  few  women  the  breasts,  but  nevtir  the  feet,  as  in  Greenland. 

'  Ninth  Annual  Report  of  the  Hureau  of  Ethnology  for  lX87-><8,  1892,  p.  372. 
-  The  Journal  of  a  second  voyage  for  the  discovery  of  a  northwest  passage  from  the 
Atlantic  to  the  Pacific.    London,  1824. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0    Iri^  111 


I.I 


■  45 

■■M 

j50 

■  6  3 

"  lis  iio 


25 


I 


II 1-25     1.4      1.6 

, 

^ 

6"     

► 

7 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


1 


'^ 


w 


<^ 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  NY.  14580 

(716)  S73-4S03 


;\ 


I 


it 


782 


REPORT  OF   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


The  operation  is  very  expeditiously  managed  by  paasing  a  needle  iind  thread,  the 
latter  covered  with  lamp  black  and  oil,  nnder  the  epidermis,  according  to  a  pattern 
fireviously  marked  out  upon  the  akin.  Several  sketches  being  thus  taken  at  once, 
tho  thumb  is  pressed  upon  tho  part,  while  the  thread  is  drawn  through,  by  which 
means  th«  coloring  matter  Ih  retained  and  a  pelrmanent  dye  of  a  blue  tinge  imparted 
to  the  skin. 

Ill  the  absence  of  needles,  says  the  author,  a  strip  of  whalebone  i» 
used  as  a  substitute.  It  is  furthermore  stated  that  the  patterns  *'  are 
nearly  the  same  in  all,"  and  that  <<a  little  of  this  kind  of  mark  is  on  the 
back  i)art  of  their  hands;  and  with  them  we  understood  it  to  be  con- 
sidered as  a  souvenir  of  some  distant  or  deceased  person  who  had 
performed  it," 

Marks  of  distinction  by  tattooing  are  employed  by  the  men  to  denote 
success  in  whaling.  "  Those  men  who  are  or  have  been  captains  of 
whaling  umiaks  that  have  taken  whales  have  marks  tattooed  some- 
where oil  their  person,  sometimes  forming  a  definite  tally."' 

Mr.  Murdoch  refers  to  an  example  in  the  person  of  a  native  named 
Afloru,  who  had  a  broad  band  tattooed  across  each  cheek,  extending 
from  the  corner  of  the  mouth  backward  toward  the  lobe  of  the  ear. 
These  bands  were  ma^le  up  of  many  indistinct  lines,  which  were  said 
to  indicate  "  many  whales."  Another  instance  was  that  of  a  native 
who  "  had  the  '  flukes '  of  seven  whales  in  a  line  across  the  chest." 

The  wife  of  the  former  "  had  a  little  mark  tattooed  on  each  corner  of 
her  mouth,  which  she  said  were '  whale  marks,'  indicating  that  she  was 
the  wife  of  a  successful  whaleman." ' 

McOlure  noics  that  at  Cape  Bathurst  he  observed  that  a  successful 
hari)ooner  had  a  blue  line  drawn  across  the  bridge  of  the  nose,^  and, 
according  to  Arinstroi>g,  he  has  a  line  tattooed  from  the  inner  angle 
of  the  eye  across  the  cheek,  a  new  one  being  added  for  every  whale 
he  strikes.^  Father  Petitot  remarks  that  in  this  region  whales  are 
"scored"  by  "tattooing  crosses  on  the  shoulder,  and  that  a  murderer 
is  marked  across  the  nose  with  a  couple  of  horizontal  lines."*  It  is 
interesting,  says  Murdoch,  that  one  of  the  "striped"  men  at  Nuwttk 
told  us  he  had  killed  a  man.  In  east  Greenland  tattooing  is  similarly 
performed.  Holm,  remarking,  in  reference  to  the  residents  at  Angma- 
gralik,  that  "Mji'ndene  ere  kun  undtagelsvis  tatoverede  og  da  kun 
med  enkelte  mindre  Streger  paa  Arme  og  Haandled.  for  at  Kunue 
harpunere  godt."  ^ 

INSTRUMENTS  AND  COLORS. 

Various  instruments  are  employed  by  the  Eskimo  in  preparing  for 
the  reception  of  pictographs  the  several  substances  used  for  that 
purpose.    The  iiigments  are  now  chiefly  obtained  from  the  trader, 


•  Ninth  Annual  Report  of  the  Hurean  of  Ethnology,  1887-«8,  1892,  p.  139. 
'^  Discovery  of  Northwest  Passage,  p.  93. 

=•  Personal  Narrative,  p.  176. 

*  Monographie,  etc.,  p.  xxv. 
»Geogr.  Tidskrift  VIII,  p.  88. 


i 


id  thread,  tho 
g  to  a  pattern 
aken  at  once, 
igh,  by  wbicb 
inge  imparted 

'halebone  is 
tteriis  "  are 
rk  is  on  the 
b  to  be  con- 
n  who  had 

)n  to  denote 
captains  of 

x)oed  some- 

i 

tive  named 
,  extending 
of  the  ear. 
Ii  were  said 
of  a  native 
chest." 
jh  corner  of 
lat  she  was 


i 


1, 


i 


i  snccessfnl 
nose,^  and, 
inner  angle 
very  whale 
whales  are 
a  murderer 
Bs."*  It  is 
at  Nuwftk 
is  similarly 
at  Angma- 
og  da  kun 
at  Kunne 


epariiig  for 
d  for  that 
bhe  trader, 

p.  139. 


Report  o' U.  S.  National  l^useum,  1895. — Hoffman. 


Plate  1 7. 


u 


Saws  for  Cutting  Ivory. 


E  17. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    17. 


^ig.  1.  Saw. 

<Cat.  No.  I,:.„4J.     .v„.,ers„„  «ive...    (;„„„„*.,  „,  c.  P.  o 


Gaudet. 


/ 


If  ' 


If 


r 


GRAPHIC   ART    OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


783 


u 


though  in  former  times  they  were  prepared  from  ininersil  luid  vejjetuble 
substances. 

Plate  17  represents  two  saws  used  in  cutting  ivory.  The  specimen 
shown  in  fijj.  1  is  from  Port  Clarence,  and  apiiears  to  be  made  of  a 
piece  of  a  steel  saw  of  American  manufacture,  but  from  the  appearance 
of  the  specimen  the  teeth  were  filed  into  it  by  the  native.  It  is 
hafted  to  a  piece  of  ivory  and  secured  by  means  of  a  niece  of  metal, 
apparently  a  nail. 

Plate  17,  fig.  2,  represents  a  saw  of  a  thinner  piece  of  metal  with  a 
very  irregularly  tiled  cutting  edge.  It  is  attached  to  a  piece  of  ivory, 
and  was  obtained  at  Anderson  River.  This  instrument  was  used  in 
splitting  walrus  tusks  lengthwise,  as  well  as  cutting  them  into  shorter 
pieces  when  necessary.  In  the  bone  or  ivory  comb  represented  in  Plate 
22,  fig.  4,  may  be  seen  the  effects  of  native  sawing  and  an  attempt  to 
make  teeth. 

Several  forms  of  knives  before  referred  to  are  illustrated  in  i)late  15. 
The  upper  left-hand  figure  (fig.  1)  is  a  woodworking  knife,  obtained  at 
St.  Michaels,  and  sent  to  the  Museum  by  Mr.  E.  W.  Nelson.  The  handle 
is  made  of  a  rib,  a  slot  in  the  forward  end  being  made  there  to  receive 
the  laterally  curved  blade,  and  in  this  respect  resembling  to  a  limited 
degree  the  type  used  by  most  of  the  Indians  of  the  Great  Lakes.  The 
blade  is  secured  by  means  of  a  thong. 

Upon  the  back  or  obverse  side  of  the  handle  is  a  depression  one-eighth 
of  an  inch  deep  and  tive-sixteenthsof  an  inch  in  diameter,  which  shows 
ample  evidence  of  having  been  used  in  holding  a  fire  drill,  or  some  other 
variety  of  drill.  Upon  the  front  side  of  the  handle  appears  the  outlines 
of  three  sailing  vessels,  immediately  behind  the  right-hand  figure  being 
a  pit  surrounded  by  a  circle  with  four  radiating  lines,  beyond  which  are 
indications  of  an  attempt  to  make  other  concentric  circles. 

These  knives  are  used  in  fashioning  wood  into  various  forms,  and 
also,  sometimes,  in  shaving  the  roughened  edges  of  ivory  rods. 

The  specimen  at  the  upper  right  hand  (fig.  2)  is  from  Kotzebue  Sound. 
The  handle,  like  the  precjeding,  is  made  of  a  rib,  while  the  arrow-shaped 
piece  of  metal  constituting  the  blade  is  secured  by  means  of  two  rivets, 
one  of  iron  and  one  of  copper,  while  the  anterior,  a  third  one,  has  fallen 
out,  leaving  only  the  perforation. 

The  cutting  edge  is  slightly  concave  from  point  to  base  and  may 
have  been  made  so  intentionally  for  the  purpose  of  causing  slight  con- 
vexity to  the  surface  operated  upon.  This  style  of  knife  is  also  some- 
times employed  in  shaving  down  ivory  rods  to  the  desired  form  and 
thickness. 

The  third  specimen  (fig.  3)  was  obtained  at  Norton  Sound.  This  bone 
gouge  or  chisel  represents  the  type  of  tool  used  for  stripping  off  birch 
bark  for  canoes  before  the  iron  tools  were  introduced.  It  is  apparently 
made  of  the  leg  bone  of  a  reindeer  and  bears  ornamentation  of  peculiar 
interest.    The  transverse  bars  consist  of  parallel  lines  by  twos,  and 


784 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1896. 


II 

I  ■ 


If 


If  t\ 


Buverul  times  by  threes,  between  wliich  is  the  ulternating  dentate  pat- 
tern, the  result  of  the  interlacing,  or  alternate  approximation,  of  points, 
the  intervening  surface  resulting  in  a  fine  zigzag  pattern.    The  simple 
zigzag  lines  occur  near  the  middle  of  the  specimen,  while  the  small  lai 
eral  ornaments  resembling  bird  tra<'ks  are  conventional  tree  patterni;). 

The  incisions  are  all  stained  with  what  appears  to  be  red  ochcr. 
Total  length  is  12^^  inches;  has  a  sharp  cutting  edge  and  shows  evi 
deu(;e  of  much  use. 

The  ivory  snow  knife  (flg.  4)  was  collected  by  Mr.  E.  W.  Nelson  at 
the  Ghalitnmt  village,  and  occupies  the  bottom  i)la<!e  on  plate  15.  The 
specimen  is  lijf  inches  in  length  and  1\^  inches  across  the  widest  part 
of  the  tolerably  sharp  blade.  The  bottom  of  the  handle  is  ornamented 
with  seven  projections  representing  seal  heads,  the  eyes  and  mouth  of 
each  being  clearly  cut  and  blackened.  Along  the  toi>  or  back  of  the 
blade  are  three  parallel  creases,  crossed  at  intervals  by  short  lines. 
The  upi)er  edge  of  each  side  of  the  blade  has  two  parallel  lines  extend- 
ing from  the  base  to  near  the  tip,  from  the  lower  one  of  which  extend 
short  <^  shaped  ornaments  resembling  the  legs  on  some  of  the  Eskimo 
mythic  animals.  The  line,  extending  almost  halfway  along  the  bottom 
edge  of  the  blade,  has  single  short  lines  projecting  backward,  at  a  slight 
angle,  at  intervals  of  about  half  an  inch  apart.  This  is  a  simpler  form 
of  ornament,  though  of  the  same  type  as  that  upon  the  upper  side  of 
the  blade. 

Along  the  center,  on  either  side,  is  a  line  terminating  at  the  middle 
of  the  blade  in  a  circle  within  which  is  another  and  a  central  perfora- 
tion tilled  with  a  hard  wooden  i^eg. 

The  central  line  on  each  side  has  simple,  short,  oblique  lateral 
incisions  as  ornaments,  while  the  outer  circle  has  lines  radiating  at  the 
cardinal  points. 

On  plate  18  are  reproduced  three  bone  skin  dressers,  figs.  1  and  3 
being  obtained  from  the  Thlingit  Indians,  while  flg.  2  was  secured  at 
Sitka,  no  specific  tribe  being  referred  to  in  the  records  accompanying 
the  object. 

The  ornamentation  on  plate  18,  fig.  1  consists  chiefly  of  three  rows  of 
small  squares  being  arranged  in  order  to  resemble  a  checkered  surface, 
the  one  series  of  squares  being  plain  while  the  other  is  specified  by 
cross  lines.  At  the  upper  edge,  embracing  a  little  more  than  one-third 
of  the  surface,  is  a  longitudinal  surface  marked  by  pairs  of  diagonal 
lines. 

The  specimen  on  plate  18,  fig.  2,  has  most  of  the  surface  of  one  side 
divided  oft'  into  three  rectangles,  all  but  one  of  the  lines  forming  the 
boundaries,  being  decorated  on  the  inner  side  by  broken  series  of  small 
triangles.  This  is  a  common  Eskimo  pattern,  but  has  not  the  oppos- 
ing fellow  so  as  to  form  the  zigzag.  The  pattern  does  not  occur  on 
other  specimens  of  like  workmanship  from  the  Thlingit  Indians,  or 
firom  Sitka,  excepting  in  the  specimen  on  plate  46,  fig.  3,  in  which  two 


fi 
% 


h 


r  dentuto  pat- 
iou,  of  points, 
.  The  simple 
the  stuall  hit 
tree  patternH. 
Je  red  oclier. 
id  shows  evi 

VV.  Nelson  at 
)late  ir>.    The 
0  widest  part 
3  ornamented 
iind  mouth  of 
r  back  of  the 
'  short  lines, 
lines  extend- 
ivhich  extend 
f  the  Eskimo 
ff  the  bottom 
'd,  at  a  slight 
simpler  form 
ipper  side  of 

>  the  middle 
itral  perfora- 

lique  lateral 
iating  at  the 


igs.  1  and  3 
s  secured  at 
companying 

liree  rows  of 
red  surface, 
specified  by 
m  one-third 
of  diagonal 

of  one  side 
'onning  the 
ies  of  small 

the  oppos- 
)t  occur  on 
Indians,  or 

which  two 


I 


li 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    18. 


l"\<^.  1.  Skin  Dhksski!. 

(Cat,  No.  W.im.  V.  S.  N.  M.     Tlilin-ii   In.liiuis.    ( ■,.1I,.,|,.,1  l,v  Lieut,  (i,   V.  Kmiiions 

r.s,  N.)  ' 

l'i;,^l'.  Ski.v  I>i{ks.ski{. 

((,';il.  \(i.  71!l,-)4.  r.  S.  \.  AI.    Siikii.     <'«illi.ctc(l  liy -Icilin  .1 .  Alcl.iiiii., 

I'i;;.  ;{.  Skin  Dukssii;. 

(f':il.  X.I.  l(W:t.-.h.      Tlilinuil  liKliaiis.     (,'ollocted  liy  l.iciit.  (i.  !•'.  Kii is,  IS.  N.) 


Rrpi)rt„t   U    S    National  Mu.riim.   I  H<iS     -HMttriijn 


Plate  18. 


I 

I 


KiiiiiiDim, 


Bone  Skin  Dressers. 


»l 


il 


Report  of  U.  S.  National  MusHunn,   1895.--Hotfman. 


Plate  19. 


V    I 


il 


Various  Forms  of  Gravers. 


EXPLANATION     OF   PLATE     19. 


8 
4 


V\ii,  ].  (;i{A\  Ki?. 

(',':ii.  N'.i.  4s:mi,  I',  s.  \. 
'•'ij,'.  'J.  (;i{AVi;i{. 

I  Cat.  N 
I''ig.  3.  Gkavi; 


M       K.iiz.l 


nil'  Noil 


11(1.      (■(.11..,I,<1  l.y   K.  AV.  \,.l 


o.  :.':iii7.  r.s.  N.  M. 


i{. 


A  mil  I'Miii  L'iviT.     (',,11, 


■I'll  l).v  K.  M.Fiiil; 


son.) 


nil'  I 


I-IH.  I.   ( 


!• 


I,U'.  5.    Gl!A\  K 


(Cut.  Nil.  L'(i!ii.  r.  s.  N.  M.      \ 
iRAVKi! 

Cut.  Xn.  .lllll.-lil,  r.  s.  N,  M. 


liiliT.^mi  I; 


■!■■    Colli'ili'il  ],\  i;.  M.l-.'irli 


III'.) 


I'url  (1, 


iivii.c.     r,,llii(,il  l,y  \V.  II.  K.iii 


(•'ill.  .\i,.4|.-,!ii   I- 


S.  N.M.     (■ 


i|pf  Nc 


lllf.        r,,l|,.,|,.  1    |,y    K.   W.  X,.]., 


.11.) 


Til—  in-i\mmmim^tmmm»n 


'V 


V 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


785 


short  rows  of  triangular  liffures  appear  near  the  middle,  while  at  the 
left  are  three  larjje  triangular  patterns  placed  so  as  to  form  a  zigzag, 
or  V-shaped,  design,  this  being  merely  an  enhirged  illustration  of  the 
snjaller  i)atterns  above  noted.  At  the  other  end  of  this  specimen  is  a 
group  of  isolated  transverse  lines;  from  the  middle  of  the  end  is 
issuing  a  continuous  horizontal  line,  1^  inches  in  length,  terminating 
in  a  bifurcation  exactly  resembling  the  common  Eskimo  conventional 
tree  pattern.  In  the  middle  space  of  the  tool  is  a  pair  of  parallel  hori- 
zontal lines,  also  terminating  in  similar  bifurcations;  this,  however, 
niay  be  meaningless,  though  it  resembles  a  doubletree  symbol,  or  it 
might  also  be  taken  as  denoting  a  seine  shuttle,  examples  of  which 
are  given  in  several  illustratious. 
Mr.  L,  M.  Turner  writes:' 

Circles  are  made  with  a  graver;  formerly  a  sharp  corner  of  Hint  set  in  a  stick. 
*  '  *  In  later  days  a  three-cornered  file,  one  worn  out,  was  substituted,  and  the 
manner  in  which  I  saw  him — an  expt-rt  ivory  worker  at  St.  Michaels — use  it  was 
simply  pushing  it  fron>  him,  turning  the  ivory  round  as  the  circle  was  K'l'ved,  a 
little  deeper  at  each  turn. 

The  straight  decorated  lines  were  made  as  two  deep  channels  at  a  suital>le  width 
apart;  the  serrations  were  made  by  pushing  from  the  outer  edge  of  the  ridge 
toward  the  groove.  These  sculptures  are,  not  made  in  a  day,  wt^ek,  or  month ;  many 
objects  are  not  completed  in  years,  as  many  of  them  are  lif»i  histories  of  the  indi- 
vidual. The  Innuit  is  never  in  a  hurry,  and  each  thinks  he  has  a  lifetime  before 
him. 

The  Kaniags  or  Kaniaks,  the  inhabitants  of  the  island  of  Kadiiik 
and  surrounding  ishinds,  "  are  possessed  of  great  skill  in  carving 
ligures  and  other  objects  from  walrus  tusks,  the  material  being 
obtained  from  tlie  Alaska  Peninsula."  Mr.  Ivan  Petrott",^  whose  words 
I  am  quoting,  remarks  furthermore: 

They  also  make  very  nicely  carved  sniitVboxes  of  whalebone.  Formerly  all  these 
objects  were  worked  with  stone  implements,  itut  the  use  of  iron  lias  long  been 
known  to  the  Kaniags,  who  used  it  at  the  arrival  of  the  Uussiaiis.  The  savages 
said  that  iron  was  occasionally  cast  tipon  the  beach  by  the  waves  [sic!J. 

Keference  has  been  made  to  the  steel  pointe<l  native-made  gravers 
used  in  various  processes  of  engraving.  In  plate  ID  are  represented 
live  instruments,  (ig.  1  of  whicli  was  obtained  at  Kotzebue  Sound  by 
Mr.  E.  W.  Nelson.  The  hamlle,  a  little  over  .">  inclies  in  length,  is 
niade  of  bone.  A  slight  slot  was  cut  at  the  large  end,  into  which  was 
inserted  a  short  piece  of  iron  or  steel,  secured  by  wrapping  with  thin 
cord,  apparently  of  sinew.  The  point  of  the  instrument  is  acute,  and 
admirably  a<lapted  for  etching  or  scraping. 

The  second  figure  from  the  top  (lig.  2)  was  secured  at  Anderson 
liiver  by  j\Ir.  \l.  McFarlane.  The  bone  handle  bears  indentations,  so  as 
to  admit  of  secure  gras[)ing.    The  point  of  steel  is  inserted  in  the  end 


'Letter  dated  March  18,  1S«)6. 

'■'Heport  on  the  ])o])ulation,  industries,  and  resources  of  Alaska, 


1880,  VIII,  p.  141. 

NAT  MIS  '.Jo- 


Tenth  Census, 


-50 


J 


786 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


i  " 


U  " 


f    ''i 
I 


(I 


and  tiled  down  to  a  narrower  width  tlian  that  liidden  from  view, 
point  measnres  ^\,  of  an  incli  in  heiglit  and  is  only  about  i,V  of  an  i 
thick.    The  front  edge  is  not  at  right  angles  to  the  sides,  and  t 
furnishes  a  better  and  shari)er  cutting  edge. 

The  third  or  nii<ldle  specimen  (fig.  3)  is  froTu  the  same  locality  as 
preceding.  The  handle  consists  of  two  pieces  of  bone,  so  arranged 
to  unite  smoothly  and  also  to  hold  in  place  a  piece  of  steel,  which  hi 
been  sunk  partly  in  each  half  of  the  handle  by  means  of  a  slot  ma 
by  sawing.  The  two  pieces  are  finally  tied  together  with  a  sinew  cor 
The  apex  of  the  graver  is  rather  more  acute  than  in  the  precedi 
spe«'inien. 

The  back  of  the  tool  is  also  ground  to  a  cutting  edge,  to  be  us 
in  scraping  smooth  such  surfaces  reipiiring  treatment  previous 
engraving. 

An  interesting  specimen  occupies  the  fourth  place  in  the  series  (fi, 
4).    This  is  from  Port  Ol.arence,  where  it  was  obtained  by  Mr.  W.  1 
Dall.    The  two  pieces  of  bone  composing  the  handle  are  secured  to  oi 
another  by  means  of  a  peg  passing  vertically  through  them,  and  t\\ 
wooden  pegs,  of  no  special  use  apparently,  are  inserted  in  handle  traiu 
versely.     Like  in  the  preceding,  a  slot  has  been  made  with  the  front 
each  piece  so  as  to  secure  the  flat  piece  of  metal  (!onstituting  the  blad 
The  point  is  neatly  finished,  and  it  will  be  observed  has  a  very  aciiti 
tip  turned  downward  so  as  to  afford  the  best  possible  means  for  fint 
engraving  in  hard  material.    The  two  pieces  of  handle  are  tied  together 
with  a  leather  or  skin  thong.    The  entire  length  is  il  inches. 

The  fifth  and  lower  specimen  (tig  5)  is  from  Cape  Nome,  and  wa> 
secured  by  Mr.  Vj.  W.  Nelson.  The  handle  is  composed  of  two  piece- 
of  walrus  ivory;  two  pegs  pass  vertically  through  them  to  hold  then 
together,  while  the  broad  blade  is,  as  usual,  inserted  in  slots  made  ii 
both  pieces  of  handle.  The  wrai)ping  consists  of  sinew  or  hide,  beiiij: 
so  covered  with  a  layer  of  hard  grease  and  dirt  as  to  prevent  identifita 
tion.  The  front  edge  of  the  instrument  is  at  an  angle  suflicient  t^ 
furnish  an  excellent  cutting  edge.    The  entire  length  is  4  ,\  inches. 

In  addition  to  the  above  remarks  concerning  the  second  specinjen,i 
is  of  interest  to  call  attention  to  the  fact  that  upon  the  right  hand  sideoi 
the  handle  there  occurs  a  rounded  cavity,  made  with  a  rude  implement 
which  may  have  been  intended  for  use  in  drilling — by  steadying  tin 
drill  at  the  top.    Such  depressions  and  for  such  purposes  are  not  rare 

Mr.  L.  M.  Turner,  Captain  Herendeen,  and  others  to  whom  refereiic 
is  made  elsewhere  state  that  formerly  the  natives  used  fragments  o; 
flint  or  quartz  with  which  to  engrave  and  decorate  specimens  of  ivory 
bone,  and  other  materials  used  for  utensils  and  weapons.  The  snial 
fragments  of  siliceous  material  were  inserted  in  the  end  of  wood  or  bom 
handles,  though  sometimes  they  were  large  enough  to  use  without  tlif 
aid  of  a  handle. 

After  a  carefiil  examination  of  all  the  engraved  specimens  of  Alaslcan 


,  1895. 

Iden  from  view.  The 
y  about  ^rV  <>f  »«  in<'li 
D  the  sides,  and  thui< 

e  same  locality  as  the 
'  bone,  so  .arranged  as 
ce  of  steel,  which  has 
means  of  a  slot  made 
her  with  a  sinew  conl. 
han  in  the  preceding 

ting  edge,  to  be  used 
reatment  previous  to 

>lace  in  the  series  (fijj. 
)tained  by  Mr.  W.  II. 
idle  are  secured  to  one 
hrough  tlieni,  and  twd 
serted  in  handle  trans 
made  with  the  front  of 
lionstituting  the  bladi', 
rved  has  a  very  aciiti 
ossible  means  for  fine 
andle  are  tied  togctlit'i 
is  -il  inches. 
Cape  Nome,  and  wa> 
posed  of  two  piece- 
rh  them  to  hold  then 
lerted  in  slots  made  ii 
sinew  or  hide,  beiiif 
to  prevent  identitio 
jn  angle  sullicient  i 
gth  is  4  i\  inches, 
e  second  specimen.! 
Ithe  right  hand  sidn 
ith  a  rude  implemciii 
|g — by  steadying  tin 
lurposes  are  not  run' 
Irs  to  whom  refereim 
ps  used  fragments  i' 
specimens  of  ivory 
reapons.    The  snial 
I  end  of  wood  or  botu 
to  use  without  tlu 

pecimens  of  AlasUaii 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP   THE   ESKIMOS. 


787 


rt  work,  in  the  collections  of  the  National  Museum  at  Washington,  Dis- 
Irict  of  Columbia,  and  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company  in  San  Fran- 
cisco, California,  it  appears  that  the  more  modern  specimens  of  ivory 
♦re  engraved  in  a  nnmner  indicating  the  use  of  steel-pointed  instru- 
iaents,  such  as  are  shown  in  plate  19.    The  lines  or  incisions  are  fre- 
quently very  pronounced  and  represent  deep  regular  cliannels  in  which 
the  two  sides  converge  to  a  sharp  cut  beneath  or  at  the  bottom,  resem- 
bling a  V-shaped  groove  of  elegant  uniformity.    In  the  older  specimens 
of  ivory  carving,  such  as  are  very  much  surface  worn  by  frequent  and 
long  continued  handling,  or  have  been  in  the  possession  of  certain 
.^individuals  and  families  for  a  long  time,  the  creases  have  become  less 
|de(!p,  and  where  they  are  sheltered  by  lateral  ridges  they  still  indicate 
Ian  origin  of  a  more  primitive  kind,  being  made,  perhaps,  by  less  expe- 
frienccd   artists  or  with  ruder  instruments.     The  numerous  hair  line 
Iscratches  and  freciuent  apparently  accidental  slips  of  the  point  would 
|indicate  the  use  of  a  point  less  acute  than  the  modern  steel  gravers 
'?inade  by  the  natives  at  this  day,  and  which  are  herewith  illustrated. 
I    In  .some  of  the  later  engravings  the  grooves  are  regular,  deep,  and 
Ipronounced,  the  cut  being  sometimes  vertical,  so  as  to  show  the  lateral 
ii'dges  at  right  angles  to  the  horizontal  base  of  the  groove,  indicating  a 
'sStrong  hand  pressure  of  a  square  cutting  edge.    The  greater  number  of 
fines  are  made,  evidently,  by  using  an  angle  of  the  graver,  the  result 
being  similar  to  that  resulting  from  the  use  of  a  variety  of  the  three- 
Bided  or  triangular  graver  u.sed  in  wood  engraving. 

An  examination  of  the  ends  of  short  lines,  especially  those  employed 
in  simple  ornamentation,  illustrates  at  once  that  most  of  them  are  made 
by  cutting  from  the  outside  toward  the  main  object  or  body  of  the 
design.  In  this  manner  the  very  short  lines  resemble  arrow-headed 
ornaments  or  projections,  or  minute  triangles.  This  is  particularly 
apparent  in  some  of  the  specimens  referred  to  in  connection  with 
liunventionalixing  and  to  the  art  of  the  Polynesians. 

Drills  and  simple  borers  appear  to  have  been  made  by  securing  to 
Wooden  handles  rather  thin  but  elongated  pieces  of  chalcedony,  or  similar 
iiliceous  minerals.  Slight  dejuessions  or  pits  apparently  made  by  such 
tocds  are  frequent,  and  it  is  probable  that  before  the  introduction  of 
Bietals  nearly  all  i)erforations  in  bone,  wood,  and  probably  in  ivory, 
vere  thus  made.  In  larger  cavities  in  bone  and  ivory,  such  as  would 
Serve  for  steadying  the  rear  or  upper  end  of  a  fire-drill  during  rotation 
0f  the  latter,  the  origin  thus  attributed  is  often  very  clear,  the  rounded 
ca\  ity,  when  not  yet  entirely  smoothed  off  by  use,  retaining  the  marks 
of  workmanship  made  by  a  crude  tool  or  instrument. 
;  That  circles  were  made  by  turning  the  specimen  to  be  engraved  and 
holding  firmly  the  stone-pointed  graver  and  pushing  it  toward  the 
Specimen  has  been  affirmed  by  one  correspondent;  but  such  instances 
^ere  no  doubt  rare,  and  it  is  believed  that  no  example  of  a  circle, 
ucleated  or  otherwise,  made  in  this  ott'hand  manner  will  be  found  in 
he  extensive  collection  of  the  National  Museum. 


IT 


788 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


I 


)ii;mA 


Ca])tain  Ilerendeen  states  that  sometimes  a  fragment  of  flint — though 
generally  one  of  iron  or  steel  and  consisting  of  a  narrow  strip  of  perhaps 
the  width  of  a  large  nail — was  filed  at  the  end  so  as  to  receive  u 
V-shaped  notch,  one  point  being  a  little  longer  than  the  other.  It  is 
well  known  that  pieces  of  hoop  iron,  nails,  and  other  articles  of  iron 
and  steel  are  similarly  employed  by  our  native  Indian 
tribes,  and  it  would  indeed  be  a  strange  fact  if  the  Eski 
mo  did  not  seize  upon  and  utilize  such  a  valuable  sub 
stance  as  metal  when  the  opportunity  was  presented, 
and  after  having  seen  sailors  and  others  work  them 
into  desired  shape  by  hammering  or  tiling. 
The  nuclei  of  many — I  might  almost  say 
nearly  all — concentric  circles  are  deeper 
than  the  circles  surrounding  them.  This 
may  be  the  result  of  having  the  longer 
point  of  such  a  V-shaped  notched  tool 
forced  deeper  into  the  material  to  be  dec- 
orated, giving  the  instrument  a  secure 
point  for  rotation,  so  that  the  outer  or 
cutting  end  may  not  so  readily  slip  from 
its  intended  course. 

Inthismanner,andformakingconcentric 
rings,  one  such  tool  would  be  necessary  for 
each  size  of  circle  required.  Reference  to 
the  various  illustrations  will  elucidate  this 
more  clearly. 

Accurate  measurements  of  the  diameters 
of  circles  upon  any  particular  specimens 
indicate  the  use  of  a  number  of  such  in- 
struments with  different  sized  bits,  and 
varying  distances  between  the  points. 

Another  class  of  circles,  with  nuclei, 
appear  to  be  made  with  auger  bits,  the 
central  pin  being  tiled  to  a  sharp  point,  while  the 
outer  vertical  cutting  edge  is  also  tiled  so  as  to  cut 
toward  the  surface  of  the  ivory,  and  to  remove  the  tex- 
ture upon  wliicli  the  auger  is  impressed  The  grooves 
resulting  from  such  work  and  with  such  an  instrument 
are  sharply  detined,  with  lateral  sides  and  a  nearly  level 
bottom,  while  the  circles  are  mathematically  accurate 
in  form.  An  illustration  of  such  work  is  reproduced  in 
plate  19,  the  specimen  being  from  a  locality  north  of  Norton  Sound. 
The  smaller  and  more  delicate  circles  occur  on  earrings  and  other  lil.e 
objects  of  personal  adornment,  sind  upon  such  articles  of  frequent  neid 
as  sewing  utensils,  examples  of  which  are  given  in  a  number  of  illus 
trations. 


%. 


Fip.  5. 

DRILL  FKOM  POINT 
BAHROW. 


Fig.  6. 

DRILL  FKOM  POINT 

BARROW. 


\\ 


1895. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


789 


ent  of  flint — thougli 
row  strip  of  perhaps 

80  as  to  receive  n 
an  the  other.  It  is 
;her  articles  of  iron 
Y  our  native  Indian 
nge  fact  if  the  Kski 
nch  a  valuable  sub 
lity  was  presented, 

others  work  them 
mini;:. 
3tsay 
eeper 

This 
anger 
I  tool 
i  dee- 
ecure 
Br  or 
from 


mtric 
yfor 
ce  to 
)  this 


'4 


i' 


eters 

mens 

1  iu- 

and 

clei, 

the 

the 

cut 
tex- 
aves 
lent 
evel  ^^'K-^- 

,    J.  DRILL  FKOM  POINT 

^^^  BARROW. 

I  in 

of  Norton  Soun<l. 

nga  and  other  lilvC 
of  frequent  nei  d 
number  of  ilhis 


Fig.  7. 

UBILL    MOUTHI'IECK  WITHOUT 
WIN08. 


TTpon  the  pipestenis  also  are  shown  excellent  results  of  such  aborigi 
nal  work,  the  ivory  stem  shown  in  plate  20,  bearing  eight  sets  of 
circles,  that  one  nearest  the  brass-bound  mouthpiece  consisting  of  but 
a  single  circle  with  its  central  pit  or  nucleus  one-eighth  of  an  inch 
deep,  while  the  circle  itself  is  but  a  mere  hair  line  in  comparison;  the 
next  two  tigures  consist  of  two  circles  eaijh  with  the  central  spot,  the 
next  four  having  three  circles  each  beside  the  central  point,  while 
tiie  last,  or  eighth,  has  four  concentric  rings  and  the  central  nucleus. 

According  to  measurement,  the  inner  or  pri- 
mary circle,  in  all,  is  three-sixteenths  of  an 
inch  in  diameter;  the  next  larger  one,  begin- 
ning with  the  second  ring,  is  one- fourth  of  an 
inch  in  diameter;  the  next  larger,  being  the 
outer  circle  on  the  fourth  figure,  measures 
three-eighths  of  an  inch,  while  the  outer  cir- 
cle of  the  last  figure,  having  four  rings,  meas- 
ures one-half  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 

The  central  pit  or  nucleus  in  each  of  the 
circles,  excepting  two,  is  tilled  with  a  tightly  fitting  wooden   peg, 
smoothed  oflF  level  with  the  surrounding  surface,  and  carefully  black- 
ened to  accord  in  color  with  the  surrounding  blackened  circles. 

This  regularity  in  diameter  of  the  several  sizes  of  circles  indicates 
the  use  of  a  bit,  or  tool,  of  foreign  manufacture  which  the  natives 
obtained  probably  through  barter.  The  sizes  increase  by  one-sixteenth 
of  an  inch  each  time  a  change  is  made  corresponding  exactly  to  the 
regulation  sizes  used  by  carpenters  and  other  workers  in  wood. 

Drills  are  used  for  i)erforating  all  kinds  of  materials,  wood,  bone, 
ivory,  and  even  metals,  and  are  much  more  common  than  awls  among 
the  more  northern  natives.    The  handles  are  of  wood  and  sometimes 

bone,  the  point  being  made 
of  iron  or  steel,  though  before 
the  introduction  of  metals 
flint  and  similar  siliceous  ma- 
terials were  employed  in  arm- 
ing the  tool. 

The  illustration  given  in 
fig.  5  is  a  bone  pointed  drill 
from  Point  Barrow,  while  fig. 
«  represents  one  with  an  iron  drill  mounted  in  a  handle  of  spruce  wood 
which  was  once  painted  with  red  ocher.  When  the  natives  use  the  drill 
and  bow,  both  hands  are  necessarily  occupied,  one  in  steadying  the 
object  to  be  perforated  while  with  the  other  the  bow  is  held  and  moved 
horizontally  to  rotate  the  drill. 

Therefore,  to  produce  the  necessary  pressure  upon  the  top  of  the 
drill,  the  native  puts  into  his  mouth  a  drill  mouthpiece  in  which  the 
top  of  drill  rotates.     Fig.  7  represents  a  mouthpiece  with  an  iron 


Fig.  8. 
DRILL  MOUTHPIECE  WITH  SOCKET  OF  IRON. 


790 


REPORT  OP  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1896. 


socket,  wbile  in  fi^;.  8  \h  another  also  of  wood,  but  holdint;  a  socket  ot 
syenite  to  withstand  tlie  friction  of  the  drill. 

Some  of  the  specimens  in  the  collections  of  the  National  Museum  arc 
decorated  with  the  usual  deep  incisions  found  in  I'oinf  Barrow  ba^ 
handles  and  tinted  with  what  appears  to  be  red  ocher. 

In  several  instances  the  wooden  pegs  inserted  in  the  i>erforations 
made  to  represent  eyes,  ears,  or  nostrils,  of  small  animal  forms,  arc 
cohered,  and  in  other  specimens,  such  as  earrings,  glass  or  porcelain 
beads  are  inserted  instead. 

After  the  etchings  have  been  made  in  the  iv(»ry  or  otiicr  material, 
the  creases  or  incisions  are  colored  so  as  to  bring  out  the  design  in 
sharp  contrast  to  the  surrounding  surface. 

Mr.  Turner  informs  me  that  "the  black  substance  used  to  coh>r  the 
etched  lines  was  from  the  charcoal  prepared  froui  burned  grass,  then 
powdered,  mixed  with  oil,  and  rubbed  into  the  etching.  Afterwards  the 
begrimed  hand  of  the  owner  was  sutHcient  to  renew  the  cohu'ing  mat- 
ter. Some  of  the  etchings  are  colored  with  a  red  substaiice  which  (an 
innovation  in  the  art)  is  procured  from  the  traders'  stock." 

Mr.  W.  11.  Dall  remarks: 

The  culorutiou  of  wooden  articles  with  native  pifjiiujuts  is  of  iincient  orij^iu,  but 
all  tlie  more  elaborate  instances  that  have  come  to  my  knowledjic  bore  marks  of 
ct)mi)aratively  recent  origin.  The  j)i<jnients  used  wen-  blue  carbonates  of  iron  and 
copper;  the  ijreen  fungus,  or  jicziza,  found  in  decayed  birch  and  alder  wooil ;  ha>niu- 
tite  and  hmI  chalk;  white  infusorial  or  chalky  eartli;  black  charcoal,  gra]diite,  and 
niicact'ous  ore  of  irons. 

A  species  of  red  was  sometimes  derived  from  pine  bark  or  the  cambium  of  ground 
willow.  In  later  prehistoric  burial  ]daces,  the  wooden  earrings  bear  the  colors 
uearly  as  bright  as  when  lirst  applied. 


11    J 


PORTKAYAL  OF  NATURAL  AND  OTHER  OBJECTS. 

In  the  following  illustrations,  which  represent  selected  lignres  from 
various  records,  will  be  noted  the  several  styles  of  illustrating  like 
species  of  animals,  and  the  ti«lelity  of  expression  and  outline  of  some 
specimens  in  further  illustration  of  the  intimate  acquaintance  by  the 
aboriginal  artist  of  the  subject  by  which  he  attempted  to  portray  his 
skill. 

Plate  12  serves  to  illustrate  the  form  of  the  Barren-ground  caribou 
or  Alaskan  reindeer,  as  well  as  the  horns  of  the  male  and  female,  wliiic 
in  the  representation  of  the  form  of  the  walrus  similar  accuracy  is 
attained,  as  may  be  observed  by  comparing  numerous  etchings  witli 
the  illustration  on  Plate  11,  which  represents  an  exceedingly  well- 
formed  walrus. 

In  fig.  9  is  presented  a  herd  of  reindeer  shown  in  various  attitudes, 
the  general  execution  of  the  figures  being  very  cleverly  done.  Tlie 
heads  of  some  are  turned  to  the  front,  thus  showing  decided  success  in 
an  attempt  at  foreshortening;  some  of  the  animals  are  lying  down,  as 
if  resting,  while  others  appear  to  be  browsing. 


B»5. 

Iioldiiij;  SI  socket  ot 

itioiuil  Museum  ure 
Point  Burrow  bay 

er. 

ill  the  ]>ertorutioiis 
aniniul  t'ornis,  are 
^lass  or  portM'lain 

'  or  other  material, 
out  the  (lesion  in 

e  used  to  coh)r  the 
burned  yrass,  then 
I};.  Afterwanls  the 
V  the  cohu'ing"  niat- 
ibstance  which  (an 
stock." 


of  anciont  ori;fiii,  hut 
iwlcdjic  lioro  iiiiirkH  of 
carltountcs  of  iron  and 
ml  aldtT  wooil ;  hit'iiiu- 
hurcoal,  graphite,  and 


Report  of   U    S   Natiniia.  Museum,    I8>>5      Hnlftiian 


Plate  20. 


i 


cainhiuin  of  gronn*! 
iujjs  bear  tlio  colors 


BJECT«. 

ected  liji:ures  from 
illustrating;'  like 
ul  outline  of  sonu* 
quaintanee  by  the 
ted  to  i)ortray  his 

en-grouml  caribou 
and  female,  while 
uiilar  accuracy  is 
JUS  etchings  witli 
exceedingly  welt 

various  attitudes, 
iverly  done.  Tlie 
lecided  success  in 
re  lying  down,  as 


i 


I 


t'     ( 

) 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP   THK   ESKIMOS. 


791 


The  aniinalH  coinpoBing  the  herd  in  II);.  10  »re  iMigravtMl  so  as  to  rep- 

[ resent  tlieiii  in  varioim  attitudes.     In  No.  1  thu  animal  apiK'ars  to  lui 

[coniin^r  up,  as  out  of  a  depression,  or  water,  while  in  No.  2  the  aninnti 

[JH  i^raxiii};.    No.  3  is  in  the  act  of  lying  <lown,  as  Hhown  in  tlie  bent 

legs.     In  No.  4  the  animal  is  lying  down,  and  the  head  is  drawn  ho  as 

to  make  it  appear  as  if  looking  either  toward  or  away  from  the  btdiolder. 


"^  iWN^ HL AIM 


^  f^ 


IIBKI)  <IK  KKISIiEKU. 

Foresliorteniiig  is  of  rare  oi'ourronce  in  jnimitive  art,  but  besides  tiie 
pre<'eding  instance  the  animal  in  No.  0  is  also  partly  ])ortraye4l  in  such 
Ipin  attitude.  No.  r»  is  not  detinitcly  depi(!ted,  the  horns  being  in 
iuch  relative  position  with  the  body  as  if  the  aninuirs  head  were  turned 

.iround  as  if  it  were  licrking  its  side.     No.  7  is  a  doe,  while  No.  8  is  a 

^%iale,  without  ivny  indication  of  action  being  shown. 

^^  7-^  l^i^i^  Jt  f^   i^  fB^  H^f^ 

12  8  4567  8 

Fijf.  10. 
IIBlin  OK  KEINDEKU. 

In  tig.  11  the  native  artist  has  certaiidy  expressed  an  intimate  acquaint- 
Wice  with  the  habits  of  deer.  The  attitude  of  the  animal  in  Xo.  1 
leems  one  of  careless  interest,  if  it  may  be  so  designate<l,  in  what  the 
iest  of  his  comrades  may  show  more  concern.  No.  2  is  in  the  attitude 
df  rising  from  the  ground,  Avhile  that  in  No. .{  exhibits  a  desire  to  move 
•way  as  if  from  an  enemy.    No.  4  is  shown,  by  the  position  of  the  legs, 


jL^irn'm 


jrf 


Fig.  11. 

HERD  OF  STARTLED  DEEB. 


Fij;.  12. 

HERD  f)F  KTABTI.ED  DEER. 


Jo  exhibit  more  activity  in  hastening  away.    The  tbreshortening  visible 
|n  No.  5  seems  to  place  the  leader  of  the  herd  in  the  attitude  of  a  pro- 
jector, being  on  the  defensive,  and  showing  a  disinclination  to  run 
^way  from  those  over  whom  he  may  have  exercised  the  privileges  or 
Rights  of  a  leader.    In  this  instance,  as  in  the  following  illustration, 
Very  excellent  workmanship  and  artistic  taste  are  exhibited. 
In  the  illustration  shown  in  fig.  12  the  deer  have  congregated 


702 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MITSRI^M,  1H95. 


betriiuHc  of  III)  iilarni,  thoir  IkmuIs  boin^  directiMl  fniwiini  toward  tli» 
beholder,  tlic  tbri'sliorteniii);  bciiij;  admirably  ('\t*<;uted.  Four  aiiinialH 
are  iiidieat«'d.  three  being  so  chmely  plitred  aH  to  make  ideiitineatioii 
ratlier  dilHnilt. 

Tlie  varioiiH  attitialeH  of  reiii<leer  ]>ortniyed  in  fig.  l<t  are  readily 
diHcernibh',  tlie  heads  and  liorns  aiding  in  spe(Mlically  distingnisliing 
the  sexGH,  as  alst*  tlio  varions  degrees  of  interest  nuinifested  at  an 
alarm,  eansed  by  the  nnseen  approaeh  (»f  a  linnter.  The  ilgnre  at  the 
right  end  of  the  illustration  hIiowh  the  native  crawling  up  beliiiid  a 
hilloek  covered  witli  tall  grass  and  weeds,  his  hand  holding  an  arrow 
and  bow  which  he  pushes  forward  before  him.  Several  of  the  aninnils 
are  drawn  foreshortened,  an  attemi>t  in  art  seldom  found  among  the 
aborigines. 

Plate  21,  fig.  8,  is  a  drill  bow,  and  is  from  Kot/e^bue  Sound.  The 
upper  or  convex  side  represents  a  herd  of  thirteen  reindeer  in  various 
attitudes  of  moving  forward  and  grazing.  The  fourth  animal  from  the 
left  end  is  drawn  with  its  head  very  gracefully  elevated  and  looking 
backward,  a  fact  very  unusual  in  an  aboriginal  pictograph.  The 
curves  are  deep  and  heavy  and  cpnte  characteristir  of  the  engravings 
of  natives  of  the  region  from  which  the  specimen  was  obtained. 


^  &JkJf>J-^^  tf^ct^ALk. 


Fltf.  13. 
HERD  CIK  UKINPEER. 


This  illustration  is  from  the  same  bow  of  which  the  reverse  is  shown 
in  idate  l-'2,  tig.  2. 

Plate  21,  fig.  G,  is  also  a  drill  bow  from  Kotzebue  Sound,  and  is 
very  yellow  with  age.  The  figures  portrayed  denote  reindeer.  The 
jieculiarity  of  this  record  is  the  depth  of  the  incisions  forming  the 
characters,  indicating  bold,  strong  work.  The  under  surface  of  the 
bow  also  bears  the  outlines  of  reindeer  (somewhat  larger  than  those 
upon  the  opposite  side),  which  are  drawn  with  great  fidelity  to  specific 
features,  with  the  exception  of  the  shape  of  the  body.  The  peculiari 
ties  of  tlie  horns  are  carefully  noted  by  the  artist,  and  the  various 
attitudes  are  exceedingly  natural. 

]*late  22,  fig.  2,  represents  a  drill  bow  also  from  Kot/ebue  Sound, 
measuring  14  inches  in  length  along  the  convex  surface.  The  reconl 
portrays  thirteen  reindeer  and  three  animals  whi(!h  may  belong  to  tin' 
same  species,  although  because  of  their  shorter  necks  and  st<mt(M 
bodies  identiflcation  is  uncertain.  The  herd  seems  to  be  moving  for 
ward,  some  of  them  engaged  in  browsing,  and  some  attempt  appears 
to  be  made  at  perspective.  The  three  short  lines  at  the  upper  right 
hand  side  of  the  bow  immediately  above  and  in  front  of  the  riglithaini 
figures  of  the  deer  are  the  outlines  of  three  otter.    All  of  these 


unl  towanl  the 

Kittir  iininialH 

:c  iduiitincatioii 

V.i  ani  readily 
'  (listin^MiiHliiiif; 
aiiit'oHtiMl  at  ail 
'lie  Hifuie  at  the 
II {i^  up  behind  a 
iildiuK  an  arrow 
1  of  thv  aninialH 
>nnd  anioni;  the 

lie  Sound.  The 
iidecr  in  varitnis 
animal  from  the 
ted  and  looking 
lictojjraph.  The 
■  the  engraviugs 
obtained. 


reverse  is  shown 

B  Sound,  and  is 
e  reindeer.  The 
ions  forming  the 
jr  surface  of  the 
iirger  than  those 
idelity  to  specific 
'.  The  peculiari 
and  the  various 


Kot/ebue  Soun«l. 
face.  The  record 
nay  belong  to  tin' 
ecks  and  stouter 
to  be  moving  foi 
attempt  appears 
;  the  upper  right 
of  the  righthaiiil 
er.    All  of  these 


1    •*  I 


I  i 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    21 

I  1 
J? 
8 
4 
5 
6 


Fijj.  1.  I{a(;  Handle. 

(Cat.Xo.48r.31,  I'.  S.N.  M.. 
I'i^.  2.  Duii.i,  How. 

(Ciit.  No.  48521,  tl.  S.  X.  M.i 

Fif?.  :i.  Bag  Haxdi.k. 

(Cat.  No.  48528,  T7.  S.  N.  M.) 

Fijr.  1.  1{a(J  Haxdi.k. 

(Cat.  No.  48,529,  I'.S.  N.  M.) 

Fij(.  ;■).  Duii,i,  J{o\v. 

(Cat.  No. 48.520,  V.  S.  N.  M.) 
Fijf.  t).  I5AC.  Hanoi. i:. 

(Cit.  No.  485:ii),  r,  S.  N.  M.) 
All  from  Kol/.i'lmt'  Sound.     Collccfpd  liv  K.  W.  Nelson. 


?-:  , 


I  i 


flit 


HI 


!r 


Report  of  U    S    National  Museum,   1 895— Hoffman. 


Plate  21, 


OQ 


01 


O 


¥ 


^...^; 


PXVPVWVWiW*" 


n 


'-J 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    22, 


1 
2 
3 
4 
5 


I'iu.   1.     r>A(i    llANDIK. 

(Ciit.  No,  isnin.r.s.  x.M.) 

Fi;;.  2.   HA<i   IFandi-K. 

(Ciit.  Xo.^ls.VJK.  T.  S.  N".M.)  - 

Fiii.  :!.  Duii.i,  How. 

(I'm.  No.  is.vj:>,  r.s.  N.  M.) 

.Ml  tVoii;  KotzpliMP  Souml.     ('oUcctfil  Uy  K.  \\'.  .Nrlsoii. 

FiJ,^    I.    l{A(i    llAMH.K. 

((,'at.  No.  S1M24,  r.  S.  N.  M.     I'oiiit  liiirrow.     ColliMtrd  liy  I.itiit.  P.  II. Kay,  f.S.A.) 

Fin.  •"•   IMfii.r,  I'mw  . 

((;iit.  No.  inriJl,  r.  S.  N.  M.     Kot/tOum  Sound.     Collcilcil  liy  ]•',.  \V.  Nclnon.) 


I 


Report  of   U    S   Nafiona'  Museum,   1 895— Hoffman. 


Plate  22. 


11.  Kav.  r.S.  A.) 


r.  Ni'lmiii.) 


-I 
Q 

Z 
< 

I 

o 
< 

CO 

o 
z 
< 

en 

o 

GO 


Q 


> 

IT 
< 

o 


I 


'  ! 


V    ■ 


I  I 


li! 


Report  of  U.  S.  National  Museum,  1895.— Hoffman. 


Plate  23. 


!     I 


'    I 


'I  III 


I 


Utensils  of  Bone  and  Horn. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    23, 


y'lii.  1.  Ill  I  1,  iDij  Si.NKW  vnn  SvAi.i,  Nkis. 

I'll.  No.  |:;:,'j:i,  r.S.  N.M.     (;iip»'  Viincoiivi'i-.   .(  iillei  tcil  \>\   Iv  W.  NcIhoii.) 

Fi.i;. 'J.  I'him.  Skin  10  SiHTTi.r.. 

'  .11.  \n.  mis,  r.  S.  N'.  M.      (jiip.'  Nnliir.      (".illf.'M-cl  liy  I',.  W.  N.'l.sdii.) 

Fiu.  ::.  <.i;.\>>  (Omi!  ok   lioM-.. 

'    il.  Nil.  I.^:)!!,  r.  S.  N.  M.      Kiilzchiii' Si.iiiiil.     <;i.llc  end  l.y  !•:.  W,  Ni'l.soli.) 
I'i;:.    I.     I'lSIIINi;    ImIM.KMKN T. 

■I'lil.  Nu.  :;>)J7ti,  r.S.  N.  M.     I.nw.T  Viikiiii.     (iillccti.l  l.y  K.  W.  N.-lsim.) 


._l 

'■'  ^ 

1 


k    H     i: 


I  w  |.  m 


I 


Report  1)1  U    S.  National  Muwum,  IBS')      Hnffman. 


Plate  24. 


z 

o 

o 

CQ 

a 

z 
< 

i 

O 
OQ 

> 

o 
_> 

a 

> 
a: 
< 
O 


s 


F.  XPLANATION     O^    PLATE    24. 


OQ 


In.li.;.  I5<>\V, 


il.  N(i.  ItL'ii'.i.  r.  S   N.  M      I  ■,,!,.■  |),nli.\  .     ('.ili.Tiiil  li\   i:   W.  \c1niim.) 


I  )i:ii  I,  I'luw  . 


-u:;!.  r..-.  N.M.    SI. 


Uhiiiil. 


l)i:iM.  r.ow, 


(r.,i    No.  r'.i'il.  r,  >.  N.  \l.     NiiliiiinMiiliiiuiilMK.     (' 


■i.ii  i.\  i:  w.  \,  N.i 


I.   I>!:ii  I,  lidW. 


M'.it.  \i).  I  lltiC.  C.  S    N.M.      fiHirNMin 


.').     IldDKlN. 
(fill.  N. 
'li;.  <p.    I!()li!vl\. 


7H,  I' 


N..\l.      N.irl..M 


(lill.rlril  l.\   i:.  W.  \, 


iiiii.     r,,;i|..>i.',l  ti\   K,  \V.  Ni 


(Uiit.  Nil.  :i;il7T,  r.  ■^.  N.  .M.     .V'  ric.n  Suiiinl.     Culli'i  ii'l  l>y  1'.  W.  .Nil.-nn  j 


f 


I 


h  I 


r 

I*    ■ 
r    • 


Report  of  U.  S   National  Museum,  1895— Hoffman. 


Plate  25. 


Boxes  of  Bone  and  Tusk. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    25. 


V\)i.  1.  Ivory  Caskkt. 


(Cat.  No. '.MdOtl.     St.  Michat'ls.     Cdllfctpa  hy  I..  M.  'I'linier.) 


Fi.u.  '2.  S\ri'K  I>i>x. 

1  ("at.  No.  ;!:n'.l".  l'.  .S.  X.  M.     Norton  Sound.     CoUettt'il  by  K.  \V.  Nolsoii.) 
Fig.  3.  Itox   KOK  Ft\<;f.s  Asii. 

(Cat.  Xo.4H,")3S.  r.  S.  X.  M.     Kolzcluif  Soiiiid.     (.'oUeclt'd  l)y  K.  \V.  Nt"I.son.> 


III 


i:i&^i.sMin'i.A.::,.^:,^i:: 


GRAPHIC    ART   OP   THE    ESKIMOS. 


793 


enjfravinjis  are  cluiracteristic  of  tlie  crude  deeply  incised  lines  of  the 
work  ac(;(>inplislicd  by  tlie  Indians  of  Kot/,ebue  Hound  an<l  vicinity. 

Plate  23,  fig.  2,  is  a  bone  seine  shuttle  from  Cape  Xoine.  This  is 
ornamented  with  several  almost  indefinite  lines  at  the  left,  probably 
representing  seals,  while  the  four  conspicuous  characters  represent 
well  engraved  outlines  of  the  reindeer.  The  shading  or  marking  upon 
the  bodies  of  the  animals  is  indicative  of  the  markings  of  color  upon 
the  animal,  and  upon  the  two  middle  figures  this  marking  is  indicated 
by  delicate  vertical  lines  very  artistically  rendered. 

Plate  24,  fig.  4,  represents  a  triangular  drill  bow  obtained  at  Cape 
Nome.  The  specimen  measures  13:^  inches  in  length.  The  thirteen 
figures  at  the  left  rei)resent  walruses,  two  of  them  heading  toward  a 
kaiak  occupied  by  a  single  hunter  who  appears  to  be  chased  by  a 
walrus  coming  from  the  opposite  direction,  as  if  it  had  been  pursued 
and  probably  angered  by  the  five  hunters  shown  in  the  umiak  immedi- 
jitely  to  the  right  of  it.  The  native  in  the  stern  end  of  this  umiak  has 
successfully  harpooned  a  walrus,  as  is  indicated  by  the  delicate  /ig/ag 
line  connecting  his  hand  with  the  harpoon  which  is  securely  embedded 
in  the  breast  of  the  animal.  Now,  turning  the  bow  upside  down,  there 
will  be  seen  two  walruses  being  towed  along  by  an  umiak  occupied  by 
five  hunters.  Immediately  to  the  left  of  this  umiak 
is  another  boat  of  similar  construction  which  has  just 
been  pulled  on  shore,  as  the  position  of  the  boat  indi- 
cates, as  well  as  the  attitude  of  the  six  natives  walk- 
ing along  toward  the  left,  each  with  something  in  his 
hands,  which  has  evidently  been  taken  from  the  boat, 
and  which  has  been  captured  or  secured  on  the  hunt, 
six  figures  indicate  habitations.  Again  reversing  the  bow  to  the  origi- 
nal position,  opposite  to  the  beached  umiak  is  a  walrus  which  has  been 
captured  by  the  hunters  in  the  umiak  proceeding  toward  the  right  and 
toward  another  walrus  which  is  there  shown.  The  remaining  six  fig- 
ures indicate  habitations  and  storehouses,  while  between  the  former 
are  shown  human  figures  in  various  attitudes  as  if  occupied  inditt'erent 
tasks.  The  under  sides  of  the  bow  bear  hunting  records,  numbers  of 
which  will  be  shown  in  other  connections. 

On  plate  25.  fig.  3,  is  shown  a  box  for  fungus  ash.  This  appears  to 
be  made  of  a  piece  of  bone,  is  \ery  crude,  and  bears  about  the  nuddle 
a  row  of  five  figures,  the  larger  one  representing  a  whale,  the  next  a 
reindeer,  while  the  three  smaller  ones  appear  to  be  animals  of  the  same 
species. 

Fig.  14  probably  denotes  one  of  the  water  birds,  though  why  it  fig- 
ures on  the  ivory  drill  bow  without  any  other  characters,  in  context,  it 
is  impossible  to  say.  The  attempt  at  engraving  a  record  nuiy  have 
been  abandoned. 

The  two  characters  shown  in  fig.  15,  are  without  doubt  deer,  as  no 
other  species  of  the  family  is  found  in  Alaska  in  which  the  tangs  of 
the  horns  project  from  the  posterior  ridge  of  the  main  branch.    In  the 


Fig.  14. 

FLYINO  niRD. 

The  remaining 


794 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


i 


iifll 


Via.  15. 

HBINDBKU. 


Fig.  16. 

KEINUKEK. 


Fig.  17. 

REINDEKIl. 


elk,  wliidi  is  not  found  ho  far  nortli,  tlie  tangs  project  from  the  ante- 
rior ridge,  while  in  the  reindeer  tlie  liorn  is  specifically  bent  forwanl 

at  the  middle,  and  tlie 
anterior  prong,  or  "snow 
shovel,''  is  also  usually 
indicated. 

The  accompanying  il- 
lustration of  the  rein- 
deer, tig.  1(),  is  <!arefully 
drawn  to  Indicate  the  peculiarity  of  the  curved  horns.  It  is  rather  too 
short  in  the  limbs  in  comparison  to  the  size  of  the  body,  and  although 
the  work  is  tolerably  good,  comparison  with 
other  illustraticms  will  be  found  to  be  of  interest. 

Fig.  17  is  a  variant  of  the 
proceeding,  and  much  better 
in  both  resemblance  to  the 
animal    it    is    intended  to 

represent  as  Avell  as  in  an  artistic  ]>oint  of  view. 
The  accompanying  figures  illustrate  the  various 
typical  forms  of  the  same  animal  as  drawn  by  the 
natives  of  various  parts  of  the  west  coast  of  Alaska.  Fig.  IS  leiu'e- 
sents  some  etchings  from  a  sijecimen  obtained  in  Point  Barrow,  though 
the  style  of  en- 
graving is  not 
very  nnich  like 
that  of  those 
people. 

Tliisa])pear8 
to  be  one  of 
the  few  groups 
in   whicli    the 

horns  are  so  unusually  high  and  in  which  each  animal  has  but  two 
legs,  one  at  ea(!h  end  of  the  body. 
A  specimen  of  the  reindeer  shown  in  fig.  19  is  from  a  fragment  of  a 

Ixme  obtained  at  Nor- 
ton Sound.  Although 
the    interior    decora- 
tion consists  of  (TOSS 
lines,  these  are  diago- 
nal instead  of  at  right 
angles,  as  before.     A 
great  difference  in  the 
art  work    is  visible. 
The  reindeer  is  followed  by  a  wolf.     Two  interesting  specimens  are 
reproduced  from  specimen  from  Kotzebue  Sound.    The  character  shown 
in  fig.  20  is  heavy  in  outline,  in  having  a  stout  body,  over  which  the 


Fig.  18. 

RKINDEF.It. 


"^ 


Fig.  19. 

BBIKDBER  mtSUEU  BT  WOLF. 


tlie  aiito- 
t  for\vsir«l 
aiul  the 
,  or  "snow 
I)  usually 

luyiiig  li- 
the rein- 
eare  fully 
atlier  too 
although 


of  view. 
e  various 
rn  by  the 

18  repre- 
,v,  though 


5  but  two 


newt  of  a 
Btl  at  Xor- 
Although 
r   decora- 

s  of  <'r088 

are  diago- 
jf  at  right 
efore.  A 
Mice  in  the 
is  visible, 
iuiens  are 
iter  shown 
which  the 


■  m! 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    26. 


1 


Via.  1.  Ska  I,  Drag. 

Kal.Xo.  i:j92l>7.  r.  S.X.  M.     St.  Mi<liii.'lH     (clh.ctcil  l.v  L.  M.  Tuni.T.) 
I'ij;.  -J.   ILwDi.K  1(11!  Kanta*;. 

Hiil.Xc..;!i;;i75,  r.  S.  X.M.     Lower  Vukon.     Collected  hy  K.  \V.  X.lsoii.) 
I'iu.  :{.  Skai.  Dha.i.     Miido  to  represent  two  seal  heads,  iipou  the  throat  heiiii;  ellljry 
of  whale,  jtartly  detached. 

((•Mt.Xo.:i;m0.i,  r.S.  X.  M.     St.  Mi.hael.s  Islaiul.     Collict..,!  UyK.  \V.Ncl.soii., 


Report  of  U    S   Natinnil  Museum,  I  895. -Hoffnnan 


Plate  26. 


m 


I 


Seal  Drags  and  Bag  Handle. 


QRAPHIC!    ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


795 


FIr.  20. 
KKINDKEIt,    KoT/.KItl'K  HOUND. 


Fij?.  21. 
KKINDKBII,    KOT/.EBCK  SOtl.ND. 


Fig.  22. 
KEINDEElt. 


"'-'vIL"'    ■-!'J 


JL 


tlio  etching  uxt«M)(lH  almost  entirely,  while  in  fij;.  21  the  body  of  u  simi- 
lar iuiiinal  from  the  same  locality  has  hut  a  lew  cross  lincH.    The  horus 
are  very  well  represented  within  outline  and 
{general  curvature. 

An  interestiu};  pair  of  animals  is  shown 
in  tiff.  22,  the  foreshortening  being  admir- 
ably drawn,  while  at  the  same  time  nuiintain- 

in}»  the  typical  spe- 
cific features  which 
are  visible  in  all 
other   native  drawings  of  the   reind«'er. 

Plate  20,  fig.   1,  represents   a  seal   drag 
from  kSt.  Michaels,     l^^pon  the  upper  portion 
of  the    ivory  utensil   are  neat  outlines  of 
wolves,    made    with 
considerable    delica- 
cy.    The  ornamental  lines  upon    which  they 
stand  and  those  encircling  the  ends  of  the  or- 
nament are  a  sort  of  meander  or  crude  zigzag, 

of  which  a  description  is 

given  elsewhere  in  connection  with  decoration, 
Plate  14,  fig.  1,  represents  a  fragment  of  bone 
from  Norton  Sound,  upon  which  is  a  rude  etching 
of  a  reindeer  approaching  a  wolf,  the  latter  in  an 
inverted  position.  At  tlie  right  hand 
is  a  i)erforation,  about  whicli  is  a  rude  cin^le  ornamented 
with  four  radiating  lines.  Peneath  this  circle  are  two  par- 
allel curved  lines  with  inner  radiating  lines,  resulting  iu  a 
very  crude  meander  pattern. 

The  illustration  of  a  wolf  (flg.  23)  shows  the  fangs  iu 
9^  the  partly  open  mouth,  the  stift"  ears,  and  long  bushy  tail. 

'^TV        The  markings  uixm  the  body  may  be  simply  in  imitation 
/\  of  the  etchings  found  upon  most  outline  or  solid  figures, 

/    \         though  they  greatly  suggest  the  brindled  fur  of 
Fig.  25.        t^>®  Canis  occidentalis  Dekay. 
HUMAN  FORM.        Tlio  porcupiue  is  quite  common  in  some  of  the 
southern  i)ortionsof  Alaska,  and  tig.  24  represents 
one  of  these  animals,  the  spines  of  which  are  used  in  decora- 
tive work. 

The  engraving  seems  to  have  been  made  with  a  very  sharp 
tool,  as  the  outlines  are  groups  of  thin  parallel  hair  lines. 

The  selected  character  reproduced  iu  tig.  25  is  so  unusual 
in  general  form,  as  found  upon  ivory  or  other  engravings  of 
the  Eskimo,  that  its  presentation  here  is  of  interest  for  purposes 
of  comparison  with  the  pictographs  of  other  peoples,  e8i)ecially  the 
petroglyphs  of  the  western  and  southwestern,  or  Pacific  Coast  States, 


Fig.  23. 
WOLF. 


Fig.  24. 
POItCl'I'INE. 


Fig.  20. 

TWO  MEN 
IN  CLOSE 
EM  II  RACE. 


im 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUREUM,  1895. 


cinbrticiiig  tlie  area  cliieily  occupied  by  triboH  of  the  Hhoslioniaii  lin- 
guistic fiiuiily. 

Two  tl^nrcH  shown  in  <;h)so  embrace,  as  in  11^.  L'(l,  may  also  denote 
combat,  as  wcH  as  the  ceremonial  of  the  shaman,  in  which  the  demon 
causing  the  illness  is  sh(»wn  near  the  body  of  the  sick  person  from 
which  it  iH  expelled. 

The  ^roup  of  lij^ures  of  the  human  form  {i\g.  27)  are  selet^ted  from  u 
number  of  en};ravin}>:s  on  ivory  bows,  chietly  from  siuithern  Alaska. 

No.  I  is  a  form  frequently  occurring  in  Kiate'xamut  Eskimo  picto- 
graphs  on  wood,  as  when  drawn  uitou  slabs  of  shingle  or  other  smooth 

1       :'         ;i  4  5  0  7  8 

Fig.  27. 

VAPIKNTS  OK  TIIK  HUMAN  KOIIM. 

surface  to  place  over  the  door  of  the  habitivtion  when  the  owner  'eaves 
for  any  purpose.  It  is  abbreviated,  and  the  result  of  carelessness  or 
perhaps  incompetency  of  the  recorder.  No.  2  is  another  form  of  man 
in  which  only  the  lower  extremities  are  indicated,  while  in  No.  3  the 
arms  are  thrown  out  horizontally  from  the  body  to  denote  the  gesture 
for  negation,  nothing.  No.  4  is  a  headless  body  and  does  not  always 
denote  death,  as  is  the  practice  among  other  pictographers,  notably  so 
the  Djibwa.  No  special  information  was  received  respecting  the  char- 
acter, and  it  is  probable  that  the  head  was  obliterated  by  erosion, 
having  originally  been  drawn.  The  specjimen  was  copied  from  an  ivory 
utensil  in  the  collection  of  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company  in  San 
Francisco,  California,  and  was  obtained  from  the  Aiqalu'xamut  lOskimo. 


';'V 


li^ 


Fin.  28. 

VAIIKH'S  KdliMS   OK   VESSKI.a. 


The  character  m  No.  5  denotes  a  canoe,  or  kaiak,  with  two  persons 
within  it,  while  the  two  paddles  project  beneath.  The  right-hand 
upward  stroke  of  the  boat  represents  the  bow  of  the  vessel.  Nos.  G 
and  7,  from  Cape  Nome,  Alaska,  are  variants  of  the  human  form  with 
arms  loosely  extended,  and  form  in  No.  8,  having  fringe  suspended 
from  the  sleeves,  probably  a  shaman,  and  very  similar  to  the  Ojibwa 
designation  of  the  Thunder  bird,  one  of  the  divinities  of  the  western 
Algonkian  tribes.  The  figure  (No,  8)  was  copied  from  an  ivory  drill 
bow  obtained  at  Port  Clarence,  Alaska,  by  Doctor  T.  11.  Bean,  formerly 
of  the  United  States  National  Museum. 


Ionian  liii 

lIho  (lunotu 
tliu  demon 
M'son  t'roMi 

tvA  from  a 
AIuHkii. 
:imo  picto- 
lur  BiuootU 


rtjTrv 


nior  eaves 
Ies8ness  or 
rm  of  man 

No.  3  tlie 
the  },'e8ture 
not  always 

notably  so 
g  the  char- 
yy  erosion, 
m  an  ivory 
my  ill  San 
Lit  ]<iSkinio. 


vo  persons 
{ght-hand 
1.  Nos.  C 
form  with 
suspended 
le  Ojibwa 
le  western 
ivory  drill 
,  formerly 


Report  of  U    S    N*t'nt,,il  M„,..i,m,   184')       MoffnrMin. 


Plate  27. 


V 


I 


*t,' 


< 
<n 


< 

)£ 

u. 
o 

-J 

Ui 

o 
o 

UJ 

> 

I- 
< 
Z 


■liT^' 


mttneminmammmm 


■   i 


Report  of  U    S.  Natienal  Mustum,  1  895  —Hoffman 


Plate  28. 


■     i 


< 

ay 

< 


< 

u. 

O 

_] 
uj 
o 
o 

UJ 

> 

I- 
< 

Z 


Plate  28. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


797 


< 
< 


< 

O 

-1 

UJ 

Q 

O 

UJ 

> 

I- 
< 

Z 


Fig.  29. 

WHALING  SHIPS  NEAR   A  IMNE-COVEnED  SIIOHE. 


Tho  portrayal  by  the  native  artist  of  boats,  both  the  kaiak  and  the 
umiak,  is  (»f  sncli  frequent  occurrence  in  the  Alaskan  etchings  and  toy 
ciuvings  that  tho  photographic  reproduction  of  native-made  models 
may  be  deemed  of  special  interest.  Plate  27  represents  a  kaiak,  while 
the  illustration  shown 
in  ]»late  28 represents  an 
umiak  with  raised  sail. 
Comparisons  with 
etchings  are  suggested, 
as  numerous  examples 
of  the  former  occur  in 

abundance,  and  will  be  referred  to  elsewhere  and  in  another  connection. 

Fig.  2S  represents  four  vessels  rigged  up  with  sails,  the  one  at  the 

extreme  left  being  manned  by  Americans  or  mixed  bloods,  distinguished 

by  the  presence  of  hats  upon  their  heads.    The  hulls  of  the  second, 

third,  and  right-hand  figures  are  in  imitation  of 
the  native  made  vessel  of  that  size,  which  is 
adapted  to  the  erection  of  masts  and  small  sails. 
The  artist  has  evidently  intended  to  represent 
the  different  varieties  used  by  him  or  his  family. 
^^s-30.  f,i  fig  29  are  represented  two  vessels,  umler 

scnooNEH.  ^j^jj  g^^ji^  within  reasonable  distance  from  shore, 

as  is  indicated  by  the  presence  of  two  pines  which  loom  up  in  the  mid- 
dle distance.  No  special  motive  appears  to  have  pnnnpted  the  delinea- 
tion of  the  ships,  excepting  perhaps  the  record  of  an  unusual  event 
in  the  history  of  the  locality  where  it  is  supposed  to  have  occurred. 

The  portrayal  of  a  schooner  (fig.  30) 
is  perhaps  only  the  result  of  "having 
nothing  better  to  do,"  as  loungers  often 
whittle  or  engrave  figures  or  outlines 
of  such  things  that  create  passing  in- 
terest.    It  is  i)robable  too  that  some- 
thing of  greater  intt^est  may  have  been 
connected  with  the  arrival  of  a  vessel  from  civilization.    This,  however, 
could  only  be  cleared  up  by  the  artist  himself  or  the  person  for  whom  it 
may  have  been  drawn. 
In  like  manner,  the  illustration  shown  in   fig.  .5 1  may  have   been 

engraved  because  of  some 
event  of  consecpience  con- 
__  nected  therewith,  or  perhaps 
because  of  the  i)eculiar  ap- 
pearance in  the  Alaska  waters 
of  a  vessel  with  but  one  wheel,  and  that  at  the  stern.  Such  vessels  are 
<'ommonon  inland  waters  of  the  United  States,  but  their  seldom  occur- 
rence so  far  north  may  have  been  deemed  of  sufficient  importance  of 
which  to  make  a  permanent  record. 


Fig.  31. 

STERN-WHEEL  STEAMBOAT. 


ftiiiiuiiiiiiiiiHi  -^ 


Fig.  32. 

UMIAK. 


798 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


A  (Tiido  or  nnliiiishe«l  uiniiik  with  four  occu]>ants  is  sliown  in  i\g.  32. 
The  bodies  are  not  indicated;  tbe  heads,  arms,  and  oars  being  in<*ised. 
The  umiak  itself  is  well  drawn,  but  with  mast  or  rigging  erected. 

Further  reference  to  vessels,  both  as  to  pictographic  variants  and  in 
relation  to  (!onveyance  by  this  means,  will  be  made  farther  on  in  con- 
nection with  conveyance  and  domestic  avocations. 

IlEl'RESENTATION   BY   SYNECDOOHE. 

The  representation  of  i>art  of  an  object  to  rei)resent  the  whole,  or  vice 
versa,  is  not  so  common  in  the  etchings  of  the  Eskimo  as  in  the  picto- 
gra]»lis  of  the  Indians. 

In  many  instances  in  the  ornamented  ivory  records,  parts  of  animal 
or  other  forms  are  portrayed  in  this  manner,  and  such  abbreviated 
characters  are  subse(|uently  utilized  and  arranged  in  such  order  so  as 
to  serve  the  pur])()se  of  simple  ornamentation,  the  i>rimary  object  or 
concept  having  but  little  if  any  further  connection  in  its  new  position. 

Mr.  L.  M.  Turner '  informs  me  that  ''  the  marginal  engravures, 
resendiliug  the  tail  of  a  whale,  are  intended  to  represent  the  number 
of  whit(^  whales  \ DclpliintipterKs  nifodon  (Linna'us)  (Hll.]  the  owner  (or 
maker)  of  the  ivory  article  has  personally  killed  or  taken  in  a  net. 


"] 
1 


St 

■    i 


l^fetMir^. 


Fig.  33. 

KSKIMO  nUNTKU  AND  IIKIil)  OK   liKINDEF.R. 


There  are,  sometimes,  partnershii)  pursuits  of  these  whales  (as  well  as 
other  creatures),  and  by  mutual  agreement  the  quarry  falls  to  him  who 
first  struck,  killed,  or  otherwise  would  have  secured  the  whales." 

The  spears  which  are  i>ortrayed  upon  some  of  the  engravings  of 
natives  in  kaiaks  are  placed  so  as  to  be  upon  a  rest,  similar  to  that 
shown  in  plate  130,  in  order  that  they  may  be  (piickly  grasped  tor  use. 
These  rests  are  made  of  ivory,  and  in  many  instances  are  decorated. 
The  specinu'u  herewith  reprodut'cd  is  from  Point  IJarrow,  where  it  was 
obtained  by  Lieutenant  P.  II.  Hay,  tJ.  S.  A.,  and  by  him  sent  to  the 
National  Museum. 

The  entire  length  of  the  specimen  is  S|  inches,  the  distance  atToss 
the  horns  being  4|;  inches,  and  across  the  base,  just  beneath  the  figures 
of  the  whales'  tails,  L*^  inches. 

The  tails  denote  the  owner  to  have  been  a  whale  hunter.  The  top  of 
the  horns  is  fashioned  in  imitation  of  a  whale's  head,  the  long-curved 
mouth  being  carefully  indicated,  wliile  blue  beads  are  inserted  to  indi- 
cate the  eyes.  Upon  the  outer  edge  of  each  horn,  c<nresponding  to 
the  back  of  the  whale,  is  a  cross,  in  the  middle  of  which  is  a  blue 
bead.    The  four  loo])s  of  thong  are  for  attachment  to  the  boat. 


'  Letter  datetl  I'«;bniiiry  25, 1895. 


Report  of  U.  S   National  Museum,  1  895.    -Hoffman 


Plate  29. 


wii  in  i\f;.  r?2. 
K'ing  incised, 
iiected. 
riants  and  in 
er  on  in  con- 


ivhole,  or  vice 
in  the  picto- 

rts  of  animal 
abbreviated 
ih  order  so  as 
ary  object  or 
new  position, 
engravnres, 
;  the  number 
the  owner  (or 
len  in  a  net. 


Bs  (as  well  as 

to  liim  wlio 
hales." 

gravinji's  of 
uilar  to  that 

)ed  for  use. 
'e  decorated, 
where  it  was 

sent  to  the 

tance  across 
1  the  ligures 

The  top  of 
long-curved 
;rted  to  indi- 
sponding  to 
!h  is  a  blue 
)oat. 


't^K 


Speah  Rest.    Point  Barrow. 


't 


I 


K' 


■A 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP  THE   ESKIMOS. 


799 


Tn  the  illustration  shown  in  figure  33,  the  i<le.a  of  many  and  much  is 
expressed  in  the  same  line  of  thought  or  conception  as  in  gesture  lan- 
guage. The  herd  of  animals,  instead  of  being  indicated  by  drawing 
the  bodies  of  those  in  the  foreground  singly  and  complete,  and  only 
])arts  of  tliose  beyond  being  perceivable  to  the  beholder,  is  represented, 
with  one  individual  exception,  by  a  single  figure  of  a  long  body,  the 
thirteen  heads  being  subsequently  placed  at  proper  intervals  above  it, 
while  a  certain,  though  deficient,  number  of  legs  and  feet  are  drawn 
beneath  and  extending  to  tlie  ground.  These  are  all  drawn  as  if  escap- 
ing from  the  hunter. 

At  the  extreme  end  of  the  engraving  is  the  representation  of  a 
hunter,  armed  with  bow,  and  indications  of  arrows.  Parts  of  the  figure 
have  become  obliterated  by  frequent  use  of  tlie  ivory  drill  bow.  The 
deer  next  to  the  hunter  docs  not  face  in  an  opposite  direction,  as  if 
escaping,  but  is  drawn  with  the  head  lowered  and  directed  toward  him. 
Tiie  attitude  has  perhaps  no  special  signification,  further  than  that 
this  deer  was  secured  by  being  shot  with  an  arrow,  whereas  the 
remainder  of  the  herd  which  the  hunter  saw  escaped.  Compare  also 
figure  of  herds  in  plate  05,  fig.  4. 

Plate  -1,  fig.  3,  represents  the  convex  side  of  a  drill  bow,  on  the  right 
half  of  which  are  thirty  transverse  figures  representing  that  number 
of  wolf  pelts.  To  the  right  is  one  otter  skin  and  the  outlines  of  ten 
bearskins.  As  will  be  observed,  these  figures  are  deeply  cut  and  rather 
conventionalized.  The  great  amount  of  coloring  matter  and  deep  inci- 
sions represent  the  bold,  strong  work,  characteristic  of  the  natives  of 
Kot/.ebue  Sound.  The  lateral  edges  are  ornamented  with  parallel 
h)ngitu(linal  lines. 

The  regular  order  of  the  outline  of  pelts  and  hides  is  perhaps  not  only 
illustrative^  of  the  great  number  of  animals  killed,  but  the  regularity  and 
repetition  of  specific  i)arts  of  the  animal's  body,  and  the  concavity  of 
tlie  sides  of  the  bears'  skins,  is  a  tendency  toward  conventionalizing. 
( )n  the  whole,  the  record  is  a  good  illustration  of  synecdoche. 

As  there  will  be  occasion  to  refer  to  another  curious  subject  in  pictog- 
raphy— the  transmission  of  special  characters,  or  the  utilization  of 
native  symbolic  characters  to  serve  as  substitutes  to  replace  imported 
or  intrusive  forms — it  may  not  be  amiss  to  refer  in  this  connection 
to  the  interesting  result  noted  in  Hritish  coins,  in  which  the  native 
Britons  copied  the  obverse  and  reverse  engravings  which  they  found 
upon  tlu?  gold  stater  of  Philip  of  Macedon.  The  coins  were  introduced 
into  the  country  of  the  littoral  tribes  through  traflfic  with  the  Gauls, 
while  the  latter  obtained  possession  of  them  after  Greece  was  plundered 
by  Brennus,  B.  C.  279. 

The  reverse  of  the  typical  stater  bears  a  charioteer  in  a  biga,  the 
two  horses  in  the  attitude  of  running,  while  behind  is  the  outline  of  a 
wheel,  usually  elliptical,  as  the  space  was  not  sufficiently  large  to  permit 
a  circle  as  large  as  the  extreme  length  of  the  ellipse  to  be  recorded. 


m 


V 

! 

! 

■ 

1 

! 

1 

1 

1 

in 

■ 

^IH> 

■W*vBHff$ 

800 


REPORT   OP    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  18!)r>. 


The  Britons  in  adopting  the  design  for  tlieir  native  coins,  and  being 
perliaps — I  may  suggest  the  word  certainly — unacquainted  witli  the 
form,  or  use,  of  the  chariot,  and  the  signification  of  other  characters 
and  figures  found  upon  the  (ireek  prototype,  rei)roduced  in  their  sui;- 
cessive  issues  and  recoiniugs  variations  in  these  foreign  cliaracters,  or 
replaced  them  by  symbols  with  which  they  were  acciuainted  and  of 
which  they  comprehended  the  signification. 

In  many  of  the  British  coins  the  horses  are  reduced  to  a  single 
animal,  though  with  legs  sufficient  for  two,  clearly  representing  the 
pair  by  synecdoche,  exactly  as  our  North  American  Indian  does  in  his 
records  of  personal  or  tribal  engagements  with  the  enemy. 

Illustrations  relating  to  this  peculiarity  on  the  coins  named,  together 
with  the  substitution  of  native  and  familiar  characters  and  symbols 
for  those  of  foreign  and  unknown  types,  will  be  presented  farther  on.' 

DECORATION  AND  ORNAMENTATION. 

The  importation  into  Alaska  and  the  adoption  by  the  natives  of  art 
designs  which  are  foreign  to  their  own  does  not  appear  at  all  impossibh', 
and  the  subject  is  one  which  would  seem  to  oft'er  an  interesting  lield  for 
investigation  with  a  reasonable  hope  of  interesting  developments. 

With  respect  to  the  probability  of  the  transmission  of  such  art  work, 
Mr.  Hadden,-  whom  I  have  before  <pioted,  remarks: 

As  decorated  objects  must  be  conveyed  by  man,  the  means  for  their  dispersal  and 
the  barriers  which  militate  against  it  are  the  same  as  those  wliich  operate  on  liuinan 
migrations;  but  there  is  one  difl'erence.  Whore  men  go  we  may  assume  that  they 
carry  their  artistic  eft'orts  and  proclivities  with  them,  bnt  decorated  objects  may  be 
carried  farther  than  the  actual  distance  covered  by  the  manufacturer,  or  even  than 
the  recognized  middleman  or  trader. 

This  brings  us  to  a  very  important  subject,  and  that  is  the  question  of  trade  routes. 
Trade  routes  are  culture  routes;  an<l  in  order  to  appreciate  the  history  of  culture,  it 
is  necessary  to  know  the  directions  in  which  it  (lowed.  Until  wo  have  a  more  com- 
jdete  knowledge  of  the  ancient  trade  routes  of  Europe,  we  can  not  recover  the  history 
of  the  prehistoric  Europe. 

This  subject  is  now  beginning  to  receive  groat  attention  in  the  Old 
World,  and  some  highly  interesting  and  valuable  facts  have  been 
brought  to  light. 

In  North  America  the  study  of  prehistoric  trade  routes,  or  culture 
routes,  has  thus  far  received  but  a  limited  amount  of  <*areful  attention; 
but  some  instances  of  curious  results  of  intertribal  traiiic  have  been 
observed.  Frequently  designs  of  a  specific  character,  such  as  may  be 
termed  peculiar  to  a  special  tribe,  are  carried  to  remote  localities  and 
there  adopted  by  other  tribes  of  an  entirely  difl'erent  linguistic  family, 
whereas  the  same  design  or  pattern  of  the  former  may  not  produce  the 
slightest  apparent  effect  upon  the  recognized  art  designs  or  ornamenta- 


'Sitecial  attention  is  called  to  the  Avork  of  Doctor  .Tohn  Evans,  D.  C.  L.  The  Coins 
of  the  Ancient  Britons,  London:  1864-1890.  Platea  A-N.,  and  i-xxiii,  together  with 
figures  in  text.     Map. 

'^Evolution  in  Art,  p.  328. 


*  , 


GRAPHIC   AKT   OP   THE   ESKIMOS. 


801 


,  and  being 
hI  with  the 
'  clisiiju'ters 
n  their  siu;- 
arficteis,  or 
ited  and  of 

to  a  single 

senting  tlie 

does  in  his 

3d, together 
lid  symbols 
farther  on.' 


itives  of  art 

iinpossibh', 

iug  hehl  for 

ments. 

!h  art  work, 

(lispersal  iind 
ite  on  Iniinun 
[lie  that  they 
tjects  may  be 
or  even  than 

trade  routes. 

of  cultiiro,  it 

a  more  com- 

sr  the  history 

ill  the  Ohl 
lave  been 

or  culture 
attention; 
lave  been 
Eis  may  be 
lities  aiul 
ic  family, 
oduce  the 
namenta- 

The  Coins 
gotherwith 


;*,* 


tion  of  an  adjoining  body  of  peojde  of  a  like  linguistic  family  and  with 
whom  theie  nuiy  be  frequent  social  intercourse.  This  is  accounted  for 
in  the  instances  in  mind  because  of  the  absence  of  like  materials  and 
resources  quite  necessary  for  a  faithful  imitation  of  the  imported  pat- 
tern, the  original  being  fully  recognized  as  a  cult  symbol,  and  any 
alteration  however  slight  would  immediately  provoke  the  anger  of  the 
gods.  Therefore,  a  remote  body  of  people  whose  cult  beliefs  are  ditl'er- 
ent,  and  who  would  i)erhaps  not  recognize  the  sacred  or  mystic  import 
of  a  symbol,  might  readily  and  without  any  hesitation  adopt  such  pat- 
tern as  miglit  suit  one's  fancy  and  subsecpiently  alter  it  to  conform  to 
the  shape  of  the  material  upon  which  it  would  be  imposed  by  incision, 
impressed  in  color,  or  otherwise. 

The  northwest  coast  of  America,  between  I'uget  Sound  and  Kadiak, 
is  an  excellent  illustration  of  a  culture  route,  and  the  arts  of  the  vari- 
ous Selisli  tribes  are  traceable  over  a  wide  area.  The  peculiar  designs  of 
the  llaida,  both  in  sculpture  and  in  tattooing,  have  been  gradually  car- 
ried northward  into  the  territ(uy  of  the  Thlinkits,  the  Kadiak,  and  have 
been  even  recently  adoi)tcd,  to  a  limited  extent,  by  the  Aigalu'vamut 
and  Kiate'xainut  Eskimo  of  southern  Alaska. 

Tlic  original  patterns  of  the  Eskimo,  such  as  the  lines,  dots,  and 
herring-bone  i)atterns,  do  not  seem  to  prevail  against  the  rounded  and 
curved  ligures  and  designs  of  the  Haida  art.  The  origin  of  the  latter 
is  peculiar,  and  the  alleged  develoi)ment,  if  not  the  introducth)n  and 
adoption,  of  t\w.  elaborate  system  of  tattooing  since  about  the  year  1833, 
certainly  otters  an  interesting  field  for  critical  research.' 

The  llaida  i)atterns,  as  has  been  intimated,  are  very  different  in  both 
design  and  concept  as  compared  with  the  artistic  work  of  the  Eskimo, 
iioth  are  ])eculiar  to  the  regions  in  which  they  flourish,  and  no  resem- 
blance whatever  is  apparent.  The  Haida  designs  originate  chietiy  in 
toteinic,  mythologic,  and  cult  forms,  which  have,  in  many  instances, 
become  so  highly  conventionalized  as  to  become  ditticult  of  identifica- 
tion. The  Eskimo  art  embraces  chietiy  an  attempt  at  personal  and 
family  records  of  hunting  exploits,  with  occasional  ceremonials  por- 
trayed in  little  more  than  simple  pictorial  fonn,  but  there  is  present  an 
exliibition  of  the  progress  of  recording  both  gestures  and  signals,  to 
aid  in  the  explanation  of  the  record,  as  well  as  fre<|uent  attemi)t8  at 
the  record  of  subjective  ideas,  a  system  of  jiictography  foreign  to  that 
of  the  Ilalda,  and  more  nearly  ai>proaching  the  petroglyjdis  of  various 
tribes  belonging  to  the  Shoshonian  linguistic  family,  ccmspicuous  among 
which  are  some  of  the  pueblos  of  New  Mexico  and  Arizona;  and  the 
seulpturings  found  in  Owens  Valley,  California,  the  authors  of  which 
ire  unknown  but  are  believed  to  have  been  members  of  the  same  family, 
both  because  of  the  typical  resemblance  of  many  of  the  patterns  and 
the  geographic  location  of  the  sculptured  bowlders. 


See  remarks  on  "Aboriginal  Art  in  (Jalifornia  and  Qneen  Charlotte's  Island," 
W.  J.  Hottnian,  in  Proceedings  Davenport  Academy  of  Sciences,  IV,  1885. 
NAT  MUS  1)5 51 


802 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  WJ'k 


Another  trade  route  of  importance  in  tlii.s connection  is  tliat  siilbidcd 
by  tlie  waters  of  the  Yukon  River.  Kskiino  patterns  have  been  car- 
ried up  into  the  country  of  the  Kenai  Indians,  a  tribe  usually  desi^tuited 
in  the  northwest  as  the  Tenanah,  and  of  the  sanu>  linguistic  relation- 
ship as  the  A|>aehe,  the  Navajo,  and  anion^  many  others  the  llupa 
Indians  of  California.  These  desiji^ns  are  made  u])  of  straight  lines, 
dots,  and  nucleated  circles,  and  occur  upon  strips  ol  bone  with  perfora 
tions  at  one  end,  and  used,  it  is  presumed,  as  necklace  ornaments. 
Similar  ornaments  are  found  also  amon^;  the  Thlinkit,  of  which  illus 
trations  are  given  on  plate  {>. 

Jn  the  National  Museum  is  an  interesting  relic  made  of  horn,  used 
as  acylindrical  box  for  dentalium  shell  nuuiey,  upon  which  arc  incised 
and  blackened  lines  so  arranged  between  two  ]>arallel  longitudinal 
lines  that  the  original  white  surface  of  the  specimen  is  a  serrated  tigiu'c 
and  not  the  ordinary  zigzag,  plate  .'iO.  Although  the  rcs«'mblance  of 
this  to  some  of  the  zigzag  and  meander  patterns  of  the  I']skimo  is  very 
striking,  no  connection  can  be  apparently  traced  between  the  two  ])e(»- 
pies,  even  along  the  supposed  course  of  migration  of  the  Ilupa  toward 
the  coast  at  the  time  of  the  separations  of  the  Apache  or  Athabascan 
tribes,  vivid  traditions  of  which  still  obtain  among  the  Apaches,  and 
linguistic  evi<lence  of  which  is  complete. 

A  well-known  trade  or  culture  route — in  fact,  one  of  the  earliest  to 
intluence  the  crude  arts  of  the  Eskimt> — was  by  way  of  the  lHomedc 
Islands,  when  the  natives  came  in  contact  with  the  t'ossack  outposts  in 
eastern  Siberia.' 

The  tratlic  which  naturally  resulted  brought  among  the  American 
natives  various  articles  of  Hussian  manufacture,  among  wliii-h,  no 
doubt,  were  ikons  aiul  other  Christian  and  ecclesiastical  obje(;ts  and 
prints,  articles  which  are  usually  found  to  be  highly  decorated  in  both 
design  and  color.  Such  objects  would  most  naturally  tend  to  intluence 
the  simple  art  of  a  people  who  were  naturally  given  to  the  ornajucnta- 
tion  of  various  utensils  and  weapons,  as  also  of  arti(!les  of  clothing. 

Through  this  channel  were  obtained,  so  ]\Ir.  IMurdoch  infoiins  me, 
the  Siberian  pii)es  and  seal  nets,  which,  together  with  the  native  labret, 
have  extended  eastward  of  Point  liarrow  to  Cape  IJathurst,  beyond 
which  Ioca)ity,it  is  believed,  neither  are  found.  This  blank  area  between 
Cape  Bathurst  and  the  delta  of  the  Mackenzie  forms  a  barrier,  or  line 
of  demarcation,  beyond  which  the  several  bodies  of  Eskimo  are  artis 
tically  distinct  from  one  another.  In  other  words,  the  three  objects 
named  as  common  to  the  Alaskan  Eskimo  are  totally  absent  east  of  the 
locality  indicated,  as  found  by  Mr.  Murdoch  during  his  residence  at 
the  Point. 

Mr.  Haddon'^  remarks  that  although  decorated  objects  pass  along 

'"There  is  good  reason  to  believe  that  the  Malayans,  the  Dutch  of  Asia,  crossed 
the  Pacific  Ocean  in  the  pursuit  of  coinmerce."  J)\vight.  Travels  in  New  England 
and  New  Yorl<.     New  Haven,  1821.     I,  p.  129. 

''  E volntiou  in  Art,  p.  330. 


is  tliiit  sin'oi'ded 
liiivc  Imm'Ii  car- 
lally  (Icsi^nafcW 
«:iii.sti('  rtiliitioii 
Ikts  tlu^  lliipa 
'  stiaifilit  liiu's, 
10  wirii  peitora- 
iire  oiiiiiiiu'iits. 
,  of  wliicli  illus 

e  of  lioin,  ust'd 
lit'li  jin'  ineisi'd 
t'l  loiiffitudiiml 
seinitt'd  fifiiirc 
rcscinhlaiico  ol' 
I'slvimo  is  very 
Ml  the  two  ])e()- 
«'  1 1 II pa  toward 
or  Atliahascan 
>  Apaclu's,  and 

tlic  carlit'st  to 
f  tlie  DioiiKMlc 
wk  outposts  ill 

the  .ViiH'ricaii 
S  wlii(di,    IK) 

objects  and 
Diated  ill  botb 
d  to  infiiiciice 
le  oriiaiiienta 
•f  clotbing. 

informs  nie, 
native  labret. 
ir.ist,  beyond 
area  between 
iirrier,  or  line 
mo  are  art  is 
three  objects 
lit  east  of  the 
residence  at 

i  pass  alon^ 

1'  Asia,  crossfd 
New  Eiigliiiid 


Report,.!  U,  S.  National  Mustum,  1  BJ5.- H.if(ni»ii. 


Plate  30. 


1 

I 


Bone  Box  for  Shell  Money.    Hupa  Indians. 


r 


iifT 


Mi 

U 


1  !' 

( 

f, 

Si        :  1 
15'      '.p' 

1  ¥■■ 

-^: 

lii^ 


OKAl'HIC    AKT   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


803 


tnuU'  routes  ^muhI  are  disttibuted  Car  and  wide,  it  does  not  alwayn  nee 
essuiily  follow  that  the  urnaiiioiitatioii  itself  is  naturalized.  It  is  poH- 
sible  that  in  many  eases  a  eertain  style  otMeeoration  is  assoeiated  with 
a  particular  kind  of  object,  and  it  nii^ht  not  occur  to  people  to  transfer 
that  decorativii  style  to  other  objects,  or  at  all  events  the  process  would 
doubtless  be  slow." 

An  interestinj;'  example  of  bone  dress  ornaments,  bearing;  simple 
deciuations  and  ronimon  to  both  the  eastern  Kskimo  and  the  Nascopi, 
as  well  as  the  now  extinct  Beothnk  Indians  of  Newfoundland,  was 
l>rou},'ht  to  my  attention  by  Professor  <  >.  T.  Masou,  Curator  of  Kthnoh){|:y 
in  the  National  Museum. 

The  specimens  are  reproduced  in  coh)red  and  plain  sketches,  and 
presented  to  the  National  Museum  by  Lady  Hlako,  of  the  (lovernment 
House.  St.  .Johns,  Newfoundland. 

The  illnstrati(Mis  represent  the  primitive  bone  oruaments  worn  about 
the  bottom  of  <lresses  prit>r  to  the  use  of  metal  substitutes,  such  as  are 
now  attainable  from  the  whites.  These  ornaments  are  chietly  of  a  class 
which  represent  an  inverted  narrow  letter  V — thus,  A — each  about  li 
I  or  L'A  inches  in  Ien;>;th  and  decorated  with  various  angular  desi|;ns. 
Some  of  them  have  niar<^'iinil  incised  lines,  within  which  and  attat^hed 
ItlHTcto  are  the  base  of  trian}j;ular  or  serrated  nnirkings  similar  to 
[soiiie  lOskimo  ))atterns,  shown  in  various  illustrations. 

|ton  tlie  eiuls  of  some  other  small  horn  ornaments  are  similar  rude 
t/ijLr/a^'  ]Kitterns,  as  shown  in  other  illustrations  of  Eskimo  workman- 
|sliip. 

The  information  is  obtainaide  as  to  the  conceptions  which  gave  rise 
Ito  the  art  patterns  of  the  Beothuk.  The  simple  /ijjjzag  may  have 
jresulted  from  an  incised  imitation  of  some  notched  ornaments  nuule  by 
iNascopi,  ornaments  such  as  the  Beothuk  were  undoubtedly  familiar 
pvith,  as  botli  varieties  are  shown  upon  the  same  plates  of  illustrations 
liiiade  by  Lady  Blake.  By  laying  the  Nascopi  ornament  upon  the  slab 
lof  horn  used  l)y  the  r»eothuk,  the  incised  serrations  forming  the  border 
jalinost  exactly  iit  to  the  zi}^/.a<;'  or  serrated  ornamentation  foiining  a 
jbHrder  near  the  edge  of  the  piece  used  by  the  latter. 

Several  patterns  occur  in  I'^skimo  decorations,  however,  which,  while 
lot  exactly  resembling  patterns  from  other  parts  of  the  world,  appear 
to  have  originated  with  them,  and  were  suggested  to  them  by  original 
piodnctsor  mechanical  contrivances,  as  the  Siberian  kantag  or  wooden 
buckets,  in  uests  of  several  sizes,  and  the  peculiar  tish  traj)  or  run 
placci'  M  narrow  channels  of  water,  and  perhaps  the  guides  to  the  pit- 
fidl.  the  latter  class  of  ornamentation  may  be  placed  the  ''seal- 

(>attern.      These    two    different   types  of   objects    nniy  have 
•  ■(1  the  motive  for  the  ligure  of  concentric  circles  and  the  rude 
respectively;  or  the  introduction  from  without  tuv.  *'>rritory  of 
Jihe  E.^ivimo  of  these  designs — the  former,  for  instance,  through  the  i.iHu 
juce  of  the  Russians,  and  the  other,  perhaps,  from  the  vicinity  of 


toot' 


Bigza 


V 


■? 


I  i 


¥  I 


804 


REPORT  OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1896. 


Torres  Straits  and  adjaceut  territory — uiay  have  been  seized  upon  as 
suggesting  the  outlines  or  concepts  perceived  in  the  native  products, 
the  i)oasible  difference  in  artistic  results  being  dependent  uiion  tlie 
iiit'erence  in  material  upon  which  the  designs  are  i)ortrayed  and  to  the 
expertness  or  lack  of  skill  of  the  Eskimo  copyist  or  artist. 

Upon  a  careful  examination  of  all  available  materials  bearing  i)ic- 
torial  records  or  only  simple  decorative  designs,  several  interesting 
facts  appear. 

First.  That  the  Eskimo  east  of  Point  Barrow,  including  those  even 
of  Labrador  and  Greenland,  exhibit  but  little  artistic  expression,  this 
being  confined  chiefly  -to  lines,  dots,  and  other  similar  rudimentary 
markings  which  are  employed  almost  wholly  for  decorative  purposes. 
This  does  not  refer  to  various  kinds  of  carvings  and  outlined  flat  fig- 
ures in  bone  or  ivory,  which  are  intended  to  be  stitched  to  clothing,  a 
custom  very  much  resembling  a  like  practice  which  obtains  in  Finland. 
Neither  does  this  refer  to  the  custom  of  stamping  designs  upon  (jloth 
or  buckskin,  a  practice  apparently  learned  from  the  several  Algonkian 
tribes  with  which  some  of  the  Hudson  Bay  and  Labrador  tribes  of 
Eskimo  come  in  contact. 

Second.  That  the  Point  Barrow  natives  are  apparently  but  moder- 
ately advanced  in  the  art  of  recording  tribal  or  individual  events,  cus- 
toms, etc.,  and  that  most  of  their  ivory  utensils  are  not  decorated;  but 
that  where  attempts  at  beautifying  are  apparent,  only  those  designs 
are  adopted  which  suggest  or  require  the  least  amount  of  manual  exer 
tion  and  artistic  ability,  so  that  straight  incisions,  creases,  or  grooves 
are  most  numerous,  while  nucleated  circles,  and  rarely  also  a  few  con 
centric  rings,  are  incised,  the  latter  apparently  by  means  of  the  common 
carpenter's  auger  bit,  properly  tiled  at  the  cutting  edge  so  as  to  pro- 
duce a  scratch  instead  of  an  incision,  the  latter  being  too  delicate  and 
tedious  a  process  for  success  in  removing  the  dense  resisting  particles 
of  ivory. 

Third.  That  the  engravings  on  ivory  and  bone  from  the  northern 
portion  of  the  west  coast  of  Alaska,  embracing  the  region  about  Kotze 
bue  Sound  and  northward,  and  including  Diomede  Islands  and  the 
opposing  coast,  as  well  as  the  area  occupied  by  the  Asiatic  Eskimo,  are 
more  deeply  and  crudely  cut,  as  indicated  by  the  lines  being  broader 
and  bolder  than  in  the  products  from  any  other  area. 

Fourth.  That  the  general  results  in  graphic  portrayals  are  more  artis 
tic  among  the  natives  of  Bristol  Bay  and  Norton  Sound,  and  improve 
in  delicacy  of  engraving  toward  the  southward  even  to  and  includiui; 
the  Aleutian  Islands;  that  the  portrayal  of  animal  forms  is  accoui 
plished  with  such  fidelity  as  to  permit  of  specific  identification;  that 
the  attempt  at  reproducing  graphically  common  gesture  signs  becomes 
more  frequent,  and  various  instances  of  the  successful  portrayal  <>f 
subjective  ideas  also  occur. 

In  his  lefereuce  to  the  Agulmuts,  whose  location  extends  from  nenr 


6. 

m  Heized  upon  as 
native  products, 
endeut  upon  tlie 
brayed  and  to  the 
rtist. 

•ials  bearing  pic- 
veral  interesting 

iiding  those  even 
3  expression,  this 
ilar  rudimentary 
jrative  purposes, 
outlined  flat  fig- 
ed  to  clothing,  a 
tains  in  Finland, 
signs  upon  <jloth 
iveral  Algonkian 
ibrador  tribes  of 

intly  but  moder- 
iual  events,  cus- 
t  decorated;  but 
[y  those  designs 
of  manual  exer 
ases,  or  grooves 
y  also  a  few  con- 
IS  of  the  common 
ge  so  as  topro- 
too  delicate  and 
sisting  particles 

m  the  northern 
on  about  Kotze 
[slauds  and  the 
atic  Eskimo,  are 
s  being  broader 

s  are  more  artis 
id,  and  improve' 
o  and  incladiui; 
brms  is  accoui 
itification;  that 
B  signs  becomes 
ul  portrayal  ui 

bends  from  ncM- 


(■.:!    J  If  I 


Report  of  U   S.  National  Museum,  1895.- Hoffman. 


Plate  31. 


I 


!1 


If   ' 


lH-.'H 


U-.^ 


Handles  Bearing  Primary  Forms  of  Decorations. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    31 


l- 

iK.  1. 

F 

i^.  1'. 

1" 

',!;■■  ••• 

F 

in-  1. 

1- 

itf-  •"'■ 

Mac   Handle. 

(Cut.  Nci.n8;52,  r.s.x.M.) 

liA(i    HaNIH-E.       FISH-THAP    Ol!    SKAL-TiKlTII    I'aITKKN. 

.     {(•!lt.^(l.24412,  r.S.  N.M.     Norton  Sound,     ('ollcrtctl  liy  L.  >I  Turner.) 
Ha(;  Handfe.     Pink-tuee  PAnEii.v. 

(Cat.  No.  24417.  I'.S.  \.  M.     Xoiton  .Siund.     Collected  by  L.  M.  Tnnicr.) 

1{a(;  Handle.     Vahiant  oe  Fig.  2. 

(Cat.  No.  38770.  C.S.  N.  M.     Nortli  of  Norton  Sourd.     ColliTted  by  Iv  W.  Nelaon.) 
KllDKIN.        I'AP.AI.I.EI.   Rows    ol'    Sk AI,-TO() Til    1'aITEKN. 

(Cut,  No.  [  'j       Norton  Sound,      ('(dlicti-d  l>v  K,  \V.  Ni-lson.) 


8 


f 


■■ 


i  \T 


'> 


I 


lit 

ft 

i 
if 


It 


!     t 


»    M 


"Wl 


M 


V 


K  I 


'.f       ' 


-f'^ 


ft  I  ..  ! 


1 

i! 

it 

■  V-    ' 

1 

r 

» 

1 

i 

Si.  i 


Report  of  U'.  S.  National  Museum,  1895.— Hoffman. 


Plate  32. 


ii 


iii? 


Plate  32. 


M 


'M 


03 

t- 
Z 
Uj 

< 

z 
q: 
O 


I- 
< 

IX 

o 
o 

Q 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    32. 


I"i<?.  1.  I\(>i!V  Ear  Pkxiunts;  Madi-:  oi    r.i:i.i'iiA  Tiivni. 

(Ciit.  Xo.  ;!;ili'l,  U.S.  N.  M.     St.  Micliacl.s.      ( •cillc<'lcil  liy  K.  W.  Xelsim.) 

Via. '2.  lU'tivM-:;  (iiiti.s'  Haii!  Ouna.mknt. 

(Cat.  .Vii.  :17IM»T.  r.  S.  .V.  M.      .\^ai.\  iiUclMiirnimil.     Collcctcil  by  K.  \V.  Nelson.) 
Fi.;;.  .">.  Eai;  I'kndants;  Hi  I'UKskntim,  Si:ai.  IIkads. 

(iJat.  N(i.  ii8i).")L',  r.  S.  X.  yi.      Si)ii;j:uiiiii;iiiiMit.      C'ullertcil  by  K.  \V.  Xel.foii.) 
lijr.    I.    ('OMII. 

(CM.  Xo.  18174,  U.S.  X.  M.     Cmiic  rrincc  ol  Wales.     ( 'ollc<-tn<l  by  K.  \V.  XVlsoii.) 
Fi^.  .">.     I'TKN'SIL    OK    I\01iV.        TllLINtilT    I  N'DI  ANS  (  .'). 

Fig.  t).  IvoitY  ()i;nami:xi  Cauvkk  i<>  Hkikksknt  Face  o-v  a  Skai,. 

l'';it.  Xo.  :iT7ii!.  r  .S.  \.  M.     Kiiim;(iiiiiii;iiimiit.     C'olb'iicd  bv  10.  \V.  Nelson.) 
Fig.  7.  ('Ai!\  Ki)  Handi.k,  .'Snowixii  Hcmax  Facks  with  Tattooino. 

(Cat.  Xo,  li7;U9.  U,  6,  X.  M.     Cliulitmut.     CollfCted  by  E.  \V.  Xel.son.) 


m 


I 


.  r 


1-    I 


( .  ' 


h  L 


.'  % 


i|: 


: !  •  .- 


.  It 


w 


Rcpoitof  U   S   National  Museum.  1  895  — Hoffrran 


Plate  33. 


Wooden  Tablet.    Papuan  Ornamentation. 


GRAPHIC   AKT   OP   THE    ESKIMOS. 


805 


Cape  Avinoff  nearly  to  (.Jape  Komanzott',  Mr.  Dall'  remarks  that  thoy 
bave  been  reported  as  remarkable  for  tlie  beauty  of  their  workman- 
ship in  ivory.    "A  kantag  or  wooden  dish,"  he  continues,  "which  was 
I  obtained  at  Nunivak  by  Captain  Smith,  was  neatly  carvt'd  and  inlaid 
with  lozenges  of  white  stone  resembling  gypsum.    They  were  lubrets 
[of  the  same  material.    Their  food  was  principally  tish  and  seal,  and 
jthey  appeared  to  be  very  destitute  of  iron  and  other  articles  intro- 
|du<!ed  by  traders.    Their  ivory  weapons  were  of  great  beauty,  and 
[some  specimens  of  hollow  carving  would  tax  the  resources  of  the  most 
[skillful  civilized  workman  to  equal." 

In  addition  to  the  above  named  facts  there  occtir  other  peculiar  pat- 
Items,  two  of  which  are  of  interest;  they  are  respectively  the  figures  of 
iconcentric  circles,  and  a  Papuan-like  zigzag  design,  to  which  reference 
[has  already  been  made.  The  former  is  frequently  a  nucleate*!  circle, 
jft'equently  regularly  incised  series  of  circles  one  beyond  the  other,  and 
[occasional  instances  iu  which  delicate  radiating  lines  are  attached  to 
[the  outer  ring. 

The  other  pattern  is  like,  jind  yet  unlike,  that  found  iu  Papuan 
[decorations,  in  which  is  a  rude  wavy  or  meander  zigzag,  or  even  more 
[sharply  defined  interdigital  lines,  or  perhaps  even  triangular  projec- 
Itions  so  as  to  form  true  serrations,  resulting  in  what  is  sometimes 
[termed  a  tooth  pattern. 

This  particular  form  of  Papuan  art  is  usually  drawn  between  or 
fwithin  i)arallel  lines,  and  extends  transversely  across  the  specimen 
[decorated.  The  Eskimo  resemblances,  if  they  may  be  so  termed,  are 
[represented  on  plate  31,  figs.  2,  4,  and  5. 

Plate  31*,  tig.  4,  represents  an  Eskimo  comb,  the  curves  upon  which 
[form  an  interesting  example  for  comparison  with  the  Papuan  designs 
(upon  a  tablet  of  wood,  referred  to  and  illustrated  by  Mr.  Stolpe,  of 
iStockholm.'    Plate  33. 

Similar  parallel  lines  carrying  between  them  the  same  style  of  a 
[rude  zigzag,  but  in  reliel",  because  the  alternate  triangular  spaces  have 
been  removed  by  cutting,  occur  upon  various  other  specimens  repre- 
sented in  various  plates  and  illustrations. 

The  short  transverse  bars  in  this  type  of  pattern  represent  in 
7,some  instances,  according  to  an  Alaskan  informant  and  pictograi)her, 
^Yladimir  Naomolf,  conventionalized  fish  traps,  su<;h  as  are  placed  in 
larrow  channels  of  water  for  catching  the  migrating  salmon.  A  sym- 
letrical  trap  of  such  construction  is  shown  on  the  faces  of  a  pipe  in 
)late  GO.  Tlie  transverse  lines  or  bars  are  complete  in  this  illustra- 
ion,  however,  yet  the  decorative  or  evolved  figure  is  easily  traceable 

the  original.  A  simpler  form  of  the  same  pattern  appears  in  the 
Kecoration  on  fig.  4  in  phite  31,  where  the  alternate  short  lines  project 
inward  toward  the  opposing  space  between  t)\e  short  lines. 


'  "Alaska  aud  its  Kesources,"  Boston,  1870,  p.  406. 

*  Stolpe,  irtvekliiifrsforeteelser  i  natinfolkeus  oi-n.imentik.    Ymer,  Stockholm,  1890, 
[4^,  pp.  193-225;  1891,  pp.  197-229,  iigs. 


I 


III 


806 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MU8EUM,  1895. 


The  native  drawings  of  the  Ho-called  ttn\i  trap  or  seal  tooth  pattern 
alHO  reneinble  the  approaches  to  the  jfaiiio  trap  or  incIoHuro,  both 
these  cotitrivances  being  represented  by  horizontal  or  oblique  or  per- 
ha[>H  even  only  parallel  lines,  leading  to  a  trap  or  indosure,  along 
which  lines  are  short  etchings  or  bars  to  denote  the  posts  or  divisions 
to  sustain  the  brush  of  the  game  drive  or  the  wickerwork  ])artitions  of 
the  fish  trap.  These  short  lateral  lines  simulate  the  <lrawings  made  to 
denote  the  separations  or  spaces  between  teeth  like  those  of  the  seal, 
of  which  examples  are  given  in  fig.  00,  and,  as  was  suggested  by  a 
native  Eskimo,  the  open  mouth  of  the  hunting  seal  was  like  the  open 
fish  trap  and  game  drive,  ready  to  take  in  such  prey  as  canu)  within 
reach.  The  conception  of  the  design  nuiy  be  found  in  the  trap,  as 
suggested  by  Naomotf,  or  in  the  "seal's  mouth,"  as  suggested  by 
Komiksr^ner,  a  Kaviagmut  Eskimo  from  Port  Clarence,  whose  j)or 
trait  is  shown  in  plate  2. 

These  drawings  in  ivory  are  usually  jdaced  between  horizontal  or 
parallel  lines,  interesting  because  they  resemble  the  chief  character- 
istics of  Celtic  art,  of  which  there  is  no  relationship  directly  except 
as  showing  the  like  workings  of  man's  mind  under  like  conditions. 
"The  Japanese,  for  instance,"  says  a  writer  in  Archa-ologia  Cambrensis,' 
"ignore  the  margin  altogether  and  make  their  decoration  entirely 
independent  of  it,  but  in  Celtic  art  the  ])atterns  are  all  designed  to 
suit  the  shape  of  the  margin."    Tliis  is  true  of  much  of  the  Alaskan  art. 

The  early  contact  by  the  Alaskans  with  art  products  from  the  South 
Pacific  is  believed  to  be  pretty  generally  recognized;  and  an  instauiio 
of  the  discovery  among  the  natives  of  Bristol  li.ay  of  the  cocoanut 
suggested  an  admirable  material  for  engraving  which  was  only  sur 
passed  in  beauty  and  texture  by  walrus  ivory.  Various  curios  have 
also  been  carried  north  by  sailors,  the  carvings  upon  which  have  sug- 
gested, no  doubt,  possibilities  in  engraving  of  which  the  Eskimo  had 
previously  had  no  conception.  Illustrated  newspapers  are  seized  witli 
avidity,  and  reproductions  of  various  cuts  attempted,  in  some  known 
instances  the  features  of  faces  being  fairly  truthful  likenesses. 

Much  of  the  art  of  the  Eskimo  has  been  influenced,  too,  by  the  intro 
duction  of  articles  of  Kussian  manufacture,  of  which  more  is  remarked 
elsewhere.  Two  fairly  good  examples  of  native  workmanship  of  this 
are  given  on  plate  34,  figs.  1  and  2,  and  representing  wooden  boxes 
with  native  ornamentation  and  Kussian  symbols  of  the  cross  and  otlici 
motifs. 

The  suggestion  for  engraving  concentric  circles  being  accounted  for 
as  to  origin  and  signification  by  Mr.  L.  M.  Turner,  and  described  farthti' 
on,  may  also  have  been  introduced  through  the  medium  of  sailors  and 
others  from  the  Gulf  of  Papua,  where,  according  to  Mr.  Haddon,  they 
are  conventionalized  eyes  in  the  ornamental  faces  carved  on  woodon 
belts. 


*  ■■hi 


»  J  anuary,  1893.     Fifth  ser. ,  pp .  20,  21 . 


1  tooth  ]>attern 

iiicloHure,  both 

obliquo  or  per- 

iiuiloHiiro,  along 

)sta  or  (livisioiiH 

)rk  i»artitiona  of 

awiiigH  iiisulo  to 

1080  of  the  weal, 

sjiggesti'd  by  a 

an  like  the  open 

as  eauie  within 

in  the  trap,  as 

s  Huggeated   by 

nee,  whoac  \wt 

sn  horizontal  or 

chief  character- 

(lire(;tly  except 

like  conditions. 

giaCanibrensis,' 

oration  entirely 

all  designed  to 

the  Alaskan  art. 

H  from  the  South 

and  an  instance 

of  the  cocoanut 

;h  was  only  siir 

ious  curios  have 

which  have  sug- 

the  Eskimo  had 

8  are  seized  with 

,  in  some  known 

Lenesses. 

too,  by  the  intro 

more  is  remarked 

imanship  of  this 

ig  wooden  boxes 

e  cross  and  other 

ing  accounted  f<'i 
described  farther 
am  of  sailors  and 
llr.  Haddon,  thoy 
arved  on  wooden 


i:  .'  ^ 


I;, 
i ,  ■' 


I   li; 


EXPLANATION    OF    tn.  A  T  E     11 4 . 


I'ij;.  1.    Wooi.KX  ]5ox. 

(I  .11.  Nil.  Jll.".;.  r.  S.  \.  >!        fai'i-  NoMir.      C'lllcciiMl  liy  I-'..  V\'.  Xcl.-;iiii.l 
F'X'j:    -.    \\'()(ii>i;n    Hun. 

(I  .•II.  Nil.  ;i:;ii77,  r.  S.  N.  .M.      ('A)ti-  Nmiiic.      ('(I'liTlcd  by  Iv  H',  X.'lsdli.) 

I'iu.  :i.   I'.ox   II. i:   I'l^iiiNf,  '1' \ii\i.!:. 

(I'jl,  No. -Jl-lj::.  r.  S.  >  .  M.      Ni.n.iii  SouikI.      i  oI'mcIciI  1)\   1..  M.  '1  iniic"-.> 


"■'i 


j 


it  I 


IV 


1   *    . 

I      5      .'i- 


f ;  n 


4»Qr 


Report  nf  US   Natmni,!  Museum.   I  B95.      Hoffman. 


Plate  34. 


!IM"'.l 


"!,"■ 


m 


« 


I 

■ 


WooDCN  Dux:   ,  ANij  Ca!)F.  fOT  Fiehin;-,  Tacklc. 


W  I 


ff- 


!     ■,•( 


w 


-il'lrl! 


«»1 


^KBtb 


GKArHIC   ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


807 


In  Alaska,  liowever,  concentric  circles  and  nucleated  rings  have  been 
utilized  to  explain  concepts  other  than  the  similar  patterns  which  occur 
elsewlieic  in  the  world,  referrinjjf  to  other  widely  distinct  origins  and 
concepts.     (Conj[tare  with  \  ari.ants  on  plate  17.) 

The  concentric  rings,  being  so  generally  widesi)read,  survive  in  the 
Kongo  region  and  in  Tangier,  where  the  design  may  owe  its  origin  to 
the  introduction  of  Mohanunedanism  and  the  Byzantine  style  of  orini- 
mcutiition;  ujmn  lioman  lamps  in  the  ruined  church  of  St.  Louis,  in 
Carthage;  and  in  numerous  localities  throughout  northern  I'^urope  as 
rock  sculptnrings,  and  in  bron/e  and  other  jewelry  and  ornaments. 
America  has  nuvny  i>etroglyphs  in  which  this  design  is  found,  the 
greatest  number  being  upon  the  basalt  rocks  in  the  arid  desert  south 
of  Uenton,  Owens  Valley,  California. 

By  these  references  to  the  occurrence  in  widely  separated  localities 
of  like  designs,  I  do  not  for  a  single  moment  <lesire  to  convey  the 
impression  that  the  belief  is  entertained  that  this  is  the  result  of 
migration  through  the  ordinary  trade,  or  culture  channels,  as  Mr. 
Haddou  designates  them,  but  lather  of  independent  development, 
being  evolved  from  very  diverse  t)riginals  and  concepts.  It  is  certain, 
nevertiu'less,  that  in  some  instances  religious  symbols  are  carried 
among  peoples  to  whom  they  are  artistically  or  technically  foreign,  and 
to  whom  the  signitication  would  be  meaningless  but  for  the  explanation 
accompanying  them. 

In  Alaska  several  difterent  versions  Jire  given  to  account  for  the 
origin  of  the  nucleated  circles,  plain  concentric  rings,  and  rings  with 
dentations.     Reference  to  like  forms  in  other  regions  is  made  elsewhere. 
iMr.  Iladdon'  remarks  with  reference  to  such  ligures  that  "there  is  a 
great  teiulency  for  spirals  to  degenerate  into  concentric  circles;  exam- 
ples could  be  given  from  New  (Juinea,  America,  luirope,  and  elsewhere. 
In  fact,  one  usually  linds  the  two  ligures  associated  together,  and  the 
Iseciuence  is  one  of  decadence,  never  the  evolution  of  spirals  froui  cir- 
[cles.    The  intermediate  stage  has  been  aptly  tern)ed  a  'bastard  spiial' 
jby  Do(!tor  ^Nlontelius — 'that  is  to  say,  concentric  circles  to  which  the 
[recurved  Junction  lines  give,  to  a  casual  glance,  the  api)earance  of  true 
spirals.'" 

Interesting  instances  in  snj)portt»f  Mr.  Haddon's  statement  are  found 
in  the  (Icvelopiiicnt  of  decorative  designs  among  \arious  tribes  of 
Jiidians,  in  which  the  textile  designs  were  ultiunitely  imitated  in  a 
free  hand  style,  thus  gradually  converting  the  angular  into  curved 
figures,  as  in  the  meander  patterns  so  common  in  the  basketry  and 
pottery  designs  of  the  several  jtueblo  tribes. 

In  northern  lOurope  and  elsewhere  in  the  Old  World  coils  of  withes, 
cords,  and  other  textile  strands  were  imitated  in  metal,  as  nuiy  be  seen 
in  luany  o\'  tlic  prehistoric  relics  of  Scandinavia  and  France. 

Associated  with  these  patterns  are  series  of  figures  consisting  of 


•'Evohitioii  in  Art,"  i».  !t;i. 


m 


i 

ii 

* 

}% 

!■ 

■H 

1 

M 

*w 

ii 

I 

m 

m 

'  a 


808 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


r 


concentric  rings,  Avhicli   no  doubt  owe  tlieir  origin  to  tlie  vegetal 
prototype. 

Thus  far  no  spirals  liave  been  observed  in  tlie  nativ<^  art  designs  of 
tbe  Eskimo  as  illustrated  in  the  National  Museum,  and  one  reason  for 
the  absence  of  spirals  may  be  attributed  to  the  diiliculty  of  engrav 
ing  the  ivory  satisfactorily,  or  i)erliai)s  to  the  absence  of  particular  life 
forms  which  might  under  other  circunjstaiices  suggest  siu'h  motifs. 
The  general  shape  of  the  spaces  upon  drill  bows,  being  long  and 
narrow,  would  otherwise  naturally  suggest  either  a  meander  or  a 
continuous  series  of  squids  as  a  nu)st  appropriate  and  con\eiiient 
pattern.  Instead  of  these,  however,  the  ornamental  "lilling-in" 
consists  of  straight  lines  of  various  lengths  and  at  various  angles, 
together  with  animal  or  bird  forms  in  various  stages  of  abbreviation 
through  conventionalization. 

l>KfX)KATION   CONSISTING    CHIKKLY   Ol'    LINKS,  1>(»TS,  AM>    ZI(i/,A(iS. 

The  older  forms  of  ornamentation,  as  already  indicate*!,  seem  to 
consist  of  straight  lines,  dots,  and  <-8haped  incisions,  while  the  appai 
ently  later  ones  are  the  circles,  made  by  met.il  instruments  possibly  di 
native  workmanship,  and  the  rude  zigzag  or  meander.  The  applicn 
tiou  of  these  several  types  of  designs  to  the  ornamentation  of  varioii> 
jirti<'lesof  use  is  represented  in  the  next  few  i)Iiges.  Soin«^  interesting 
examples  of  figure  carving,  bearing  engravings  of  various  tyi)es,  arc- 
also  reproduced. 

While  the  rude  zigzag  pattern  is  frequently  alluded  to  as  the  "tisli 
trap"  pattern — the  name  being  deemed  appropriate  because  the  type 
originated  in  that  contrivance,  according  to  Naomoff — the  designation 
"seal  tooth"  pattern  might  be  equally  appropriate,  as  the  arrangement 
of  the  teeth  and  spaces  between  them  may  have  suggested  the  i)atterii 
among  tribes  in  other  parts  of  the  Eskimo  territory. 

Plate  li~f,  tig.  <S,  shows  a  woman's  skin  scraper,  from  Cape  Darby, 
The  specimen  appears  to  be  made  of  fossil  ivory  and  is  carved  in  imi- 
tation of  a  whale's  tail,  and  rounded  so  as  to  fit  the  palm  of  the  hand. 
The  front  end  has  a  deep  incision,  in  which  was  placed  at  one  time  a 
Hint  scraper,  in  imitation  of  other  examples  in  the  collection  of  tlu! 
National  Museum.  The  specimen  bears  beneath  a  depression,  show- 
ing it  to  have  been  used  for  holding  the  top  of  a  drill.  The  ornamen- 
tation on  both  sides  and  transversely  at  the  rear  portion  consists  of  a 
single  line  to  which  are  attached  irregular  short  radiating  or  transverse 
lines  in  imitation  of  the  rudest  type  of  the  "fish  trap"  pattern.  This 
ornamentation  is  in  accordance  with  the  typical  ornamentation  of  tlic 
ICskimo,  such  as  comes  from  the  shell  heaps  of  the  Aleutian  Islands, 
across  to  the  east  coast  of  Greenland,  and  antedating  very  likely  tlie 
historic  period. 

Ill  i)late  .'51,  fig.  a,  is  shown  an  ivory  bodkin,  here  reproduced  as  of 
interest  in  presenting  ujton  the  one  side  five  parallel  lines  of  une<pi;il 


to  the  vegetal 

(;  art  designs  of 
(I  one  reason  for 
Milty  of  engrav 
)1"  partit'nlar  life 
est  .such  motifs, 
being  h>ng  and 
I,  meander  or  a 
and  c(»nvenient 
ial  "lilling-in" 
various  angles, 
of  abbr«!viatioM 


I    /KiZAfiS. 

ieatetl,  seem  to 
while  the  appar 
leuts  iK)ssibly  v\' 
'.  The  applicii 
ation  of  ^•ariolI^ 
5ome  interestinj; 
irious  tyi)es,  arc 

.  to  as  the  "tish 
eeause  the  type 
-the  designation 
the  arrangement 
sted  the  iiatteru 

im  Cape  Darby, 
s  carved  in  in»i- 
dm  of  the  hand, 
d  at  one  time  a 
jollection  of  the 
epression,  show- 
,  The  ornameii- 
ion  <'onsists  of  a 
ng  or  transverse 
'  pattern.  This 
oeiitation  of  the 
leutian  Islands, 
;•  very  likely  the 


eproduced  as  of 
lines  of  une«iu;il 


'          *. 

'       'E.' 

If    ! 

if-   '             ■ 

EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    35. 


7       S      !l 


Fig.    1.    TllI.MllLK    (il'AHK. 

(Ciit.  N<).4:!-ir)!),  r.S.  X.  M.     Sl.MicliiMls.     C.ll,.,!,.,!  l,v  Iv  \V.  N.Uo.i.) 
Fiji.  1'.   'riliMiu.i;   Iloi.i.Ki!. 

(Ciit.N(..'.;!l7:iI,r.S.  N.M.      \,,rt,ML  SiMin.l.     (■.,ll,.,t.il  ny  L.  M.  ■I'uriM-r.) 
Tig.  :?.  'riUMiii.K   lI(tM)i;i!, 

(<;at.N.,.  rji»:!14,  I'.S,  N.  A[.     Si,  M  i,l„icls.     (;,.ll,.ct,Ml  l,y  K.  W.  Ni-U,,,,.) 
Fij;.    \.    SKINK    TllIMIil.K    llol.DKI!. 

((';it.  ;i(i-l,V.',  r.  S.  \,  M.     Kiislniniik.     I '(illciti'dlix  K.  \V.  N.  Isoii.) 

Fig.  Ti.  Moiniu'iKCK. 

(Cat.  N<).(>:!(i(i7,  r.S.  X.M.      Didiii.d..  I>h„iil.s.     Cnlk.ctr.lliy  K.  \V.  N-,.|s..ii.) 
Fig.  I).    TllIMIW.l'.    (JlAIM). 

(('iit.N(..4:iHtil,  r'.S.  X.M.     liialililiM.     (;„ll,.,.t,.,|  l,y  K.  W.  N,.|s„ii  i 
Fig.  7.  iMoiTiii'iKCE. 

(Cal.  N,i.  il'iliOd.  r.S.  X.M.      Diiiiiirilc  I.«l:,ri(l«.     (  ullc't,.,!  I,v  K,  \V.  .Nelson.) 

I'ig.  S.   IIandi.i:  ok  SriiAi-KK. 

(Cilt.Xd.  4418(1.  r.S.  N.M.      (  ii|„.  I):ill>y.      (■(iII.mI,  ,1  l,y  !■:.  W.  Xrlson.) 

Fig.  it.   'I'ouAc Co  1{<)\, 

(Cat.  N...447ti(),  r.  S.  N.M.      Slcd^,.  l^);,,,,!.     (nllrclcl  l,y  K.  W    Nrl.s,,,,.) 


R..|)(.'l  i.f   U    5    N.i:'nfi,ii  MubiHim,  inys.-- Hoffman. 


Plate  35. 


Nclsiiii.) 


Nelson.) 


i*. 


■^  'tr 


DEconATtiD  Utensils  Used  by  Women. 


■^ 


i:      !         1 


I;;-  -I 


r 

J 


m 

i   • 

r  1  ■■ 

''1  i 

.  .  I 

1 

jl''i 

1 

I'r; 

i 

¥ 


i,,' 


JSE: 


A^ 


i 

j 

t 

1 


II 


1  t 


I     j 


.1!         I 


ORAPHIC  AHT  OF  THE  ESKIMOS. 


809 


leiifftli,  iM'tweon  wliicli  are  tlio  sliorr  lattM-al  lines  imd  /ijr/ap,  sliowiii|j 
[tlio  inotlKMl  of  enj,Mavin{;  and  tho  artist ir  evolution  of  the  pattern. 

I'lat«'  .'i«»,  li^s.  1-1,  reiaesrnt  kanta};  handles.  Tlie  specimen  shown 
in  iiii.  I  is  from  Sledge  Island,  and  is  ornamented  by  two  i»arallel  lon},'i- 
tndinal  lines  between  wliii^li  are  cross  lines  by  threes  at  intervals  of 
about  an  inch.  In  i\ii.  -'  the  sets  of  cross  lines  are  by  twos,  but  on  the 
inner  si<le,  facing  (nie  another,  are  sln)rt  lines,  as  in  the  ornamental 
pattern  before  referred  to  as  the  lish  trap  or  seal  tooth,  {•iving  rise 
ultimately  to  the  /ig/ag.  In  tig.  •'{  is  represented  a  handle,  upon  the 
upper  side  <»f  which  tiie  ornamentiition  consists  of  ten  whales  in  relief, 
while  upon  the  under  side  is  a  very  neatly  engraved  mamnnil  of  the 
same  species,  tlnnigh  extending  horizontally  instead  of  transversely. 

In  tig.  1  tin'  npi»er  side  represents  two  horizontal  lines  with  the  short 
lines  exteniling  inward  between  their  opposing  feUows,  a  sort  of  inter- 
digitatlon,  tin-  interior  si>aces  n'jnesenting  a  rude  zigzag  with  the  outer 
angles  being  removed  instead  of  being  shai>e<l  to  a  point,  as  in  the  true 

aig/ag. 

f  In  the  next  illustration  of  a  bag  handle,  plate  .'il.tig.  1,  are  three 
parallel  lines  extending  Irom  end  to  end.  From  the  outer  lines  inward 
are  short  lines  at  intervals  of  perhnps  i  of  an  inch,  while  extending  to 
either  side  from  the  central  line  are  similar  short  lines  extending  <mt- 
ward  so  as  to  project  between  the  short  lines  from  without — a  sort  of 
Interdigitation,  resulting  in  a  double  row  of  the  "fish  trap"  pattern  or 
rude  zi.rzag  presented  in  so  many  of  the  illustrations. 

Fig.  L'  of  the  same  plate  also  bears  a  series  of  like  ornamentation,  the 
Oonce])t  ])erhaps  also  being  found  in  the  fish  trap. 

riate  37,  tig.  3,  rei)resents  a  bow.  one  end  of  which  terminates  in  an 
animal's  head,  while  about  the  neck,  the  middle,  and  the  rear  end  are 
parallel  lines,  irom  the  inner  side  of  which  and  ai)proa(!hing  the  opjH)- 
gite  side  are  small  triangular  jxtints  so  arranged  alternately  from  one 
tide  to  the  other  as  to  leave  an  intervening  si)ace  in  the  form  of  zigzag. 
This  design  is  very  common  on  work  from  several  particular  localities. 
It  is  used  as  an  onunnent  in  filling  out  blank  spaces,  as  in  the  illustra- 
tion (tig.  <i  on  the  same  plate.  .'57),  where  it  serves  to  decorate  seals' 
•kins,  seventeen  of  them  being  i)laccd  in  a  row.    This  may  be  oom])ared 

fith  like  illustrations  in  connection  with  conventionalizing. 
?|  Plate  ;n,  tig.  1,  represents  a  bag  handle,  hxiality  unknown,  upon 
irhich  is  shown  a  pattern  consisting  primarily  of  a  (central  incision 
^tending  from  end  to  end,  from  which  radiate  toward  either  side  sev- 
eral series  of  diagonal  lines,  which  ai)pear  to  be  similar  in  type  to  that 
phown  in  ])late  .'JS,  fig  1,  and  on  plate  39,  tig.  2. 
On  plate  34,  lig.  1,  is  a  small  wooden  box  obtained  at  Cape  Nome. 
has  a  sliding  lid,  while  the  two  lower  projections,  resembling  feet, 
re  in  reality  the  outlines  of  bears'  heads.    As  will  be  noted,  there  are 
jveral  outlines  of  flintlock  guns  shown  upon  the  lid,  besides  other 
laracter.s,  while  along  the  margin  arc  short  diagonal  lines  arranged 


m 

m 
m 


5 


«  ,' 


V] 


<^ 


/}. 


/ 


y 


^ 


i 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-S) 


1.0 


'^^  lilM    1 2.2 


I.I 


i^ 


2.0 


1.25 


1.8 


1.6 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


\ 


%     .^    ■« 


** 


O^ 


4p 


ri>^\  ^ 


*i^ 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER, NY.  MS80 

(716)  872-4503 


^■s 


s 


% 


^ 


I.* 


■I;      ! 


i  '; 


!  ': 


810 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1896. 


in  the  form  of  zigzags.  A  few  Russian  letters  are  incised  u^ion  the 
sides,  indicating  the  natives'  knowledge  of,  or  acquaintance  with,  char- 
acters of  that  hmguage. 

In  plate  34,  flg.  2,  is  represented  a  box  of  almost  the  same  form  and 
from  the  same  locality,  the  bottom  being  represented  in  the  illustra- 
tion, and  upon  it  a  variety  of  ornamentation  very  much  in  imitation  of 
the  patterns  before  mentioned  and  found  on  many  of  the  specimens. 
Upon  closer  investigation,  however,  it  will  be  observed  that  the  mar 
ginal  lines  bear  between  them  small  arrowheads  or  < -shaped  figures, 
while  in  the  remaining  spaces  the  ornamentation  consists  of  parallel 
lines,  the  intervening  spaces  being  ornamented  by  short  diagonal  lines. 
The  two  lozenges  in  the  middle  bear  upon  the  center  a  cross,  evidently 
suggested  by  Russian  ecclesiastical  pictures  or  literature. 

Plate  37,  fig.  1,  is  a  plain  white  ivory  bow  drill  from  Point  Hope. 
The  ornamentation  is  visible  in  the  illustration  and  consists  simply  of 
the  wavy  exterior  produced  by  filing  a  series  of  indentations  along  the 
edge  of  the  triangular  bow. 

Plate  37,  fig.  5,  also  from  Point  Barrow,  shows  two  parallel  lines 
extending  from  almost  one  end  to  the  other,  between  which  are  diag- 
onal lines  at  short  intervals.  The  bottom  edge  of  the  bow  is  indented 
at  intervals  of  a  little  over  an  inch,  leaving  projections  upon  whieli 
small  triangular  figures  extend  from  the  bottom,  presenting  an  oriiu 
mental  eflfect.    The  coloring  matter  apparently  consists  of  red  ocher. 

Plate  38,  figs.  1, 2, 3,  and  4,  represent  bag  handles  from  Norton  Sound. 
St.  Michaels,  the  Yucon  River,  and  Point  Hope,  respectively. 

In  plate  39,  fig.  1,  the  ornamentation  upon  the  upper  side  consists  of  n 
median  horizontal  line  or  crease  terminating  at  one  end  with  three  per 
forations,  which  number  occurs  also  at  the  other  end  of  the  rod.  At 
right  angles  to  this  median  line,  at  either  end,  are  eight  nucleated  rings. 
At  the  center  of  the  specimen  are  a  like  number,  in  the  middle  of  which 
group  is  inserted  a  large  blue  glass  bead.  Upon  the  upper  side,  instead 
of  a  median  line,  the  surface  is  filled  with  a  continuous  row  of  nucleated 
circles.  Upon  examination,  however,  it  is  observed  that  the  circles 
consist  of  two  or  three  different  sizes,  showing  that  instruments  of 
that  number  of  sizes  were  used.  The  rings  indicate,  furthermore,  tliat 
the  tool  was  of  hard  metal,  but  no  doubt  fashioned  by  the  artist,  n 
narrow  piece  of  steel  having  a  crotch  filed  into  the  end  so  as  to  leavi 
two  sharp  points. 

Plate  39,  fig.  3,  represents  a  very  neat  bag  handle  or  bow  drill  nearl.v 
18  inches  in  length.  The  top  is  fluted  longitudinally  by  means  of  tliiei 
deep  creases,  while  in  the  outer  sides  are  a  series  of  cavities  or  seal 
lops,  also  ornamented  along  the  margin  by  incisions.  This  specimen  is 
interesting  because  of  the  great  number  of  nucleated  circles  scatteied 
along  the  under  side.  Each  of  these  circles  seems  to  have  been  made 
with  the  same  instrument,  which  was  apparently  a  carpenter's  bit. 
one-fourth  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 


1895. 

re  incised  upon  the 
aintance  with,  chur- 

t  the  same  form  and 
nted  in  the  illustia- 
niuch  in  imitation  of 
ly  of  the  specimens, 
erved  that  the  mar 
)r  < -shaped  figures, 
consists  of  parallel 
short  diagonal  lines, 
er  a  cross,  evidently 
rature. 

1  from  Point  Hope, 
id  consists  simply  of 
lentations  along  the 

s  two  parallel  lines 
een  which  are  diag- 
the  bow  is  indented 
ections  upon  whicli 
presenting  an  orna 
sists  of  red  ocher. 
from  Norton  Sound, 
spectively. 
aer  side  consists  of  a 
end  with  three  per 
endof  the  rod.    At 
ght  nucleated  rings, 
the  middle  of  whicli 
)  upper  side,  instead 
)us  row  of  nucleated 
'^ed  that  the  circles 
hat  instruments  of 
;e,  furthermore,  that 
led  by  the  artist,  a 
d  end  so  as  to  leavi 


I  or  bow  drill  nearly 
y  by  means  of  thrci 
I  of  cavities  or  sral 
I.  This  specimen  i> 
5ed  circles  scattered 
to  have  been  made 
r  a  carpenter's  bit. 


f 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    37. 

1 
2 

8 

4 
« 
6 


Via. 

1 

ViiT. 

•> 

ri«. 

;< 

rig. 

4 

Fig. 

5 

!'i«. 

«> 

IlHii.i.  Mow. 

(Cut.  N.(i:i8(i4,  r.S.  N.  M.     I'ciiiil  Ilupr      Collcctcil  li.\  K.  \V.  Nilsini. 
I>U1I.L   l?<)W. 

(Cat.  N(i.45:i4(i,  V.  S.  N.  M.     Ciiiif  NniiH'.     Ciillf.tcd  liy  K.  W.  Nelsi.ii.) 
Diui.i.  How. 

(Cat.  No.  :t:il'.il,  r.  S.  X.  M.     Norton  .Snuiul.     Cnllcitcl  liy  K.  W.  X(l.-«)ii.) 

DiMi.i.  r.ow. 

(Cat.  .NO.  HO.iiO,  C.  S.  \.  M.     I'oiiit  l!arri»w.     dilliMtid  l>y  Lieut.  I'.  II.  Kay.  I".  S.  A.) 
Dliil.i.  Mow. 

(Cat.  No.  .".(!51S.  C.  S.  N.  M.     Point  Harrow.     Colk-cted  l)y  Lieut.  I*.  II.  Kay,  U.  S.  A.) 

Ditii.L  Itow.     'l'lli^4  K])('ciiiicii  is  2IHi>cli*^H  ioii;!- 

(Cut.  No.  24540,  I'.  S.  N.  M.    .St.  MicliaeU.    ColliMttil  liy  L.  M.  Turner.) 


rf 


[*■' 


Report  of  U    S  National  Museum,  1895 -Hoffman 


Plate  37. 


)i>.) 


Kav.  r.S.  A.) 


Uiiv.  U.S.  A.) 


I 
00 

-i 

-I 

E 
o 

a 


UJ 

S 
< 
z 


i 


;  t 


f  1 


;        :   ' 


):■: 


if 

1  w 

,' 

I 


t''l 


EXPLANATION   OF    PLATE    38. 


1     2     :!     I 


Fi;,^  I.    K.\M,\(i   Handi.k. 

d'af.  No.  2411.">.  V.  S.  X.  M.     Nnrtim  Somid.     Colli'dcil  liy  I..  M.  Turner  ) 

I'i;;.  'J.   KANTAti   IIandik. 

(Cut.  No.  ■-•  14J.'>.  r.S.  N.M.     SI.  .Michaels.     CoUeited  by  L.  M.  I'lirner.) 

Fiu.  :i.   K'ANTAti   IIanpi.k. 

(r.it.Xd.  oJ^.');;'.!,  V.  S.  N.  M.     VuUim  Kiver.) 
Fi<r.  I.  Kantai;  IIandi.!;. 

((;at.  Nil.  iLiSnll.  l".S.  N.  M.      I'oilit  llopo.     CollecleiMiy  K.  W.  NeUoii.) 


.'  i       '■ 

i '  ■ 

1 

P 

i 

■ 

1 

rl 

If  i 

Rtportof  U  S  National  Museum    I895^Moffnnan, 


Plate  38. 


I 


Ornamented  Kantaq  Handles. 


;(    !  |!i'!lf.U" 


!l 


i  ■  i 

\M 

•i  ■   ^ 

1 

j 

'  1 

]■■ 

ii 


lis 


1 

1 

f 

1 

i 

EXPLANATION    OF   PLATE    39. 


1 


I!       I 


Fi-.  1.    Maii  IIandi.i:. 

(Cat.  Xo.  Sll'.ll,  r.  S.  N.  M.     INiiiit  liaiTow.    (;ollt>rl(>(l  I»y  Mint.  P.  IT.  Ray,  U.  S.  .\.) 

Fig.  -'.  I{A<i  IIandi.k. 

((.'at.  No.  •J4.'>41t,  r.  .S.  N.  M.     Norton  Soiiml.    CoUetted  l>y  I,.  M.  Tuiiu-t) 

V\ii.  :t.  \\m,  Hanpi.k.. 

(Cat.  No.  S!i4'.';i.  r..S.  N.  M.     I'oint  Harrow.    Collecteil  by  Upiit.  P.  11.  Kay,  I'.S.  A., 
Fig.  \.  UA(i  Hamh.k. 

(Cat.  Nil.  8!l.'12.  r.  S.  N.  M.     I'oint  Harrow,     (.'ullictea  l>y  Lieut.  P.  H.  Kay,  W  S.  A.) 


1^  i 


u 


Ml   I 

1  : 


Rvport  of  U.  S,  National  Muivuin,  1895.— Hnffman. 


Plate  39. 


Bag  Handles. 


r 


Hi 


'[  m 


'f 

J 

s. 

■i 

i 
! 

1 

i          I 

1 

i  "1 

1 

1  fl 

1' 

-11  i 

( 

! 

*• 

ft 

■  ■   i 

t-rmm 


Report  of  U,  S.  N«tion«l  Museum,  1895.— Hoffmin. 


i   1 


1         8 


1  2  8  4  6  6 

t  u 


•  _jr y: — :xi 


^^^nf^T-^r'^/^  ]^ 


4  6  6  V        8 


10 


'^-^^    ^  ^  _^  htU£ 


2  14        5  0  7  8 


Records  f^ 


Plate  ^0. 


d-4^  (Ui^   tt^  4WJW   nj^   tffrl  ,^ifrr 


^  -^^  -w^ 


V        8  9  W 


10  11  IS 


kEnCiiSaiilBljBZBia^ 


11 


IS  U  14 


15 


16  17    18 


^  ^^LMm"^>,,jir-^Ji^tf,>^kiit<-i^^m$^ 


5  «  7 


10 


11 


-X X. 


:r X. 


JL 


Records  ftWAQ  Handles. 


'y^^mm 


I 


I'il:. 


1  f 

i 

flp  ' 

1 

k^'i' 

•;   . 

j-f .; 

! ; 

.  1  . 

:  ■  !    , 

Iv  '    ■ ! 
III     ' 

• 

11: 


!  i 


h"'- 


GRAPHIC   ART  OP  THE   ESKIMOS. 


811 


Plate  39,  Hg.  4,  represents  a  bag  handle  rajirked  with  a  single  median 

line  from  which  the  specimen  slopes  toward  either  si<le  of  the  onter 

dge,  and  it  is  also  fashioned  along  the  outer  margin  like  the  preceding 

Le,  though  tlu^  <'urves  or  scallops  are  longer.     Between  each  curve  is 

small  V-shaped  niche,  while  at  the  middle  this  is  replaced  by  a  short 

callop  or  curve. 

The  specimen  rei)re8ented  in  plate  39,  fig.  2,  is  decorated  upon  the 

per  side  by  a  median  horizontal  line,  deeply  engraved,  to  which  are 
ttached,  by  pairs,  short  diagonal  lines  exactly  resembling  the  herring- 
one  pattern,  each  pair  of  these  patterns  being  about  one-half  an  inch 
bora  the  sm!ceeding  pair.  Upon  th'  lower  or  concave  side  is  a  similar 
Median  line,  to  one  side  of  which  are  placed  the  figures  of  thirty-seven 
Bese,or  skuas,  swimnung  toward  the  right.    The  figures  are  as  nearly 

ike  as  can  be  made  by  the  average  native  artist,  and  are  equidistant 

)m  one  another. 
[The  rej;ularity  of  the  arrangement  of  these  bird  figures  suggests  that 

lamentation  was  aimed  at  as  well  as  a  historic  record. 


I 


2~ 


.^-.-^ 


-^^3! 


3 


Fiji.  ;i4. 
NATIVES  AKMKI)  WITH  OrNS. 


^ig.  ;U  represents  but  two  of  the  five  panels  or  si)aces  dec«)rated, 

^th  (»f  which  bear  figures  referring  to  canoes  in  which  the  men  al  the 

ir  are  armed  with  oars,  while  those  at  the  bow  have  guns  r.iised  as  if 

mt  to  shoot.    The  partitions  consist  of  transverse  ornamental  lines, 

iniprovenient  over  the  pairs  or  sets  of  vertical  plain  incisions  shown 

the  paneled  record  in  plate  3(5,  fig.  i'. 

'he  seriated  inner  edges  of  the  dividing  lines,  facing  one  another, 
semble  the  conventional  figures  used  to  denote  fish  weirs,  ami  appear 

the  present  instance  to  have  been  used  as  ornaments.  As  before 
ited.  the  same  pattern  has  been  suggested,  apparently,  by  the  arrange- 
jnt  of  tlie  teeth  of  the  seal,  illustrations  of  which  are  of  frecpient 
jurrence  in  the  t'ollectious  of  the  National  Museum. 
In  fig.  35  is  the  rude  outline  of  an  ivory  harpoon  head,  on  w^hich  the 
fctli  of  the  seal  are  deeply  incised,  while  in  fig.  36  the  pattern 
proaches  more  nearly  the  rude  meander,  between  which  and  the  true 
rzag  as  made  by  the  Eskimo  there  are  constant  gradations  and 
Miding  of  form. 

'he  native  in  plate  40,  bottom  line,  is  following  a  herd  of  walrus.    He 

pacblling  with  an  ordinary  one-bladed  pjiddle,  in  front  of  which  is 
le  harpoon  slightly  elevated  above  the  deck,  and  behind  him  is  the 


812 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


1 

1 

Jj        : 

Fig.  35. 
SEAL  IIRAO,  HIIOWINO  TEETH. 


inflated  seal-Hkin  float,  the  rear  end  being  bifurcated,  showing  the 
two  flippers.    Four  cross-like  characters  denote  flying  birds. 

The  regularity  and  sameness  of  the  figures  seem  to  denote  an  attempt 
at  ornamentation  as  well  as  a  hunting  record. 

Plate  14,  figs.  4,  5,  6,  and  7,  show  specimens  made  of  reindeer  antler, 
and  are  from  Norton  Sound.  The  ornamentation  is  rude,  and  in  all 
but  one  case  consists  of  the  representation  of  animals.  In  fig.  4  tin 
design  is  of  the ''fish  trap"  pattern,  with  a  median  line  and  short 
alternate  radiating  incisions,  the  spaces  being  occupied  by  crosses. 
probably  the  simplest  and  rudest  form  of  ornamentation  excepting  tlio 

simple  straight  line.  At  one  end 
appears  to  be  an  indication  of  eyes 
and  nostrils,  but  there  is  not  suf 
flcientmarkingtoindicate  whether 
this  was  intended  for  otter  or  seal, 
The  accompanying  illustration, 
fig.  37,  represents  a  tool  the  use  of 
which  is  not  known.  "It  has  a  point  like  a  graver,"  says  Mr.  Murdoeli. 
"and  is  made  of  reindeer  antler,  ornamented  with  a  pattern  of  incisei! 
lines  and  bands,  colored  with  red  ocher,  and  was  perhaps  a  marline 
spike  for  working  with  sinew  cord."' 

Plate  41,  tig.  5,  shows  a  small  ivory  wedge,  used  in  splitting  sniali- 
pieces  of  wood.  The  specimen  bears  upon  one  side  a  nucleated  cirtlt 
with  two  lateral  radiating  lines,  different  from  the  conventional  tlowd 
symbol,  though  resembling  to  some  extent  the  circles  and  lines  shovn 
on  [)late  lil),  fig.  5.  Along  the  upper  edge  are  three  parallel  linis. 
From  the  outer  ones,  extending  inward,  are  shown  very  short  diagoiia 
lines,  being  a  rude  imitation  of  some  of  the  "fish  trap"  ])atterns. 

A  general  view  of  the  specimen,  tiiking  note  of  the  short  curve  over 
the  (drcle  to  denote  an  eyebrow,  would  suggest 
the  head  of  a  bird,  the  parallel  lines  along  the 
lower  left  side  very  much  resembling  the  mouth. 
Plate  41,  fig.  2,  is  a  small  ivory  creaser  used  in 
decorating  moccasMis.  Upon  the  sides  are  a 
series  of  parallel  lines  leaving  three  spaces,  the 
central  one  cotisisting  alternately  of  black  and  white  squares,  wliilt 
the  lateral  spaces  bear  continuous  rude  meander  or  /ig/ag  patteiii> 
The  latter  are  more  neatly  indicated  by  deeper  incisions  than  usuallv 
found  in  ivory  specimens. 

Plate  41,  fig.  3,  represents  a  bone  guard,  such  as  is  placed  over  Hit 
bow  of  a  kaiak  to  protect  it  against  floating  ice.  The  chief  ornameiita 
tion  consists  of  three  parallel  lines  extending  along  either  side,  within 
which  is  the  rude  meander  pattern,  while  from  the  outer  sides  exteiui* 
a  sort  of  herring-bone  pattern. 

Plate  41,  fig.  4,  shows  an  ornament,  broken  at  one  end,  which  appeiii! 


AAAA^ 


Fig.  36. 

ARIIANOKMENTOF  INCISIUNSK 
DENOTE  TEETH  oF  SEAL. 


'li 


'Niuth  Anunal  Keporfc  of  tho  Bureau  of  Ethnology  for  1887-88,  1892,  p.  294,  flj?  •2^*- 


895. 

3ute(l,  showing  the 

ug  birds. 

[)  denote  an  attempt 

B  of  reindeer  anthr, 
is  rudo,  and  in  all 
mals.  In  fig.  4  tlif 
ian  line  and  short 
•cnpied  by  crosses. 
ation  excepting  tlio 
t  line.  At  one  end 
m  indication  of  eyes 
ant  there  is  not  snf 
J  to  indicate  whetiii'i 
ded  for  otter  or  soal. 
anying  illustration, 
nts  a  tool  the  nsc  of 
'  says  Mr.  Mnrdodi. 
a  i)attern  of  incisei! 
perhaps  a  marline 

I  in  splitting  sniali- 
B  a  nucleateil  ciiclt 
conventional  tlowd 
les  and  lines  shown 
hree  parallel  lines, 
very  short  diagomi 
rap"  i)atterns. 
he  short  curve  over 


Fig.  36. 

RANOKMENTOF  INCISIUNSIC 
DENOTE  TEETH  (iP  SEAL. 

i^hite  squares,  v  Iiilf 
or  /ig/ag  pattt ins' 
iisions  tlian  u snail} 

8  is  placed  over  Hit 

lie  chief  oruanioiita 

g  either  side,  witliii 

outer  sides  exteiidf 


end,  which  appears 

88,  1892,  p.  294,  flg  288. ; 


11 


EXPLANATION   OF    PLATE   41. 


I  ! 


Fi; 

V\< 
Ki. 
Fi. 
Fi,. 

Fii 


1.    \N  1  DliK    I'Olt    Sl'I.HTIN(i    WALKCS    HiDK. 

I  Tat.  Xii.  1:17:111.  U.S.  N,  M.     Niiiiiviik  Island,     (•.illpcfcd  by  K.  W.  N(:,-<nii.) 

1.'.  C'i!i;.\si:k. 

(Cat.  No.  I."il4ii,  r.  S.  N.  M.     .Slc(lf,'i)lHliiii<l.) 
:>.    KoMC    (ilAIM)    1(11!    lillW    (IK    HoAl'. 

iCat.  No.  ;);!:.'l!l.  r.S.  N.  .M.     collected  by  E.  \V.  Ni-Lsoh.) 
1.    <  >I!.\A.MKN  r. 

(Cat  Ki).  :i74::i,  r.s.  n.m.) 
r>.  Ivoiiv  Wki)i;i.  ]()I!  Spi.rrriNo  Wood. 

(Cat.  N(i.  lS:.'S:i,  I.S.  \,  .M.     Nmiivak  Island.     ColU'ctcd  by  K.  AV.  NcInoii.) 
ti.    lioDKIN. 

(('at.  Nii.:i77.".LM'.S.  N.  M.     Clu'littnut.     ('(lUci'lcd  by  K.  \V.  NelMin.; 


hi 


* 


sclsiin.) 


Nflttoii.) 


11.) 


.'i  Report  uf  U    S  NatHinal  Musoum.  1895.  -  Hoffmnn. 

■i 


Plate  41, 


'!   :l 


n 


Ornamented  Utensils. 


Mf 


1 


1,1, 


ir^ 


i 

^— 

t 

t 

•1  ■  i 
t      ' 

1      ; 

':  •,' 

i|S: 


! 


f  : 


R«p<irt  »f  U    S  NatKinal  Mutnum,  IStfi.-  Hoffman 


Plate  42. 


'    I 

!  -1  ^' 

' 

•1 
■J    ■ 

1                      ■ 

1  ;:i 

1 1 

■'[   .  ■ 

1    ■' 

If  1 

. 

Ornamented  Utensils. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    42. 


I'i^,  1.  I'm:  Pi:\MiANr. 


(1,1!.  No.  li'il'.i'j,  r.  S.  N.  M.      NiiiiiMik  I>l:iiii|.     CiilliMMfil  li.v  i;.  \S '.  Nilxiii.) 


lit;.  L'.  Ttiv    I'l-ll. 

iCiii.  N(p.4:i."ii:t,  r.s.  N.  M.    (\\]iv  \',iii('ii  iMi     ('(illiTiiil  ii\  i;.  w.  NrUmi.) 
I  1-.  ;;.   II  \ii;  niiNAMi.M'. 

ii':ii.  Nil.  ;i;i)n:i,  r.s  N.  M  .     KuslnmnU.     < 'ullcTti'il  Uv  Iv  W.  NiUmi  ) 

I'i;.   I.    .■^I'l   \i;   til'.\HI>   I'OI!    IIOAT. 

H 'ill.  Nil.  ;i77."iO,  r.  .S.  N.  M.     ClmlllMiiil.     (  oM.  iiid  li\   [■:.  W    Nrl.smi.t 
I  i;,'.  ."i.    ll(Pl-r    IImoK,    I'OI!    II.VNiilNi;    11'    IlKN.SII.r.. 

-I'll.  Nil.  7;iii:!4,  r.s.  N.  M.     Cnlli  rlrd  hy  ("    I„  MrKa.v.i 
I'iu.  (i.    Sli;,\|;    (ilAlM)    I'Hl!    UiiA  I. 

ii'al.  Nii.:i7|i'il.  r.  S.  X.  M.     AimLioirininil.     ('nlltclcil  liy  !■;.  W.  Ni'Ihuii.) 
li;;.  7.  .\iii:u\v  M'ljAKni  i'i:nki{. 

(I'lit.   No.  rjT.-*!*:!.  r.  s.  \.  M.      Kuwiik  m-  l'ulu;itii   lliviT.    .MiLska.      ( 'iillci.|c(l  liy   l.in.t. 
G.  M.Stuiuv.  U.S.  N.) 


:i ' 


h 


i." 


I 


>i 


i    '■ 
,!■   i 

!! 


M 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF    THE    ESKIMOS. 


813 


to  liave  served  as  a  hsiiidle,  as  a  small  perforation  in  the  middle  seems 
to  have  been  made  for  the  purpose  of  inserting  a  cord.  The  upper 
side  or  half  of  this  ornament  is  decorated  with  zigzag  cross  lines,  while 
tlie  lower  has  the  herring-bone  pattern,  like  the  ornaments  upon  one 
side  of  the  running  figure  in  the  preceding  illustration,  plale  41,  fig.  3. 
I  Mate  41,  fig.  6,  represents  a  bodkiu,  and  is  elsewhere  referred  to  with 
respect  to  ornamentation. 

DECORATION   t'OXSISTINO   CHIEFLY    OF   CHICLES. 

The  several  objects  represented  on  i>late42  are  variously  ornamented 
in  simple  patterns.  Fig.  1  is  an  ivory  car  pendant,  which  is  creased 
spirally  from  end  to  end  by  one  continuous  line.  I'ig.  -  rei)resents  a  toy 
tish,  upon  which  is  incised  the  figure  of  a  wolf,  with  another  linear 
character  somewhat  resembling  a  crude  representation  of  the  same 
species. 

Tlie  hair  ornament  shown  in  fig.  3  on  the  same  plate  is  «lecorated 
along  the  upper  half  by  two  pairs  of  transverse  parallel  lines,  between 


<MT*55:^.L^^ 


^gggjii^i^ 


Fig.  37. 

TOOTH   oy  ANTLKH.      I'OINT    llAllltf)W. 


wliicli  arc  cross  lines  to  resemble  the  common  i>ortraiture  of  a  sus- 
pciidt'd  seine  net,  as  shown  on  plate  o!),  also  in  fig.  71)  on  jtage  .s<>.5. 

Tlie  sjtear  guard  shown  in  plate  42,  fig.  4,  bears  a  simple  vertical  line 
t'roiii  which  diverge,  downward  and  on  either  side,  three  lines,  between 
which  arc  small  punctures.  This  enlarged  tigurc  suggests  a  like  origin 
;is  the  ornamented  line  in  the  middle  of  fig.  (i,  the  latter  having  for  its 
conception,  no  doubt,  the  plant  symbol  menti()nc<l  and  figure«l  clse- 
wlieie,  particularly  in  connection  with  plate  77,  and  in  fig.  70,  i)age  .SIJ.'J. 
Compare  also  with  fig.  11,  on  plate  77,  and  other  types  of  circles  repre 
sciitcd  thereon,  which  occur  uimn  various  types  of  Eskimo  utensils  and 
oMianieiits. 

I  Mate  42,  fig.  ;">,  is  a  common  hook  made  for  use  in  suspending  various 
lionsehold  articles. 

In  addition  to  the  lateral  diverging  lines,  the  central  one  is  absent, 
'•lit  in  its  stead  a  continuation  of  perforations  from  which  radiate  three 
incisions,  made  by  means  of  a  narrow  saw  or  a  sharp  edged  file.  These 
incisions  serve  instead  of  the  narrow  or  shallow  cn'ases  noted  on  figs.  4 
and  ii.  Punctured  spots  are  also  added  to  serve  as  additional  orua- 
iiieiit.s. 


! 


*   '; 


814 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


¥ 


!  IM 


The  lower  figure  on  plate  42,  lijj.  7,  is  an  arrow  straightciier,  made  of 
ivory.  The  lower  loiigitudiual  line  has  similar,  though  more  frequently 
recurriug,  lateral  lines  than  on  fig.  (5,  while  the  side  bears  a  continuous 
row  of  nucleated  circles,  the  central  cup  like  perforations  being  unusu 
ally  large  in  comparison  to  the  rings  surrounding  them,  clearly  indicat 
ing  that  a  one-eighth-inch  auger  bit  was  used  in  their  production,  as 
a  smaller  instrument  made  s])ecially  for  incising  rings  (as  the  V-shaped 
cuts  in  the  end  of  a  piece  of  metal)  would  naturally  have  the  two  points 
efpially  pointed.     (Compare  plate  77.) 

The  reverse  of  the  side  bearing  the  median  line  bears  a  similar  inci   | 
sion  from  end  to  end,  but  the  lateral,  oblique,  radiating  lines  are  esicli 
between  one  eighth  and  one  half  inch  in  length,  somewhat  between  tlic 
two  sizes  noted  on  i)late  8.    This  is  evidently  without  significance  other 
than  that  of  ornamentation. 

In  a  private  communication  of  recent  date  Mr.  L.  M.  Turner  informs 
me,  with  reference  to  the  circle,  that  "this  ornament  is  much  more  com- 
mon south  of  Bering  Strait,  where  it  is  a  conventionalized  representa 
tion  of  a  flower.''     Mr.  Murdoch '  writes : 

Soino  <if  the  oMer  iiiipleinents  in  our  collection,  ornumeuted  with  this  iignre,  niiiv 
have  been  obtained  by  trade  from  the  sonthern  natives,  Imt  the  Point  Harrow  p«'0]ile 
certainly  know  how  to  make  it,  as  there  are  a  number  of  newly  made  articles  in  tli; 
collection  thus  ornamented.  Unfortunatolj',  wo  saw  none  of  these  objects  in  the  pidc 
ess  of  manufacture,  as  they  were  made  by  the  natives  during  odd  niouuiuts  of  leisiiic 
and  at  the  time  I  did  not  realize  tlie  importance  of  finding  out  the  process.  No  toil 
by  which  tliose  figures  could  be  made  so  accurately  was  ever  olTered  i'or  sale. 

Neither  Mr.  Turner  nor  Mr.  Dall,  both  of  whom,  as  is  well  known,  siient  loiii; 
periods  among  the  luitives  of  the  Yukon  region,  ever  observed  the  prot^ess  of  niiik 
ing  this  orujiment.  The  latter,  however,  suggests  that  it  is  perhaps  done  witli  an 
inii)rovised  centerbit,  made  by  sticking  two  iron  points  close  together  iu  the  «iul 
of  the  handle.  »  »  »  Lines  rarely  represent  any  natural  objects,  but  goii 
erally  f()nn  ratluu'  elegant  conventional  jiatterns.  most  conunonly  double  or  siiiiili 
borders,  often  Joined  by  oblique  cross  lines  or  fringed  with  short,  pointed  panillii 
lines.  *  *  *  While  weapons  are  decorated  only  with  conventional  patterns.  otliprS 
implements  of  bone  or  ivory,  especially  those  ]t(!rtaining  to  the  chase,  like  the  seiilj 
drags,  etc  ,  are  frei|uently  carve<l  into  the  shape  of  animals,  as  well  as  being  orna- 
mented with  conventional  patterns. 

Mr.  L.  M.  Turner  says,  furthermore : 

The  circles  which  have  smaller  ones  within  represent  the  so-called  "kantag"  (a| 
word  of  Siberian  origin  introduced  by  the  Russians),  or  wooden  vessels,  manul'ac- 
tured  by  Indians  and  bartered  with  the  Innuit  for  oil  and  sealskin  Itootsoles.  eti. 
These  "kantags"  are  sometimes  traded  iu  nests,  i.e.,  various  sizes,  one  within  tlie^ 
other.      (See  ligs.  4,  7,  and  10,  on  plate  77.) 

Regarding  the  "circle  figures,"  Mr.  Turner^  remarks  further : 

1  know  from  information  given  by  one  of  the  best  workers  of  bone  and  ivory,  alsojl 
pipe-bowls,  in  the  Uualigraut  (or  Unalit)  village,  near  St.  Michaels,  that  the  cnlr; 
means  a  llower  when  it  has  dentations  on  the  outer  periphery,  and  some  that  werej 
nntinislied  on  an  old  much  used  handle  for  a  kantag  (wooden  vessel)  were  also  saiiil 
by  him  to  mean  flowers. 

'Ninth  Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology  for  1887-88, 1892,  pp.  390,  Mi'l. 
^Letter  liated  February  2.'i,  1895. 


J. 

[ghtciier,  made  of 
I  more  frequently 
ears  a  continuous 
ons  being  unusu 
n,  clearly  indiciit 
3ir  production,  as 
(as  the  V-sliapcd 
vethe  two  points 

ars  a  similar  inci 
ng  lines  are  each 
wrliat  between  the 
significance  other 


1.  Turner  informs 
i  much  more  com- 
ilized  representa- 

.vitli  this  figure,  may 
Point  Harrow  p«'0])le  | 

iiiailo  articles  in  the 
le  objects  in  the  proc 
I  uionients  of  leisure, 
bhe  process.  No  foul 
^erc»l  ibr  snlc. 
1  known,  s^ient  long 

tlie  pro(!e8s  of  niak-  ,'i 
erhaps  done  with  au  f 

together  iu  the  fiid 
il  objects,  but  geu- 
nly  double  or  sin^'le ' 
ort,  pointed  piinilltl 
;ional  patterns,  otlipt; 
B  chase,  like  the  sen] 

well  as  being  orim- 


-called  "kantag"  (a| 
en  vessels,  man n lac- 
ilskin  Itootsoh's.  etr. 
sizes,  one  within  tbi 

:k8  further : 

'  bone  and  ivory.  :ils( 
haels,  that  tbc  (  i<I' 
,  and  some  that  wcif 
'essel)  were  also  suni 


5, 1892,i)p.  390,  :;!'! 


1 1 , 

m. 

1  , 

i' 

i 

.■'I     ' 


11 

,. 

h 

1 

P 

H  ■' 

Report  of  U    S   National  Museum,  1835.— Hoffman. 


Plate  43. 


Ornamented  Carvings.    Africa  and  Alaska. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    43. 


L_. 


1  i^.  1.  Fktisii  Mai>k  ok  IIiPPoi'OTAMrs  Tooth. 

(Cut.  No.  174704,  U.  S.  N.  M.     r,ukiiy;a  UiviT,  Koiiyo.     (Nillcvli'd  liv  Dorsoy  Mohuii.) 
liir.  2.  I[Aii{-i>!M-.ssiX(i  Pin. 

((Jat.  No.  1747:17,  V.  .S.  X.  ^I.     Liikiijiii  Uiver,  Koii;;ii.     Collfclpil  h.v  Doraey  Mohiin.) 
I'ij,'.  :{.    llAIH-DKKSSl.Mi    I'lX. 

(Cut.  Xi).  1747;i(),  U.  S.  X.  M.     LuUuli  Itivcr,  Kongo.     Collected  l>y  Dorsey  Moliiin.) 
Fij;.  I.  Skai,  DitAG  IIandi.k.     Ktlioy  ol' tlic  .luiinnl. 

(Ciit.  Xo.  SnOlH,  U.  S.  X.  M.     .SI.  Miclia.la,  .Mii.ska.) 


M      t 


t^   I!}! 


im 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF    THE    ESKIMOS. 


815 


I'liose  circleB  alMo  re]>ro8eiit  Ibe  arms;  jiiBt  why  I  do  not  know.  The  spots  over  ii 
,l(,i,''.s  eydid,  usnally  brown  in  color  in  the  dog,  are  also  called  Tiiq,  and  a  dog  thus 
iimikcd  is  culled  Tnqoliq.  The  word  refers  to  th«  dark  colored  portion  of  that 
i(:^i(>ii  and  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  oriliee,  but  when  the  circle  is  made  thus  ©, 
tlnii  it  refers  to  the  hole  [spot]  and  the  surronuding  part. 

I  have  elsewhere  shown  how  the  circle,  or  rjither  the  si)iral,  may  be 
(liiiwn  to  denote  mobility,  as  in  the  shoulder  Joint  of  the  Hyure  of  a 
fjrasshopper  to  denote  the  Nahuatl  symbol  for  Chapultepcc!.'  The 
circle  is  also  used  on  vsirious  figures  of  seals,  and  apparently  denotes 
the  shoulder  Joint,  as  shown  in  harpoon  head  in  the  collection  of  the 
Museum  (No.  43750).  Further  illustration  of  the  conventional  use  of 
circles  is  given  under  the  caption  of  Conventionalizing,  with  plate  75. 

The  employment  of  an  iron  or  steel  bit,  evid'iuce  of  which  appears 
to  have  been  one  about  three  sixteenths  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  is  shown 
upon  a  neatly-carved  seal  obtained  in  St.  Michael's,  here  represented  as 
tlie  lower  right-hand  figure  on  i>late  43,  fig.  4.  The  si)ecimen  was  used 
as  a  seal  drag,  two  perforations  beneath  the  reach  communicating  with  a 
larger  one  at  the  lower  part  of  the  abdomen,  through  which  the  neces- 
sary cord  was  })as8ed.  These  bit  marks  are  in  the  form  of  decorative 
circles,  the  central  holes  being  in  each  filled  with  a  wooden  peg.  the 
eyes,  though  smaller,  also  being  plugged  with  hard  wood. 

I'late  37,  fig.  4,  represents  a  specimen  of  bag  handle  or  <lrill  bow 
from  Point  Barrow,  showing  a  number  of  nucleated  rings,  only  one 
luuleus  being  without  the  second  outer  ring,  indicating  that  these 
circles  are  made  with  different  instruments. 

Similar  nutileated  circles  appear  upon  specimens  from  an  entirely 
rciuote  locality.  In  fig.  1  of  the  rem.iining  specimens  upon  plate  43  we 
liave  a  fetish  made  of  hippopotamus  tooth,  secured  by  'Sir.  Dorsey 
Mohuu  on  the  Lukuga  River,  in  the  Kongo  State,  Africa.  The  nuclei 
arc  ])robably  one  eighth  of  an  inch  in  depth,  while  the  circle  surround 
inii  each  one-fimrth  inch  in  diameter.  The  groove  clearly  indicates 
tlic  use  of  a  metal  tool  in  every  respect  resembling  the  circles  and 
rcsi)cctive  central  pits  upon  the  ornamented  drill  bow  shown  in  fig.  4 
oil  plate  37. 

The  specimen  referred  to  is  an  imitation  of  the  human  form,  the  head 
sliuiitly  bowed  forward,  the  arms  close  to  the  body,  with  the  hands 
rtaehing  toward  each  other  before  the  body.  The  body  is  represented 
iis  cur  ott"  a  little  below  the  umbilicus,  and  is  scooped  out  below  as  if 
intended  to  be  placed  upon  a  rod. 

Another  specimen,  fig.  2,  represents  a  hair  dressing  pin,  from  the  same 
locality,  25  inches  long,  with  a  sharp  point  below,  while  the  almost  flat 
top  or  head  is  ornamented  with  five  similar  nucleated  circles,  each 
til rec  sixteenths  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 

Tlio  remaining  specimen,  fig.  3,  from  the  Lukuga  Kiver,  Kongo  State, 
Vliiia.  is  a  slightly  concave  disk,  bearing  five   series  of  concentric 


'  "  Beginnings  of  Writing."    Appleton  &  Co.,  N.  Y.,  1895.    j).  90,  tig.  49. 


i"     • 


It    . 


816 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


% 


cJi'cles,  tlie  <;(5iitral  i)erf(»ation  in  tho  middle  passing  ontirely  through 
the  piwre  of  ivory,  wliicli  at  that  i>oiiit  is  three  -  fourths  of  an  incli 
thick.  The  eindes  were  also  made  with  a  metal  tool,  more  likely  of 
native  manufacture,  out  of  a  piece  of  foreign  iron  or  steel,  the  end 
of  which  was  tiled  A  shaped,  as  mentioned  in  connection  with  the 
instruments  of  the  Eskimo. 

Tliese  African  specimens,  two  nuide  of  hipi)opotanui8  teeth  and  one 
of  ivory,  are  similar  in  texture  to  the  nuiterials  employed  by  the 
J'iSkimo,  and  the  process  adopted  practically  tiie  same  because  of  such 
texture. 

These  illustrations  are  here  introduced  not  with  the  object  of  tracing 
the  migration  or  transmission  of  a  given  pattern,  but  because  of  tho 
interest  naturally  excited  by  the  independent  discovery  of  a  process  of 
workmanship  found  to  have  developed  in  such  widely  remote  localities. 

In  northern  Africa  the  same  form  of  circle,  nucleated  and  as  concen- 
tric rings,  is  very  miuth  employed  for  decorative  purposes.  Wiiat  the 
original  signification  may  have  been  it  is  now,  jierhaps,  impossible  to 
determine,  and  it  may  be  that  in  the  two  localities  to  be  referred  to 
below  tlie  designs  were  brought  from  Europe,  aud  probably  originally 
from  the  Ottoman  Empire. 

On  plate  J 1  is  shown  a  leather,  brass  mounted  knife  sheath,  at  the 
upper  end  of  wiiich  is  a  tolerably  fair  attempt  at  a  figure  c«msisting  of 
concentric  rings,  while  beneath  it  a  series  of  rectangular  ligures  within 
one  another.  The  designs  are  produced  by  pressure  from  the  under  side, 
the  i)atterns  having  been  made  before  the  ]>iece  of  sheet  metal  was 
placed  about  the  sheath.     This  example  is  from  Tangier,  in  Morocco. 

From  an  anti(iue  subterranean  chapel  at  Carthage  was  obtained, 
about  fifteen  years  since,  a  collection  of  Christian  lamps  and  other  evi- 
dences of  tlie  secret  profession  of  the  then  new  faitli,  among  the  orna- 
mentation upon  some  of  which  relics  are  many  symbols  of  Christianity 
and  of  monograms  of  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  but  the  most  interest- 
ing in  the  present  connection  is  the  recurrence  of  the  very  widespread 
figure  of  concentric  rings,  as  also  of  squares  or  re(;tangular  ligures 
within  one  another,  as  will  be  observed  upon  the  illustration  of  the 
Koman  lamp  in  plate  45. 

This  illustration  is  re[)roduced  from  an  article  by  A.  Delathe  on 
Carthage  I'antique  chapelle  Souterraine  de  la  (volliue  de  Saint-Louis.' 

Upon  another  lamp  of  the  same  general  form,  from  the  same  locality, 
is  a  cross  pattee,  the  arms  of  which  are  severed  with  nucleated  and 
concentric  rings,  exactly  like  many  of  those  upon  Alaskan  objects. 

The  larger  rings  and  square  figures  upon  the  lamp  shown  in  plate  t~> 
resemble  those  upon  the  brass-ornamented  Moorish  knife  sheath  from 
Tangier,  Morocco  (plate  44),  where  it  was  secured  by  Lieutenant  A.  V. 
Niblack,  U.  S.  N.    The  chief  interest  lies  in  the  two  designs  near  the 


'Cosmos,  lievuo  «le  Sciences  et   tie   leurs   applications,  Paris,  Nouvelle  S<5r,  5^". 
1896  (March  21),  p.  495. 


Report  of  U,  S.  National  Mu»eum,  189S.— Hoffman. 


Plate  44. 


'..i/iH', 


-^^y 


C^O'"; 


;o*^. 


Knife  Sheath.    Tanqiers,  Morocco 


lit 


)m 


lis* 


V. 

i  r     ■ 

f  1.     1 

ii;  1 

, , . 

' 

li' .. 

:      ■ 

:   ^ 

'■■^ 

-   •■         1 

li  ^ 

11^ 

If 


Report  of  U.  S.  Nnt'Onal  Muieum,  IHQ'i.      Huffrnsn. 


PLATE  45. 


" '  RC  ' 

'  ■^'''  Ht  'tr 

,4'V  jH|'' 

It 

Roman  Lamp.    Carthage. 


■u 


1 


i 

■ 

1 

'M 

i:.; 

t     ^^H 

I 
1 

! 

.t 
1 

• 

1    : 
1    i 

■•ii 

■ 

i 

i 

i 

1  i'  ' 

ORAIMIIC    ART   OF  THK   ESKIMOS. 


817 


top — one  a  tl);ur«  of  r(>ctuii;;leK  witliiii  oiw  aiiotlior,  and  tlio  other  a 
li;;iire  of  riulo  riii^H  siirroiiiMliiiK  oiio  aiiotlier. 

It  is  Htniiiv;^  tliiit  tlu'so  two  (lesions  hIiomUI  be  HU};^rast4Ml  ii))oii  the 
Uoniaii  hiinp  tVoin  Carthage,  the  hitter  of  an  t^arly  rinisthm  period, 
iiiid  from  tht^  same  quart«>rof  At'riea.  It  is  inohabh'  that  )M»th  designs 
may  iia\e  their  ori^^in  in  the  ]u>enliar  Oriental  patterns  so  freely 
tiMphtyed  in  >ro)nunniedan  eonntries,  in  some  of  wld<;li  they  even  ante- 
iliite  tlu^  birtli  of  Molianiined.  The  ocenrrence  of  liki^  desi;;ns  in  Turk- 
estan is  also  mentioned,  and  their  appaient  absenct^  in  Hindustan, 
as  ilhistrated  by  tlie  colU'ctions  in  the  National  MustMini,  is  rather 
riMnarkable. 

The  delicate  /.iii/MH  lines  on  the  niiddh-  band  of  the  sheatli  are  aitpar- 
cntly  nnide  in  the  Haine  nuinuer  as  like  patterns  on  Polynesian  weapons 
and  ornaments,  by  inessin;*-  forward  upon  the  tool,  and  at  the  Hauie 
time  rocking  it  from  side  to  side,  the  lateral  incised  ])oints  bein^  made 
as  the  lateral  cuttinj;  edj;e  is  depressed,  and  again  liberated  when 
till  iiinj,'  the  tool  toward  the  opposite  side  to  nuike  a  similar  nnirk.  The 
work  is  ])erformcd  rapidly,  and  nniy  be  crudely  thou{;li  similarly  imi- 
lilted  by  means  of  a  very  narrow  chisel  and  a  piece  of  hai'd  wood. 

The  recent  discoveries  in  I'^ffypt  by  Mr.  l-'limlers-Petiie  are  of  so 
lii^iii  an  interest  to  archa'olojry  {generally,  that  a  brief  refereiuu^  thereto 
■I  ly  be  of  interest,  especially  so  because  some  of  the  i)ottery  is  de(!o 
rated  not  only  with  ti<;ures  of  aninnils  and  birds,  but  a  common  decora- 
tive motive  which  represents  "a  h>nf;  boat  with  two  cabins,  an  ensijiii 
l>ole.  and  numy  oars;  sometimes  the  lij^uro  of  a  nnm  is  added."  A  red 
ware,  said  to  have  been  imj)orted  from  the  Mediterranean  rejjion,  bears 
decorations  of  ''dents  de  loup,''  tlowers,  and  i)Iant8. 

Of  {jreat  interest  is  the  di.scovery  of  vessels  bearinjj^  numerous 
tij,aires  of  <!on<"entri<r  circles,  vjjses  of  nuler  type  than  the  lathe-made 
cciamies  of  the  Efjyptians,  and  recognized  to  be  the  workmanship  of  a 
foreign  people. 

Tliiso  iiitiiiih-rs,  tliti  cvid^ncos  of  whoso  K*'"«'rJil  cnltnro,  Itcliefs,  and  fimoral  cns- 

I s  show  them  to  hiivo  been  striiiifjers  in  the  Nili-  ^'illley.     Not  a  single  (h-tuil  of 

their  culture  did  they  hold  in  common  with  the  KgyptianH.  Mon-over,  their  nnm- 
''iT,  which  was  found  to  have  spread  over  a  considerahh;  ]iortion  of  upper  Kgypt, 
tViPiu  Aliydos  t<»  (Jebclen,  over  one  hundred  miles,  whilst  their  inliuenci^  was  <d)srrv- 
mIiIc  from  Tenneh  to  llieraconpolis,  i.  e.,  over  three  hundred  ami  fifty  miles,  and 
iilisolute  control  of  the  region  which  they  assumed  and  which  is  shown  by  the  total 
alisciice  of  any  object  lecalling  Kgyptian  civilization,  show  them  not  only  to  have 
1"  111  invaders,  but  invaders  who  once  had  swept  ov«'r  tln^  region  and  who,  settling 
ilown,  had  lived  there  for  a  considerable  period,  borrowing  little  or  nothing  of  the 
jp<  ((jdo  whose  land  they  occupied.' 

In  connection  with  the  report  made  by  Mrs.  ('ornelius  Stevenson, 
whose  words  I  have  «iuoted,  Doctor  1).  (».  lirinton  remarks  that  these 


'Proceedings  of  the  American  Fhilosoidiieal  Socit^ty,  I'hiladelphia,  I'a.,  XXXV 
\^W.     p.  r.7,  riate  IV. 

NAT  MUS  95 52 


I,'''' 


.i: 


f  F 


m 


818 


IS  i  -!■ 


U 


1' 

1^. 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  181t5. 


intruders  were  probably  Libyans — that  is,  Berbers — the  ethnography 
of  which  stock  has  been  a  special  study  with  him.  Doctor  Brinton 
remarks:  "  This  identiti(;ation,  I  believe,  will  finally  be  established.  If 
we  examine  the  configuration  of  the  Nile  \'alley  and  its  surroundings, 
no  other  theory  is  tenable,  i)r()viding  the  Libyan  stock  extended  that 
far  south  of  the  Mediterranean  at  a  date  3()(.M)  li.  (J,  \N'e  know  they 
did,  and  much  earlier,  from  their  very  early  presence  in  east  Africa." 
Itajjpears  to  be  conclusively  shown  by  Doctor  Brinton's  further  argu 
ments  that  the  "new  race"  was  of  the  Libyan  stock. 

The  origin  of  the  concentric  circles  and  other  incised  ornamentation 
as  decorative  motives  on  this  pottery  would  seem  to  have  come  from 
the  Mediterranean,  perha|>s  north  of  it,  where  a  iwav  approach  is  found 
in  later  Xeolithic  stations  in  Itaiy,  Spain,  and  in  the  lower  strata  of 
Ilasserlik.  Could  there  have  been  a  prehistorit;  comnion  center  of 
develojmjent  of  this  very  common  ornament  in  northwestern  I'Uirope, 
from  which  it  was  carried  into  Si;andinavia,  and  the  valleys  of  certain 
portions  of  France,  where  its  occurrence  is  so  frequently  remarked  in 
bronze  and  other  articles  of  personal  adornment? 

It  has  been  shown  that  trade  routes  existed  in  prehistoric  times 
between  Italy  and  the  Scandinavian  Peninsula  and  Denmark,  the  scat- 
tered graves  en  route  pioducing  amber  (ov  one  side  and  ornaments  of 
south  European  manufacture  on  the  other.  Similar  trade  routes,  which 
were  also  (culture  routes,  have  also  been  suggested  as  having  existed 
between  Scandinavia  across  northern  ICurope  and  Asia  down  into  India. 
Why  could  not  like  routes  have  been  foHowed  in  prehistoric  times  along 
the  lines  of  the  localities  pioducing  so  nuich  jewelry  and  fictile  ware 
chiefly  ornamented  with  sjjirals  and  concentric  rings? 

That  tra<le  routes  existed  between  the  countries  of  the  ]Mediterra- 
nean,  even  as  far  cast  as  ^lacedonia,  has  been  well  established,  and 
the  following  remarks  are  of  interest  in  this  connection : 

In  the  June  number  of -'The  Strand  Magazine'''  appeared  an  illus- 
trated article  devoted  to  finds  of  coins  in  (Ireat  Britain,  one  illustration 
in  particular  attracting  my  attention  because  of  the  i)resence  upon  the 
reverse  of  a  nucleated  ring,  which  character  in  this  connection  appears 
to  have  no  apparent  relation  with  the  other  objects  represented  upon 
the  coin  and  witli  which  it  is  associated. 

U])on  reference  to  the  various  works  on  the  coinage  of  the  ancient 
Britons,  several  curicms,  interesting,  and  apparently  new  facts  present 
themselves — facts  whi(!h  may  with  propriety  be  here  referred  to.  The 
subject  seems  to  me  to  be  closely  rehited  to  that  under  ccmsideraticm  in 
so  far  as  it  relates  to  trade  or  culture  routes,  and  the  adoption  of  char 
acters  by  a  people  with  whose  sigidfication  or  import  they  may  be  unac 
quainted,  and  the  ultinnite  replacement  of  sucih  char.acters  which  may 
be  of  importance  in  and  a  necessary  part  of  the  prototype,  by  the  sub 


'  Luiuloii,  18!H>. 


GRAPHIC   AKT   OF    THE    ESKIMOS. 


81}) 


stitutioii  of  their  own  characters  or  symbols,  through  whi«;h  change  the 
siyiiilication  of  the  legend  upon  the  |)rototyi)e  is  lost,  and  would  no 
longer  be  recognized  by  tlie  authors  thereof. 

1  have  already  referred  to  the  coinage  of  the  Hritons,  as  treated  in 
tlu'  admirable  work  of  Doctor  -lohn  Evans,'  to  whii^h  the  reader  is 
iclrrred  for  full  details  aiul  ample  illustrations  in  support  of  the  sug- 
f-cstions  ventured  below. 

1  luive  had  occasion  to  refer  to  liritish  coins  bearing  the  tigure  of  the 
liorsc,  with  additional  legs  to  denote  that  more  than  one  such  animal 
w  lis  intended.  Such  practice  of  representing  a  i>art  for  the  whole,  or 
vice  versa,  was  referred  to  as  synecdoche,  an<l  as  being  common  to  the 
pictographic  records  of  the  Xorth  American  Indians. 

On  [>late  43,  fig.  .">,  is  the  representation  of  an  uninscribed  British 
p(I(l  coin,  upon  the  reverse  ot  which  appears  the  outline  of  a  horse, 
cacli  leg  divided  into  two,  so  as  to  resemble — in  fact,  give — eight  legs, 
and  suggesting  the  two  horses  noticeable  upon  the  obverse  of  the  typical 
prototype,  as  shown  in  (ig.  1  <mi  the  same  plate.  Now,  looking  at  the 
jcjfs  of  the  horse  on  the  reverse  of  fig.  l*,  there  will  be  seen  the  same 
iiiunber  of  legs,  with  the  cxcei)tion  that  tiie  engraver  of  this  piece  has 
united  each  pair  at  the  fetlocks,  so  as  to  terminate  in  one  hoof,  instead 
of  two  hoofs,  as  in  some  other  examples. 

In  the  specimens  of  the  same  series  of  coins  the  successive  copying 
of  designs  has  resulted  in  solid  legs  instead  of  by  pairs,  thus  returning 
to  a  pattern  on  which  but  a  single  animal  is  portrayed. 

I'.ut  to  return  from  this  digression.  It  is  necessary  to  show  how  the 
oriiiir  i  patterns  came  to  be  employed  by  the  designers  for  the  liritish 
coins.  It  has  been  pretty  clearly  proven  by  Doctor  .John  Evans,  Mr. 
Hawkins,  and  others,  that  the  ancient  Britons  were  possessed  of  money 
Ion<;  bel'ore  tlie  time  of  ( 'icsav's  visit.     The  distinct  mention  of  money 


I  "The  Coins  of  tbe  Ancient  JJritoiis."    LoimIou:  1H64-1890. 

Seo  also  Adani8on'8  Account  of  the  discovery  at  Hexham,  in  Northumberland,  of 
AnL;l((-Saxon  roins  called  Stvcas.  lioyal  Society  of  Auti<|uarian8  of  London  [IHIUfJ. 
llliistnitions  of  IttI  coins. 

I  loctoi-  Stiikdey's  ' '  Twenty-three  ))latcB  of  the  Coins  of  tuc  Ancient  ISritish  Kiiij^s," 
1.(111(1(111.     |17t!."».] 

Doctor  Kvaus  remarks  that  "the  coins  themselves  are  most  inaccurately  drawn," 
\(>t  they  are  interesting  as  showing  a  certain  degree  of  evolution  and  alteration  of 
( liiiiMcters  V  iiich  the  t'ligravers  coi>ied  or  attempted  to  copy  from  the  prototypes. 

Niinimoriim  Antiiiiiornni  Scriniis  Hodleianis  liiconditorum  Catalogus  cum  com- 
incntario  tabnlis  icneis  et  appendice.     [Oxonii  ?]  A.  D.  IT'iO.     Plates. 

Nnmmi  lUitannici,  of  inten'st  in  ]>resent  connection,  are  shown  on  I'late  XVI. 

Annals  of  the  Coinag»»  of  liritain,  by  the  Kev.  Httgers  K'uding.  H.  I).  I  vols. 
I.iindou.  IXV.K     I'latcs  and  map. 

ilio  Silver  Coins  of  Kngland,  by  Kdwanl  Hawkins,  I'.  K',  S,,  etc.  London,  18S7. 
><  .  riatesand  ma)*.  (Jives  illustrations  of  i$ritish  coins  similar  to  othorderivatives 
of  the  Macedonian  riiillipus. 

Celtic  Inscriptions  on  (iaulish  and  liritish  Coins.  Heale  I'oste.  London,  1861. 
i'latcs  i-xi, 


:V. 


.1" 


i  { 


!,illl' 


ill 


ill. 


11 


!■ 


820 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


occurs  ill  various  classic  writinjjs  of  the  time  of  Ca'sar,  and  yearly  trib- 
ute is  noted  by  Dion  Cassius,  Eutropiiis,  Diodorus,  Strabo,  and  others. 
Doctor  I'iVans  remarks: 

It  may  iii<lt;oil  bo  ui'g<-(l  that  these  writers  tire  all  of  tliein  later  than  Cii-Har;  hut 
it  Ih  tu  Ite  oltHorveil  that  the  iuforiiiation  upon  which  some  uf  them  wrote  \  uh  derived 
from  earlier  Hoarcos,  iiiul  that  not  oue  of  tiiem  treats  the  jiresence  of  gold  and  nilver 
in  Ihis  country  as  of  re<^(nt  date,  or  appears  to  have  had  the  remotest  concejition 
that  in  the  time  of  .Julius Ciiaar  it  was  destitute  of  them.> 

Commerce  between  the  flauls  and  Britons  existed  lon^  anterior  to 
the  i)eriod  of  the  Uoman  invasion,  and  a  native  coinage  existed  also 
amonj;:  the  ( Jatils.  The  intercourse  of  the  Pli(cnicians  and  lUitons  was 
also  of  an  early  date,  and  the  founding  of  the  Greek  colony  of  Massiliu 
(Marseilles) — usually  placed  at  about  li.  C.  GOO — also  aided  in  civilizing 
that  part  of  (laul,  where  the  neighboring  Gauls  no  doubt  first  learned 
of  the  usages  of  tiivilized  life,  the  effect  of  sucli  actjuirements  gradually 
extending  toward  the  channel  settlements,  and  finally  across  and 
among  the  British  tribes.  From  this  center  of  civilization,  says  Doctor 
Evans,  the  Gauls  became  acquainted  with  the  sirt  of  coining. 

The  early  silver  coins  of  Massilia  (and  none  in  gold  are  known)  were  occasionally 
imitated  in  the  surrounding  country;  hut  when,  abotit  the  year  15.  C.  305,  the  gold 
mines  of  Crenides  (or  Philippi)  were  acquired  by  Philip  II  of  Macedon,  and  worked 
so  as  to  produce  about  £250,000  worth  of  gold  per  annum,  the  general  currency  of 
gold  coins,  which  had  before  been  of  very  limited  extent,  became  much  nu)re  exten- 
sive, and  the  stater  of  Philip — the  n^gahi  uumismo  of  Horace — became  everywhere 
diffused,  and  seems  .at  once  to  have  been  seizetl  on  by  the  barbarians  who  came  in 
contact  with  Greek  civilization  as  an  object  of  imit.'ition.  In  fJaul  this  was 
especially  the  case,  and  the  whole  of  the  gold  coinage  of  that  <ountry  may  be  said 
to  consist  of  imitation,  more  or  less  rude  and  degenerate,  of  the  Macedonian 
Philippus.' 

Doctor  Evans  further  remarks  : 

Another  reason  for  the  adojttion  of  the  Philippus  as  the  model  for  iniit.ation  in  tlu; 
Gaulish  coinage  lias  been  found  in  the  probahility  that  when  Hrennus  plundered 
Gree(!e,  H.  C.  27it,  he  carried  away  n.  great  treasure  of  thtwe  coins,  which  thus  became 
the  gold  currency  of  (ianl.  This  would,  however,  have  had  moreeffect  in  I'annonin, 
from  whence  the  army  of  Itrennus  came,  than  in  the  more  western  (Jaul. 

On  plate  40,  fig.  1,  is  reproduced  a  type  of  the  Philippus,  the  lau- 
reate head  upon  the  obverse  representing  Apollo  (or,  ai^cording  to 
some,  of  young  Hercules),  while  on  the  reverse  is  shown  a  charioteer 
in  a  biga,  with  the  name  of  Philij)  below  a  horizontal  line  in  the 
exergue. 

The  biga  on  these  coins  of  Philippus  II  refers  to  the  victories  of 
Philip  at  Olympia.    The  resemblance  to  Apollo  may  have  been  snj: 
gested  by  some  relation  to  that  identification  of  Hercules  and  the  sviii 
which  prevailed  in  Asia  at  a  later  time,  and  possibly  as  early  as  that  of 


'  "  The  Coins  of  the  Ancient  Britons."    Lon«lon :  ISC-l-lSiN),  p.  20. 
« Idem.,  p.  24. 


i!^ 


I  yearly  trib- 
,  and  others. 


inn  Cti'Har;  but 
it«  V  as  derived 
yold  iiiid  silver 
;o8t  coiieeptiou 


^  anterior  to 
existed  also 
:  Uritons  was 
^  of  Massiliii 

in  civilizinjLj 
first  learned 
its  gradually 

across  and 
,  says  Doctor 


re  occasionally 
;.  3fir),  the  gold 
»n,  iind  worke<l 
ral  currency  of 
ch  more  exten- 
tuo  everywhere 
13  who  caine  in 
Jiinl  this  was 
ly  may  be  said 
ie  Macedonian 


nutation  in  the 
nus  plundered 
3h  thus  becani(> 
3t  in  I'annonia, 
ml. 

ms,  the  lau- 

uncording  to 

a  charioteer 

line  in  the 

victories  of 
e  been  suji 
and  the  sun 
•ly  as  that  (if 

1>.  20. 


I!     i 


I 


>/ 


I !!  I : 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    46. 

Fi}".  1.  Stater  of  Philip  II.  of  Maocdon. 

Fig.  2.  Uniiiscribed  ^^okl  coin  of  iiiicieiit  l^ritoiis,  lieliev»Ml  to  ha\  o  liccn  (lesijiiicd  nfter 
stater  of  riiili]».     (iold;  weijufht,  111  Kn>i»>*- 

I'ifi.  15.  KesciiildcH  jjicccdiiifj;',  tliough  bust  and  horse  face  toward  left.  AVt-ijiht,  114 
fj;iiiiiis. 

Fig.  1.  Also  iininH<'ril)ed  and  of  gold.  The  lillet  is  of  leaves  turned  n])ward  ;  llic  liorae 
!H  disiointf<l,  and  greater  dejiartun^  from  the  ])rototyi)o  is  a])i)arent. 

Fig. 5.  Another  gold  imitation  of  the  stater,  but  still  greater  dissimilitrity  is  appar- 
ent on  the  reverse. 

Fig.  (!.  live  small  dots  arc  introduced  in  the  face,  so  as  to  cover  tins  sjiaoe  between 
the  eyes  and  hair.  IJeneath  the  horse,  th(>  helmet,  visible  in  the  stater,  has 
become  a  circle  surrounded  by  small  <lots. 

F'ig.  7.  The  dejjarture  from  the  iirotolyjie  is  still  more  interesting  in  this  sjx'cimen — 
!»  nucleated  circle,  a  jilain  circle,  and  a  pellet  ajtitearing  beneath  tlu'  horse 
in  place  of  the  helmet.  Doctor  l^vans.  from  whom  these  references  were 
obttiined,  remarks  that  this  specimeu  shows  ''a  curious  inst.anee  of  extreme 
degra<lation  from  the  type  of  the  Phillipus  on  the  reverse." 

I'iil.  S.  The  headdress  resembles  a  cruciform  ornament,  with  two  open  crescents 
l)laced  back  to  biick  iu  the  center.  The  reverse  bears  the  horse,  with  both 
a  circle  and  a  wheel-shaped  ornameut  in  lieu  of  the  hehuet. 


;l 


ReoolnfU,  S    National  Musejin    1835— Hot'f, 


<i<fiit'tl  after 

^Vfijrlit,  HI 

1;  tlit'liorse 

rent. 

ty  is  iippar- 

ice  lii'tweeii 


Plate  46. 


))C('llll('tl — 

till'  liorse 
Uircs  wore 
)rextrfnie 

eresreiits 
with  both 


British  Imitations  of  Macedonian  Stater. 


!g&. 


[I  I 


i,* 


GRAPHIC  ART  OP  THE  ESKIMOS. 


821 


Philip  II.'  Between  the  Itorses  and  base  line  is  the  figure  of  a  helmet, 
sufijjestin};  the  hea<l  jjear  of  the  slain  over  which  the  victor  is  driving. 
Oil  some  specimens  the  helmet  is  replaced  by  the  fulmen,  a  A,  or  the 
(J reek  /'. 

Uecause  of  the  limited  space,  the  wheel  of  the  chariot  is  rather  oval, 
suggesting  perspective  on  the  engraving,  though  on  later  imitations 
tliis  can  not  be  claimed  for  the  elliptical  form  of  the  wheel  or  the 
character  substituted  therefor.  "The  earliest  of  the  (iaulisli  imita- 
tions," saya  Doctor  Evans,^  "follow  the  i>rototype  pretty  closely,  but 
eventually  both  the  head  and  the  biga  become  completely  transformed.'' 

The  earliest  British  coins  showing  such  imitation  of  the  Philip])us 
are  believed  to  be  of  the  period  of  ir)0-20(>  B.  C,  although  the  death 
of  Philip  11  took  place  15.  i\  .'{,'i6,  so  that  his  coins  began  to  be 
imitated  in  Gaul  about  H.  0.  3(K). 

The  author  whom  I  have  above  quoted  says  also  that  coins  reduce  in 
weight  for  the  sake  of  the  small  gain  of  the  governing  })ower;  and 
coincident  with  such  reducti<m  in  weight,  and  perhaps  size,  there  is  a 
remarkable  change  in  types,  in  each  successive  imitation,  thus  depart- 
ing more  and  more  from  the  original  prototype.  "The  reduction  of  a 
complicated  and  artistic  design  into  a  symmetrical  figure  of  easy  execu- 
tion was  the  object  of  each  successive  engraver  of  the  dies  for  these 
coins,  though  probably  they  were  themselves  unaware  of  any  undue 
saving  of  tnmble  on  their  part  or  of  the  results  which  ensued  from  it." ' 

By  reference  to  the  illustrations  as  figs.  4  and  r»,  and  plate  47,  figs.  .*> 
and  S,  examples  selected  from  many  diverse  forms,  there  will  be  observetl 
a  most  remarkable  deviation  in  engraving  from  the  original  ty\n\  The 
wreath  and  hair  become  so  strangely  altered  as  to  be  scarcely  recog 
ni/iible,  a  few  geometri*'  or  other  simple  figures  serving  in  place  of  the 
leaves  and  h)cks.  These  finally  result  in  a  cross  like  figure,  as  in  plate 
17,  figs.  1  and  2,  while  in  some  still  other  imitations  the  head  is  repre- 
s(Mite<l  by  an  ear  of  grain,  like  wheat  or  rye  (designated  by  Doctor 
Evans  as  corn). 

The  most  interesting  changes  occur,  however,  upon  the  reverse  of 
tlie  imitations,  and  it  is  to  these  changes  that  I  wish  to  make  special 
r'-ierence. 

As  stated,  the  typical  Philippus  bears  beneath  the  horses  a  helmet, 
as  shown  upon  the  illustration  in  plate  40,  fig.  1.  This  article  of  hea<l 
gear  may  or  may  not  have  been  known  to  the  (lauls,  and  if  it  were,  it 
is  more  than  probable  that  the  Britons  were  unfamiliar  with  it,  being 
more  remote  from  the  peoples  by  whom  such  defensiv*^  armor  was 
used,  so  that  even  if  the  helmet  was  represented  upon  (laulish  imita- 
tions, the  British  engraver  seems  to  have  ignored  the  exact  form  and 


'  Kckhel.     Quoted  at  sccoikI  liiiiid  from  Nuiiii.siiiiitn  ITelloiiina,  by  William  Murtiii 
I.<  akt'.     London,  18H<),  in  footnote. 

"I'ho  Coins  of  Iho  Aucieut  IJritons."     London,  18«U-1H!»0,  p.  24. 
Iilem,,  p.  28. 


m 


iif) 


11  ■• 


I  ..  r 


fit; 


Hi 


'fi ;. 


!1  '•■ . 


V 


.  II 
■  1 

' 

1; 

1 

; 

• 

1 

^ 

.;  ,1. 

822 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


to  have  made  wliat  he  tliou{i(1it  iiuiy  have  been  intended,  or  ]>erliaps 
even  ventured  to  introduce  a  iSritisli  symbolic  ligure,  the  isigniftcation 
of  which  he  di«l  i'oinprehend. 

It  is  probabli^,  also,  that,  in  the  abseiu^e  of  {jood  tools  for  engraving 
metals,  some  of  the  simpler  designs  were  maile  by  using  a  pointed 
punch  or  like  tool,  and  punching  the  patterns  or  parts  of  ]iatterns 
desired.  The  pellet,  surrounded  by  a  ring  of  i)ellets,  was  equivalent 
to  a  ring  with  its  nucleus,  as  in  plate  40,  tig.  8.  The  figure  also  pre- 
sents itself  as  a  circle  with  four  small  pellets  arranged  in  the  form  of  a 
cross,  and  jdate  4fl,  figs.  2  and  0,  and  finally  in  the  semblance  of  a  wheel 
with  six,  seven,  or  eight  spokes,  illustrations  of  which  are  given  in 
plate  46,  tigs.  7  and  8,  and  plate  47,  tigs.  1,  2,  and  H.  Leaving  off  the 
circle  suggested  a  cross,  as  in  the  former,  and  a  star,  as  in  plate  47,  fig. 
3,  both  without  doubt  Druidical  symbols,  as  was  also  the  nucleated 
ring,  of  all  of  which  numerous  examples  occur.  This  cross  or  star  form 
ultimately  gave  rise  to  imitations  of  crab-like  objects,  which  in  turn 
were  interpreted  to  denote  figures  resembling  the  hand.  Such  gradual 
though  i>ersistent  imitation  resulted  in  some  remarkably  dissimilar 
patterns,  as  may  be  noted  by  comparing  the  typical  Philippus  in  plate 
46,  tig.  1,  with  the  illustration,  plate  40,  figs".  5  and  0,  while  beneath  the 
figure  of  a  disjointed  horse  on  plate  47,  fig.  3,  the  star  survives;  while 
the  head  upon  the  obverse  retains  but  a  few  rectangular  marks  to  den<>te 
leaves,  while  the  right-hand  upper  figure  signifies  the  eye,  and  the  lower 
broken  circle,  bearing  a<-Ghai)ed  attachment,  the  mouth. 

The  A,  which  has  been  referred  to  as  a  variant,  an<l  rarely  occurring 
beneath  the  body  of  the  horse,  has  been  reproduced  as  a  triangle,  the 
angles  of  which  consist  of  nucleated  circles  connected  by  short  lines. 
This  symbol  is  also  an  astronomical  character,  and  is  of  frequent  occur- 
rence on  various  petroglyphs  located  in  that  an^a  of  country  formerly 
occupied  by  the  several  tribes  of  Indians  composing  the  Shoshonian 
linguistic  family. 

Again,  the  same  object  figures  extensively  in  the  mnemonic  records 
of  the  Ojibwa  Indians,  especially  those  records  relating  to  the  sha- 
mauistic  ritual  of  the  Mide'wiwin,  or  Grand  Medicine  Society,  elsewhere 
described  in  detail.'  Another  symbol  found  in  lieu  of  the  triangle, 
though  without  doubt  a  variant  of  it,  resembles  an  Ojibwa  symbol  to 
denote  "  the  mystic  power  of  looking  into  the  earth  and  there  discov- 
ering sacred  objects."  It  consists  of  three  rings,  or  perhaps  even 
nucleated  rings,  placed  in  the  form  of  a  triangle,  a  wavy  line  extending 
around  the  upper  circle  and  downward  to  either  side  toward  the  lower 
ones,  denoting  "  lines  of  vision."  What  the  signification  of  the  char- 
acter upon  the  coins  may  have  been  it  is  imijossible  to  imagine,  unless 
it  were  merely  a  variant  of  the  A ,  which  in  turn  may  have  been  a  con 
ventioualized  form  of  the  helmet,  as  shown  in  the  typical  Philippus  on 


'  See  the  writer's  exposition  of  this  ritual  in  the  Seventh  Annual  Report  of  the 
Bureau  of  Ethnology  for  1885-86,  1891,  p.  143. 


or  ]>(>rliap8 
dgiiiftcutioi) 

r  engraving 
i;  SI  |>ointed 
of  ]iatterii8 
equivalent 
re  also  pre- 
lie  form  of  a 
e  of  a  wheel 
re  given  in 
ving  oft"  the 
ilate  47,  fig. 
e  nu<!leated 
)r  star  form 
ich  in  turn 
Lich  gradual 
\'  dissimilar 
)us  in  plate 
beneatli  the 
Mves;  while 
ks  to  denote 
id  the  lower 

y  occurring 
riangle,  the 
short  lines, 
[uent  occur 
ry  formerly 
Shoshonian 

mic  records 
to  the  sha- 
:,  elsewhere 
le  triangle, 
ii  symbol  to 
ere  discov- 
rhaps  even 
i  extending 
d  the  lower 
)f  the  char- 
jine,  unless 
been  a  con- 
hilippus  on 

Report  of  tlie 


]i  n. 


Report  of  U    S.  National  Wuneuni,  1  895  —Hoffman. 


Plate  47. 


P 


if)'  '  "! 


I'll!  ■.,! 


If    .:  1 

■  1 
II 

li 

' 

'.'■ 

!    ■. 

1 

1    '1  ■      i 

1 

.It. 

Coins  of  Britons  and  Gauls. 


EXPLANATION   OF    PLATE   47. 

Fig.  1.  The  liead  oriiuuicut  on  thi8  pieco  becomeH  more  croHH-liko  tlian  in  the  )irece<1- 
iiig,  while  upon  the  reverse  tlie  iippearuiice  ot'u  niieh-ated  cirrle  Ittiieath 
the  horse  is  cunuteibahuieed  by  another  with  au  additional  ciri-le  of  dots 
or  ]Hdlet.s  about  it  above  the  animal's  bat-k.  U|>on  tlie  reverse  is  the  name 
of  a  prince,  Tasi  iovax,  whose  Latini/ed  name  would  be  Tas(  i<)\  ants,  the 
exact  form  in  which  the  name  appears  upon  the  coins  of  Cunobeline,  who 
prochiims  himself  to  have  been  Tajsciovam  F. 

Fig.  1'.  On  this  piece  the  crnciforni  ornament  becomes  still  more  intricate,  while  the 
circles  are  in  various  forms  and  of  various  types. 

Fig.  3.  The  remains  of  the  wreath  are  nudetiued,  and  the  object  beneath  the  horse 
has  assumed  a  stellar  form  instead  of  a  circh',  wliich  in  turn  was  a  helmet 
in  the  prototype. 

Figs.  1-7.  These  coins  are  cast  and  not  stamped.  In  some  spt-ciuiens  noted  by  Doctor 
Kvans  the  grain  of  the  wooden  niohl  is  distinctly  visible.  The  obverse 
in  all  bears  a  bead  in  imitation  of  sonu)  petroglyphie  rcnuiius  in  North 
America,  though  the  reverse  shows  the  outline  of  an  animal  believed  to 
be  a  horse. 

Fig.  ><.  This  specimen  has  a  laureate  bust  without  any  signs  of  a  face;  the  open 
crescents  are  connected  by  a  serpent  line.  The  reverse  bears  a  horse  with 
a  triple  tail  and  a  wheel  beneath  the  body. 


r 

t 
o 
o 

1( 
Ix 

S(l 
CO 

tn 
ex 
ex 
(.tl 

r 

erji 
a  N 
silt 

n;, 

oCl 
riii< 
the 
iote 
Clin 
Jiiin 

lillC! 

otce 
Si 
the 
of  A 
17,  li 
show 
III 

isli  81 


okaimik;  art  of  the  kskimos. 


823 


plat«<  U\.  Wn.  1.  Very  intiMcHtiii^  IimIuimI  are  tlio  t^oiiis  of  tin — or  an 
allity  in  whi«'h  thiit  iiuital  is  in  cx«rt'Ms — tlioii^li  tlieHo  are  holioved  to  be 
Gaulish  nithcr  tiian  Itritisli,  altlioii^li  tlie  IummI  of  tlio  I'liili|>]MiM  proto. 
type  is  ruUely  rcprodiurod,  wliilo  tlie  animal  ui)on  tlio  rovt'rse  isholioviMl 
by  l)o<^tor  ICvans  to  represent  a  bull  rather  than  the  horse.  Plate  17, 
lifjH.  1, ."),  0,  and  7. 

The  hunum  head  upon  the  obverse  is  the  rude  representation  of  that 
part  of  tlie  bo«ly,  the  face  beinj;  indicated  by  two  crescents,  one  above 
the  other,  with  the  concave  side  outward.  The  eye  consists  eitlu'r  of 
a  siiiiph;  rin^,  a  nuehuited  ring,  or  the  latter  attaehed  to  a  stem  which 
extends  dcjwn  toward  the  neck.  The  animal  form  upon  the  reverse  is 
readily  iletermined  by  comparison  with  other  coins  showing  variants. 

The  two  characters  beneath  the  animal  form  on  plate  47,  tig.  4,  appear 
to  be  a  remnant  of  or  to  have  been  suggested  by  the  exergual  legend 
on  the  jn'ototype  on  which  the  luime,  in  (Ireek  characters,  of  Philippus 
occurs. 

On  some  of  the  liritish  coins  no  trace  of  a  legen<l  remains,  but  in  a 
few  instances  some  apparently  meaningless  (characters  appear  to  have 
been  introduced,  clearly  indi(;ating  that  the  engraver  was  aware  of 
some  legend  upon  his  copy,  but  being  unaccpiainted  with  its  import  or 
signiticati<»n,  introduced  an  eijuivalent  in  so  far  as  ornamentation  was 
concerned,  following  the  custom  of  geometric  decoration.  Such  an  illus- 
tration is  here  reproduced  on  plate  4t!,  tigs.  .'{,  4,  and  7.  In  other 
examples  again,  this  style  of  zig/ag  decoration  is  omitted  below  the 
exergue  line  aiul  a  inndeated  ijirclc  portrayed  instead  of  a  legend  or 
other  character,  as  in  i>late  47,  tig.  I, 

The  wheel  of  the  chari<»t,  which  is  apparent  in  the  prototype,  is  gen- 
erally oval,  sometiujes  ellijjtical,  and  in  some  of  the  British  imitations 
a  second  wheel  is  placed  upon  any  remaining  otherwise  vacant  spot, 
such  an  illustration  being  reproduced  on  ]date  47,  fig. .'{,  while  in  plate 
l»!,  tig.  8,  tw()  wheel  like  characters  are  introduced,  one  above  the  body 
<>l  the  horse  aiul  the  other  beneath,  instead  of  tlie  common  nucleated 
ring.  In  examining  the  numerous  examples  of  coins  one  tinds  too  that 
the  Ihitish  engraver  has  introduced,  instead  of  the  figure  of  a  char 
ioteer,  a  number  of  disjj^inted  pellets  or  rings,  and  short  straight  or 
curved  lines,  making  it  almost  impossilde  to  trace  the  original  in  this 
Jumble  of  characters.  In  some  instances  these  segregated  dots  and 
lines  again  appear  to  become  lead. justed,  ultimately  forming  a  chari- 
oteer in  the  form  of  what  seems  to  be  a  winged  figure  of  victory. 

Similar  unique  and  interesting  imitati«nis  o«;cur  on  the  obverse  of 
tlie  British  coins,  in  which  the  engraver's  interpretati(ni  of  the  head 
of  Apollo  (or  Hercules)  is  shown,  sometimes  as  a  fanciful  cross,  plate 
47,  tig.  1,  and  in  othei'  instances  as  an  ear  of  grain,  examples  being 
shown  in  plate  4t},  tigs.  3,  5,  and  7. 

Ill  this  use  of  the  circles,  nucleated  rings,  and  other  British  or  Gaul- 
iisli  symbols  upon  British  coins,  no  evidence  appears  of  the  transmission 


f  'IftT 


1  ' 


M   •■ 


t       i  ■   ' 


If 


1 

!ii 


;  !:fti 


i 


Mir 


824 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


of  sin;li  «;hara<rters  Iroiii  Mucedoniii,  from  which  the  coins  were  obtained, 
and  which  furnished  tliedesifjns  upon  tlie  Philippus  for  the  British  and 
(iaulisli  eufjravcrs.  Nevertheless,  other  of  the  Macedonian  coins  bear 
upon  the  reverse  <'on(!entri<!  rings,  between  which  are  serrations,  so  as 
to  ahnost  appear  like  circular  saws  of  various  sizes  laid  one  upon  the 
other,  diuiinisliing  iri  size  toward  the  upper  or  last  one.  On  a  coin  of 
Herod  I.,  bearing  a  Macedonian  shield,  while  upon  the  obverse  of  the 
saute  i)iece  is  a  helmet,  with  cheek  jueces,  surrounded  by  a  legend. 
The  helmet,  which  appears  to  form  the  chief  emblem  upon  the  piece, 
greatly  resembles  the  smaller  headi)iece  upon  the  obverse  of  the  stater 
shown  in  ])late  40,  tig.  I. 

Mr.  Gardner,'  in  his  jtaper  on  "Ares  as  a  sun  god,  and  solar  symbols 
on  coins  of  Thrace  and  Macedon,"  shows  that  the  jMacedonian  shield 
is  of  astronomical  jjattern,  and  belongs  specially  to  a  deity  who  is 
worshiped  as  th^  sun,  and  the  interior  devi<'e  of  this  shield  on  the 
coins  of  J[erod  I.  is  identical  with  that  a<lopted  as  the  whole  type  on 
certain  coins  of  Uranojtolis  of  Mace«U)n. 

The  occurrence  of  circles  to  denote  ring  money  is  found  in  the  I'^gyp- 
t''in  hieroglyphs,  and  it  is  barely  possible  that  such  characters  ui)on 
yoelisks,  or  in  other  petroglyi>hs,  may  have  had  some  reference  to  ring 
money  in  the  various  countries  with  which  the  Kgyjttians  were  in  com- 
mercial relations,  extending  possibly  to  Ma<redonia,  IMnenicia,  and  other 
of  the  peoi)le8  of  the  northern  siiores  of  the  IMediterranean. 

The  l']gyi)tians  used  rings  of  gold  and  silver,  aiul  the  Hebrew  expres- 
sion for  the  heaviest  unit  in  weight,  the  talent,  originally  meant  a  circle. 
Gold  rings,  siiys  ]\lr.  Madden,-  were  also  used  as  a  means  of  exchange 
in  Uritain,  in  the  interior  of  Africa,  among  the  Norwegian  sea  kings, 
and  in  China  disks  with  central  i>erfori»tions  are  employed.  The  brass 
cash  is  an  illustration  of  the  latter,  and  the  sacred  writuigs  u«ake 
frequent  reference  to  rings  of  metal  and  strings  of  gold,  the  latter 
evidently  being  tied  in  bundles  of  certaiii  .specified  weights  and  values. 

Interesting  as  this  subjec^t  may  be,  it  would  be  inappropriate  in  the 
present  paper  to  continue  the  study  of  types  of  rings  and  variants 
and  their  signification  in  the  various  localities  throughout  the  world 
in  which  they  occur  as  originals,  and  as  the  result  of  intrusion  by 
intertribal  traflic  or  otherwise. 

The  wooden  tablet  represented  in  plate  33  is  reproduced  from 
Doctor  Stolpe's  monograph,  published  in  "Ymer,"^  and  illustrates  one 
characteristic  type  of  wood  (;arving  found  in  Polynesia,  or,  to  be  more 
exact  as  to  location,  in  the  Tubuai  Islands.  The  circles  are  rather 
infrequent,  but  the  triangular  decoration  is  more  common,  and  occurs 
upon  various  cerem»)nial  inqdements  and  weapons  in  various  forms  and 
combinations.     In  scnne  examples  the  designs  are  very  complicated 


'Num.  C!hr<)ii.,  now  sfiioH,  1880,  XX,  <iiiutc(l  IVoiii  Miuldon's  JcwIhIi  Coinage 
"Coins  of  tlio  .lews,  V.  W.  Maddon,  London,  188L 
•'Stockhohn,  1890,  fig.  IG. 


fi  rs 


i-      i^ 


GRAPHIO    ART   OP   THE    ESKIMOS. 


825 


thtiiiiied, 
itish  iiiul 
)ins  bear 
ins,  so  as 
ui)on  the 
a  voin  of 
se  of  the 
1  lejjend. 
he  piece, 
;he  stater 

[•  ayinbols 
iiin  shieUl 
y  who  is 
Id  oil  the 
e  type  on 

the  I'^.gyp- 
!tcrs  upon 
ce  to  ring 
re  in  com- 
and  other 

w  exprcs- 
iit  a  cirele. 
exchange 
sea  kings, 
The  brass 
ngs  make 
the  latter 
nd  values, 
nte  in  the 
I  variants 
tlie  worUl 
rusiou  by 

iced  from 
trates  one 
o  be  more 
are  rather 
md  occurs 
forms  and 
)mpli('ate(l 

Joinafjt*. 


and  elaborate,  while  in  other  instances,  as  upon  a  metal  surface,  the 
result  is  a  mere  zigzag,  the  result  of  using  a  narrow  graver,  an<l  as  it 
is  pushed  forward  the  tool  is  rotate<l  from  side  to  side. 

The  character  of  the  material  upon  which  decoration  is  attempted 
greatly  inlluences  the  artistic  result. 

Some  circles  from  eastern  Turkistan,  to  whii^h  my  attention  was 
called  by  my  friend  1  )octor  Walt-r  flimgh,  of  the  Xati«)nal  Musenm, 
resemble  almost  exactly  those  mentioned  by  Doctor  A.  li.  Meyer, 
who  presented  some  interesting  illustrations  of  shields  from  the  J5is- 
marck  Archipelago  and  New  (Juinea,  upon  some  of  which  are  several 
series  of  concentric  rings  (four)  while  some  are  nucleate<l  with  a  solid 
spot  and  three  surrounding  rings.' 

In  his  monograph  on  the  whirring  toy  or  "bull-rorer,"'  Doctor  J.  1). 
E.  Schmeltz^  presents  a  number  of  illustrations  from  various  hx'alities, 
nearly  all  of  which  are  ornamented.  Two  si>ecimens  from  West  Aus- 
tralia are  of  peculiar  interest,  from  the  fact  of  the  recurren<e  of  two 
figures  shown  on  a  Koman  lamp  from  Carthage  (plate  45,  p.  81(i).    The 


Fig.  38. 

GOLD  nOAT  FOrND  AT  NORS,  HF.NMAKK. 

one  specimen  of  these  wooden  toys  is  ornamented  with  five  figures  of 
concentric  circles,  the  three  middle  ones  having  ea<'h  five  rings,  while 
the  fianking  or  end  figures  luive  each  but  ibur  rings. 

Tiie  other  toy  has  upon  one  side  three  figures  of  rectangles,  each 
figure  consisting  of  a  nest  of  five,  one  within  the  other,  as  in  the  con- 
struction of  concentric  rings.  At  either  end  are  short  curved  lines. 
Such  a  coincidence — as  it  can  he  nothing  more — is  ti iily  remarkable, 
espeiiially  as  the  Australian  designs  are  not  in  exact  accordance  with 
the  usual  type  of  designs. 

The  district  of  Thisted,  Denmark,  contains  many  small  grave  mounds, 
from  some  of  which  unique  finds  hav«^  been  obtained.  One  clay  vessel 
covered  with  a  flat  stone  contained  ab<mt  one  hundred  small  boats,  the 
ribs  ami  sailing  of  which  are  mad«^  of  bronze  bands  bent  around  one 
another,  while  in  the  middle  of  these  lie  sheets  of  thin  plates  of  gold 
whose  corners  overlap  each  other  at  the  bottom  of  the  boat  and  are 
bent  around  the  bronze  bands  above,  covering  it.     In  the  same  manner 

'  riibliciitioneu  aus  dcm   Koupl.     Etlinoi^.  MuBfuni   Dresden.     X.     1895.      l'lat«< 
XVIII,  (iirs.  3,  4,  and  5. 
^  Das  Schwirrholz.     llunihiii-^',  18%. 


i'S     !| 


Ol 


Hi     II 


I'f 


%; 


V  ,1  > 


826 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


the  outside  covering  is  eft'ected.'  Ipoii  the  side  of  the  boat  ilhistrated 
in  fig.  38  will  be  observed  two  ligures  of  concentric  rings,  a  design  so 
frequently  met  with  in  the  prtihistoric  relics  of  Scandinavia. 

A  wooden  dish,-  found  with  other  objects  in  a  funeral  ship,  bears  dec- 
orations consisting  of  concentric  rings  similar  to  the  preceding. 

Petroglyphs  in  abundance  representing  so-called  cuj)  stones,  nucle- 
ated cin;lcs,  and  ciuicentric  circles  of  various  'lumbers  of  rings,  as  high 
as  live  and  six,  and  occasionally  vvm  more,  occur  throughout  northern 
Europe,  from  Ireland,  Scotland,  and  elsewhere  in  the  British  Isles, 
eastward  throughout  Scandinavia,  Finland,  and  liussia,  into  Siberia. 

In  a  petroglyph  at  Lokeberg,  in  Itohuslan,  Sweden,^  are  represented 
a  number  of  manned  Viking  ships,  above  three  of  which  are  jwrtrayed 
nucleated  rings,  several  of  which  are  attached  to  projections  connected 
with  the  vessel,  and  resembling  uplifted  banners  or  other  emblems.  In 
a  number  of  instancies  are  small  spots  only,  without  the  surrounding 
circle.     These  circles  in  contact  with  vessels  resemble  very  nuich  the 

Eskimo  eiigrave<l  ligures  on  the  rod  shown  in 
another  place  on  plate  08,  fig.  (J. 

Professor  Oscar  Montelius  figures  in  his  "Kul- 
tur  Schwe<leiis  in  Vorchristlicher  Zeit"  a  gold 
vase  nearly  3  inches  in  height  and  about  4 
inches  in  diameter,  about  the  body  of  wiiich  are 
four  rows  of  concentric  circles.  The  upper  row, 
near  the  neck,  consists  of  such  raised  figures 
each  more  than  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  in  di- 
ameter, while  the  row  a  short  distance  below 
this  consists  of  rings  averaging  three-sixteenths 
of  an  inch  across.  Below  the  greatest  diameter 
of  the  vessel  is  another  row  of  raised  concentric 
rings,  the  outer  one  measuring  about  Uve-cighths  of  an  inch  across, 
while  the  circles  near  the  base,  ancl  extending  in  a  row  about  it,  are 
apparently  a  little  less  in  diainetcr. 

These  rows  of  circles  are   sejiarated    by   longitudinal  raised  lines, 
between  some  of  which,  both  above  and  below  the  row  of  the  largest  cir- 
cles, are  short  veitical  lines  presenting  wliat  appears  like  a  milled  edge. 
This  style  of  ornament  is  very  general  and,  as  note<l  elsewhere,  of 
widesprea<l  occuirence. 

jMr.  Frederick  (xeorge  Jackson,  in  his  description  of  the  jewelry  of 
the  Samoyads,'  says  that  the  bonnet  is  adorned  with  tails  of  colored 


Fig.  39. 
SAHOTAD  OUNAMENT  OF  MKTA 


■  ■  ■'  ill        !  8 


'QuottMl  fniiii  Hcport  of  Natioiiiil  Musemn  for  1H!M,  1S92,  pp.  .T)?,  558,  tig.  41. 
(Prehistoiif  Naviil  Architocturt",  (Jeo,  II.  lioehiiKT.) 

The  roiider  is  referreil  to  an  iiiteri'-atiiig  paper  on  Origins  of  I'rehixtoric  Ornament 
in  Inland,  <oinpIt'ti'«l  in  Part  I  of  Vol.  VII,  of  tlio  .lournal  of  tlii'  Royal  Society  of 
Aiitii|uaries  of  Ireland,  for  1S!I7,  by  Mr.  George  Colfey. 

^Report  of  the  I'liited  States  National  Museum  for  1H91.     1H<»2,  p.  5(M,  fig.  lOS. 

'Oscar  Moutelins,  Die  Kultiir  Scliwedens  in  Vorchristlicber  Zeit,  IJerlin,  1885,  p.  73. 
tig.  87. 

^ The  Great  Frozfu  Laud.     London,  1895,  p.  67. 


Instrated 
le^igu  so 

ears  dec- 

5S,  nucle- 
},  aslii^h 
nortbern 
all  lales, 
Liberia, 
resented 
ortrayed 
onnected 
Bins.  In 
'ounding 
nuch  the 
iliown  in 

ii8"Kul- 
"  a  gold 
about  4 
iiich  are 
per  row, 
I  figures 
ch  in  di- 
;e  below 
xteentlis 
Jiaineter 
mcentric 
1  across, 
Lit  it,  are 


ed  lines, 
rgest  cir- 
Icd  edge, 
vbere,  of 


:;l 


iwehy  of 
r  colored 

)8,  fig.    II. 

OrnamenI 
Society  of 

jj.  108. 
l«8.'>,  p.  73, 


!i 


f'     ' 

(! 


:>  . 


m 


•i  ■ii  ' 


?  ,41 
r<  it 

ji    k 


t!l 


Report  nf  U.  S    National  Muspunn,   I89S.      Hii'fman. 


Plate  48. 


Ornamented  Ivory  Jewelry. 


■  'V  ' 


^■■•l,i; 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE   48. 


!l        1(1 


Fij;.  1.  V.\n  Pknoant. 

(Cat.  No.  :i0845,  r.S.  X.  M.     KimUmiiik.     fnlliitiil  li.\  K.  \V.  N<l-<oii.) 

rij;.  '_'.  Eak  I'i'.xuANT. 

((,'at.  Xi>.  ;!684ti  I  .'],  V.  S.  N.  M-     Kiu  I-aUf,  Alaska      Ciillrilfd  l.v  K.  W.  N<.ls()n.) 

Fig.  ^.    KaK    I'KNDANT. 

(Cat.  No.  ;!tW4.').  r.  S.  N.  M.     Kiislikakwin  Itivcr.     CoIlnltMl  liy  K.  \V.  NcUoii.) 

I'i<;.  4.    KaU    I'KXDANTS. 

(Cat.  No.  ;i()ft:Jit,  r.S.  N.  M.     I.uwir  KusliUakwiii  l!i\ci-.     Collcilfil  l.y  K.  W.  Xil.soii.) 

Fig.  ').  Kak  I'i-.ndant. 

(C'.ct.  No.  4S71:;.  r.S.  N.  M.     Vnl.oii  Itivir.     ('ollci  ted  liy  K.  \V.  Ncl.son.) 
Figs.  (I,  7.    KaU   I'KNDAXT.'^. 

((Jat.  Xo.s.  ;!l)H4.">,  liiiSK).  r.S.  N.  M.     Kii.skiimiU.     <  ollroicil  by  K.  W.  N    Ihoii.) 

Fig.  X.    V.\U    I'KXDAXT. 

(Cat.  No.  IJSlHi,  l'.  S.  N.  M.     I'.is;  Lake,  .\la>Ua.     ColliTtcd  liy  K.  \V.  NrNoii.) 

Fig.  !t.   l'<)\\  i)i:u  CiiAKtiKH. 

(Cat.  Xo.  i:!74(iO,  C.S.  N.  M.     Ikalnik.     Colli'.t<  .1  liy  J.  Applcualr.  C.  S.  Sljiiial  CorpH.) 
Fig.  10.   Fai!  Fi;.n'1)ant. 

(Cat.A'o.aSltiU,  U.S.  X.  Al.     Xuliiklil  uhi-uiiiiil.     (  ollrcti'il  li\   Iv  W.  Nil.^im.) 


"V 


I 


i    :' 

tl 

i  f     ,1: 

GRAPHK!    AKT   OP   THE    ESKIMOS. 


827 


.strips  of  cloth,  to  wliicli  are  attached  "brass  disks  (about  3  inches  in 
diameter)  and  other  ornaments,  such  as  brass  ciiarms,  beads,  and  but- 
tons." It  is  ])robable  that  these  materials  are  specially  made  in  liussia 
for  trade  with  the  natives;  nevertheless  the  nucleated  circle  is  an 
important  feature  in  ornamentation  thereon,  the  metal  ])endant,  of 
which  an  illustration  is  jjiven  in  fig.  '.>*,),  beiny-  not  only  very  similar  to 
the  prehistoric  ornaments  of  Scandina^'ia,  but  is  decorated  in  the  same 
manner. 

Mr.  Jackson  says  furthermore:  ''While  I  am  talking  about  Samoyad 
Jewelry,  I  might  mention  the  vast  biuikles  sometimes  used  to  fasten  the 
belt.  They  are  made  of  brass,  stamped  out  with  patterns,  and  are 
often  1>  in(;hes  in  diameter.  Of  brass,  too,  and  <'opper  are  their  rings; 
and  they  even  wear  reindeer  bells,  each  weighing  at  least  half  a  pound, 
hanging  from  their  elbows." 

It  is  but  natural  to  suppose  that  native  art  is  thus  stimulated,  and 
influenced,  by  the  pr<>bable  introduction  of  mateiials  of  foreign  manu- 
facture, such  trinkets  being  gaudily  decorated  to  add  to  their  attract- 
iveness in  the  estimation  of  the  uncultured  natives. 

IJECOHATION    UK    I'KKSONAl.    OIJNAMKNTS,    ITKNSII.S.    KTC. 

The  utilization  of  various  figures  to  apydy  simply  for  ornainentation 
is  ^  ery  common,  and  is  of  later  date  than  the  incision  of  simple  lines 
and  dots.  The  animate  and  other  characters  do  not  seem  to  have  been 
used  in  any  a'sthetic  manner  until  the  system  of  pictography  had  gained 
a  lirm  ibothold.  Numerous  examples  are  here  given  of  simple  decora- 
tion of  drill  bows,  for  which  no  other  record  was  ready,  and  of  the 
various  styles  of  decorating  articles  of  primiti\e  Jewelry  or  personal 
ornaments,  and  other  objects  of  daily  use. 

The  following  list  comprises  a  number  of  selections  to  illustrate  the 
various  methods  of  decorating  articles  of  personal  use  or  adornment, 
utensils  of  daily  use,  and  other  obje(;ts. 

A  number  of  ear  pendants  are  represented  in  plate  48,  figs.  1-8  and 
10.  The  chief  interest  lies  in  the  variety  of  ornamentation,  consisting 
of  drill  holes,  circles,  concentrii;  rings,  and  in  one  instance  serrations 
are  attjiehed  to  the  circles. 

The  cup-shaped  specimen  shown  in  Hg.  t)  is  a  powder  charge,  orna- 
mented with  conventionalized  figures  of  flowers,  fruit,  etc.,  to  which 
special  attention  is  given  in  connection  with  conventionalization. 

Plate  32,  fig.  1,  represents  ear  pendants  made  of  beluga  teeth.  They 
we''  )tained  at  St.  Michaels,  and  are  ornamented  with  the  zigzag 
patltin  frequently  alluded  to  as  the  "fish  trap"  pattern,  Tiiis  pattern 
is  quite  neatly  made  and  presents  an  unusually  pleasing  effect.  Ujion 
the  bare  space  between  the  two  transverse  rows  of  ornamentation  is 
incised  a  small  cross — a  figure  quite  unusual  in  Eskimo  art. 

Plate  32,  fig.  2,  represents  a  biuikle  or  ornament  used  by  girls  in 
securing  the  hair.    The  decoration  represents  a  face,  the  eyes  being 


'.i    ii  i'i 


I 


: 

:\     ■    ', 

i- 

'     ; 

' 

1^' 

1. 

1 

1 1  != 

^? 

^J.^ 

'■''  4 

828 


REPORT  OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


indicated  by  sharply  incised  lines,  while  the  impils  are  perforations 
njade  with  a  <liill.  The  nostrils  are  also  indicated  with  delicate  per- 
forations, and  the  teeth  are  well  defined.  The  lips  are  also  well  detined 
by  means  of  transverse  lines  representing  the  gums  and  the  edges  of  the 
teeth,  while  the  other  lines  drawn  vertically  denote  the  si)aces  between 
the  teeth. 

Plate  3'J,  lig.  4,  represents  a  comb  from  Cape  Prince  of  Wales.  This 
is  of  pectiliar  interest  from  the  fact  that  it  exactly  represents  in  tmtline 
specimens  from  Torres  Strait.  The  ornamentation  resembles  Papuan 
art  designs,  and  also  the  peculiar  meander  or  zig/ag  pattern  referred 
to  in  ])late  33. 

On  the  inner  space  are  three  ornaments  which  represent  the  conven 
tional  tree  symbols.     The  specimen  is  an  old  one,  as  may  be  observed 
from  its  past  usage  and  di8(!oloration.    The  teeth  are  broken  and  appear 
to  have  been  short.    They  weie  no  doubt  made  by  sawing  witli  instru- 
ments such  as  are  shown  in  i)late  17. 

Plate  40,  fig.  4,  represents  a  pair  of  earrings  secured  in  a  stick.  Upon 
the  front  are  ornameTital  incisions  representing  concentric  rings,  from 
four  sides  of  whicli  extend  short  lines  terminating  in  perforatiotis.  In 
one  of  these,  liowever,  the  short  connecting  lines  were  not  inserted — 
this  part  of  the  operation  having  evidently  been  neglected. 

Upon  tlie  reverse  are  short  projections  which  Jire  carved  so  as  to 
curve  downward,  forming  an  T-shaped  hook  for  insertion  in  the  lo])e  of 
the  ear. 

Plate  40,  fig.  5,  shows  a  similar  stick  with  wrapping  so  as  t^>  secure 
a  number  of  earrings  which  have  been  inserted,  and  in  whicli  iiianner 
they  are  transferred  from  i)lace  to  i>lace  for  sale  or  for  barter. 

Plate  50  represents  a  series  of  carved  ivory  belt  buttons  and  pend- 
ants, as  well  as  two  spear  guards  for  attachment  to  a  canoe.  On  tig.  1 
is  shown  the  crude  meander  or  zigzag  so  frequently  referred  to.  T'pon 
the  outer  surface  of  these  figures  .appear  small  tridents  wliich  rei)resent 
trees,  or  rather  they  may  be  termed  the  conventional  ornamental  figure 
evolved  from  the  tree  figure  or  tree  design.  A  simple  meander  or 
triangle  is  shown  upon  the  button  in  plate  50,  fig.  2,  in  whi(!h,  it  will 
be  observed,  the  meander  is  produced  by  the  interdigitation  of  short 
lines  attached  to  the  parallel  lines  within  Avhich  the  meander  crosses. 

Pigs.  3,  4,  and  G  have  circles  with  various  decorations,  that  upon  fig. 
4  being  perhaps  the  flower  symbol,  described  elsewhere  in  detail. 

The  ivory  button  shown  in  fig.  5  is  decorated  by  simple  perforations, 
each  of  which  is  filled  with  a  wooden  peg,  the  arrangement  of  the 
perforations  being  regular  and  symmetrical. 

Plate  51  illustrates  six  forms  of  bone  belt  fasteners  or  toggles.  The 
specimen  shown  in  fig.  1  was  collected  by  Mr.  L.  M.  Turner  at  Norton 
Sound,  and  measures  2^  inches  across.  Within  the  upper  and  lower 
margins  are  five  horizontal  incised  lines,  while  along  the  vertical  edge 
there  are  but  four  each.     Upon  the  inner  line  and  directed  inward  are 


irforatioMB 
licate  per- 
il I  defined 
gcH  of  the 
8  between 

les.  This 
in  outline 
s  Papuan 
1  referred 

0  conven- 
observed 
id  api)ear 
til  instru- 

V.  Upon 
iigs,  from 
ions.  In 
iserted — 

so  as  to 
le  lobe  of 

;o  secure 
Uninner 


lid  pend- 
On  fig.  1 
'.  I'pon 
epresent 
al  figure 
mder  or 
1,  it  Avill 
of  short 
crosses, 
ipon  fig. 
lil. 

(rations, 
t  of  the 

iS.  The 
Norton 
d  lower 
!al  edge 
ard  are 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    4  9, 


Iv 


"I!V    IaIPIKMKN] 


iC.it.  X, 


•  1.1:.  1'.  I \ 


\I 


<"!V   I.MIM.KMKM 
((-'iit.  Xo,  HIMil.s,  (• 


''■"'■  i.S,  .\,  M,      I 


\iiniL;iiiHi"i 


-"""II.     r^'lliri,-,!  I,v  i:   W 


Ki'  Siirrn.K 


(<':\{.  X, 


'K-    I.     K.M! 


<Wfi.  r 


I.IM.S    IN     W 


S   X..\L 


N.M.     Ah 


l'.\HlilN(iS    I\    \\- 


'>"|'I:n   II(pm,i: 


"'':in  Isliiiiils. 


•'"IllTt.ll    l,\     I, 


M.  I 


iiiiiii'.) 


I'iu.  (!.    I 


('.it.  \i).  :;i;(i|  1,  [ 
^"';v  <ii;\.\.Aii:.\ 
C'ai.  Nil,  3rt7Ju,  U.S.  X. 


"""■:\  ![()(. i)|.; 

.  S.  X.  M.      \, 


"Ilk.      ('.,11,.,. I,., I   \,y   J.;    w 
H. 


\,.K 


!■  loi;  Ai.i: 


:ii.\  iilii'liML 

IT  Hat. 


""Mil.       C, II, .,.(,., I    1,^.   |.;_  \Y.Ki 


U«u.) 


•M.     c,,!!,.,.,,.,!  I, 


.V  !•;.  w. x,i 


.soil. J 


Rppnrf  nf   U    S   N.ilion.il  Museum,   IflJ^,  —  Hof'iTi.m 


Decorated  Ornaments  and  Utensils, 


ill 


II: 


'« 

;' 

:'" 

i  ' 

' 

'■ 

'I  ■  I  r^ 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    5( 


Fi^'.   1.    C.AHVKI)    ]{K|.T    FaSTKXKK. 

"'^"•^'o-">*5«7,T-.S.  N.M.      M.nilhoCI,, 

liH.  2.  C.\i{\i;i)  ]{Ki.T  HrnoN. 

(I 'iit.Xo. :!;!(!:!:!.  r.s.x.M.     st.  >ri,.i 


wer  Vukoii  Uiv.T.      r„ll(,,.t,..l  l.y  Iv  W.  Nels 


'"•) 


!• 


!«.  :^.    liKl.T    niTTON. 


i.U'ls.      Collcctcl  liy  !•:.  W.  X, 


Isiill.) 


V\g.  4.  l{j.:i/r  1 


('.'at.  Xii.  ;i,sui];i.  r.  s.  X.  M.     ( 'i,.,] 


iUITOX 


(<'iit.  Xo.  :i77fii,  r 


ifiniit.      Collcctcil  l.y  K.  AV,  X,,) 


son.) 


!«■  5.   MrnoN. 


X.  M.      K 


"iiKi-iiiKiyiiiiiiil.      ColU-.tcl  l.y  K   W.  Xi'ls. 


.11.) 


V\)y.  (i.   Hi-.i/r  () 


( (  ar.  Xo.  480;iO.  r .  S,  X  .M ,      K„(  z,.i 


KXAMKXT. 


.11..  Sound.     ( ■..lle.t.a  l.y  i:.  w.  Xcison.) 


V\iX.  7.  S 


Fij.-. 


((.'at.  X,..;t8l.-,L'.  I'.S.  X..M.     i. 

I'KAK    GrAl!l>    K(.H    KaIAK. 

d'at.  Xo.  :i5;t8;i.  r.  s.  x.  ^r. 


owcr  Viiki 


111.      C.illi.ct,.,!  liy  K.  W.  Xeli 


•"<.    SPKAU   (iU 


■.srii. 


iinii'iMniiil. 


AIM). 


Sf.n.) 


>y  K.  W.  Xi'Is 


(<':it.  Xo.  t:ir.:i(i.  r.s.  x.  .\i.    ( ■,•,,„.  v 


\»'  \  aiiroiiviT.     Coll,.,.),.,!  liy  K.  \V.  Xel 


els<.n.j 


Rppiirt  of   (J    S    National  MusHum,   1  895.- Hnffn-an. 


Plate  50. 


I)    M; 


r    f: 


ri. 


'    V: 


■  ;,'.   ^5 


.V 


IvoRV  Buckles  and  Pendants. 


1 

I  '  i' 

1; 

: :  :l! 

„i.    '•!! 


y 


I 


■.) 


►  ■ 

H'-'av 

ji^  , 

^^v  '^^H 

u 

mU-  IB 

I  1 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    51 


t 


y.  1.   Hi-.i  1    Fasi  KNKi!,  T()i.i;i.K  Hi;   IUckm;. 

(Cat.  Ni).  JliilU.  I'.S.  N.  M.      Xnrtiui  Snuiiil.      ('nllicli-il  I,y  I,.  M,  Innirri 
<;.  J.   liEi.r  I'asikm:!!,  Toiaiii;  ou  liUt.Ki.i:. 

i(':it.  Xii.JKllii.  r.  S.  X.  M.      Xortoil  Soiiiiil.      Ciilliclcd  l)y  L.  M,  I'uiinT.i 

i;.  ;>.   Mi'.i.r  rAsii:\r,i!,  TiKitii.i:  oit  I'.rcKi.i:. 

iCiil.  Xo.  •JlillJ.  r.  S.  X.  M.     Niiriiiii  SiMiiicl.     (  dllci  ifil  liy  L.  M.  riirinT.) 

ii.  I.   Uki.i'  Fastkm'.u,  To(i(ii.E  til!  I?rcKt,i:. 

(Cat.  Xo.  ;i7'.l!lJ.  r.  S.  X.  M.      IMimit.      ("ollfcl.il  by  l).  \V.  Xclsoii.) 
y.  r>.    liKl.r    IVxSTKN'Kl!,    Toiilil.K    Oil    l$lCKI.i;. 

(I'Ml.  Xo.  JJCit;;;,  r.  S.  X.  M.      Xoitoii  SmmimI.      Ccillcclid  l)y  I",.  W.  Xi1miii.» 
j;.  il.   IJKi.r  Fa>tk\i:i!.  Toixii.!',  oh  IU'(  ki.I".. 

(Cal.  Xo.rniJL'   I'.S,  X.  M.      rriiiiorsUa.      ((illfiU'd  li\  W.  II.  Hall.) 


Report  of  U.  S   National  Museum,  1895 Hoffman. 


■teiiWIttUIMIItliMilL 


Plate  51. 


m 


Ivory  Buckles  or  Toggles. 


?«..('!?  I 


-       '^l'  \ 

■  ^  ^!' 

•    ;;|  ||'. 

I  II 

'i'      ^iil  m 

\l    m\ 

K  ^ 

B 

II 

1  ■ 

IL  *Z 

'!! 

Ill 


■I 


i  i  f) 


(IP    i: 


il 


':     'i 

•s  ■' 


POIiiij: 


r 


t 


■i    !l 


Rtport  of  U  S  National  Museum,  1 895. —Hoffman. 


Plate  62. 


Pj,nvt? 


I :  *C'.«t^l-sif 


,«•  '4*r 


'*JS!SIwPp*'  ■' 


#'*»':;^i^'f^^.i«^ 


ilfiil' 


»f.^)jHMiiHlHHf)j|*fs 


^^raiflBKri 


,>Hu<     'nMMMM 


liiaiTiT   ii 


CO 
UJ 

< 

o 

u 

-i 
o 

UJ 
Ui 

Z 
O 

z 
< 

CO 

UJ 
CD 

3 


3 
Z 
(O 


llM 


-t%5*.«S'  % 


'fc  u: 


GRAl'IIIC   ART   OF   THK    ESKIMOS. 


mnitttm 


82J) 


sliort  incisions,  each  oiic-Hixteentli  of  an  iiudi  in  icni^tli.  SunoiMulin}; 
the  central  perforation  in  a  (luadrihitcral  tijjfnre  confonnin;;  to  tint  out- 
lino  of  the  ornament,  (ionsistinjj  of  three  incised  lines  one-Hixteenth  of 
an  inch  a]Kirt.  Upon  the  inner  sides  of  the  square  are  siniilai-  short 
lines  directed  upward  toward  the  interior,  as  upon  the  inner  line  of  the 
outer  s(|uare. 

In  plate  51,  fi};.  2,  also  from  Norton  Sound,  the  ornamentation  von 
sists  of  eij^ht  lines  running*'  |iurallel  with  the  four  outer  borders,  the 
interior  space  about  tlie  (icntral  perforation  bein;;-  blank. 

In  plate  51,  tiy. .'{,  also  from  Norton  Sound,  the  ornamentation  becomes 
a  little  more  (iomplex.  The  two  sets  of  parallel  lines  around  the  inte 
rior  form  a  s«]uare.  Within  each  set  of  lines  thus  drawn  ar*-!  markinjjs 
so  jdaced  as  to  form  a  cru<le  zij;zay  resultinjij  from  the  short  lines  pro- 
jecting alternately  outward  and  inward  by  a  process  resembling  wiuit 
might  be  termed  interdij^itation.  Tliis  has  some  resemblance  t«)  or  sug- 
gests the  Papuan  patterns,  to  which  reference  is  madeelsewheie.  The 
interior  space  about  the  central  perforation  is  ornamented  by  two  lines 
forming  a  cross. 

In  plate  51,  lig,  4,  there  is  shown  a  buckle  from  IMnuit,  Alaska,  and 
both  lines  and  dots  are  employed  in  ornamenting  the  surface.  The 
sijuaresare  present  as  in  the  preceding  reconl,  while  small  perforations 
occupy  the  space  between  the  groups  of  lines. 

In  plate  51,  tig.  5,  from  Norton  Sound,  the  outer  border  consists  of 
two  decorated  tigures,  while  surrounding  the  central  i)erforation  are  six 
concentric  rings,  four  short  lines  diverging  from  the  outer  ring  toward 
the  outer  angles  of  the  ornament.  From  the  inner  angle  of  the  inner 
quadrilateral  ligure  are  four  short  lines,  each  terminating  in  a  V-shaped 
tigure,  or  bifurcation,  rudely  resembling  the  conventionalized  whale  tail, 
though  in  this  instance  more  likely  denoting  a  tree,  as  it  also  represents 
a  conventionjllized  tree  figure. 

In  i)late  51,  fig.  <},  from  Premorska  two  series  of  lines  are  drawn,  with 
the  ditt'erence,  however,  tliat  instead  of  bearing  additional  ornamenta- 
tion between  the  two  quadrilateral  tigures  the  ornamentation  consists 
of  nucleated  crircles,  three  upon  each  side,  while  within  the  inner 
square  and  surroundhig  the  central  perforation  are  tiiree  concentric 
rings.  The  space  beyond  the  outer  ring  and  the  angle  of  the  inner 
s([uare  is  filled  witii  small  figures  consisting  of  a  spot  surrounded  by 
two  concentric  rings. 

Upon  plate  52  are  shown  thirteen  figures  of  needle  cases  or  snulf 
tubes,  upon  which  are  shown  various  styles  of  ornamentation.  The 
specimen  at  the  extreme  left,  from  the  Lower  Vukon,  is  o(!tagon;il, 
while  the  next  shows  a  series  of  rings  produced  1)y  tiling,  as  in  the 
fourth  figure,  and  to  a  certain  extent  in  the  last.  Tlic  encircling  hands 
ui»oa  figs.  5,  G,  7,  8,  and  9  illustrate  in  various  ways  tlie  rudimentaiy 
Ibrras  or  originals  from  which  have  developed  that  peculiar  meander 
or  zigzag  to  which  reference  is  made  in  various  i)laces  and  in  various 


i    'i; 


if 
It; 

11^ 


i 

m 

830 


UEPOUT   OK    NATIONAL    MTSKUM,  1K!»5 


1 1 


i  t  3i 


!       .  J 


connections,  and  wliirli  Iuih  Immmi  coinpariMl  to  a  <;ertuii  degree  with 
tlio  rapiian  ornanientiition  n^t'ernMl  to  by  Mr.  Alfred  C.  lladdon. 
Upon  the  l\v«>  ll^^nrcs  at  the  right  iiand  are  a  series  of  small,  nu(;leated 
ringH,  an<l  i)arti<*ularl.v  in  (ijr.  12  are  shown  several  instances  in  which 
these  rin};s  are  surronnded  by  radiatin^j^  lines,  a  bottom  line  extending 
to  a  transverse  base  line  or  attnclied  (o  another  nncleated  cirele  of  like 
form.  These  may  be  n'lated  to  the  (lower  symbols,  to  which  Mi-. 
TaK^en  M.  Tnrner  makes  reference  in  the  lettei-  which  1  have  (jnoted. 

Plate  .'55,  lig.  1),  sImjws  a  tobacco  box  froni  Sledge  Island.  It  is  a  rude 
imitation  of  a  seal,  a  small  opening  Iteing  cut  in  the  neck,  while  the 
rear  end  was  at  (Uie  time  undoubtedly  closed  by  means  of  a  wooden 
plug.  TheornaiiHMitation  throughout  consists  of  parallel  lines  between 
which  the  incisions  of  short  trinisverse  lines  are  so  arranged  as  to  indi- 
cate the  rude  nu'ander  ov  zigzag  i>attern.  Upon  the  back  are  several 
conventional  tree  patterns 

Plate  -o.  tig.  1,  represents  an  ivory  casket  from  St.  Michaels.  It  is 
made  of  the  upper  hollow  portion  of  a  walrus  tusk  and  is  very  pro- 
fusely illustrated  with  the  zigzag  pattern,  borders  of  which  encindo 
the  spe(;imen  both  above  and  below,  while  arouiul  the  center  is  an 
almost  continuous  pattern  of  six  nu(!leated  circles,  each  connected 
with  the  otluT  by  means  of  continuous  strips  or  zigzag  ornamentation. 
Between  the  two  outer  lims  of  each  of  these  ornaments  we  lind  the 
fish  trap  pattern,  in  some  the  plain  zigzag,  in  another  short  transverse 
lines,  etc.,  showing  various  degrees  of  ornamentation  of  the  same  gen- 
eral type.  Kadiating  from  the  outer  circles  of  all  the  specimens  are 
short  vertical  lines  at  four  opposite  points,  in  imitation  of  the  tlower 
sj'mbol.  On  the  remaining  spa<!es  between  this  central  ornamentation 
and  tlic  two  outer  margins  are  rows  of  small  circles  similarly  orna- 
mented within  by  concentric  rings  and  upon  the  outside  by  ladiatiug 
lines. 

The  round  box  illustrated  in  plate  .')4,  tig.  3,  is  from  Norton  Sound. 
This  was  used  for  holding  (isliing  tackle.  The  top  and  bottom  are 
made  of  wood,  while  the  circular  band  is  ma«le  of  a  Hat  ])iece  of  rein- 
deer horn  securely  lashed  together  at  the  Joints  by  means  of  two  iron 
and  one  copper  clasp  attached  longitudinally.  The  surface  of  this 
band  of  horn  is  very  neatly  ornamented  around  the  upper  portion  in 
zigzag  pattern,  while  the  corresponding  border  below  has  been  left 
plain.  IJetween  these  two  borders,  however,  are  a  series  of  figures  of 
concentric  circles  very  iu»atly  incised  and  Jirrangcid  alternately,  first  a 
large  circle,  then  two  small  ones.  Kach  of  these  figures  is  furthermore 
ornamented  by  four  radiating  lines  resembling  the  flower  symbol, 
although  from  the  great  number  of  concentric  circles  within  it  there 
is  suggested  rather  the  idea  of  the  symbol  used  to  denote  the  nests 
of  kantags  or  wooden  buckets  obtained  by  l)arter  from  the  Chukchi  of 
the  Asiatic  side. 

Plate  35,  fig.  o,  rei)re8ents  a  bone  "mouthpiece"  from  Diomech; 


OHAI'IIIC    ART    OF    TMK    KSKIMOS. 


831 


lomed*' 


iHliind.     The  oriuitiKMitatioii  u|>oii  tliis  is  nul<-  aiid  det^ply  incised,  con 
sistiny' of  H  bjis«»  line  (»t' two  parallel   incisions.  I>el ween  \vlii«'li  is  tlie 
iiule  meander  or  %i^/a^^  to  the  top  of  whi(th  are  incised  at  re^nhir  inter 
vals  trident  lljjnres  ij'presentinj;  the  (vtnventioiial  tree  syniljol.     Sinii 
lar  incisions  and  markings  apptsir  also  iip<ni  a  lar^^er  specimen  irom 
the  same  locality,  shown  in  tig.  7. 

Plate  .'t'J,  tig',  f),  shows  a  spt^'inien  withont  any  indication  to  iinirk  the 
lot'ality  from  which  it  was  obtained,  althongli  from  its  association  witli 
the  collections  from  Alaska  it  may  be  infeired  that  it  was  made  by  soim^ 
one  of  the  native  tribes,  very  lik«'ly  the  sonthern  or  southeastein 
natives,  who  have  intermarri«'d  with  the  Thlinffit,  or  possibly  the  Thlin- 
jjit  themselves,  altlMmjfh  the  jiarviiij;  very  {jreatly  res«ind)les  that  copi«>d 
after  the  work  of  the  Ilaida.  In  almost  any  position  in  which  tlie 
specimen  may  be  hehl  faces  appear.  I'pon  the  lower  side  is  tlu'  repre- 
sentation of  a  face  the  expn^ssion  of  wliich  is  exactly  like  that  in  ti;:.  .'>, 
wliile  the  front  or  ronnded  portion  of  the  ornamenr  shows  a  p4M  lec^t 
snake's  head,  thonyh  this  was  proltably  inteinled  to  represent  a  seal. 
The  ornament  a]»pears  to  havt^  been  nsed  for  atta«hment  to  the  end  of 
a  cord,  ]>robably  in  harness  or  on  some  wea]»on. 

Plate  l.'{  represents  thre«'  liynres  of  bone  seine  shuttles  oi-  handles 
from  the  Yukon  River.  The  ornamentation  u])on  tig.  I  is  vt;ry  simple. 
It  consists  of  diagonal  lints  between  two  horizontal  ones,  with  the 
exception  of  a  small  s])ace  about  the  upper  third,  where  half  a  dozen 
lines  cross  at  the  opposite  angle.  lIi)on  tig.  2  the  lines  are  cdoser 
togi'ther,  and  in  the  lower  ligure  very  short  iim>s  are  attached  so 
as  to  extend  at  right  angles  from  their  rcsi)ective  base  lines.  These 
are  of  that  pi'imary  type  forming  the  base  of  the  '4ish  weir"  or  "lish 
trap"  i>attern,  which  in  turn  forms  the  base  of  the  rude  angular  mean- 
der and  ultimately  (d"  tlie  zigzag,  to  which  reference  is  nnide  elsewhere. 

In  fig.  3  th(^  ornamentation  consists  first  of  two  horizontal  parallel 
lines  extending  along  each  outer  border,  between  each  j>air  of  lines 
are  short  lines  forming  zigzags.  The  interior  spacers  are  tilled  with 
other  i)atterns.  At  the  u]>per  end  is  an  animal,  apparently  represent- 
ing a  wolf,  witli  the  life  line  upon  the  body,  while  at  the  lower  extremity 
s.  thi>  outline  of  a  beaver.  At  the  two  small  triangles  formed  by  the 
'•ros.s  Iin«  .>•  the  middle  of  the  sjiecimen  aic  two  small  trees,  simply 
decorative,  find  iiiteiuied  to  fill  the  blank  s])ace. 

ii.)t(»  1!»,  lig.  .'i>  ri',>ri)se"ts  ;\  \en  beautiful  net  shutth^  obtained  in 
tiie  Aleutiiiii  iKlsiuds  bv  ^1  .  L  I.  Turner.  The  only  ornament  of  any 
<-v>nsequenceon  tiiis  r<')ir  'Heiits  i  figure  ni'  con(!entiic  rings,  from  which 
radiate  eight  delii-ate  liih;.->.  Tlds  is  probably  a  highly  conventi(Uialized 
figure  of  th'  iow*  r  symbol,  ttiough  in  the  ductography  of  the  Ojibwa  and 
some  of  ihc  -^hosiioiiian  tribos  it  would  denot«'  the  symbol  oi'  the  sun. 

The  superiority  (.-f  Mic  v.orkmanship  is  apparent,  and  is  character- 
istic of  that  of  the  soutliciu  Alaska,  or  rather  the  Aleutian,  natives. 

Plate  28,  fig.  1,  represents  a  reel  for  sinew  for  small  nets,  obtained 


'I 

I 


t  ' 


;  t 


11! 

il-'   i 

t^.^.^ 

1          l! 

h\h       :- 

832 


RKI'OHT   OP    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  189' 


ut  Vjii\)o  N'aiM'oiivor,  Alsiska,  by  Mr.  E.  W.  NelHoii.  Thv  specimen  ih 
iniidt^  of  bolus  iiiul  is  decoratud  with  inciHod  lineH  e\t(MHliii{;froiii  point 
to  point  ulon^^  (Mtiiur  Mli^e,  with  iuterior  nmrkin^H  of  short  linos,  as 
shown  on  tht;  spocinien. 

Phitci  'J'.i,  li^.  I,  roprcHiMits  a  tishin;;  implement  nuuleof  rcindeur  horn. 
It  is  sli;;htly  (Mirvoil  and  forked  at  either  end,  three  of  the  four  ends 
terminal  in^  in  liemls,  ])robably  tliat  of  the  seal.  The  chief  <Iecoration 
consists  of  a  median  line  extending  from  t^id  t(»  end,  to  which  are 
attaclied  several  |»airs  of  characters  re)»resentin^  the  herring  bone 
pattern,  thon^li  with  the  addition  of  Hhort  outer  lines. 

The  pertbration  visible  in  the  center  is  intended  for  holding  a  drill. 

IMate  .'Jr»,  tigs.  1,  2,  and  .'J,  represents  snnill  ivory  thimble  holders  or 
guards.  The  ormunentation  upon  these  is  different,  that  upon  tig.  1 
and  tig.  -  ronsisting,  respectively,  of  simple  borings  or  depressions  and 
concentric  rings,  while  upon  llg. .'{  appears  a  continu(ms  line,  to  which 
ar<'  attached  several  pairs  of  short  obliipie  radiating  lines,  as  in  plate 
lil>,  tig.  1. 

IMate  ',Vi,  tig.  1,  repr«'sent8  a  seine  thimble  holder  trom  Kushunuk. 
This  is  a  rude  outline  of  a  seal  with  the  young  i)laced  transversely  to 
its  back,  while  the  ornamentation  consists  of  several  sizes  of  concentric 
rings,  two  of  which  show  radiating  lines  attached  to  the  outer  surface. 

IMatc  .'5r»,  Hg.  (J,  represents  a  thimble  guard  from  Unalakleet.  The 
mnamentation  upon  tiiis  is  in  imitation  of  that  from  the  Northwest 
Coast  northward  from  Kotzebue  Sound,  and  consists  almost  exclusively 
of  various  patterns  of  the  zigzag  or  nu^ander  design. 

riate  2."5,  tig.  .'J,  is  marked  in  the  catalogue  as  a  bone  grass  comb,  from 
Kotzebuc  Sound.  Mr.  Murdoch,  who  has  examined  the  specimen  in 
my  presence,  believes  it  to  be  simply  an  ordinary  comb  for  personal 
use.  The  ornamentation  is  divided  into  two  panels,  separated  by  four 
parallel  transverse  lines,  each  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch  from  the 
other.  Short  lines,  placed  closely  side  by  side,  radiate  from  the  inner 
lines  t«)war(l  the  outer.  These  inner  lines  with  short  radiating  lines  are 
reprochuH'd  at  either  end  of  the  specimen.  Ueference  to  the  illustra- 
tion will  more  clearly  represent  this.  In  the  upper  panel  is  the  por- 
trayal of  a  whale,  with  some  other  lines  probably  intended  to  denote 
whales,  but  the  figures  were  not  completed.  There  is  also  a  depression, 
which  was  used  for  the  insertion  of  the  top  of  a  drill.  The  lower  i)ancl 
contains  several  i>airs  of  parallel  lines,  between  which  is  the  rude  out 
line  of  a  steamboat  representing  a  revenue  cutter. 

Plate  41),  tigs.  1  and  li,  represents  ivory  implements,  probably  used  in 
connection  with  harness.  The  former  is  decorated  with  a  series  «>f 
nucleated  rings,  all  of  one  size  and  app.arently  made  with  the  same 
instrument,  while  on  the  latter  the  rings  are  replaced  by  simple  jier- 
forations,  some  of  which  are  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch  in  depth  and 
were  subseijuently  ftlle<l  with  a  hard  gummy  substance.  The  most  of 
them  have  now  become  emptied  of  tliis  material. 


M 


Hi   li,. 


GHAPiriC    AUT    OK    THK    KSKIMOft. 


883 


eciinen  ih 

I'oiii  point 

linos,  UM 

leer  \um\. 
four  ends 
lecorutittii 
vliicli  lire 
'in^  hone 

H;  a  drill, 
lolders  or 
)on  li^.  1 
sions  and 
I  to  which 
s  in  ])late 

ushunuk. 
^^ersely  to 
concentric 
r  surface, 
eet.  Tlie 
Northwest 
Lclusively 

tnib,  from 
cinien  in 
personal 
1  l>y  four 
from  the 
he  inner 
lines  are 
illustra- 
the  por- 
denote 
prossion, 
er  i)ancl 
ide  out 

used  in 

leries  of 

le  sanu^ 

pie  per- 

)th  and 
Imost  of 


The  rei>resentation  of  the  two  snow  shovels,  tij;.  10  a  iind  />,  is  to 
nulicati^  the  nuinner  of  attaching;  tlic  ivtuy  cutting  c<l^es  upon  which 
some  of  the  en{;ravin);s  descrihcd  are  fonnd.  The  wooden  portion  is 
^fcnerally  nuide  of  spruce;  the  several  pieces  (romprisin^^  the  shovel,  as 
above  shown,  are  secured  t«»};ether  by  nn'ans  of  sinew  braid.  They  are 
used  for  all  kin«ls  of  shoveling;  in  the  snow,  and  sometimes  for  «'xcavat- 
in;;  in  snowdrifts,  f«>r  nuikinp;  pitfalls  tor  pmus  etc.  The  ed};e  of  the 
wood  is  tltted  with  a  t(Mi};ue  into  a  y:roove  in  the  top  of  the  ivory  edjic, 
which   is    1.3  inches  deep.     It   is  fastened  on  by  wooden  treenails  at 


y^ 


KiK.40. 

SNiiW   SMOVEI.H. 

irregular  intervals,  and  at  one  end,  where  the  edge  of  the  groove  has 
been  broken,  by  a  stitch  of  black  whalebone.  ♦  *  *  Tlie  whippings 
of  sinew  braid  on  the  handle  are  to  give  a  tirm  grip  for  the  hands.' 

I'Mg.  41  is  a  fanciful  object  "  made  solely  for  the  market."  The  speci- 
nu!u  measures  2.0  inches  in  length,  and  is  made  of  an  ivory  head  fitted 
into  a  handle  of  wood  painted  red.  "The  head  was  called  a  'dog,'  but 
it  looks  more  like  a  bear.  Small  bits  of  wood  are  inlaid  for  the  eyes, 
ani  tiie  outline  of  the  mouth  is  deeply  incised  and  <!olored  with  red 
ocher,  having  bits  of  white  ivory  inlaid  to  represent  the  canine  teeth. 

'Ninth   Viinual  Report  IJureau  of  ICtlmology,  1887-88.     1892,  p. 30C,  tig. 386,  a  and  b. 
NAT  MUS  1)5 53 


\l' 


I  1*1    it 


834 


REPORT    OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


f'l  !  r 


The  ears,  nostrila^  vebrissa',  and  hairs  on  the  muzzle  are  indicated  by- 
blackened  incisions.  There  is  an  ornamented  collar  round  the  neck,  to 
which  is  joined  a  conventional  pattern  of  triangular  form  on  the  throat 
and  a  somewhat  similar  pattern  on  the  to^t  of  the  head  between  the 


ears. 


» 


Ornamentation  of  utensils  is  carried  on  to  an  almost  unlimited  degree, 
and  the  simple  nucleated  circle  occurs  very  fre<iuently,  in  fact  in  pre 
ference,  in  some  portions  of  Alaska,  to  the  arrowhead  and  herringbone 
designs. 


Fig.  41. 

t)EroRATKD  ivonv  c.Mivma. 

I'oiiit  BaiTow. 

From  Point  r>arrow  we  have  a  twister  for  working  the  sinew  backing 
on  bows,  upon  one  aide  of  which  is  a  row  of  conspicuous  nucleated 
rings.'  The  specimen  is  of  ivory,  and  measures  5.4  inches  long.  It  is 
one  of  a  pair,  as  two  pieces  constitute  a  sel. 

In  tig.  43  is  represented  a  good  example  of  a  native  dipper  made  of 
fossil  ivory.  The  decoration  along  the  top  of  the  straight  tlat  handle 
and  around  the  uj^per  part  of  the  outside  of  t!ie  bowl  consists  of 
nucleated  circles.  These  Avere  originally  colored  with  red  ocher,  but 
are  filled  with  dirt,  while  those  upon  the  handle  are,  to  a  great  extent, 
almost  effaced  by  wear. 


TWISTER  POH  WORKINO  SINEW  BAC'Kl.VG  Olf  BOW. 

Upon  fig.  44,  representing  a  knife  with  a  handle  made  of  reindeei 
antler,  occur  a  number  of  lines  of  nucleated  cin^Ies  «ionnected  by  short 
lines.  The  ornamentation  extends  horizontally  along  the  top  and  sides, 
the  incisions  havitig  originally  been  colored  witli  red  ocher,  but  at 
present  contain  more  dirt  than  o(!her.^ 


'Ninth  Annual  Report  Rnreau  ofEtlinolnf^y,  1^187-88. 
^Idcm,  i>,  173,  fiKH.  U:?  and  114. 


1892.     p.  292,  Ar.  2fi6. 


'^^^^^iik 


indicated  by 

tlie  neck,  to 

)n  the  throat 

between  the 


ni  ted  degree, 
1  fact  in  1)16 
herringbone 


I    11 


M' 


lew  backing 

s  nucleated 

ong.    It  is 

»er  made  of 
Hat  handle 
consists  of 
ocher,  but 
eat  extent, 


■^ 


'     tjVB  El 


«'      tl 


reindeer 

by  short 

^nd  sides, 

r.  but  at 


hi 


kr,  28B. 


i'[5|!^ 

I 

3.  ..1 

j 

i 

i 

1':  ■■ 

1 1 

Report  of  U.  S  National  Museum,  1 895 —Hoffman. 


Plate  53. 


Decorated  Hunting  Hat.    Katmai  Island,  Alaska. 


GRAPHIC    ART   OK    THE    ESKIMOS. 


835 


Another  iiiterestinjf  specimen  of  workmanship,  bearing  ornainiMita- 
tion  of  the  same  character  as  the  preceding,  is  shown  in  i\g.  45,  and 
consists  of  a  cliisel.  The  small  blade  has  an  oblique  tip,  not  beveled 
to  an  edge,  and  is  haft('<l  in  walrus  ivory,  yellow  from  age.  The 
nucleated  rings  aie  coh)red  witli  red  ocher,  and  the  two  halves  of  the 
handle  are  fastened  together  by  a  stout  wooden  treenail  and  a  stitch  of 
whalebone.' 


Fi};.4;i. 

DIPI'EIl  (IF  FOWSIL,  IVOKY.2 

The  accompanying  illustration  of  the  foreshaft  of  a  seal  dart,  fig.  46, 
is  given,  reproduced  from  the  report  on.  the  natives  of  Point  Barrow.' 
The  ornamentation  is  contined  almost  wholly  to  the  nucleated  circles, 
the  oidy  animate  object  portrayed  being  a  deer.  It  is  said  that  some 
of  these  shafts  are  highly  ornamented,  the  firjures  being  all  incised 
and  colored,  some  with  ocher  and  some  with  soot. 

The  specimen  shown  on  plate  .'i.'i  represents  a  decorated  hunting  hat 
from  Katmai  Island,  Cooks  Inlet,  Alaska,  and  was  collected  by  Mr. 
W.  J.  Fisher. 

/b. 


l''i{r.44. 

1.AR'1K    KMKB   Willi   OUNAMKN  IKll   IIANDI.i;. 

This  vari«'ty  of  head  covering  is  (Mumiion  to  tlie  Uiitives  of  the  islands 
of  Kadiak  and  those  occupied  l»y  tlic  Aleuts.  'Iliis  si)e(;ini«'n  is  made 
of  wood  shaved  down  until  tlic  average  tliickness  is  only  about  one- 
Icmrth  of  an  inch,  wliile  tlie  Insight  along  the  front,  from  the  toj)  lo  the 
I'ottom  of  the  viscu-,  is  !>!,'.  inches.  The  color  in  chief  is  of  white;  the 
iiorizontal  band  about  the  bottom,  llcsh  color;  the  remaining  vertical 
stripes  in  front  smd  about  the  top,  and  downward  through  the  crescent- 

Niiilli  Aiimiul  liiijiort  Miireini  of  Ktliii<)lo<;y,  18S7-HS.     ls<t2.  p.  !";{,  ligs.  li;{  and  lit. 
Idem.  tijr.  IL'.  ]..  103. 
Idem,  p.  217,  lig.  L'04. 


If., 


836 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Ill 


KiC.  45. 

OIIISEI,,    WITH     DKCO- 
KATICI)  IIANDLK. 


i\l'i 


like  figure,  blatik.    Tlie  interior  spaces  between  the  black  lines  just 
nanic'l  are  filled  in  with  dark  or  dirty  vermilion. 

Beads  of  dark  blue,  bhuk,  and  white  constitute  portions  of  the 
decorations,  while  the  projec^ting  lines  denote  the  application  of  sea- 
lion  bristles,  over  several  of  which  beads  have  been  sliiiped. 

Tlie  chief  purjjose  of  here  representing  the  specimen  is  to  show  the 
place  of  attaching  the  decorated  bone  <unaments  illus- 
trated on  plate  52.  The  strips  of  bone  are  but  one-eighth 
of  an  inch  in  thickness,  yet  there  are  a  number  of  per- 
forations along  the  top  curve  and  outer  edge,  in  which 
were  inserted  bristles  secured  by  small  wooden  pegs. 

The  ornamental  ;.lab  of  bone  attached  to  the  right 
side  of  the  hat  is  decorated  with  oblique  grooves,  about 
one-half  an  inch  apart,  between  which  are 
rows  of  dots  01-  coini)lete  perforations. 

Upon  the  left  side  of  the  hat  the  bone 
slab  was  split  from  near  the  top  to  the  bot- 
tom, while  the  diagonal  grooves  were  util- 
ized to  carry  threads  beneath  the  level 
of  the  outer  surface  to  hold  together  the 
pieces  from  comidetely  separating. 

Upon  the  upper  part  of  the  back  of  the 
hat  are  twr  arrowheaded  ornaments,  each 
I'l  inches  in  length  and  projecting  at  right 
angle"?  from  the  wooden  base,  each  being  decorated  with 
nucleated  rings,  those  on  the  central  rows  of  four  each 
measuring  three-sixteenths  inch  in  diameter,  while  the 
outer  rows  of  three  rings  each  are  but  one-eighth  of  an 
inch  each. 

The  two  en«ls  of  the  piece  of  which  the  hat  is  made  are 
held  together  by  means  of  a  piece  of  wood  5^  inches  long 
and  less  than  an  inch  in  width,  placed  horizontally  at 
the  back  and  bearing  perforations  along  the  central  line, 
through  which  a  sea  lion's  whisker  has  been  jtassed  in 
imitation  of  stitching,  thus  securing  the  ends  with  a  ]>er- 
fectness  to  almost  resemble  a  continuous  pi«^ce  of  wood. 

The  decorations  vary  according  to  the  owner's  skill  and 
taste,  and  are  used  in  canoe  trips  to  protect  the  eyes  froni 
the  glare  of  light  and  to  permit  more  intent  gazing  for 
the  marine  animals  sought. 

In  plate  54  are  three  exami)le8  of  Eskimo  bone  carv- 
ing, the  outer  ones  being  charms  and  ornaments  for  attachment  to  the 
hunting  hats,  an  illustration  of  which,  together  with  the  method  of 
attachment,  is  shown  in  plate  53. 

The  si)ecimen  at  the  left  of  the  plate,  as  viewed  by  the  reader,  was 
collected  by  Mr.  E.  W.  Nelson  at  Hhaktolik.     It  is  of  bone,  and  is  deco- 


k 


Fig.  iO. 

SKAI,  KAKT. 


lines  just 

MIS  of  the 
ion  of  sea- 

►  show  the 
lents  illus- 
ono-eighth 
ber  of  per- 
3,  ill  which 
leii  pegs. 
)  the  light 
)\e»j  about 


m\ 


m 

m 


i\\.  MAHT. 

lilt  to  the 
let  hod  of 

|(l(>r,  was 
is  deco- 


1 

^  H 

;|  H 

•  M 

1 

H 

lii.  1 

l\  i' 

EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    54. 


1 


l-iii.  1.   Hat  Ouxamknt. 

((\it.Xo. -JlTii:!,  r.S.  N.  M.     St.  Mirhai-N.      Collei'lnl  liy  I.    MTmrnT* 

Fiji.  1'.  Hap  ()i:na.mi-.m. 

((,'at.  N'li.  .")(lll4,  r.  S.  N.  M,     I'ri-innrskii,  ViiUmi  Itivcr.     (  ulliTtid  li\    TIioiikim  l)i'iini-<iiii.) 

lijf.  ;>.  Hat  Ouvamkni. 

((.^iit. No. 4;w(i8,  r.s. N.  .M,    sii.iktoiiu.    Cuiiri  ini  ii\  )■;.  w.  Nii>..ii., 


Report  o'   U    S.  National  Museum.  1895-    Hoffnnan. 


Plate  54. 


n 


II--  '$  ^^ 


r 


r 

li^^^ 

M 

If  '•' 

1 

t 

"'■; 

r' 

-^v.1 

^n  i 

lit 


Hat  Ornaments  of  Bone. 


:ti  '1 


m 


ii 

'1 

GRAPH FC   ART   OP   THE   ESKIMOS. 


837 


ruled  with  tlireo  round  ]>ie(!e8  connected  above  and  below  by  i)erniit- 
ting  the  original  bone  to  remain  intact  while  the  intervening  portions 
were  removed.  The  disks  are  each  ornamented  with  live  niu'leated 
circles,  tlie  central  spots  being  perforations  of  uniform  diameter. 
Among  these  rings  are  three  incised  lines,  darkened  by  dirt. 

The  specimen  at  the  right  side  of  the  plate  is  from  St.  Micliaels, 
N(>rton  Sound,  and  was  collected  by  Mr.  L.  M.  Turner.  The  specimen 
is  also  of  bone,  an«l  the  decorations  are  alike  on  either  side.  This  also 
is  a  charm  for  use  on  hunting  hats. 

The  specimen  in  the  center  of  the  i)late  is  of  thin  strip  of  bone,  to 
be  used  for  a  similar  purpose  as  the  two  i)receding  in  ornamenting 
hunting  hats.  The  specimen  is  marked  ''Natiomil  Museum,  No.  5(J04, 
Premorska,  Yukon  Hiver,"  and  was  collected  by  Thomas  Dennison. 
The  nucleated  circks  U[»on  the  specimen  have  running  upward  straight 
lines,  bifurcated  at  the  top  in  imitation  of  one  variety  of  the  tree  sym- 
bol, while  midway  b«'tween  the  top  and  bottom  are  like  i>roJecting  lines 
as  at  the  top.  At  the  lower  extremity  of  the  specimen  is  a  simple  form 
of  decortation,  consisting  of  a  horizontal  line  from  which  short  lines  are 
projecting. 

Plato  7  represents  three  forms  of  ivory  arrow  and  spear  straighten- 
ers  from  three  different  localities  and  bearing  dift'erent  forms  of  decora- 
tion. The  specimen  at  the  left  side  of  the  plate  was  collected  by  Mr. 
E.  W.  Nelson  at  Diomede  Islands,  a  locality  occupying  a  position  mid- 
way between  the  American  and  Asiatic  continents.  It  measures  8J 
inches  in  extreme  length,  1^  inches  across  the  widest  part,  and  has  an 
average  thickness  of  five-eighths  of  an  inch.  The  perforation  with 
which  the  weapons  to  be  straightened  are  held  is  at  an  angle  of  almost 
45  degrees,  as  compared  with  the  plane  of  length  of  the  piece. 

The  rear  or  convex  part  is  plain,  but  upon  the  slightly  concave  front 
is  an  engraving  of  a  reindeer.  Tiie  lines  seem  to  be  partly  filled  in 
with  dirt,  tJie  result  of  use,  and  not  with  black  coloring  matter  placed 
there  with  ii  tention  to  intensify  the  sketch. 

The  slight  depression  which  api)ears  lower  down  uiion  the  handle  is 
intended  to  be  used  in  drilling,  the  top  of  the  drill  being  held  vertical 
by  being  inserted  in  the  cavity,  while  the  opposite  end  maybe  intended 
for  drilling  holes,  or  for  fire  making. 

Another  specimen  is  that  at  the  right,  also  collectt'd  by  INIr.  Nelson, 
tho"'- J  at  Cape  Darby.  This  si)eciinen,  intended  for  similar  service  as 
..receding,  is  shaped  like  the  body  of  a  deer  with  the  doe's  head  at 
one  end,  while  the  eyes  are  two  blue  beads  neatly  inserted  in  holes. 
Like  the  prece«ling,  some  traces  of  hunting  records  are  retained,  tlie 
incisions  in  several  places  being  almost  obliterated  by  long  continued 
use.  At  one  place  a  native  is  represented  as  directing  a  gun  toward  a 
reindeer,  while  in  front  of  the  latter  are  several  lines  indicating  that 
another  specimen  of  the  same  si)ecies  was  to  be  engraved,  but  not 
<M)mpleted.    Almost  beneath  tlie  hunter  is  a  rectangular  figure,  to  one 


liii 


838 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MU8KIJM,  189r.. 


':    •- 


end  of  wLicli  is  attiirluMl  ti  inaninial,  which,  thoiif^h  rehitively  Rinall, 
appears  to  rcpii'sciit  a  boar. 

U])on  the  <»p])osite  side  of  tlie  HtHM'iiiien,  wliich  is  browninh  yellow 
from  age,  are  a  iinniber  of  deliciite  lines,  some  of  which  clearly  por- 
tray habiti«tioiis,  a  tiee,  two  men,  and  a  slcil^'e  with  two  dofjs. 

Alonjf  the  back  of  tlic  specimen,  representinjjf  the  spine  of  the  ani- 
mal iuutated,  are  two  ])arallel  lines  extending  backward  toward  thv 
h)zenge-shaped  jterforation  ummI  for  straightening  weapons.  The  per 
foration,  as  in  the  preceding  example,  is  also  cat  through  at  an  angle, 
though  only  about  lU  or  1")  degrees  variance  from  tiie  line  of  the  longest 
diameter.    The  entire  lengtli  is  4^^  incrhes. 

The  middle  si)ecimen  is  from  Nnbriuklichugnlnk,  ami  Wiis  secured 
by  ]\Ir.  Nelson.  The  form  is  greatly  liketl'atol'  a  common  steel  car- 
riage wrench.     It  is  made  of  bone,  and  the  four  sides  of  tin;  handle 


rj 

III 

ol 

tl 


Fig.  47. 

TOOI,  llAil  I  If'  WOI.VEniMO  SKIM. 


bear  longitudinal  lines  with  lateial  (tuts,  so  placed  as  to  resemble 
arrowheaded  or  >-shaped  iignres.  The  typo  of  deeorjition  being  one  of 
the  oldest  and  simplest,  will  be  fcmnd  more  lully  treated  sind  illustrated 
in  connection  with  the  subject  of  decoration  and  conventionalizing. 

The  specimen  is  apparently  a  very  old  one,  arclneologicjilly,  and 
shows  traces  of  long  continued  or  rough  usage. 

Plate  40,  fig.  0,  shows  an  ornament  for  attachment  to  the  cap  used 
by  Aleut  hunters,  as  is  shown  in  plate  53.  This  specimen  was  obtained 
at  Kushunuk.  The  ornamentation  consists  of  very  strongly  incised 
concentric  rings,  to  the  outer  one  of  which  are  attached  two  parallel 
lines  extending  diagonally  toward  the  base  line,  possibly  Avith  the 
intention  of  tilling  the  blank  triangular  space,  which  would  otherwise 
remain  without  markings. 

Many  of  the  so-called  drill  bows  in  tlie  collection  of  the  National 


GRAPHIC    ART    OF    THK    KHKIM08. 


830 


ve]y  small, 

isli  yellow 
Itijirly  por- 

r>f  tlM!  ani- 

owaid  t\ni 

The  per 

ail  angle, 

lie  longest 

18  Heciiied 
sfeel  ear- 
lie  handle 


fesenible 
[ig  one  of 
lustrated 

zing, 
jlly,  and 

ip  used 

Obtained 

incised 

Iparallel 

lith  the 

lierwise 

[ational 


Museum  are,  in  reality,  handles  tor  (tarrying  toot  and  other  bags.  The 
I'oint  Harrow  collection  contains  four  such  bags,  and  as  iMr.  Murdoch's 
description  is  short  and  to  the  point,  I  can  not  do  better  than  to  <piote 
him.    He  says: 

Theau  ba^^H  aru  iihva.vH  iiiiido  of  Hkiii  with  the  liair  out,  and  tlitt  Hkins  of  wolver* 
iiK'H'  luiadH  are  tho  most  doHirtMl  Cor  tliiH  ]mii|»oh(;,'     [I'ig.  17.  | 

rii»  bottom  of  tli*0)a;;  is  a  pioco  of  siiort-liaired  brown  duorHkin,  with  tlio  huir 
out,  piurced  acroHH  tlio  luitidlc.  'lim  HJdos  and  unds  ar«^  iniitio  of  thu  HkinH  of  four 
wolverine  heudH,  witliout  tlio  lower  .jaw,  cut  off  at  tiie  nape  and  Hpread  out  and 
sewed  to^cllier  Hide  by  Hid()  with  tlie  hair  outside  and  nosi's  up.  One  head  conioH  to 
eaeh  end  of  the  hn'^  and  each  Hide,  aud  tlie  H|)a<;es  between  tliu  uohch  are  filled  «Mit 
with  K'i**NetH  of  dcerHkiu  and  w(dvcrini^  skin.  A  narrow  ntrip  of  the  latter  i»  Hewed 
rouiul  the  mouth  of  the  ba;;.  I'he  handle  Ih  of  walrus  ivory,  11^  inchen  h>n^  and 
about  one-half  inch  H(]uare.  There  is  a  vertical  lude  tlirou^h  it  ouc>half  inch  from 
each  end,  and  at  one  «uid  also  a  Iraiisvcrst^  hole  between  this  and  the  tip.  One  end 
of  the  thoni;  which  laHteiiH  the  handle  to  the  ba;;  is  drawn  through  this  hole  ami  eut 
otVeloHo  to  the  Hiirface.  The  otiior  end  is  lirou<;litovcr  the  handle  anil  <lown  through 
the  vertical  hob;  and  nuidt^  last  with  two  half  Htitclies  into  a  hole  through  the 
HO|>tum  of  the  uuHe  of  the  head  at  one  cud  of  the  ba^.  The  other  end  of  the  handle  in 
fantened  to  the  opposite  nose  in  the  same  way,  but  the  thon;c  ^>*  seeured  in  the  hole 
by  a  simple  knot  in  the  end  above.  On  one  side  of  the  handle  Ih  an  unfinished 
incised  pattern. 

Many  of  these  bag  handles  are  decorated  on  two,  tiiree,  or  even  all  four 
sides,  when  they  are  so  fasliioned.  altliougli  some  are  convex  tibove,  as 
well  as  below,  leaving  but  two  sides  upon  which  to  engrave  anything. 

Another  variety  of  decorated  handles  are  those  used  in  small  bags, 
meaning  but  oiie-(iuarter  the  si/e  of  the  one  above  described. 

In  addition  to  the  incised  ornamentation,  both  decorative  and  his- 
torical or  niythologic,  many  of  the  small  bag  handles  are  carved  with 
whale  Hukcs,  bear  heads,  seal  heads,  and  other  objects,  as  will  be 
found  upon  examining  various  illustrations  in  the  present  jiaper. 

DKCOKATlUN    OK   AN'IMAl-   CAIiVINtJS. 

As  in  the  preceding  methods  of  decorating  ornaments,  various  animal 
carvings,  ettigies,  toys,  etc.,  are  also  <uiiaiiient«!d,  the  artistic  ell'orts 
being  directed,  in  many  instances,  to  heighten  the  resemblance  to  the 
prototype  selected.  Thus  are  atteni[>ted  the  indication  of  spots,  stripes, 
and  scales  upon  animals  and  tish,  tlut  results  being  olten  very  clever. 

IMate  5.'J,  tig.  1,  shows  a  specimen  which  was  obtained  at  Sledge 
Island.  It  is  a  very  ornanientiil  handle  for  packages  or  bags,  to  either 
end  of  which  is  attached  a  short  (iliain.  <  )iie  of  these  chains  terminates 
in  a  seal  head.  The  links  were  cut  from  the  same  piece  as  the  handle! 
itself.  The  separate  attachments  to  which  the  package  is  fastened 
consist  of  two  small  swivels,  or  jtiiis,  perforated  below  ajid  terminating 
on  toj)  in  carved  seal  heads,  the  ears,  eyes,  nostrils,  an<l  mouth  of  which 
are  clearly  indicated.  The  ornanieiitation  upon  the  top  of  the  handle 
consists  of  four  small  characters  of  the  primary  form  of  dectoration 


'  Ninth  Annual  Report  hureau  of  Ethnology,  1887-88.     1892,  pp.  187, 188,  tig.  166. 


1 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


■3.2 

m 

140 


25 
22 

2.0 


1.8 


1111.25      1.4   ill  1.6 
=     —  11111=— 

< 

6" 

► 

emt,    *.  ■'> 


// 


'/ 


/A 


Photograpliic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  MSSO 

(716)  872-4503 


I 


ga 


840 


■^' 


if 


REPORT  OF  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


previously  referred  to,  tind  illustrated  in  plat«  48,  figs.  1  and  2,  and  plate 
31,  fig.  2. 

Plate  55,  lig.  2,  is  another  kantag  handle,  and  was  obtained  at  Norton 
Sound.  It  is  very  old,  measures  6.^  inches  in  length,  and  is  ornamented 
upon  the  upper  surface  with  two  rows  of  seal  heads  in  relief,  each  row 
consisting  of  fifteen  heads,  upon  which  are  indicated  the  eyes.  At 
either  end  are  the  relief  figures  of  two  whales  flanking  the  perforations 
through  which  the  cords  are  passed. 

Plate  32,  fig.  3,  represents  two  ear  pendants.  Very  quaint  ftices  are 
inclosed  by  circles  from  which  ])rqiect  four  small  circles  or  knobs  with 
central  indentations.  The  eyes,  nose,  and  mouth  very  much  resemble 
the  face  of  a  seal,  the  forehead  being  ornamented  by  small  punctures. 
This  closely  resembles  the  carved  ivory  seal  faces  in  fig.  0,  in  which  the 
punctures  are  placed  upon  the  cheeks  to  indicate  the  root  of  the  whis- 
kers. Above  the  eyes  are  markings  to  denote  the  eyebrows.  In  other 
respects  the  faces  are  very  human.  These  faces  resemble  to  some 
extent  that  shown  in  fig.  7,  although  it  will  be  observed  that  in  the 
latter  the  nostrils  are  very  definitely  outlined,  while  beneath  the  mouth 
are  two  pairs  of  descending  lines  to  indicate  tattoo  nmrks. 

Plate  56,  fig.  2,  represents  an  effigy  of  a  seal.  The  concentric  circles 
are  ornamented  on  the  outer  side  with  three  short  radiating  lines  and  a 
longer  base  line  in  exact  imitation  of  the  common  flower  symbol  which 
it  is  undoubtedly  intended  to  represent.  The  central  perforations  made 
by  the  central  pin  of  the  tool  used  in  making  the  symbols  are  closed 
with  wooden  blocks  which  secure  small  bunches  of  bristles.  Altogether 
the  8i)ecimen  is  very  artistically  made. 

Plate  56,  fig.  3,  shows  a  belt  clasp.  This  represents  a  seal.  Upon 
the  side  cf  the  body  is  a  large  figure  of  concentric  rings,  to  either  side 
of  which  are  three  small  sets.  The  central  one  is  furthermore  orna- 
mented with  four  short  radiating  lines  attached  *o  the  outer  ring,  while 
the  small  circles  are  decorated  with  short  radiating  lines,  the  upper  one 
being  represented  by  pairs,  while  the  bottom  line  is  represented  by  two 
lines;  yet  the  figures  appear  to  be  the  same  as  the  conventional  flower 
symbol,  which  may  have  been  utilized  in  this  instance  to  ornament  the 
body  of  the  animal,  as  in  the  preceding  case. 

Plate  26,  fig.  3,  represents  a  seal  drag  from  St.  Michaels.  The  thong 
is  made  of  rawhide,  and  the  instrument  is  used  for  dragging  dead  seals. 
It  is  made  of  walrus  ivory,  and  represents  two  seal  heads,  the  eyes  and 
nostrils  being  clearly  indicated,  not  only  by  perforations,  but  in  one 
case  the  perforations  are  filled  with  wooden  pegs,  and  the  other  the 
eyes  are  filled  with  beads.  Upon  the  throat  of  each  seal  is  the  ettigy  of 
a  whale,  very  neatly  carved,  and  partly  detached  to  add  to  its  relief. 
The  perforation  extends  through  the  mouth  of  the  seal  at  the  right 
hand,  for  the  admission  of  a  noose  or  cord.  U))on  the  upper  surface  of 
the  drag  concentric  rings  are  seen. 

Plate  56,  fig.  4,  represents  the  ettigy  of  a  seal,  and  was  made  to  be 


I 


and  plate 


at  Norton 
nainented 
each  row 
eyes.  At 
rforations 

fiices  are 
lobs  with 
resemble 
unctures. 
i^hich  the 
the  whis. 
In  other 
to  some 
it  in  the 
le  mouth 

ic  circles 
es  and  a 
ol  which 
nsmade 
e  closed 
iogetlier 

Upon 
her  side 
re  orna- 
gj  while 
per  one 
by  two 
I  flower 
ent  the 

i  thong 
1  seals. 
es  and 
in  one 
er  the 
Ifigyof 
relief, 
right 
face  of 

•  to  be 


li 


.     1 


I' 


li  I 


Ifli 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    55. 


W 


I 


I'i^.  1.  ]\m,  lIwni.K  WITH  Chain  1;m>s. 

iClll.  N(i.4lti!Pl.  r.S.  N.  M.      Slr.l;;..  l^lilliil.      (•(.llcilnl  l.y  K.  \V.  Nrlsi.ll.) 

lifj.  •_'.  Kantai;  IIaxihj:. 

(f'iit.  Xi>. 'JU:!!,  f.  S.  N.  M.     Noil  DM  Si.mi.l.     ( •nlliclc  d  liv  L.  M.Tiinn-r.) 
l'i>:.  15.    KAXTA(i   IIandik. 

(('al.Xi>.44«9i),  r.  S.  N.  M.     Sl.-.l;;.-  IsliiiKl.     Ccillci  ti-.l  l.v  K.  W".  Nrlsoii.) 


ij 


Report  of  U    S   National  Museum.  1895.     Hoffman 


Plate  55. 


Ui 

-I 

a 

z 
< 

I 

'J 
< 
oa 

o 

UJ 

t- 
z 
u 

< 

z 

IT 

O 


11 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    56. 


2 
I 

1     :>     :\ 


I'ij;.   1.    Kl'KKiV   OK   OlTKIl. 

(Ciit.No.  :tti4T:.  r.S.  N.  M.     KusliKmnik.     ( 'nllnl.il  liy  K.W.  Nelson.) 

Fig.  2.  Kkki<;y  ok  Skai., 

(Ciil.Nii.  r..V.Ki'.>.  r.S.  X.  M.     r.ri.slnn  \'.»\.     (•ollccica  l>.v  K.  1,.  McKiiv.t 
Fiji.  !'.    Fl'KKiY   OK   OTTKIt. 

(Cat.  No.  MiUii,  r..S.  N.  M.     Miiiiviik  Ishiiiil.     Collt    l.d  l.y  \V.  II.  Kail.) 
Fio.    I.     IlKKKiY    OK    SKAI.. 

((^iit.No, 48ilr.',  r.S.  N.  M.     KolzchiM'  Soiiml.) 
Fiji.  •">     KKKKiY   OK   WAi.itrs. 

(Cat.  No.  T-2!t()4.  V.  S.  X.  M.     Nasliafjak.     Colle.(««l  l>.\   K.  I-.  M.Ka.v.) 


M 


R«porl  nf  U    S    Nitional  MuiPum.  1895.      Hoffman 


Plate  56. 


Ornamented  Animal  Effigies. 


h'l 


1    ■  i 


<'.]i 


w-;' 


,"  ,1 


V,  J  •  1'  .  r*',.!/: 


.■'JL'i^'-'Tl.  i^;!. ■>'.>'!  i^{U>!'f-l\mUkii^mjiJlt^VJ^^)VSiSVfll 


Report  of  U  S  Nttmntl  MuMum,  liOS.-  HoffmaM. 


PtATt  67. 


57. 


I 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    57. 


r" 


1     :'     ;{ 


iy.  1.     I.KriliV    Ol'    I'l  «)l  NliKI!. 

(•'i,|.  Nil.  ClT'^li,  I'.S,  \,  M,      riiiil.iKlc.  I,     Cclli'i  Inl  li.v  I'"..  \V.  N'cImi.ii.j 

'in.!'.  ('.\iivi:r  I'niriM'.s  <>i    Si.ais, 

(CmI.  No.  :i,"ilMlii.  r.S  N.  M.     Aliiiiiiiii  IsliiiiiN.     CnlliTi.il  liy  1 ..  \I    liinii  r 

'"iK. H.  KriitiY  OK  Skai.. 

(('ill.  Nci.  :;7ril(i  1.  S.  N.  M.     I'niili.Ulr.i.    (■..Il.ri.a  l.v  i:.  W.  N.  l>..ii,i 


'!>:.  I.  l>iiA<i  IIaxi'I.k  is  Imiiation  uk  m.ai.. 

(('ill.  No. ;i:iL'!ij.  r.s.  \.  M.    Nurioii  SomikI,    Cillrci. 
'jii.'t.  Iti'.r.ciiA. 


(Cil.  No.  ;i:i:i7;i,  I.  S.  N    M.     Nnrion  Smnrd.     ('..llrcii 


■iii 


ti.  lli;AVi:ii 


(C.ii.  No.  :i:;:i.')f,.  r.s  N.  M,     Nmiimh  > 1.    (i.ll.cic 


in.  7.    (iHAVI.INt. 


(('ill.  No.  :n.'i;i.'    I'   S   N.  M       Nnilon  Soiiml,     C.illiMl. 


"ill. M.   I'lsii. 


(('ill.  No  :i:;.').;"i.  C,  S.  N.  .M.     I'oiiil  r.;iiiuu.     roll.rir 


l.\   i:.  \V.  N. ■Noll. I 


liv  !•:   W.  N..Nnii.i 


li\    K.  W.  N, 1,011  ) 


li\   !•:.  W.  N.Isoii 


i.\  I. Mill.  r.  II.  \ui\  \.s.  A.I 


1 

pm^ 

p 

1*!" 

■  ! 

1 

ii 


W 


J     'i 


It.  ii 


M 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


841 


Ki«. 4S. 

KIIIIINCJ     OK 
ITDKNDIM. 


used  for  attachiui:^  cord  and  for  drajjf;"!}?  seals.  The  ornainent.ation 
consists  of  sharply  marked  nucleate<l  cin-les.  The  specimen  is  from 
Kot/ebue  Sound,  and  is  considerably  ruder  aixl  less  artistic  than  the 
other  specimens  in  this  series. 

In  plate  50,  fig.  5,  is  reproduced  the  ettigy  of  a  walrus.  The  speci- 
men was  obtained  at  Nashagak  by  Mr.  E.  L.  ^bKay.  As  iit  tigs.^and 
.'i,  the  body  is  ornamented  with  concentric  rin;;s,  to  the  outer  of  each 
of  which  are  radiating  lines,  almost  like  the  conventional  flower  symbol, 
and  possibly  intended  for  the  same.  Kxtending  hori/.<Mitally  between 
these  "circle  nuirkings"  are  rows  of  small  perforations,  <u<lrilled  Ixdes, 
simply  to  serve  as  ornaments.  The  peculiar  marking  upon  the  top  of 
the  head,  which  no  doubt  is  intended  to  represent  the  wrinkles  orf(»lds 
of  the  skin,  is  also  the  rude  symbol  of  the  fennile  genitals  as  drawn  by 
the  Eskimo,  and  of  whi<'h  one  single  instance  is  found  in  the  collec- 
tions of  the  National  Museum,  ami  is  reproduced  in  fig.  4S. 

Plate  41,  fig.  1,  is  an  ivory  we«lge  used  for  splitting  wal- 
rus hide.  The  tool  is  made  in  imitation  of  an  otter,  the 
back  and  eyes  having  incased  nucleated  rings,  with  radii, 
which  are  connected  by  lines.  The  back  bears,  within  the 
parallel  space,  some  herringbone  patterns  similar  to  those 
on  the  figures  shown  on  the  same  plate  (41),  figs.  .{  and  4. 

Plate  r)4,  fig.  1,  represents  a  carving  of  an  otter.  The  arti- 
cle served  as  an  (unament,  but  for  what  special  i)urpose  is 
not  known.  As  will  be  noted  by  reference  to  the  illustration,  the  back 
from  the  neck  to  the  base  of  the  tail  bears  a  deep  iiu-ision,  through 
which  were  made  several  perforations  for  attaching  it  by  nu'ans  of 
cords  to  some  other  object.  Within  the  concentric  circles  are  blue 
glass  beads  which  have  been  in.serted  in  the  perforations  left  by  the 
tool  used  in  making  the  rings.  The  eyes  are  also  provided  with  srnall 
glass  beads.  All  the  lines  and  markings  have  been  filled  in  with  some 
black  coloring  matter. 

Plate  57,  fig.  0,  rei)resents  a  beaver,  upon  whose  back  is  the  outline 
of  a  snuiller  beaver.  Over  the  whole  are  ornamental  lines  crossing  one 
another  at  right  angles. 

Comi)arison  nuiy  be  made  with  an  efiigy  of  a  seal,  upon  whose  back, 
transversely  and  in  relief,  is  a  young  one;  both  parent  and  young  being 
deccHated,  the  former  with  concentric  rings. 

Plate  2(),  fig.  2,  represents  a  bag  hancUc  from  tiie  Lower  Yukon. 
The  specimen  is  almost  semicircular,  and  nieasures  1>  inches  across  from 
point  to  point,  and  4  inches  in  height.  The  upper  or  convex  side  lias 
high  relief  carvings  representing  bears'  heads,  niiu^  in  number,  the 
eyes  and  nostrils  being  pronounced  perforations,  while  upon  the  fore- 
lu>ad  of  each  is  a  sharply  defined  cross.  Along  the  upper  edge,  corre- 
sponding to  the  necks  of  the  bears,  are  the  deeply  cut  figures  of  six 
bears,  and  continued  around  to  tlie  inside  of  the  handle,  and  con- 
nected witli  the  necks  of  three  of  the  bears,  are  the  figures  of  trees. 


842 


REPORT  OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


^'.\'>< 


WU 


Immediately  below  tbe  bears'  beads  are  tbe  figures  of  seventeen  seals, 
to  tbe  back  of  eacb  of  wbicb  is  a  diagonal  line  to  represent  a  harpoon, 
while  transversely  to  the  latter  is  shown  the  cord.  These  resemble  a 
general  attempt  at  ornamentation,  tbe  uniformity  of  drawing  appear- 
ing to  substantiate  this  belief. 

Plate  57  represents  a  number  of  figures  of  animals  and  fish,  all  of 
them  toys,  with  the  exception  of  fig.  4,  whicb  is  a  drag  handle.  Fig.  1 
represents  a  fiounder,  and  is  ornamented  with  delicate  incisions  and 
radiating  lines  for  fins.  Fig.  2  shows  an  ivory  carving  representing 
seals  and  ornamented  with  delicate  jtunctures  and  incised  lines.  Fig.  3 
is  an  effigy  of  a  seal  with  the  head  portion  plain  while  the  back  is 
ornamented  with  triangular  murks  as  if  made  with  single  incisions  of 
a  three-cornered  graver.  Fig.  4,  already  referred  to,  represents  a  seal, 
the  orniimentation  consisting  of  curved  parallel  lines  within  which  are 
short  diagonal  lines  extending  from  each  parallel  lino  toward  the  other. 

Plate  57,  fig.  5,  represents  the  beluga,  with  very  rude  markings  upon 
the  back. 

The  Kantag  or  bag  handle  shown  in  plate  58,  fig.  3,  is  in  imitation  of  a 
beluga  whale,  while  the  back  of  the  neck  also  bears  a  rude  outline  of 
such  a  mammal.  The  shoulder  bears  a  transverse  bar  within  whicb  is 
a  meandering  line  extending  from  side  to  side  of  the  animal ;  behind 
this  are  the  figures  of  four  "killer"  whales,  while  near  the  rear  end  of 
the  figure  itself  is  the  upper  part  of  a  bowhead  whale  shown  with 
water  spouting. 

Plate  55,  fig.  3,  represents  a  kantag  handle  from  Sledge  Island.  The 
decoration  consists  of  figures  of  four  right  whales  carved  transversely, 
two  at  either  end.  From  the  ends  of  the  handle  are  suspended,  in  the 
shape  of  links,  other  whales,  while  upon  the  middle  of  the  handle  are 
engraved  delicate  outlines  of  two  whales  facing  eacb  other. 

Plate  41,  fig.  6,  represents  a  bodkin,  the  point  consisting  of  part  of 
a  three-cornered  file  while  the  other  end  terminates  in  a  short  chain. 
The  last  link  represents  a  fish  tail  and  is  ornamented  with  nucleated 
circles,  while  the  handle  of  the  instrument  bears  a  series  of  nucleated 
rings  with  short  radiating  lines,  representing  the  fiower  symbol,  as  in 
plate  15,  fig.  4,  thouf;h  larger. 

Plate  57,  fig.  7,  represents  a  grayling,  though  in  reality  the  shape 
and  pronounced  decoration  of  the  upper  half  of  the  body  represents 
more  nearly  the  salmon.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  median  line  is 
ornamented  with  other  lateral  incisions  in  imitation  of  the  "fish  trap" 
pattern,  while  the  fins  are  very  pronounced  and  consist  of  shar])ly 
mtfrl.cd  serrations,  resembling  one  half  of  the  preceding  pattern. 

Plate  57,  fig.  8,  represents  a  fish,  the  dorsal  markings  consisting  of 
hatched  lines.    This  probably  represents  a  salmon. 


:eeii  seals, 
k  IiarpooD, 
esemble  a 
?  appear- 

ish,  all  of 
3.  Fig.  1 
10118  and 
[•eseiiting: 
8.  Fig.  3 
back  is 
•isions  of 
ts  a  seal, 
iiieh  are 
lie  other. 
igs  upon 

tion  of  a 
Jtline  of 
ivliich  is 
behind 
I'  end  of 
m  with 


1.  The 
tersely, 
,  in  the 
die  are 

part  of 

chain. 

Jleated 

ileated 

I,  as  in 

shape 
esents 
line  is 
trap" 
iarj)Iy 


ng  of 


I  i  1 
1 1 


•p 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    58. 


1 
2 

3 
4 
5 


Vig.  1.  HtNTixc  Kkcorp. 

((Jat.  No.  8!)4(<7,  r.  S.  X.  M.    I'oiiit  Karrow  .    C<»ll«'(tra  li.v  Kitiil.  V.  11.  Kay,  V.  S.  A.) 
Fig,  2.  Kanta«i  Haxih.e. 

(Cul.Xo.  4;Ji>:ifi,  U.  S.X.M.     '■Niilmiiiklu-lmpiluk."     (Jollt'ctcd  l.y  K.  W.  Nelson.) 

V'lff.  3.  Kaniaij  Handle. 

((.'at.  No.  jyg'.'O.  r.  S.  N.  M.     rnalaklcet.    CoiU'ctfa  liy  E.  W.  Nilson.) 
Fig.  4.  Kantag  Handle. 

(Cat.  No.244'.'9.  r.S.  \.  M.     St.  Micliael.s.    Coll.ctcfn.y  I..  M.  Tuniir.) 
Fig.  5,  IJoNE  IJ(>.\. 

(Cat. No.  129221,  r.  S.  N.  M .     St.  MUliael.s.    (JolU'cttKl  liy  L.  M.  Tiiriiei.) 


1             , 

■'                1 

1,                          J 

imMm 

Report  of  U    S   Nations    Museum,  1895       Hoffman. 


Plate  58. 


hi     ,  i 


Decorated  Utensils. 


ni  ! 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


PICTOGRAPHS  OF  DOMESTIC  AVOCATIONS. 


843 


Fin-  49. 


The  greater  number  of  the  records  appear  to  come  under  this  general 
caption,  tojjether  with  whi«rh  some  hunting  scenes  are  inchided.  The 
various  forms  of  habitations  used  by  the  I'^skimo  are  also  here  referre<l 
to,  rather  than  in  the  i>revious  chapters  in  connection  with  the  j^eo- 
grajdiic  h>cation  and  environment  of  the  several  subtribes  or  settle- 
ments, because  comparisons  nniy  here  be  made  between  the  forms  or 
outlin«'S  of  houses,  sled;ies,  and  ])ossibly  also  canoes,  to  show  the 
degree  of  fidelity  of  reproduction  of  specific  ]>e<'uliarities  of  either  of 
the  last  named. 

HAlllTATIONS   AND   CONVKVANilK. 

In  his  referenc*'  to  the  dwellings  of  the  Eskimo  generally,  Mr. 
Petrotf '  speaks  of  the  winter  an«l  summer  habitations  as  being  (piite 
distinct  from  one  another.  The  former  being  underground  to  a  cer- 
tain extent,  having  a  mound-shaped  appear- 
ance with  a  ridge  projecting  for  some  distance, 
beneath  which  is  the  entrance,  is  closely  imi- 
tated in  the  pictographs  by  the  natives.  The 
smoke  holes  are  in  the  top  of  the  dome,  or  near 
the  center,  for  the  escape  of  the  smoke.  The 
common  houses,  on  the  other  hand,  are  inclosed 
above  ground,  and  jtartake  of  the  nature  of  ;i 
log  structure  coven'd  with  skins,  find  s<mie 
times  of  an  ordinary  tent-shaped  shelter.  The  fire  is  built  not  within 
the  tent,  but  before  the  entrance.  Tliis  feature  is  also  carefully  observed 
in  the  etchings  made  by  the  native  artist,  and  numerous  exaniples  are 
given  in  illustration  thereof. 

A  larger  building,  known  as  the  kashqa,  is  found  in  almost  every 
village,  built  after  the  pattern  of  the  winter  habitation.  A  raised 
platfornx  runs  all  around  the  interior  for  seating  the  visitors,  and  on 
some  of  the  larger  kashqas  several  such  tiers  have  been  observed. 
These  structures  are  generally  used  for  <eremonial  observances.  An 
illustration  of  the  ground  pl.ai  of  such  an  inch)8ure,  made  by  a  native, 
is  reproduced  in  lig.  49. 

In  tig.  49  is  the  outline  of  a  dwelling  leproduced  from  plate  81, 
which  constitutes  a  Chuckche  '•  year  record."  Tiie  original  was  obtained 
by  Baron  Nordenskiold  in  Siberia,  and  is  now  in  the  possession  of  a 
gentleman  in  England.  The  pictographs  were  drawn  upon  a  piece  of 
walrus  hide. 

In  the  interior,  at  the  left,  is  shown  the  ridge  intended  for  seats  or 
sleeping  places.  The  o(!cupant  seated  upon  it  api)ears  to  be  gesticu- 
lating and  in  conversation  with  his  companions. 

A  similar  drawing  in  fig.  50  shows  this  seat  also.    This  sketch  is 


KWBI.l 


NU  KliOM  ClinKfllK.  YEAR 
HE<<>11I). 


I 

I 


'  Teuth  Census  of  tli«  Inited  States,  VIII,  p.l28. 


844 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1896. 


UTO 


1'         .  i_    _ 

'  '    '       '■  i/ 

!;■■;(      ;  ■"■ 

1    ' 

''    '■             ■'■', 

Vi!{.  60. 

WINlKIl    IIAII1TATU)N,   WlIU    WOOD  CIIOITKIt   AT   WOltK. 


from  u  piiiu  fruin  Norton  Suiiiid.     A  druiiiiner  occupies  the  Heat,  while 
his  roiiipsinions  are  diinciiig. 

On  th(^  ontHJde  is  hIiowii  one  niua  at  work  clioppintr  wood,  wliile  two 
of  Ilia  <*oinpaiiionH  are  indicated  hh  brin^^ing  in  a  itiece  of  timber  tor 

Hplitting. 
This  structure  is  al 
^  most  a  connterjiart  of 

r        ~^  ^        the   specimen   on   the 

^^~~'     ^  ^        (Jliuckche  chart  from 

Siberia. 

In  11};.  />l  are  repre- 
sented two  forms,  almost  identical,  of  structures  made  for  white  men, 
to  serve  as  trading  establishments  as  well  as  sleeping  (juarters.  The 
outline  in  some  i)ictographs  of  traders  jmssesses  one  more  nearly  like  a 
one-story  log  house. 

On  one  of  the  ivory  bodkins  shown  in  ])late  2-4,  tig.  .">,  the  triangular 
figures  with  diagonal  projecting  lines  on  either  side  near  the  top  are 
outlines  of  summer  habitations,  the  utilization  of  which  for  apparently 
purely  decorsitive  i)ur])()ses  being  ]>robably  i)romi»ted  by  the  regular  and 
angular  forms,  straight  lines  being  preferable  and  more  desirable  for 
such  ornamental  engraving,  as  curved  lines  are  foreign  to  the  i>rinutive 
straight-line  system,  largely  attributable  to  the  kind  of  instruments 
available  and  the  generally  ditli(!ult  nature  of  the  substance  to  be 
worked  or  engraved. 

In  plate  59,  lig.  4,  is  another  and  ruder  form  of  indicating  the  same 
style  of  summer  habitation,  the  variants  in  plate  50,  tig.  li,  being  also 
more  explanatory  in  detail,  and  of  interest  as  indicating  a  departure 
in  engraving  from  the  original  type  of  a  tent  shelter,  the  light  lines 
diverging  from  near  the  top  denoting  the  poles,  over  which  some  skins 
or  importe*!  fabrics  have  been  thrown. 

In  plate  <»()  aic  a  number  of  illustrations  of  native  pursuits.  In  the 
fifth  line,  or  No.  5,  are  shown  son>e  delicately  engraved  figures. 

Nos.  1,  .*{,  5,  7, 1),  lb,  and  12  represent  habitations  of  several  kinds,  of 
each  of  which  the  village  is  composed.  The  occupant  at  the  entrance 
to  No.  1  is  employed  in  susi)eiMling  from  a  ]K)le — to  the  left  of  the  house 
No. .{ — some  meat,  probably  fish.  Festoons  of  the  same  kind  of  food, 
for  the  purpose  of  drying,  are  sus- 
pended from  the  food  racks  shown  in 
Nos.  1,  r>,  an<l  S  antl  on  the  horizontal 
pole  resting  on  the  roofs  of  the  two 
houses  at  Nos.  0  and  10.  A  granary 
is  also  in<licated  in  No.  S,  the  stair- 
way beneath  being  plainly  shown.  The  occupants  of  the  houses  Nos. 
0  and  10  are  also  occupied  with  domestic  duties.  Fig.  U  represents 
the  boat,  idaccd  upon  a  rack  so  as  to  dry  the  skin  covering. 

The  summer  habitation  (No.  12)  has  an  open  door  at  one  side,  and  to 


id. 


Fig.  SI. 

WHITE  MEN'S  DWELUNHS. 


t,  while 


liilc  two 
iIht  for 

'o  is  ul 
•puit  <>f 
on   th(; 
t  from 


I  repre- 
to  men, 
?.  The 
{ like  a 

ngnlar 
o])  are 
irently 
lar  and 
ble  for 
mitive 
iments 
to  be 


:  same 
g  also 
iirtiire 
!;  lines 
skins 

tn  the 

ids,  of 
ranee 
honse 
food, 


Noa, 
sents 


id  to 


1 

11  ' 

1 

,1 

EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    59. 


.,■■:' 

i     ^    '    \ 

1     .    i    ■' 

lii 


Iv'^ 


Fiii.  \.   iM.'M.i,  How. 

il'iil.  Nil.  i;i'.i:il».  r.S.  N.  M.     Niilniiikli.     <  (ill. ■(•till  l.y  !•:.  \V.  N.lsi.ii.) 

I'i-i.  1'.   I»i!ii.i,  Hiiw. 

(Cat.  Nil.  i;i;ifi(l.  r.  S.  N.  M.      rain-  I'litur  nl'  Walf.-.     Cnilritiil  \<\    K.  \V .  \il.-inii  ) 

rijj.  :•.  lUMi.i,  How. 

(Cat.  No.:!:tl8r.,  C.S.N.M       Norton  Soiiml.     Ciilltctiil  liy  F..W.  NiNmi.) 
1  lU'.   I.    iMill.l.   Mow. 

(Cat.No.  ;!;il87,  r.S.  N.  M.     Niiitoii  Soniiil.     Cullfilril  liy  K.  W.  Nelson.) 


Rtpoft  of   U.  S   NatiM' .)    MusHum,  IBiS       M..Hm.in 


Plate  59. 


O 
CO 


a: 
Q 

z 
o 

o 

CE 

o 
o 


II 


Report  of  U.  S.  Nktional  Muieum,  1895.— Hoffman. 


ffl^^^/zi   <    III  ^    Ml  t   a  ^  I  ^   I 


Kij 


..^^a^»\  A[Hlj^Mi^7Hr^'S]^^#°H^  Ai^ 


1  S34567  8  9 


10  11  13    la 


anter:;^^, 


.,^mii^^_f::C^  /g':^^'^^^^^" 


';f!^-^a^>^ 


A  ^-L^ 


*nn^.m^ft.^i^rtc:^ip^w.,.A:j&'U 


1  S      3  4  5  0  7  8 


0  10 


11 


Records  of  Domestic  Avoc 


Plate  60. 


y 


J I. 


♦   I  *  »   i^  M    ♦    i    I   rr^ 


kdAdikilA^ 


^^ffgfLA^ii-Hikll  -iiiiH-'ii'i'ftmm-nrTi 


10     11      12  18  14  16  16   17   18     19      SO   21  2S   23  24   >» 


^f^fe'r!!!^A.»w<^^..^.^i^^^  M^^^^4^ 


10         11  13 

6 


14        15 


16 


a 


';^^vwJ^^4>Mh1-^^w^  IfftiAlfMH  h 


# 


ift       n 


12  13 


f^W-^:v 


ji>- 


11  t» 


)RDS  OF  Domestic  Avocations. 


18 


14       15       16 


i.,.; 


'^'i 

GRAPHIC    ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


845 


the  right  is  se<ate(l  one  of  the  Iiousehohl  (No.  13)  eiii|ih>yed  in  Mtirring 
some  food  in  a  ketth*.  The  smoke  (No.  11)  is  rising;  to  u  consideruble 
height,  and  another  pot  or  kettle  is  seen  to  the  right.  The  native 
shown  in  No.  1~»  is  greatly  excited,  having  both  hands,  with  ext«'iid('d 
fingers,  thrown  ui)ward,  the  cause  being  seen  in  an  old  man  drag- 
ging ashore  a  walrus,  which  is  being  harpiNUied  by  No.  17.  The  (d«l 
age  of  the  native  (No.  1<»)  is  indicated  by  his  walking  with  a  staff,  this 
method  of  portraying  an  old  ])ersou  being  common  in  many  portions 
of  the  world,  the  Kgyi>tian  hieroglyphs  abounding  in  chariicters 
almost  identical  to  the  one  here  shown.  Tin*  walrus  (No.  lU)  is  also 
shown  as  having  been  captured,  the  native  in  No-  L*l  having  con 
siderable  dilVu'ulty  in  dragging  it  ashore,  as  he  is  d<iwn  on  one  knee 
tugging  at  the  harpoon  line,  while  a  companion  is  obscrv»'<l  near  him 
(No.  22),  aiding  him. 

Fig.  20  is  the  outline  of  a  doe,  which  was  als«>  secured.  No.  L'.'i  denotes 
a  dog,  while  Nos.  21  aiul  25  indicate  two  other  Uiitives. 

An  excellent  illustration  of  the  different  methods  of  portraying  canoes 
and  houses  is  given  in  platen  <50,  seventh  line,  the  whole  scene  denoting 
a  native  village  situated  n«'ar  the  water.  Upon  the  canoe  (No.  21)  is  a 
^^shanuin  stick,"  or  votive  offering,  erected  to  the  menmry  of  the  one 
who  «)wned  the  scaffold,  and  perhaps  canoe  as  well.  Another  offering 
of  similai-  purport  is  erected  upon  the  roof  of  the  Ikuisc  No.  H».  Om* 
showing  the  same  fan-like  top  will  be  found  in  conne(;tion  with  mortuary 
customs. 

At  No.  4:  the  native  is  putting  away  sonu'thing  resend)ling  a  pole, 
while  at  No.  C  the  two  men  seem  to  be  engaged  in  <*onversation  con 
cerning  the  canoe,  the  one  nearest  to  it  having  his  right  hand  pointing 
towanl  or  touching  it. 

The  winter  habitations,  with  their  entrances,  are  jjortrayed  in  a 
manner  different  from  the  usual  (uistoin.  The  entrance  is  very  pro- 
jecting, and  apparently  overhanging. 

Smoke  is  seen  issuing  from  the  ai)ex,  chimney,  or  funnel  c«»ntaining 
asmoke  hole,on  the  house  No.  12.  A  food  scaffold,  known  bythe  vertical 
poles  projecting  considerably  above  the  transverse  ]>ody,  is  shown  in 
No.  13,  while  beyond  is  what  appears  to  be  anotlier  seaHWId.  The 
erosion  to  which  thQ  ivory  has  been  subjected  has  obliterated  all  other 
parts  of  the  figure. 

A  very  comnnm  figure  is  that  resembling  an  oblong  box  jilaeed  upon 
upright  poles,  in  reality  a  scaffold,  upon  which  is  built  a  storehouse  for 
the  protection  against  noxious  animals.  These  figures  are  usually 
placed  near  the  reju'esentatiou  of  the  dome  shaped  winter  habitation, 
as  each  family  has  such  a  storehouse. 

Other  scaffold-like  structures  also  occur,  and  IVeciuently  the  kaiak  or 
umiak,  placed  upon  the  scaffold  for  drying,  may  be  mistaken  tor  one  of 
these,  which,  in  reality,  are  the  resting  ]>lace  of  some  human  body. 
This  practice  is  not  common  everywhere,  however. 


1 

i- 

1 

I^K 

1 

^H 

I:> 


il., 


m 


' 

i  ! 

•,-.;! 

Wl 

I  ,?'    1       . 

h:  !i  j 

' '-, 

lij ' 

•  iii  1 

I . 

V. 

846 


REPORT   OV    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Ill  some  ethnogi'iiphic  "  Meinornnda  ('oncerning  the  anrtic  Eskimos  in 
Alaska  and  Siberia,"  by  Mr.  rlolin  W.  Kelly,'  an  interpreter,  says: 

The  EMkimo  ooiiieakH  (open  boats)  have  a  frainowork  of  spruce  covered  with  split 
walrii8  hides,  sea-lion  skiiiH,  or  white  ;j;raiiii)iis  skins.  Tlie  latter  is  not  used  if  sea- 
lion  or  walrus  skins  are  obtainable,  as  it  is  rather  thin.  The  Bering  Strait  and  north- 
coast  boats  are  generally  21  feet  long  with  5  feet  beam,  and  have  a  carrying  capacity 
of  15  persons  and  500  pounds  of  freight. 

Those  of  the  Kotzebne  Souu«l  average  about  ;{"•  feet  in  length  and  (i  feet  in  width. 
They  have  a  carrying  capacity  of  20  ]>crsons  and  1,000  pounds  of  freigiit,  or  3,000 
pounds  of  merchandise  and  a  <  lew  of  (J  men.  There  are  exceptional  boats  built  on 
the  sound  that  are  as  niuch  as  42  feet  over  all.  In  crossing  Kot/ebue  Sound  or 
Bering  Strait  the  natives  sew  on  bulwarks  of  sea-lion  skins  a  foot  high  to  keep  the 
water  from  dashing  in. 

Mr.  Ivan  Petrott','^  who  spent  a  number  of  years  in  various  portions 
of  Alaska,  in  an  oilicial  capacity,  says  of  the  vessels  of  the  Eskimo: 

All  the  Eskimo  tribes,  without  exception,  manufacture  an«l  use  the  skin  canoe 
known  as  the  kaiak,  identical  with  that  of  the  eastern  or  (ireeuland  Eskimo;  and 
this  feature  is  so  distinctive  and  exclusive  that  a  tribal  name  might  justly  be  based 
upon  it  should  the  necessity  arise  for  another.  At  i)re8ent  I  know  of  only  one 
instance  where  an  intermixture  of  the  inuuit  witli  arothcr  tribe  has  taken  place 


■«se^2£i-:5a 


Fiji.  52. 

MODEL   KAIAK   AXI»   DOITIII.B   I'ADDI,!'.,    I'DINT   KAHROW. 

nnder  such  circumstances  that  the  foreign  element  has  gained  the  npi)er  hand,  and 
there  they  have  already  abandoned  the  manufacture  of  the  kaiak  and  apparently 
forgotten  the  art  of  its  constriution.  I  refer  to  the  Oughalakhmute,  who  have 
mixed  with  the  Thlinket.  The  open  skin  boat,  the  owwudA,  or  woman's  boat,  also 
known  aa  hidar,  is  used  by  certain  tribes  on  the  north  coast  of  Asia;  but  the  kaiak 
jiroper  is  only  foTind  among  the  Eskimo. 

When  the  Russians  lirst  oltscrved  this  cratt,  they  applied  to  it  the  name  of  bidarkii, 
a  diminutive  of  bidar,  a  Kamchatkan  term  for  an  open  skin  boat.  This  term  is  now 
used  throughout  Alaska  wherever  Russian  intluenee  once  predominated,  aiul  the 
same  word  has  been  incorporated  into  several  Eskimo  dialects  in  the  form  of  hidaH, 
which  is,  however,  applied  only  to  two  and  three  ii.iteh  kaiaks — a  variety  formerly 
known  only  on  the  Aleutian  Islands,  and  ado)>tcil  by  the  Russians  for  greater  con- 
venience in  hunting  and  traveling.  From  Bristol  Bay  westward  and  northward  the 
kaiak  and  ooniiak  only  are  used. 

The  accompanying  illustration  serves  to  show  the  general  form  of  the 
kaiak,  so  often  figured  by  the  natives  in  their  hunting  record. ' 

Although  flg.  52  is  from  the  most  northern  portion  of  Alaska,  the 
generic  tyi)e  of  construction  is  practically  the  same  among  all  the 

'  Bureau  of  Education,  Circular  of  Information  No.  2, 18JH),  Washington,  18JM),  p.  27. 
-Tenth  Census  of  the  United  States,  VIII,  1884  (Alaska,  etc.),  pji.  124,  12.'). 
'Ninth  Annual  Report  Bureau  of  Ethnology,  1887-88.     1892,  tig.  341,  p.  224. 


..  27. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP   THE   ESKIMOS. 


847 


Eskimo.  The  double  psuldle  is  so  often  used  in  i)ortraying  signals  on 
ivory  that  its  representation  liere  will  be  of  interest  in  showing  how 
a(;curately  the  native  artist  portrays  even  the  taj>ering  form  of  the 
blades. 


Fig.  5:t. 

KAIAK. 


Kig.  54. 

KAIAK.'*. 


On  plate  27  i.s  shown  an  illustration  of  a  native  kaiak  model. 

Several  forms  of  the  native  i)<)rtriiyal  of  kiiiaks  are  shown  in  flgs.  53 
and  r>4.  Tho  first  is  a  simi)le  outline  and  ineonii)lete,  and  an  occupant 
was  evidently  intended  to  be  ])ortrayed,  as  all  the  remaining  portion  of 
the  record  from  which  it  was  selected  was  comjdetc  in  every  detail.  The 
two  illustrations  in  iig.  .■)4  are  less  accurate  in  outline,  the  latter  being 
a  simple  group  of  scratches. 

The  s])ccimcn  shown  in  tig.  55  is  very  accurately  drawn,  the  harpoon 
and  seal  float  being  shown  upon  the  kaiak  immediately  behind  the 
hunters. 

The  representation  of  large  boats  tised  for  traveling,  hunting,  and 
fishing,  for  the  propulsion  of  which  boat  oars  and  sails  may  be  used,  is  of 
such  frequent  occurrence  in  the  records  of  the  Eskimo, 
that  a  reference  to  the  vessel  and  its  actual  appearance 
is  deemed  ajjpropriate. 

This  large  skin-covered  open  boat  is  in  general  use 
by  the  natives  of  Crrecnland  and  Alaska,  as  well  as  by 
the  Aleuts  and  some  Siberian  tribes.  The  vessel  is  designated  as  the 
umiak,  by  the  Point  Barrow  natives,  and  some  of  the  Aigaluxaraiut,  of 
the  southern  coast,  have  used  this  name  as  well  as  the  term  baidarka. 

Fig.  5(5  represents  a  model  of  an  umiak  from  Utkiavwin,  U.  S.  N.  M., 
No.  565(53,'  and  seems  to  illustrate  the  general  form  so  closely  followed 
in  the  engravings  by  native  artists.  The  natives  sit  with  the  face 
toward  the  bow,  using  the  paddle  and  not  an  oar.    The  women  are 


j^S^sss^ 


Fig.  55. 

KAIAK. 


Fig.  .^0. 

MUDKI.  or  C.MIAK. 


said  by  Egede,  in  his  "(Treenland"  (p.  Ill),  to  sit  with  the  face  toward 
the  stern,  "rowing  with  long  oars."  Mr.  Murdoch^  remarks  with  refer- 
ence to  this  that  "though  the  women  do  a  great  share  of  the  work  of 


'  From  the  Ninth  Annual  Report  Bureau  of  Ethnology,  1887-88, 1892,  Iig.  34.')',  p.  340. 
'  Idem,  p.  335. 


I 


;i!i 

''■;■' 


k!    'fSm 

11 

II 

H  W  ' 

•    ■  '».)  ■ 

!i  i  .- 


';':: 


848 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


FiK.  57. 

UMIAK. 


navigating  the  boat  when  a  Hiiigle  family  or  a  srna]!  party  is  making  a 
journey,  it  is  by  no  means  considered  a  woman's  boat,  as  appears  to  be 
the  case  among  the  Greeidanders  and  tlie  eastern  Eskimo  generally. 
On  the  contrary,  women  are  not  admitted  into  the  regularly  organized 
whaling  crews,  unless  tln^  umialik  can  not  procure  men  enough,  and  in 
the  'scratch'  crews  assembled  for  walrus  hunting  or  sealing  there  are 

usually  at  least  as  many  men 
as  women,  and  the  men  work  as 
hard  as  the  women." 

This  is  mentioned  to  e.xplain 
the  reason  why  the  female  fig- 
ure is  absentin  records  of  hunt- 
ing and  fishing  trips,  although  present  in  other  scenes,  such  as  domestic 
and  i)robably  ceremonial  rej'ords. 

Plate  28  represents  an  illustration  of  a  native  model  from  Alaska. 

A  native  drawing  of  the  umiak  with  four  hunters  is  shown  in  tig.  57. 
The  lines  are  heavily  incised,  and  blackened.  The  men  are  without 
paddles,  which  may  have  been  an  oversight  on  the  part  of  the  artist. 
The  spear  or  harpoon  rest  is  also  shown,  as  well 
as  the  weapon  itself. 

A  lesscarefully  drawn  illustration  of  an  umiak     ^^^ 
is  shown  in  lig.  58.    The  three  occupants  are 
without  paddles.     Still  ruder  form  is  shown  in 
fig.  51),  where  an  attempt  at  throwing  a  harpoon  at  a  whale  is  also  shown. 

In  tig.  iH)  is  rei>roduced  a  still  ruder  drawing  of  an  umiak,  no  hunter 
being  shown,  yet  the  record  in  which  this  vessel  occurs  is  of  a  class, 
or  in  that  condition  of  completeness,  that  vshould  also  have  present  the 
occupant. 

A  better  illustration  of  an  umiak,  containing  tive  people,  is  shown  in 
fig.  (II.     The  lines  are  lightly  incised. 

A  neatly  executed  sketch  of  an  umiak  is  illustrated  in  tig.  Oli.  The 
bow  is  longer  than  usual,  and  also  projects  from  the  water. 


■AIL 

Fiji.  5H. 

UMIAK. 


X 


"g^m^ 


}-^iiLV5^^<^VK 


Fig.  69. 
UMIAK^PrilsUINci   WIIAI.K. 


Two  varieties 
of  sledges  are 
portrayed  in  pic- 
togra])hs  made 
by  the  Eskimo, 
oneof  them  being 
the  railed  sledge 

(fig.  0;5),  used  for  carrying  loads  of  articles  belonging  to  camp  equipage, 
etc.,  while  the  othei-  pertains  to  a  low  Hat  sledge,  without  rails  (fig.  64),' 
and  used  for  (sarryiug  bulky  objects,  such  as  game,  frozen  seals,  and,  as 
Mr.  Murdoch  infornis  us,  for  transporting  the  umiak  across  the  land  or 
solid  ice.  lioth  are  made  without  nails,  the  ditfereutparts  being  mortised 
together  and  lashed  securely  with  stitches  of  thong  and  whalebone. 


'Niuth  Auuuiil  lioport  of  Bureau  of  Ethnology,  1887-88,  1892,  p.  353. 


im:~ 


>\vn  in 

The 

trietie.s 
(8  are 
ill  pic- 
made 
skiino, 

beiiiK 

Isledjie 

]ipage, 

J.  64),' 

Lnd,  as 

liiul  or 

kitised 

[ue. 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF   THK    ESKIMOS. 


S49 


Fin.  60. 

IVMIAK. 


The  runners  are  made  to  slide  easily  by  fitting  to  them  .shoes  of  clear 
ice  as  long  as  the  runners  themselves,  "  fully  1  foot  high  by  (»  inches 
thick.  The  sledge,  with  these  ice  runners,  is  estinnited  to  weigh,  even 
wlien  unloaded,  upward  of  200  or  30(»  p:)unds;  but  it  appears  that  the 
smoothness  of  running  more  than  counterbalances  the  extra  w«'ight.'" 

The  Hat  sledgi'  is  used  also  for  ordinary  travel  as  well  as  freight,  and 
an  illustration  of  one  with  ivory  runners 
is  shown  in  tig.  05. 

The  ditterence  between  these  varieties 
are  ofteu  very  neatly  portrayed,  as  well 
as  other  accessories  pertaining  tliereto. 

Dot'tor  Dall  furnishes  several  illustra- 
tions of  sledges,''  one  from  Norton  Hound  being  like  the  railed  sledge  oi 
Point  Barrow.  Some  ditterence,  however,  is  sipparent,  and  this  may 
naturally  influence  the  portrayal  of  the  vehicle  in  engravings  on  ivory. 
The  same  author  also  furnishes  the  illustration  of  a  Hudson  Bay  sledge 
in  which  the  runners  are  absent,  the  entire  base  consisting  of  birch 
boards,  three  of  which  are  laid  side  by  side  and  secured,  and  about  12 
feet  long.  These  are  cut  thin  at  one  end  and  turned  over  like  a  tobog- 
gan, held  down  with  rawhide,  and  inside 
the  curve,  says  J)octor  Dall,  the  voyageur 
—    carries  his  kettle. 

The  railed  sledge  of  the  Yukon  is  scnne- 
what  dift'erent  from  the  two  forms  already 
mentioned,  the  upper  rail  rising  from  the  front  toward  the  back,  and 
resembling  very  much  a  native  sketch  of  a  dog  sledge,  as  shown  in  fig.  00. 
The  hunter  seems  to  be  seated  upon  the  8le<lge,  seeming  to  iiidiciite  that 
he  has  no  other  loads  and  that  the  rear  projection  on  the  sledge  is  the 
high  framework  shown  in  the  Yukon  type. 

In  fig.  07  is  a  native  reproduction  of  a  dog  sledge  made  somewhat 
after  the  type  of  the  Point  Barrow  type, 
though  no  such  drawings  have  been  found 
in  Point  Barrow  records.  The  men  are  both 
energetically  working  to  aid  the  dog  in  mov- 
ing the  sledge,  which  seems  loaded.  The 
dog  is  well  portrayed,  the  ragged  outline  no  doubt  being  intended  to 
denote  the  shaggy  coat  of  hair. 

In  his  reference  to  the  Eskimo  of  Melville  Peninsula,  Captain  Parry 
says  :•' 

The  distance  to  which  these  people  extend  their  inland  inunigr.ation8  and  the 
extent  of  coast  of  which  they  possess  a  personal  knowledge  are  really  very  remark- 
able. Of  these  we  could  at  the  time  of  our  first  intercourse  form  no  correct  judgment, 
from  our  uncertainty  as  to  the  length  of  what  they  call  a  seenik  (sleep),  or  one  day's 


^^i^^- 


Fig.  01. 

UMIAK. 


Fig.  02. 

UMIAK. 


•Ninth  Annual  Report  of  Bureau  of  Ethnology,  1887-88, 1892,  p.  354. 
^Alaska  and  its  Resources,  Boston.     1870,  p.  421. 
3  Journal  of  a  Voyage,  etc.,  etc.,  London:  1821,  p.  165. 
NAT  MUS  95 54 


850 


REPORT  OF   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


journey,  by  which  alone  they  couM  descriho  to  us,  with  th»!  help  of  their  imperfect 
aritlimetic,  the  UiHtance  from  one  ])ht('u  to  aiiotlier.  lint  our  Hnlmfi|uciit  knowledge 
of  thu  coast  haH  dearod  up  ninth  of  tills  dinicuHy,  alfordini;  th*^  invuns  of  applying 
to  their  hytlrograpliic-al  sketches  u  tolerably  accuiatu  seulo  for  thost;  parts  which  we 
have  not  hitherto  visited. 


:i  ■■>■■. 


?tif 


•i 


:  ^ 


fi,.  ,, 


I  ! 


■n   .  -»      -3r 


Fig.  fin. 

IIAII.KIl   SI.KIIlil;.       r'CiINT   IIAlillOW. 

In  the  following,'  (lescription  tents,  liiilutntions,  iiiul  boats  are  illus- 
trated, as  also  some  doniestie  avocations,  as  might  be  expecte*!  in  the 
representation  of  village  life. 

Quite  an  interesting  result  is  produced  in  plate  00,  fig.  <»,  or  sixth  line, 
the  drawing  repiesenting  the  outlines  of  the  houses  so  that  tlie  inte- 
rior, with  the  occupants  variously  engaged,  is  exposed  to  view. 


Fig.  64. 

FI,AT  SLEIKli:.     I'OINI'  IJAHnOW. 


The  end  of  the  record  at  No.  1  denotes  a  partial  turn,  indicating  the 
intention  of  the  owner  of  the  record  to  at  sonu^  future  time  continue 
the  pictographs  in  that  direction  to  the  next  face  of  the  drill  bow.  No. 
1  is  on  or  at  his  enjpty  storehouse,  the  framework  only  being  drawn. 


Fig.  65, 

SMAT.I.  8I.KD0E  WITH   IVOIiY   UrNNEHS.      POINT  BAHKOW. 

No.  2  is  a  rack,  with  food  or  goods  on  toj),  while  at  No.  3  is  the  first 
house  of  the  village — the  latter  being  indicated  by  the  several  habita- 
tions. One  of  the  oc(rupants  is  seated  npon  an  elevated  ledge  or  seat, 
while  another  is  seated  on  the  floor  before  it;  the  other  inmates  are 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF   THK    ESKIMOS. 


851 


vC 


'IJ 


first 
tbita- 
se.at, 
8  are 


Fiii-  M. 

KI.KIMtK. 


either  seated  or  inoviiij;  about  as  indicafed.  (Tpon  the  roof  is  a  votive 
ottering;,  a  bird  shaped  "shaiiiaii  stick,"  the  import  of  which  is  else- 
where described  in  detail.  Still  iii(»re  of  the  family  are  seen  at  the 
entrance  to  the  house,  one  person  within,  while  two  are  upon  the  roof. 
In  the  storehouse,  or  rather  beneath  the  ^oods,  No.  .">,  is  visible  a  doj; 
tij^ht,  the  anintals  bein^  drawn  in  the  attitude  of  springing  at  one 
another;  at  the  rijjht  is  the  owner  occupied 
in  renjoviufjf  some  article  from  the  scattbhl. 

In  the  habitation  No.  6,  with  its  entrance 
No.  7.  are  a  number  of  persona  in  various  atti- 
tudes. One  is  reclining  upon  the  elevated 
shelf  used  for  both  seat  and  bed;  while  upon  t\w  tloor  are  three  seated 
at  a  tabk»,  those  behind  it  beinj;  represented  or  partly  hidden,  the  upi>er 
parts  of  their  bodies  only  rising  above  the  boanl.  A  nr.inber  of  other 
individuals  are  shown  o(!cupied  in  other  ways.  The  scaffold  at  No.  8 
supporting  the  gootls,  as  usually  represente<l,  has  also  a  horizontal  pole 
for  drying  meat,  several  ]>ie<!es  thereof  being  designated,  while  two 
persons  beneiith  seem  to  be  touching  hands  or  liiinding  some  article. 

The  habitation  No.  i),  and  its  entrance  No.  10,  also  indicates  a  num 
ber  of  the  inmates.  One  in  particular  is  making  gestures  to  another; 
between  the  two  there  is  an  object  resembling  a  person  as  if  wrapped 
in  a  blanket.  Smoke  is  seen  issuing  from  the  sm(»ke  hole,  while  above 
it  is  what  may  be  here  intended  the  evil  spirit  of  a  dead  person  return- 
ing to  take  possession  of  a  sick  one. 

The  l^skimo  generally  believe  in  the  return  of  the  soul  of  the  d«'ad, 
and  espe<!ially  does  the  disembodied  spirit  hover  around  the  house  ot 
the  dead  for  three  days,  in  the  endeav<u'  to  return  and  to  jmssess  itself 
of  a  living  body.  In  the  purpose  of  guanling  against  tliis  evil,  the 
inmates  make  certain  shamanistic  preparaticms,  pi'ompted  by  the  local 
shaman.  The  smoke  issuing  from  the  mouth  of  the  smoke  hole  leaves 
open  the  way  for  the  return  of  the  evil  spirit  and  his  companion  spirit, 
seen  api)r(Kiching  from  above  the  house. 

No.  11  represents  a  scallbld  for  the  storage  of  food,  and  a  man  is 
seen  in  the  act  of  reaching  toward  the  black  spot  denoting  reindeer  or 

venison  liouse,  as  the  sliape  indicates. 

>  ,       _       %     ^^^iSriliP^m  ^^'  ^'-^  '**  another   interesting  in- 

iL        ^Wy**^>^^s^n       terior,  one  native  being  seated  upon 
„.    „  the  ledge  while  a  vessel  is  seen  near 

Fiji.  07.  " 

j^,g„„g  his  feet.     Another  man  is  reaching 

toward  something  near  the  ceiling, 
while  the  rest  of  the  occupants  of  the  room  are  seated,  one  of  them 
reaching  up  toward  the  standing  tigure  as  in  the  act  of  asking  for,  or 
supplication.  Smoke  is  issuing  from  the  smoke  hole,  while  some  one  is 
occupied  near  the  fire  beneath  it.  A  ladder  is  placed  against  the  out 
side  of  the  entrance  to  the  house,  and  a  man  is  seen  part  way  up  near 
another  person  who  seems  to  be  occupied  in  gesture  and  conversation. 


852 


UKl'OUT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


m 


FiR.  68. 

MKNI>IN<I   NKT. 


Aiiotlior  man  is  Hecii  carrying  a  Hnowshoe-like  object,  probably  of  rein- 
deer or  deer,  to  the  siinnnit  of  the  house  roof  to  dry.  The  pole,  with 
(irosHplece,  situated  near  the  head  of  the  ladder,  is  a  votive  ofiering 
erected  there  by  one  of  the  inmates. 

No.  \'.\  is  a  sledj^e,  upon  which  is  seated  the  driver  usin^;  his  whip. 
Thedo};-  is  iir^ed  forward,  and  another  native,  one  of  the  three.  No.  14, 
who  had  been  off  trading  for  skins,  is  hailing  a  boat  seen  coming  to 

tiie  shorts  with  the  gunwale  ]iarallel  therewith,  pre 
1^^      ^f  senting  another  good  in.stance  of  foreshortening  of 

^liMiUiHtfanMiB     the  object.     The  nnin  behind  the  sledge  is  walking 

along  with  his  stati'  elevated.  The  inverted  Hgure 
above  seems  to  belong  to  a  series  attempted  on 
that  side  of  the  panel  of  the  bow  drill,  as  another  tigure,  having  no 
apparent  connection  with  the  completed  record,  occurs  :ilso  at  a  point 
over  the  three  wading  boatmen  following  the  baidarka,  No.  HI,  which 
is  being  pushed  ashore.  No.  17  is  also  in  shallow  water  and  appears  to 
start  away  as  the  oarsmen  are  seated  within  with  their  ari.us  extended 
grasping  the  ])addle. 

An  interesting  and  cleverly  drawn  native  sket<;h  of  a  man  mending 
a  sein(5  net  is  shown  in  tig.  <kS.  The  attitude  is  lifelike,  while  in  one 
hand  is  jmrtrayed  a  short  liite  denoting  the  shuttle. 

A  man  splitting  wood  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustration, 
lig.  (»!>.  lie  has  a  heavy  mallet  or  some  other  like  utensil  raised  above 
his  head,  and  in  the  act  of  driving  wedges  to  split  a  piece  of  wood. 

Plate  .')!>,  lig.  t,  represents  an  old  stained  specimen  of  ivory  from 
Ncuton  Sound.  The  engravings  upon  this  are  rather  deep,  and  are 
tilled  with  deep  brown  coloring  matter.  The  semiitircular  objects  to 
the  right  of  the  middle,  some  being  shown  in  rather  an  angular  form 
towaid  the  left  of  the  middle,  represent  habitations.  These  characters 
appear  in  a  more  conventionalized  form  and  for  decorative  purposes  in 
plate  L'4,  tig.  it. 

The  chief  inteiest  attached  to  this  record  is  in  the  variety  of  forms 
of  habitations,  thus  enabling  one  to  perceive  the  ditt'erences  in  the 
variants  placed  in  consc^cutive  order.  The  two 
extremes  are  very  uidike,  and  would  scaniely  be 
recognized  as  portraying  a  similar  idea,  but  for  the 
intervening  examples  showing  the  evolution  in  the 
execution  of  form. 

The  two  elongated  tigures  to  the  right  of  the  habi- 
tations denote  inverted  kaiaks  upon  racks  for  drying.  The  human  fig- 
ures, one  of  whom  is  shown  seated,  represent  natives  supplicating  a 
shaman  for  aid.  The  figure;  has  both  arms  extended,  as  in  making  the 
gesture  for  sui)plication,  while  the  shaman,  standing  at  the  left.  Las  his 
arms  and  hands  uplifted,  as  in  the  gesture  illustrated  in  several  figures 
relating  to  shamauistic  ceremonials,  termed  by  the  natives  as  "  agitating 


i 


Fig.  69. 

SI'LITTINO  WOOD. 


GRAPHIC   AKT   OF   TlIK    KSKIM08. 


«r)3 


tlie  air"  in  order  to  call  to  liini  liis  tutelary  );imnliaii,  who  Ih  to  aiil  tlio 
Hliainan  in  hiiccohk,  in  order  to  comply  with  the  r(M|u«>st  uuuh^  of  liiin. 

Within  the  (lomeshapeil  habitation  neatest  the  shaman  is  an  acMrom- 
paniment  of  tambonrine  drunimin^s  while  two  asMistantM  are  also 
enp;a^e<l  in  invo(;ation. 

To  the  ri^ht  of  tlie  snppliirant  is  a  repetition  of  his  own  form,  indi- 
eatin};  his  har)>ooiiin^  a  seal  or  other  animal,  while  still  further  toward 
the  end  of  the  rod  is  iin  unfinished  li^ureof  a  man  in  a  kaiak — pntbably 
the  su|)plicant  in  another  exploit  nnide  possible  through  the  shunuin's 
asHistance. 

Turninjf  the  bow  around  so  as  to  luiufj^  the  j-onvexity  l»en<nith,  therei 
a])pearH  at  the  left  a  linear  outline  of  some  undetermined  animal,  near 
to  whieli  is  an  umiak  containinjjc  three  nien.  They  are  approachin;^  a 
settlement  indi(;ated  by  tw(»  forms  of  habitations,  a  dome  slui]u-d  or 
permanent  one  and  a  triaii;;ular  or  temporary  shelter,  the  two  d<Miot 
ing  both  kinds  eonstitnting  the  villa<;e. 

Two  racks  are  visible,  a  sinj-le  tme  from  which  are  sns])ended  numer- 
ous stands  of  meat  or  tisii,  and  a  double  one,  similarly  tilled  with  food. 
Tlie  rude  outliiu^  of  a  native  at  the  rijjlit  is  nearest  to  a  boat  lyinj;  upon 
its  side,  beyond  which  are  the  outlines  of  four  waterfowl. 

Home  whales  are  next  portrayed.  The  one  w  ith  the  tlukes  above  the 
water,  and  the  spray  thrown  or  foiced  from  the  spout  boles,  appears  to 
have  thrown  from  the  water  the  vessel  containiu};  foui'  natives.  Their 
vessel  is  curved,  making  a  slight  arch,  and  the  exposed  end  seems 
broken  open. 

The  whale  beyond  this  is  harpooned  by  a  native  in  a  kaiak;  the 
intlated  float  is  still  u])on  the  kaiak  behind  liim,  indicating  that  not 
much  line  has  run  out,  as  the  whale,  also,  is  beaded  toward  the  hunter. 

The  whale  to  the  right  of  the  preceding  <'hara<tei'  has  the  tail  up  in 
the  air,  while  some  water  is  indicated  as  issuing  from  the  spout  hole. 
In  front  of  this  is  an  umiak  with  four  hunters  making  for  a  herd  of  wal- 
ruses on  and  about  a  ledge  of  rocks. 

The  rocks  are  iiulicated  by  the  short  nuukings  between  the  two  ])ar- 
allel  lines  denoting  them,  tiie  markings  consisting  of  the  pattern 
frequently  mentioned  herein  as  tish  trap,  and  of  which  numerous  illus 
trations  are  given,  as  on  plate  .'U,  tig.  2,  and  i)late  'Mi,  fig.  li,  and  on  the 
accomi)anying  plate  oO,  fig. ,'{.  This  indication  of  rock  is  of  interest  in 
its  differentiation  from  ice,  as  a  solid  mass,  the  latter  being  drawn  only  to 
show  its  outline  as  a  ffoe,  the  interior  i>art  of  the  space  being  left  biaidv 
to  denote  its  colorless  or  transparent  condition.  On  the  same  ])late, 
jdate  M,  in  fig.  2,  is  shown  a  floe  upon  which  seals  are  taking  refuge. 

The  speaker,  or  rather  he  of  whom  the  record  tresits,  in  plate  (JO,  fig. 
8,  is  represented  at  No.  1.  llis  right  hand  is  elevated  as  when  used  in 
gesticulating,  wliilehis  left  points  down  toward  the  foot  of  thescaftbld 
upon  which  is  a  repository  for  foo<l.    The  two  scaffolds  at  No.  2  no 


1 

1 

^li 


III 


854 


RKPOUT   OF    NATfONAI.    MIISKTM,  IH!).'.. 


(loiibt  Im'Ioii;;  to  liiiii,  aiid  form  pait  of  the  vilhi;;*'  iiulicated  by  the 
Hcvi'ral  liabitatioiiM  aii<l  stotclioiiscs. 

No.  3  is  a  <loiiu>  sliapcd  wiiitci-  liabitatioii,  about  which  two  people  aiu 
occupied.  N<>.  I  is  aiiotlici'  yraiiaiy  or  I'ood  repository,  while  No.  5 
represents  a  se»;oml  iiouse  upon  wliicli  two  jtcophi  are  talliiuf;  very 
animatedly.  Tiu^  one  at  tlie  ri^^ht  s(>eniH  to  Uv.  reipiestin^,  or  HU|)pli- 
eatiu};,  both  hands  ))ein;4(lirected  upward  toward  tlu'one  spoken  to. 

No.  (►  is  the  st<»ray«'  phice  lor  food  and  olliei'  ariit-h's,  wiiih'  in  No.  7 
we  tind  another  (hunesliaped  winter  iiouse  witli  Die  innuites  in  view. 
A  tidrd  jterson  is  standiii;;  before  tiie  ihtor,  wiiile  under  tiio  a<'eunipany- 
in^  seatVold  a  fourth  individual  is  visible. 

No.  !>  represents  a  wintei-  house,  and  snudie  is  lisin;;'  frcnn  the  place 
where  tlie  smoke  hole  is  usually  found.  The  smoke  looks  straight  and 
ri^id,  iesend)Iin}i'  a  tr«'e.  The  two  people  seem  to  l>e  occupi«'<l  in  carry- 
in^^  soinethin;;.  The  illustriition  at  No.  10  is  a  scan«)ld  for  the  saft;  loca- 
tion of  food,  and  Nos.  11,  l.*{,  an<l  II  are  similar  sfru<'tuies,  whereas  No. 
lli  is  a  warehouse,  pr(d)ably  of  a  white  trader.  No.  !."» is  a  winter  house, 
thou^fh  ajjpait'utly  deserted. 

The  specimen  representi'd  in  plate  (»l  is  a  pi])e  bearin,i;  delicate  and 
elaborate  eti'hings  of  a  variety  of  sul»ie<'ts.  The  obji-ct  is  nnule  of  wal- 
rus ivory,  measurinji  l.>;  incdies  in  lenf^th,  !•;  inches  in  height  near  the 
inserth)n  of  the  bowl,  and  slij^htly  less  than  1  inch  in  transverse  diame- 
ter at  the  same  jioint.  The  perlbration  at  tin*  mouthpiece  is  one  eighth 
of  an  inch  in  diameter. 

The  bowl  is  of  block  tin,  while  the  top  of  the  bowl  is  lined  with  a  thin 
sheet  of  perforated,  ornamentcil  brass.  The  calil)erof  the  bowl  is  oidy 
one-tburth  of  an  in(;h  in  diameter,  and  seems  to  have  been  made  in 
inntation  of  a  Chinese  i>ipe  Itowl  and  possibly  for  the  same  style  of 
smoking. 

The  pipes,  like  others  of  like  form  from  the  same  locality,  at  St. 
Michaers|  ?|,  have  been  said  to  have  been  made  tor  sahi  to  tra<ler8. 
That  may  be,  and  does  not  in  the  least  impair  the  interest  and  value 
of  the  pictographic  records  ])ortrayed  upon  the  sevei'al  sides.  Though 
the  pii)es  may  be  shaped,  to  a  lindted  extent,  in  imitiition  of  tbreign 
shapes,  yet  the  jnctography  renniins  Ivskimo,  made  by  an  Ivskimo,  and 
to  portray  Ivskimo  scenes  and  avocations. 

The  upper  ligure  of  the  pij>e  prt^sents  the  characters  on  the  left  side, 
and  beginning  at  the  extreme  left  is  observed  a  vertical  ornamental 
bar  or  border,  similar  to  those  drawn  along  the  lower  half  of  the  i>ipe  . 
stenj,  though  in  the  latter  space  they  are  arranged  diagonally,  and 
made  to  separate  ornaments  consisting  of  (toncentric  rings,  ornaments 
to  which  special  reference  is  nuide  elsewhere. 

The  first  group  consists  of  two  persons  engaged  in  twisting  a  cord, 
though  the  suggestion  has  b«'en  made  that  they  api)ear  to  be  engaged 
in  a  pastime  which  couvsists  in  nmking  string  tigures,  similar  to  the 
American  boy's  "cat's  cradle,"  etc.  The  tigure  next  to  the  right  repre- 
seuts  the  end  view  of  a  building  having  tw()  rooms,  in  the  larger  of 


i 


I  by  the 

Wv  No.  5 
AWii  v«ry 
or  mippli- 
eii  t(». 
V  in  No.  T 
>s  in  view, 
icomimny- 

I  the  i»h»ce 
•aij-lit  ami 
il  in  t'any- 
L'  safe,  loca- 
luMcas  No. 
liter  liouse, 

I'licate  and 
a«le  of  wai- 
lit  near  the 
erse  diiune- 
\  oneei^lith 

with  a  tliin 
j(»\vl  is  only 
»en  made  in 
inie  style  of 

\lity,  at  St. 
to  traders, 
t  and  value 
les.  Though 
M  of  foreign 
Ivskinio,  and 

the  left  side, 
ornamental 

f  of  the  pipe  . 
:onally,  and 

8,  ornaments 

sting  a  eord, 
o  be  engaged 
iimilar  to  the 
e  right  repre- 
the  larger  of 


Niporto)  U.  S  Niticinal  Muxum.  IB9S.     Hoffman 


Plate  61. 


UJ 

a 


>- 

IT 

O 
> 


< 

o 
o 


, 


M  ^i 


If'li 


h  I 


it 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


855 


which  appear  two  persons  seated  ]»laying  on  the  tainbonrinc  dium, 
while  a  third  person  is  depicted  in  tlie  graceful  attitude  of  dancing 
"a  la  Americaine."  The  fourth  figure  is  crouching  or  kneeling  before 
the  hearth,  probably  to  light  a  fire,  as  none  appears  to  be  there,  as 
indicated  by  the  absence  (»f  smoke.  The  presence  of  fire  is  generally 
indicated  by  the  i>ortrayal  of  short  lines  sidhering  to  a  vertical  one,  to 
denote  smoke. 

Upon  the  outside  of  the  large  room  is  alow  structure  containing  the 
second  room.  The  face  of  the  sun  is  ])ainted  upon  the  wall,  in  reference 
to  the  return  of  the  sun  and  warm  weather — to  spring;  and  the  droi)s 
of  water,  (;aused  by  the  melting  sun  or  ice  upon  the  roof,  are  shown 
dropping  from  a  short  wooden  <'arved  spout.  The  carving  seems  to 
have  been  made  in  imitation  of  similar  ones  found  among  the  T'hlinkit 
and  Ilaida  Indians.  The  above  dance  and  portrayal  of  the  sun  refers 
to  highly  imp(utant  and  complicated  ceremonials  observed  at  the  return 
of  the  sun  from  the  south. 

The  illustration  reaching  almost  across  the  ivory  space,  that  resem- 
bling light  lines  in  imitation  of  a  ladder,  is  a  fish  weir,  placed  in 
streams  for  catching  salmon,  and  one  of  these  fish  is  actually  shown 
approa<'hing  the  opening  leading  to  the  inclosure  in  which  the  game  is 
secured.  An  otter  is  also  drawn  approaching  the  tish  trap,  denoting 
the  destructive  habits  of  the  mammal  in  robbing  the  trap  of  iisli  thus 
secured  and  unable  to  escape. 

The  rectangular  iigi  f  immediately  behind  the  otter  api)ears  to  be  a 
view  of  the  top  of  a  I  jat  landing,  facing  the  water,  and  upon  which 
are  tv.o  persons,  one  seated  near  a  handled  \essel — probably  a  bucket 
or  basket — while  the  other  is  drawn  in  the  attitude  of  spearing  fish, 
the  entire  sketch  seeming  to  have  reference  to  another  method  of  secur- 
ing fish  for  food. 

Immediately  across  the  ivory  space,  and  along  the  opposite  base  line, 
are  observable  four  persons,  each  drumming  upon  his  medicine  drum 
and  approaching  a  dome-shaped  habitation,  within  which  are  ])ort^ayed 
two  persons,  crawling  forward  on  hands  and  knees  to  receive  from  a 
seated  figure  some  mysterious  or  magic  substaiu'e.  This  is  a  shaman- 
istic  ceremony,  in  which  some  charmed  medicines  are  secured,  and  by 
means  of  which  some  si)e('ial  success  is  expected  in  the  chase. 

The  character  in  the  middl*'  of  the  iviuy  rod,  nearest  to  the  dome- 
shaped  house,  is  a  spout  of  water,  at  the  narrow  eiul  of  which  is  a  trans- 
verse line,  with  a  shorter  one  within  the  inclosure.  These  two  lines 
denote  the  logs  of  wood  employed  by  the  beaver  in  building  a  dam. 
The  beaver  is  shown  swimming  toward  a  dark  spot,  which  seems  to 
consist  of  a  series  of  short  scratches,  and  which  denotes  the  deposit  of 
twigs  for  food,  while  the  rounded  dark  <Msk  upon  the  shore  line  repre- 
sents the  beaver's  house.  The  animal  is  accurately  portrayed,  the  tail 
being  especially  conspicuous  to  give  specific  in<lication  as  to  the  species 
of  animal  intended  to  be  shown. 

In  the  next  figure  is  represented  one  method  of  securing  deer.    The 


!;f;i.     M 


;!)! 


I  i 


U 


856 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


iiicloaure,  within  which  three  deer  are  shown,  ia  a  pen  made  for  securing 
such  game,  the  fourth  animal  to  enter  liaving  been  driven  forward  from 
the  open  country  and  guided  toward  the  entrance  by  the  erection  of 
low  brush  fences,  as  will  be  observed,  extending  diagonally  toward  it 
from  the  base  lines  at  either  margin  of  the  ivory.  The  two  hunters, 
armed  with  bow  and  arrow,  are  seen  running  toward  the  inclosure  to 
shoot  the  deer. 

Beyond  the  rear  fence  or  inclosure  of  the  deep  pen  are  two  pine  trees. 
Upon  one  is  perched  a  bird,  while  half-w«ay  up  the  other  is  a  small  mam- 
mal. The  latter  ia  not  drawn  in  imitation  of  the  porcupine — as  else- 
where portrayed — and  it  may  be  intended  to  represent  the  marten. 
The  next  figure  is  a  bhick  bear,  erect  upon  his  hind  feet  and  being 
attacked  by  a  hunter  armed  with  a  spear. 

The  next  scene  is  a  snare  trap,  which  has  caught  aiul  suspended  in 
the  air  a  small  animal.  The  trap  is  surrounded  by  vertical  sticks  so 
arranged  about  Hie  baited  ])art  that,  to  cause  it  to  be  sprung,  the  ani- 
mal can  rea(*h  the  bait  only  at  one  open  space.  The  noose  is  arranged 
so  as  to  catch  the  aninuil  about  the  neck,  in  imitation  of  the  American 
boy's  rabbit  snare. 

The  next  trap  shown  consists  of  a  log,  or  sapling,  resting  upon  a 
short  upright  piece,  so  that  when  the  bait  is  ttmched  the  log  will  fall 
and  secure,  by  crushing,  the  animal  so  unfortunate  as  to  enter.  The 
top  is  weighted  by  extra  pieces  of  timber  and  sometimes  stones,  secured 
so  as  not  to  fall  off.  A  small  animal  is  seen  approaching  the  trap  from 
one  side,  while  from  the  other  is  seen  approaching  a  bear;  the  idea 
being  that  this  arrangement  or  ki-nd  of  trai)  is  employed  in  securing 
both  kinds  of  animals.  The  small  deer  and  men  shown  along  the  oppo- 
site base  line  represent  two  hunters  disguised  in  wolf  skins  so  as  to 
more  readily  approach  within  sluM)ting  distance  of  the  reindeer,  while 
the  third  has  goiui  forward  and  shot  an  arrow,  which  is  seen  in  its  Hight 
approaching  an  animal. 

The  last  iigiire  of  the  group  is  a  fallen  reindeer  upon  which  one  bird 
of  prey  has  alightc«l  and  another  is  seen  descending.  The  feathers  in 
the  outstretched  wings  are  t'learly  indicated  and  the  attitude  is  very 
lifelike. 

The  upper  ridge  of  the  right  side  of  the  pipestem  also  bears  some 
interesting  scenes.  That  on  the  section  nearest  the  bowl  contains  two 
human  ligures,  one  representing  a  native  in  the  attitude  of  kicking  a 
ball,  his  leg  being  still  in  the  air,  while  the  other  person  is  portrayed 
as  reaching  out  his  hands  as  if  to  catch  the  ball  as  it  descends.  The 
illustration  next  toward  the  left  represents  a  habitation  with  two  rooms, 
in  the  larger  of  which  is  a  horizontal  line,  midway  between  the  floor 
and  ceiling,  denoting  the  shelf  used  as  seats  aiul  for  sleeping.  Upon 
this  shelf  are  seven  persons,  live  of  whom  are  represented  as  drum- 
ming, using  the  ordina»y  tambourine  for  the  purpose. 

Beneath  are  live  characters,  four  being  shamans,  while  the  fifth,  a 


TI^VXCMnVM 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP   THE   ESKIMOS. 


857 


a 


4 


smaller  one,  shown  as  horizontal  in  the  air,  is  the  <lenion  which  has  been 
expelled  from  a  sick  man.  The  smaller  apiirtment  shows  one  person 
with  a  dish,  or  pan,  probably  preparing  food  for  the  participants  in  the 
ceremonials  condncted  within  the  adjoining  room. 

Outside  of  the  house  is  a  man  portrayed  in  the  act  of  splitting  wood, 
the  log  beneath  his  feet  having  two  wedges  projecting  which  aio  being 
driven  in  to  split  the  timber.  A  second  individual  is  i)ushing  at  his 
dog  sledge,  he  having  returned  with  a  load,  as  may  be  observed,  the 
logs  still  in  position  at  the  front  of  the  sledge. 

The  figure  next  to  the  preceding  is  seated  upon  the  ground  and 
apparently  mending  his  net.  The  characters  .above  the  wood  chopper 
and  the  returning  traveler  are  drawn  upon  the  opi)08ing  base  line. 
The  figure  in  the  attitude  of  running  is  going  to  the  assistance  of  one 
who  has  caught  a  seal,  the  latter  resisting  capture  by  the  use  of  his 
flippers,  which  are  drawn  extended  from  the  body  to  denote  their  use 
in  the  present  instance.  The  ring  indicates  a  hole  in  the  ice,  while  the 
bar  held  in  the  hands  is  the  piece  of  wood  to  which  the  line  is  secured. 

The  illustration  of  tishing  through  the  ice  is  shown  in  several  records, 
but  in  none  more  graphically  than  in  the  figure  nearest  to  the  seal 
hunter  above  referred  to.  The  native  is  here  shown  seate<l,and  before 
him  is  a  fish  lying  attached  to  a  short  line  by  which  it  is  secured,  while 
with  the  other  hand  tlie  fisherman  is  holding  his  rod,  the  line  passing 
through  a  hole,  and  beneath  are  shown  the  sinker  and  hook,  while  a 
fish  is  seen  approaching  to  take  hold.  The  representation  of  the  trans- 
parency of  the  ice  was  no  doubt  beyond  the  ability  of  the  artist,  and  he 
therefore  very  wisely  made  no  attempt  at  any  indication  of  a  surface 
line. 

By  turning  over  the  pipestem  the  record  may  be  renewed  at  the  fig- 
ure of  the  umiak,  containing  five  hunters,  four  of  whom  are  using  the 
paddles,  whilst  the  fifth  is  throwing  a  harpoon  toward  a  large  ws 'jus. 
This  creature  has  already  been  harpooned  by  a  hunter  in  a  kaiak,  who 
is  holding  up  one  hand  with  his  fingers  spread,  while  in  the  other  hand 
he  holds  his  paddle.  Upon  the  stern  of  the  kaiak  is  the  fioat,  used  in 
connection  with  the  harpoon  line.  A  second  walrus  is  observed  iinme 
diately  behind  the  harpooned  animal. 

At  the  extreme  left  of  the  stem  is  a  crouching  or  kneeling  hunter 
preparing  to  throw  a  harpoon  at  a  seal  or  fenuile  walrus,  from  whose 
mouth  drops  of  water  or  ])erhaps  blood  are  seen  to  tri<!kle. 

Upon  the  opposing  base  line  of  the  pipestem  is  a  single  whaU'  hunter 
in  his  boat,  a  small  whale  having  been  harpooned,  wliile  to  the  line  a 
large  skin  fioat  is  attached  to  impede  the  animaPs  motion.  The  other 
whale  is  escaping,  and  the  water  is  shown  spouting  from  the  nostrils 
of  both  animals. 

The  ornamentation  upon  the  two  lower  sides,  as  well  as  the  treelike 
figures  near  the  mouthpiece,  will  be  discussed  in  connection  with  the 
evolution  of  ornamentation. 


858 


REPORT    OK    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1896. 


■     *;: 
.;     ,     .      ii 

i                h 

I!       '' 

I 

;]         1^ 

1 

Wh  1 

1  . 
1  t 

The  specimen  represented  in  the  upper  liyiire  in  plate  (i'2  measures 
12  iuclies  in  lenjftli  aloii};  the  eential  line  and  !••  inches  in  heijjht  at 
the  back  of  the  bowl.  The  lattei'  measures  2}^  inches  across  the  top 
and  is  Ih  inches  in  heijiht.  The  pipestem  is  made  of  a  line  compact 
piece  of  walrus  ivory,  which  retains  some  of  its  lateral  curvature  as 
well  as  that  visible  from  the  front  view.  The  bowl  is  symmetrical  and 
was  undoubtedly  turned  on  a  lathe. 

The  characters  portrayed  along  the  middle  base  line,  beginning 
nearest  the  mouthpiece,  represent,  first,  a  seal,  then  two  Mater  fowl.  A 
walrus  tiien  api)ears  above  the  surface  and  is  looking  after  the  umiak, 
which  has  passed  in  pursuit  of  a  whale,  and  which  creature  has  been 
attacked  by  one  of  the  hunt»"s.  Tiic  second  hunter  is  holding  aloft 
his  oar,  a  signal  to  indicate  to  others  near  by  that  assistaucc  is  wanted. 
The  other  men  in  the  umiak  are  using  the  paddle  so  as  to  keep  pace 
with  the  whale,  which  is  shown  spouting. 

The  elevated  scaffold  which  is  next  ]»ortrayed  was  a  notched  piece 
of  timber  set  in  jdace  to  serve  as  a  ladder,  and  one  ])er8on  is  shown 
ascending,  a  bundle  being  .attached  to  his  back — probably  food — as  the 
other  i»erson  on  the  scattbM  i8occu])ied  in  preparing  food  of  sonu'  kind, 
which  is  then  sus])ended  from  the  horizontal  i>oles,  as  shown  in  the 
etching.  The  next  illustraticui.  to  the  right,  represents  a  fisherman 
hauling  up  his  net  to  dry,  while  another  man  is  occupied  in  sjditting 
wood,  the  Wi'dges  used  for  the  juirpose  being  shown  in  the  log  at  the 
end  resting  ujion  another  ]>icce  of  wood  or  a  stone. 

The  hous«',  which  conu^s  next  in  order,  has  two  rooms,  uj)on  the  roof 
of  the  smaller  one  being  shown  an  individual  carrying  into  the  house 
some  i»ieces  of  wood,  which  have  been  sjdit  by  the  wood  chopper.  The 
horizontal  line  at  the  toj)  of  the  large  room  has  susi)ende<l  from  it  snuill 
round  objects  which  denote  some  kind  of  food :  and  at  the  middle  line, 
the  shelf,  used  as  a  bed  or  for  seat,  shows  tlir4>e  i)ersons;  the  first  one, 
with  one  leg  hanging  down,  is  pointing,  or  reaching,  toward  a  dish 
containing  food,  as  the  second  has  already  placed  some  into  his  mouth. 
The  third  person  is  lying  down,  with  legs  curved  and  his  head  resting 
ui)on  a  i)illow  or  bale  of  soiiu'  material  found  <'onve'.iient  for  the  pur- 
pose. The  person  seated  upon  tlie  floor  does  not  seem  specially  occu- 
l)ied,  and  directly  behind  is  a  vertical  line,  upon  which  is  a  lamp,  the 
usual  method  of  constructing  these  being  that  of  placing  two  soapstone 
lanips  ni)on  a  crosspiece,  so  as  to  balance,  the  center  of  the  latter  being 
seemed  to  a  vertical  stick. 

The  last  illustration  denotes  a  dome-shaped  structure  with  a  smoke 
hole  in  the  roof,  one  person  being  api)arently  busied  with  his  i>ipe, 
while  the  other  has  before  him  a  kettle,  in  which  he  is  stirring  with  a 
stick  or  ladle,  netwccn  the  two  persons  is  tiie  fire,  from  which  the 
smoke  is  seen  to  rise  and  to  escape  through  the  opening  at  the  top. 

Within  the  snudl  room  of  the  house  above  mentioned  is  a  short 
vertical  line,  to  which  are  attached  some  small  globular  figures.    The 


Report  of  U    S   National  Museum,  1895. — HoMman 


Plate  62. 


>• 
ir 
O 
_> 

a 

< 

o 
o 
u 
Q 


■:¥l 


'l.l 


I  n' 


V^.  f 


\  f 


I      11 


f  <!      ' 


Report  n»  U,  S   National  Museum,  189S       Holfn 


Plate  63. 


^.■■|  'i' 


]■■'. 


hi 

t- 

u 

Q. 


a 

UJ 

< 

q: 
O 
O 

UJ 

Q 


it' 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF    THK    ESKIMOS. 


850 


s 

Ui 
0) 

a 


a 

u 
h- 
< 
a: 
O 
o 
lij 
O 


line  represents  tlio  spout  iiiid  is  on  Uut  oiitsi<Ic  of  tlie  house,  wliile  tlio 
globules  denote  drops  of  water — similar  to  those  ptntrayed  on  the  pipe 
with  the  metal  bowl,  plate  (M — and  refers  to  the  melting  of  the  snow 
upon  the  roof,  as  the  approaeh  of  spring  is  referretl  to  espeeially.  On 
the  opposite  side  of  the  specimen,  the  first  eharaeter  is  a  man,  with  a 
bundle  on  his  back,  running  in  the  direction  of  an  inclosnre  iind  deer 
drive.  Two  reindeer  are  already  in  the  pen,  while  three  animals  are 
running  toward  it,  closely  pursued  by  the  drivers,  one  of  whi(!h  is 
armed  with  bow  and  iimloubtedly  also  arrows. 

The  third  person,  walking  along  the  upper  base  liiu',  is  in  attendance 
at  a  tisli  trap,  into  which  four  (ish  are  seen  to  swim.  l>eyon<l  this  is  a  tall 
pine,  upon  the  sununit  being  a  bird,  and  half-way  up,  a  snnill  mamnnil. 

The  scatfold  beyond  this  has  upon  the  roof  a  man  engaged  in  hang- 
ing up  deer,  whic^h  have  been  capture«l  and  brought  home  by  the  two 
men  at  the  dog  sledge,  upon  which  is  another  deer.  Immediately  above 
these  tigures  is  a  man  leading  a  dog  hitched  to  a  sled  and  thus  dragging 
home  two  seals — the  latter  represented  upon  their  backs,  just  as  these 
aninnils  are  gotten  along  easily  on  account  of  the  abundance  of  hair.  A 
large  bear  is  shown  upon  his  Inuinches,  one  luitive  attacking  him  with  a 
spear,  while  the  second  person  has  started  to  run  away  after  shooting 
an  arrow  into  the  bear's  back.  The  remaining  two  tigures  deuttte  two 
kinds  of  traps  nsed  in  catching  small  animals,  one  being  caught  by  a 
noose,  while  the  second  is  a  deadfall. 

Upon  the  upper  base  line,  beginning  nearest  to  the  tall  i>ine  tree 
already  des(!ribe(l,  one  man  is  shown  attempting  to  take  a  somersault, 
possibly  as  a  pictorial  portrayal  of  the  sense  of  joy  at  the  return  of 
sunnner;  the  second  person  has  a  rod  which  he  is  dragging  home. 
The  two  dogs  are  very  cleverly  portrayed,  while  the  man  next  to  the 
left  is  s))earing  an  otter.  The  animal  upon  the  ground  seems  to  be 
intende<l  for  a  marten. 

A  clever  sketxrh  is  presented  in  the  next  illustration,  in  which  a  native, 
with  a  pack  on  his  back  and  a  small  bucket  in  his  hand,  is  gathering 
berries. 

The  recor<l  ends  with  a  deer,  which  has  been  secured  by  means  of 
suspending  a  strong  noose  over  a  path  or  trail  freipiented  by  the 
animal.     The  hunter  has  «'onie  u|)  to  kill  the  captive  with  a  spear. 

The  decorative  designs  are  treated  of  elsewhere. 

The  sj)ecimen  shown  in  plate  (J.')  measures  lO-j  inches  in  length,  IJ 
inches  in  height  at  the  highest  part  near  the  bowl  space,  and  seven- 
eighths  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 

This  differs  from  the  other  pipes  in  the  nuinner  of  i>lacing  the  engrav- 
ings, these  occupying  the  lower  spaces,  while  the  upper  bear  the  con- 
centric rings  and  diagomU  lines.  The  left-hand  figure  in  the  upper 
illustration  in  the  plate  denotes  a  habitation  with  its  entrance.  Seated 
upon  the  projecting  shelf  seat  is  the  drummer,  holding  the  tambourine 
drum  in  cue  hand  while  with  the  other  he  grasps  a  drumstick.    The 


860 


REPORT    OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


;    J; 


i^' 


^r- 1! 


'  -i  (' 


other  Hgiiros  are  tlie  dancerH,  in  various  attitudes,  witli  liaudH  and 
fingers  extended.  Upon  tlie  roof  of  the  entrance  are  two  men  in  simi- 
lar attitudes,  wliile  witliin  tlie  entran<'e  is  one  figure  of  a  man  in  the 
attitude  of  falling  fiu'ward  upon  the  ground.  The  daiiee  does  not  appear 
to  be  a  shamanistie  eereniony,  as  otherwise  the  indication  of  a  demon 
would  be  observed. 

In  fiont  of  tlu^  entrance  is  a  group  of  figures  in  a  threatening  atti- 
tude, (^spe«!ially  one  of  the  men,  who  a]>pears  to  be  drawing  his  bow  with 
the  intention  of  shooting  his  vis-avis,  who  has  a  hand  up  ns  if  guard- 
ing his  face.  Tliere  appears  to  have  been  a  dis<!ussion  respecting  a 
seal — lying  upon  the  ground  between  the  men— whicli  resulted  as 
suggested. 

The  next  figure  is  shown  in  the  attitude  of  spearing  a  seal  in  the 
water,  the  spear  bladder  being  shown  at  the  ui)i)er  end  of  the  weapon. 
The  next  man  is  dragging  home  a  seal,  while  the  next  following  is 
engaged  with  a  like  animal,  stoo])ing  down  at  the  tail  and  for  some 
purpose  not  indicated. 

Tlie  laig(^  creature  lying  ujmn  the  base  line,  next  to  the  right,  is  a 
whale.  One  of  the  hunters  has  a  hatchet  and  is  cutting  up  the  ani- 
mal, while  the  two  assistants  are  otherwise  engaged  at  either  end. 
Next  toward  the  right,  is  another  hunter  in  the  act  of  dragging  along 
upon  a  sledge  his  kaiak.  The  last  ])er8on  to  follow  has  upon  his  sledge 
a  seal  which  has  been  captured. 

Apart  from  the  ornamentation  in  the  upper  ridge,  there  are  two  seals 
visible  at  the  left. 

Upon  the  reverse  side  of  the  pipestem  shown  in  the  lower  figure  in 
plate  01,  the  regular  ornamentation  o«!curs  likewise  along  the  up])er 
face,  only  two  compartments  at  the  extreme  right  being  reserved  for 
the  figures  of  seals. 

Beginning  at  the  righthand  end,  and  Avith  the  lower  plane,  a  habi- 
tation, similar  to  the  one  upon  the  opjxjsite  side,  is  portrayed,  the  only 
difference  being  that  there  are  two  human  figures  drawn  within  the 
entrance  to  the  home  instead  of  one. 

Another  figure  of  a  man  is  upon  the  outside,  seemingly  leaning 
against  the  door,  while  behind  him  are  two  men  in  mortal  combat,  one 
preparing  to  thrust  his  spear,  while  the  other  has  a  drawn  bow  with 
arrow  directed  forward  toward  his  victim.  Some  plants  are  shown 
upon  the  ground,  which  may  have  been  the  cause  of  the  quarrei  which 
seems  to  be  indicated. 

l^octor  A.  Warburg,  of  Florence,  Italy,  kindly  sent  me  sketches 
taken  from  a  pipe  similar  to  tlie  preceding,  which  he  founrt  in  the  col- 
lection of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History  in  New  York 
City.  An  interesting  pipe  from  St.  Michaels  is  in  the  collection  of  the 
Georgetown  College,  Washington,  District  of  Columbia.  The  story 
told  by  the  etchings  is  the  same  as  in  plate  (52,  and  it  appears  as  if  a 
certain  person,  or  persons,  were  the  author  of  all  of  these  examples,  the 


GRAPHIC    ART    OF   THK    ESKIMOS. 


8(11 


cliararteristics  of  the  etchings  boinj;'  tlie  siiine,  as  well  ns  tlu^  };eiu'ral 
iinpurt  of  the  narrative.  In  the  (Jeorj^etowu  College  sperinieii,  how- 
over,  the  base  line  above  or  against  which  are  shown  the  llgures  in 
varionH  ]>nr8uit8  and  avocations  extends  t'roni  the  front  or  bowl  end 
spirally  aronnd  the  stem  back  to  the  nionthpicce.  This  is  uniqnt;  so  far 
as  known,  and  appears  to  be  simply  a  fant^v  on  tlie  part  of  the  maker 
td  cause  (piicker  sale  of  the  specimen,  nearly  all  of  this  «'lass  of  ivory 
workmanship  being  made  for  sale  to  visitors. 

Plate  24,  tig.  '2,  is  a  triangularly  shaped  drill  bow  from  Sledge 
Island.  It  is  13A  inches  in  length.  The  three  sides  are  very  fully  «leco- 
rated,  the  back  of  the  bow  bearing  the  greatest  amount  of  work. 
The  three  square  ligures  at  the  lelt  represent  scaffolds,  niton  whi«'li 
storehouses  are  located.  Between  these  are  two  elonpited  tigures  rep- 
resenting winter  habitations.  Upon  the  house  at  the  left  are  four 
human  ligures  in  various  attitudes  of  gesticulatioti.  The  thin  vertical 
line  at  the  right  (»f  the  entrance,  having  a  small  transverse  scratch  at 
the  top,  denotes  a  votive  olfering,  imlicating  that  one  of  the  oc<!upants 
of  the  house  was  lately  deceased.  Five  nu'n  are  seen  under  and  about 
the  second  storehouse.  Upon  the  next  or  second  habitation  from  the 
left  are  four  human  beings,  the  larger  being  on  all  fours,  as  if  in  the 
attitude  of  watching  those  just  nuMitioned.  The  next  figure  is  occu- 
pied with  s(mie  snuiU  (tbject  at  a  lire,  the  smoke  of  which  is  seen  rising. 

Of  the  two  suc(!eeding  ligures,  one  is  apparently  lu)lding  a  line,  widle 
the  other  appears  to  be  oc(!upied  in  some  gymnastic  performance. 
Beyond  the  next  storehouse  is  another  habitation.  IJeside  the  two 
human  tigures  will  be  observed  smoke  issuing  from  the  lire,  and  a  rack 
upon  which  are  suspended  sonui  ol)je(^ts,  possibly  meat,  or  sonui  other 
uuiterials.  The  fourth  habitation  from  tluj  left,  somewhat  larger  and 
more  rudely  drawn  than  the  pieceding,  also  has  upon  the  roof  live 
individuals,  with  arms  and  legs  in  various  attitudes.  The  two  vertical 
lines  with  a  horizontal  pole  between  them  reiucvsent  a  meat  rack,  and 
the  other  lines  indicate  meat  or  lish.  The  six  human  ligures  immedi- 
ately to  the  right  of  this  meat  rack  are  pla<!ed  so  tluit  the  heads  ]»oint 
toward  the  center  of  the  recoi'<l,  wliiU;  tlie  feet  of  three  rest  on  the  bot- 
tom base  line,  and  the  feet  of  the  other  three  on  the  top  base  line. 
This  is  intended  to  represent  the  idea  of  a  circle,  as  the  iiulividuals  are 
engaged  in  a  ceremonial  dance.  ( Mie  of  them,  evidently  the  shaman, 
is  shown  with  three  lines  projecting  from  the  head,  possibly  indicating 
a  mask.  From  this  point  to  the  right  end  of  the  drill  b«)w  the  record 
occupies  both  top  and  bottom  lines  of  the  illustration.  Uimn  the 
dwelling  to  the  right  of  tlie  dancers  are  four  human  figures,  one  with 
a  spear  directed  toward  a  deer,  while  the  individual  on  the  top  of  the 
roof  U  pointing  with  one  hand  toward  the  animals,  and  his  companion 
has  both  arms  raised  in  exclamation.  The  square  elevated  structure, 
adjoining  the  house,  represents  a  storehouse.  At  the  top  of  the  rod, 
above  these  human  tigures,  Is  a  man  dragging  home  a  seal  which  hu 


862 


REPORT   or    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1H«»5. 


>f  t 


\y. 


I ) 


liuH  (raptured,  while*  in  front  of  liiin  stands  a  roindnn  wliirli  is  boin^ 
allot  at  by  a  native  who  is  ai mud  with  bow  and  arrow.  A  little  farther 
to  the  left,  upon  the  same  line,  a  nuin  is  lyinj;  tiat  upon  the  ground 
with  his  m\u  <lirected  toward  J  he  deer.  Metweon  the  two  elevated 
storehouses  are  ei{;ht«^'n  niitives  in  various  attitudes,  ])arti(;ipatiii};  in 
a  dance.  At  the  ri^^ht  is  a  winter  habitation,  upon  which  an  Indian 
stands  with  one  hand  elevated,  the  object  in  his  hand  evidently  dcnot- 
inj;  a  tambourine  drum.  A  votive  olferinj;  is  shown  over  the  entranoe 
to  the  habitation,  while* to  the  right  is  seen  rising-  a  column  of  smoke. 
Upon  the  scatf<dd  beneath  the  sipuire  part  of  the  str  eture  reju'esent- 
ingthe  storehouse  is  an  inverted  boat  suspended  for  drying.  A  partly 
obliterated  tigure  of  a  human  being  occupies  the  space  between  the 
storehouse  and  the  end  of  the  rod.  The  under  sides  of  the  bow  are 
tilled  with  tigures  of  habitations,  racks  from  which  an;  suspeiuled 
pieces  of  meat,  and  individuals  occupied  witli  various  domestic  duties. 
One  portion  of  another  part  of  the  record  represents  an  umiak  going 
away  from  land  toward  some  small  objects  which  aie  believed  to  repre- 
.sent  seal,  while  on  the  shore  are  represented  four  men  dragging  at  a 
large  animal,  possibly  intended  to  represent  a  seal,  and  in  front  of  them 
a  dog  is  hitched  to  another  seal,  dragging  it  home  to  the  camp,  possibly 
to  the  left. 

riate  (54,  tig.  3,  also  represents  an  ivory  drill  bow  from  Diomede 
Islands.  The  ornamentation  shown  at  the  left  end  of  the  illustration 
is  an  attem])t  at  duplicating  the  peculiar  zigzag  markings,  the  simjde 
form  of  whicli  is  shown  in  jwate  .'{1,  fig.  4.  The  next  oblong  tigure  on 
four  i)iles  represents  a  granary  or  food  storehouse.  Next  is  shown  a 
human  being  with  his  arms  extended  in  the  act  of  making  some  ges- 
ture. To  the  right  of  this  is  a  building  resembling  a  white  man's 
habitation  or  trader's  store.  The  mammal  to  the  right  of  this  repre- 
sents a  bear.  Next  come  the  figures  of  two  walruses,  and  beyond  the 
middle  to  the  right  is  the  outline  of  a  large  bear  in  the  attitude  of  eat- 
ing some  mammal  which  he  has  captured  at  the  seashore,  apparently 
a  seal  or  large  tisli.  To  the  right  of  this  is  a  very  crude  ligure,  some- 
what resembling  a  whale,  with  the  tail  elevated  and  the  head  down, 
though  from  the  "blowholes"  there  appears  to  be  some  S])ray  ascend- 
ing. The  latter  seems  to  be  represented  by  dots  instead  of  the  usual 
short  lines.  To  the  right  of  this,  upon  the  base  line,  is  a  long  necked 
animal  denoting  a  seal,  and  beyond,  at  the  extreme  right,  is  a  granary 
or  storehouse  elevated  u])on  piles.  Turning  the  si)ccimen  so  that  the 
upper  line  becomes  the  base  line  there  will  be  observed  at  the  left,  to 
the  right  of  the  grsinary  Just  mentioned,  a  figure  of  a  seal,  next  two  fair 
outlines  of  trees,  and  a  walrus.  The  pointed  tigure,  almost  triangular 
in  shape,  appears  to  denote  a  summer  habitati<m.  The  character  in  the 
middle  of  the  record,  apparently  a  scatfolding,  is  not  clearly  determin- 
able, as  it  seems  to  indicate  from  one  point  of  view  a  granary  upon  a 
scaffold,  but  the  projection  at  the  left  with  two  short  vertical  lines 


■--*'-'  '"■'«e..'j^'a.'.'-iytt.r^ 


OUAPIIIO    ART   OF    THK    ESKIMOH. 


803 


riu.  70. 

PICKINii    IIKItlMKH. 


depending  tluMolVoin  8U};^0HtH  ivn  attusnpt  iit  denoting;  Home  form  (»f 
iinimal,  wliirli  sut'iiis  (>l>s<;ur(Ml  by  tlio  Kqiian^  stni(;ture  iittiu^lioil  to  the 
opposite  line.  A  littlu  I'arthcr  to  the  left  is  the  figure  of  a  muii  with 
arms  outstretched,  and  heyoixl  this  tlie  body  of  a  wahus  with  liii^e 
tusks.  On  tlie  opposite  side  of  the  record,  at  the  extreioe  riii^ht,  is 
portrayed  a  rock  projecting;  friuu  the  sea,  upon  which 
are  restiufj  four  seals.  A  short  distaiKiebi'yond  tlieae 
is  s(>en  an  umiak,  and  toward  the  left  a  whale,  from 
above  the  head  of  wliich  is  indicated  by  simple  litth? 
triangular  dots  an  explosion  of  spray,  as  is  shown  in 
the  tij^ure  upon  the  opposite  si<le  of  the  drill  bow.  This  is  of  peculiar 
inten'st,  ami  indicates  either  inexperience  in  portraiture  on  the  part  of 
the  native  artist  or  a  iiiyh  degree  in  conventioindizing.  The  renniining 
fllj^urcs  can  be  readily  deterndned  an<!  need  no  further  inter))retation. 
Upon  the  narrow  convex  edge  of  the  bow  in  the  center  of  the  entire 

record  is  the  outlint^  of  another  whale  with  the 

M  ^^         triangidar  dots  for  spray  being  arranged  a  little 

i^F\\^^^^^/^      nearer  togetiier  so  as  to  approa(di  more  nearly  the 

_  iyBllfll"wlff*"  "       usual  method  of  indicating  spray  or  water  thrown 

from  the  blowholes.  To  the  right  of  this  is  a  wal- 
rus and  live  seals,  while  to  the  left  is  a  seal  with 
its  young  on  its  hack,  and  other  characters  readily  determinable  by  the 
reader  without  furtiier  explanation.  TIm-  bottom  of  the  bow  bears  a 
continnous  series  for  njorc  than  half  of  it-  iitire  length  of  conventional- 
ized seal  heads,  indicating  ornamentation  rather  than  an  attempt  at  a 
historical  record. 

Fig.  70  represents  a  native  piiiking  berries.  This  illustration  is  of 
peculiar  interest,  as  the  nucleated  circles  ujion  the  short  leaved  stems 
denote  the  fruit.  The  same  tigure  with  the  blossom,  in  which  the  three 
short  radiating  lines  are  addetl  to  denote  the  tlower.  is  shown  on  plate 
4()  in  the  powder  nieasure.  U])on  this  too  ar«'  the  short  lines  running- 
downward  from  the  ring  on  the  mcasuie,  to  which  are  attached  three 
berries,  i.  e.,  three  nucleated  » :i<'les. 

The  engraving  represented  in  lig.  71  is  selected  from  a  series  of  cliarac- 


KiK.71. 
crrriNu  rv  a  wai.iuk. 


'tt  ■; 


M   \i 


m 


i  tl 


1^ ' 


Fig.  72. 
crrriNo  ri-  keindeek. 


Fig.  73. 
rUTTINO  II'  KEINDEEB. 


ters  on  an  ivory  drill,  locality  unknown.  The  horizontal  body  represents 
a  walrus,  lying  on  its  back,  being  cut  up  by  the  two  men,  the  one  at  the 
left  hand  using  a  cleaver,  while  his  companion  is  otherwise  engaged  at 
the  head  of  the  animal.  The  artistic  execution,  apparent,  is  extraordi- 
narily good ;  the  lines  being  deep  single  (^'cases,  indiciiting  the  engraver 
to  have  been  thoroughly  experienced  in  the  use  of  the  graver. 


Il 


864 


REPORT  OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


t 


Fig.  74. 

CATCH  IN<1 
FISH. 


Fig.  75. 

CATCHINd  8KAI,  THIlordll  THE 
ICE. 


Two  illustratious  of  natives  cutting  up  reindeer  are  shown  in  figs.  72 
and  73.  Both  are  very  cleverly  drawn,  the  limbs  of  reindeer  being 
very  naturally  indicated,  as  assumed  in  dead  animals. 

.  A  very  clever  sketch  of  a  native  fishing  through  a  hole  in 

''C         the  ice  is  shown  in  flg.  74.    The  hole  is  indicated  by  a  small 
"j^      circle  while  the  ice  itself  is  not  shown — that  being  trans- 
parent.    One  fish  has  already  been  caught,  as  shown  above. 
The  absence  of  lines  to  denote  ice  is  similarly  evident  in  the 
Kolguev  illustration  on  plate  10. 

A  seal  caught  through  the  ice  is  shown  in  lig.  75,  the  hole 
being  shown  back  of  the  hunter  by  the  single  form  of  a  loop, 
as  in  the  illustration  referring  to  seal  spearing,  tig.  70,  where  the  hole 
is  again  in<licated  by  a  circle  on  the  ice  line. 

This  scene  is  taken  from  the  Ohuckche  chart, 
though  the  drawing  is  evidently  of  Eskimo  type. 
Tho  small  loop  above  the  nose  of  the  seal  is 
simply  an  indi(!a<^  )n  that  there  is  a  hole  in  the 
ice,  made  by  the  .Aeal  for  breathing. 

Alikespecimen  of  Alaskan  work !«  shown  in  flg. 
77,  wlierc  only  the  surface  of  the  ice  is  shown,  and 
the  tigureof  animal  is  absent — beneath  the  surface. 
Tlie  artistic  e.vecutiou  of  the  several  objects  portrayed  in  tig.  78  is 
rather  crude.    The  two  summer  habitations  or  tents  at  the 
\  left  have  between  them  a  long  i)ole  from  which  are  sus 

^\  peiided  cords  for  the  reception  of  fish  for  curing.    The 

^~"A  person  engaged  in  hanging  up  this  article  of  food  is  drawn 
ii  (^  in  a  crouched  or  seated  manner,  not  because  he  or  she 
was  so  seated,  but  because  the  figure  was  irade  too  large 
for  tlie  space  within  which  to  represent  it  in  an  upright 
position.  Figures  in  a  seated  pos- 
ture are  always  placed  in  contact  with  the  sur- 
face upon  which  they  are  presumed  to  be  so 
located,  either  upon  the  ground,  in  a  canoe,  or 
on  a  projecting  shelf  inside  of  the  dwelling. 
The  circumstance  of  a  sick  person  being  brought 
before  a  shaman  for  treatment  is  quite  differ- 
ent, as  in  such  instances  the  humaii  figure  is 
drawn  as  if  lying  down  and  may  not  be  in  contact  with  the  ground. 
The  tree-like  figure  at  tlie  right  of  the  tent  is  smoke  arising  from 

the  fire.    The  two  roofed  buildings  are 
built  in  imitation  of  the  habitations  of 
white  traders,  one  of  them  having  a  door 
at  the  side,  and  a  covered  portico,  or 
platform,  at  the  side. 
The  scene  on  the  fiat  piece  of  bone  shown  in  flg.  70  represents  sev- 
eral subjects.    In  the  upper  half,  at  the  right,  is  a  summer  shelter, 
within  which  are  two  flgures.    One  is  seated  upon  the  floor,  while  the 


t 

Fij;.76. 

SI'EAUlNd   SKAI,. 


h 


Fig.  77. 


SPEAKING  8EAL. 


Fig.  78. 
CUHINO  FISH. 


iu  flgs.  72 
jer  being 

a  hole  in 
y  a  small 
\g  trans- 
n  above. 
;nt  in  t'ae 

,  the  hole 

)f  a  loop, 

the  hole 


i^ 


Hliordll  THE 

tig.  78  is 
iits  at  the 

are  sus 
ug.    The 

is  drawn 
le  or  she 
too  large 
I  upright 


^ 

7. 
tiEAL. 


;  ground, 
jing  from 
lings  are 
[itious  of 
ug  a  door 
trtico,  or 

ents  sev- 
r  shelter, 
while  the 


III 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    6  4. 


1 
2 
3 


li-.  1.  I.i;n...  n„w  wvn.  TiiKm-:  Fa.-ks.  Oknamknti.i.  ^^n^   I'l,  ,,.,;,:Arns 

"  ■■",   ^':-  :""'■  '■■  ^-  ^-  ^'-     !  \''— H   „„,„;,.  ,■  i„   n.,.„r.i   k   i.  ::kss.,       v,;'., ,„ 

-i.lrul    N,.ri,,ii  Snuiid.      Cn'.l.'.  i,i!  liy  !■;.  W.  N,.l,,,l|., 
I'iu.   -.     illMl.l,     l',.i\V    MAIMI)    WITH     Ai.K. 

'<^n.\.,.(;:;i;j-j.r  s.  \.  M.     i.i,,,,,,.,!,.  ui  ,n,u.    (■..li,.r„.,M.v  f  w  \,..s„..  i 

I   l'4.   '■'.     I'lMI  I.     !1()\V. 


(Cit.  N....i;il(i.;,  r.s.  .\.  M.      l>i,„Mr,lr  Nl.,ii,ls.     c, 


111!  Iiil  hy   ]■;.  W.  \,.|m,i,., 


Hi|: 


Report  of  U.  S.  Natmnal  Museum,  1895.   -Hoffman. 


Plate  64. 


irlh 


• 


a 

a: 
3 
O 
hi 
IT 

O 

z 
< 

UJ 

CO 
tn 

o 
m 


O 


<T  &•■ 


U5li 


r  i 


'  I 


:f|ii 


ii 


M 


j>. 


'?    ai 


Li 


Hi 


"1 


PT 


I J 


i 


\l 


t'l 


r  > 


•i  4 


»      I 


-t            1 

i  k      i 

1         ' 

' 

r     fi^ 

,  L ,  <|li 

MB     ^|i 

f 

1  1'    ll 

, 

M{  1 

^ 

Hit  i 

;' 

IS'  u 

IS,  1- 

11 

lik^ 

Report  of  U    S    Nstional  Museum,  1895.— Hoffman. 


Plate  65. 


Ornamented  Cylindrical  Cases. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    6  5. 


1 

2 
3 


y'lii.  I.   IIinti.m;  Taily. 

"■.H.\.,.;-j.,:;:M.r.S.\.M.    S..  .M,,!,.,-!,..  Coll,...,.,!  I,v  i.  W    ,„,„..,■  , 

<'••".  N.uuis.,r.s.x.M.    n„„..,„i„i,.,.  .  .,ii..,.„.,i  i,v  1 .  w  x..u„„  , 

l'',U.    I.    JllUKAI.   (ASK   ,„•    lf,.;iN-„K,,i;    ]I..KN.  • -N- 1.,.,,.., 

(CMt..\o.5Wil,-,.     tl.orMit.v.'i     C,.ll..cl,..l  l,y  Li.ul.lMl,  l;„.v.  1   .S.  .\., 


I-.S.  .\.) 


GRAPHIC    AKT   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


865 


other  lias  his  liaiuls  exteiuleil  and  eli'vatcd,  as  if  callinj^  attention  to 
gonietliin^of  importance,  or  making  the  gesture  for  surprise.  Tiie  tall 
tree  like  object  next  to  the  habitation  is  a  column  of  sin<»ku  arising 
from  a  heap  of  burning  wood,  visible  upon  the  gnmntl,  while  to  the  loft, 
against  the  lire,  is  a  kettle,  in  which  some  one  is  stirring  with  a  stick. 
That  the  person  is  tired  appears  to  be  indicate<l  by  his  resting  his  hand 
upon  his  knee  as  he  leans  forward  toward  his  work.  The  rack,  bearing 
a  long  horizontal  pole,  is  next  toward  the  left,  and  beneath  it  is  a  man 
hanging  uj)  fish,  which  has  beeii  prejjared  by  the  one  at  the  tire.  The 
individual  has  a  piece  of  meat  raised  toward  the  bar,  while  before  him 
is  a  vessel  from  which  it  was  rcmove<l.  The  h>ng  net  stretched  from 
the  left-hand  scallold  pole  to  the  end  of  the  re<ord  is  a  gill  net,  a  form 
used  to  set  in  shallow  water  and  generally  stretched  at  right  angles  to 
the  shore  line,  in  which  manner  more  fish  are  intercepted  tlian  if  it 
were  parallel  therewith. 

The  small  projections  above  and  below  the  net  arc  floats  and  sinkers. 

Plate  G<i,  tig.  2,  shows  a  powderhorn  made  of  antler.  It  was  obtained 
at  St.  Michaels.  The  specimen  is  decorated  by  incisions  cut  length- 
wise, to  both  sides  of 
which  are  attached 
vai'ious  tigures  of  ani- 
m  a  1  s ,  birds,  and 
human  habitations. 
The  princii)al  tigure 
shown  in  the  illustra- 
tion represents  three 
summer   habitations, 

while  one  of  the  natives  is  occupied  in  suspending  meat  from  a  drying 
pole.  At  the  left  of  this  is  a  habitation  beneath  which  is  shown  another 
habitation,  inverted,  in  which  are  portrayed  four  human  beings.  To  the 
left  is  a  fox,  or  wolf,  holding  in  its  paws  some  small  creature,  evidently 
game  which  it  has  captured.  The  animal  seems  to  be  pursued  by  a  bird 
of  prey  shown  to  the  left,  both  having  probably  been  hunting  the  same 
quarry. 

Plate  05,  tig.  3,  represents  a  so-called  ivory  box  for  snutl',  though  the 
specimen  appears  to  be  made  of  horn.  This  was  obtained  at  Ilotham 
Inlet.  The  specimen  is  divided  into  four  ditlerent  compartments  by 
means  of  transverse  lines,  each  line  consisting  of  parallel  incisions 
decorated  as  in  plate  28,  tigs.  2  and  4.  The  spaces  contain  representa- 
tions of  fish,  sledges,  tree  ornamentations,  and  various  other  charac- 
ters, notably  the  outlines  of  a  number  of  human  beings,  apparently 
dancers  with  rattles. 

Plate  14,  fig.  2,  represents  a  bone  or  reindeer-horn  specimen  from  St. 

^lichaels.    Upon  the  lower  side,  at  the  left,  is  represented  a  boat  with 

four  white  men  cariying  out  supplies  from  a  trader's  store,  within 

which  and  behind  the  counter  stands  another  man  with  a  hat  upon  his 

NAT  MUS  95 65 


FiR.  79. 

ENORAVINf)  t)N  HONE. 


'%»> 


I- 


Ni/ 


11' 

■J- 

'■i 


iliV 


ii) 


m 

M 

- .  j 

^ 


?  ! 


866 


REPORT   OP  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


licnd.  To  the  right  nf  this  in  shown  anotlier  hitt,  about  which  four 
persons  are  occupied  in  preparing  food.  One  is  standing  over  a  kettle 
with  a  utensil  in  his  hand,  as  if  stirring,  while  anotlier,  to  the  right  of 
the  sinoke,  is  in  the  act  of  reaching  into  the  vessel  over  which  he  is 
occupied.  At  the  extreme  riglit  is  a  meat  rack.  13y  turning  the  speci- 
men upside  down  tliere  will  be  observed  approaching  from  the  left  a 
native  pushing  a  sledge,  to  which  are  attached  two  dogs.  In  front  is  a 
native  with  hands  lowered  and  extended,  as  if  calling  to  urge  forward 
the  dogs.  At  the  right  is  a  scaftold  which  i.s  in  connection  with  an 
underground  habitation.  From  the  top  of  one  of  the  smoke  holes  is 
seen  rising  a  heavy  cloud  of  smoke.  Two  natives  are  also  jwrtrayed, 
the  one  at  the  right  with  arms  extended,  as  if  making  signals.  To  the 
left  is  an  upright  pole  over  the  entrance  of  the  habitation,  which 
represents  a  votive  ottering. 

J  Mate  G6,  tig.  3  represents  a  kantag  or  bucket  handle  from  Norton 
Sound.  It  is  an  old  time-stained  piece,  and  bears  upon  the  lateral 
edges  a  few  sharply  incised  tigures,  tliat  upon  the  right  or  upi)er  side 
denoting  a  procession  of  loaded  sledges.  The  attitudes  of  the  dogs 
following  them,  as  well  as  of  the  nien  assisting,  are  very  natural.  Upon 
the  opposite  side  of  the  middle  are  three  kaiaks,  on  either  side  of  which 
are  a  number  of  seals,  while  at  the  extreme  left  are  two  low  mounds 
representing  winter  habitations. 

In  plate  07,  tig.  .'i,  Nos.  2, 3,  and  4  indicate  the  summer  habitations 
of  some  natives  who  had  gone  away  to  catch  and  cure  salmon.  The 
fish  are  drying  upon  the  racks  shown  in  Nos.  1  aiul  5;  at  the  latter  one 
the  natives  are  hanging  up  fish,  while  at  the  other  end  of  the  rack  is 
the  ever  present  dog. 

No.  6  denotes  the  boat  with  three  men  inside,  while  the  fourth  is 
towing  the  vessel  toward  shore. 

The  individual  at  No.  7  is  making  the  gesture  for  calling  attention  to 
something  which  he  has  at  his  feet — probably  a  salmon.  No.  8  is  a 
native  taking  a  skin  of  one  of  the  dead  animals,  while  Nos.  9  and  10 
are  also  going  to  join  in  carrying  venison,  as  shown  by  Nos.  11  and  12. 
The  dog  between  the  two  last  named  seems  to  scent  the  meat.  No.  13 
is  engaged  in  cutting  iip  an  animal,  the  cut  in  the  abdomen  being  shown 
by  two  parallel  horizontal  lines.  Nos.  14  and  15  are  dead  deer,  over 
which  the  native  at  the  last  named  is  busied.  No.  10  is  lying  tlat  on 
his  stomach,  holding  a  gun,  as  beyond  the  hillock.  No.  17,  he  sees  a 
herd  of  deer,  some  grazing  and  some  lying  upon  the  ground.  The  rack 
at  18  is  where  he  had  a  camp  at  a  former  time,  showing  the  locality  to 
have  been  visited  before. 

The  entire  village  appears  to  have  turned  out,  as  shown  in  plate  67, 
fig.  3,  to  aid  in  dragging  ashore  a  whale,  No.  1.  Lines  extend  to  either 
side,  where  groups  of  men  are  dragging  at  them,  No.  2.  The  tigures  on 
the  animal  are  cutting  ofif  pieces,  one  at  the  left  or  head  end  having 
raised  a  long  slice  of  blubber  or  skin,  while  at  the  other  end  one  of  the 


R«porfof  U    S.  Natioral  Mu»«uni,  1  B>5.— Hu'fman, 


Plate  66. 


late  67, 
o  either 
urea  on 
having 
e  of  the 


/ 


I 


UJ 

z 
o 
m 


> 

o 
> 

z 
o 

<0 

Q 
cc 
o 
u 

UJ 


ition  to 
8  is  a 
and  10 
and  12. 
No.  13 
shown 
er,  over 
iiat  on 
sees  a 
he  rack 
ality  to 


C^' 


,  *v>'/^ 


V^ 


Md 


r 


\ 


w  I 


*  V 


fe 


k^A 


Report  of  U.  S.  Nationil  Mu«aum,  189S Hoffman, 


1  2  3    4    5  6    7       8  9    10       11       12    IS    14    15  16  17 


i  i 


I.,  r 


5r 


1  2  3        4 


8  7 


8  0 


.IS    ;S 


'-il  ill! 


i ') 


^:) 


■ny 


;    !>./:  '  I; 


:;    I 


wijppwpMwi;p^ia>^   ^  i^p^ 


mmmm^mmm 


i 


Records  of  D 


mm 


Plate  67. 


3^'»;^?>^vV4t>:"lL»i"a»'>l<'"!^«^/-J  ^A,..^,,„,^aBB: 


2  18  14  15      16     17         18      19     80   21  22  33     84 

1 


«t 


«-4frM>irirt>Tfr   .i^-j^HLai^^ 


8  9 


r-..«rifeir-^M^lM>/p>^Hkfe- Ai«K 


10  11  12  13 


14  16  16         17     18 


19 


^^>^f^<l!f/^M%'i;^^^  lltlh^^\ 


^  A^jtm^ 


6  7 


ipom 


^  F^SUx^  j;r 


iiiniiiffliiii  itinngMP 


Records  of  DIly  Avocations. 


^*.■^ 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP   THE    ESKIMOS. 


867 


men  is  receiving  a  piece  from  another;  while  still  another,  nearer  the 
tail,  is  tossing  a  piece  of  the  meat  to  a  companion,  whose  arms  are 
stretched  out  to  receive  it. 

Still  another  pair  of  natives  are  occupied  with  a  large  piece  lying  upon 
the  ground.  At  No.  3  is  a  habitation,  and  at  No.  4  the  man  is  getting 
ready  his  sledges  to  haul  the  meat  back  to  the  house,  where  the  long 
vertical  ridge  poles  indicate  that  the  meat  is  to  be  suspended  from  them. 
Tlie  natives  at  Nos.  0  and  7  are  also  in  the  attitude  of  some  occupation 
in  anticipation  of  having  meat  to  hang  up  at  the  scaflFold  at  No.  (J. 

The  inverte<l  quadruped  near  the  middle  of  the  record,  and  above  the 
rope,  pertains  to  a  record  which  was  to  rest  upon  the  base  line,  on  the 
upper  surface  of  the  same  side,  but  whicli  was  not  undertaken. 

The  men  at  No.  5  are  apparently  using  sledge  runners  upon  which  to 
drag  their  umiak  to  the  shore,  so  as  to  ajiproach  the  whale  from  the 
water  side  to  assist  in  cutting  him  to  pieces- 
Plate  07,  iig.  3,  represents  a  number  of  «liflferent  avocations  connected 
with  the  chase,  and  the  artistic  porirayal  of  the  actions  represented 
are  peculiarly  distinct  aiul  interesting. 

Tlie  left  end  of  the  record  is  somewhat  marred  by  wear,  but  the  first 
character  to  be  intelligible,  No.  1.  denotes  the  horns  of  a  slaughtered 
reindeer,  of  which  the  skin,  No.  2,  is  outstretched  upon  the  ground. 
At  No.  3  are  represented  the  horns  and  forelegs  of  the  animal,  which 
have  been  dressed  for  transportation  to  the  village.  At  No.  4  is  the 
skin  of  a  female  reindeer,  Avhile  at  No.  5  is  visible  the  hunter  seated 
upon  the  ground  and  smoking  his  ])ipe.  His  gun  and  quiver  of  arrows 
are  indicated  at  Nos.  C  and  7  respectively. 

No.  8  denotes  a  bear  which  has  been  captured  by  the  same  hunter, 
whose  figure  is  reproduced,. and  his  comi)anion.  No.  11  represents  a 
man  engaged  upon  the  section  of  a  temporary  shelter,  while  the  indi- 
vidual at  No.  12  is  using  a  drill  bow  to  rotate  the  stick,  held  by  No.  13, 
in  the  act  of  making  fire.  Nos.  14  and  10  represent  a  boat's  crew  who 
landed  at  the  camp  or  shelter  just  named.  The  first  of  the  figures  is 
dragging  the  boat  along  shore,  tlie  one  in  the  stern  aiding  in  poling. 
No.  1.5  is  the  figure  of  a  fish  to  indicate  the  purpose  for  which  the  party 
is  away  from  their  own  home. 

At  No.  17  is  shown  a  man  hanging  meat  upon  the  rack  for  drying, 
the  strii)8  of  meat  being  visible  the  entire  length  of  the  horizontal  pole 
to  19,  which  is  the  skin  of  a  reindeer.  The  duties  of  No.  18  are  not 
apparent,  hut  he  was  evidently  helping  in  the  work  of  suspending 
pieces  of  meat.  No.  20  is  a  winter  habitation,  before  which  is  one  of 
the  inmates.  No.  21,  engaged  in  preparing  food,  or  something  that 
requires  stirring.  Before  him  is  observed  rising  a  colunm  of  smoke, 
No.  22,  while  at  No.  22  is  another  kettle  belonging  to  No.  23,  who  is 
also,  apparently,  going  to  assist  in  the  culinary  work.  No.  24  is  a  canoe 
lying  upon  its  side,  so  as  to  dry  the  bottom,  and  behind  it  is  seen  the 
owner  engaged  in  cleaning  and  repairing  the  side. 


868 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


id-: 


:-.]  ■:. 


The  elongated  figure  at  No.  25  is  a  iUh  net  stretched  out  for  drying. 
Other  characters  appear  to  have  been  made  farther  toward  tlje  right, 
but  from  use  of  the  rod  the  surface  has  been  worn  so  smooth  as  to 
obliterate  them. 


wm.ni 


Ismk  i^\^  1 X 


3  4  5  6 

¥iii-  8". 

EHKIMll    ATlll.F.IIC   Sl'llUTS. 


.  The  etchings  reproduced  in  |>hite  G7,  flg.  4,  were  copied  from  anivory 
rod  ill  the  collection  of  the  Aluska  Commercial  Company,  and  were 
interpreted  by  Vladimir  Naomoft",  a  Kadiak  half-caste  referred  to  else- 
where. The  left-hand  iigure  represents  a  long  rack  from  which  a  native 
has  suspended  reindeer  hides,  the  person  being  portrayed  at  the  right 
as  in  the  act  of  descending  from  a  short  ladder.     The  dome-shaped 

Iigure  is  a  habitation,  before  the  door  of  which  is 
^■^^  a  scjuare  figure — perli{ii)S  a  kettle — from  which 


smoke  is  arising.     A  native  is  next  drawn  in  the 


Fig.  81. 

NATIVE  ATHLETE. 


actof  shootingareindeer.thearrowsbeingshown 
as  if  sticking  in  its  back.  The  continuous  body 
with  eleven  pairs  of  horns  indicates  that  number 
of  animals.  To  the  right  are  several  reindeer  down  upon  the  ground, 
two  having  been  shot  with  arrows,  the  native  being  again  shown  in  the 
act  of  shooting  toward  a  herd  of  ten  reindeer,  wotmding  one  which  after- 
wards attacked  him,  and  which  he  caught  by  the  horns,  as  shown  at  the 
extreme  right  end  of  the  record. 

The  figure  of  the  habitation  No.  1,  shown  in  accompanying  illustra- 
tion fig.  80,  has  above  it  at  the  left  a  character  resembling  a  cedar  tree, 
but  which  denotes  smoke.  This  resembles  also  the  char- 
acter to  denote  spray  or  water  as  sj touted  by  whales,  illus- 
trations of  which  are  found  elsewhere. 

The  individual  seated  over  the  entrance  to  the  habita- 
tion. No.  2,  is  watching  the  amusements  going  on  a  short 
distance  before  him.  Nos.  .'i  and  4  have  made  use  of  the 
fishrack  poles  for  horizontal  bars,  and  whilt  ^o.  '.i  is  astride 
of  his  and  gesturing  with  his  conversation  with  No.  2,  No.  4  is  making 
a  turn. 

The  person  indicated  in  No.  .~» is  preparing  to  run,  the  two  remaining 
figures  in  Nos.  (5  and  7  acting,  perhaps,  as  coachers. 

Fig.  HI,  taken  from  the  engravings  on  the  ivory  pipestem  represented 
in  plate  61,  shows  a  native  in  the  act  of  standing  upon  his  head 
or  taking  a  somersault.  The  representation  is  unique,  and  nothing 
approaching  this  kind  of  athletic  sport  has  been  elsewhere  found  upon 
the  specimens  in  the  collection. 

The  seated  figure  in  fig.  82  is  holding  with  one  hand  a  piece  of  wood 


i_ 

Fig.  82. 

NATIVE  MAKINO 
A  BOW. 


hUi, 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF    THE    ESKIMOS. 


869 


A 


Via.  83. 
NATIVK8  WRESTLINCI. 


r   ^ 

Kig.  84. 

FOOTIIAI-I.   KICKKI)  nV  NATIVE 


'  wood 


from  which  he  intends  to  make  a  bow;  the  other  hand  holding  an  adz 
with  whieli  the  greater  part  of  the  superfluous  material  is  rem«)ved  ere 
beginning  the  tinal  cuts  and  scrapings  to  produce  the  ultimate  form  on 
surface. 

The  illustration  of  two  men  wrestling  is  reproduce*!  in  fig.  8.3  from 
the  pipestems  shown  in  plate  (J2.     The  attitude  of 
the  men  is  realistic,  and  shows  the  clinch  in  a  "<!atch- 
as-catchcan"  contest. 

This,  fig.  84,  is  also  reproduced  from  the  same  pro- 
lific source,  the  pipestem,  «hown  in  jdate  Gl.     The 
man  at  the  right  has  kicked  the  ball  into  the  air, 
Avhilo  his  companion  is  ready  to  catch  it,  as  is  shown  by  the  outstretched 
hands. 

Two  men  engaged  in  gambling  are  shown  in  fig.  8.').  That  they  are 
sitting  close  together  is  indicated  not  only  by  their  ap|)arent  proximity 
but  furthermore  by  the  lepresentation  of  the  foot  of  one  num  extending 

beyond  the  back  of  his  vis-a-vis. 

Whether  the  game  is  i>laye«l  with  cards,  with 
sticks,  or  some  other  materials,  is  not  determi- 
nable. 

The  ilhistraticm  in  fig.  8«»  is  not  of  uncommon 
occuiTence  in  records  of  dances,  those  so  indi- 
cated being  the  observers  and  not  the  participants  in  tlie  ceremonials. 
The  i)ipe  represented  in  the  native  drawing  is  the  Siberian  i)attern,  an 
Eskimo  reproduction  of  the  general  type  being  shown  in  plates  61  and 
62,  in  which  the  bowl  is  a  vertical  stem  with  a  broad,  rather  flaring  top 
witli  but  a  narrow  and  deep  perforation,  resembling 
tlie  Chinese  pattern  in  respect  to  the  small  quantity  of 
tobacco  which  the  smoker  can  consume  atone  filling. 

The  effect  is  attained,  however,  as  Mr.  Murdoch  in- 
forms me  "that  the  smoker  will  take  a  deep  inhalation 
of  smoke — and  vile  smoke  it  is,  generally — retaining  it  for  a  considera- 
ble time  until  he  is  compelled  to  take  breath,  when  another  similar 
inhalation  of  smoke  is  taken.  This  is  repeated  until  the  small  charge 
of  tobacco  is  consumed.    The  result  is  a  most  violent  fit  of  coughing, 

becoming  spasmodic  and  of  such  apparent- 
ly painful  character  as  to  lead  one  to  believe 
that  the  poor  victim  is  going  to  die  at  once." 
Many  of  the  Indian  tribes  practice  like 
inhalations  of  smoke,  the  usual  combina- 
tion among  the  Dakota  tribes  consisting  of 
various  kinds  of  purchased  tobacco  mixed  in  varying  degrees  with  the 
inner  red  bark  of  the  red  osier  Cornus  )ttolonifera,  or  the  leaves  of  TJva 
Ursi,  found  along  the  elevated  lands  of  the  upper  Missouri  and  Yellow- 
stone rivers. 
The  bark  or  the  leaves  are  chopped  up  finely  in  the  proportion, 


Fig.  8.-.. 

NATIVKS   CiAVHI.lNfJ. 


Fig.  86. 

NATIVE  S.MOKINU   I'IPE. 


rl: 


^'i  f 


i       ^ 

■ 


4 

■   ■■■( 

I.  ^- 1 
j 


I.  -. 


t;  i ) 


If 


i 


t 


.'     1 


f 


870 


REPOllT    OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


r'X^^}^3'^ 


Fig.  87. 

DANfE. 


usually,  of  two  to  one  of  tobacco,  rubbed  together  in  the  palm  of  the 
Lund  and  packed  into  the  deep,  narrow  tube  of  the  Catlinite  pipe. 

The  outer  or  dry  part  of  the  lips  only  are  placed  against  the  pipe- 
stem,  and  the  moment  a  deep  long  pull  is  taken  the  outer  corners  of  the 
mouth  are  slightly  openetl,  without  removing  the  lips  irom  the  tip,  and 
a  deep  breath  taken  in  order  that  as  the  air  enters  the  mouth  some  of 

the  smoke  held  therein  ])a8ses 
along  down  the  trachea  into  the 
—  bronchial  tubes,  entirely  filling 
the  lungs.  The  expiration  is  per- 
formed by  expelling  the  smoke 
through  the  nostrils,  at  the  conclusion  of  which  another  deep  draw  at 
the  stem  followed  by  a  like  inhalation,  this  being  continued  with  the 
regularity  of  ordinary  breathing,  at  each  inspiration  smoke  passing 
along  with  the  air  into  the  lungs. 

Frequent  coughing  spells  result  and  bronchial  troubles  are  very 
common  among  the  males.  Tiie  opportunities  for  close  observation 
were  especially  good  during  tiie  writer's  detail  as  surgeon  at  a  military 
station  at  a  tin»e  when  the  number  of  Indians  upon  the  ration  roll  was 
13,oU0,  and  personal  experience  was  abundant  also,  both  in  the  method 
of  making  and  the  acquirement  of  a  severe  attack  of  bronchitis,  though 
of  but  limited  duration. 

The  group  represented  in  fig.  87  is  actively  engaged  in  a  dance,  the 
various  attitudes  indicating  considerable  exertion.  The  seated  figure 
is  holding  aloft  his  shaman  tambourine  drum,  the  stroke  across  the 
disk  indicating  the  stick  with  which  he  produces  the  percussion. 


'^  ti>^.ff^B  ^  "^r.   lP^A^^%fr'^/r^'%%dh.\A V A 


123456   V       8 


10      11     12    13    14    15 

Fig.  88. 

DANCE   AND  FEAST. 


10   17  18  19  20  21  22      23 


24 


The  larger  figure  at  the  right  is  the  chief  officiating  personage,  and 
is  engaged  in  chanting.  One  hand  is  directed  toward  tiie  drununer, 
while  the  other  is  held  aloft,  in  the  a<'t  of  supplicating  aid  from  his 
daimoii  or  guardian  spirit. 

Fig.  88  is  one  of  the  very  few  illustrations  of  dances,  and  is  perhaps 
the  only  one  that  seems  to  be  of  a  social  character,  in  consequence  of  a 
successful  hunt. 

No.  1  is  a  man  making  the  gesture  for  here,  at  thin  place,  having 
reference  to  the  village  of  which  he  is  an  inhabitant  and  of  which  the 
houses  are,  in  part,  shown  in  Nos.  18,  20,  22,  24,  and  the  storehouse, 
No.  23.  No.  2  is  obliterated,  and  although  it  appears  to  resemble  a 
human  figure,  it  is  more  probably  a  peak,  similar  to  the  ones  shown  in 
Nos.  3  and  7.  Nos.  4  and  5  are  the  hunters  who,  in  the  shelter  of 
the  hill  No.  7,  are  crawling  up  to  within  shooting  distance  of  the  deer, 


:i  ii, 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP  THE   ESKIMOS. 


871 


the 


resting  upon  the  ground  at  No.  8.  No.  0  denotes  a  bow  and  two  arrows, 
while  another  arroAv,  carried  by  the  rear  hunter,  is  shown  above  and 
between  the  two  figures. 

The  next  portion  of  the  record  i)ertains  to  the  feast  given  at  the 
dance,  the  hitter  being  graphicially  jwrtrayed  in  Nos.  0-17.  The  drnni- 
iners  are  indicated  at  either  end  of  the  group  of  dancers,  tlie  one  at  No. 
0  being  seated  upon  the  ground.  Nos.  10  and  11  are  rather  more 
violent  in  their  attitudes  tlian  Nos.  12  and  13.  No.  12  is  sho.wn  with 
the  right  hand  to  the  mouth  to  denote  the  gesture  to  eat,  wliile  with 
his  left  he  is  pointing  in  the  direction  of  the  feast  awaiting  them. 
No.  13  is  indicating  himself,  and  also  points  to  the  same  place  as  No. 
12,  indicating  that  he  too  will  be  there.  No.  14  is  also  shown  as 
making  the  gesture  to  eat,  eating,  or  food,  while  with  the  other  hand 
thrown  backward  is  pointing  in  the  direction  of  the  habitations.  No. 
15  seems  to  be  a(!ting  in  the  nuinner  of  an  usher,  holding  both  hands 
toward  the  place  of  the  food,  as  if  inviting  the  others  to  go. 

No.  10  is  shown  with  his  hands  up,  a  common  attitude  given  to  i)er- 
sons  portrayed  as  dancing  or  other  excitement,  such  as  surprise  or 
alarm  in  hunting,  etc.,  while  No.  17  has  risen  from  his  place  and  is  using 
the  drunj,  similar  to  the  one  at  No.  9.  The  summer  habitations  are 
shown  in  Nos,  18,  20,  and  22,  the  persons  indicated  between  them  being- 
members  of  the  households  near  which  they  are  represented. 

No.  23  is  a  scaffold  storehouse,  while  No.  24  denotes  a  winter  or  per- 
manent habitation,  with  one  of  the  inmates  on  the  roof. 


and 


his 


.^^ 


:^\JiMM^     >^^.n* 


1 


8 


2  5  3 

Fig.  89. 
WHAUNO  SHIPS  AND  BOATS,  AND  VISITINO  NATIVES. 

In  tig.  89  is  portrayed  an  event  which  seems  to  have  been  of  interest 
to  the  recorder,  or  owner  of  the  record.  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3  are  whaling 
ships;  from  No.  2  is  observed  a  feather  like  figure  rising  from  the  deck, 
between  the  main  mast  and  mizzenmast,  which  denotes  smoke  rising 
from  the  fire  used  for  boiling  blubber.  At  No.  3  the  line  is  secured  to 
walrus,  which  is  being  hauled  aboard. 

Nos.  4  and  6  represent  ships'  boats,  while  No.  5  is  a  native  canoe,  the 
recorder  being  indicated  at  the  stem  of  No.  o,  in  the  act  of  making  a 
gesture  with  his  left  hand,  and  pointing  with  his  right  toward  the  direc- 
tion of  the  ship  No.  1,  upon  which  are  two  men,  the  one  upon  the  bow- 
sprit of  which  is  returning  a  gesture  sign. 

The  man  at  the  stern  of  the  last-named  ship  is  also  making  a  hailing 
sign  to  the  canoe  men  at  No.  4. 

The  two  crosses  at  No.  7  are  birds,  while  No.  8  is  the  walrus  which 
has  been  secured  by  the  crew  of  ship  No.  3. 


'A, 


872 


REPOUT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Ill  fig.  90,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3  represent  whaling  ships  iit  anchor,  tlie 
middle  figure  being  somewhat  obliterated  by  the  wearing  away  of  the 


la 


j:    1 


;  It 

M 


I'.  ■*    ;| 


5 


r,    ! 


m 


V')i 


:>  . 


'4' 


-<^^^ 


.^ 


•:s\\a\\iHT«au.u\iuuiM^ 


y    JtJt.    Artr^,?t^ 


^_ 


9 


10 


Fi«.  IH). 
WMALEIirNTKIIS  AND  SHIPS. 


ivory  of  the  bow.  The  anchor  chain  in  seen  at  No.  3.  Nos.  4  and  <i  are 
the  shi]»a' boats  in  pursuit  of  whales,  the  specimen  at  No.  5  having  been 
harpooned,  while  in  No.  6  the  hunter  is  reaching  down  to  grasi)  the 
harpoon,  the  open  hand  being  clearly  indicated.  No.  8  is  a  killer  whale, 
while  Nos.  !>  and  10  denote  seals  diving  into  the  sea. 

PICTOGRAPHIC    RECORDS. 

This  collection  of  records  ])ertains  more  particularly  to  individual 
exploits — hunting  aiul  fishing,  traveling  and  combat.  It  is  practi(?ally 
impossible  to  claasifv  all  of  the  records  or  to  relegate  them  to  a  spe- 
cific subject,  as  the  subjects  are  frequently  not  on  one  single  theme, 
but  embrace  a  number  of  ideas  upon  the  same  continuous  face  of 
ivory;  therefore  the  records  are  necessarily  classified  according  to  the 
import  of  the  majority  of  characters  inscribed. 

In  the  accompanying  series  ])resented  below  there  appears  to  be 
more  allusion  to  individual  performances  than  the  record  of  an  indefi- 
nite number  of  people. 

INDIVIDFAL    EXPLOITS. 

The  carving  shown  in  fig.  91,  made  of  a  piece  of  walrus  ivory,  was 
coi)ied  from  the  original  in  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company,  San 
Francisco,  California,  and  the  interpretations  were  verified  by  Vladimir 
Naomolf,  a  Kadiak  half  breed,  to  whom  reference  has  already  been 
made. 

No.  1  is  a  native  whose  lelt  hand  is  resting  against  the  house,  while 
the  right  is  directed  toward  the  ground.  The  character  to  his  right 
rei»rcsents  a  "shaman  stick"  surmounted  by  the  emblem  of  a  bird — a 
"good  spirit" — in  memory  of  some  departed  member  of  the  household. 
It  was  suggested  that  the  grave  stick  h.ad  been  erected  to  the  memory 
of  his  wife. 

No.  2  represents  a  reindeer. 

No.  3  signifies  that  one  man,  the  designer,  shot  and  killed  another 
with  an  arrow.  The  elbow  of  the  arm  drawing  the  arrow  is  seen  pro- 
jecting behind  the  back,  illustrating  close  observation  on  the  part  of 
the  artist. 


GRAPHIC  ART  OF  THE  ESKIMOS. 


873 


No.  4  denotes  that  tbe  narrator  lias  made  tradinj;  expeditions  with  a 
doff  sledge. 

No.  't  is  a  sailboat,  although  the  elevate<l  ])addle  signities  that  that 
was  the  manner  in  which  the  voyage  was  best  made.  The  conspicuous 
and  abrupt  stem  specifies  that  it  was  a  heavy  boat,  for  use  in  sailing, 
and  not  a  baidarka. 

Xo.  <»  represents  a  dog  sled,  with  the  animal  hitched  up  for  a  Journey. 
Tiie  radiating  lines  in  the  left-hand  upper  corner  of  the  square  contain- 
ing the  pictograph  are  the  rays  of  the  sun. 

No.  7  is  a  sacred  or  ceremonial  structure.  The  four  figures  at  the 
outer  corners  of  the  sipiare  reiuesent  the  young  men  placed  on  guard, 
armed  with  bows  and  arrows,  to  keei>  away  those  not  niembers  of  the 
band,  who  are  depicted  as  holding  a  dance.  The  small  s«inaro  in  the 
center  of  the  inclosure  represents  the  lireplace.    The  angular  lines 


JJy^l^^f^ 


^?^V^ 


!l  1(1  11 

Ili;(l>l!l)S   CAFiVKI)   IN   IVilHY. 

extending  from  the  right  side  of  the  structure  to  the  vertical  partition 
lino  show  in  outline  the  subterranean  entrance  to  the  structure  or 
lodge. 

No.  S  is  a  pine  tree,  upon  which  a  ]»orcupine  is  crawling  upward. 

No.  9,  a  similar  species  of  tree,  from  the  bark  of  wliicli  a  bird  [wood- 
pecker] is  extracting  larva'  for  food. 

No.  0  is  a  bear. 

No.  10  represents  the  owner  of  the  record  in  his  boat  holding  alott 
his  doublebladed  paddle  to  call  for  help  to  drive  lisli  into  a  net. 

No.  11  is  an  assistant  fisherman,  one  who  has  resi)onded  to  the  call, 
and  is  observed  <lriviug  fish  by  beating  the  water  with  a  stick. 

No.  12  represents  the  net  which,  as  is  customary  also  among  many  cf 
the  tribes  of  the  Great  Lakes,  is  usually  set  in  moderately  shallow 
water. 

No.  13,  the  figure  over  the  preceding  character,  denotes  a  whale,  with 
line  and  harpoon  attached,  which  was  caught  by  the  fisherman  during 
one  of  his  fishing  trips. 


J 


% 


i-i 


ii4 


}i^ 


1 


I  ■! 


!'< 


•I-  : 

I; 


i  1 


'  *i--' 

'«-? 


■i '. 


874 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Fig. 92. 
TIIHOWINd  IIAKPOON 


m^ 


t 


w 


SHOOTlNd   HEINDKKH. 


A  man  in  u  kneeling;  poHture,  about  to  throw  a  gpear  at  an  animal,  in 
shown  in  tig.  02.     Tho  attitude  is  lifelike  and  the  Nket<;h  well  made. 
An  illustration  of  shooting  a  reindeer  is  shown  in  tig.  93.     The  man 
is  lying  upon  the  ground  and  is  using  a  gun  instead  of 
(H^  a  bow  and  arrow. 

^^  The  illustration  given  in  tig.  04  is  a  remarkably  clever 

bit  of  engraving,  especially  in  the  attitude  assumed  by 
the  native  in  drawing  the  bow.  The  arrow  has  already 
been  discharged  and  is  on  its  message  of  death,  but  a  short  distance 
from  the  head  of  the  animal.  Immediately  in  front  of  the  hunter  is  a 
mound  upon  which  is  a  tree,  behind  which  the  hunter  approached  to 
within  shooting  distancie.  The  animal  is 
drawn  facing  the  hunter  to  indicate  the 
fa<'t  that  it  was  secured. 

The  flatness   and   absence  of  mark-    ]i 
inj^s  upon  the  mound  indicate  the  ditl'er- 
ence  between  it  and  a  winter  habitation. 

The  bag  handle  shown  on  plate  58,  tig.  2,  presents  three  panels,  on 
which  are  portr.iyals  of  natural  objects.  The  separating  lines  consist 
of  pairs  of  vertical  zig/ag  markings,  while  the  front  i>anel  bears  the 

figure  of  a  hunter  armed  with  a  bow  and 
arrow  in  pursuit  of  reindeer,  one  of  these 
animals  being  indicated  in  each  of  the 
two  remaining  panels. 

The  two  individual  characters  repre- 
sented in  fig.  0')  as  Nos.  3  and  5  are 
intended  to  denote  the  same  person.  The  one,  as  No.  3,  is  the  hunter 
armed  with  bow  and  arrow,  and  by  hiding  himself  behind  the  trc  e,  No. 
2,  lie  was  enabled  to  shoot  the  buck,  Xo.  1,  when  the  latter  had  kept 
on  grazing  to  within  proper  range.  Being  hidden  from  view  of  the  doe, 
No.  0,  by  the  hill.  No.  4,  the  hunter  imitated  the  call  of  the  male,  thus 
bringing  within  range  the  female.  The  figure  in  No.  5  represents,  as 
above  stated,  the  hunter,  but  in  this  additional  form  in  order  to  give 

r^  $-H%  -^  ^>^ 

1  2  3  4  5  6 

Fig.  05. 
HCNTINO  DEER. 

him  the  gesture  of  calling  or  beckoning  with  the  left  hand,  in  the  direc- 
tion indicated  by  the  extended  right  arm  and  hand,  the  attitude  of  the 
animal  also  showing  that  it  followed.  The  hunter  has  projecting  from 
his  mouth  a  short  black  line,  denoting  voice,  produced  by  whistling  or 
a  decoy  whistle. 

The  sketch  shown  in  fig.  96  is  of  interest  on  account  of  the  indica- 
tion shown  by  the  artist  that  the  reindeer  is  wounded  and  can  not 


T^    ^-^^^ 


HUNTKR 


Fig. 94. 


neiNDEEB. 


GRAPHIC    ART    OF    THE    ESKIMOS. 


875 


Via.  116. 

lUNTKIiH   AKTKH   A    I'KINDKKK, 


Fill.  1(7. 

Hl'NTKIl   AI'PUOACHlNd    WAI.UI'S. 


escape  being  shot  by  the  liunter.  The  animal  is  placed  in  an  attitndo 
ns  it'  backin^^  the  legs  drawn  so  as  to  project  Mlightly  to  tlie  IVont  to 
denote  its  inability  to  progress  in  tiiat  direction. 

The  short  line  in  tlu>  hand  of  the  middle  hnnter  is  an  arrow,  which 
is  being  held  toward  the  one  shooting.    The  llgure  at  the  left  is  qnietly 
observing  the  scene, 
snioiiiug  his  pii»e.  •^  -  ■-• 

A  c  1  e  \'  e  r  u  n  d 
cleanly  cut  illustra- 
tion is  reproduced 
in  tig.  U7,  represent 

ing  a  hunter  in  his  baidarka,  [laddling  toward  an  ice  pan  upon  which 
is  quietly  reposing  a  walrus. 

All  the  figures  arc  lieavily  incised  t)y  vertical  lines,  the  ice  alon«' 
remaining  as  a  hoUow  outline  to  indicate  its  trans]nireiit  or  translucent 
coixiition. 

The  illustration  of  the  two  sides  of  u  piece  of  ivory,  tig.  1>8,  is  from 

rtkiawin,  in  the 
I'oint  Harrow  re 
gion  of  Alaska,  an<l 
is  described  by  Mr. 
Murdoch'  as  being 
a  piece  of  an  old  snow-shovel  edg«^  with  freshly  incised  ligurcs  on  botli 
faces,  which  the  artist  said  represent«'d  his  own  record.  "The  figures 
are  all  colored  with  red  ocher.  On  the  obverse  the  figures  all  stand 
on  a  roughly  drawn  gnmnd  line.  At  the  left  is  a  man  pointing  his 
rifle  at  a  bear,  which  stands  on  its  hind  legs  facing  him.  Then  comes 
a  she-bear  walk- 
ing toward  the 
left,  followed  by 
a  cub,  then  two 
large  bears  also 
walking  to  the 
left,  and  a  she- 
bear  in  the  same 
attitude,  fol- 
lowed by  two 
cubs,onebehind 

the  other.  This  was  explained  by  the  artist  as  follows:  *  These  are  all 
the  bears  I  have  killed.  This  one  alone  (pointing  to  the  "r.ampant"  one) 
wasbad.  All  the  others  were  good.'  We  heard  at  the  time  of  his  giving 
the  death  shot  to  the  last  bear  as  it  was  charging  his  comrade,  who  had 
wounded  it  with  his  mu/zle  loader.  On  the  reverse  the  figures  are  in 
the  s.ame  position.  The  same  man  points  his  rifle  at  a  string  of  three 
wolves.     His  explanation  was :  'These  are  all  the  wolves  I  have  killed.'" 


Fig.  98. 
HDNTINfl  SCOKE  ENdKAVKI)  ON  IVOKY.     (AFTEIl  MURDOCH.) 


I  Ninth  Anuiial  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology,  1887-'88, 1892,  p.  362. 


i 


876 


REPORT  OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  IHftR. 


it 


M  m  * 


\  '■ 
! 


ifv^ 


•:■;  ■  ! 


%€     ■ 
-i:,'.'' 


ii: 
if 


/  '9 


t'^,1. 


Plate  •'tO,  llg.  3,  hIiowh  h  drill  bow  from  Norton  Soiiiid.  Tlio  orna- 
iiuMitatioii  upon  one  Hido  ronsists  of  eleven  wolves,  wliilu  on  the  other 
Hide  is  r(ipresent«!d  a  herd  of  reindeer,  tlu<  herd  hein/,'  divided  into  two 
]»artH,  iM^tween  whieli  is  shown  the  llj^nre  of  a  wolf. 

It  may  be  that  the  above  instance  rerords  the  fa<'t  of  the  owner 
bcin*;  a  snccessful  hunter,  and  thus  records  a  successful  exploit, 
though  the  uniformity  in  outline  of  the  animals  su^^jfcsts  a  tendency 

also  toward  ornamentation  as 
well  as  jMutrayins  an  occur- 
lence. 

The  fungus-ash  box  shown  on 
plate  oO,  flg.  ."),  shows  along 
the  upperline  of  illustrations  a 
liunter  with  throwing  stick  and 
wea])on  running  after  some 
binls  which  he  is  desirous  of 
securing. 

lJl)on  the  lower  line  the  same 
person,  perhai)8,  is  shown  be- 
hind a  sledge  riding  his  dog  in 
pulling  the  conveyance. 

When  the  box  is  reversed, 
there  will  be  seen  upon  the  upper 
line  a  clump  of  trees  at  the 
right,  while  to  the  left  of  these 
is  a  hunter  kneeling  in  the  atti- 
tude of  shooting  at  a  bear;  be- 
hindthe  latter  is  another  animal, 
perhai)s  a  unite. 

TTpon  the  lower  line  is  a  ship, 

toward  which  two  native  boats 

are  dire(!ted.    The  face  at  the 

left  is   apparently  simply  an 

attempt  at  caricature. 

The  hunting  tablet  found  by  ]Mr.  Murdoch  at  Point  Barrow,  and 

before  referred  to,  is  represented  in  plate  65,  tig.  1.    The  description 

given  by  him  is  in  connection  with  the  illustration  given  on  plate  50, 

fig.  1,  referring  to  the  reverse  of  tlie  tablet. 

The  accompanying  illustration,  fig.  99,  and  description  is  from  iSIur- 
doch's  report  on  the  Point  Barrow  Eskimo,"  and  appears  to  be  one  of 
the  four  specimens  brought  back  by  him.  The  tablet  is  of  ivory,  4.8 
inches  long  and  1  inch  wide.  On  each  face  is  an  ornamental  border 
inclosing  a  number  of  incised  ttgures,  which  probably  represent  actual 
scenes,  as  the  tablet  is  not  new. 


Fig.  99. 
IirNTINd  SCnUK  ENURAVKU  ON  IVOKY  (AFTEK  MURDOCH). 


'Ninth  Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethuology,  1887-88, 1892,  p.  361  et  seq. 


ite.-. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


877 


Mr.  Murdoch  say.s: 

Tbu  tl^iirfH  oil  tlitt  (i)iv<M'Hu  fac««  aru  cohired  witli  hmI  oclior.  At  th)^  ii|i|ier  tiid, 
NtantliiiK  on  a  i;r«>MH  liiwt,  with  his  htMtil  tnwiird  tho  oiid,  Ih  n  riulrly  drawn  man  holding 
hJH  ri({lit  hand  n]»  and  ]iiN  left  down,  with  tli«)  lin^i'iH  (MitNpruad.  At  hiH  left  Ntaiidit 
a  boy  with  both  bandH  down.  Thumt  tl^iiruN  probably  reprt^HiMit  tho  hunter  and  hi.s 
Hon.  .liiHt  bfl]ow  the  rroHN  line  in  a  ninn  ruiftiii);  a  npear  to  Htriktt  an  animal  wiiich  in 
])<>rhapH  inoant  for  a  reindettr  witiiont  horiiH.  Thra«<  d«-«>r,  aUo  without  horim,  Htand 
witii  thtnr  feet  on  one  border  with  thi>ir  headn  toward  the  np]M>r  end,  and  on  the 
other  bordi-r  near  the  end  are  two  biickH  with  lar^e  afttlerH  heading  the  otiier  way, 
and  beliind  them  a  man  in  a  kaiak.  Itetween  him  and  the 
animal  wliieb  the  iirHt  man  i»  Hpearin^  is  an  object  wbieh 
may  reprcHent  tliu  ereitcent  iiioim.  The  Htory  may  perhaps  be 
freely  translated  as  follows:  "When  the  nn»oii  was  yoniifj. 
the  man  aud  his  hou  killed  hIx  reindeer,  two  of  them  biicka 
with  larjjfe  antlers.  One  they  speared  on  land,  the  rest  they 
chase  I  with  the  kaiak.'" 

On  the  reverse  tiie  liKiires  and  the  border  are  eolored  black 
with  sout.  In  the  left-hand  lower  row  is  a  she  bear  and  her 
enb  lieatlinK  to  the  left,  followed  by  a  man  who  is  about  to 
shoot  an  arrow  at  them.  Then  eome  two  mort)  Itears  heading 
toward  the  right,  and  in  the  right-hand  lower  corner  is  a 
whale  with  two  tloats  attadied  to  him  by  a  harpoon  line. 
Above  this  is  an  iimiak  with  four  men  in  it  approaching 
another  whale  which  has  already  received  one  liar])oon  with 
its  two  tloats.  The  harpoon  which  is  to  be  thrust  at  him 
may  be  seen  sticking  out  over  the  bow  of  the  boat.  Then 
come  two  whales  in  a  line,  one  heading  to  the  left  and  one  to 
tlie  right.  In  the  left-hand  upper  corner  is  a  tigiiro  which 
may  rejiresent  a  boat  bottom  up  on  the  staging  of  four  posts. 
We  did  not  learn  the  actual  history  of  this  tablet,  which  was 
brought  down  for  sale  with  a  niinilier  of  other  things. 

Mr.  W.  Boyd  Diiwkins  figures  an  arrow  straight- 
eiier  of  walrus  ivory  (tig.  100)  wbicli  is  almost  an 
exact  reproduction  in  lorni  of  tliat;  shown  in  jdateS, 
tig.  1.  The  latter  is  from  the  Diomode  Islands,  and 
bears  the  tigure  of  a  reindeer  only.  That  shown  by 
Mr.  Dawkins  bears  along  one  edge  a  row  of  reindeer, 
while  at  the  opposite  margin  of  the  same  si<le  a 
series  of  seven  figures,  five  of  which  resemble  the 
human  form,  each  with  antler  and  headdress,  and 
outstretched  arms,  from  the  sleeves  of  which  are 
suspended  what  appears  to  denote  fringe — short 
seiiations.  Two  figures  are  place<l  in  profile  and  in  that  position  more 
nearly  resemble  reindeer  rampant,  though  the  characters  are  evidently 
intended  to  represent  the  same  idea  as  that  expressed  in  the  five 
preceding  ones.' 

Another  illustration  from  the  same  work  aiul  author  relates  to  a 
hunting  scene,  two  natives  being  represented  as  in  pursuit  of  two 
reindeer,  one  of  which  has  been  shot  and  is  lying  down.^ 


Fijj.  100. 
ARROW    STRAKillTEXER. 


'  Early  Man  in  Britain.    London,  1880,  p.  238,  tig.  92. 


Idea  ,  p.  239,  fig.  93. 


)  ■> 


HI 


i    j 


'd.  ■ 


878 


REPORT  OP   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


Plate  22,  fig.  1,  represents  an  ivory  drill  bow  from  Kotzebue  Sound. 
The  implement  is  15  inches  in  length  and  seven-eighths  of  an  inch  in 
width.  Betides  being  undulating  the  specimen  is  polished  down  at 
ii; Nervals  of  2  inches  in  such  a  manner  as  to  represent  or  produce  slight 
cf  istrictions,  as  will  be  observed  from  the  illnstration.  It  represents  a 
hunting  record,  the  hunter  or  owner  of  the  si)ecimen  being  shown  at  the 
left  in  the  attitnde  of  shooting  at  a  bear,  whi«*h  animal  is  accomi)anied 
by  seven  others  of  the  same  '  pecies.  Some  of  these  are  separated  by 
vertical  lines,  thus  forming  partitions  in  the  record.  At  the  extreme 
right  is  another  illustrntion  af  whale  hnnting,  and  to  intelligently  un- 
derstand the  engravin;;  the  bow  must  be  turned  around.  The  hnnter  is 
here  represented  in  his  kaiak,  above  which  is  an  iiTegnlar  circle  con- 
nected with  the  whale  by  a  sharply  deHne«l  line.  This  represents  a 
hari)oo'.  cord  and  the  seal-skiir  float  which  is  usually  attached  to  impede 
+lie  progress  of  tlie  captive.  The  whrle  is  rei)resented  with  great 
accuracy.  Above  the  outline  of  the  kaiak  will  be  seen  a  native  draw- 
ing a  bow,  the  arrow  being  directed  forward  toward  a  flock  of  geese, 
uumbciiiig  seven,  one  i)receding  the  other,  in  a  very  lifelike  attitude. 

IMate  68,  fig.  2,  .shows  an  old  and  age-stained  specinien  of  ivory,  also 
representing  a  drill  bow,  from  Kotzebue  Sound.  The  under  surface  is 
the  one  represented  in  the  illnstration.  At  the  extreme  left  are  five 
bear  skins  and  a  long-tailed  animal  which  nuvy  denote  the  otter.  To 
the  right  of  the  vertical  line — the  line  denoting  the  separation  between 
two  records — are  engraved  the  figures  of  three  white  meii,  or  perhaps 
only  two,  as  the  two  are  of  the  figures  portrayed  with  the  rimmed 
hats.  One  of  these  is  handing  a  small  objeirt  to  his  coujpanion,  Avhose 
hands  appear  to  be  stuck  in  his  pockets.  To  the  right  of  this  individual 
are  six  cone-like  objectf  connected  at  the  apex  by  a  continuous  line, 
and  between  which  are  rude  upright  objects  resembling  columns  of 
smoke.  These  are  summer  habitations,  with  pvobably  indications  of 
smoke  fn)m  the  cam]>  fires.  In  the  middle  of  the  record  are  two  cone- 
like structures,  dencjting  mountains,  between  which  is  a  semicircle 
deeply  engraved  with  short  lateral  lines  representing  a  ccmventional 
tree  symbol  with  brandies  at  either  end  and  upon  the  sides.  The  sig- 
nification of  this  appears  to  be  that  between  two  iriountain  regions 
occurs  an  abundance  of  timber.  This  method  of  i)ortraying  an  abun- 
dance of  anything  \A  very  sin)ilar  to  a  common  i)ractice  adopted  by  many 
of  the  Indian  tribes  of  the  United  States,  especially  the  OJibwa  and 
some  of  the  Shoshonian  tribes.'  The  four  triangular  figures  to  the  right 
represent  huts,  while  a  continuous  line  extends  from  the  mountain 
toward  the  right  and  connects  with  a  man  disg.iiseJ  in  a  wolf  skin. 
The  signification  of  this  is  not  clear.  It  may  denote  the  act  of  a  shanuin 
in  such  disguise  approaching  the  habitations  and  extracting  something 
therefrom,  or  he  may  intend  harm  to  one  of  the  occupants;  or  it  may 


'Compare  with  portrnyal  of  mountains  nnd  adjoining  marah  on  the  "("liuckche 
Y«;ir  record,"  iu  plate  81,  at  lig.'26. 


[ot/ebue  Sound. 
18  of  an  inch  in 
jlislied  down  at 
>r  produce  slight 
It  represents  a 
ug  sliown  at  the 
is  accomi)anied 
re  separated  by 
At  the  extreme 
intelligently  un- 
[.    The  hunter  is 
f^nlar  circle  con- 
lis  represents  a 
ached  to  impede 
)ted  with  great 
1  a  native  draw- 
i  flock  of  geese, 
lifelike  attitude, 
en  of  ivory,  also 
under  surface  is 
nie  left  are  five 
i  the  otter.     To 
aration  between 
incii,  or  perhaps 
ith  the  rimmed 
nipanion,  whose 
f  this  individual 
continuous  line, 
ing  columns  of 
y  indicathms  of 
d  are  two  cone- 
is  a  semicircle 
a  conventional 
sides.     The  sig- 
onntain  regions 
aying  an  abun- 
dopted  by  many 
the  OJibwa  and 
ures  to  the  right 
1  the  mountaiii 
in  a  wolf  skin, 
act  of  a  shauujn 
cting  something 
ants;  or  it  may 


on  the  "(.'hnckche 


Report  of  U.  S.  National  Museum,  1895.— Hoffma 


Plate  68. 


8 


CO 
Q 

O 

> 

IT 

o 
> 

z 
o 

05 

Q 
q: 
O 
O 
u 

cc 


>h  i 


!^ 


1      yu 


I 


1 


GRAPHIC  ART  OF  THE  ESKIMOS. 


879 


signify  that  in  this  disguise  he  was  enabled  to  approach  walruses  and 
shoot  them.  This  method  of  disguise  was  practiced  by  some  of  the 
prairie  tribes  of  Indians  west  i-f  the  Mississippi  Hiver.  Many  shy  ani 
nials  may  tlius  be  approached  to  within  shooting  distance,  while  the 
liuman  form  would  at  once  alarm  them  and  cause  them  to  escape. 
Three  walruses  are  drawn  npon  the  record,  and  as  their  heads  are 
placed  in  the  diretition  of  the  human  figure,  it  is  believed  that  this  is 
intended  to  denote  their  capture  by  the  hunter,  this  practice  being 
very  common.  On  the  contrary,  had  they  not  been  secured,  their  heads 
would  have  been  placed  in  an  opposite  direction.  At  the  extreme  right 
are  six  bear  skins  upon  the  ground,  in  an  upright  i)osition,  very  much 
resembling  the  conventionalized  ligures  of  skins  shown  in  plate  2l*, 

tig.  '". 

On  the  opposite  side  or  upper  curve  of  the  bow  is  a  very  rare  char- 
acter; in  fact,  the  only  instance obs<Mved  in  the  entire  collection  in  the 
possession  of  the  Xational  Museum  in  which  the  pudendum  is  indicated. 

This  character  was  referred  to  in  conversation  with  Mr.  Murdoch, 
who  questioned  the  writer  with  reference  to  its  occurrence  in  picto- 
grai)hs  from  Point  Barrow.  At  fciie  time  of  the  conversation  the 
engraving  had  not  yet  been  observed.  The  creature  immediately  to 
the  right  of  this  is  a  walrus  which  has  been  harpooned,  as  th'>  projecting 
weapon  illustrates,  and  through  it  is  the  tiying  harpoon  line  connecting 
it  with  the  hunter  in  the  bow  of  a  fine  large  umiak  occupied  by  seven 
hunters.  The  next  character  is  an  umiak  hurrying  to  the  right  in 
pursuit  of  a  whale,  the  harpoon  having  been  thrown  forward  and 
apparently  into  the  animal.  The  next  figure  is  that  of  a  human  being 
with  one  hand  to  his  head  and  the  other  to  his  groin,  the  sharply  incised 
line  extending  downward  from  the  middle  of  the  abdomen.  The  sig- 
nification of  this  is  not  clear.  Further  toward  the  right  are  the  out- 
lines of  two  kaiaks,  the  shapes  of  whidi  are  very  graceful,  while  only 
one  shows  the  presence  of  a  hunter,  the  other  being  incomplete.  The 
record  is  concluded  upon  this  side  of  the  bow  by  the  figures  of  two 
walruses. 

Upon  one  side  are  a  number  of  walruses  and  otlicr  animals,  wliile 
near  the  left  is  the  portrayal  of  a  wlnile,  to  which  the  harpoon  line  and 
float  seems  attached.  Some  short  figures  are  introduced  to  fill  up  the 
s[»ace.  On  the  remaining  side  we  have  at  the  extreme  left  a  seiiu;  net, 
to  the  right  of  which  are  several  animals  not  identifiable  with  certainty, 
as  the  engravings  are  very  crude  on  this  record.  A  number  of  wal- 
ruses, a  whale,  and  a  man  in  a  kaiak  o(!CUpy  the  greater  portion  of  the 
remaining  part  of  the  record,  while  a  single  triangular  habitation  is 
shown,  together  with  *wu crudely  drawn  figures  of  wolves. 

Plate  21,  tig.  1,  sliows  a  drill  bow  from  Cape  Darby,  wliere  it  was 
collecti'd  by  ^fr.  E.  W.  Nelson.  It  is  of  ivory,  and  measures  Vih  inclies 
ill  length.  It  is  a  hunting  record,  the  story  beginning  at  the  right 
iiaiul.     The  hunter  is  shown  with  gun  raiseU,  directed  toward  a  herd  of 


m  ,i 


i 

u 

11 


i  a 


'mn 


880 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


'Mr- 


reindeer.  Above  fourteen  of  these  animals  will  be  observed  black  spots 
denoting  bullets,  and  indicating  that  that  number  of  animals  Mere  shot 
The  remaining  five  have  no  such  marks,  which  indicates  that  that  num- 
ber were  with  the  herd,  but  were  not  secured.  The  peculiarity  of  this 
uni([ue  record  is  the  indication  of  the  bullets,  each  denoting  capture 
of  the  game,  whereas  in  most  other  records  from  the  same  region  the 
indication  of  the  capture  of  game  consists  in  the  heads  of  the  animals 
being  turned  toward  the  hunter;  those  animals  seen  and  not  captured 
being  turned  in  an  opposite  direction. 

By  reversing  the  bow  so  as  to  bring  to  proper  view  the  small  figures 
at  the  left-hand  upper  corner,  the  reader  will  perceive  at  the  left  an 
elevated  storehouse,  to  the  right  of  which  is  a  small  mound  represent- 
ing a  winter  habitation,  while  next  to  the  right  of  this  is  another  struc- 
ture of  similar  character.  The  main  figure  portrayed  has  a  thin  line 
extending  from  himself  to  one  of  the  reindeer  of  the  preceding  group, 
indicating  that  another  hunter  captured  it  by  means  of  a  lasso  or  rope. 

On  the  under  side  of  the  bow  is  a  seal-hunting  scene.  At  the  left 
are  five  kaiaks,  four  of  the  hunters  being  represented  with  the  paddle 


JE58^L_jrfL 


^■^ 


■fr^  ^m- ^-m- 


n. 


i4;l! 


U\  'i'. 


"i 


^^^  ^^% 


^m  >Ti^'¥A^r^ 


10 


a 


12        i:!       14 


15 


16 


17  18 


19 


20 


21 


iMj:.  101. 

RECORD  (IF  IirNT.     ALASKA. 

uplifted  horizontally  to  indicate  the  i)resence  of  game  and  to  call  the 
attention  of  other  hunters  lO  the  animals.  To  the  right  of  the  fifth 
boat  is  a  fish.  The  next  character  represents  a  kaiak,  the  occupant  of 
which  also  holds  his  paddle  horizontally  above  him,  as  he  is  approach- 
ing two  seals,  and  indicates  to  the  occipants  of  the  umiak  to  approach 
and  capture  them.  One  of  the  liunterB  in  the  umiak  is  portrayed  M'ith 
a  gun.    The  figure  at  tlie  extreme  right  represents  a  fish. 

On  the  edge  of  this  drill  bow  is  a  series  of  figures  ap])arently 
intended  to  fiP  up  the  space.  The  twelve  beginning  at  the  left  repre- 
sent seals  facing  the  right.  Then  come  five  larger  animals  facing  the 
left,  all  of  these  apparently  half  in  water,  their  projecting  heads  and 
bodies  very  much  resembling  some  characters  used  for  the  portrayal  of 
water  fowl.  The  next  character,  which  is  T-shaped,  is  a  conventional- 
ized whale  tail.  The  next  character  to  the  right  is  not  sufficiently 
clear  to  admit  of  certain  identification,  but  the  next  four  represent 
deer.  Beyond  the  vertical  bar  are  sixteen  rudely  executed  figures  of 
seals. 

Fig.  101  is  a  record  of  a  hunting  expedition,  reproduced  from  an  ivory 
drill  bow  in  the  collection  of  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company,  San 


GRAPHIC    ART    OF    THE    ESKIMOS. 


881 


l<>an('isco,  Calitornia.    The  uniiiials  secured  ])y  the  hunter  are  shown, 
as  well  as  those  observed  by  him  during  the  trip,  but  not  secured. 

Nos.  1  and  2  represent  deer;  Xo.  -i  is  the  outline  of  a  porcupine,  next 
to  which  is  the  habitation  of  the  hunter,  No.  4.  Smoke  is  seen  issuing 
from  the  roof  of  the  hut,  while  at  the  door  is  the  hunter's  wife  with  a 
vessel.  No.  5.  At  No.  «5  is  the  outline  of  the  hunter  himself  in  the  atti- 
tude of  shooting  an  arrow,  thus  indicating  the  weapon  used  by  him. 
Nos.  7,  8,  and  9  are  beavers;  Nos.  10,  11,  12,  13,  and  14  are  martens; 
No.  ir»  is  a  vessel,  according  to  the  interpretation  given  by  Naomoff, 
although  there  are  no  specific  characters  to  identify  it  ditterent  fiom 


21 


r\^.  102. 

IIUNTINO  SroBF.  ENOnAVKD  ON  IVOKY.     (AFTKH  MfniiOPK.) 

the  preceding;  No.  16  is  a  land  otter;  No.  17  re[)rcsents  a  bear,  while 
No.  18  is  a  fox;  No.  10  is  a  walrus,  the  tusks  being  perceptible  at  the 
left  side;  No.  20  is  a  seal,  while  No.  21  represetits  a  wolf. 

As  above  remarked,  the  animals  are  all  indicated;  those  with  the 
heads  turned  toward  the  hunter  were  secjured,  while  those  with  the 
head  turned  away  from  him  were  observed,  but  not  secured. 

The  story  told  by  the  pictograph,  together  with  the  text  in  the 
Kiate^aniut  dialect  of  the  fnnuit  language,  is  as  follows: 

Ilui'nuna'gra  hui'puqtu'a   picu'qulu'a  mus'tpdi'qnut.  pamu'qtulit' 

1  (t'roiii)  iiiy  place  1  wont  liiiiitiiiK  (for)  skinn.  MiirtoiiH 

(settlement) 

NAT  MIS  Of) 5(» 


882 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


taqi'nir*n,      ami'daduk'      a^laluk',      a'quia'mttk      piqu'a     a^laluk'; 

Ave,  wcuHul  one,  liiml  ottor  I'might  one: 

kuquMu'liuiiumuk'    a^laluk',    tun^liiinnk    tiVguqli'ugu'   inclu'ganuk', 

wolf  one,  (leer  (I)  killed  two, 

pe'luk     pinalMinnk,      nu'nuk      pit'quni',      maklak'mnk      pit'quiii', 

heiiver  throe  por('ii|)ine       (I)  cniiKht  none.  Heal  (I)  caught  none, 

atshi'auamuk'       pit'quni',      iiaqi'lamuk'       pit'quni',       tagu'^amuk' 

wulruH  (I)  cauglit  none,  fox  (I)  caught  none,  bear 

pit'quni'. 

(I)  canght  none. 

In  tlie  collection  from  Toint  liarrow  is  one  example,  of  which  an 
illustration  is  here  reproduced  in  lig.  102.  It  is  a  piece  of  the  ed^ie  of 
an  old  snow  shovel,  and  measures  4.2  inches  long,  with  a  loop  of  thong 
at  the  upper  edge  to  admit  of  suspension.  It  is  covered  on  both  sides 
with  freshly  incised  figures,  colored  with  red  ocher,  and  is  described 
by  Mr.  Murdoch  as  follows:' 

The  obverse  ia  horderefl  with  a  single  narrow  line.  At  tlio  left  is  a  man  staiKliny 
witli  arms  ontstretehed,  sujiporting  himself  by  two  slender  staft's  as  long  as  he  is. 
In  the  middle  are  three  rtide  (ignres  of  tents,  very  high  and  slender.  At  the  right 
is  a  hornless  reindeer  heading  to  the  left,  with  a  man  standing  on  its  back  with 


Fig.  ion. 

HUNTmO  SCORE  ENORAVED  ON   IVORY.      I'OINT  BARUOW.      (AFTER  .MnR',)OfH.> 

his  legs  straddled  apart  and  his  arms  nplifted.     On  the  reverse  there  is  no  bordt^r, 
but  a  single  dog  and  a  man  who  supports  himself  with  a  long  stall'  are  dragging  an 
empty  rail  sledge  toward  the  left. 
I  find  no  mention  of  the  nse  of  any  such  scores  among  the  eastern  Eskimo.     *     *     * 

The  engraving  represented  in  fig.  lO.'i  is  from  a  Hat  luece  of  the  out- 
side of  a  walrus  tusk  9.7  inches  long  and  1.8  wide  at  the  brojider  end. 
The  engravings  are  very  crude,  when  compared  with  some  of  the  work 
irom  the  west  coast  of  Alaska.  The  specimen  is  one  of  the  four  pieces 
brought  back  from  Point  Barrow  1)y  Mr.  Murdoch,  and  the  foHowing  is 
his  description.^ 

The  (ignres  are  incised  on  one  facie  only  and  colored  with  red  oilier.  The  facc^  is 
divided  lengthwise  into  two  panels  by  a  horizontal  line.  In  tlie  upper  panel,  at  the 
left,  is  a  man  facing  to  the  right  ami  i)ointing  a  gun  at  a  line  of  three?  standing  deer, 
facing  toward  the  left.  Two  are  bucks  and  one  a  doe.  Then  <'()me  two  bucks,  rc)»- 
resented  without  legs,  as  if  swinniiing  in  the  water,  followed  by  a  rude  iigure  of  a 
man  in  ii  kaiak.  Below  the  line  at  tlie  left  is  an  umiak  with  (i\e  men  and  then 
a  I'ow  of  twelve  conventionalized  whales'  tails,  of  which  all  but  the  tirst,  second, 
and  fifth  are  joined  to  the  horizontal  line  by  a  short  straight  lino.  The  record  may 
lie  freely  translated  as  follows:  "I  went  out  with  my  gun  and  killed  three  largo 

'Ninth  Amraal  Keport  of  the  Hnrenu  of  Ethnology,  l«87-88,  IX'Jl',  pp.  363,  364,  tig  %3. 
"Idem,  p.  362,  363. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


883 


rtimloer,  two  luirkw,  ami  u  doc.  I  also  Mpcarod  two  largo  biukH  in  tbc  wat<'r.  My 
wlialing  crow  have  taken  ten  whales."  The  uumber  of  whales  is  open  to  .suspicion, 
as  they  just  till  up  the  board. 

Ill  the  above  description  the  author  does  not  state,  as  he  has<loiie  in 
another  instance,  that  the  interpretation  was  ohtaine<l  from  tlie  nativ^e 
owner,  and  it  may  therefore  be  assumed  that  he  ventures  the  interpre- 
tation liimsell'.  The  statement  at  first  that  the  animals  were  deer  and 
hiter  on  reindeer  is  confusing  in  the  attempt  to  <lifferentiate  betveeen 
the  objective  portrayal  by  the  natives  of  tho  two  species  of  animals. 
It  is  evident  that  the  reindeer  is  intended,  because  of  the  unusually 
long,  narrow  antlers  and  their  forward  direction  in  their  position  upon 
the  head.  It  is  unfortunate  that  no  other  pictograi»hs  from  Point  liar- 
row  are  at  hand,  in  ()rder  that  satisfactory  comparison  with  other  rep- 
resentations of  deer  and  reindeer  might  be  made  so  as  to  make  note  of  the 
specific  ditterences,  as  we  find  so  elaborately  portrayed  in  the  records 
from  Sledge  Ishiinl,  Norton  8ound,  and  elsewhere. 

The  reference  to  a  femal  animal  is  perhaps  a  random  one,  because 
the  natives  of  Alaska,  as  well  as  the  aborigines  of  North  America 
generally,  are  too  cautious  and  matter  of  fact  to  portray  that  which 
tliey  do  not  intend.  The  horns  upon  the  third  animal — the  doe(  ?) — are 
too  strikingly  like  those  upon  the  two  preceding  specimens  to  denote 
anything  different  from  them  in  sex. 

The  statement  that  "the  number  of  whales  is  open  to  suspicion"  is 
worth  noting,  as  fre(iuently  a  large  number  of  anything  is  denoted  by 
an  indefinite  number  of  conventional  indications  of  such  objects. 
Various  examples  are  given  in  which  smih  large  numbers  have  been 
engraved  with  an  ornanumtal  or  decorative  motive,  leading  one  to  sus- 
pect the  true  import  intended  by  the  re(;order.  A  common  example  is 
found  in  the  ordinary  "war  bonnet"  of  eagle  i>lumes.  worn  by  several 
of  the  so-called  Prairie  tribes  of  Indians.  The  single  feather  is  gained 
by  a  warrior  when  he  eithe;-  kills  an  enemy  or  is  one  of  the  first  four  to 
reach  and  toiicli  the  fallen  enemy  with  the  cou])  stick,  a  bow,  or  any 
other  object.  Tlieact  of  being  able  to  rea*'h  the  enemy  in  such  manner 
is  deemed  by  the  Indian  to  denote  that  he  is  nearer  and  more  in  danger 
than  the  one  who  may  have  fired  the  fatal  shot.  After  a  number  of 
jdumes  have  been  thus  gained  by  a  warrior,  each  to  indicate  an  exi)loit 
of  valor,  the  number  becomes  inconvenient  for  attachment  to  the  scalp 
lock  and  the  long  plumed  bonnet  is  permitted,  provided  the  one  so 
entitled  thereto  is  able  to  purchase  siU'Ji  a  decoration,  the  present  value 
of  eagle  plumes  varying  from  $1  to  $li  each. 

In  similar  manner  an  indefinite  number  of  items,  to  denote  many,  is 
often  portrayed  in  pictorial  records  of  various  rudely  remote  i)eoples; 
and  it  is  probable  that  the  above  is  only  another  instance,  of  which 
others  are  noted  in  the  present  paper. 


'?'w  '' 


h 


:fi 


1- 


<   !! 


884 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


HUNTING  AND  FISHING. 


The  chara<5tera  in  plato  09,  ti{?.  3,  at  Nos.  1,  2,  aud  3,  denote  wbalen, 
wbile  at  Nos.  4, 5,  «>,  and  7  are  indicated  four  American  whaling  ships. 
The  one  at  No.  7  i.s  placed  in  a  foreshortened  position,  something  sel- 
don«  expected  to  be  so  reproduced  by  primitive  peoples. 

No.  8  appears  to  be  an  ice  pan,  at  the  base  of  which  two  men  seem  to 
be  in  the  water  with  hands  uplifted  to  attract  attention;  while  No.  9  is 
a  seal  flsher  hastening  forward.  The  harpoon  is  seen  resting  upon  the 
rack  upon  the  fore  i)art  of  the  canoe,  as  is  also  perceptible  in  No.  10. 
The  large  bodies  behind  the  occupants  of  the  boat  are  lloats  used  to 
retard  the  swimming  and  escape  of  harpooned  seals. 

Tho  iiiunuer  of  huntinjr  sea  otter  is  as  foll«iWH:  In  Alaska  the  Aleuts  or  otlioi' 
niitiv<;s  :ir<3  tlio  ottur  hunters.  A  larg<«  niunbor  of  Lidarkas  take  provisions  for  a 
day  or  two,  and  when  the  weather  is  calm,  put  out,  often  out  of  sight  of  land.  When 
arrived  on  the  banks  most  frequented  by  these  animals,  the  bidarkas  form  a  long 
line,  the  leader  in  thu  middle.  They  paddle  softly  over  the  water  so  as  to  make  no 
disturbance.  If  any  Aleut  sees  an  otter's  nose,  which  is  usually  the  only  part  above 
tho  surface,  he  throws  his  dart  and  at  the  same  time  elevates  his  ]>addle  iierpendicu- 
larly  in  the  air.  The  ends  of  tho  liiui  dart  forward,  so  as  to  en<ircle  tho  animal  in  a 
cordon  of  ))idarkas,  aud  everyone  is  on  the  watch  for  tho  second  appearance  of  tho 
otter.  The  same  )>rocess  is  repeated  until  tlie  animal,  worn  out  with  diving,  lies 
exhausted  on  the  surface,  an  easy  prize  for  Iuh  captors.  The  skin  belongs  to  tho 
hunter  who  first  struck  it,  or  to  him  who  struck  nearest  tho  head.' 

Plate  09,  fig.  2.  Capture  of  polar  bear  |  ?1.  The  signilication  of  tl  e 
illustratiou  is  that  a  bear  was  observed  eating  a  seal,  wlien  the  natives 
of  the  village  at  No.  9  went  forward  in  the  canoes,  Nos.  5  and  0,  when 
one  of  the  bravest  made  the  attack  with  a  spear.  The  seal  is  indicated 
at  No.  1. 

The  figure  at  No.  4  is  not  explained;  while  at  No.  8  a  canoe  is  still 
resting  upon  the  scaftbld  drying. 

In  plate  09,  lig.  1,  is  a  record  of  a  whale  and  seal  hunt.  No.  1  is  a 
seal  which  has  been  <!aptured  by  the  two  hunters,  Nos.  2  aud  3,  aud  is 
being  dragged  to  shore  for  return  home.  Tlie  hunter  is  carrying  his 
seal  lance  before  him  like  a  staff,  while  No.  3  is  carrying  his  at  a  charge. 
Nos.  4,  5,  aud  0  are  baidarkas  with  the  oarsmen  within,  the  foremost 
individual  in  No.  0  having  hari)ooned  a  whale,  which  is  heading  away, 
spouting.  The  object  between  the  boats,  Nos.  5  and  0,  is  a  seal  diving- 
out  of  harm's  way.  The  hunter  at  No.  8  has  caught  a  seal.  No.  10,  and 
on  the  line  is  a  small  disk  which  denotes  the  float  used.  In  some  picto- 
graphs  the  disk  represents  the  opening  in  the  ice,  through  which  the 
line  is  dropped,  altliough  this  may  be  in  the  air  and  lesemble  a  float. 

No.  11  is  indefinite,  while  Nos.  12  and  13  denote  the  summer  or  tem- 
porary habitJitions,  erected  for  r  short  sojourn  only,  until  the  meat 
has  been  secured  which  is  being  placed  upon  the  rack.  No.  14,  by  the 
person  shown  at  the  left  end,  in  that  employment. 


'  Dall,  Alaska  aud  its  Kesources,  i)p.  490, 491. 


k,^ 


nrbales, 
;  8hip8. 
11  g  sel- 

jecin  to 
No.  9  is 
ion  the 
No.  10. 
ised  to 

or  other 
U8  fur  a 
.  When 
n  u  lou^ 
mako  no 
rt  uhove 
>endicu- 
nial  in  a 
e  of  tlio 
iu^,  ]iu8 
',H  to  the 

of  tl  (i 

ijitives 
,  when 
Licated 

is  still 

.  1  is  a 
aud  is 
lug  his 
hargo. 
remost 
away, 
diving- 
iO,  aud 
)  picto- 
di  the 
loat. 
>r  tem- 
!  meat 
by  the 


V 


WirtJ-. 


Report  of  U.  S.  NttiontI  MuMum,  189S,— Hoffman, 


itrmatwarM  "^  mi^nSht  ■fc.Jl.llirff  il  fiiOCn^ftA'    iL.rtilJlilMl!^  ^- 


1  8  3 


:2i 


1  8 


>  4P<'C  ^^^f^^^tmA^r 


liMQi 


JtiBK 


Records  on  Ivoi 


Plate  69. 


17  tt 


iiagCfcM&K  ^ c>-^miTii^rCTXlm^A\>J''--^  iin/lli/IIIIIIIIJIIIIliiiimm.m.        , 


7  6  0  10  U  la      18  14 

1 


16 


>^^rf*HiM  -rihtfintf-    1l^-t^ 


7  8  9 


Vl 


i^--4tdBjar  ->AaA   ^^»»4r^  HtAy^.ja^.^ 


8  9 


10 


11 


12 


18 


14 


Records  on  Ivory  Rods. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


4^ 


^ 


1.0    Ir:  i^  II 


I.I 


t  1^ 


2.5 

M 
2.0 


1.8 


1.25  ||,.4    |,.6 

-^ 6"     

► 

V] 


v) 


/ 


/^ 


'/ 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


33  WIST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  U5S0 

(716)873-4503 


<\^^ 


iV 


•sj 


:\ 


\ 


^ 


^ 


"i^^ 


a  i- 


I  ^  11 


BRBBsmm 


l>At3,Uii!C 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


885 


n] 


Tho  vertical  Htrokcs  continuing  beyond  this  to  the  end  oi'  the  record 
are  simply  ornamental,  the  s]>ace  being  deemed  too  small  for  further 
records. 

At  Nos.  16  and  17  are  two  baidarkas  to  indicate  that  the  seal  was 
captured  while  on  a  hunt  by  boat. 

The  .accompanying  illustration,  in  plate  (>9,  fig.  4,  represents  a  Heet 
of  canoes  the  natives  having  gone  on  a  liunt,  although  the  leading 
umiak  only  is  shown  to  be  engaged  in  harpooning  a  whale,  No.  7,  which, 
<|uite  unusually,  is  portrayed  with  the  tail  projecting  from  the  water. 
The  animal  in  front  of  it  is  a  seal.  The  No.  9  character  dentttes  a 
se<al  diving  out  of  the  way.  One  of  the  men  in  No.  12  boat  is  making 
a  signal  of  surprise  to  the  boatmen  behind,  as  he  has  observed  the 
whale  in  sight  and  has  thus  given  the  alarm  as  well. 

No.  1  seems  to  have  been  intended  for  a  specific  character,  but  may 
have  remained  unfinished,  merely  touching  up  the  right-hand  end  so  as 
to  be  ornamental.  The  two  figures  in  Nos.  2  and  3  indicate  wolves, 
the  number  captured  by  the  party  in  *'ie  baidarka,  No.  4,  No.  5  is  a 
whaler  observed  by  the  hunters. 


Fig.  104. 
HIVAL  WHALK  HUNTERS. 

An  illustration  of  rivalry  in  hunting  the  whale  is  given  in  fig.  104, 
but  the  sequel  does  not  appear.  The  two  boats  were  pursuing  the  same 
animal,  which  is  shown  spouting,  and  the  harpoon  throwers  are  in  the 
attitude  of  casting  their  weapons  at  the  same  instant. 

The  etching  is  strongly  and  artistically  executed. 

Plate  64,  fig.  2,  represents  a  very  old  ivory  bow  drill  from  the  l)io- 
mede  Islands.  The  specimen  is  actually  brown  with  age  and  bears 
incisions  upon  four  sides.  The  surface  shown  in  the  illustration  bears 
at  the  left  a  large  umiak  in  which  are  four  hunters,  the  one  in  the  bow 
being  represented  as  throwing  a  harpoon  toward  an  approaching 
whale.  Beyond  this  figure  is  a  hunter  in  his  kaiak  who  has  thrown 
his  harpoon  at  a  whale,  the  latter  being  represented  with  the  head  pro- 
jecting vertically  from  the  water.  The  short  irregular  character  in  the 
stern  of  the  kaiak  represents  the  inflated  seal-skin  fioat.  Two  (»ther 
whales  in  this  upright  position  are  shown  to  the  riglit  of  the  above 
mentioned,  and  they  are  approached  from  the  right  l)y  two  hunters  in 
a  large  umiak,  the  one  in  the  bow  being  also  represented  as  having 
cast  a  harpoon,  the  line  extending  from  his  hands  to  the  animal.  At 
the  extreme  right  is  a  hunter  in  his  kaiak.  Upon  the  opposite  side  of 
the  specimen,  beginning  at  the  left,  is  a  walrus  being  dragged  forward 
by  four  men.  To  the  right  of  this  group  are  shown  four  kaiaks  each 
with  its  hunters,  and  each  hunter  having  his  harpoon  elevated  horizon- 
tally above  his  head  as  in  the  act  of  throwing.    Behind  the  hunters 


886 


REPORT   OF  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


i^  »■ 


:,i:^ 


1 1^' 


i  it 


are  represented  the  ii»ua1  figures  of  the  inflated  seal  skins  used  in 
connection  with  the  harjioon  line.  Three  large  figures  of  walruses 
are  next  sliown,  upon  the  bsusk  of  the  first  being  portrayed  a  young 
one.  At  the  right  of  the  upright  walrus  is  an  umiak  containing  f(nir 
hunters  wlio  are  traveling  toward  the  right  in  pursuit  of  a  whale, 
towards  which  the  hunter  in  the  bow  of  the  umiak  is  casting  his  har- 
poon. Upon  the  upper  narrow  edge  of  the  rod  are  a  number  of  small 
figures,  at  the  extreme  left  six  natives  being  shown,  each  with  one  arm 
elevated,  and  a  small  line  extending  from  the  hand  to  the  head,  very 
much  suggesting  the  use  of  the  pipe  as  in  the  act  of  smoking.  Three 
seals  are  next  drawn,  beyond  which  are  tw<t  kaiaks,  and  beyond  these 
the  figures  of  six  seals.  The  entire  series  of  characters  are  arranged 
with  such  apparent  regularity  as  to  suggest  more  of  an  attempt  at 
ornamental  decoration  than  the  ])ortrayal  of  any  experience  in  hunt- 
ing. The  narrow  face  opposite  to  this  bears  two  horizontal  parallel 
lines  within  which  are  a  number  of  narrow  cross  lines  and  two ci)cular 
indentations,  neither  of  which  appear  to  have  any  special  significance 
further  than  an  attempt  at  simple  ornamentation. 

Another  illustration  of  whale  and  seal  hunting  is  given  in  plate  70, 
fig.  1.  The  four  creatures  indicated  by  No.  1  are  seals,  toward  which 
the  native  in  the  canoe  is  paddling.  No.  2.  Above  him  is  a  small  cross 
denoting  a  bird  in  flight.  The  spouting  whale,  shown  in  No. .'{,  is  har- 
pooned by  the  man  in  the  bow  of  the  baidarka.  No.  4,  while  the  man 
behind  hinj  is  holding  aloft  his  catch — a  large  fish — while  with  his  right 
hand  he  is  also  calling  attention  by  the  gesture  of  surprise.  The  others 
in  the  boat  are  paddling  to  keep  up  with  the  whale. 

Nos.  5  and  0  appear  to  be  seals,  although  the  latter  resembles  more 
nearly  the  smaller  whales,  as  drawn  in  other  pictographs,  yet  this  can 
scarcely  be,  as  the  hunter.  No  7,  is  lying  upon  the  ground  and  resting 
his  gun  upon  a  ridge  or  rock,  in  the  attempt  to  shoot  the  animals. 

The  hunter  at  No.  8  is  stealthily  coming  up  to  No.  7,  carrying  a  gun 
or  lance. 

No.  0  denotes  three  seals,  while  No.  10  is  a  hunter  awaiting  tiieir 
approjich,  lie  lying  behind  a  small  heap  of  what,  by  its  remaining 
untouched  by  the  graver,  would  appear  to  be  ice. 

No.  11  is  a  boat  being  cariied  out  of  the  water,  a  whale.  No.  12.  hav- 
ing been  killed  and  ready  to  be  cut  up.  No.  l.'J  is  a  baidarka  containing 
some  returning  whales,  while  No.  14  is  a  seal,  the  hunter  taking  it  to 
his  habitation  at  No.  15,  the  interior  view  being  disclosed,  showing 
within  two  of  the  hunter's  family,  one  seated  upon  the  floor  while  the 
other  is  addressing  some  words  to  him,  or  her,  as  denoted  by  the  atti- 
tude of  the  hands.  Another  permanent  dwelling  is  indicated  at  No. 
1(),  the  smoke  rising  out  of  the  smoke  hole,  while  the  owner  is  at  the 
side  entering  into  conversation  with  the  others  because  of  the  return 
of  the  lucky  hunter. 

The  accompanying  fig.  105  is  interesting  because  two  ditt'erent  pur- 


GBAPHIC   ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


887 


suits  are  representeil,  one  hniug  interrupted  in  order  to  prosccate 
another.  Tlie  natives  liad  gone  out  in  their  baidarkaH  to  lish,  as  indi- 
cated by  tlie  middle  figure  of  No.  2  group  holding  up  two  fish  which 
had  been  caught,  and  the  nutn  No.  4  also  liaving  a  hu-ge  salmon  (f) 
attached  to  a  pole.  A  whale  was  observed  siMiuting,  No.  1,  when  the 
boatmen  started  after  him,  the  foremost  one  darting  his  harpoon  into 
(be  animal  while  the  one  on  the  stern  began  to  make  signals,  calling  to 
his  companions  tliat  there  was  game  in  sight.  The  signal  is  the  com- 
mon one  of  holding  aloft,  iiorizon tally,  an  oar  so  that  it  may  be  seen  by 
tlioso  toward  whom  it  is  held  and  intended  to  be  seen.  The  signal  was 
observed,  as  we  perceive  in  No.  li  the  three  men  pushing  into  the  water 
the  baidarka,  lying  on  its  side,  the  middle  man  holding  the  harpoon 
while  the  one  at  the  right  is  pushing  at  the  vessel.  No.  4,  as  already 
stated,  has  a  fish  attached  to  a  i)ole;  No.  5  is  making  gestures,  also 
calling  to  others  to  come,  while  No.  6  is  seen  walking  toward  the  shore 
with  a  rod,  probably  intended  for  an  oar. 

The  three  small  crosses  in  a  horizontal  line  above  No.  3  denote  birds 
flying  in  air. 

Plate  00,  lig.  I,  consists  of  a  sliort  ivory  handle  for  carrying  a  kantag 
or  bucket.    It  is  a  very  old,  yellowish-brown  piece  of  ivory,  and  was 


tfJ^^^X^I^ 


Fi>;.  1(15. 
WIIA).E  UUM. 


obtained  at  Hi.  Michaels.  The  engraving  is  charai'teristic  of  the  locality, 
being  deep  and  boldly  cut.  Upon  the  upper  surface  siiown  in  tig.  1 
appears  an  umiak  with  four  hunters,  the  one  in  the  bow  preparing  to 
throw  his  harpoon  toward  a  whale.  In  front  of  the  latter  is  another 
iimiak,  the  man  in  the  bow  of  which  is  also  throwing  his  harpoon  to  a 
whale,  while  in  front  of  the  latter  is  a  projecting  fluke,  indicating  an 
animal  of  similar  species  descending  into  the  water,  while  to  the  right 
is  an  umiak,  theoc(!upant  of  which  is  endeavoring  to  throw  his  harpoon 
into  the  whale  just  referred  to.  At  the  extreme  right  is  another  umiak 
with  four  men,  the  one  in  the  l)ow  also  harpooning  a  whale.  The  head 
of  the  latter  is  drawn  very  much  in  imitation  of  a  tuskless  walrus,  and 
might  be  mistaken  for  that  animal,  or  a  seal,  but  for  the  spray  of  water 
which  is  represented  as  being  thrown  from  the  blow  holes.  Turning 
the  handle  around,  we  perceive  advancing  from  the  right  two  umiaks  with 
masts  erect,  upon  which  are  several  indefinite  figures.  A  little  farther 
on,  however,  is  shown  a  whale  to  which  a  line  is  attached,  indicating 
that  he  has  been  harpooned,  while  the  shapeless  figure  referred  to  may 
possibly  indicate  the  inflated  skin  which  is  always  attached  to  impede 
progress  in  the  case  of  an  escaping  monster  of  this  kind.    The  curious 


sm 


888 


RKPORT    OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


1:; 


figure  a  Hliort  distance  above  the  whale  and  directly  opposite  to  tbe 
Huko  S])oken  of  in  the  record  above,  represents  an  island  with  its  ele- 
vated center  and  precipitous  sides.  Upon  the  other  side  of  the  top 
carving  tlie  drawings  are  a  little  more  delicate.  Two  of  the  most  con- 
spicuous characters  on  the  left  side  represent  seal  nets.  The  two 
umiaks  are  proceeding  in  the  direction  of  a  whale  which  appears  to 
have  been  harpooned,  as  at  the  end  of  a  long  thin  line  there  appears 
attached  the  usual  tioat.  The  figure  at  the  extreme  end  is  that  of  a 
seal,  while  the  one  to  the  left  of  it  may  be  another  animal  of  the  same 
species.  Between  the  latter  and  the  whale  is  a  very  small  and  very 
delicately  drawn  kaiak.  The  man  represented  has  a  i)addle,  while  a 
spear  projects  backward  and  upward  behind  him. 
\  On  the  under  surface  of  the  bow,  between  two  parallel  lines  but  a 
quarte'"  of  an  inch  apart,  are  about  twelve  characters  denoting  various 
animals  which  the  hunter  wishes  to  intimate  he  has  killed.  Some  of 
them  can  be  identified,  while  others  can  not,  the  drawing  being  rather 
crude. 

The  specimen  shown  in  plate  59,  fig.  2,  is  from  Cape  Prince  of  Wales, 
and  represents  a  variety  of  hunting  records.  Beginning  at  the  left 
hand  along  the  lower  edge  is  visible  a  very  crudely  carved  figure  of  a 
native  with  a  spear,  following  two  bears.  To  the  right  is  a  native 
kneeling,  preparing  to  shoot.  The  next  four  figures  represent  umiaks 
loaded  with  native  hunters  going  to  sea.  These  are  followed  by  the 
figure  of  a  whale  which  is  being  harpooned  by  the  hunter  in  the  bow  of 
an  umiak  immediately  to  the  right.  The  next  figure  is  that  of  a  dog, 
and  the  next  a  native  who  has  hold  of  a  thong  by  whicii  he  is  leading 
another  dog.  Then  we  observe  a  hunter  dragging  a  seal,  while  a  short 
distance  above  this  are  small  crosses  representing  birds.  The  next  is 
a  walrus,  to  the  right  of  which"  is  a  dog  dragging  a  sledge  upon  which 
is  seated  the  owner.  Turning  the  bow  around,  we  perceive  at  the  left 
four  >-shaped  figures,  indicating  the  end  of  both  records.  The  first 
figure  i)rojectiug  from  the  base  line  is  a  whale's  fiuke,  then  several 
small  figures  to  represent  walruses,  then  two  men  arc  observed  grasping 
hands,  with  apparently  a  spear  between  them.  A  large  umiak  is  shown 
in  front  of  another  walrus,  two  of  the  hunters  in  which  have  raised 
their  spears  to  cast  toward  some  walruses  lying  upon  a  fioating  cake 
of  ice.  To  the  right  of  these  animals  is  represented  a  seal  being 
dragged  by  three  hunters.  These  are  preceded  by  another  group  of 
three,  who  are  also  dragging  home  a  seal.  A  single  native  is  next 
shown,  with  a  line  directed  to  a  spot  near  the  base  line,  which  denotes 
a  seaFs  head.  The.  large  fin-like  character  represents  a  fiuke,  as  in  the 
first  figure  of  this  record.  An  umiak  is  then  shown,  one  of  the  natives 
in  which  is  in  the  act  of  harpooning  a  whale,  while  a  native  in  one  of 
the  other  umiaks  has  also  a  line  attached  to  him.  The  record  is  con 
eluded  by  aitother  umiak  containing  four  men  pursuing  a  walrus. 
Upon  the  under  side  are  a  number  of  illustrations  of  hunters,  some 


GRAPHIC    ART   OP    THE   ESKIMOS. 


889 


harpooning  walruses,  while  others  appear  to  be  after  some  reindeer 
who  liave  taken  to  the  water.  Along  the  narrow  t'dges  are  also  repre- 
sentations of  various  objects,  one  side  being  tilled  more  than  half  of 
its  length  by  a  procession  of  dog  sledges,  the  remainder  being  filled 
with  sealers  upon  ice  does,  a  whale,  and  some  boatmen.  The  other 
edge  represents  some  very  deei>ly  incised  and  grai)hic  outlines  of  boats 
and  marine  hunters,  the  record  terminating  at  om;  end  with  some  Hying 
birds,  while  at  the  other  two  indiv  iduals  dragging  a  seal  are  shown. 

I'late  22,  Ag.  5,  is  a  dril!  bow  from  Kot/cbue  Sound.  The  sjiecimeu 
measures  H5^  inches  in  length.  A  se(;tional  view  of  the  specimen  is 
lozenge  shaped,  so  that  there  are  both  above  an<l  below  two  fsices  upon 
which  records  are  engraved,  making  a  total  of  four  records.  As  repre- 
sented in  the  illustration,  the  record  upon  the  lower  side  consists  of 
seal  and  whale  hunting  scenes.  At  the  extreme  left  is  a  rude  outline 
of  an  umiak,  within  which  are  crude  representations  of  human  beings. 
The  vessel  is  very  close  upon  an  immense  whale,  which  is  evidently 
escaping  from  them  in  the  direction  of  another  umiak  which  appears 
to  be  approaching  it.  The  oblong  ligure  to  the  right  of  the  last  named 
umiak  is  an  inverted  boat  i»laced  upon  scafl'olding  for  the  purpose  of 
drying.  Some  partly  eroded  figures  are  seen  between  the  bow  of  the 
boat  and  three  men,  one  above  the  other,  who  are  portrayed  in  the  act 
of  dragging  home  an  immense  seal,  licyond  this  are  three  umiaks 
filled  with  hunters,  while  still  farther  to  the  right  are  two  or  three 
walruses  swimming  in  the  water.  To  the  right  of  the  last  namtMl  is  a 
figure  very  much  resembling  the  conventional  outline  of  a  wolf,  while 
beyond  that,  to  the  right,  is  a  low  elongated  structure,  heavily  etched, 
which  represents  a  winter  habitation.  Above  the  entrance  is  a  human 
figure,  with  arms  extended,  as  if  attracting  attention  to  something. 
Beyond  this  structure,  to  the  right,  is  a  very  delicately  engraved  scaf- 
fold, upon  which  food  or  other  similar  materials  are  placed  for  safety. 

Along  the  u[)per  surface  of  this  bow,  beginning  where  the  previous 
story  ended,  we  find  a  storehouse  erected  on  stilts  attached  to  the  ordi- 
nary winter  habitation,  upon  and  about  wliich  are  the  outlines  of  some 
human  beings.  A  food  rack  is  erected  above  the  entrance  to  this  habi- 
tation, from  the  horizontal  bar  of  which  are  suspended  objects  which 
are  probably  pieces  of  meat  or  fish,  as  the  occupaitts  appear  to  be  seal 
hunters,  two  of  them  being  rei)reseuted  in  the  act  of  dragging  home 
seals.  Just  to  the  right  of  this  is  a  grazing  deer  whose  legs  are 
unnaturally  long,  and  in  front  of  this  is  an  umiak  hohling  four  hunters. 
The  two  small  figures  to  the  right  of  the  last  named  are  seal  heads 
protruding  from  the  water.  Beyond  this  is  another  umiak  with  four 
hunters  whose  arms  are  in  various  attitudes  as  if  in  earnest  conversa- 
tion. The  small  mound  like  figure  at  the  bow  of  this  boat  represents 
the  shore,  and  immediately  to  the  right  are  shown  three  natives  drag- 
ging home  upon  its  back  a  huge  seal.  Beyond  this  animal  are  other 
hunters  similarly  engaged.    The  oblong  outline  somewhat  resembling 


890 


UEPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  189r. 


a  canoe  lying  on  its  side  can  not  be  deterniined.  To  thu  right  of  thi», 
however,  is  another  figure  of  a  seal  being  dragged  toward  tite  riglit, 
and  approaching  two  men  whose  arms  are  uplifted  as  if  in  joy  at 
receiving  aasistaiwe.  Tlie  partly  obliterated  figure  of  a  human  being 
is  seen  approaching  the  entrance  to  one  of  the  ordinary  winter  habita- 
tions, from  the  door  of  which,  as  well  as  from  the  middle  portion, 


▼  ^  ^r      PfciWn'^^  'iiiMm»«. 


Fig  l(i«. 

WIIAI.K  IIITNTERS. 

appear  two  vertical  sticks  with  small  figures  at  the  top,  both  repre- 
senting votive  oA'erings.  Th«'  scaflbld  at  the  right  represents  a  store- 
house used  for  food  or  grain. 

In  fig.  1(M)  is  presented  another  illustration  of  the  indication,  picto- 
rially,  of  what  the  hunter  desired,  or  saw,  and  how  nuich  thereof  he 
secured.  The  three  men  in  the  baidarka  are  headed  toward  two  whales, 
the  foremost  one  of  the  funncr,  lie  in  the  bow,  being  roi>resenti'd  in  the 
act  of  casting  a  harpoon,  the  dotted  line  indicating  the  counse.  The 
whale  struck  by  the  weapon  is  headed  toward  the  hunters,  indicating 
that  he  was  captured;  whereas  the  second  whale  is  going  in  the  con- 
trary direction,  denoting  that  he  had  been  observed  and  very  much 
wanted,  perhaps,  but  not  ca])tured.  The  short  projections  above  the 
heads  of  the  whales  denote  fins — and  seem  thus  to  specify  the  finback. 

The  cruciform  figures 
denote  flying  birds. 

A  peculiarly  inter- 
esting specimen  of  art 
is  illustrated  in  fig. 
107,  and  consists  of  a 
flat  piece  of  ivory,  4 
inches  long  and  1.2 
inches  wide,  roughly 
carved  and  covered 
with  incised  figures. 
The  specimen  is  made 
of  a  fragment  of  an 
old  snow- shovel  edge, 
is  perforated  at  one  end,  and  lias  attached  to  it  by  a  strand  of  sinew  a 
little  handle  formed  of  ivory,  and  represents  two  bowhead  whales  with 
the  heads  attached,  so  that  a  slight  stricture  results,  about  which  the 
cord  is  tied. 
The  spiracles  on  the  efhgies  are  incised  and  blackened. 
"Tlie  upper  edge  is  carved  into  five  distinct  heads — first,  a  rude 
bear's  head,  with  the  eyes  and  nostrils  incised  an<l  blackened  as  usual; 
then  four  human  heads,  with  a  face  on  each  side.  The  froiit  faces  have 
the  noses  and  brows  in  low  relief,  and  the  eyes,  nostrils,  and  mouths 


Fig.  107. 

IVORY  CARVINli  BEAKINfi  PICTCXIKAPHH,  POINT  IIAKROW. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


891 


inciHcd  and  blackened;  the  back  ouch  are  flat,  with  tlio  hiHt  throe 
features  indicated  as  betbrc.  At  the  end  is  a  rude  tignre  of  a  bear, 
heading  toward  the  right,  with  the  ears  in  relief,  the  eyes  and  nioutlk 
roughly  incised  and  blackened,  and  the  legs  indicated  by  roughly 
incised  an<l  blackened  lines  on  the  obverse  face.  Both  faces  are  cov- 
ered with  rmlely  incised  and  blackened  lines. 

''On  the  obverse  there  is  a  single  vertical  line  between  each  i)air  of 
heads,  lielow  the  bear's  head  is  a  bear  heading  toward  the  right; 
under  the  lirst  human  head,  an  umiak  with  four  men;  under  the  sec 
end,  a 'killei*  (Orca)  heading  toward  the  right;  under  tlie  third,  two 
of  the  usual  conventi(Uiali/ed  whales'  tails  suspended  from  a  cross  line; 
and  under  the  last,  a  'killer'  with  very  large  'Hukes'  heading  toward 
the  left. 

"On  the  reverse  there  are,  below  tho  bear,  a  bear  heading  toward 
tlie  right,  below  each  of  the  liuinan  heads  a  whale's  tail  with  the  tlukes 
up,  and  under  the  bear's  head  a  bear  heading  toward  the  right."'  This 
end  is  jjcrforated  as  befon^  stated. 

Fig.  108  represents  a  village  near  a  stream,  or  the  seashore.  Nos.  1 
and  3  are  habit.ations,  while  the  structure  at  No.  2  represents  a  store- 


.^L 


3 


io  rs  tn  n 


4  5 

Fijt.  !08. 

FI8IIIN0  NEAR  TIIIC  YILI.AOK. 


house,  a  box  like  rercptacle  built  upon  poles  within  which  to  store  food. 
Upon  the  cnti  ance  way  of  No.  i  is  seen  a  man  occupied  in  some  ordi- 
nary occupation,  but  at  his  lelt  is  a  vertical  polo  upon  which  is  a  short 
transverse  line,  the  elligy  of  a  bird  or  fish,  most  probably  the  former. 
This  is  a  votive  offering,  or  "shaman  stick,"  erected  to  tlie  memory  of 
a  departed  member  of  the  family.  P>ird  carvings  are  deenuid  the  best 
that  can  be  selected,  flying  si)irits  or  demons,  typified  by  birds,  being 
considered  good  omens,  whereas  walking  or  crawling  ones  are  oft  n 
nuilevolent. 

To  the  right  of  the  man,  over  the  entrance  to  the  habitation,  is  another 
"shaman  stick,"  erected  probably  with  the  same  motive  as  tlie  preced- 
ing one,  though  to  indicate  a  second  person,  only  one  sti<*,k  being  erected 
to  one  individual  at  the  same  idace. 

The  four  figures  seated  upon  the  ground  at  the  water's  edge — Nos. 
4-7 — denote  four  persons  fishing,  the  floats  being  visible  on  the  lines  of 
Nos.  C  and  7. 

Fig.  109  represents  a  party  of  fishermen,  the  three  figures  at  the 
right  being  in  a  seated  posture.  Considerable  surface  erosion  by  con- 
stant use  has  weakened  the  lines  at  the  left  side  to  such  an  extent  as 


I  Ninth  Annual  Kcport  of  the  IJiircau  of  Ktlinology,  1887-88, 1892,  pp.  397, 398,  fif,'.  398. 


I  1 


I' 


I- 


R' 


I 


:  1 


it^ 


Hill 


111 


892 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


hi  H  ^  r^^v4 


£3L 


3 


0 


5 

Fig.  100. 
KIHBINn  WITH  HOOK  AND  LINE. 


to  inako  iiit«rpretiitioii  more  difficult.  The  long  upright  lines  may  have 
been  intended  to  denote  rods,  as  a  Hiniilar  line  in  the  hands  of  No.  0  in 
known  to  be. 

No.  3  may  have  had  a  rod  and  line  attached  to  his  hands,  as  in  Nos. 
6  anil  7,  but  the  surface  here  is  perfectly  smooth  and  polishe<l,  tlius 

obliterating  all  evidence 
/  of  such  implements. 

As  many  of  the  ivory 

drill  bows  sind  bag  handles 

have  inscribed  upon  them 
records  of  seal  hunts  in 
which  are  found  engrav- 
ings of  natives  dragging  seal,  it  seems  proper,  if  not  necessary,  to 
illustrate  the  utensil  with  which  the  dragging  is  performed.  Fig.  110 
represents  a  seal  drag,  an  article  with  which  every  seal  hunter  is  pro- 
vided and  c<arries  with  him  for  drtigging  home  his  game.  This  consists 
of  a  small  ivory  handle  or  knob,  to  which  is  secured  a  stout  thong 
doubled  at  the  other  end  in  a  bight  about  18  inches  long.  The  bight  is 
looped  into  an  incision  in  the  animal's  lower  jaw,  while  the  knob  serves 
for  attaching  a  longer  line  or  the  end  of  a  dog's  harness.  The  seal  is 
dragged  on  his  back,  and  runs  as  smoothly  as  a  sled.  The  illustration 
of  the  drag  referred  to  above  is  one 
of  a  small  collection  in  the  National 
Museum,  and  marked  as  from  Point 
Barrow.' 

Some  of  these  ivory  knobs  show 
slight  markings  or  incisions  to  serve 
as  ornamentation,  as  shown  in  ])late 
20,  fig.  3,  though  the  greater  number 
are  carved  in  symmetrical  forms,  and 
usually  in  imitation  of  seals,  Avhales, 
or  something  of  this  kind. 

Floats  of  inflated  seal  skin  are  used 
in  capturing  whale  and  walrus.    An 
excellent  specimen  from  Point  Bar- 
row,^ fig.  Ill,  will  serve  to  illustrate 
the  general  appearance  of  the  float, 
and  will  furthermore  serve  to  make 
intelligible  the  ])eculiar  fish  like  ob- 
ject portrayed  on  somts  ivory  records,  where  the  seal  fisher  is  repre- 
sented as  in  his  kaiak,  with  the  harpoon  and  float  projecting  backward 
from  the  body.    The  accompanying  illustration  is  here  reproduced  from 
the  Point  Barrow  report  by  Mr.  Murdoch. 
The  village  in  plate  70,  fig.  2,  is  located  at  Nos.  1  and  2,  the  store- 


Fig.  110. 

8RAL  DRAG. 


>  Ninth  Annual  Report  of  tbe  liiirean  of  Ethnology,  1887-88, 1892,  p.  256,  fig.  257 ' 
>Idem.  p.  246. 


.  T% will       wi>  I  m 


-"ti 


f'A^^^*'  f 


Na^rt  of  U.  S.  NaUoMl  MuMum,  laOS^Hotfmwi. 


,1  lit 


M:^^ 


6  6  7 

2 


8        8 

8 


VtCl^i^W^', 


m 


Whale  and  Seal  Hunting  F 


jJC'-li.-     ''"''"tf  "^^ 


Plat»  70. 


.^£. 


— >H,'>\Jti^^(aBSmk 


8  0  10 

1 


u  u 


18  14 


16  16 


6  6 

2 


r      \,       lAMi'MAmitt 


7         6  »  10 


U 


It 


18       14 


»        8 
8 


♦  ♦ 


LC  AND  Seal  Huntinq  Records. 


-^'mil. 


GRAPHIC    ART    OI'   THE    ESKIMOS. 


S!)3 


v: 


house  being  at  the  extreme  left  end  of  tlie  first  lioiise.  Smoke  is 
rising  from  the  middle  elevation,  while  upon  the  entrance  are  two 
])ersons,  one  of  whom  is  shown  with  his  arms  elevated,  as  if  hailing 
some  one,  ♦vhile  the  second  appears  to  be  in  conversation  with  the  man 
(m  the  scaftold  belonging  to  the  next  house,  at  No.  2.  On  the  latter 
are  two  people  pulling  np  a  ladder  to  get  the  hunter  to  bring  up  the 
meat,  when  the  seal,  dragged  by  N<>. .'{,  is  eaten  nj).  The  hunter's  dog  is 
following.  No.  4  denotes  two  men  pulling  at  a  seal,  while  those  at  No. 
5  are  similarly  engaged.  Nos.  G,  7,  <S,  and  *.»  are  also  taking  home  their 
captures.  The  tigure  in  the  air,  between  Nos.  7  and  8,  resembles  the 
usual  outline  ;>f  an  evil  spirit,  as  portrayed  in  connection  with  cere- 
monial performances  of  shamans,  but  in  the  present  conm'«'tion  the 
import  of  the  character  is  unintelligible,  unless  the  artist  intended  to 
represent  one  of  the  natives  in  the  act  of  jumping. 

No.  10  denotes  two  seals.  No.  II  a  water  bird,  whiU'  No.  lli  indicates 
a  canoe  with  the  rowers  standing  about  in  conversation,  in  which  the 
inhabitants  of  No.  13  are  i)articipating. 


Ki);.  III. 

INKl.ATKI)   SKAI.SKIN    I-I,IIAT. 

No.  It  is  the  storehouse  or  scatt'old  belonging  to  the  occupaiits  of 
No.  i;{. 

riate  22,  tig.  o,  represents  another  drill  bow  oi  bug  handle  trom 
Kotzebue  Sound.  The  s<|uare  object  on  poles,  at  the  right  end  upper 
line,  represents  a  cache  or  granary,  while  the  domeshape<l  structure  is 
a  winter  habitation,  on  the  entrance  to  whicli  is  a  native  with  his  arm 
directed  downward,  as  if  indicating  that  place  for  some  particular 
reason.  The  next  character  repn'scnts  a  scatfold  used  for  drying  meat 
or  lish.  Two  men  are  represented  as  approaching  the  rack,  both 
dragging  an  oddly  formed  character,  probably  intended  to  represent 
a  seal.  The  nuimmal  is  a.  reindeer,  while  to  the  right  is  an  umiak 
containing  four  m«'n  approaching  two  ligures,  the  forms  of  which  are 
not  sufficiently  distinct  to  identify. 

Biiyond  these,  however,  are  two  seals  whose  heads  are  seen  protrud- 
ing from  the  surface  of  the  water.  Another  umiak  is  shown,  beyond 
which  three  men  are  shown  diagging  a  seal  or  walrus.  These  are 
followed  by  three  others  similarly  occupied.    The  dome-shaped  tigure 


% 


894 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


to  the  right  (hMiotes,  without  doubt,  a  similar  aniinnl  upon  an  ice  iloc, 
the  hitter  being  indicated  by  its  having  been  U^ft  white  to  denote  trans- 
parency. 

One  man  is  seen  dragging  at  a  seal  to  the  right  of  the  tloe,  and  a  little 
farther  on  are  two  men  making  gestures,  the  lirst  having  both  hands 
and  arms  directed  upward,  while  the  second  has  one  arm  directed  to 
the  left  of  the  rod,  while  with  the  other  the  hand  is  1lex«'d  toward  his 
head,  as  if  beckoning  to  some  one  at  his  left  and  indicating  the  direction 
to  his  right. 

The  walrus  have  been  surprised  by  hunters,  as  shown  in  plate  7(>, 
fig.  3,  many  of  them  swimming  away,  as  shown  in  No.  li,  one  animal 
having  its  young  still  resting  upon  its  back.  The  ice  pan  at  No.  2  has 
three  animals  remaining  upon  it,  a  young  walrus  at  its  mother's  back 
being  indicated  in  the  middle  figure,  while  the  largest  figure  is  already 
harpooned,  its  tlipi)ers  ( ?)  being  exten<led  in  its  endeavor  to  slip  into 
the  sea  and  escape.  The  middle  boatman  in  No.  4  is  holding  aloft  his 
paddle,  thus  calling  for  assistance,  the  signal  being  visible,  perhai)s,  by 
other  hunters,  who  will  at  once  respond.  In  No.  5  the  hunter  had  har- 
pooned his  walrus,  which  immediately  attempted  to  escape  by  resorting 


4  5 

Via.  112. 

A   WAI.KfS  HUNT. 


to  an  ice  pan,  upsetting  the  canoe  and  dragging  it  upon  the  ice,  and  at 
the  same  time  throwing  into  the  water  the  unfortunate  hunter,  whose 
head  and  shoulders  are  seen  projecting  above  the  base  line,  here  indi- 
cating, also,  the  water  line. 

In  tig.  112  is  shown  a  remarkably  graphic  illustration.  The  artist 
was  of  more  than  ordinary  cleverness,  and  the  engraving  scarcely 
requires  any  description.  The  animals  noted  in  No.  1,  the  middle  one 
on  the  ice  pan  in  No.  5,  and  the  one  to  the  right — the  last  but  one — are 
each  shown  with  their  young  up«»n  the  back. 

The  ice  pan  upon  which  the  aninnils  had  been  floating  is  indicated  by 
an  outline  only,  the  body  being  left  white  and  in  imitation  of  nature. 

Plate  21,  fig.  2,  represents  the  back  of  bow  shown  elsewhere.  As 
before,  there  is  an  upper  and  lower  face  upon  which  hunting  records 
are  portrayed.  Hegiuning  with  the  upper  surface  at  the  right-hand 
side,  we  perceive  four  walruses,  to  the  right  of  which  is  an  umiak  occu- 
pied by  four  hunters.  The  one  in  the  bow  appears  to  have  a  short- 
handled  ax,  while  the  second  has  one  arm  uplifted,  and  directed  forward 
from  the  nmuth  appears  a  short  line  terminating  in  zigzag,  which  is 
believed  not  to  be  accidental  but  intentional,  and  indicates  voice  or 
speech,  sound  being  portrayed  in  other  pictographs  as  well,  seemingly 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


805 


iii(li(;ating  this  extent  of  acquaintance  with  the  recording  of  subjective 
ideas.  The  third  person  in  the  boat  is  using  the  paddh',  wliile  the  one 
at  the  stern  has  a  weapon  of  some  kind  with  which  he  is  attempting  to 
keep  off  an  aggressive  walrus  which  is  following  them. 

To  the  right  of  this  is  another  umiak  paddling  toward  the  right  in 
the  direction  of  the  three  walruses  represented.  Above  the  middle 
of  this  is  a  small  cross  which  denotes  a  bird.  The  next  figure  repre- 
sents an  umiak  in  which  are  four  people  close  to  the  body  of  a  whale 
which  has  been  harpooned.  The  elongated  curved  figure  resting  ui)on 
two  short  vertical  lines  represents  a  boat  on  shore  and  on  a  scaffold 
drying.  At  a  distance  of  about  1^  inches  from  this  is  shown  a  whale 
in  the  act  of  diving,  as  is  intimjited  by  the  fact  of  the  greater  portion 
of  the  body  being  directed  upward  while  the  head  is  down  in  the  water, 
as  shown  by  the  spray  which  emanates  from  the  blow  hole  in  contact 
with  the  surface.  The  oblong  cross  above  this  represents  a  bird.  The 
adjoining  characters  to  the  right  can  not  be  definitely  determined. 
The  figures  at  the  end,  however,  represent  two  winter  habitations  with 
the  accompanying  granaries  and  the  presence  of  human  figures. 

Turning  the  bow  around  and  following  the  remaining  fmies  from  the 
left  hand,  Me  find  first  a  winter  habitation  with  smoke  rising  from  the 
center,  in  front  of  which  is  a  tent  with  a  vertical  pole  projecting  upward 
atthe  right.  A  native  is  seen  dragging  home  a  seal,  while  to  the  right 
are  more  human  figures  apparently  embarking  in  umiaks,  three  of  these 
vessels  being  under  way.  Beyond  the  bow  of  the  right  hand  boat  and 
ui)on  the  base  line  are  two  figures  which  represent  seals,  Avhile  of  the 
two  in  the  air  the  one  at  the  left  represents  a  fox  or  wolf  aiul  that  at 
the  right  a  bird.  The  remaining  half  of  the  space  upon  this  bow  is 
filled  with  a  procession  of  natives  dragging  home  seals,  eight  of  these 
animals  being  shown.  The  vertical  sti<!k8  used  by  these  natives  are 
seal  spears,  which  they  employ  to  aid  locomotion. 

Plate  24,  fig.  3,  represents  a  drill  bow  from  Nubuiakhchugaluk, 
collected  by  Mv.  E.  W.  Nelson. 

The  specimen  nu»asures  12,'^  inches  in  length,  and  is  rudely  decorated 
both  above  and  bene.ath.  The  figure  at  the  extreme  left  is  partly 
obliterated.  The  next  represents  a  native  in  his  kaiak  in  the  a(!t  of 
throwing  a  harpoon  toward  a  walrus,  whicli  he  is  closely  pursuing,  and 
beyond  which  are  four  other  animals  of  the  same  species.  The  next 
figure  represents  an  umiak  with  three  occupants,  the  one  nearest  the 
bow  being  represented  as  in  the  act  of  throwing  a  harpoon.  Two  large 
crude  figures  of  walruses  are  between  this  boat  and  another  umiak,  in 
which  are  three  persons,  the  one  at  the  stern  being  shown  with  the 
rudder,  the  one  in  the  middle  having  both  arms  extended  and  upward 
as  if  in  surprise,  and  the  one  at  the  bow  being  in  the  act  of  throwing  a 
harpoon  toward  a  whale.  Above  this  are  five  birds,  indi(;ated  by  crude 
crosses.  To  the  right  of  the  whale  is  a  native  with  bow  and  arrow, 
preparing  to  shoot  toward  a  reindeer.    The  triangular  figure  to  the 


Il  't 


8J)6 


REPORT  OP  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


■t;  iF 


Mi  t 


\i ' 


right  of  the  rciudeer  appears  to  be  a  summer  habitation,  while  the 
figure  of  a  mammal  at  the  extreme  right  is  not  drawn  with  sufticient 
accuracy  to  admit  of  identification.  The  under  side  of  the  bow  con- 
tains characters  the  import  of  which  is  very  much  the  same  as  that  of 
those  just  enumerated.  The  edges  of  the  bow  are  decorated  with  hori- 
zontal incised  lines. 

The  retjonl  given  in  plate  60,  tig.  2,  embraces  several  ditterent 
exploits.  In  No.  1  the  helmsman  at  tlie  end  of  the  large  canoe  is  hold- 
ing aloft  the  double  bhuled  paddle  to  attract  attention  and  to  call  for 
assistance,  as  a  walrus,  No.  2,  is  making  an  attack  u])on  the  native  in 
the  kaiak,  No.  3.  The  leaning  figure  in  the  stem  end  of  the  kaiak  is 
the  inflated  seal  skin  used  as  a  float  in  hunting  whale  and  wiilrns. 
No.  4  is  rock  and  indicates  shore,  near  which  is  No.  5,  a  large  animal. 
The  canoe  party  at  No.  0  are  also  making  signals,  seals  having  been 
discovered:  No.  0,  toward  which  the  native  in  the  kaiak,  No.  S,  is 
going,  having  already  thrown  his  harpoon  as  indicated  by  the  Aveapon 
before  the  bow,  and  securing  one  seal  as  noted  by  the  harpoon  pro- 
truding from  its  back. 

Both  boats  are  near  a  large  rock  showing  a  water-worn  cavity,  as 
in  No.  7. 

Another  native,  armed  with  hari)oon  and  float,  is  paddling  along  at 
No.  10.  The  figures  at  No.  11  and  12  are  either  partly  worn  away  or 
incomplete  and  are  unintelligible. 

The  regularity  with  which  the  hunters  and  their  captured  seals  are 
depicted  in  i)late(IO,  fig.  3,  is  a  step  in  the  direction  of  the  decorative — 
representation  of  a  hunting  exploit. 

Each  of  the  hunters  has  secured  an  animal,  the  hunter  dragging 
No.  2  seal  having  a  bow  and  arrow  while  the  others  have  harpo<ms, 
the  weapon  being  cleverly  indicated  by  the  barbed  head  in  the  hands 
of  the  native  dragging  seal  No.  10. 

Fourteen  seals  were  secured,  only  one  gettingawjiy  from  tlui  slaughter, 
as  indicated  in  No.  15. 

The  illustration  in  i»late  60,  fig.  4,  is  interesting  because  of  an  attempt 
at  persi>ective.  The  record  was  too  conjprehensive  to  be  engraved  upon 
the  ivory  surface  available,  and  as  there  were  more  (ianoes  employed  in 
the  hunt  than  could  be  drawn  along  one  line,  in  consecutive  order,  three 
of  them  are  raised  to  appear  as  if  they  were  in  the  air,  though  in  reality 
beyond  the  two  touching  the  water  line  in  the  foreground.  The  canoes 
at  No.  2  are  for  one  person  only,  while  that  at  No.  .'i  has  nine  people  in 
it.  The  walrus,  which  the  party  is  evidently  going  to  attack,  are  at 
Nos.  4  to  11  end)races  the  habitations  referring  to  the  fact  that 
..{age  is  located  there,  while  the  scafiblds — with  the  exce])tion  of  No. 
6 — are  for  canoes,  the  vessels  being  inverted  and  the  paddles  i)rojecting 
beneath.  The  exception  referred  to  is  a  food  scaffold,  to  which  a  Hight 
of  steps  has  been  placed.  Two  persons  are  observed  on  the  roof  of  the 
house  at  No.  5,  watching  the  departure  of  their  friends,  while  a  short 


jI'I'Av.' 


,  while  the 
h  sufticient 
e  bow  coii- 
■t  us  that  of 
I  with  hori- 

il  different 
iioe  is  hohl- 
to  call  for 
le  native  in 
lie  kaiak  is 
md  walrus, 
[•ge  animal, 
iving  been 
,  No.  8,  is 
he  weapon 
rpoon  pro- 

Cfivity,  as 

\g  along  at 
[•n  away  or 

I  seals  are 
corative — 


dragging 
harpoons, 
the  hands 


slanghter, 


m  attempt 
aved  ni)on 
u ployed  in 
I'der,  three 
in  reality 
'he  canoes 
!  people  in 
ck,  are  at 
3  fact  that 
ion  of  No. 
projecting 
sh  a  tlight 
•oof  of  the 
le  a  short 


[  I 

i   ' 

i'  L. 

1?-; 


r 


Report  of  U.  S.  Nitionai  MuMum,  1 895.— Hoffman. 


Plate  71. 


-I 
i 
o 
ffi 

a 

z 
< 

Z 

UJ 

I- 

UJ 

a 


>• 

(£ 

o 

_> 

o 

UJ 

< 
K 

o 
u 

UJ 

o 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP   THE   ESKIMOS. 


897 


o 

CD 

Q 

z 
< 

UJ 

l- 
(/) 

UJ 

a. 


>■ 
tr 
O 
> 

O 

UJ 

I- 
< 

IT 
O 

u 

UJ 

o 


Fl;;.  113. 
ALASKAN  NoTICR  (iF  liIUKCTION. 


column  of  sinoki'  is  seen  arisinj;-  Worn  flic  middle  elevation  of  tli(^  liabi- 
tatioii. 

At  No.  4,  food  is  seen  suspended  beneatli  tiie  inverted  boat,  while 
above  it  the  liarjumn  is  ])roJecting,  sliowinj?  that  the  Aveajmn  is  kept 
near  at  liand  for  immediate  use,  shouhl  occasion  demand  it. 

The  engraving  in  phito  70,  fig.  4,  presents  interesting  details  in  the 
portrayal  of  various  attitudes  assumed  by  walrus  Xos.  4,  7, 9  and  11,  as 
well  as  the  specific  ditlerence  between 
the  canoes,  the  baidarka  holding  more 
than  one  ])erson,  and  the  kaiak,  gen- 
erally, but  for  one  person.  The  former 
is  shown  in  various  styles,  as  Nos.  1,  2, 
and  .'{,  wliile  the  latter  is  represented  in 
Nos.  C,  8,  10,  12,  l.'i,  and  14.  The  small 
(!ross  above  No.  3  <lcnotes  a  bird  in 
flight,  as  also  the  two  figures  of  like 
form  above  the  seal  at  No.  7.  A  large 
water  fowl  still  remains  upon  the  water 
before  the  bow  of  the  kaiak  at  No.  8. 

The  hunter  in  the  kaiak  No.  <J  has 
thrown  his  harpoon  into  a  walrus,  while 
the  occupants  of  Nos.  10  and  12  have 
raised  their  weapons  preparatory  to  throwing  them.  The  elongated 
objects  projecting  from  the  kaiaks,  behind  the  occupants,  Nos.  10, 12, 
and  13,  are  inflated  seal  skins  used  as  floaters  for  the  harpoon  line, 
to  impede  the  speed  of  the  harpooned  animal,  and  also  to  prevent 
its  escape  l)y  remaining  too  long  underwater  or  to 
trace  its  course  while  there. 

TRAVEL   AND   GEOGUArilK;    FKATlTltKS, 

Locomotion  by  boat  is  graphically  represented  in 
many  records  and  by  sledge  in  occasional  instances. 
Walking  with  the  seal  spear  used  as  a  cane  is  com- 
mon, and  in  one  example  age  is  also  indicated  by 
the  attitude  of  the  bent  body,  a  method  of  i)ortray- 
ing  physical  condition  seldom  found  in  Eskimo  picto- 
graphs,  but  of  frequent  occurrence  in  the  records 
of  the  Ojibwa  and  Dakota. 
Fig.  113  is  reproduced  from  a  small  slab  of  wood, 
and  is  explained  as  follows: 

Seal  hunters  thus  inform  their  comrades  that  they  have  returned 
home:  The  first  to  return  to  the  regular  landing  place  sometimes  sticks 
a  i)iece  of  wood  into  the  ground  leaning  toward  the  village,  upon  which 
is  drjiwn  or  scratched  the  outline  of  a  baidarka  or  canoe  heading  toward 
one  or  more  outlines  or  lodges,  signifying  that  the  occupants  have  gone 
toward  their  houses. 

NAT  MUS  95 57 


FlK.  114. 

ALASKAN    NOTIOK    OK    1)1- 

KECTION. 


I 


il 


I   ^ 


'i 


!' 


y\ 


I     : 

■  I 


I  - 


Vi 


!■?    I 


H9H 


REPORT  OF   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


In  tliis  coniie(;tiun  iiiay  bo  inoiitioiicd  a  coiniiion  device  used  by  the 
natives  ot'  Noutlieni  Alaska  and  Kadiak  to  indicate  direction  taken  or 
to  be  taken.  Wlien  liunterM  become  separated  tlu'  one  first  retnrn- 
ing  to  tlie  forks  of  the  trail  pnta  a  piece  of  wood  in  the  ground,  on  the 
top  of  which  he  makes  an  incision,  into  which  a  short  piece  of  wood  is 
secnred  horizontally  so  as  to  jioint  in  the  direction  taken. 

This  device  is  sometimes  drawn  upon  ivory  and  other  materials,  in 
connection  with  other  objects  to  make  pictographic  records,  and  then 
8imi)ly  rei)reseiits  a  character  like  the  letter  T,  the  npper  crosspiece 
being  very  sliort  in  comparison  with  the  vertical  stroke. 

The  practice  of  erecting  snch  sticks  to  indicate  direction  is  very  com- 
mon to  tlie  tribes  living  along  thedreat  Lakes,  espeidally  the  Crees 
and  the  OJibwa. 

I'late  2'),  tig.  2,  represents  a  snuffbox  of  walrus  ivory.  This  speci- 
men, which  was  obtained  at  Norton  Sound,  is  crude  and  very  old.  Upon 
the  upper  border  ov  margin  is  a  line  encircling  the  specimen,  upon 
which  is  a  series  of  very  interesting  although  crude  ligures.  The  only 
engraved  <'haractcr  below  the  line,  upon  one  side,  is  a  very  rude  sledge 
atta«'hed  to  a  long-necked  dog. 

The  iti]te  re])iesented  in  ])late  71  measures  lOA  inches  in  length  along 
the  lower  outer  curve,  while  the  ornamental  head  in  front  is  1  inch  in 
length.  The  latter  is  easily  removed,  being  merely  an  ornamental  head 
of  the  i>eg  used  to  plug  tlu^  drilled  tube  of  the  pipestem.  The  stem  is 
three  fourths  of  an  inch  in  lateral  diameter  and  about  lA  inches  through 
the  stem  at  the  back  of  the  bowl— froni  top  to  bottom.  The  bowl  and 
its  sup]torting  stem  is  1 A  inches  in  height.  Upon  either  side  of  the  rim 
of  the  bowl  is  a  carved  human  face  with  blackened  eyes  and  mouth, 
the  nose  being  (juite  pronounced. 

The  engravings  occupy  the  four  sides  of  tin'  stem,  the  two  lower 
panels  being  reserved  for  boating  scenes,  while  the  upper  are  retained 
for  game  and  village  scenes.  Ui)on  the  upper  right  hand  side  are  six 
reindeer,  followed  by  a  wolf,  while  before  the  foremost  reindeer  is  the 
figure  of  a  man  in  the  attitude  of  following  sea  fowl,  evidently  in  the 
attempt  to  secure  some. 

lieneath  this  scene  is  a  Heet  of  eight  umiaks,  under  rail,  while  in 
each  vessel  are  the  outlines  of  human  figures,  one  at  the  bow  of  the 
leading  umiak  reaching  toward,  or  grasping,  the  foresail  stay,  while 
every  helmsman  has  his  oar  to  steer  his  boat.  In  the  fifth  boat — forward 
fr<m>  the  mouth])iece  of  the  jiipe — is  one  native  smoking  his  pipe. 

On  the  left-hand  side,  in  the  lower  spa<e,  are  six  kaiaks,  each  having 
its  occupant  using  the  paddle,  while  toward  the  stem  is  seen  projecting 
the  harpoon  and  seal  skin  float,  ready  and  inflated  for  use. 

The  upper  spacre  i)ortrays  a  village  scicne,  in  tlie  middle  being  the 
dome-shaped  winter  habitation,  from  which  smoke  is  issuing;  three 
persons  upon  the  roof  of  the  entrance  are  wat<'hing  the  return  of  the 
hunters,  one  raising  his  arms  as  if  hailing  the  latter  with  ]>leasnre  at 


GRAPHIC   AKT   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


899 


tlioir  Kiil'v  01-  HiUTfHst'iil  return.  Tlic  liiiiiturH  an^  at  tlii>  left  4lru;j:ji;iiig 
alon^  tbi'ir  kaiaks  upon  .sledges.  The  ti};ure  placed  upon  stilts  is  an 
umiak,  suspended  for  drying  and  proteetion,  while  beneath  it  is  a  dog 
and  his  nnister  approaching  the  entrance  of  the  habitation. 

At  the  right  is  a  storelnuise  or  granary,  built  above  the  ground,  and 
near  it  u  nnm  calling  or  urging  forward  the  dog  hitched  lo  the  sledge, 
upon  which  is  |>Iaced  a  load  and  one  person. 

The  artistic  execution  of  the  engravings  is  goo<l.  The  lines  are  very 
uniform  in  depth  and  witltli,  showing  the  artist  to  have  been  an  expert 
in  the  use  of  the  graver  as  pertains  to  the  mechanical  part  «>f  the 
etching,  at  least. 

The  lines  are  all  tilled  in  or  stained  with  a  v«'ry  black  stibstance, 
giving  the  work  rather  a  harsh  and  new  appearance  and  not  so  soft 
and  warm  in  tone  as  some  of  the  older  and  more  worn  spe<'imens. 

The  engraving  in  jdate  40,  tig.  1,  is  very  bold  and  seems  to  i)resent 
strong  evidence  of  persiuctive  drawing,  not  through  mere  accident  but 
from  intention.  The  gradual  diminution  in  the  si/e  of  tiie  buildings 
and  store  racks  at  the  left  end  of  the  record  is  very  cleverly  done. 
The  ligure  at  No.  !>  is  a  baidarka  inverted  ui)on  tin*  rack  so  as  to  permit 
it  to  dry,  while  the  rod  upon  the  entrance  to  the  hojise  at  No.  8  is  a 
votive  ottering,  erected  to  the  memory  of  one  of  the  bousehold.  The 
man  uiton  the  roof  is  speaking  and  gesticulating  to  those  at  No.  <i. 

The  parties  in  the  canoes,  Nos.  10,  11,  IL',  and  13,  are  leaving  to  visit 
another  village,  indicated  by  a  large  habitation  and  storehouse,  Nos. 
14  and  15,  about  which  the  four  human  tiguresare  i)ortrayed  as  making 
gestures,  both  beckoning — by  the  hand  raised — and  jjointing  to  the 
house,  as  if  <lesiring  the  visitors  to  come  there. 

There  is  no  evidence  of  want  of  food,  or  death,  as  indicated  in  some 
other  records  presented  herein,  but  simply  an  exhibition  of  gladness  at 
the  return  of  friends  or  visitors  who  api>ear  to  have  come  within  hailing 
distance. 

The  excitement  caused  by  the  arrival  of  two  whaling  shi[)s  is  cleverly 
portrayed  in  plate  40,  tig.  2.  At  No.  1  is  a  baidarka  still  upon  the  dry- 
ing poles,  while  the  natives  at  No.  L*  are  excitedly  rushing  toward  it  to 
l>ut  to  water  and  to  follow  the  other  boats  already  under  way  to  visit  the 
ships.  The  boats  Nos.  .'i  to  7  are  all  going  along  toward  the  anchored 
ciaft,  Nos.  8  ami  9,  the  anchor  chains  being  designated  by  zigzag  lines, 
thus  more  emphatically  indicating  liiikn. 

The  canoes  at  Nos.  10  and  V2  are  coming  from  another  direction,  an«l 
the  native  on  the  bow  of  No.  10  is  hailing  the  helmsman  on  the  sliip 
No.  9.  The  natives  in  both  boats  at  the  right  have  oars  for  rud- 
ders.   No.  11  is  a  tlock  of  birds. 

The  record  reproduced  in  fig.  115  illustrates  another  method  of  giv- 
ing information  with  regard  to  distress  in  another  village,  which  o(!ca- 
sioned  the  departure  of  the  person  by  whom  the  notification  was  given. 
The  design?  were  traced  ui»on  a  narrow  strip  of  wood,  which  was  then 


Tf 


*  ;  I; 


pi       ..■:  ' 


J.     I 

! 

i 

p  i 

III 

K 

900 


RKPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


stuck  Upon  the  rout'  of  tliu  lioiiHe  beloiif^iiif^  to  the  drat'tHiiiaii,  and 
made  to  k>an  in  tlio  direction  of  the  course  to  be  taken. 

This  18  shown  in  No.  1,  tlio  narrow  projection  upon  the  apex  of  the 
roof  denoting;  th«'  stick;  No.  3  is  the  baidarka,  containin^j  the  residents 
of  the  honsc;  No.  A  is  a  grave  stick,  indicating  a  deatli  in  the  settle- 
ment to  which  the  trip  is  inad<*,  the  stiik  being  a  votive  ottering,  erected 
to  the  memory  of  the  deceased :  Nos.  4  and  6  denote  the  Inmses  of  the 
village,  the,  triangular  one  being  made  by  leaning  t<»gether  boards  or 
slabs,  an<l  is  termed  a  summer  house,  while  the  dome-shaped  one,  made 
nu)re  compactly  and  covered  with  turf,  denotes  a  ]>ermanent  or  winter 
residence.    JJoth  kinds  are  represented,  and  by  this  method  of  synec- 


Jj^igS^^ 


Fig.  115. 
ALASKAN  NoriCK  OK  DIMTKEHfl. 

doche  the  village  is  indicated  by  portraying  only  one  of  each  kind  com- 
posing the  settlement. 

The  design  shown  in  tig.  IKJ  is  in  imitation  of  drawings  nmde  by  the 
natives  of  southern  Alaska  to  convey  to  the  observer  the  information 
that  the  draftsman  had  gone  away  to  another  settlement,  the  inhabi- 
tants of  which  were  in  distress.  The  drawings  were  made  on  a  strip 
of  wood  which  was  placed  at  the  door  of  the  house,  where  it  might  be 
seen  by  visitors  or  inquirers. 

Vladimir  Naomotl',  the  native  to  whom  reference  has  before  been  made, 
and  who  drew  for  the  ]>reseijt  writer  the  specimen  under  consideration, 
gave  the  following  explanation :  No.  1  is  a  native  making  the  gesture 


icM. 


^ 


^ 


^^]^^ 


rift.  no. 

NOTICK  (iK  IfErAKTUllE  TO  RKUBVB  DISTRESS. 

indicating  sc//with  the  right  hand,  and  with  the  left  indicating  the 
direction  of  going.  No.  2  is  the  native's  habitation,  a  winter  or  perma- 
nent residence,  dome  shaped,  i)artly  underground,  with  the  roof  thinly 
covered  with  turf  to  keep  out  the  extreme  cold.  No.  3  is  a  scaffold  used 
for  drying  fish ;  upon  the  top  of  the  pole  is  placed  a  i^iece  of  wood  tied 
so  that  the  longest  end  points  in  the  direction  to  be  taken  by  the  relief 
party.  No.  4  is  the  baidarka  containing  tMie  party.  No.  5,  a  native  of 
the  settlement  to  be  visited.  No.  6,  a  summer  habitation.  No.  7  is  a 
shaman  or  grave  stick,  a  votive  ottering  erected  to  the  memory  of  a 
recently  deceased  person,  the  cause  which  necessitated  the  journey. 
No.  8  is  a  winter  habitation,  in  which  the  deceased  had  resided.    The 


ORAPHIC   ART  OP  THE   ESKIMOS. 


901 


Fin.  U7. 
WALKt;H    lll'NTEIi  A'ltACKKIi. 


winter  reHidencc,  No.  8,  t«)gctlier  with  tho  Huniiiier  I(h1),'o  in  No.(>,  denuti's 
the  aettUmvnt. 

Tbe  record  on  iduto  10,  fig.  3,  einl)nicing  Nos.  1  to  10,  is  Hiinilar  in 
stylo  to  <tnu  explained  by  Naonioft',  and  pci-tainH  to  tlie  <lcHignation  of 
geoKrapliic  or  rather  tojmgrapliic  features  of  an  area  of  country  between 
thatoccnpiedby  the  recorder  and  another 
place  to  whi(!h  reference  is  made. 

No.  1  denotes  three  birds  flying  in  the 
air,  and  No.  2  has  reference  to  four  seals, 
both  groups  of  creatures  being  at  a  shore 
line,  as  the  tree  at  No.  3  resembling  a  pine 
indicates.  The  group  of  trees  immedi- 
ately to  the  right  denotes  a  grove  or  woods,  indicated  by  a  gnaip  of 
trees  being  placed  close  together.  No.  4  is  a  human  being  and  the  intcn 
tionof  tho  recorder  is  to  imply  that  natives  are  resident  there — beyond 
the  woods.  Another  grove  or  forest  o<!curs  beyond  the  settlement,  as 
indicated  by  the  group  of  trees  at  No.  5,  beyond  which  another  handct 
is  situated. 

Then  comes  another  forest  at  No.  7,  beyond  which  is  a  locality  abound- 
ing in  seals,  No.  S.  Beyond  this  is  a  range  of  timbered  hills,  the  upland 
being  indicated  by  a  semicircle  covered  with  short  vertical  lines  to 
denote  the  timber. 

No.  10  is  au  ornamental  mark  similar  to  No.  18  in  import,  and  serves 

to  denote  the  end  of  that  i»arti<'ular  re<'ord. 

-J^jig/1^.^  A  hunting  scene  begins   with  No.  11;  the 

n^^^M  whale  is  moving  toward  the  right,  spouting, 

it  ^tmim^m^    causing  the  walrus.  No.  IL',  to  move  out  of  the 

way.    Water  fowl  are  seen  at  No.  13  J  while  the 

elevations  at  No.  14,  over  which  some  birds  are 

flying  and  at  the  left  base  of  which  is  another  walrus,  appear  to  be 

rocks  protruding  from  the  sea. 

At  No.  15  are  two  other  walrus,  while  .at  N«»s.  1(1  and  17  are  two 
approaching  whaling  ships. 

The  character  at  No.  18  concludes  the  historN". 


Fig.  118. 

QUAHRBL  OVEK  OAMB. 


(!OMHAT. 

But  few  illustrations  occur  in  the  ivory  records  in  the  National 
Museum  collections  in  which  i)ersoual  combat  is  iMutrayed,  Wrest- 
ling is  shown,  in  one  instance,  under  the  caption  of  Tastimcs  and 
Games,  while  another  denoting  a  struggle  and  combat  with  a  walrus, 
both  being  in  the  water,  is  given  below. 

Fig.  117  represents  an  Alaskan  in  the  water  killing  a  walrus.  The 
exph)it  was  deemed  of  suliicient  importance  to  perpetusite  it  by  rejord- 
ing  the  illustration  upon  a  slab  of  ivory,  now  in  the  museum  of  the 
Alaska  Commercial  Company,  San  Francisco,  California. 

Two  men  having  a  serious  altercation  over  a  seal  are  shown  in  fig. 
118.    One  is  unarmed,  while  the  other  has  a  bow  and  arrow  which  he 


u 


R 

\ 

1 ,' 

¥i 

>, 

i 

'i 

i 

iK 

i  ' 

1! 

f; 

y 

1 

ij 

ii' 

1 

( 

;i 


r,  i: 


i'.' 


K  ^' 


1|:, 

4 


002 


RKPORT    OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


liiis  tlircatciHMl  to  UH(\    The  umiriiuHl  iiiuii'h  IuiiuIh  arc  in  nttitiulos  of 
jyciHtnrr. 

riiit  two  Htnif;j;liiig  iiKMi,  platu  40,  W^.  4,  No.l,  appear  in  the  attitude 
of  wreHtlin^,  luit  the  rapi«l  approa<;h  of  two  others,  No.  li,  >vit)i  HpearH 
in  tlie  attitnde  of  eliar^fin^  <»r  thrnnting,  HceniB  to  h'nd  more  soriouH 
ii(>sH  to  the  record.    Tlie  position  of  tlio  legs  of  the  combatantH  indicates 
th«^  portrayal  of  considerable  strenjfth  being  exerted. 

Nos. .'{  and  S  are  honses,  tlie  latter  showing  the  cohunn  of  smoke 
C(»nsiderably  curved  downward  to  the  right,  denoting  a  strong  breeze 
from  the  ojiposite  direction.  No.  4  is  a  water  bird,  i»rol)ably  a  duck, 
while  No.  "»  denotes  a  seal.  An  aninnil  of  this  species  has  been  cap- 
tured by  the  hunter,  N<».  0,  who  is  <lragging  it  liome  to  the  house,  No.S, 
while  his  wife — ]»erhaps  some  other  inmate — stands  at  the  entrance  and 
with  botli  hands  nnikes  the  gesture  of  rtquent  or  inritatinn  to  enter,  the 
hands  being  thrown  toward  the  threshold.  Nos.  i),  10,  and  11  are  dog 
sledges  being  biought  back  by  traders  from  some  other  locality.  The 
sleds  are  loaded.  The  attitudes  assumed  by  the  men  in  aiding  the  dogs 
in  pulling  are  very  cleverly  depicted.  Considerable  etfort  ist'xpressed 
in  the  leader  of  the  sledge  at  No.  10,  while  ])ushing  is  done  by  other 
l>ersoiis  at  the  rear  at  Nos.  0  and  10.    No.  11  is  lightly  loaded,  as  the 


2     3 


7       8    9      10  U     13     13    14 

Fig.  no. 

ATTACK  ON  VIIXAOB. 


IS 


owner  is  seated  upon  the  sledge,  while  his  companion  is  walking  leis 
urely  along  behind. 

The  illustration  in  fig.  110  represents  a  village,  upon  which  an  attack 
is  made  by  some  natives  from  another  locality. 

The  figure  of  a  rack — a  pole  suspended  horizontally  upon  two  verti- 
cal forked  j»osts--is  shown  in  No.  1.  Fish  for  drying  are  seen  attached, 
the  regularity  of  the  short  vertical  strokes  being  evidence  of  the  char- 
acter of  the  food.  Nos.  2  to  (>,  7,  and  0  are  conical  huts  made  of  boards 
and  saplings,  such  habitations  as  are  erected  by  hunting  i)arties  when 
they  find  game  sufficient  in  any  special  phu'e  to  prompt  their  going  to 
so  nuK'h  lab(n-  for  their  prote(!tion  against  rain  or  cold.  In  Nos.  8,  10, 
11, 12,  and  13  alarm  is  expressed  by  the  signal  for  assistance,  the  arms 
being  held  aloft  and  waved  to  attract  attention  and  to  indicate  that 
the  presence  of  the  beholder  is  desired. 

No.  14  is  a  tree,  from  behind  which  the  enemy  shot  an  arrow  which 
caused  the  alarm.     The  enemy  liad  come  up  unperceived. 

I  IDEOGRAPHY. 

This  subject  embraces  one  of  the  most  interesting  in  the  entire  realm 
of  pictography.  Among  the  Eskimo  there  is  less  evidence  of  ability  in 
this  direction  than  among  some  of  our  Indian  tribes.    Gesture  signs 


ORAPIIIC   ART   OP   TIIK    EHKIMOH. 


903 


an*  roiiiiiioti  to  all  iiiAiikiii<l,  hut  in  tlit*  ^ruatcr  part  of  tlio  I'liitud 
States  tlir  si^ii  1an};iia;;(«  is  riipidly  i'alliii;;  into  ilisiisr,  Itotli  Iktuiiho  of 
tli«' <l<'sti'iu;tioii  ot'  tlic  hiitValo.  f  m*  pursuit  of  wliich  was  pui'ti(*ipatf(l 
ill  by  many  trilM's  of  <livt'rse  lan^iia^'cs,  a  condition  wliit-li  lii'oii<;lit 
about  a  most  lii};lily  <i(*Vflo)i(>(I  >{('stun>  laiiuiiavr,  and  also  b(>caiisiM»f 
tlic  rapid  settlnni'tit  of  tl..i  :'oiiiitry  ami  tlir  consciiiu'iit  rtvstrictioiis  of 
Indians  traveling  from  piar(>  to  placo,  wliii  li  also  scrvud  tu  k('('[»  alivo 
jjrstnr*'  specrli.  Tin'  a«loptioii  of  tlu^  Spanisli  laii- 
^iia^o  l>y  tiM'  Indians  on  tlic>  8outliw(>st  border,  and 
tliciMdnookjartioti  iiitlu'nortli,also]ielp('d  to  resume 
tlie  need  of  a  resort  to  gesture,  the  pres4*iit  methods 
of  oral  speech,  mutually  intelligilde.  being  vastly 
superior  and  more  satisfactory. 

The  use  of  gesture  speech  by  the  Ivskiino  is  well 
known,  and  repeated  instances  showing  the  attempted 
reproducti<ni,  graphically,  of  gesture  signs  occur  in  the  ivory  records, 
some  examples  of  which  are  reprodui'ed. 

To  facilitate  further  study  in  this  line  of  investigation,  the  writer 
Hubmits  a  collection  of  gesture  signs  used  by  ilie  ICskinio  and  other 
tribes  of  s(mtliern  Alaska,  a  collectitni  made  some  years  since,  though 
hitherto  u!!publishe<l. 


Kl«.  IJO. 

Ill-MAN  hldlllKH  MAKINil 
(IKMIUUKS. 


l»l(rro(JUAl'HS   OF    tJHSTUUE   SUJNS. 

Xo.  I  of  tig.  1-0  represents  a  shaman  waving  his  hands  and  arms,  as 
if  he  were  stirring  up  the  air  above  his  head,  the  motive  being  the 
invocation  of  beiiigu  spirits  to  aid  him  in  his  work.  The  rested  tigure 
shown  in  No.  2,  denotes  the  man  making  application  tor  aid,  and  his 
arms  are  extended  upward  in  like  manner,  but  in  this  instance  denoting' 
supplieaiioH,  the  diflferenco  between  the  two  being  that  the  latter  is 
rested  upon  the  ground  to  indicate  his  ashimj  for  aid,  wheii'as  the 
shaman  is  portrayed  not  only  erect,  but  in  the  attitude  of 
dancing,  with  his  song  and  incantations. 

The  illustrati<ni  given  in  tig.  121  is  taken  from  an  ivory 
drill  bow  in  the  National  Museum,  marked  as  from  Norton 
Sound,  Alaska.  The  tigure  represents  tlu!  gesture  sign,  or 
signal  of  discovery.  In  this  instanct^  the  game  <;oiisists  of 
whales,  and  the  signal  is  made  by  ludding  the  boat  paddle 
aloft  and  horizontally. 

Fig.  12L'  reiuesents  a  number  of  natives  lishing  through  the.ice.tbr 
seal.  The  individual  represented  at  No.  1  is  dragging  an  animal  out 
of  the  water,  a  hole  having  been  cut  for  breathing  place  at  which  these 
animals  make  their  appearance.  No.  2  has  a  seal  upon  the  ice  and 
appears  to  have  great  difhculty  in  ]iulling  it  along.  No.  ,'i  is  preparing 
to  S[)ear  an  animal,  his  watchful  attitude  being  aiiparent.  No.  4  is 
holding  aloft  liis  harpoon  or  lance,  making  a  signal  that  he  has  discov- 
ered game,  or  hears  it,  and  thereby  warns  others  near  by  to  be  silent. 


Fig.  121. 

SIO.NAI,   OP  DIH 
(••JVEKV. 


If      /I 


t 


11 

is   W 

904 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


^o.  5  is  iibout  to  thrast  his  lauce  through  the  hole  into  the  water 
beneath.  No.  0  hu»  stuck  his  harpoon  into  the  ice  and  is  erecting  a 
shade  over  the  hole  so  as  to  jiermit  him  to  see  beneath,  while  No.  7  has 
thrust  his  weapon  downward  through  the  ice. 

Mr.  ]  >all '  mentions  a  practice  adopted  by  the  Aleuts  when  hunting 
otter,  by  which  the  fact  of  having  thrown  the  spear  is  intimated  to  his 
companions,  when  they  will  at  once  paddle  and  form  a  circle  around 


^y^.^..^."^    "tTi I2_ fl3L 


lAi 


A 


^ 


12  3  4  5  6  7 

Fig.  122. 

BBAL  FISHINO  AND  SinNAL. 

the  spot  so  as  to  attack  with  spear  the  animal  when  it  returns  to  the 
surface  to  breathe.  The  signal  is  graphically  portrayed  in  the  follow- 
ing illustration,  in  which  several  hunters  had  such  exploits,  and  also 
in  many  others,  in  some  of  which,  however,  the  signal  may  also  denote 
the  idea  to  come,  a  call  for  assis<tance  when  the  animal  is  thought  to  be 
liable  to  escape  or  to  be  unmanageable. 
The  iishermen  ibund  a  small  school  of  whales,  as  shown  in  fig.  123, 

Fig.  123. 
SIONALIMl  FOB  ASslsSTANCB ;  WHALES. 

and  three  of  them  have  been  harpooned  while  a  fourth  is  escaping. 
Help  to  secure  the  monsters  is  required,  and  all  of  the  occupants  of  the 
boats  are  making  the  signal  for  assistance  by  holding  horizontally 
above  the  head  the  boat  paddle.  This  signifies  come,  and  also,  under 
other  circumstcuces,  game  found. 

Fig.  124  represents  a  lecord  of  a  hunt,  made  for  the  present  writer 
by  Vladimir  Naomoft",  in  1882.    The  drawing  is  in  imitation  of  similar 


10 


11 


12 


Fig.  124. 
ALASKAV  NOTICE  OK  HUNT. 

ones  made  by  the  natives  of  the  southern  coast  of  Alaska,  to  inform 
their  visitors  or  friends  of  their  departure  for  a  purpose  designated. 
They  are  depicted  upon  pieces  of  wood,  which  are  placed  in  conspicu- 
ous places  near  the  doors  of  the  habitations. 

The  following  is  the  explanation  of  the  characters :  No.  1,  the  speaker, 
with  the  right  hand  indicating  himself  and  with  the  left  pointing  in  the 
direction  taken ;  No.  2,  holding  a  boat  paddle,  goinfj  by  boat;  No.  3,  the 
speaker  holding  the  right  hand  to  the  side  of  the  head,  to  denote  sleep, 


■Alaska  aud  its  Rvsources,  p]).  490.  491. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


905 


and  the  left  elevated  with  one  finger  erect  to  signify  one  night;  No.  4, 
a  circle  with  two  marks  in  the  middle,  signifying  an  island  with  huts 
upon  it;  No.  5  same  as  No.  1;  No.  (>,  a  circle  to  denote  another  island 
where  they  touched;  No.  7,  similar  to  No.  3,  with  an  additional  finger 
elevated,  to  signify  two  nighU  or  xfeeps;  No.  8,  the  speaker  with  his 
harpoon,  the  weapon  with  which  he  sometimes  hunted,  and  with  the 
left  making  the  gesture  sign  to  denote  sea  Hon.  The  hand  is  held  edge- 
wise, with  the  thumb  elevated,  then  pushed  outward  from  the  body  in 
a  slightly  downward  curve.  No.  9  represents  a  sea  Hon,  which  the 
hunter.  No.  10,  secured  by  shooting  with  bow  and  arrow.    No.  11  is  the 

1234  50  7  8 

Fijf.  125. 

ALASKAN  NOTICE  UF  DEPAnTl'KE. 

boat  with  two  persons  in  it,  the  paddles  projecting  downward  beneath 
it.    No.  12  is  the  winter  habitation  of  the  speaker. 

The  record  given  in  fig.  125  was  also  drawn  for  the  present  writer  by 
Vladimir  Naomoff. 

Nos.  1,  3,  5,  and  7  represent  the  person  spoken  to,  and  no  arms  are 
indicated,  as  no  response  is  supposed  to  bo  made  by  him.  No.  2  indi- 
cates the  speaker  with  his  right  hand  to  his  side  or  breast,  indicat- 
ing «<■//,  the  left  hand  pointing  in  the  direction  in  which  he  is  going. 
No.  4,  both  hands  of  the  speaker  are  elevated,  with  fingers  and  thumbs 
extended,  signifying  many.  When  the  hands  are  thus  held  up,  in  sign 
language,  it  signifies  ten,  but  when  they  are  brought  toward  and  back- 
ward from  one  another,  many.  Among  the  "Plains  Indians"  of  Indian 
Territory,  when  both  hands  are  thus  held  up  for  ten,  and  then  thrown 
downward  to  the  left,  it  signifies  ten  times  ten  or  one  hundred.    The 


Fig. 120. 
ALASKAN  NOTICE  OK  lll'NT. 

latter  practice  of  indicating  any  number  multiplied  by  ten,  by  thus 
throwing  to  the  left  both  hands,  has  not  been  found  to  obtain  among 
the  Alaskan  natives.  No.  6,  the  right  hand  is  placed  to  the  side  of 
the  head  to  denote  sleep  or  night;  in  this  instance  denoting  many  sleeps, 
or,  in  other  words,  many  nights  and  days;  the  left  hand  points  down- 
ward to  denote  at  that  place.  No.  8,  the  right  hand  is  directed  toward 
the  starting  point,  wliile  the  left  is  brought  upward  toward  the  head- 
to  go  home,  or  whence  he  came. 

The  drawing  represented  in  fig.  12G  was  made  by  an  Alaskan  native 
to  illustrate  that  be  contemplated  making  a  journey  to  hunt,  iind  the 


■^^?i- 


006 


REPORT  OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


IM 


\l\' 


■r  ii 


',  :^  -y 


!■  :r^  "!i' 


AKK 


/vaX 


f 


result  of  that  tour.  No.  1  is  an  uudulating  lino  extcndiug  from  loft  to 
rigbt,  and  represents  the  contour  lines  of  the  country  and  mountain 
peaks;  No.  2  represents  the  native  going  from  home;  No.  It,  stick  placed 
on  a  hilltop,  with  a  bunch  of  grass  attached — so  as  to  be  more  readily 
visible — pointing  in  the  direction  ho  took ;  No.  4  represents  tlie  native 
of  another  settlement,  with  whom  the  traveler  remained  over  night; 
No.  5  is  the  habitation  of  the  figure  in  No.  4;  No.  G,  a  long  vertical 
stroke,  representing  the  end  of  the  first  day,  i.  e.,  the  time  between 
two  days — rest;  No.  7,  the  traveler  is  again  shown  to  be  on  the  way; 
No.  8,  making  a  signal  that  on  the  second  day  (the  right  hand  raised, 
with  two  lingers  extended,  tiro)  he  saw  deer.  No.  1),  the  left  hand  jmint- 
ing  in  the dire<tion  of  the  animal.  No. 9 represents  the  deer  facing  the 
hunter,  which  attitude  is  an  indication  that  the  animal  was  secured. 
In  fig.  127a  is  indicated  the  course  pursued  by  one  of  a  hunting  party, 

who  decided  to  return  home,  leaving 
information  en  route  as  to  direction.  He 
ascends  the  nearest  elevation  of  ground, 
a  hilltop  or  ridge,  and  ties  a  bunch  of 

grass  or  other  light 

^^    Pr        colored  material  to 

the  top  of  a  long  stick 

■———■—■    or  rod.  The  lower  end 

4  4  6 

of  the  stick  is  placed 
firmly  in  the  ground, 
leaning  in  the  direc- 
tion taken.  When  another  hill  is  ascended,  another  stick  with  similar 
attachment  is  erected,  again  leaning  in  the  direction  to  be  taken.  These 
sticks  are  placed  at  proper  intervals  until  the  village  is  sighted,  the  left 
hand  semicircular  or  dome-shaped  body  denoting  the  settlement  shown 
by  synecdoche. 

The  drawing  shown  in  fig.  121b  was  also  made  by  Naomoff  for  the 
present  writer,  to  illustrate  that  a  settlement  had  been  attacked  by  si 
hostile  party  and  finally  deserted.  The  last  one  to  leave  prepares  the 
drawing  upon  a  strip  of  wood  to  inform  his  friends  of  the  resort  of  the 
survivors.  No.  1  represents  three  hills  or  ranges,  aignifying  that 
the  course  taken  would  carry  them  beyond  that  number  of  hills;  No.  2, 
the  draftsman,  indicating  the  direction,  with  the  left  hand  pointing 
to  the  ground,  one  hill,  and  the  right  hand  indicating  the  number  tiro, 
the  number  still  to  be  crossed;  No.  3,  a  circular  piece  of  wood  or 
leather,  with  the  representation  of  a  face,  placed  upon  a  pole  and  facing 
the  direction  to  be  taken  from  the  settlement.  In  this  instance  the 
drawing  of  the  character  denotes  a  hostile  attack  upon  the  village,  for 
which  misfortune  such  devices  are  sometimes  erected.  Nos.  4  and  5 
indicate  summer  and  winter  habitations.  No.  0  is  a  storehouse  erected 
upon  upright  poles  so  as  to  be  beyond  the  reach  of  predatory  aniuuals. 
The  latter  device  is  used  by  the  coast  natives  generally. 


b 

Fig.  127. 

ALASKAN  NOTICE  OF  DIRECTION. 


ORAPPIIC   ART   OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


907 


Fig.  128  represents  hunters  who  have  been  unfortunate  and  are 
sutt'ering  from  hunger.  The  figures  are  8cratche<l  or  drawn  upon  a 
piece  of  wood,  and  placed  where  there  is  the  greatest  chance  of  its  dis- 
covery by  passers.  The  stick  bearing  tlie  devices  is  stuck  in  the 
ground  and  inclined  to- 
ward the  shelter  of  the 
suft'erers.  The  following 
is  the  interpretation  of 
the  record : 

No.  1  is  a  horizontal 
line,  and  denotes  a  canoe, 

indicating  that  the  persons  are  fishermen ;  No.  2,  a  man  with  both  arms 
extended,  signifying  i'.i  gesture  language  nothing,  corresponding  to  the 
ordinary  gesture  for  negation ;  No.  3  is  a  companion  with  the  right  hand 
placed  to  the  mouth,  signifying  to  cat,  the  left  pointing  to  the  house 
occupied  by  the  hunters,  and  indicating  at  that  place  there  is  nothing 
to  eat;  No.  4  represents  the  shelter  occupied  by  the  sufferers. 

The  record  in  fig.  129  is  similar  to  the  preceding  aiul  is  used  for  a 


Fig.  128, 
HTABVINO  lIlTNTEnH. 


Fifr  129. 

HTAHVINd  IIUNTEKS. 

like  purpose.  No.  1  represents  the  baidarka,  showing  double  projec- 
tions at  the  bow  in  imitation  of  some  forms  of  the  canoe,  the  two  strokes 
at  the  other  end  representing  the  occupants  of  the  boat.  No.  2  rei»re- 
s(?nts  a  man  making  the  gesture  for  nothing,  both  hands  thrown  hori- 
zontally outward  toward  either  side.  No.  3  has  his  right  hand  )>Iaced 
to  the  mouth  to  denote  to  eat,  the  left  ])(>intiiig  to  the  habitation,  No.  4, 
indicating  that  there  is  nothing  to  eat  in  that  houne. 

FiK-  130. 

IirVTINO  SOBNII. 

This  is  used  by  the  Alaskan  coast  natives  generally. 

The  record  portrayed  in  fig.  130,  refers  to  the  success  of  the  hunter 
shown  in  No.  3.  As  elsewhere  stated  with  reference  to  the  position  or 
attitude  of  animals,  it  will  be  perceived  that  the  two  deer,  represented 
in  Nos.  1  and  2,  were  secured  by  shooting,  the  gun  being  indicated  in 
No.  3.  No.  4  represents  a  man  with  a  gun  held  transversely  above  the 
head,  this  being  a  signal  to  denote  come,  or  approach,  while  the  indi- 
viduals iu  Nos.  5,  G,  and  7  are  in  various  attitudes  with  extended  arms 


908 


REPORT  OP  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


Iituuls,  .and  flngerH.  No.  5  is  represented  in  the  act  of  making-  a  gSHture 
synonymous  with  that  in  No.  4,  attracting  attention  and  beckoning  to 
another  to  approach. 

No.  ({ likewise  shows  the  gestures  to  come  or  approach,  the  direction 
of  tlio  liands  being  earthward,  corresponding  exactly  with  a  common 
and  widespread  gesture  for  the  person  called  to  approach  Htealthily. 
Indications  by  gesture  to  come  are  uniformly,  amongst  the  No:  th 
American  Indians  and  Innuit,  made  by  turning  the  palm  downward 
and  drawing  the  extended  index  finger  toward  the  body,  as  if  directly 
indicating  the  path  upon  which  the  person  beckoned  to  is  directed  to 
approach. 

In  No.  7  the  gesture  apitcars  still  more  excited,  and  the  skill  in 
pictorial  expression  is  certainly  very  cleverly  indicated.  The  right 
hand  of  the  figure  calls  to  the  beholder  to  come,  while  with  the  left 
hand,  as  with  the  right,  the  number /our  is  indicated,  as  is  also  the 
case  M'ith  the  figure  in  No.  C.  The  reason  of  this  is  apparent  in  Nos. 
8,  D,  10,  and  H,  denoting  four  black  or  i)orhaps  cinnamon  bears,  whose 
heads  are  directed  away  from  the  group  of  human  figures,  ami  espe- 
cially so  from  No.  .'i,  who  thus  intimates  that  he  was  informed  by  his 


-^■^fln^afc^n^ 


2  3 

Fig.  131. 

BIONAL  OF  DISTRESS  AND  WANT. 


friends  of  four  bears  having  been  seen  in  a  direction  pointed  to  by  the 
left  hand  of  No.  7,  but  which  he  did  not  secure. 

Had  the  heads  been  directed  toward  the  si)eaker  or  owner  of  the 
record,  as  in  the  instance  of  the  two  deer,  the  information  would  have 
signified  that  the  bears  had  been  captured. 

An  interesting  and  r.irely  found  engraving  is  reproduced  herewith 
in  fig.  l.n.  Specimens  of  like  import  were  described  to  the  present 
writer,  and  pencil  drawings  made  to  illustrate  the  manner  in  which  the 
Aigalu  lamut  Eskimo  of  the  southern  shores  of  Alaska  convey  the 
intelligence  that  they  want  assistance  and  that  they  possess  nothing. 

The  figures  shown  in  Nos.  1  and  4  represent  the  habitations  of  two 
families,  the  storehouse,  No.  2,  being  common  property.  Nos.  3, 5,  6,  7, 
and  the  human  figure  standing  upon  the  habitation  marked  No.  4  are 
making  signals,  all  excepting  No.  7,  calling  attention  by  their  uplifted 
hands  and  arms,  while  No.  7  has  his  arms  extended,  to  denote  nothing, 
this  being  a  universal  gesture  for  that  idea.  The  Egyptian  hieroglyphs 
and  the  Maya  pictograph,  as  mentioned  by  Dc  I^anda  in  his  represen- 
tation of  alphabetic  characters,  are  drawn  in  the  attitude  of  out- 
stretched arms,  no  other  part  of  the  body  being  present  or  necessary. 


GRAPHIC    ART    OP   THE    ESKIMOS. 


909 


Th«  conventional  gesture  sign  used  by  the  Indians  of  the  United 
States  is  to  throw  the  flat  right  hand  outward  to  the  right,  the  hand  in 
the  first  position  being  in  front  of  the  right  side  at  the  height  of  the 
elbow. 

Some  tribes  and  European  iiations  who  are  still  profuse  and  )n-oiitic 
in  gesture  as  an  accompaniment  to  speech  frequently  employ  both 
hands,  moving  them  outward  from  the  front  toward  either  side,  bring- 
ing the  palms  uppermost,  and  at  the  same  time  giving  the  shoulders  a 
slight  shrug,  an  unconscious  though  effective  emphasis  to  the  gesture. 

The  accompanying  figure  (132)  represents  at  Nos.  2, .{,  and  4  the  hab- 
itations of  a  village  of  which  the  author  or  owner  of  the  record  is  a 
member.  No.  1  denotes  a  water  fowl.  No.  2  is  a  habitation,  from  the 
roof  of  whi<^h  project  three  shaman  sticks,  erected  as  votive  ott'eriiigs 
to  deceased  members  of  the  household.  The  owner  is  also  apparent  on 
the  roof,  occupied  by  domestic  duties.  No.  3  is  another  house,  from  the 
roof  of  which  is  seen  the  issuings  of  smoke.  No.  4  is  another  long 
house,  from  the  right  hand  end  of  which  is  seen  i)rojecting  a  stick  indi- 
cating the  direction  taken  by  the  owner  in  his  departure  for  another 
locality.  No.  5  represents  a  swan  (the  uppermost  figure),  which  was 
observed  by  the  traveler  on  his  journey,  as  also  an  animal,  the  specific 
name  of  which  could  not  be  ascertained.    No.  0,  however,  is  the  traveler 


\miJMxik^mmmr^^''r-  ^ '■  d^^;^^ ^k i£km  ,r^ 


Fie- 132. 
NOTICE  OF  DEPARTUKB  TO  VISIT  NEUillUORINO  VIIXAdE. 

himself  seated  on  his  dog  sledge,  holding  in  his  hand  a  whip,  with  which 
he  is  urging  the  dog  to  hasten,  as  the  end  of  the  journey  is  near  at 
hand.  He  is  preceded  by  another  native  (No.  7),  whom  he  caught  up 
with,  who  was  dragging  home  some  game.  No.  <S  is  the  house  of  the 
person  whom  the  traveler  is  going  to  visit.  Tlie  leftliand  figure  sees 
him  coming,  and  shows  his  pleasure  by  extending  his  arn\  horizontally, 
to  inform  others  of  the  village  that  he  sees  the  stranger  approaching. 
The  figure  on  the  meat  pole  is  said  to  be  exceedingly  pleased  at  the 
news,  and  is  seen  performing  some  athletic  feat  on  the  horizontal  pole 
mentioned.  Another  of  the  household  is  occupied  at  the  storehouse 
(No.  9)  in  preparing  for  the  storing  of  tlie  game  captured  by  No.  7. 

Smoke  observed  issuing  from  the  roof  of  the  habitation  No.  8  is 
similar  to  that  in  No.  3,  and  resembles  also  in  graphic  execution  the 
tail  of  the  dog  in  No.  6.  Upon  comparison  it  will  be  found  that  the 
water  thrown  up  by  a  whale  in  blowing  is  represented  in  like  manner. 

ABSTRACT   IDEAS. 

But  few  instances  denoting,  or  perhaps  even  suggesting,  abstra 
ideas  have  been  met  with.    The  following  examples  embrace  also  ges- 
ture language  as  well  as  an  attempt  at  recording  subjective  ideas. 


910 


Vi 


i'l. 


;  1'^ 


t^ 


I'.' 


I' 


?n 


!,1   , 


JJ 


I: 


ii   :;■ 


REPORT  OV   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1896. 


^.  c«^^\,..,f^^:rW 


It  is  seldom  that  the  indication  of  speech  is  attempted  by  the  Eskimo, 
but  in  Hg.  133  an  excellent  portrayal  of  the  idea  of  urging  by  means 
of  the  voice,  or  calling,  is  given.  The  two  men  are  traveling  with  a 
sledge  and  three  dogs,  the  foremost  of  the  figures  having  a  line  extend- 
ing from  the  side  of  the  hea<l — presumably  the  mouth — to  thele  ader 
of  the  dogs.    The  idea  is  also  exhibited  in  other  pictographs  made  by 

Eskimo,  and  is  not  of  rare 
occurrence  in  pictographic 
drawings  of  the  natives  of 
Kadiak,  as  stated  by  Vladi- 
mir Naomoff. 
Voice  lines  are  frequently 
and  similarly  portrayed  by  the  Cheyenne,  Arapaho,  and  Dakota  Indians. 
In  pictographs  relating  to  hunting  expeditions  and  pastimes  the  lirst- 
named  tribe  is  perhaps  one  of  the  most  advanced  in  expressing  pic- 
torially  some  of  the  more  difficult  ideas,  not  only  objective  ones  but 
subjective  as  well. 

The  line  extending  from  the  mouth  to  denote  speech  is  a  visible  pre- 
sentation of  the  common  gesture  sign  for  the  same  idea,  made  by 
passing  forward  from  the  mouth  the  extended  index  finger. 


Fig.  133. 

NATIVE  HPEAKINQ  TO  UOO. 


({((^^nnf  * 


1  2  8  4 

Fig.  134. 

BIIOKE  LINE,  OK  WATEK  MARKS. 

The  elevated  left  hand  of  the  leader  of  the  party  is  an  additional 
indication  that  he  is  urging  the  dogs  to  (|uickeu  their  i)ace,  or  perhaps 
to  exert  greater  effort  in  pulling  the  sledge. 

The  illustration  in  fig.  134  represents  several  men  carrying  an 
umiak.  The  vessel  at  No.  3  is  raised  above  the  ground,  the  four  lines 
resembling  props  or  supports  being  the  men's  legs.  The  boat  is  being 
carried  toward  the  water,  the  shore  lines  being  indicated  by  the  vertical 
curves  at  No.  2.  The  artist  felt  that  he  had  not  the  skill  in  perspec- 
tively  showing  the  water's  edge,  and  so 
places  the  water  lines  in  a  position  in 
which  they  may  clearly  be  observed. 
The  four  crosses  at  the  left  of  the  engrav- 
ing denote  waterfowl,  while  the  figures 
at  No.  4  denote  a  standing  one  in  conversation  and  gesture  with  the 
departing  ones,  and  another  seated  upon  the  ground. 

A  good  portrayal  of  the  whale  is  given  in  fig.  135.  The  spray — a  small 
character  for  which  is  placed  over  the  highest  ridge  of  the  head — is 
portrayed  to  specify  the  nature  of  the  mammal.  The  oblique  line  pro- 
truding from  the  back  is  the  harpoon  which  was  used  in  the  capture. 

An  interesting  fact  connected  with  this  pictograph  is  the  represeuta- 


^ 


¥ 


Fig.  135. 
A  CAPTIVE  WHALE. 


GRAPHIC   ART  OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


911 


tion  of  death,  i.  e.,  a  d^ad  whale  or  killed  whale,  determined  by  the 
presence  of  the  instrument  with  which  death  was  accomplished.  This 
is  rare  in  Innuit  pictography,  but  frequent  in  Indian  art. 

Plate  G8,  fig.  ^,  is  a  large  bag  handle  from  Cape  Nome.  This  is  par- 
ticularly interesting  from  the  fact  of  the  presence  of  a  variety  of 
human  forms,  some  resembling  the  bird  like  forms  or  wings  very  much 
resembling  the  characters  for  "  Thuuderbird,"  as  portrayed  by  the 
Ojibwa  and  other  Algonkian  tribes.  The  left  half  of  the  lower  face  of 
the  bow  represents  umiaks  with  hunters  and  harpoons.  Near  the 
middle  of  the  record  is  a  very  gracefully  drawn  whale  tail  up  in  the 
air,  as  the  animal  appears  to  be  diving  while  the  hunter  is  throwing 
his  harpoon  into  its  body.  Upon  the  upper  half  of  this  same  side  of 
the  bow,  the  two  sides  being  divided  by  parallel  median  lines,  are  a 
number  of  whale  tails,  indicating  whales  that  have  escai)ed,  while 
others  .ire  shown  in  the  attitude  of  swimming.  Near  the  left  is  a  very 
conspicuous  umiak  occupied  by  four  hunters.  Over  the  bow  of  the 
boat  projects  a  large  harpoon  resting  upon  the  harpoon  rest.  This 
illustration  is  reproduced  elsewhere  with  further  explanation.  The 
upper  or  convex  side  of  the  bow  is  also  divided  into  two  longitudinal 
ridges  or  faces.  Upon  one  of  these  is  the  portrayal  of  umiaks  rowing 
toward  the  left,  one  hunter  harpooning  an  animal,  while  at  the  extreme 
left  four  hunters  appear  to  be  carrying  an  umiak  toward  the  water,  as 
if  preparing  for  departure.  The  right  half  of  tlie  record  appears  to 
represent  the  other  line,  as  there  are  several  habitations  with  smoke 
rising  from  the  smoke  holes,  votive  offerings  attached  near  by,  as  well 
as  scaffolds.  In  this  instance  the  latter  are  evidently  for  burial  pur- 
poses and  not  for  food.  This  is  made  clear  from  the  fact  that  the 
votive  offerings  are  placed  in  close  contact  with  the  respective  burials. 
A  little  farther  to  the  right  are  three  men  returning  with  a  sledge  and 
a  single  dog,  two  additional  persons  appearing  to  lag  behind,  as  if 
wearied  or  bent  with  age.  The  representation  of  a  human  ligure  car- 
rying a  staff"  is  a  common  in<lication  of  age  or  indigence,  and  occurs 
very  frequently  in  Egyptian  hieroglyi)hs,  as  well  as  in  the  mnemonic. 
One  of  the  individuals  shown  in  the  Kskimo  record  stoops  forward 
very  much,  and  this  is  believed  to  indicate  age.  Immediately  behind 
him  is  the  rude  outline  of  a  fox,  which  may  have  reference  to  his  being 
a  shaman,  or  he  may  possibly  have  captured  such  an  animal.  To  the 
right  is  a  ligure  denoting  a  wliale's  tluke,  indicating  that  the  hunters 
are  also  whalers,  because  to  the  right  of  this  tiuke  is  an  umiak  with 
two  persons  sitting  in  it  using  the  paddle.  The  hunter  in  the  bow  of 
tliis  boat  has  his  paddle  projecting  forward  and  not  quite  touching  the 
water,  the  perspective  being  admirably  represented,  as  it  does  not  cut 
tlirough  and  destroy  the  structure  of  the  boat.  Upon  the  other  face  of 
this  same  bow  are  several  umiaks  in  pursuit  of  a  whale  and  several 
natives  dragging  seals,  two  of  these  natives  having  attached  to  the  rear 
part  of  their  bodies  appendages  drawn  exactly  like  a  dog's  tail  or  a  fox's 


i  ;«  1  . 


.m 


m 


912 


REPORT  OP  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


tail,  which  indicateH  that  the  natives  belonged  to  tlioHO  chisses  referred 
to  by  Captain  Heechey  in  his  Notice  of  tlie  Iiulians  of  Hchisma  Reef 
Inlet,  who  wore  sucli  ornaments  attiiched  to  their  clothing,  giving  them 
a  ridiculous  appearance,  and  may  probably  have  occasioned  the  report 
of  the  Chukche  that  the  people  of  that  region  have  tails  like  dogs. 

Tlio  remaining  figures  upon  this  bow  consists  of  human  beings  and  a 
few  animal  forms,  near  tlie  extreme  right  being  a  curious  outline  of  an 
umiak,  the  occupants  of  which  are  shown  with  extended  arms  from 
which  numerous  short  lines  project.  These  may  denote  the  fur  upon 
the  sleeves  of  the  dress,  or  they  may  have  other  signification,  or  they 
may  possibly  be  merely  a  fancy  of  the  engraver. 

SHAMANISM. 

Although  the  Eskimo  are  extremely  superstitious,  and  numbers  of 
them  are  recognized  shamans  of  ability,  yet  there  seems  to  be  a  gen- 
eral scarcity  of  pictographic  matter  pertaining  thereto.  This  is  strange, 
too,  as  among  some  peoples  the  records  are  almost  entirely  devoted  to 
shamauistic  ceremonies,  and  in  several  instances,  as  among  theOjibwa, 
for  instance,  the  mnemonic  and  hunting  records — all  shamanistic — are 
the  only  relics  of  pictography  at  this  day. 


l.t.  ;■ 


[•i' 


MYTHIC   ANIMALS. 

But  a  few  specimens  portraying  mythic  animals  occur,  the  following 
being  the  most  conspicuous: 

The  accompanying  specimen,  on  plate  72,  is  from  Cape  Prince  of 
Wales,  and  was  collected  by  Mr.  E.  W.  Nelson.  It  represents  a  whale- 
line  guide,  and  is  used  on  the  bow  of  an  umiak  used  for  whale  hunt- 
ing. The  two  pieces  of  ivory,  measuring  in  height  4^  inches,  are 
ingeniously  Joined  together  by  mortising,  the  slot  in  either  piece  being 
made  so  as  to  face  its  fellow ;  and  into  these  slots  is  afterwards  placed 
a  piece  to  hold  both  sides  in  place,  by  being  secured  by  ivory  pegs 
which  pass  through  at  right  angles  to  the  connecting  piece,  as  will  be 
observed  in  the  illustrations.  In  the  lower  cut  will  be  noticed  an  addi- 
tional piece,  larger  than  the  round  pegs,  which  consists  of  a  large 
glass  bead. 

The  horns  of  the  specimen  represent  the  heads  of  a  mammal,  the 
eyes  consisting  of  wooden  pegs,  while  the  nostrils  are  drillings  filled 
in  with  pegs  which  appear  to  have  been  blackened. 

In  the  upper  figure  are  portrayed  two  thunderbirds  or  eagles,  each 
descending  to  grasp  a  whale,  the  latter  having  spray  in  the  act  of 
being  ejected  from  the  "blowholes."  In  the  lower  figure  the  birds  are 
represented  as  having  secured  the  whales  and  have  risen  into  the  air, 
as  seems  indicated  by  the  form  of  the  whale  on  the  right-hand  side. 
The  engraving  of  the  characters  is  decidedly  bold  and  expressive,  the 
entire  surface  of  the  etched  portions  still  retaining  more  or  less  black 
color.    The  general  artistic  form  of  the  bird  is  very  like  that  usually 


1^ 


mm 


referred 
ma  Keef 
iig  them 
le  report 
logs, 
gs  and  a 
ne  of  au 
018  from 
fur  upon 
,  or  tbey 


libers  of 
)e  a  gen- 
strange, 
voted  to 
i  Ojibwa, 
Stic — are 


following 

*rince  of 
i  ti  wbale- 
ile  buiit- 
jlies,  are 
jce  being 
Is  placed 
ory  pegs 
,8  will  be 
an  addi- 
a  large 

iimal,  tbe 
igs  filled 


?le8,  each 
le  act  of 
birds  are 
0  the  air, 
and  side, 
ssive,  the 
ess  black 
,t  usually 


■I 


III    !'. 


\l 


■  .-il 

i 


V. 


5' 

1?! 


II 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATFI    72. 


I'ius.  1  mill  L'.  (>r.\i.i;'~K  am>    !i'i;vi;i;-i,  ok  \Viiai.i;-I,i\i:    (iiirn.   l'i.\(r.i>  hn   I  ua 
i>i    IMiAK.   I'm  n  i\    lliNiiNd. 
(Ciil.  Nit.  4>lt)il.  U.  S.  N.  M.     C:!]!!'  I'linciMil  W'liU^s.    (  nUiclcil  liy  !•;.  W,  .NfUi.n.l 


t      'j  1  h  . 


J  f 


I 


Rtporl  ol  U   S  N«finniil  Mmeum,    Ifl95  — Hoffmnn 


Plate  72. 


Mythic  Biro  and  Whale  on  Harpoon  Rest. 


4. 


'.,«•?" 


Report  of  U.  S.  Nationtl  MuMum,  1895,— Hoffman. 


1 1; 


10 


11 


18  84      33  £2 


B^^ 


7         « 


13    25 

1 


::■> 


tfnlV>Al?^,^.i|l  ..Cl^^fek^:^\lhllMS^^iiimf<H»» 


1     S  8 


5  6  7 


8        9  10 


11 


II'  'li, 


)p^^^igr^y'^  #^  i4r  )f^  w^'^jM 


3       4  6  6 


6  9  10  11     V2 


'   i^     i 


I  a  3  456  789  10         1 

4 

Records  of  Shamanistic 


Plate  73. 


12  24      33  .»    31    iM    19      18  28 


4  1  5 


7  8  18   a5    14         18  16     7  8 


Mmmamt^  JXi^  ^  t^  tkT'^^^iii^^-*^:^^ 


10 


11  12 

2 


u 


14  10 


18 


Ltta^ULfflLjffSLl 


A£*^U//,ff<IKl»>KirtfyIffi«/I(iU!«)Ixf/;^tKA! 


10    11  12 

a 


18      14     15     le 


17 


~^''"  <^'glfe^_ 


18    19   80 


^^   *  A<^  ^  \^>a,,ii^i:^^'^^-^Y^>^^ 


7   8    9     10    11     12     18 

4 

Records  of  Shamanistic  Ceremonials. 


14  u 


16 


IP 


\l 


)•?>, 


!<     ', 


i 


il 

'■  t  i 

]l  ! 

t  *■ 

GRAPHIC   AET   OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


913 


i'uiiiul  in  Algoiikiaii  pictographs,  and  does  not  keep  in  general  liar 
mony  witli  Alaskan  art,  although  the  whales,  which  are  true,  typical, 
Alaskan  examples,  seems  at  once  to  repel  the  suspicion  of  intrusive 
cliaracters,  or  such  as  are  non-Innuit. 


TT-ir 


Ti n — 

« 

Fig.  130. 

MYTHIC  SERPENTS. 


^Sr^ 


The  four  perforations  in  the  piece  are  for  attaching  it  to  the  gunwale 
of  the  umiak. 

The  illustrations  given,  a,  h,  and  c,  of  fig.  l.*i{>,  represent  mythic 
serpents,  and  are  described  in  some  of  the  folk  tales,  v  very  much 
resembles  the  "  water  monster"  of  the  Ojibwa, 
though  it  is  scarcely  possible  that  the  cult  of 
the  latter  could  have  been  conveyed,  even  in 
the  slightest  degree,  to  the  Eskimo.  Other 
intervening  tribes,  notably  so  those  of  the 
A  thabascas  family,  have  serpent  myths,  and  Fig.m. 

Irom  this  people  the  idea  may  have  been  con-    "^"""^^  a^imai.  i.KvocRrao  na- 
veyed  to  the  Innuit,  especially  as  the  latter 

are  in  fretpieut  communication  with  the  Kenai  Indians,  the  northwest- 
ernmo.*<t  tribe  of  the  above-mentioned  famiy. 

It  has  been  suggested,  too,  that  the  creatures  may  have  been  copied 
from  or  suggested  by  illustrations  in  newsi)apers  or  other  literature. 

In  fig.  137  is  shown  a  mythic  creature  taking  up  a  man  and  n'eparing 
to  devour  him.    The  belief  in  water  monsters  survives  among  the 
natives  of  the  southern  coast,  opposite  the  island  of  Kadiak,  a  creature 
resembling  somewhat  a  reptilian  foi-m  in  imitation  of 
an  alligator,  of  which  illustraticuis  are  also  given  else- 
where. 

The  outlines  in  fig.  138  are  not  sufliciently  specific  to 
indicate  the  kind  of  creature  intended,  but  the  indica- 
tion of  the  heart,  together  with  the  voire  line,  or  life 
lim\  extending  therefrom  to  the  open  month,  is  very  much  like  some  of 
the  figures  found  among  the  Zuni  and  the  Ojibwa. 

This  peculiar  line  denotes  the  animal  to  be  of  a  mythic  or,  i)erhap8, 
sacred  character,  and  has  reference  to  ceremonials  known  only  to  the 
shamans  or  members  of  certain  (;ult  societies. 
NAT  MUS  95 r)8 


Fig.  138. 

MYTFlir  ANIMAL. 


'fr^m 


■'»/■ 


i 

ft! 

tv5 


e 


li; 


I 


1'  "H" 


ir    J 


■;£ 


It 

iff 


!■■  ^ 


t 


914 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


In  plate  66,  fig.  2,  is  tlie  engraved  figure  of  a  seal,  within  which  are 
various  objects,  animate  and  inanimate,  resembles  that  class  of  sacred 
objects  often  carried  by  the  Ojibwa  jea'sakid  or  juggler. 

Fig.  139  represents  a  series  of  characters  only  i)art  of  which  are 
intelligible.  No.  1  is  evidently — from  the  curve  of  the  horns — a  rein- 
deer, while  No.  2  is  explained  to  be  a  mythic  animal — a  serpent,  as 
similarly  elongated  quatlrupeds  have  been  interpreted  by  some  natives. 
No.  3  appears  to  be  the  first  of  a  series  of  seven  figures  (Nos.  3,  4,  5, 
7,  8,  0, 10)  which  are  apparently  decorated  with  fringed  coats,  like  the 
neighboring  Kolosh  and  Keuai  Indians,  and  marks  of  bird  or  other 
faces  upon  their  heads. 

No.  6  is  an  aijuatic  bird  in  flight,  which  at*once  shows  the  difference 
in  execution  of  ideas,  the  liuman  figure  being  bifurcated  as  above  indi- 
cated. No.  11  is  a  mammal,  resembling  the  usual  character  denoting 
the^JM^oruZrt". 

CEREMONIALS. 

Mr.  Murdoch  remarks  that  at  some  of  the  ceremonial  dances  of  the 
Eskimo,  at  I'oint  linrrow,  the  participants  wear  masks,  some  of  which 
are  sometimes  decorated  with  slight  ornamentation. 


-it    ^A->-  ^  1\'^^ 


Fig.  139. 
HVTIIIC  CREATURES. 

Gorgets  are  also  worn,  and  fig.  3  represents  an  excellent  example 
with  ornamentations  relating  to  fishing  and  hunting.  The  same  author 
remarks,  also,  that  the  more  southern  Eskimo  of  Alaska  are  in  the 
liabit  of  using  in  their  dances  very  elaborate  and  highly  ornamented 
and  painted  masks,  of  which  the  National  Museum  po.ssesses  a  very 
large  collection.  The  ancient  Aleuts  also  used  masks.  On  the  other 
hand,  no  other  Eskimo,  save  ''  those  of  Alaska,  ever  use  masks  in  their 
l^erformances,  as  far  as  I  can  learn,  with  the  solitary  exception  of  the 
people  of  Baffin  Land,  where  a  mask  of  the  hide  of  the  bearded  seal  is 
worn  on  certain  occasions.  Nordenskiiild  saw  one  wooden  mask  .among 
the  peojde  near  the  winter  ((uarters  of  the  Vega,  but  learned  that  this 
had  been  brought  from  Uering  Strait,  and  probably  from  America."' 

The  dancing  mask  i)reviously  referred  to  and  shown  in  plate  16  is 
from  Kuskoquim,  and  was  collected  by  Mr.  E.  W.  Nelson.  The  speci- 
men is  of  interest  from  the  fact  that  it  constitutes  perhaps  the  only 
example  of  woodwork  bearing  pictographs  in  color.  The  specimen, 
including  the  lower  i)endant,  measures  about  OA  inches  in  length,  the 
width  of  the  largest  piece — bearing  the  eyes,  nose,  and  mouth — being 
almost  3  inches  across.  Upon  the  top  and  right  side  are  a  number  of 
punctures  for  the  insertion  of  feathers,  oidy  three  of  the  latter  being 
now  present.    The  four  slats  of  wood  are  attached  to  the  main  piece 


>  Ninth  Annual  Report  of  tho  Knrean  of  Ethnology,  1887-'88,  1802,  p.  370. 


.1 


which  are 
of  s.acred 

(Thich  are 
8 — a  rein- 
?rpent,  as 
e  natives. 
08.  .3,  4,  5, 
s,  like  the 
or  other 

rliff'erence 

l)ove  iudi- 

denotiug 


ses  of  the 
of  which 


example 
ue  author 
re  in  the 
lamented 
Bs  a  very 
the  other 
s  in  their 
on  of  the 
ed  seal  is 
sk  among 
that  this 
jrica."' 
ate  1(J  is 
lie  speci- 

the  only 
ipecimen, 
ugth,  the 
h — being 
amber  of 
ier  being 
aiu  piece 


370. 


I 


j,* 


f  ?" 


■  i      (-J 


ii|^ 


.; 


6  *'  .^' 


i 


1 


k^ 


H 


Repoit  of  U.  S.  National  Museum,  1895. — Ho     nan. 


/ 


D 


Plate  74. 


::^- 


(JKAPHIC    ART   OF    THK    ESKIMOS. 


915 


< 

z 
o 
s 

UJ 
(T 
U 

O 


z 
< 

< 

I 
03 


by  ineans  of  thin  strands  of  bark.  The  Heveral  pieces  were  rudely 
besmeared  with  a  white  chalky  paint,  while  over  several  portions  of 
them  are  marking's  in  black. 

Tpon  the  left  cheek  of  the  mask  are  four  vertically  arranged  figures 
of  masks,  rather  jirotes)]ue  in  expression.  The  lower  one  is  not  us 
elaborately  drawn  as  the  others.  Upon  the  upper  piece  of  wood,  upon 
the  left  of  the  mask,  is  an  outline  of  an  umiak,  with  sail  spread,  iu 
the  bow  of  the  boat  is  the  figure  of  a  native  with  hands  and  arms 
uplifted,  while  another  llgure  is  visible  in  the  stem  acting  as  helmsman. 

The  markings  upon  the  remaining  piece  are  ))robably  meaningless. 

Among  the  Indiansof  the  Northwest  (Joast,  the lakutat  and Tshilkat, 
and  to  a  certain  extent  the  neighboring  tribes,  nnisked  dances  are  of 
frequent  occurren«'e,  the  i)urport  being  usually  ceremonial;  though  at 
this  day  much  of  the  former  sacred luiss  of  these  ceremonials  has  become 
debased.  Among  the  Kskinu)  ceremonial  «lan»es  are  of  great  impor- 
tance, though  not  of  such  fretpience  as  among  their  southern  neighbors. 

In  llg.  110  the  vertical  strokes  shown  by  Nos.  1  and  10  represent  the 
timbers  supporting  the  structure  within  which  the  dauic  takes  place, 
not  suOicient  space  being  available  upon  the  specimen  of  ivory  to  rep- 

lllljut^lli 

Fiff.  140. 

CBIteMOMAI,  DANCE, 

resent  the  roof.  Nos.  2,  7,  and  0  are  the  drununers,  each  armed  with  a 
Hat,  tajnbourine  drum,  generally  used  by  the  shamen  everywhere.  Nos. 
3,  4,  5,  0,  and  8  represent  the  dancers,  marked  with  what  appears  to  be 
bear  heads — made  of  some  light  wood,  such  as  cedar.  The  attitudes  of 
the  dancers  are  remarkably  clever  and  lifelike,  showing  the  various 
attitudes,  both  natural  and  assumed,  in  imitation  of  the  animal  repre- 
sented,  as  may  be  found  at  any  dance  of  aboriginal  peoples  when  they 
attain  that  ])articular  degree  of  enthusiasm  consequent  upon  and  per- 
cei)tible  to  the  beholder  after  a  feast. 

This  engraving,  plate  7.3,  tig.  2,  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  on 
account  of  the  portrayal  of  the  transmission  of  sound,  a  stage  of  devel- 
opment found  in  but  few  instances  in  Alaskan  pi(!tographs,  but  of 
frequentoccurrence  among  the  Cheyennes,and  other  neighboring  tribes, 
in  the  vicinity  of  Foft  Sill,  Indiau  Territory,  and  other  posts  farther 
north. 

The  entire  record  relates  to  a  ceremonial  diince,  held  on  account  of  a 
sick  person,  and  the  indication  of  the  village  houses  and  sledges  of 
visiting  natives. 

The  narrator  is  iu'licated  at  No.  1,  his  arms  outstretched  to  embrace 
the  surrouudiug  area  us  the  place  where  he  was,  aud  which,  perhaps, 


916 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1H95. 


;1:  I 


is  his  residence  also.  Nos.  ti,  G,  and  8  denote  scaflolds  for  fond,  the 
accumulated  material  being  apparent  upon  the  transverse  poles.  At  the 
residence  at  No.  3  smoke  is  emerging  IVom  the  smoke  hole  in  the  roof, 
and  someone  is  also  upon  the  roof  of  the  entrance  reaching  outward 
toward  what  may  have  been  intended  for  a  scaffold,  but  which,  because 
of  erosion,  had  become  partly  obliterated,  as  have  also  ])ortions  of  the 
human  beings  beneath.  The  next  house.  No.  i,  also  has  a  column  of 
smoke  rising  from  the  smoko  hole,  while  several  vertical  lines  before 
the  entrance  indicate  the  original  i)ortrayal  of  the  ncciessary  storehouse 
or  food  scattold.  No.  a  is  another  permanent  habitation,  while  at  No. 
7,  over  the  roof  of  the  entrance  to  the  house,  is  the  outline  of  a  man,  hor- 
izontal and  Avith  the  hand  thrown  downward  as  if  making  a  common 
gesture  sign  for  lyinff  down,  or  to  He  there,  having  reference  i)erhaps  to 
the  recumbent  position  of  the  occupant,  who  may  be  sick  and  for  whose 
benefit  the  ceremonies  are  in  operation.  A  heavy  column  of  smoke  is 
issuing  from  the  chimney. 

Upon  the  house  No.  9  are  two  persons  apparently  interested  in 
something  or  someone  at  No.  7,  no  doubt  referring  to  the  sick  man. 
At  No.  10  is  designated  the  entrance  to  the  house  No.  D,  and  upon  the 
roof  are  four  persons;  the  one  at  the  right  holding  in  one  hand  tam- 
bourine drum,  while  with  the  other  hand  he  is  beating  it,  the  sound 
therefrom  passing  forward  over  the  group  of  dancers  before  the  house. 
In  the  rear  of  the  drummer  are  three  assistant  musicians,  and  from  the 
absence  of  drums  or  rattles  they  appear  to  be  singers,  the  belief  being 
furthermore  strengthened  from  the  fact  that  each  of  the  three  has  an 
arm  or  hand  elevated;  the  one  at  the  right  appearing  to  place  his 
hand  before  his  mouth  to  denote  in  gesture  language  xpeecli,  voice, 
song,  a  common  jjortrayal  in  various  Indian  pictographs,  as  well  as 
Maya,  Mexican,  Egyptian,  and  llittite  hieroglyphs  and  objective  repre- 
sentations of  voice  in  various  forms.  The  remaining  figures  also  appear 
to  have  their  hands  directed  upward  before  the  face,  an  approach  in 
gesture  to  the  preceding.  The  sign  for  sing,  singing,  is  made  by  hold- 
ing the  palm  upward  and  passing  the  hand  u[»ward  and  forward  from 
the  mouth,  though  beginning  before  the  neck  and  passing  at  from  6  to 
10  inches  before  the  mouth. 

The  narrow  vertical  line  with  streamers  of  cloth  or  calico  attached, 
and  surmounted  by  the  wooden  effigy  of  a  bird,  is  a  votive  offering  or 
♦'shaman  stick"  erected  upon  the  roof  of  the  house  No.  9  in  commemo- 
ration of  one  of  the  household. 

The  character  at  No.  V2  is  another  shaman,  armed  with  a  drum,  which 
he  holds  in  one  hand  and  with  the  other  strikes  the  head  with  a  drum- 
stick, which  is  seen  crossing  the  surface  in  the  endeavor  to  drive  away 
one  of  the  evil  spirits  or  demons  hovering  about  in  the  air  after  being 
expelled  by  exorcism  from  the  body  of  the  sick  man. 

The  group  embracing  nine  figures,  No.  13,  denotes  the  assistant 
shamans  driving  about  and  punishing  the  evil  spirits — the  same  one 


ORAnilC    ART   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


017 


heiiig  1u>rc  loprodiuuMl  with  tiplittcd  liaiids  niul  once  as  u  small  bein^ — 
tlioy  being  masked  and  decorated  witli  fringed  sleeves  and  garments 
and  armed  with  weapons  possessing  mysterious  power  in  exorcism. 
The  demon  appears  in  nearly  each  instance  to  supplicate  the  shaman 
not  to  strike  with  the  uplifted  rod,  the  gesture  sign  for  sup]>lication 
being  accurately  jiortrayed,  both  hands  being  elevated  toward  the  one 
addressed,  not  only  surpassing  in  })ictorial  execution  the  sann^  idea  as 
found  among  other  American  aborigines,  but  being  exactly  similar  to 
the  hieroglyph,  for  the  same  idea,  of  the  Kgyptians. 

Nos.  14,  ir»,  and  1(5  are  sledges,  drawn  up  near  to  the  phu*  of  the 
dance.  The  representations  of  the  sledges  are  more  nearly  like  some 
llgures  of  the  baidarku  shown  elsewhere,  because  of  the  abnostvertitMl 
bow  and  the  dark  line  along  the  top,  consisting  of  two  horizontal  lines 
within  which  are  short  vertical  strokes,  the  latter  denoting  bales  of 
peltries  and  furs  received  from  other  natives  for  barter.  The  man  at 
the  fore  part  of  the  sledge  in  No.  14  is  smoking  a])ipe,  while  the  iigures 
on  top  of  both  No.  14  and  15  appear  to  enjoy  the  scene,  tiieir  arms 
ap])arently  raised  as  if  in  acclamation.  At  No.  1(5  the  dog  is  assisted 
in  pulling  the  sledge  by  the  man,  Avho  is  dragging  at  a  cord,  the  load 
being  evidently  a  heavy  one,  as  the  uuni  at  the  side  of  the  sledge  is 
also  tugging  at  it  to  assist  in  pro]mlsion. 

The  scene  presented  in  plate  73,  tig.  1,  is  of  interest,  because  the 
ceremonial  <lance  is  i)erformed  in  the  middle  of  the  village,  as  indicated 
by  the  peculiar  distribution  of  the  habitations  an«l  the  sledges  of  the 
visitors. 

The  characters  mi  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3  denote  permanent  or  winter  habi- 
tations, upon  which  are  observed  some  of  the  witnesses  to  the  dance. 
No.  4  is  a  high  pole  erected  between  the  habitations,  and  upon  it  is  an 
cfligy  of  an  animal,  while  the  pole  itself  is  decorated  with  streamers  of 
calico  or  cloth,  tlannel,  etc.  No.  5  is  a  slender  stick,  upon  the  top  of 
which  is  placed  the  wooden  efhgy  of  a  bird,  the  whole  being  designated 
a  "shaman  stick"  or  votive  offering,  being  a  token  or  memorial  erected 
by  a  relative  or  friend  to  one  deceased.  The  memorial  is  intended  also 
as  a  "luck  stick,"  i.  e.,  a  public  testimonial  of  wishing  luck  to  the 
spirit  of  the  dead. 

Near  theliabitation  No.  2  is  an  oblong  figure  upon  stilts,  denoting  a 
scaffold  upon  which  food  is  stored.  These  are  so  erected  as  to  be 
beyond  the  reach  of  dogs  and  noxious  or  predatory  animals. 

Nos.  (>  to  12  are  sledges  belonging  to  a  i)aity  of  fur  traders  who 
(chanced  to  stop  at  the  village.  At  Nos.  0  and  12  the  dogs  have 
already  been  unhitched  and  the  owners  are  seated  at  the  front,  smok- 
ing their  pipes.  Jiales  of  goods  are  indicated  by  the  solid  outline  of 
oblong  figures  raised  upon  short  lines  above  the  sledges  themselves. 

The  human  figures  represented  by  Nos.  13  to  22  are  the  shaman 
and  his  assistants.  These  are  duplicate  characters  of  the  latter  por- 
trayed in  driving  away  evil  spirits,  Nos.  25  to  20,  which  an^  indicated 


I 


t.-'! 


y 


f-T^ 


t  . 


! 


<;  t-.-.- 


III 


■'  i-. 


!  -■ 


I-  ^i' 


W  ^   ' 


918 


KEPOKT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1896. 


OH  liuiiiiui  tui'in.s,  curved,  with  tlic  I'uot  and  Ic^'h  turned  upward  and  the 
arniH  thrown  ibrwurd,  uh  if  making  violent  eftbrts  at  Jumping.  These 
spirits  are  driven  around  from  one  ])oint  to  another,  Home  sluinmns 
driving  and  Htriliing  tlieni  to  compel  their  de]>artnre,  while  others  arc 
assisting  in  exorcism  by  using  tlio  magic  rattles,  seen  as  short  T-shaped 
figures  in  tlie  hands  of  some  of  tlie  assistants. 

A11oftliisccremonyisforthe]uirposeof  exorcism,  the  expulsion  of  the 
demons  of  disease  from  the  body  of  a  sick  man,  indicated  as  wrap]>ed 
up  at  Xo.  lit,  where  he  is  supposed  to  be  lying  upon  the  ground. 

The  entire  grouping  of  tlie  figures  is,  necessarily,  ])laced  along  two 
base  lines,  each  line  running  parallel  with  the  border  of  the  ivory  bow 
upon  which  the  record  is  i)ortrayed.  The  heads  of  the  different  indi- 
viduals, as  well  as  the  housetops  and  the  toi)S  of  the  sledges,  are  all 
directed  inward  toward  the  middle,  this  being  the  limit  of  possibility 
of  artistic  execution  in  attempting  a  bird's  eye  view  of  the  whole  vil 
lageand  its  dancing  ground — the  latter  being  about  the  high  decorated 
pole,  at  No.  4,  but  for  lack  of  space  the  ceremonial  is  transferred  to 
where  it  is  drawn — the  intenticm  being  to  represent  the  dancers  as  if 
in  a  circle,  their  movements  being  directed  around  the  pole  bearing  the 
animal  tigiire. 


3  4       5        6     7 

Fifj.  141. 
RIIAMAMSTIC  CEKEMKNIAL. 


8  0 


10 


11 


Two  distinct  styles  of  engraving  occur  in  the  pictograph  represented 
in  lig.  141,  although  they  are  probably  by  the  sauie  artist.  The  habi- 
tations shown  in  Xos.  1  and  3  are  in  delicately  engraved  lines  quite 
foreign  in  execnti<m  to  the  crudely  carved  figures  in  Nos.  4  to  11.  The 
houses  are  in  ])rotile,  and  both  indicate  the  place  of  entrance  at  the 
right  side,  beneath  the  delicate  vertical  rod  projecting  .above.  Human 
figures  are  seen  ui)on  the  roofs,  those  upon  No.  .'5  appearing  to  be  occu- 
pied in  an  animated  conversation,  as  suggested  by  the  attitude  of  the 
arms. 

The  vertical  poles,  connected  by  a  crosapiece,  indicated  in  Xo.  2,  rep- 
resent a  ra(!k  where  lish  and  the  meat  of  game  are  suspended  for  dry- 
ing. The  figure  of  a  man  engaged  in  some  occupation  connected  with 
the  rack  is  observed  between  the  vertical  poles. 

The  human  figures  indicated  in  Nos.  4  to  9  are  engaged  in  a  dance, 
the  attitudes  of  all  but  two  being  well  executed  in  the  representation  of 
the  peculiar  manner  of  leaning  forward  the  body,  common  to  nearly  all 
aboriginal  tribes  when  participating  in  such  pastimes.  In  Xos.  6  and 
8  are  seen  peculiar  tail-like  appendages,  representing  merely  ornamental 
streamers  often  tied  to  the  belt  at  the  spiral  portion  to  represent  the 
tails  of  animals  which  these  natives  sometimes  imitate,  both  in  dress 
and  actions. 


OliAI'HIC   Altr   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


919 


Tliu  twu  luainiiiiilian  fit^iiros  at  tlio  extreino  rij^lit — Nos.  10  aixl  11 — 
aio  (I()j,'K,  facing  on«^  another,  an  attitiulo  U88iuiie<l  by  strangtiis,  as 
tlifise  lia<l  probably  acuoiupauicd  their  masters  to  the  phu-e  of  the 
ceremony  portrayed. 

IMate  73,  lig.  1  represents  a  ceremonial  dance.  The  characters  in 
Nos.  1  and  I,  representing  three  pairs  of  human  forms,  are  dancers, 
who  arc  aiding  the  shaman  at  Xo.  U,  who  is  shown  with  his  hands 
uplifted  and  throwing  them  circularly  about  as  if  "stirring  up  a 
bree/e,"  which  lui  is  in  fact  doing,  in  »o  far  as  it  pertains  to  the  spirits 
of  the  air,  whose  aid  he  is  invoking.  All  this  is  being  done  becaus(^ 
the  seated  figure  at  the  left  end  of  the  habitation.  No.  3,  is  reipiesting 
the  shaman's  assistance.  Four  other  human  figures  are  indicattnl  alxuit 
the  same  habitation,  though  partly  worn  ot}',  and  at  the  right-hand 
upper  corner  is  a  shaman  stick  or  votive  ottering,  placed  there  to  the 
menuuy  of  one  of  the  owner's  family.  The  stick  a^tpears  to  be  sur- 
mounted by  an  etligy  of  a  bird,  this  being  the  common  practice.  Nos. 
.")  and  0  appear  to  be  dancers,  each  armed  with  rattles,  small  round 
frames  of  wood,  having  both  flat  sides  covered  with  seal  gut  or  buck- 
skin, being  used  by  shamen  or  their  assistants.  No.  7  denotes  another 
habitation,  at  the  left  end  of  which  is  a  votive  ottering  and  at  the 
other  a  human  figure,  who,  with  his  left  hand,  reaches  down  to  another. 
No.  8,  who  appears  in  the  act  of  winking  aid  from  spirits  in  the  air. 

No.  0  is  undetermined,  but  Nos.  10,  11,  and  12  are  reindeer,  the  first 
and  last  having  attached  to  them  the  spirit  or  guardian  of  the  shaman, 
who  has  compelled  the  animals  to  come  w  itliin  reach  of  the  hunter's 
gun,  though  only  one  of  the  three.  No.  1-,  having  been  se(Mired. 

No.  13  represents  the  shaman  in  another  instance  when  his  services 
were  requested;  this  time  by  a  native  shown  in  No.  14,  at  the  left-hand 
end  and  seated  or  leaning  against  the  dwelling.  Some  votive  offerings 
are  also  perceived  upon  the  roof,  while  to  the  right.  No.  15,  are  a  num 
ber  of  natives  indulging  in  a  dance,  probably  a  ceremonial  one,  as  the 
record  is  one  pertaining  to  shamanistic  matters  entirely. 

The  ivory  bag  haiulle  shown  on  plate  32,  fig.  7,  is  an  excellent  piece 
of  workmanship,  and  presents  evidence  of  artistic  expression  not  met 
with  in  any  other  specimens. 

The  central  disk  presents  therelief  carving  of  a  human  face,  the  nose 
being  clearly  indicated  as  ditterent  from  that  drawn  or  engraved  upon 
the  seal's  face,  while  below  the  mouth  are  the  vertical  lines  to  denote 
the  tattooing  practiced  by  the  women.  The  expression  of  the  face  is 
rather  Arm  and  represents  a  frown.  The  ring  surrounding  the  face 
is  the  fur  hood,  the  fur  itself  being  indicated  by  the  short  radiating 
lines  extending  therefrom. 

The  opposite  side  of  the  specimen  is  a  reproduction  of  the  obverse, 
with  the  exception,  however,  that  the  face  is  that  of  a  man,  the  moutli 
being  portrayed  by  having  the  corners  turned  upward  to  denote  i\ 
smile,  while  below  either  corner  is  a  circular  spot  to  indicate  the 
labrets.    The  furred  hood  is  also  shown. 


Tn 


i)20 


KKPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUHEUM,  1895. 


r  I 


■ii'-   I 


I  !^  1: 


Upon  cither  Hide  o(  thu  I'auu  arc  Hoals,  oriitiinuiittMl  with  myeil  cir- 
cles, >vhiU)  a,\ouii  the  h»wer  cdp)  tuc  two  parallel  liiicH  hearing;  interior 
decorations  of  simple  cross  lines. 

The  upper  e«l^e  has  a  simple  longitudinal  crease,  while  beueaih  this 
line  is  t'lirtlierntoro  ornamented  by  short  lateral  ones. 

INDIVIDIAL   SHAMANISM. 

The  illustration  prt'sented  in  i\\r.  141!  is  |>erhaps  unique,  the  ori"'i<al 
having  been  obtained  from  a  native  well  versed  in  shamanism,  a 
fact  juofi'ssed  to  be  one. 

Descriptions  of  Hhannms' ceremonials  in  medicine  hxlj^es,  especially 
in  the  initiation  of  candidates,  were  published  by  the  present  writer  in 
the  Seventh  Annual  Ueport  of  the  llureau  of  ICthnolo^^y,  and  relate 

to  the  Ojibwa  Midc'wiwin  or 
(Irand  Medicine  Society,  a  cult 
society  known  to  the  Catludic 
Fathers  who  first  canui  to  Can 
ada,  but  which,  until  the  above 
rVport  was  published,  had 
never  been  thorou}»hly  under- 
stooil.  The  complete  exposi- 
tion (»f  the  mythology  d 
ritual  thereto  was  jjiven  ' 
present  writer;  and  a  similar 
contribution  to  science  has 
been  recently  ]>ublished  in  the 
Fourteenth  Annual  Keport  of 
the  same  J  Uireau,  and  embraces 
the  exposition  of  the  ceremoni- 
als of  the  several  cult  societies 
of  the  Menomini  Indians,  the 
report  being  a  part  only  of  the 
memoir  which  embr.aces  a  com- 
plete history  of  that  tribe,  lirst 
known  through  their  discovery 
by  Nicollet,  in  H!34. 
The  illustration  given  above,  representing  an  Kskimo  shaman  heal- 
ing a  sick  man,  with  the  explanation  given  by  the  recorder  thereof,  is 
of  peculiar  value  and  interest.  The  Innuit  ceremonial  structures  are 
partly  underground,  the  roof  being  covered  with  turf  and  other 
materials,  and  the  entrance  thereto  being  by  a  partly  underground  or 
possibly  tunnel  like  passage- way. 

In  the  figure,  a  represents  the  entrance  to  the  chamber,  or  lodge,  as 
a  habitation  of  natives  or  Indians  is  often  designated;  b,  the  tireplace; 
c,  a  vertical  ])iece  of  wood  upon  which  is  [>laced  a  cross  piece,  upon 
each  end  of  which  is  a  lamp  made  of  steatite  aud  fed  with  fat;  d,  the 


Via.  142- 

HHAHAN  ClRINO  A  SICK  MAN  IN  THE  L'BUBMUNIAL 
HTKICTIRE. 


OKAI'IIIC    AKT   OF   TMK    K8KIM(>8. 


M21 


iniisieiaiiH  upon  rai.s(>d  Hcuta  (Iriiniiniiii;  upon  tainboiiriiH^  (Iriiins,  mid 
pi'udiiciii^  IIUI8U;  to  tli»  inovenieiitH  of  tlio  slinniaii  (liirin)<:  liis  incanta- 
tioiiH  ill  exoriMHin^  tliu  <U>iiioii,  or  evil  Mpirit,  Huppost'd  to  liavo  posses- 
sion of  the  patient;  e,  visitors  and  friends  seated  aronnd  tliu  iiit^'riorof 
the  chamber  to  witness  the  ceremony; ,/',  the  sliaman  represented  in 
making;  his  iiuMintations  preparatory  to  exorcising:  from  the  body  of  the 
psitient  the  demon  to  whose  presence  the  disesise  is  attributed;  //,  the 
patient  seated  upon  tlie  th>or  of  the  chamber — the  U'gs  bein^  fohle<l 
under  iiis  body  and  scarcely  visitile  to  the  behohU>r,  they  are  omitted 
in  the  picto^raph.  /(  represents  the  shaman  in  another  sta^e  of  the 
ceremonies,  driving;  out  the  demon.  /  is  anotlier  lif^ure  of  the  ])atient — 
from  hi$^  head  is  seen  to  issue  a  line  connecting:  it  with  ./'.  ;  is  the 
demon.  A- is  the  shaman  in  the  act  of  driving'  the  demon  out  of  the 
lod^e  or  chamber — in  his  hands  are  sacred  objects,  his  personal  fetish, 
in  which  liis  power  lies;  1,  t'le  tlyinj;  demon  eiub'avoriiijj  to  esciipo 
throu}>:h  the  doorway,  ni  and  n  are  assistants  to  tlic!  shaman,  stationed 
at  the  entrance  to  strike  and  hasten  the  departure  of  the  demon. 

JMate  G4,  ti^.  1,  represents  a  drill  bow  troni  the  north  of  Norton  Sound. 
Contrary  to  the  usual  custom,  this  specimen  is  curved  e<ljjewise,  so  that 
upon  the  back  appears  one  continuous  record,  while  upon  the  front  side 
there  are  two,  the  front  being  beveled  from  tlu^  central  line.  Quite  a 
number  of  interesting  tigures  appear  u|>oii  this  record,  the  results  in 
hunting  having  apparently  been  brought  about  by  the  kind  otlices  of 
a  shaman,  to  whom  application  lias  been  made  for  success  by  the 
reconler  or  owner.  In  the  smal.  p;ice  at  the  extreme  left  is  tlie  outline 
of  a  human  ligure,  the  arms  bent  and  the  hands  touching  the  sides, 
two  i»rominent  ears,  and  three  lines  directed  iipwanl  from  tln^  head. 
This  represents  the  shaman  winise  intliieiice  had  been  obtained.  Imme- 
diately below  this  human  tigure  is  an  oblong  outline  attatOied  to  a 
delicate  groove  or  line  extending  forward  t«)  a  whale.  This  represents 
the  doat  attached  to  the  harpoon  line.  The  next  character  rei)resents 
a  seal  facing  the  right,  its  vis-si-vis  being  a  native  crawling  along  with  a 
spear  in  his  hand,  evidently  intending  to  capture  it.  The  short  etchings 
projecting  from  the  ba:e  line  and  extending  to  the  right  to  a  distance  of 
about  three  inches,  represent  a  marsh.  Five  seals  are  shown  about  the 
middle  of  this  marsh,  as  if  swimming  in  the  water  with  only  the  head 
and  top  of  the  body  projecting,  lieyond  these  animals,  and  at  the  end 
of  the  marsh,  is  the  outline  of  a  boat.  Some  distance  to  tl-e  right  is  a 
ligure  very  much  resembling  a  crouching  bear.  This  aguin  is  a  repro- 
duction of  the  tigure  of  the  shaman  whose  kindly  otlices  had  been 
secured  upon  another  occasion.  He  seems  to  be  throwing  forward  a 
magic  bullet  which,  used  by  the  hunter  in  the  kaiak  above  him,  enabled 
the  hunter  to  secure  the  seal  he  wanted,  as  shown  by  the  bullet  mark 
above  the  animal  a  short  distance  in  front  of  the  kaiak.  Timui  the 
same  face  of  the  bow  will  be  observed  a  number  of  characters  as  if 
suspended  from  the  upper  line  thereof.    liy  turning  the  bow  about,  the 


ii  ■' 


>  i 


'U 


■  i 


li: 


w  h 


I- 


I 


«! 


922 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


I)icture8  will  be  brought  into  proper  position.  Beginning  at  the  left, 
are  two  elongated  figures,  each  upon  stilts,  which  represent  the  scaf- 
folds upon  which  these  boats  are  placed  for  drying.  Three  winter  habi- 
tations are  next  in  order,  about  which  are  a  number  of  human  beings 
in  various  attitudes.  Smoke  issues  from  the  top  of  the  house,  and  the 
vertical  rods  projecting  from  the  first  and  second  indicate  votive  offer- 
ings. To  the  right  of  the  third  house  are  three  human  beings  standing 
about  an  umiak,  which  is  drawn  foreshortened,  and  a  line  extending  to 
the  right  to  an  oblong  figure,  which  is  a  seal  which  they  have  captured. 
There  are  outlines  of  five  natives  with  arms  extended,  one  with  a  spear, 
but  the  import  of  these  characters  is  not  intelligible.  The  next  figure, 
however,  is  shown  in  the  act  of  dragging  a  seal,  while  beyond  it  is 
another  seal,  toward  whic'i  a  native  is  throwing  his  spear.  Beyond 
the  latter  is  sliown  the  body  of  another  seal,  toward  which  a  hunter  is 
crawling  on  all  fours,  and  in  an  opposite  direction  from  him  is  his  com- 
panion engaged  in  like  i)ursuit  of  another  seal,  shown  to  the  right.  As 
the  bow  is  shown  in  the  illustration,  with  the  figure  of  a  shaman  at  the 
right,  it  w  I  be  observed  that  along  the  upper  face  are  a  number  of 
illustrations  which  represent  \arious  avocations.  At  the  extreme  right 
is  the  body  of  a  rein<leer  lying  upon  the  ground,  the  horns  at  the  right 
l)rojecting  upward,  and  uiion  the  body  of  the  animal,  as  well  as  behind 
it,  are  birds  feeding  upon  it.  Following  this  toward  the  right  are  four 
other  animals  of  like  species,  with  the  outlines  of  a  fifth,  which  can  not 
be  clearly  determined.  Following  the  base  line  for  some  distance,  we 
come  to  another  deer  in  the  act  of  browsing.  A  little  beyond  the 
middle,  toward  the  right,  are  three  natives,  the  first  going  toward  the 
right  with  his  harpoon  directed  forward,  the  second  with  a  line  extend- 
ing to  the  right  to  some  object  upon  the  ground,  wh'ch  the  third  appears 
to  be  stabbing  with  his  spear,  the  weapon  being  uplifted.  This  may 
represent  the  killing  of  a  seal.  Another  native  is  seen  approaching 
this  group  of  three,  beyond  which  is  the  outline  of  a  large  mammal, 
evidently  intended  to  represent  a  deer. 

By  again  turning  the  bow  upside  down,  so  that  the  upper  line  becomes 
the  base  line,  another  record  presents  itself.  The  group  of  figures  at 
the  extreme  left  denotes  two  natives  occupied  in  boiling  something,  as 
their  hands  are  attached  to  short  lines  extending  into  the  kettles,  which 
arc  placed  against  the  fire  from  which  the  smo^ie  is  rising.  It  is  very 
likely  that  they  are  cooking  the  meat  of  the  reindeer,  as  the  hide  of 
the  animal  is  8usi)ended  from  the  horizontal  drying  pole  or  scaffold  at 
the  right,  beneath  Avhich  another  native  is  occupied  in  hanging  up  the 
meat.  The  large,  irregularly  drawn  body  to  the  right  of  this  scaffold 
appears  to  denote  a  habitation.  Two  human  beings  are  engaged 
between  this  and  a  triangular  body  which  may  denote  a  summer  habi- 
tation, the  latter  being  usually  made  of  bark,  canvas,  or  boards.  To 
the  right  of  the  triangular  building  is  a  human  being,  beside  him  being 
another  scaffold  or  drying  pole  from  which  is  suspended  the  hide  of  a 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


923 


a  b 

FiK. 143. 
a,  8IIAMAN  MAKINO  IN('AN'TATIOMS;    b, 
INVOKINfJ  AID. 


Hinall  mammal.  Beyond  the  middle  of  the  bow,  toward  the  right,  is  a  fig- 
ure of  a  kaitik  with  a  native  within  it  paddling  forward  toward  a  larger 
umiak  under  Bail.  In  front  of  this  stands  a  man  with  a  gun  uplifted, 
as  if  shooting  toward  the  deer  whose  feet  are  attached  to  the  upper 
line  or  base  line  of  the  preceding  record.  Beyond  this  is  the  outline  of 
another  umiak  iinder  sail,  and  occupied  by 
three  hunters. 

In  fig.  143,  No.  a,  is  represented  a  native 
who  desired  the  services  of  a  shaman,  and, 
upon  visiting  one,  declared  his  needs  and 
probably  paid  the  fee  usually  required. 

The  shaman,  making  his  usual  ceremonies 
of  incantation  to  invoke  his  guardian  spirit, 
or  tutelary  daimon,  is  shown  with  that 
creature  about  to  depart  on  the  mission 
desired  by  the  shaman. 

The  spirit  is  a  bird,  and,  as  all  flying 
creatures  are  deemed  lucky,  it  is  here  represented  in  unusually  large 
size,  to  increase  the  importance  of  the  performer. 

Another  illustration  of  making  incantation  is  shown  in  fig.  143&,  the 
shaman  expressing  his  ability  to  cause  fish  to  come  to  the  hunter  by 
whom  the  proper  fee  is  paid.  The  drawing  is  taken  from  an  Alaskan 
shaman's  dnim,  but  appears  to  be  foreign  to  pure  Eskimo  drawing, 
having  probably  originally  come  from  the  Thlinkit,  or  neighboring 
tribes  of  Athabaskan  stock. 

A  remarkably  interesting  engraving  is  reproduced  in  fig.  144.  The 
profession  of  the  Eskimo  shaman  is  very  like  that  of  his  confrere  of  the 
Menomini  and  Ojibwa  Indians,  oi  Wisconsin  and  Minnesota,  respec- 
tively. He  has  the  power  to  invoke  his  i)ersonal  guardian  or  tutelary 
daimon  in  aiding  him  to  secure  the  services  of  other  deities  or  spirits 
to  perform  certain  acts  of  exorcism,  or  incantation  and  invocation,  so 
that  a  spirit  messenger  may  be  sent  on  almost  any  mission  for  informa- 
tion that  may  be  desired;  or  the  guardian  spirit  or  daimon  may  bring 
about  some  events,  or  control  the  actions  of  both  men  and  animals,  as 

may  be  desired. 

In  the  ilhistration,  fig. 
144,  is  shown  lirst,  at  No. 
1,  an  assistant,  who  aids 
the  i)erf'ormer.  No.  2,  by 
using  the   magic   or 
"medicine  drum."     No 
doubt  a  hunter  has  called,  .and  for  a  certain  consideration,  or  ])romise 
of  some  parts  of  the  game  secured,  has  solicited  the  shaman  for  "hunt- 
ing medicine,"  in  order  that  he  may  secure  a  whale. 

The  two  men,  the  shaman  and  his  assistant,  are  both  within  the 
shaman's  lodge,  the  inclosure  or  habitation  being  indicated  by  the 


3  4 

Fig.  144. 
SHAMANISTK"  CEBKMONY. 


■^p 


^Mi'i 


::.l.- 


V    ! 


924 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


ii' 


|i 


circular  line  wliii^h  surrounds  them  and  is  planted  upon  the  ground 
or  base  line.  The  mystic  induence  has  been  made  to  secure  a  whale, 
ISo.  4,  which  has  been  compelled  by  the  shaman's  alleged  supernatural 
power,  in  the  guise  of  an  anthropoid  deity,  to  swim  to  the  locality 
where  the  ceremonies  are  performed,  in  order  that  the  hunter  may  be 
enabled  to  reach  him.  The  short  serrated  marking  between  the  whale's 
head  and  the  figure  of  the  spirit  denotes  the  spray  spouted  from  the 
whale. 

The  line  connecting  the  spirit  and  the  shaman's  hand  is  the  indica- 
tion of  the  magic  influence  possessed  by  the  latter  over  the  spirit 
messenger. 

Other  illustrations  of  shamanistic  power  are  given,  especially  exam- 
ples of  exorcism  of  demons  possessing  the  sick  and  to  whom  illness  is 
attributed. 

The  illuatration  in  ftg.  145  is  reproduced  from  a  walrus-ivory  drill 
bow  in  the  museum  of  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company,  of  San  Fran- 
cisco, California.  The  interpretation  given  to  the  present  writer  is  as 
follows : 

Two  sick  men  were  brought  to  the  shaman  for  treatment.  The 
shaman's  summer  habitations  are  represented  in  Nos.  1  and  2,  the 


^'^^>^  >"^rfr  ^i^Mb.\ 


8  705  4  3  2  1 

Fig.  145. 
SHAMAN  EXORCISINO  DEMON. 

presence  of  trees  denoting  that  there  was  a  grove  close  by.  No.  3  is  the 
shaman,  who  is  represented  in  the  act  of  holding  one  of  his  "demons" 
or  personal  deities,  with  whose  .aid  he  pretends  to  expel  malignant 
spirits  or  demons  from  the  body  of  the  sick  man.  No.  4  is  the  demon 
under  control  of  the  shaman.  No.  5  represents  the  same  shaman  in  the 
act  of  exorcising  the  demon  in  the  patient.  Nos.  0  and  7  are  the  sick 
men  who  are  under  treatment  and  from  whom  the  "evil  beings"  have 
been  expelled.  The  two  "evil  beings"  or  demons  are  shown  in  No. 
8,  represented  in  violent  movement  in  their  endeavor  to  escape  the 
powerful  influence  of  the  shaman. 

The  engraving  presented  in  plate  73,  fig.  3,  is  without  doubt  one  of 
the  cleverest  artistic  products  thus  far  received  from  Alaska  and 
known  to  be  the  work  of  a  native.  The  entire  grouping  of  the  herd  of 
reindeer,  some  of  the  animals  walking  leisurely  along  while  others  stop 
to  browse,  and  while  the  foremost  manifest  curiosity  and  alarm,  indi- 
cates that  the  artist  was  not  only  a  close  observer  of  the  habits  of  the 
animal,  but  had  an  unusually  keen  acquaintance  with  the  anatomical 
structure  and  the  attitudes  assumed  under  difierent  circumstances  so 
as  to  express  the  emotions. 


OKAPHIC    ART   OP    THE    ESKIMOS. 


925 


Tho  hunters,  Nos.  18  and  19,  had  gono  to  a  shaman  to  seek  his  aid  in 
securing  luck  for  game,  and  the  shaman  (wlio  is  represented  by  the 
upper  part  of  the  body  only,  hands  outstretched,  above  the  two  rein- 
deer, Nos.  11  and  12)  being  favorably  disposed,  is  driving  the  game 
in  the  way  of  the  hunters,  his  assistants,  at  Nos.  1,  2,  and  5,  also  driv* 
ing  animals  by  being  portrayed  as  if  riding  upon  their  backs. 

No.  4  represents  a  fawn,  the  open  mouth  suggesting  its  crying  to  its 
parents,  while  the  upper  figure  at  No.  3  and  the  legless  one  at  tho 
space  between  Nos.  7  and  8  are  represented  as  beyond  the  lirst  tile  of 
animiils — an  attempt  at  perspective,  no  doubt. 

The  attitudes  of  Nos.  12  and  IG  are  a  good  attempt  at  foreshorten- 
ing, rather  a  difficult  undertaking  for  a  native  barbarian. 

A  doe  is  also  shown  above  the  animal  at  No.  10,  walking  parallel 
with  the  herd,  No.  17,  but  her  legs  are  supposed  to  be  invisible  because 
of  her  being  beyond  those  in  the  foreground. 

The  herd  at  No.  17  is  portrayed  as  an  elongated  body  with  numerous 
heads  and  two  legs  more  than  necessary  for  tlie  eight  animals  iiulicated. 
In  nearly  all  instances  the  horns  are  carefully  drawn  so  as  to  show  tho 
peculiar  curve  toward  the  front  as  well  as  the  so-called  snow  shovels — 
the  horns  projecting  forward  and  downward  over  the  nose,  and  by 
means  of  which  the  animals  cut  through  the  snow  in  search  of  lichens 
and  other  food. 

Nos.  18  and  19  are  the  hunters  with  bow  and  arrow,  the  attitudes 
assumed  in  shooting  being  well  represented.    No.  20  is  the  hut. 

In  the  accompanying  illustrations,  plate  74,  are  three  views  selected 
from  a  drill  bow,  in  the  museum  of  the  Alaska  Commercial  (Company 
of  San  Francisco,  California.  The  rod  upon  which  the  characters  occur 
is  here  presented  in  three  sections.  A,  B,  and  C.  In  A  is  found  the 
beginning  of  the  narrative  of  one  who  applied  to  a  sliaman  for  success 
in  hunting;  which  extends  only  one-half  of  tho  length  of  the  rod. 
The  course  of  the  inscription  is  then  continued  on  the  adjacent  side  of 
the  rod  at  the  middle,  and  reading  in  both  directions  (sections  B  and  C), 
toward  the  two  files  of  approaching  animals.  Biind  C  occupies  the 
whole  of  one  side. 

The  following  is  the  explanation  of  the  characters: 

A.  No.  1  represents  a  baidarka,  or  skin  boat,  resting  on  poles;  this 
is  done  in  order  that  the  vessel  may  dry.  No.  2  is  one  of  the  habita- 
tions of  the  village,  as  are  also  those  in  No.  4,  and  the  storehouses  in 
Nos.  5  and  7.  No.  3  denotes  a  tree  located  in  the  village.  No.  G  is  a 
tree,  between  the  branches  of  which  and  the  roofs  of  the  houses  are 
place<l  poles  for  drying  food — fish,  etc.  The  characters  from  No.  1  to 
No.  7  signify  the  settlement,  the  home  of  the  person  to  whom  the 
history  relates.  No.  8  is  the  hunter  sitting  on  the  ground  asking  for 
aid  and  making  the  gesture  for  supplication,  asking  by  elevating  both 
hands  toward  the  sky,  or  toward  the  one  from  whom  aid  is  solicited. 
No.  9  is  the  shaman  to  whom  application  is  made  by  the  hunter  desiring 


I. 


i 


u 


'I 
iff 


^■■y 


ij   i 


m  t 


^l 


v^iU 


.1  s 

•I-  " 

.  ^''  I 

^-  II  1: 


926 


ifiii 


'"'I 

il!!, 


1^1 1 


1    'J       !■ 

ir'' 

1 

f         i           ' 

rl 

J  ;r    1 

i- 

:" 

Ii 

^, 

fe' 

REPORT  OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


8uece88  in  the  cliuse.  The  Hliainau  has  finished  his  incantatious,  and 
while  still  retaining  his  left  arm  in  the  position  for  that  ceremony  holds 
the  right  toward  the  hnnter,  giving  him  the  success  requested.  No.  10 
is  the  shaman's  winter  lodge,  while  Nos.  11  and  13  are  trees  surrounding 
it,  as  well  as  the  eummer  habitation  noted  at  No.  12. 

In  the  illustration,  B  is  a  record  i)ertaiuing  to  the  hunter's  previous 
ai)plication  to  another  shaman  with  whom  no  satisfactory  arrangement 
could  be  made.  Consequently,  the  shaman  caused  the  game  to  flee  and 
get  out  of  the  hunter's  way.    The  detailed  description  is  as  follows: 

B.  No.  14  is  a  tree  standing  beside  the  habitation  No.  1~>,  upon  which 
the  shaman  is  observed  standing  and  driving  back  the  game  visible 
over  the  remainder  of  the  scene.  No.  10  is  a  deer,  the  nearest  to  and 
the  lirst  to  feel  the  shaman's  order  to  return  to  a  safe  place.  No.  17 
are  the  horns  of  a  deer  protruding  from  the  surface  of  the  river  which 
the  animal  is  swimming.  No.  18  is  a  fawn,  recognizable  also  by  the 
unusually  long  legs  as  compared  to  the  size  of  the  body. 

In  the  last  panel,  C,  is  recorded  the  continuation  of  the  story  begun 
by  the  recorder  or  hunter  in  A,  No.  8. 

No.  19  represents  a  tree  located  near  the  hunter's  habitation,  which  is 
shown  in  No.  20.  The  hunter,  designated  in  the  attitude  of  shooting, 
at  No.  21,  after  having  been  granted  the  request  for  success,  placed  the 
effigy  of  his  totem  upon  the  top  of  his  house  as  a  mark  of  gratification 
and  to  insure  greater  luck  in  his  undertaking.  Nos.  22  sind  23  embrace 
five  deer  t^hich  were  secured,  the  heads  of  the  animals  being  turned 
toward  the  hunter,  denoting  that  the  game  was  captured.  No.  24  is 
the  shaman's  demon  driving  the  game  toward  the  hunter,  while  in  Nos. 
25,  26,  27,  and  28  are  indicated  other  demons  who  were  invoked  to  aid 
the  chief  tutelary  guardian  of  the  shaman  primarily  invoked  for  this 
service. 

The  figure  in  No.  25  is  a  water  monster  resembling,  in  this  instance, 
a  whale,  but  which  is  represented  by  other  of  the  Innuit  as  a  four  or 
six  legged  serpent.  The  latter  idea  is  common  in  the  mythology  of  the 
Algonkian  tribes;  but  the  existence  of  such  a  being  in  the  mythology 
of  the  Aigalu'^amut  and  Kiate'^amut,  Innuit  as  well  perhaps  as  among 
others  of  this  nation,  seems  entirely  original  with  them. 

Plate  04,  tig.  2,  represents  a  bone  wedge  for  splitting  thin  strips  of 
wood  for  fish  traps.  The  specimen  is  from  Nunivak  Island,  and  is 
remarkable  for  the  curious  engraving  which  is  shown  to  exist  upon  the 
upper  surface.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  outline  within  which 
almost  all  the  small  figures  are  drawn  denotes  a  seal,  a  median  line 
extending  from  the  eye  backward  almost  to  the  tail.  Above  and 
beneath  this  arc  various  figures  of  guns,  animals,  plants,  and  straight 
lines,  while  upon  the  reverse,  at  a  point  nearly  2  inches  from  the 
tail,  there  projects  from  the  median  line  a  many  branched  tree,  imme- 
diately above  which  and  to  either  side  are  shown  two  reindeer  as  if 
browsing.     These  reindeer   present  a  peculiarity  which   has   been 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


927 


especially  noticeable  in  ZnTii  and  Algonkian  i>i(tograi)liy  to  represent 
what  is  designated  as  the  life  line.  This  consists  of  a  line  drawn  from 
the  month,  or  very  near  it,  backward  into  the  body,  where  it  terminates 
in  a  line,  or  more  generally  a  triangular  figure,  to  denote  the  head.  It 
is  a  sh.amanistic  figure,  <  kJ  indicates  that  the  shaman  who  possessed 
it  had  influence  over  the  life  of  the  animal  so  portrayed.  This  subject 
has  been  more  clearly  described  in  connection  with  the  shamanistic 
ceremonies  of  the  Ojibwa  Indians  in  the  en- 
graving of  the  Mide'wiwin  or  Grand  Uledicine 
Society  of  the  Ojibwa,  published  in  the  Four- 
teenth Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  Eth- 
nology. 


VOTIVE   OFFERINGS   AND  MORTUARY. 


Fig.  146. 
VOTIVE  OKKEKINd. 


Fig.  14G  is  copied  from  a  piece  of  walrus 
ivory  in  the  museum  of  the  Alaska  Commercial  (Company,  San  Fran- 
cisco, California,  and  was  interi)reted  to  the  present  writer  in  San 
Francisco  in  1882. 

The  left-hand  figure  is  a  votive  offering  or  "shaman  stick,"  com- 
monly designated  a  medicine  stick,  erected  to  the  memory  of  one 
departed.    The  "bird"   carvings  are   considered  typical  of   "good 
spirits,"  and  the  above  was  erected  by  the  reniorse- 
XfjL^        stricken  individual  who  had  killed  the  person  shown. 
/  /  Tlie  headless  body  represents  the  man  who  was  killed. 

,  In  this  respect  the  Ojibwa  manner  of  portraying  a  man 

J  "killed"  or  "dead"  is  similar.    Comparison  with  another 

'"P*  Eskimo  drawing,  designating  a  "killed  whale"  by  the 

I  presence  in  the  back  of  a  harpoon,  may  be  made  herewith 

as  another  concei)tion  of  the  idea  of  "dead"  or  "killed." 
^^  The  right-hand  figure  represents  the  houiicide  who 

^n*  erected  the  "grave  post"  or  "shaman  stick."    The  arm 

^  is  thrust  downw.ar<l  toward  the  earth,  to  represent  the 

gesture  for  lill.    This  is  common,  likewise,  to  the  gesture 
for  the  same  idea  as  made  by  the  Blackleet  and  Dakota 
**  Indians. 

^^  In  lig.  147  is  reproduced  an  inscription  from  a  grave 

JS^^  post  commemorating  a  liunter,  as  land  animals  are  shown 
to  be  his  chief  pursuit.  The  following  is  the  explanation 
of  the  characters : 
No.  a  is  the  baidarka,  or  bosit,  holding  two  ])ersons. 
The  occupants  are  shown,  as  arc  also  the  i)addles,  wliich  project  below 
the  horizontal  body  of  the  vessel. 

No.  h  is  a  rack  for  drying  skins  and  fish.  A  pole  is  added  above  it, 
from  which  are  seen  floating  streamers  of  calitio  or  cloth.  No.  e  is  a 
i'ox.    No.  il  is  a  land  otter,  while  No.  e  is  the  hunter's  summer  habita- 


Fig.  147. 

INSCIIIPTION    ON 

UKAVE  rOHT. 


li 


928 


REPORT    OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUJI,  1895. 


t    ', 


)  I 


■■■«■'  V'- 


'  It 


i*  ix 


b 


tiouH.  These  are  temporary  dwellings,  and  usually  constructed  at  a 
distance  from  home.  This  also  indicates  the  profession  of  a  skin  hunter, 
as  the  permanent  lodges,  indicated  as  winter  houses,  i.  e.,  with  round 
or  domelike  roof,  are  located  near  the  seashore,  and  summer  houses 
are  only  needed  when  at  some  distance  from  home,  where  a  considera- 
ble length  of  time  is  spent  in  hunting. 
The  accompanying  illustration,  fig.  148,  is  of  a  similar  nature,  and  is 
,  erected  to  the  memory  of  a  fisherman. 

X^  At  a  is  represented  the  baidarka,  containing  the  owner 

''  and  a  companion,  probably  denoting  the  friend  of  him  to 

"  whose  memory  the  tablet  was  erected.    No.  b  denotes 

the  bow  used  in  shooting  seal  and  other  small  marine 
animals. 

No.  c  is  a  seal,  the  chief  object  of  pursuit  of  the  deceased, 
while  d  indicates  a  whale,  an  animal  also  hunted  by  him. 
In  the  illustration  in  fig.  149  is  a  drawing  of  a  village 
and  burial  ground,  drawn  by  a  native  in  imitation  of  the 
original  seen  by  him  among  the  natives  of  the  southern 
mainland — the  Aigaluxamut.  Carvings  are  generally  on 
walrus  ivory,  and  often  on  wooden  slats.  In  No.  7  is  a 
representation  of  the  grave  post,  in  position,  bearing  an 
inscription  similar  in  general  character  to  those  in  the  last  two  pre- 
ceding figures. 
The  interpretation  of  the  characters  is  as  follows : 
Nos.  1, 2, 3,  and  4  represent  various  styles  of  habitations  composing 
the  village.  No.  5  is  an  elevated  structure  used  for  storing  food.  No. 
C  is  a  box  with  wrappings,  containing  the  corjise  of  a  child.  Scaffold 
burial  is  frequent  among  some  of  the  natives.  The  small  lines,  with  ball 
attached,  are  ornamental  appendages,  consisting  of  8trii)s  of  cloth  or 
skin,  with  charms,  or  sometimes  tassels.  No.  7  is  the  grave  post,  bear- 
ing rude  illustrations  of  the  weapons  and  utensils  used  by  the  deceased 


d 

Fig.  148. 

INSCRIPTION  FItOM 
UKAVE  POST. 


1. 


Fig.  149. 

VIIXAOE  AND  Bl'KIAI.  GROUNDS. 

during  life.  No.  8  is  a  grave  scaffold,  containing  the  body  of  an  adult. 
Besides  the  ornamental  appendages,  as  in  No.  G  preceding,  there  is  a 
"  shaman  stick  "  erected  over  the  box  containing  the  corpse,  as  a  mark 
of  good  wishes. 

CONVENTIONALIZINQ. 

Some  examples  of  decoration  are  presented  herewith,  in  which  there 
often  appears  to  be  solely  an  attempt  at  ornamenting  the  otherwise 
plain  surface  of  ivory.  In  others  there  are  evidences  of  an  advance 
in  the  graphic  representation  of  objects,  in  thit  the  originals  are  no 


GRAPHIC  ART  OF  THE  ESKIMOS. 


929 


•onger  accurately  or  entirely  portrayed,  as  through  an  apparent  i>ro- 
cess  of  synecdoche  conventions  are  attained,  whicli  are  thus  emidoyed 
for  ornamentation,  while  the  original  import  of  the  objects  themselves 
seems  to  have  been  lost  sight  of,  in  so  far  as  their  use  for  historic 
records  are  intended.  Some  miscellaneous  examples  will  suffice  to 
illustrate  these  remarks.' 

Plato  40,  Figs.  5,  G,  and  7  are  interesting  examples  of  conventional- 
izing, and  indicate  a  long  stride  toward  the  employment  of  certain  forms 
for  decorative  purposes  or  for  the  ornamentation  of  spaces  upon  ivory 
rods  or  bows  that  might  not  otherwise  be  apt  to  be  filled  with  records 
of  exploits  or  ceremonials. 

The  row  of  thirteen  figures  in  i)late  40,  fig.  o,  are  the  rear  portions  of 
whales,  the  attitude  sometimes  taken  by  them  in  plunging,  when  the 
tail  emerges  from  the  water  to  an  unusual  distance. 

The  row  of  fourteen  T-shaped  characters,  fig.  6,  are  conventionalized 
forms  to  denote  the  whale,  the  tail  only  being  drawn  to  indicate  the 
entire  animal.  Similar  figures  are  frequently  tattooed  upon  the  body 
to  denote  a  successful  whaler.  Instances  are  referred  to  under  the  cap- 
tion Tattooing,  p.  781 .  In  the  row  marked  fig.  7  are  shown  fifteen  swim- 
ming seals,  the  arrangement  being  decorative,  though,  in  accordance 

Fig.  150. 

FIQCRRS  OF  BWIMMINa  SBALS. 

with  a  common  custom,  they  may  also  have  been  intended  to  denote 
many  seals  captured,  an  indefinite  number  of  objects  often  signifying 
many,  and  more  than  the  actual  number  indicated,  whicli  may  be  lim- 
ited for  want  of  room. 

Other  instances  of  conventional  characters  of  well-known  objects  are 
presented  elsewhere. 

The  regularity  with  which  the  seals  are  portrayed  in  fig.  150  is 
another  illustration  of  recording  the  successful  hunt  for  these  animals, 
as  well  as  an  attempt  at  utilizing  these  figures  for  decorative  purposes. 

Other  illustrations  are  given  herewith,  in  which  certain  animal  forms 
ho'  become  so  conventionalized  as  to  be  almost  unrecognizable,  and 
111  tl;  shape  these  forms  are  used  secondarily,  and  i)erhaps  even  pri- 
iMai  !.'> ,  :)s  decorations,  the  designs  being  artistic,  as  well  as  of  historic 
i  tl  terete  1. 


'Since  th  laper  w.as  prepared  for  publication  tbore  has  been  issued  by  Mr. 
Uiiiliuar  Sti).  of  Stockholm,  an  elegant  folio  publication  on  ornamentation, 
oi.'titlcil  '  Stii>'  tl  i  Amerikausk  Ornamentik  K  Bidrag  til  ornanientens  biologi," 
l)\\.\'i'j,  i!i.'i,r''s  M".    ilates  XX. 

Eslv'tiio  workiii  '>ip  bearing  decorations  occur  on  iigares  on  pages  10-21.  A 
I'liitt  pu^ti<i1(''>  ^X  ) '<  twing  both  sides,  bears  a  painted  face  on  one  surface  and  a 
foint  nti'""i'''^''<^  fii.ii  upon  the  reverse.  This  specimen  is  from  Port  Clarence,  and 
)rin!>  tlio  f^Hot  of  its  l.(:in);  in  color  and  on  wood,  is  of  interest. 

'I'attuoiujj^.  riliowinir  vavi  us  conventionalized  forms,  (»ccur  in  figure  47  ["Central 
Es'inic,"!  au  «'  fi.iriiiD  48  ["  ffim  St.  Lawrence  Island"]. 


\m 


-  lij 


930 


REPORT  OP  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


;i 


If 


I-' 


li: 


:4 


I'M 


'   i 


a 


ii,y  \; 


:i'  : 


1^ 


'Hi        I 


B  i 


!>:||^ 


I*'  I 


Fig.  151. 

HABITATION. 


Plate  22,  flg.  4,  represents  a  drill  bow  from  Point  Barrow.  There  are 
two  horizontal  median  lines,  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  apart,  extend- 
ing from  end  to  end,  from  which  extend  toward  the  onter  sides  short, 
straight  incisions,  opposite  to  each  of  which  are  the  conventional  whale 
tjiils.  This  appears  to  be  strictly  decorative,  the  original  import  as  a 
hunting  record  having  apparently  been  lost  sight  of  in  the  attempt  at 
ornamentation. 

Plate  22,  flg.  3,  represents  another  si)ecimen  of  like  character  from 
the  same  locality  as  the  preceding.     It  measures  10  inches  in  length 

along  the  dorsum.  Apart  from  the  two  perfora- 
tions whi<;h  e.xist  at  either  end  of  tlie  bow,  there 
are  larger  holes  made  for  the  insertion  of  turquoise 
or  blue  glass  beads.  On  the  under  surface  are 
represented  skins  of  a  number  of  animals.  The 
ten  narrow  hides  at  the  left  are  otter  skins.  The 
succeeding  five  oblong  ligures  with  interior  cross  hatchings  are  proba- 
bly bear  hides.  The  remaining  figures  to  the  right,  ten  in  number, 
represent  the  skins  of  the  deer.  A  very  decided  attempt  is  shown  in 
this  illustration  at  ornamental  decoration  as  well  as  i)reserving  a  hunt- 
ing record,  as  the  figures  are  intended  to  be  represented  as  nearly  alike 
as  possible,  the  skin  of  each  si>ecies  of  animal  being  almost  exactly 
like  others  of  its  species. 

One  of  the  drill  bows  bears  a  series  of  illustrations  of  habitations, 
various  forms  being  indicated,  so  as  to  readily  connect  the  extremes. 
The  normal  form  is  shown  in  fig.  151,  while  the  more  conventionalized 
outline,  which  would,  if  calone,  be  difticult  of  specific  identification,  is 
shown  in  fig.  152. 

Plate  40,  fig.  7,  represents  a  scries  of  seals,  the  object  of  which  is 
rather  in  the  order  of  a  decoration  than  as  a  hunting  record.    The 
(!arving  is  deep,  and  (iharacteristic  of  the  work  of  the  natives  from 
whom  it  was  obtained  at  Cape  Nome.    A  like. form 
of  representing  seals  is  shown  elsewhere. 

The  various  panels  in  plate  (50,  fig.  2,  contain  seals 
at  either  end,  as  Nos.  1  and  11,  while  the  bars  of  ver- 
tical lines  separate  the  intervening  ])(>rtion  of  the 
ivory  rod  into  other  panels,  containing  single  figures 
of  trees,  in  regular  order  and  rather  ccmventional,  and  in  this  'iite 
resulting,  in  reality,  in  merely  a  subject  of  no  history,  Imt  of  <lef  ^  iti\e 
or  ornamental  import. 

At  No.  11  a  new  record  was  begun;  a  man  is  seated,  and  i-  a|>i)iu- 
ently  preparing  souie  article  of  diet. 

Plate  03,  fig  4,  represents  a  drill  bow  from  Kotzebue  Ron-  ',     j>iie 
specimen  measures  18^  inches  in  length,  and  is  decor;ili.'  iipon    tlio 
side  shown  in  the  illustration  by  two  rows  of  seals  ftjuf (list ant    tVoin 
one  another  and  so  arranged  as  to  represent  a  methrxl  of  orncmentii 
tion  rather  than  a  historical  record.    The  great  nutnbcr  of  Sfjals  raav 


Fig.  152. 

HAniTATION 


There  are 
irt,  exteiid- 
iides  short, 
ional  whale 
import  as  a 
)  atteini)t  at 

xacter  from 
»8  in  lengtli 
wo  perfora- 
i  bow,  there 
of  turquoise 

surface  are 
liinals.    The 

skins.  The 
js  are  i)roba- 
i  in  number, 

is  shown  in 
•ving  a  liunt- 
\  nearly  alike 
naost  exactly 

'  habitations, 
he  extremes, 
i^entionalized 
ntitication,  is 

of  which  is 
record.  The 
natives  from 


GRAPHIC    ART   OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


931 


Fig.  152. 

HAIIITATION 

in  thi?     'i»tc* 
of  der      iti\e 

and  i-  appar- 


tSitn"'!. 


J'^ie 

iir-   apoTi    tlio 

idiytanl    from 

)f  ornr,iiieiit.i 

of  s«*;»l8  ma\ 


indicate,  as  in  other  records,  that  tlie  hunter  was  a  very  successful  seal 
hunter.  Upon  tlie  opposite  or  convex  side  is  a  similar  portrayal  of 
animal  forms,  though  in  tliis  instance  only  one  continuous  row  of 
spouting  whales  occupies  the  base  line,  while  along  the  upper  line  but 
four  of  these  animals  have  been  drawn,  the  remaining  eight  spaces 
being  blank.  One  edge  of  this  bow  is  very  crudely  but  deeply  incised 
with  strange  looking  figures  representing  human  beings  with  alligator 
heads,  armed  with  mandibles  similar  to  those  of  huge  birds.  Several 
mammalian  forms  are  also  represented,  one  or  two  being  of  mythic 
im))ort.  Sc^veial  kaiaks  are  also  shown,  the  occupants  being  engaged 
in  walrus  and  seal  hunting. 

riate  21,  tig.  1,  is  the  back  of  the  bow  drill  represented  in  plate  3, 
tig.  1.  Considerable  interest  is  attached  to  this  specimen  from  the  fact 
of  the  i)ronounce<l  median  lines  extending  from  end  to  end,  the  various 
objects  between  these  and  the  outer  margin  being  so  arranged  as  to 
form  a  very  symmetrical  and  decorative  figure.  This  approaches  very 
nearly  one  variety  of  decoration  practiced  by  the  Papuans,  and  referred 
to  by  Mr.  Alfred  C  lIa<ldon.' 

The  specimen  is  inverted  and  the  interpretation  begins  at  the  tirst 
figure  at  the  right,  which  represents  a  man  in  a  kaiak  following  four 
seals.  The  two  figures  extending  above  and  below  the  median  line  are 
bear  skins.  The  two  elongated  figures  at  the  narrow  portion  of  tlie 
bow  are  otter  skins.  These  are  succeeded  at  the  next  widening  of 
the  bow  by  the  representation  of  another  bear  skin,  and  so  on  alter- 
nately to  the  extreme  right,  in  addition  to  the  last  otter  skins  there 
being  still  two  added  because  of  the  narrowness  of  that  portion  of 
the  bow.  The  space  beyond  the  perforation  in  the  bow  at  the  extreme 
right  is  ornamented  also. 

Plate  24,  figs.  5  and  G,  represents  two  ivory  bodkins,  both  from  Norton 
Sound,  Avhere  they  were  obtained  from  Mr.  E.  W.  Xelsou.  They  are  each 
about  Wh  inches  in  length.  Tlie  specimen  shown  in  fig.  5  is  sharjdy 
l>ointed  at  either  end  and  has  three  decorated  sides.  On  the  plate  the 
illustration  is  inverted  so  that  the  triangles  with  projecting  lines  which 
represent  summer  habitations  are  misleading.  In  this  instance  tlie 
figure  of  the  summer  habitation  has  been  adopted  as  a  means  of  deco- 
ration only  and  has  no  special  imi)ort.  Upon  the  next  side,  the  edge 
of  which  is  partly  visible,  are  the  figures  of  eight  walruses,  also  jWaced 
u[>on  the  utensil  simply  as  a  means  of  decoration.  Upon  each  of  the 
three  sides  appears  a  deeply  creased  base  line,  and  at  intervals  of 
about  one  inch  are  oblique  lines  one-eighth  of  an  inch  in  length  placed 
almost  together,  closely  resembling  one  of  the  forms  utilized  to  denote 
or  indicate  the  "  Finback  "  whale.  The  signification  of  these  charac- 
ters, however,  (;an  not  be  determined.  They  are  believed  to  represent 
decorative  marks  only. 

Plate  24,  fig.  (5,  represents  a  bodkin,  only  one  end  of  which  is  sharp- 


Evolution  iu  Art,  before  quoted. 


^TT 


932 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


S    I 


v:  1 


(ijiii 


!  I 


!  1 

I  I 


,11  ;i 


f- 


m 


Hi  !  I 

sll    ■  ; 


I    •  i 


eiied,  the  other  end  terminating  in  a  seal  head.  The  four  sides  of  the 
specimen  are  decorated,  the  first,  shown  in  the  illustration,  bearing  six 
figures  composed  of  the  rear  halves  of  whales  joined  together  so  as  to 
present  flukes  symmetrically  at  either  end.  On  the  second  side  are  out- 
lines of  seven  triangular  summer  habitations,  on  the  right-hand  slope 
of  which  are  two  projecting  lines,  similar  almost  to  the  lines  in  the  pre- 
ceding figure  representing  summer  habitations.  On  the  third  side  are 
engraved  figures  of  seven  wolves,  wliile  upon  the  fourth  side  is  a  single 
horizontal  line  with  other  obliijue  lines  extending  therefrom  at  inter- 
vals of  about  an  inch,  similar  to  tlie  groups  of  threes  in  the  i)receding 
figure. 

Plate  21,  fig.  5,  represents  a  drill  bow  from  Kotzebue  Sound,  measur- 
ing 17^  inches  in  length.  It  is  made  of  yellowish  and  old  looking 
ivory,  the  dorsum  being  round  while  the  under  surface  has  two  divided 
faces.  The  animals  represented  ui)on  these  are  wolves,  and  are'  evi- 
dently arranged  in  such  manner  as  to  present  a  pictorial  result  rather 
than  a  liunting  record.  It  is  possible  that  the  hunter  may  have  been  a 
wolf  hunter  and  intended  in  this  manner  to  illustrate  his  great  success, 
as  a  great  number  frequently  indicates  an  indefinite  number — that  is,  a 
larger  number  gathered  during  a  lifetime  than  could  conveniently  be 

^^    "^     ^     ^       *     ^     ^    V    ^^ 

Fio.  153. 

COKVENTIONAL  BEARSKINS. 

portrayed  on  so  small  a  surface.  A  similar  idea  obtains  in  gesture 
language,  in  which  tlie  native  will  pass  his  hands  upward  and  outward 
as  if  outlining  a  heap  uf  some  soft  material,  this  gesture  signifying 
large  or  many;  an  indefinite  number  signifying  a  great  many,  in  con- 
tradistinction to  a  limited  number  which  would  be  indicated  by  ges- 
tures of  an  entirely  different  form. 

The  specimen  shown  in  plate  37,  fig.  6,  is  part  of  a  drill  bow  which 
is  nearly  25  inches  in  length.  Upon  one  surface  the  utensil  is  deco- 
rated with  figures  of  seventeen  reindeer  and  nine  bear  skins,  rather 
decorative  than  as  a  hunting  record,  while  upon  that  side  visible  in  the 
illustration  thirty-seven  skins  of  the  seal  are  drawn,  the  interior  of 
these  objects  being  decorated  with  short  lines  extending  from  the  outer 
line  inward  tov^ard  the  middle  of  the  body,  while  the  median  line 
extending  through  the  middle  of  the  hide  is  similarly  etched  toward 
the  outer  side,  leaving  the  two  white  spaces  as  a  series  of  zigzags. 

Plate  59,  fig.  1,  represents  a  drill  bow  from  Nubriakh,  collected  by 
Mr.  E.  W.  Nelson.  The  characters  represent  bearskins,  and  are  placed 
almost  at  equal  distances  from  one  another  across  the  entire  length  of 
the  specimen,  to  represent  ornamentation  rather  than  a  record  of 
exploits. 


sides  of  the 
,  bearing  six 
blier  so  as  to 
side  are  out- 
;-haiul  slope 
s  in  the  pre- 
jird  side  are 
e  is  a  siugle 
uiii  at  inter- 
le  preceding 

ind,  ineasur- 
old  looking 
two  divided 
tnd  are"  evi- 
esult  rather 
bave  been  a 
eat  success, 
' — that  is,  a 
'^eniently  be 


* 


in  gesture 
nd  outward 

signifying 
my,  in  con- 
;ed  by  ges- 


bow  which 
sil  is  deco- 
Lins,  rather 
sible  in  the 
interior  of 
n  the  outer 
ledian  line 
led  toward 
gzags. 
dlected  by 
are  placed 
8  length  of 
record   of 


r 


Report  of  U   S   National  MuMum,  189S.— Hotfmtn. 


o 


O 


A 


Plate  77. 


^ 


11 


Various  Forms  of  Concentric  Circles. 

Fnim  Eskimo  s|)»?c'iiiieus. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATt     77. 


10 


I'i^f.  I.  Simplti  niicloiitfti  i-irclc,  fcmul  t«x»«M'(liii>;l,v  toiiunttn  on  ivory  iiteiiHilH  iinil 

ornaiiicntH. 
rif^H.  1',  It,  I,  7,  mill  10.  Ki'iuisciit    varioiiM  fornis  of  coiicontrii'  <ii<li'M,  usual  as  orna- 

iiifiital  or  (l«coiativ«>.     Soiu»!  of  tlifst'  aii> drawn  to  il««iiot<>  nests  of  Kanta;;,! 

or  bnckcts. 
I''i^.  5.   Not  common,  lint  I'vidcntly  niatlo  with  an^i-r  l»if. 
I''i<i;s.  (I,  H.  VJ,  and  lit.  'I'lirsc  occnr  on  various  animal  rl)i<;ios,  and  arc  mhkIo  to  drnoti^ 

till!  «'.V08. 

Fi;.;.  !>.  'riiis  is  a  variant,  and  occnrs  on  a  Tlilinkt*t  s|UM-ini*'n.  apparently  in  inutation 

ot'  I'.skinio  patterns. 
Ki<;.  11.  (?ran1)i;rry  stalU  and  Ido.ssom. 
Figs.  11  )ind  l.">.   X'ariantH  ol"  (lower  oftlu)  cranborry. 


1 


!>'i 


! 


GRAPHIC  ART  OP  THE  ESKIMOS. 


933 


The  nine  crude  outlines  shown  in  fig.  1.j3  represent  that  number  of 
bears  killed  during  the  lifetinu'  of  the  owner  of  the  record. 

The  skins  are  here  suspended  from  upright  poles  or  posts,  and  the 
arrangement  of  figures  has,  in  other  instances,  suggested  patterns  for 
decorative  purposes,  as  will  be  observe<l  elsewhere  in  connection  with 
the  subject  pertaining  thereto. 

Figs.  7  and  8  of  plate  oO  are  spear  guards  usually  attached  to  the 
upi^er  surface  of  rhe  canoe  so  as  to  form  a  secure  guard  upon  which 
the  spear  is  placed.  Both  of  these  guards  are  decorated  witli  concentric 
rings,  both  different.  TTpon  the  outer  liiie  in  lig.  7  we  perceive  diverg- 
ing short  lines  terminating  in  the  conventional  V-shape  or  tree  figure, 
while  in  the  other,  fig.  8,  will  be  perceived  the  plain  line,  which  may 
l)erhaps  refer  to  the  flower  symbol  noted  in  fig.  i  of  plate  50,  and 
described  elsewhere  in  Mr.  Turners  communication.  See  .also  plate  75 
bearing  various  forms  of  native  patterns  of  cin^les. 

Plate  38  represents  four  ivory  bag  haiuUes,  of  which  fig.  1  is  from 
Norton  Sound.  It  bears  upon  the  upper  side  four  sets  of  concentric 
cin  Ics,  equidistant  from  one  another,  and  connected  by  a  median  line, 
above  and  below  which  are  a  pair  of  radiating  diagonal  lines  appar- 
ently denoting  the  conventional  symbol  of  whale  fins.  This  specimen 
is  similarly  marked  upon  the  bottom  side  and  convex  edge.  With  ref- 
erence to  this  ornamentation,  it  is  one  step  beyond  that  represented  in 
plate  29,  fig.  2,  which  was  obtained  at  St.  Michaels,  and  upon  one  side 
of  which  are  shown  five  sets  of  concentric  circles  similarly  connected 
by  median  lines,  but  witliout  the  lateral  radiating  lines  above  noticed. 

On  plate  .'38,  fig.  3,  is  shown  another  bag  haiulle  upon  which  appear 
seven  sets  of  concentric  circles,  which,  however,  are  smaller  than  those 
shown  on  the  two  preceding  specimens,  plate  38,  figs.  1,  2.  The  design 
shown  in  fig.  3  appeal's  to  be  the  primary  mode  of  decoration,  as  iu 
this  there  are  no  connecting  lines. 

Plate  48  represents  a  variety  of  ear  pendants  from  several  localities 
on  the  west  coast  of  Alaska.  The  chief  feature  of  these  si)ecimens 
consists  in  the  variety  of  ornamentation.  Simple  dots  made  by  drill- 
ing, concentric  rings,  nucleated  circles,  and  in  one  specimen — fig.  8 — a 
scries  of  serraticms  attached  to  two  of  the  circles,  compris«'  the  chief 
features  of  ornamentation.  Fig.  9,  however,  represents  a  powder 
charger  consisting  of  a  bell-shaped  implement,  h<>llow  beneath,  with 
Just  sullicient  cavity  to  contain  one  charge  of  powder.  The  nucleated 
circles  upon  this  specimen  are  .among  the  smallest  thus  far  found  in 
tiie  colle(!tions  of  the  National  Museum.  The  arrangement  of  the  cir- 
cles, also,  is  artistic  and  geometri(!al.  Those  attached  to  lines  extend- 
ing from  the  ring,  and  apparently  suspended  therefrom,  are,  witliout 
doubt,  flower  symbols,  as  midway  between  the  circle  and  the  upper 
ring  .are  short  lines  denoting  leaves.  This  is  probably  the  blossom  or 
fruit  of  the  cranherry — VacHnium  Mtis-idaa. 

Around  the  lower  border  of  the  utensil  is  a  delicately  incised  line, 


I 


r     t 


i 


I 


I?  . 
'i'" 


'^.% 


I  ' 


M  : 


iMvl 


H 


934 


REPORT  OF  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


small  nucleated  circles  alternatinf>:  with  vertical  lines  terminating 
above  in  a  similar  small  nucleated  circle,  from  which  diverge  two  short 
lines,  which  in  turn  end  in  similar  rings.  The  entire  outline  of  the 
character  is  that  of  the  simpler  form  of  the  tree  symbol,  though  it  is 
believed  to  denote  the  fruit  of  the  arctic  plant  known  as  the  Vaccinium. 
Tills  belief  is  strengthened  by  the  occurrence  of  similar  characters 
known  to  denote  this  plant,  and  from  which  a  native  carrying  a  bucket 
or  kantag  is  shown  as  in  the  a<'t  of  plucking  fruit.    Compare  fig.  70,  p.  863. 

Above  these  cluiracters  are  a  series  of  larger  nu(;leated  rings,  each 
with  three  radiating  lines,  which  are  without  doubt  intended  to  icpre- 
sent  the  flowers  of  this  same  i»lant.  That  the  circle  with  such  exter- 
nal ornamental  appendages  is  intended  to  represent  flowers  has  been 
explained  in  Mr.  Turner's  communication  above  noted. 

The  circles  portrayed  upon  this  specimen  are  the  most  delicate  found 
upon  any  of  the  specimens  in  the  National  Museum.  They  are  appar- 
ently the  work  of  an  expert  workman,  and  made  with  comparatively 
deli«'ate  instruments. 

The  arrangement  of  nucleated  rings  in  the  form  of  a  triangle  and 
connected  by  short  lines,  as  in  the  fruit  or  plant  character  above  noted, 
ai)pears  ui>on  some  Thlinkit  bone  ornaments  shown  in  plate  9,  lig.  3. 
The  transmission  of  the  character,  or  its  suggestion,  api)ears  to  have 
come  from  the  Innuit,  the  southern  tribes  being  known  to  make  this 
pattern,  and  the  intertribal  relations  with  their  eastern  and  southern 
neighbors  is  constant.  Being  a  shaman's  ornament  among  the  Thlinkit 
would  Tjiiggest  the  idea  that  the  original  signification  of  the  character 
was  unknown  to  them. 

Plate  OS,  lig.  0,  represents  a  very  beautiful  rod  of  ivory  from  Kotzebue 
Soun»l.  It  is  perforated  at  one  end  like  a  bag  handle,  but  sharpened 
at  the  other  in  imitation  of  a  bodkin.  Three  sides  are  decorated.  The 
peculiarity  of  the  ornamentation  is  the  insertion  in  the  blank  spaces  of 
nucleated  rings,  their  association  with  these  hunting  expeditions  being 
very  mu<'ii  in  imitation  of  the  characters  upon  tiie  ])etrog]yph8  at 
BohuslJin,  in  Sweden,  and  shown  in  plates  75,  70,  and  others  of  like 
character,  showing  simi>l(^  nu«'lei  or  pits,  as  well  as  nu(;leated  circles 
attached  to  lines  to  represent  human  beings,  exactly  like  some  found 
in  the  Shoshonean  area  of  srathern  Nevada  and  in  the  JVloki  country. 
The  illustration  in  plate  "^^  epresents  at  the  extreme  left  four  vertical 
lines,  with  the  zigzag  ami  toothed  pattern  found  upon  other  objects, 
which  has  been  designated  as  the  fish  trap  or  seal  tooth  ])attern.  The 
next  figure,  a  crescent,  and  is  a  symbolical  whale  tail.  The  two  bars 
leaning  toward  one  another,  beiween  the  whale  tail  and  the  walrus, 
are  the  rude  outlines  of  the  sides  of  a  habitation,  the  delicate  indication 
of  the  o(!cupants  within  being  shown.  The  remaining  figures,  as  will 
be  observed,  consist  of  a  kaiak  and  severnl  whales  and  wab'uses.  The 
groups  upon  the  other  sides  of  this  rod  are  very  much  in  imitation  of 
the  preceding. 


Report  of  U.  S.  National  Museum,  1 895.— Hoffman. 


Plate  75. 


o   o 


® 


ft' 


U 


e 


.iittnt/T 


_y^ 


■-1^^ 
t^- 


jmiuy^   \mmyi^/^ 


'?•■ 


,#. 


°STROGLYPHS  AT  BOHUSLAN,  SWEDEN. 


# 


!■: 


;'•  fi^l 


T^^ 


i ..  - 


t    .    - 


u 


Report  of  U.  S.  National  Museum,  1895 Hoffman, 


V       .^ 


m 


^^^ 


m^^ 


^ 


/ 


p<  < ' « . 


it %j 


"Miiiiiimi  r 


NUmaiH*/ 


Jiinj) 


araaiccc 


•Jify 


4«*^ 


Plate  76. 


Petroglyphs  at  Bohuslan,  Sweden. 


,<^'' , 


«  i 


ti  ' 


lllilnl  1 


iryni-w 


Hjj-: 


11:     |: 

«;  ■'" 

if  ■      \  ' 

1!  *      ■■  ' 

^i.,S.ife:.i 

1^      \\ 
(I 


f  I 

I': 

;,      1 

1;    i 

M  u 


•sr^^mm 


■I 


'I 


li: 


r'  >*''ij 


Report  of  U.  S.  National  Museurr,  1  895— Hoffman. 


i  ^^^  v^  ^  - 


Plate  78. 


^..■^'^  >.^  .^  ^-'^ 


1j  : 


o 

o 

o 


z 
< 
s 

Ui 

< 

I 


s 
o 

u. 

UJ 


^^ 


1^ 


M 


*    : 


GRAPHIC    ART   OP   THE   ESKIMOS. 


935 


^ 


o 
o 
CD 

o 
o 


CO 

z 
< 

S 
UJ 

_l 
< 

I 

S 
o 
cc 
u. 

UJ 

< 
a. 


Other  interesting  and  .similar  illuHtrations  of  nucleated  rin/^s,  in  con- 
nection with  lines  to  denote  liunian  beings,  are  given  by  Hans  Hihle- 
brand,'  as  also  con(;entric  circles  and  simple  nnclei  in  the  same  work, 
page  381.  These  illustrations  are  of  petnjglyphs,  an<l  it  is  evident  that 
in  the  first  named  instance  the  nucleated  ring  is  the  head  of  an  oarsman, 
or  perhai)s  one  in  authority,  as  most  of  the  designations  for  the  rowers 
are  alike  in  length  and  form,  whereas  the  nucleated  Hgures  are  always 
nearer  one  end  of  the  vessel. 

Plate  ;U,  tig. .'{,  bears  upon  one  si<le  a  median  incision,  ui)on  the  ui>per 
sides  of  which  are  represented  a  series  of  conventionalized  trees.  Upon 
the  reverse  are  similar  tree  patterns,  but  drawn  at  oblii[ue  angles,  all 
leaning  toward  the  left. 

In  the  figure  of  a  ship's  anchor  chain  the  links  are  indicated  by  draw- 
ing the  chain  zigzag.  This  is  found  lo  <)(!cur  in  oidy  one  instance,  as 
shown  on  plate  40,  lig.  2. 

Other  interesting  examples  of  conventionalizing  are  shown  in  the 
distinction  between  the  i)ortrayal  of  an  ice  tloe,  being  a  simi)le  curved 
line  as  in  No.  5  of  fig.  112,  to  denote  transparency  of  substance,  while 
the  walrus  upon  it  is  incised  and  the  surface  blackened. 

A  similar  view  of  walrus  upon  rocks  is  shown  in  tig.  3  on  plate  70, 
the  rocks  being  outlined  somewhat  after  the  order  of  a  tloe,  though,  to 
show  the  s<>lid  and  creased  sides  of  the  dark  material,  the  pictograph 
is  incised  with  the  zigzag-like  i)attern,  fre(iuently  illustrated  in  orna* 
mental  borders  as  the  fish-trap  pattern. 

Plato  88,  fig.  4,  shows  a  bag  handle  from  Point  Hope.  The  outer 
edges  are  scalloped,  a  small  circular  excision  appearing  at  the  i)oints 
where  these  scallops  should  terniiiuite,  each  of  these  excisions  being 
furthermore  ornamented  by  a  circular  line  which  surrounds  it  and  from 
which  radiate  shorter  lines  at  right  angles  like  the  rays  of  the  sun. 
In  the  middle  of  the  handle,  extending  from  end  to  end,  is  a  high, 
rounded  ridge,  at  each  side  of  which  is  a  median  line;  on  tlie  sides 
facing  the  circular  excisions  are  two  short  lines  directed  outward,  while 
midway  between  these  points  are  two  shorter  lines  directed  inward 
toward  one  another. 

Plate  78  represents  part  of  a  page  from  a  whaleman's  log  book,  being 
a.journal  of  the  bark  Fcri,  Captain  E.  Kussell,  who  sailed  Friday,  June 
20,  1854,  from  New  Bedford,  Mass.,  for  the  Indian  Ocean,  on  a  si)erm- 
whaling  voyage,  and  returned  May  20,  1857.  As  will  be  observed  by 
reference  to  the  illustrations,  the  note  under  date  of  Tuesday,  Decem- 
ber 11, 1855,  is  as  follows: 

Commences  with  fresh  breezes  from  NW.  Squally  «&  Rainy  heading  SW.  Middle 
part  heavy  Rain.  Latter  part  7  A.  M  Saw  a  school  of  Sperm  Whales.  Lowered  all 
three  boats.  Struck  and  saved  7  Whales,  ;?ot  them  alongside  at  1  P  M  and  coni- 
iiieuced  cutting  Latt  4"  21  N  Long.  GO"  W 

Near  the  left  margin  is  a  vertical  column  of  six  whales.    At  the 


>  "De  Liigre  Naturfolkeus  Kcmst,"  Stockholm,  1884,  pp.  379, 380. 


m 

Til- 


i 


fi 


if 


rk 


•'i  >■ 


Illl 


5  : 

i 

t     [ 

'     i                  I 

( ■ 

r 

' 

'r,i     '    . 


f     • 


936 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


extreme  loft  Ih  an  iu8<rription,  ''16th  time  of  seeing  tliem,"  denoting 
tliat  it  was  the  sixteenth  time  that  whales  liad  been  sighted.  Tlie 
letters  at  tlie  tail  end  of  the  whales,  W  B,  IS  B,  and  L  B,  denote  waist 
boat,  starboanl  boat,  and  larboard  boat,  two  whales  being  captured  by 
the  first  antl  second,  wliile  three  were  taken  by  the  last  inuncd.  At 
tlie  right  of  tlie  whales  are  the  numbers  of  barrels  of  oil  furnished  by 
each,  as  well  as  the  total,  amounting  to  140.  The  method  of  stain|)ing 
tliese  outlines  is  by  means  of  small  wooden  blocks,  which  are  dipped  in 
ink  or  otiier  coloring  matter,  for  the  reason  that  the  picture  of  the 
whale  is  so  readily  i»erceived,  obviating  the  necessity  ot  searching  over 
each  page  to  find  any  special  reference  thereto  in  the  manuscript  text. 

On  plate  7!)  is  represented  another  part  of  the  same  log  book,  and 
under  date  of  iMonday,  July  21,  185«»,  are  two  references,  the  llrst,  "20 
time  of  se(?ing,"  and  another  »yOth  time,"  referring  to  the  characters 
of  whale's  flakes  or  tails  standiiig  upright,  and  denoting  in  this  con- 
nection that  the  whales  were  sighted  but  not  captured. 

On  i)hite  8(»  are  represented  five  specimens  of  Eskimo  carvings  which 
are  of  interest  in  this  connection. 

In  fig.  I  is  shown  a  very  short  kantag,  or  perhaps  bag  handle,  from 
Sledge  Island,  the  original  measuring  but  about  2^  inches  in  length, 
while  the  perforations  along  the  to^)  ridge  separate  the  pieces  of  ivory 
into  a  series  of  connected  flukes.  These  are  better  illustrated  on  fig. 
3,  a  specimen  from  Gape  Darby,  in  which  the  whale  tails  are  almost 
separated  from  one  another,  slightly  bent  to  one  side,  and  very  natural 
in  general  outline. 

In  fig.  V  is  shown  another  neat  specimen  from  Sledge  Island,  while  in 
fig.  2  we  liave  one  made  of  a  piece  of  hollow  ivory  or  bone,  in  which 
both  ridftcs  are  rudely  perforated  so  as  to  simulate  whale  tails,  as  in 
the  preceding  illustrations.  These  four  specimens  are  of  interest,  from 
tlie  fact  that  the  flukes  are  utilized  in  the  decoration  or  ornamentation 
of  utensils,  and  probably  at  the  same  time  denoting  that  the  owner 
was  a  whale  hunter  or  had  been  successful  in  catching  whales.  The 
most  interesting  specimen  in  the  series,  however,  is  that  given  in  fig.  5, 
which  represents  a  kantag  handle  from  Point  Hope.  This  specimen, 
in  addition  to  having  the  carving  of  a  whale  fluke  at  the  upper  edge, 
has  neatly  engraved  upon  one  side  four  flukes,  flanked  on  either  side 
by  a  bowhead  whale  facing  inward.  The  six  figures  are  arranged 
artistically  and  symmetrically,  and  are  almost  exactly  of  the  same 
class  of  ornamentation  as  in  plate  80. 

The  question  would  naturally  arise  whether  the  Eskimo  had  copied 
such  methods  of  portrayal  from  the  whalers,  or  the  whalers  from  the 
Eskimo,  or  whether  the  art  evolved  independently  among  both. 

In  consultation  with  Captain  E.  P.  Herendeen,  now  of  Wa-diington, 
District  of  Columbia,  a  gentleman  who  has  spent  many  years  in  the 
Arctic  regions,  1  am  informed  by  him  that  he  made  his  first  whaling 
voyage  toward  Point  Barrow  in  the  year  1854.    At  that  time  he  found 


Report  of  b,  S.  National  Muieum,  1895,  -Hoffman. 


Plate  79. 


^i^i^ 


/L.    ^^7^2^. 


C^^  '??y^fc^*->-C 


^/ 


^ 


c-^ 


// 


/-  ^>^ 


l24m 


WHALER'S  Record  of  Sighting  Whales. 


113 


«:  ^' 


(  'i   5 


I'      ( 
I       ! 


:t     I 


ill;'! 


I  -I 


I;  i 


V 


EXPLANATION     OF    PLATE    80. 


^^^ 


Krt.VTA.,   Maxim.k. 

filt.  Ko.  4J4,M,  U.  s.   \     \|  MM-,       , 
KaNTAG    Ham„,k.            ■  '"■'""■'^-      '■""•••"-'  '■:    K.  W.XeU.,,,.. 

<''a!.   X,,.  .(Ki:t7    [;    s    y    \I  ,■ 
Kaxta,;   llANorK.         '     '  """  '  '"''^      '■"'••••""  'a  K.  U'.  NHs..,,. 

"■■"•X".  M7I7.  r,  S    N     \|        ^11       ,    , 
K.VNTA.i    llAXJ.l.K.  ■       ■'  ■"'^"  '"'■■""•        t''<-il--t. y  K.U-.. V ,.,«„„,, 

(Cut.  No.  (j;iS()|.  (     s    \    \i       ... 


i  I 


! 


on.) 


Report  of  U    S    National  Museum,   1895  —Hoffman. 


Plate  80. 


o 


UJ 


I 


!■•£■ 


I 


m 


'. 


1 


GRAPHIC  ART  OP  THE  ESKIMOS. 


937 


1      T 

Fig.  154. 
WHALE  F..UKE.S,  (ACE  NOME. 


in  possession  of  the  natives  of  Point  Barrow  innumerable  specimens 
of  ivory  upon  which  were  engraved  similar  outlines  of  flukes  and 
whales,  both  of  which  had  reference  to  whaling  expeditions.  Captain 
Herendeen  believes  also  that  the  Innuit  practiced  this  method  of 
indicating  a  whale,  by  simply  portraying  its  tail,  prior  to  the  voyages 
to  tliat  part  of  the  Arctic  ocean  of  the  whalers.  This  is  a  question 
that  can  not  now  be  satisfactorily  determined  when  we  come  to  remem- 
ber the  early  arrival  in  that  part  of  the  Arctic  regions  of  the  Russians 
and  people  of  other  nationalties,  all  of  whom  came  for  purposes  of 
exploration  and  i>robably  traffic.  The  practice  of  i)ortrayiiig  but  part 
of  an  animal  for  the  whole,  knowii  as  synecdoche,  is  very  common 
among  some  of  our  native  Indian  tribes,  and  it  seems  to  have  resulted 
chiefly,  perhaps,  as  labor  saving,  and  also  perhaps  because  many  of 
the  natives  may  have  had  occasion  to  portray  certain  animals  by  only 
the  most  conspicuous  parts  to  represent  the  whole,  as  the  observer 
would  readily  understand  the  intention  of  the  artist.  Such  a  process 
of  pictography  is  particularly  prevalent  among  the  Dakota  and  other 
of  the  Plains  Indians,  especially  in  connec- 
tion with  the  indication  of  proper  names,  in 
which  the  human  head  is  drawn  with  a 
short  line,  issuing  from  the  mouth  and  run- 
ning upward  from  the  head,  connecting 
thereby  the  object  or  animal  which  suggests 
the  name  of  the  person;  and  in  which  the  line  denotes  speech,  in  imi- 
tation of  the  co'umon  gesture  sign  made  by  passing  tiie  finger  forward 
from  the  mouth,  denoting  "That  is  it,"  instead  of  simply  passing  the 
finger  forward  to  denote  speech  generically;  the  latter  would  be  indi- 
cated in  pictograi)hs  only  by  a  short  straight  line,  extending  forward 
and  perhaps  slightly  curved,  but  not  attached  to  any  object. 

In  comparison  with  the  preceding  remarks  concerning  the  conventional 
fluke,  the  accompanying  designs  on  fig.  154  are  reproduced  from  a 
specimen  from  Cape  Nome.  The  forms  are  <liverse,  yet  both  are  accu- 
rate in  suggesting  the  original  which  furnished  the  concept. 

Such  T  shaped  figures,  denoting  flukes,  are  tattooed  upon  the  body 
to  signify  tliat  the  person  so  decorated  is  a  successful  whaler.  Reference 
to  several  localities  where  the  natives  practice  this  method  of  personal 
adornment,  to  indicate  also  individual  achievement,  will  be  found  under 
the  caption  of  Tattooing,  p.  781. 

Plate  14,  fig. .'},  represents  a  kantag  or  bucket  handle  from  Norton 
Soun«l.  Upon  this  specimen  is  engraved  a  wolf,  to  the  right  of  wliich 
are  two  gia/ing  reindeer,  while  the  fourth  and  fifth  characters  repre- 
sent hides  or  ^ikins  of  bear  placed  in  an  upright  position  so  as  to 
almost  resemble  tie  tree  symbol.  To  the  right  of  this  is  a  hal>itation 
witli  smoke  rising  from  the  smoke  hole,  and  a  native  a[>proaching  the 
entrance.  Along  the  uj>per  margin  of  this  specimen  are  two  seals  at 
the  left,  and  a  whale's  fluke,  indicating  that  a  whale  wa.-*  seen  by  the 


938 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


'.'t 


iiatives  in  the  "boat  to  the  right.  This  portrayal  of  the  whale's  fluke, 
althou;;h  utilized  a^  a  simple  ornament  or  decorative  design  in  many 
instances,  is  here  portrayed  in  Imitation  of  the  system  adopted  by  the 
New  England  whalers,  as  represented  in  plate  80. 

riate  08,  fig.  1,  is  a  drill  bow  from  Cape  Nome,  15^  inches  in  length 
and  §  of  an  inch  square.  Upon  the  side  shown  in  the  illustration  are 
a  series  of  semicircles,  with  tooth  like  attachments  on  the  upper  sur- 
face, the  interior  being  filled  in  with  vertical  Hues,  lietween  each  of 
those  semicircles  is  a  cross-liki?  figure  denoting  a  bird.  The  semicircles 
themselves  are  conventional  characters  to  represent  whales. 

At  the  extreme  right  is  the  outline  of  a  reindeer  facing  toward  a 
native,  who  has  his  arms  in  tlie  attitude  as  if  holding  a  bow,  part  of 
the  character  being  obliterated.  Upon  the  opposite  side  of  this  bow 
are  a  number  of  curious  looking  objects  somewhat  resembling  the  gen- 
eral outline  of  a  whale  with  a  peculiar  mandible  like  attachment  extend- 
ing upward  and  forward  from  the  head,  while  to  the  back  are  attached 
sh(>rt,  inclined  lines  almost  resembling  harpoons.  Tho  fact  tliat  these 
short  lines  are  placed  in  position  by  pairs  indicates  that  they  denote 
legs,  the  mandible  being  in  reality  the  mouth  of  the  mythic  creature 
which  it  represents  lying  upon  its  back  with  tlie  feet  uppermost.  At 
the  extreme  right  of  this  record  are  three  small  creatures  of  the  same 
species,  though  not  as  carefully  represented  as  the  prec^eding  ones. 

Upon  the  top  of  the  bow  the  left  and  middle  portion  is  occupied  by 
reindeer,  and  a  habitation,  near  to  which  is  a  meat  rack  and  human 
figures  with  arms  outstretched.  At  the  right  of  the  record  is  a  very 
delicately  engravtnl  picture  of  a  village  with  six  habitations. 

The  bottom  of  the  bow  is  ornamented  by  a  continuous  line  of  nucle- 
ated rings  of  several  sizes,  the  central  perforations  in  nearly  every 
instance  being  v.n usually  deep,  while  the  rings  themselves  surround- 
ing the  perforations  are  generally  deeper  on  one  side  as  if  the  instru- 
ment with  which  they  were  made  had  not  been  held  directly  at  right 
angles  with  the  surface  operated  upon. 

COMPARISON. 

Plate  81  represents  a  "  History  of  a  Year  of  the Chukch."  [t  is  repro- 
duced from  a  lithographic  print  by  l>octor  Carlos  Bovallius,  and  is  in 
imitation  of  the  original,  drawn  on  walrus  skin,  and  it  is  alleged  to 
have  been  the  work  of  some  Chukche  natives.  It  is  not  known  whether 
Doctor  Bovallius  has  published  a  history  in  detail  of  this  pictographic 
recoid,  but  attention  was  called  to  the  record  by  Doctor  Walter  Hough 
of  the  National  Museum,  who  received  the  above  information,  in  turn, 
from  Doctor  Bovallius,  to  the  effect  that  the  record  refers  to  the  avoca- 
tions and  hunts  of  one  entire  year. 

The  preceding  paragraph  was  written  one  year  ago  and  the  interpre- 
tation given  at  that  time-,  and  in  connection  therewith,  was  based  upon 
the  application  of  Eskimo  pictographs  of  known  signification,  and 
upon  information  possessed  relative  to  such  interpretation  in  general. 


h 


^ 


s. 


m 


.1^ 


-%, 


\ 


II 


jr? 


i 


MM 


■s  . 


li  •. 


-i;i.: 

'!;'.'   I 


■•I   i 


i        ( 


rW 


M 


['*  I 
fi  1 
Hi  ' 

[  t  I    - 
111     : 


i';  t 


14 


;li 


P 

h    .  I 


1  i 


i  i 


Rtportof  U.  S.  National  Muiaum,  1695.— Hoffman. 


'•  History  of  a  Yeah  of  the  ( 


Plate  81. 


I8T0RY  OF  A  YEAR  OF  THE  ChUKCH." 


I 

V 

I 

J 


lid 


y^. 


|.* 


u 


"i 


■1i:' 


»Wi 


\.??. 


i 


> 


*^' 


¥»*,  /:.■■■ 


:-*'!.'>  ^ 


?:■ 


jj^ieM 


1     ^ .  ■ 

^V^ 

/    ', 

"^ 

;«     ^ 

GRAPHIC   ART  OP  THE   ESKIMOS. 


939 


ITaving  within  the  past  few  days  had  opportunity,  and  occasion,  to 
further  examine  the  literature  bearing  upon  the  Swetlisli  J'olar  Expe- 
ditions, I  learn  that  this  plate  forms  one  of  the  illustrations  given  by 
Mr.  Hans  Hildebrand  in  his  monograph  on  primitive  art,  and  forming 
a  chapter  in  one  of  liaron  NiU'deiiskiold's  works.'  In  speaking  of  the 
generally  intelligible  state  of  the  pictographic  characters,  he  remarks 
as  follows: 

*'  Ich  will  es  allerdings  nioht  auf  mich  nehmen,  von  alien  diesen  Bil- 
dern  eine  befriedigende  Erkliirung  zu  geben, die  llauptziige  sind.jedoch 
so  (leutlich,  das  sie  nicht  misverstanden  werden  K(>nnen.  2s'ahe  den 
Contouren  der  Haut  laufen  auf  beinahe  alien  seiten  breite  Linien, 
welche  an  mehreren  Stellon  zu  breiteu  Flecken  aufschuellen.  Diese 
Linien  stellenden  Strand  dar, die  Flecken  sind  zuweileii  Ilohen,zuweilen 
Zelte,  die  letzen  theils  an  den  regelmJissigen  Konischen  Fornion,  tlieils 
an  den  Tiber  die  Zeltspitze  hinausgehendeu  Enden  der  das  Cierippe  des 
Zeltes  bildenden  Stangen  erkennbar — diese  Kleinen  hervorstel  i  nden 
Enden  tinden  sich  auch  auf  den  moderneu  Abbildungeu  der  Ichukt- 
8chen-D(hfer.'' 

The  following  interpretation  is  given  as  viewed  from  the  Eskimo 
standpoint,  as  the  entire  collection  of  figures  of  animals,  whales,  ships, 
human  beings,  and  every  other  character  is  typically  Eskimo,  and  the 
system  of  recording,  as  well  as  the  type  of  characters  themselves,  was 
undoubtedly  obtained  from  the  Eskinjo  by  copying  other  like  records 
of  ivory  obtained  from  the  natives  of  the  American  coast,  or  possibly 
from  the  Ynit,  who  are  near  neighbors  of  the  Chukchc,  a:i<l  who  are, 
furthermore,  the  Asiatic  representatives  of  the  Eskimo.  Neither  is  it 
known  that  the  Chukche  were  at  all  proficient,  originally,  in  recording 
pic*:orially  their  records,  literature  being  generally  silent  on  that  sub- 
ject, and  nothing  appears  in  the  collections  of  the  National  Museum 
that  bears  any  relation  to  ornamentation  of  any  character  whatever 
and  marked  as.  of  Chukche  origin. 

Believing  therefore  that  the  record  under  discussion  is  Eskimo,  the 
interpretation  is  given  from  the  standpoint  of  our  knowledgt  of  Indian 
characters.  The  presence  of  the  two  disks,  Xos.  1  and  2,  denote  the 
sun,  No.  1  being  in  Indian  pictography  a  black  sun,  or  night,  while  No. 
2  represents  the  summer  sun  as  it  usually  appears  a  little  above  the 
northern  horizon.  These  two  scenes  therefore  would  confirm  the  state- 
II  (^n^,  ven  by  Doctor  Bovallius  as  covering  the  period  of  one  year. 
A  nib  the  outer  margin  of  this  record,  and  marked  ]>y  indentations 
and  irregularities,  appears  the  shore  line,  upon  the  outer  margin  of 
which  toward  the  border  of  the  record  are  various  scenes  depicted  as 
occurring  upon  a  solid  surface,  while  within  the  line  generally  are 
various?  scenes,  as  whale  hunting,  etc.  The  outlines  of  habitations  are 
also  scattered  at  intervals,  as  in  Nos.  3  and  4,  apparently  in  the  midst 


'Stndier  oi*li  FDrskniugar  fthanlcdtla  af  niiiia  resor  i  hi\}j;a,  nord«'n.  Stockholm, 
1881.  ris,  and  ill.  This  work  wa»  re])riiited  in  Leipzig,  1885,  iindor  tho  title  of 
"Studieii  uud  Forschunjjeii  veranlasst  durcli  ineine  reiscn  iin  liohon  Nurden." 


I 


940 


REPORT  OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Mm  <: 


of  the  wjitiU',  but  tliis  roHultn,  no  doubt,  from  tlie  fact  that  Isirjjo  bhiiik 
81)ae<'st  liad  been  left  after  tlie  u<|uatie  Hcenes  were  coiiiph'tiMl,  and  the 
habitations  were  tlien  jdaced  upon  tlie  most  avaihible  space.  In  No.  3 
will  be  observed  a  vertical  jude  Mith  c«»rds  stretched  out  to  various 
sides  of  the  i)ole,  while  beneath  an^  represented  four  human  boinji's. 
The  imi)ort  of  this  is  not  clear,  but  in  flfj;.  4  we  have  the  outline  of  an 
underfjjround  habitation  very  similar  to  many  of  those  represented  on 
the  ivory  rods.  Over  the  entrante  is  placi'd  a  votive  oH'eiing,  shown 
by  a  vertical  line  with  a  short  cross  line  attached  to  the  toj),  beneath 
which  is  a  human  being  with  arms  extended  from  the  head  as  if  reach- 
ing to  sometliing  above  him.  Upon  the  dome-s'iaped  ])ortion  of  the 
habitation  are  three  human  beings,  one  crawling  by  the  side,  while 
two  are  engaged  in  peeping  down  through  the  smoke  holi!  to  see  what 
is  going  on  within.  On  the  inside  are  three  natives,  one  on  tlie  floor, 
while  tlu'  second  is  seated  on  the  bench  or  projecting  boards  jdaced 
around  tlie  interior,  which  also  serve  as  beds,  while  the  third  appears 
to  be  hanging  by  his  feet  from  a  horizontal  bar.  Whether  this  is  sim- 
ply an  acrobatic  feat  or  not,  we  have  no  means  of  determining.  At  No. 
5  is  another  object  in  the  shai)e  of  a  parallelogram  within  which  two 
human-like  objects  are  seated,  facing  in  opposite  directions.  These 
characters  are  very  similar  to  the  Shoshonian  pictographs  as  found 
among  the  cliff  remains  of  northwestern  Arizona.  The  hands  of  one 
of  these  characters  are  elevated,  with  the  fingers  outspread,  as  if 
making  gestures,  while  the  other  has  his  hands  jdaced  toward  the 
ground,  with  fingers  spread.  It  is  probable  that  this  represents  some 
shamanistic  idea. 

Among  the  various  representations  of  umiaks  are  some  very  interest- 
ing ones,  those  in  Nos.  G,  7,  atid  8  being  particularly  well  drawn.  At 
No.  9  is  one  which  very  much  resembles  the  petroglyphs,  or  the  petro- 
graphic  representation  of  boats  as  found  in  Sweden,  of  which  an  illus- 
tration is  given  in  jdate  70.  A  fine  illustration  of  harpooning  is  shown 
in  No.  10,  the  floats  being  attached  to  the  line,  while  the  animal  is 
shown  as  attemi»ting  to  escape,  at  the  same  time  blowing  water  above 
his  head.  A  similar  ex])loit  is  shown  in  No.  11,  the  harpoon  having 
been  cast  and  the  whale  followed  by  the  umiak  represented  in  No.  12. 
In  No.  1.'?  is  shown  an  umiak,  from  which  a  harpoon  is  being  thrown  at 
a  seal,  while  the  native  in  the  stern  is  elevating  his  paddle  in  imitation 
of  the  signal  to  denote  concentration.  This  is  a  notice  to  the  accom- 
I)anying  kaiaks  that  the  harpoon  has  been  cast  and  that  the  assisting 
hunters  are  to  surround  the  animal  struck. 

In  No.  14  we  have  the  interesting  illustration  of  a  whale  being 
harpooned,  the  float  appearing  behind,  while  a  second  harpoon  has 
been  thrown  into  him,  the  line  of  which  is  still  attached  to  an  umiak, 
which  in  tarn  is  connected  by  a  continuous  line  to  a  pocond  umiak, 
both  boat  loads  of  hunters  in  this  wise  keeping  up  with  their  foray. 
In  No.  15  a  whale  is  likewise  shown  with  two  harpoons  and  floating 
lines  attached. 


iterest- 
At 
petro- 
iilas- 
showii 
inal  is 
above 
laving 
^0.  12. 
own  at 
itation 
acconi- 
sisting 

being 
on  luis 
uuiisik, 
nmial;, 

foray, 
ioating 


OKAPIIIC    ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


041 


Tpon  tlio  opposite  side  of  tlie  illustration  la  seen  »  pregnant  wbale 
(llg.  1<»),  tlu'  body  of  tlui  larger  animal  being  lifted  ])artly,  while  within 
is  portrayed  a  snuiller  whale  with  tho  head  dire«'ted  toward  the  head 
of  its  parent.  A  little  to  the  left  of  this  are  some  well  drawn  illnstra- 
tions  of  sledges,  to  whi<!h  three  dogs  are  hit<'hed,  No.  17,  while  around  to 
the  left  are  the  outlines  of  several  natives  holding  their  arras  aloft  as  if 
experieiieing  surprise  or  Joy  at  souu'thing  in  which  they  are  interested. 
At  No.  l^  is  shown  an  indentation  repiesenting  a  little  inlet  in  which 
a  whaler  is  shown  anchored.  Near  the  vessel  are  natives  in  various 
attitudes,  as  if  engaged  in  conversation  <»r  bartei',  while  above,  in  No, 
1!>,  are  four  small  triangular  bodies  projecting  t(»ward  the  water,  which 
denote  habitations,  very  much  in  form  like  the  ordinary  liulian  tent. 

At  No.  2()  is  the  ontline  of  a  large  bear  being  attaiked  by  two 
natives,  the  one  in  front  pn'tending  to  strike  him  with,  some  largo 
object,  while  the  man  behind  him  is  in  the  attitu<le  of  nsing  a  spear, 
(^uite  a  settlement  is  represented  at  a  i)roJecting  point  of  land,  No.  21, 
the  lines  upon  which  are  continuous  dark  bodies,  both  round  and  tri- 
angular, representing  habitations  of  various  kinds. 

In  No.  22  are  represented  six  small  scaflolds,  and  from  llio  opposite 
side  of  this  point  are  three  others  which  may  represent  burial  scaffolds, 
or  they  may  possibly  be  intended  for  food  storage  only.  At  No.  2']  is 
the  shore  line,  the  short  projecting  lines  radiating  therefrom  appar- 
ently denoting  sedges  or  grass,  while  the  lines  extending  anuind  the 
village  appear  to  denote  a  rise  in  the  land  corresponding  to  the  con- 
tour lines.  In  No.  24  is  shown  an  individual  upon  a  loft,  with  arms 
outstretched,  as  if  making  signals.  In  No.  25  two  habitations  are 
shown,  with  another  scaftold  denoting  the  end  of  the  settlement.  The 
inclosure  between  Nos.  24  and  25,  within  which  are  vast  nund)ers  of 
short  lines,  seems  to  denote  a  marsh  with  sedges,  or  reeds,  or  other 
aquatic  plants,  while  in  No.  2(5  we  have  a  continuous  line  of  blackened 
spots  denoting  the  contour  of  a  mountain  range  upon  which  we  tind  at 
several  points  human  beings,  one  with  a  spear,  while  another  has  his 
arms  outstretched  as  if  attracting  attention.  Beyond  this  range  are 
indicated  various  animals,  conspicuous  amongst  them  being  tlie  deer. 
This  ppparently  denotes  a  hunting  ground.  At  No.  27  is  another  inlet 
in  which  are  represented  tliree  whalers  or  whaling  ships,  while  upon 
the  shore  we  find  two  pairs  of  human  beings  in  which  one  person  of 
each  pair  seems  to  hand  forward  some  object  to  the  other,  who  is 
shown  with  outstretched  arms  as  if  to  receive  it.  About  the  ships  are 
shown  numbers  of  umiaks  loaded  with  natives  who  have  come  to  trade. 
In  No.  28  is  another  indication  of  a  bear  hunt,  three  natives  i)artici- 
pating  in  this  attack,  two  armed  with  bows  and  arrows,  while  the  third 
has  only  a  spear.  In  No.  29  is  shown  what  appears  to  be  a  hostile 
encounter  between  several  natives,  and  actual  hostility  is  taking  place 
as  shown  in  No.  30,  where  two  are  engaged  in  grappling  with  one 
another,  wliile  their  companions  stand  by  in  various  attitudes  of  sur- 
prise or  alarm. 


V] 


<^ 


n 


^/,. 


^ 


^. 


ew  oS. 


^>. 


■ff 


7 


/A 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


'"-  iM    1 2.2 


I.I 


1^ 


2.0 


1.8 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


V 


1.25      1.4      16 

.« 6"     

► 

23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  MS80 

(716)  872-4503 


if 


% 


\ 


Hi' 


if-  ■ 


m. 


r 


m 


IH 


'I' 


M' 


<i  : 


^I0f 


M 


i 


j 


.'^^f 


'I   i 


942 


REPORT  OP  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


Aloug  the  shore  line  indiciited  at  No.  31  are  numbers  of  habitations 
and  scaflblds,  as  observed  elsewhere,  while  at  No.  32  are  a  series  of 
black  projections  which  evidently  denote  hills,  as  these  are  also  shown 
at  No.  20.  The  native  shown  in  No.  33  appears  to  have  shot  an  arrow 
into  some  animal,  while  the  native  in  front  of  the  latter  is  in  the  atti- 
tude of  thrusting  his  spear.  Absence  of  horns  seems  to  indicate  a  doe, 
or  possibly  a  bear,  although  the  length  of  the  limbs  would  preclude  the 
latter  idea.  At  No.  34,  however,  the  figure  of  a  bear  is  drawn  more 
carefully.  In  No.  35  is  shown  a  herd  of  reindeer,  while  in  No.  36  is 
shown  another  whaling  ship,  beneath  which  are  four  kaiaks  loaded 
with  individuals  who  have  come  after  trade.  A  curious  illustration  is 
that  shown  in  No.  37,  in  which  quite  a  string  of  reindeer  arc  attached 
to  sledges.  The  native  in  No.  38  is  apparently  driving  back  the  ani- 
mals who  are  heading  off  in  that  direction.  In  No.  39  is  the  outline  of 
a  habitation  with  the  accompanying  hoii/ontal  rack,  from  which  meat 
or  other  food  is  shown  suspended.  The  character  in  No.  40  is,  without 
doubt,  the  outline  of  a  net,  and  resembles  in  almost  every  respect  sim- 
ilar ones  found  in  the  pictographs  made  by  the  natives  of  the  American 
coast.  In  No.  41  is  a  horizontal  line  with  five  animal  heads  protruding. 
These  would  seem  to  denote  walruses,  but  from  the  fact  of  the  projec- 
tions above  Ihe  head  they  are  probably  intended  ■  >r  leer  who  have 
broken  through  tlie  ice,  or  maybe  swimming,  toward  .'  nj*;!  the  umiaks 
are  hastening,  as  shown  above.  No.  42  represents  a  number  of  individ- 
uals with  arms  extended  and  hands  directed  toward  the  ground,  whiijh 
resemble  very  much  some  of  the  characters  on  the  drill  bow  (plate  08, 
fig.  3. 

Since  the  above  interpretation  was  dictated,  I  have  had  the  oppor- 
tunity to  consult  Captain  E.  P.  Uerendeen,  a  gentleman  thoroughly 
famili.ar  with  the  country  and  the  natives  of  both  sides  of  Bering 
Strait.  Upon  submitting  to  him  the  chart  for  his  examination  as  to 
the  geographic  location  referred  to,  the  following  additional  informa- 
tion was  obtained,  as  well  as  his  approval  in  the  belief  that  the  coast 
natives  [Eskimo]  were  more  likely  the  authors  of  the  record  than  the 
"  1  )eermen  "  [( JhuckcheJ. 

That  part  of  the  record  marked  No.  40  comprises  the  coast  of  the 
Holy  Cross  (iulf;  and  extending  backward  to  No.  18,  which  denotes 
Plover  Bay,  are  observed  whales  and  a  whaling  ship,  denoting  a  com- 
mon occurrence  in  past  years  for  whalers  to  enter  one  of  the  numerous 
inlets,  seek  a  good  anchorage,  and  there  make  the  required  catches 
instead  of  sailing  in  the  open  sea.  Whalers  are  said  to  have  been 
common  at  almost  every  favorable  point. 

The  point  of  land  at  No.  19  is  East  Head,  and  is  precipitous,  while  a 
small  village  is  located  near  the  entrance,  of  which  my  informant  could 
not  give  me  the  native  name.  Opposite  the  hull  of  the  vessel  is  a  long, 
narrow  black  line,  which  represents  a  sharp  spit  of  land  actually  occur- 
ring at  that  point  iu  Plover  Bay. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


943 


stations 
leries  of 
0  sliowii 
,n  arrow 
the  utti- 
te  a  doe, 
lude  the 
vii  more 
!^o.  3G  is 
3  loaded 
ration  is 
att<ached 
the  ani- 
iiitliiie  of 
ich  meat 
,  without 
pect  sim- 
Imeriean 
otrudiiig. 
10  inqjec- 
rho  have 
le  umiaks 
tMidivid- 
id.  whi(;h 
(plate  08, 

le  oppor- 
oroughly 
Bering 
ion  as  to 

informa- 
the  coast 

than  the 

,st  of  the 
denotes 
ig  a  com- 
lumerous 
I  catches 
ave  been 

8,  while  a 
ant  could 
is  a  long, 
Uy  occur- 


At  No.  23  is  a  point  of  land  which  is  recognized  as  Indian  Point. 
The  shore  has  a  rocky  appearance,  and  immediately  back  from  the 
surf  line  appear  some  contour  lines,  upon  which  arc  the  representation 
of  scaftblds,  as  before  noted,  which  Captain  Herendeen  says  are  caches 
of  the  natives,  while  the  houses  are  scattered  along  in  rows.  The 
irregular  area  between  the  village  and  the  ridge  of  hills  at  No.  2G  is  a 
marsh.  The  hills  are  also  in  actual  existence  and  beyond  them  is  a  good 
hunting  ground,  as  indicated  by  the  artist. 

To  the  right  of  Indian  Point,  in  the  midst  of  an  inlet  at  No.  43,  is 
Arakan  Island,  formed  like  a  hump,  with  a  straight  line  on  one  side  to 
denote  the  water  line.  The  line  at  No.  44  covers  an  inhabited  stretch  of 
land,  commonly  called  the  Michigme,  and  located  on  a  bay  of  the  same 
naipe.  Several  habitations  are  visible,  and  a  number  of  hamaii  forms 
are  drawn  near  to  them. 

At  the  right-hand  end  of  the  Michigme  settlement  is  an  inlet  show- 
ing three  whales,  near  each  of  which  is  a  pair  of  human  beings,  one 
person  in  the  act  of  handing  to  tlie  other  sume  object,  the  import  being 
trade,  the  purpose  of  the  visit  of  the  natives. 

The  lower  or  opimsite  shore,  marked  Nos.  30,  31,  34,  and  3G,  Captain 
Herendeen  is  not  positive  whether  it  may  represent  a  (!ontinuation  of 
the  Asiatic  shore  or  St.  Lawrence  Island,  the  locality  where  the  Asiatic 
coast  natives  obtain  oil  and  various  articles  with  which  their  country 
is  not  well  stocked,  returning  therefor  wooden  vessels,  poles  for  tents, 
frames  for  boats,  etc.,  which  are  primarily  obtained  from  the  Cliuckche, 
as  the  latter  come  from  the  inland  regions  by  means  of  sledges,  as  shown 
at  No.  17. 

From  the  general  apperranceof  the  drawings,  the  continuity  of  shore 
lines,  with  the  exception  of  a  small  and  apparently  insigniticant  break 
at  No.  45,  would  indicate  that  the  Asiatic  side  alone  was  intended 
to  be  shown,  and  not  the  opposite  American  shore.  The  statement, 
too,  that  the  record  is  a  "year's  record"  should  also  be  taken  into 
consideration. 

At  No.  46  is  an  indentation  probably  intended  to  represent  St.  Law- 
rence Bay.  There  is  quite  a  herd  of  seals  indicated,  clearly  denoting 
the  presence  there  in  great  numbers  of  that  animal.  Habitations  of 
variouskinds  line  the  shore  line,  to  indicate  a  settlement  of  natives.  At 
No.  47  is  shown  a  harpooned  walrus,  followed  by  a  native  in  a  kaiak, 
who  has  his  arm  raised  as  if  about  to  cast  a  second  weapon.  No.  48 
has  already  been  alluded  to  as  a  marsh,  the  short  lines  being  indica- 
tive of  the  sedges  growing  at  that  locality.  No.  49  is  a  skin  tent,  near 
which  is  lying  upon  the  ground  what  appears  to  be  intended  for  a 
sledge.  The  latter  is  in  imitation  of  the  Chuckche  type,  as  may  be 
observed  by  comparing  those  at  the  opposite  side  of  the  chart  in  con- 
nection with  the  sledges  to  which  reindeer  are  hitched,  near  No.  39. 

The  general  resemblance  of  these  teams  of  the  Chukche  is,  in  gen- 
eral, very  much  like  those  of  the  Samoyeds,  and  I  can  not  refrain  from 


U' 


-I 

'f 
lit 

III, 


^1 1 


m 


li' 


I 


i: 


m 


(. 


n 


I  :|  1 


li  i  ■ 

■  =  (( 

If  I     •" 
{    > 


If. 


h 


m 


\ 


944 


REPORT   OF  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


introducing  horeritli  as  plate  82'  an  illustration  publisluMl  by  Mr. 
Jackson  in  liis  work  on  ^'Tho  (ireat  Fro/.en  Tiitnd/'  which  illuntration 
i8  a  reproduction  from  a  i>hotograph.  The  middle,  covered  sledge,  is 
one  used  by  women,  the  remaining  one  being  for  goods  and  men. 

No.  50  denotes  a  village,  the  tent  poles  protruding  from  the  tops  of 
theledges.  Along  the  shore  are  more  habitations,  and  two  umiaks  filled 
with  hunters  are  shown  in  the  water.  At  No.  51  are  two  natives 
making  an  attack  upon  a  bear.  One  of  the  hnnters  has  a  spenr,  while 
the  other  is  armed  with  bow  and  arrow.  A  third  hunter,  a  little  to  the 
right,  has  shot  his  arrow  into  the  animal,  and  has  extended  his  open 
band  outward,  to  indicate  to  the  others  that  he  has  "oust  a  weapon," 
in  imitation  of  the  custom  of  whalers  when  they  elevate  the  paddle, 
or  spread  hands,  to  inform  their  companions  of  their  action  and  to 
recjuest  concentration  of  boats  to  secure  the  game. 

At  No.  52  is  a  group  of  six  men.  Two  are  going  forward  with  a  spear, 
•while  the  two  in  the  middle  are  making  gestures.  The  i)air  at  the  right 
are  in  close  embrace,  apparently  in  combat.  No.  53  illustrates  the 
method  of  spearing  seal  through  the  ice,  very  similar  to  tliat  shown  at 
No.  31.  The  snmll  ring,  however,  denotes  the  breathing  hole  made  by 
the  seal,  this  being  absent  in  the  latter  inst.ance.  Nos.  54,  55,  and  56 
are  obscene  figures,  and  not  worthy  of  reproduction. 

A'arious  illustrations  of  Chuckche  ;irt  are  given  by  Mr.  llans  Hilde 
brand,^  and  in  every  instance  the  products  resemble  the  figures  on 
plate  10,  and  appear  as  if  they  had  been  drawn  with  a  ])encil  or 
sharply- pointed  brush.  The  general  type  of  the  portrayals  are  like  those 
of  the  Eskimo,  clearly  showing  artistic  relationship.  In  the  same  con- 
nection are  shown,  also,  a  series  of  line  drawings,  reproductions  from 
drill-bows  from  Port  Clarence,  some  of  them  being  so  like  those  in  the 
colletrtion  of  the  National  Museum  as  to  lead  me  to  bel  eve  that  the 
originals  used  by  Mr.  Ilildebrand  and  by  me  were  the  same,  or  that 
they  were  nmde  from  copies  or  duplicates  by  the  same  Alaskan  artist. 

On  plate  0  are  represented  six  piectes  of  decorated  bone  slabs 
obtained  from  the  southeastern  neighbors  of  the  Eskimo — the  Thlinkit 
Indians.  The  specimens  are  selected  at  random  from  a  necklace  bear- 
ing a  total  of  fifteeli.  They  were  the  property  of  a  shaman  and  formed 
part  of  his  decorations,  but  whether  they  were  believed  to  possess 
mystic  or  other  virtue  is  not  known. 

The  interest  connected  with  this  lot  consists  in  the  decorations  upon 
the  pieces  of  smooth  bone.  The  ornamentation  is  typical  of  the 
Eskimo,  as  may  be  perceived  by  reference  to  numerous  illustrations 
submitted  herewith,  and  was  app.arently  adopted  in  imitation  of  sim 
ilar  designs  observed  in  the  possession  of  Eskimo  shamans,  or  such  as 
may  have  been  introduced  through  the  medium  of  intertribal  traffic. 
The  trade  route  along  the  northwest  coast  has  before  been  referred  to 
as  one  of  the  most  interesting  culture  routes  of  that  part  of  the  Ameri- 


'  London :  [dato  f  ]  plat«  opp.  p.  G8. 

»De  Liifcro  Naturfolkms  Kon»t   Storkhohn,  1884. 


imI  by  Mr. 
Ihistration 

I  sledge,  is 
men. 

tbe  tops  of 
iiiaks  filled 
ro  natives 
[>ear,  while 
little  to  the 
id  his  open 

II  weapon," 
he  paddle, 
on  and  to 

ith  a  spear, 
it  the  right 
it  rates  the 
t  shown  at 
le  made  by 
55,  and  5G 

[ans  Hilde 
figures  on 

,  ])encil  or 

B  like  those 
same  con- 
tions  from 
lose  in  the 
that  the 

le,  or  that 
can  artist, 
tne  slabs 
e  Thlinkit 
ace  bear- 
nd  formed 
to  possess 

ions  upon 
al  of  the 
ust  rations 
an  of  sim- 
or  such  as 
)al  traffic, 
eferred  to 
he  Ameri- 


)( 


Report  of  U   S.  National  Muieum.  1895.— Hoffman, 


u 


J^^ 


Plate  82. 


*  '\ 


in 

s 
< 

UJ 

cc 

UJ 
UJ 

Q 

Z 


o 

UJ 

5 

< 

(Si 


1     :<fl 


'S; 


it 


^:i 


' 


IH; 


I 


H- 


1 

;|i 

'li' 

1 

II 

1 

1 

i 

OKAPHIC   AUT   OF   THE    ESKIMOS. 


94.5 


can  contineut,  but  with  an  almost  total  ubsenco  of  evidence  to  the  con- 
trary, the  direction  of  the  movement  of  cultnre  and  art  designs  has 
been  in  the  opposite  direction  to  that  ilhistrated  by  the  present 
instance.  In  oLher  words,  the  Haida  and  other  influences  liave  been 
pushing  steadily  nortliward  and  westward  aniongHt  and  beyond  the 
territory  of  the  Thlinkit,  and  not  from  the  latter  areas  eastward  and 
southward. 

By  reference  to  the  illustrations  in  the  plate,  it  will  be  observed  that 
the  concentric  circles,  apparently  ma<le  in  the  same  manner  on  all  the 
pieces  where  present,  were  made  by  pieces  of  metal  tiled  to  a  V-shaped 
form,  one  apex  or  side  being  left  a  little  longer,  perhaps,  than  the  other, 
so  as  to  more  easily  serve  as  the  center  pivot.  The  rings  are  of  differ- 
ent width  from  the  outer,  showing  that  they  were  not  made  by  an 
instrument  with  movable  arms,  in  imitation  of  a  pair  of  dividers.  Fur- 
thermore, the  diameters  are  not  exactly  of  the  regulation  size,  as  would 
be  found  in  a  common  manufactured  bit,  but  the  outer  rings  are  less 
than  one-fourth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  being  almost  soven-thirty- 
seconds — an  unusual  size.  The  inner  circles  are  scant  three-sixteenths 
of  an  inch  in  diameter,  clearly  indicating  that  the  tools  were  of  aborig- 
inal workmanship,  though  made  of  imported  metals  as  well  as 
imported  instruments. 

The  arrangement  of  circles  as  in  fig.  3,  plate  9,  is  also  in  imitation  of 
Aleutian  and  other  Eskimo  i)atterns,  and  foreign  to  the  ornamentation  of 
the  Thlinkit,  as  far,  at  least,  as  illustrated  in  the  products  of  that  tribe 
now  in  the  collection  of  the  National  Museum.  Heference  has  already 
been  made  to  a  like  arrangement  of  circles  on  some  of  the  ancient 
British  coins,  referred  to  at  page  819,  and  a  closely  resembling  example 
of  which  is  shown  in  plate  47,  fig.  1. 

The  strong  resemblance  between  some  of  the  carvings  of  the  Eskimo 
and  those  of  the  cave  dwellers  of  the  Dordogne  has  been  referred  to 
by  various  authors. 

Mr.  Edward  T.  Stevens  remarks  that  "  It  is  singular  that,  except  at 
La  Madelaine,  none  of  the  bones  appear  to  have  been  gnawed  by 
beasts  of  prey."  The  cave  people  are  believed,  therefore,  to  have 
occupied  the  caves  permatiently  or  to  have  closed  them  when  deserted, 
and  to  have  excluded  carnivorous  animals  which  might  otherwise  have 
been  attracted  by  the  accumulation  of  bones. 

Doctor  A.  B.  Meyer,  director  of  the  Royal  Zoological  and  Anthropo- 
logical Museum  in  Dresden,  has  recently  published  some  magnificent 
folio  volumes  on  the  ethnographic  jaaterials  from  various  localities — 
from  the  Philippines,  New  Guinea,  etc. — and  in  Volume  ix  of  the  series 
presents  some  illustrations  of  combs  bearing  decorations,  which  would 
at  a  cursory  glance  suggest  the  type  from  which  the  Eskimo  orna- 
mentation was  obtained  for  the  comb  shown  in  plate  32,  fig.  4.  The 
several  specimens  of  workmanship  of  the  Nigritos  above  mentioned 
may  be  found  by  reference  to  Doctor  Meyer's  plate  2,  figs.  1,  2,  and  3. 
NAT  MUS  95 60 


;■ '. , , 


Mi 


1 1 1 


'■] 


1 1 


'■1 


¥' 


1    '^ 

»  ■ 

i 

i 

•i 

] 

K  '  ■.   1    -' 

'*  1 

ii.;iii 

^lifl 

:!    ■: 

■rw 

\  ■■  fl 

r^^i 

■l 

i 

Hh 

<l 

^il 

'1 

,; 

946 


REPORT  OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1896 


Plate  65,  fig.  4,  is  a  thread  case  of  reindeer  horn,  marked  as  from 
'^Ooglaamie."  This  is  interesting,  because  of  tlie  peculiar  portraiture 
of  reindeer  horns,  in  which  these  projections  are  exceedingly  tall  and 
straight,  as  compared  with  the  art  work  of  other  localities.  The  most 
interesting  figure  connected  with  this  is  the  representation  of  a  kaiak, 
immediately  above  which  are  two  nucleated  rings,  exactly  like  those 
shown  in  the  pctrog]y])hs  from  Sweden. 

Plate  7,  fig.  1,  represents  an  arrow  straightener  made  of  reindeer 
antler.  The  specimen  measures  Of  inches  in  length,  and  is  Hurmounted 
by  the  outlines  of  a  reindeer's  head,  the  small  knobs  only  indicating 
the  rudimentary  horns.  The  eyes  are  made  by  the  insertion  in  small 
perforations  of  three  glass  beads.  The  nostrils  and  mouth,  as  well  as 
the  ears  and  the  external  meatus,  are  all  very  true  to  nature. 

An  incised  line  extends  along  the  spine  from  the  occiput  to  within  an 
inch  of  the  rear  end,  and  two  incised  lines,  one  on  either  side  of  the 
neck,  run  parA>llel  therewith. 

This  specimen  is  very  interesting  as  comparing  very  favorably  with 
some  of  the  specimens  figured  by  Messrs.  Lartet  and  Christy,'  which 
are  found  in  tlie  cases  of  Dordogne. 

An  exceedingly  interesting  arrow  straightener  of  walrus  ivory  is 
shown  on  the  same  plate,  fig.  2.  The  reindeer,  which  is  portrayed  in 
outline,  has  tlie  head  thrown  forward  as  in  rapid  running.  The  legs 
are  gathered  up  close  to  the  bodyj  the  ears  are  indicated  by  mere 
perforations,  while  the  eyes  were  originally  inlaid,  one  still  retaining  a 
plug  of  dark  wood.  The  perforation  in  the  body — for  the  insertion  of 
spear  or  arrow  points — was  made  by  sawing  the  spaces  between  the 
perforations  made  by  drilling,  the  saw  marks  yet  remaining  where  the 
angles  w<'re  formed. 

The  perforations  in  the  arrow  straighteners  in  the  Museum  collection 
are  all  at  an  angle  of  about  20°  to  40°,  so  as  to  permit  the  inserted 
piece  to  extend  backward  toward  the  longest  projection  of  the  straight- 
ener, in  order  that  a  sort  of  V  shape  is  formed,  the  two  ends  being  thus 
more  readily  grasped  by  the  one  hand,  so  as  to  produce  stronger  and 
more  steady  pressure  than  if  both  hands  were  used. 

A  number  of  deeply  incised  and  uncolored  figures  of  reindeer  are 
engraved  over  the  body  of  the  utensil,  and  but  a  single  character 
differing  therefrom  ai)pears  to  be  that  of  a  shaman,  shown  near  the 
point  of  the  perforation,  his  two  arms  being  extended  and  his  head 
decorated  with  horn-like  ]>rojection8,  as  if  the  result  of  a  ceremonial 
mask. 

The  third  specimen  (fig.  3  on  plate  7)  also  represents  an  arrow 
straightener,  the  head  end  of  which  ends  in  the  outline  of  the  fore 
quarters  of  a  bear.  The  eyes  are  made  of  two  blue  beads  inserted  in 
perforations,  and  the  teeth  are  indicated  by  incisions  with  the  graver. 
The  fore  legs  are  made  to  extend  downward  over  the  front  of  the  per- 


>  Reliquiae  Aquitanicto  Loudon,  1875,  PL  B.  XIX,  XX. 


GRAPHIC  ART  OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


947 


foration  so  as  to  give  additional  strength  to  that  part.  The  Ni>eciinen 
is  slightly  decorated  on  one  side  with  the  outline  of  a  hamau  being 
with  arms  extended,  a  line  extending  from  the  head  along  the  middle 
toward  the  perforation;  on  one  side  is  the  drawing  of  a  wolf,  while 
beneath  it  is  a  flintlock  gun.  Upon  the  other  side  is  the  representa- 
tion of  a  reindeer,  with  two  smaller  animal  forms  incised,  while  beneath 
the  former  is  the  rude  portrayal  of  another  flintlock  gun,  the  flint  being 
indicated  by  an  unusually  strong  line  projecting  from  the  raised  hammer. 

The  general  outline  of  these  animal  forms  appears  at  a  flrst  and 
careless  glance  to  be  very  like  the  examples  flgured  by  Messrs.  Lartet 
and  Ghristy,  but  upon  close  inspection  the  difference  between  the  sev- 
eral types  becomes  more  and  more  apparent.  As  before  intimated, 
if  the  cave  dwellers  of  France  were  in  such  an  intellectual  status  as  is 
ii9ti»lly  claimed,  the  artistic  work  as  evidenced  in  their  etcliings  on 
horn  appears  vastly  suiierior  to  that  of  many  peoples  far  in  advance  in 
civilization. 

Farther  discussion  on  this  subject  is  not  deemed  appropriate  in  this 
connection,  but  will  be  renewed  in  a  paper  the  purport  of  which  is 
intended  to  be  an  examination  of  the  relative  merits  of  the  art  work 
of  primitive  peoples. 

Similarities  of  design  with  divers  signiflcations,  and  dissimilar  pat- 
terns with  like  purport,  occur  in  all  parts  of  the  habitable  globe,  and, 
as  before  intimated,  the  concept  giving  origin  to  such  designs  should  in 
all  instances,  where  practicable,  be  sought  for  among  the  pe«)ples  who 
are  the  authors  thereof.  In  like  manner,  it  is  of  the  highest  importance 
to  obtain  tlie  native  artists'  interpretation  of  any  obscure  or  conven- 
tionalized characters,  as  such  are  often  apparently  intelligible  from 
their  resemblance  to  characters  of  known  signification,  whereas  the 
result  of  inquiry  may  sometimes  be  rather  startling,  if  not  open  to  the 
suspicion  that  the  uncultured  artist  is  himself  unconsciously  iu  error. 


APPENDIX. 

The  following  list  of  gesture  sign?  were  collected  during  the  summer 
of  1882  in  San  Francisco,  California,  where  an  intelligent  Kadiak  half- 
caste  was  met  with  under  circumstances  which  enabled  him  to  devote  his 
exclusive  attention  to  the  subject  of  the  transmission  of  thought  with- 
out the  use  of  oral  speech.  This  person  was  the  offspring  of  a  Russian 
father  and  a  Kadiak  mother,  and  during  his  youth  had  almost  con- 
stantly accompanied  his  father  in  trading  and  collecting  peltries  for 
the  Russian  Fur  Company.  After  the  transfer  to  the  United  States  of 
Alaska,  this  man,  Vladimir  Naomoif,  continued  in  the  service  of  the 
Alaska  Commercial  Company,  of  San  Francisco,  California,  visiting  the 
various  settlements  of  natives  on  the  mainland  and  inland  to  the  Cop- 
per River  Indians  [Kutchin  or  Kenai],  a  tribe  of  the  Athabaskan  lin- 
guistic family.  In  this  manner  Naomoff  became  thoroughly  familiar 
not  only  with  Russian,  English,  and  the  Kadiak  dialect,  but  with  half 


:•  I 


948 


BRPOKT   OF   NATIONAL   MU8EUM,  1895. 


a  dozen  or  iqore  other  native  dialects,  which  enabled  him  to  observe 
and  acquire  the  varioaH  reHourtieR  which  many  of  the  natives,  meeting 
as  strangers,  would  be  compelled  to  employ  to  enable  them  to  commu- 
nicate in  ordinary  contact,  and  also  in  the  representation  of  graphic 
methods  whereby  to  communicate  to  owners  of  houses  of  a  visit  and 
the  import  thereof. 

The  collection  of  gestures  was  made,  together  with  many  others,  from 
most  of  the  Indian  tribes  west  of  the  Mississip])!  Uiver,  and  deposited 
in  the  library  of  the  Bureau  of  Kthnology,  through  the  courtesy  of 
which  I  am  enabled  to  give  them  publicity  in  this  connection. 


okstukr  sions  ok  rhkimo. 
Bad. 

Place  the  flat  hands,  with  the  palms  Ibrwanl,  in  front  of  their  respective  shoulders, 

the  fingers  extended  and  naturally  separated,  then  throw  tlioin  forward  and  Itack- 

ward  alternately,  the  face  at  the  same  time  assuming  an  expression  (»f  disgust. 

Bbavkr. 

Make  the  sign  for  tree;  thenbnap  the  teeth  and  hook  the  curved  index  horizontally 
inward  toward  the  face  from  a  position  in  front  and  to  the  right  of  it;  then  extend 
the  left  fist  tnlgewise  to  the  front  and  left  of  the  body,  tliu  right  extended  toward 
the  same  direction  though  on  a  higher  plane;  then  pull  them  simultaneously  back 
toward  the  right,  in  a  jerky  or  tugging  manner.  Conception :  Tree,  cutting  down  with 
the  teeth,  and  dragging  away  log. 

Bravkk  (abbreviated  sign). 

Indicate  the  canines  by  sticking  the  forefingers  u|>ward  and  forward  teoni  the 
corners  of  the  mouth ;  then  snap  the  teeth  several  times  and  hook  the  curved  index 
horizontally  toward  the  month  from  a  position  to  the  front  and  right  of  it. 

BhAK,  Black. 

Pass  the  fiat  hands  alternately  upward  and  forward  from  the  face,  pnlliug  them 
back  again  more  fiexed,  as  in  imitation  of  his  climbing  a.  tree. 

Bio.    (Broad.) 

Pass  hoih  flat  hands,  palms  downward,  from  a  position  before  the  body  outward 
toward  their  respective  sides. 

Boat. 

Place  the  clinched  hands  at  the  left  side  of  the  body,  the  right  higher  than  the 
loft,  and  pass  botli  simultaneously  horizontally  backwards  toward  the  left  hip. 
Conception:   Vting  the jmddle. 

Boil,  To. 

Snap  the  fingers  upward  from  the  inner  surface  of  the  tips  of  the  thumb;  at  the 
same  time  move  tliem  upward  and  downward  in  small  circles  about  2  feet  from 
the  ground.    Conception :  The  bubbling  of  boiling  water. 

Born,  To  he. 

Place  the  extended  fore  and  second  fingers  (or  all  the  fingers)  against  either  side 
of  the  epigastrium  and  throw  them  simultaneously  downward  along  the  body,  out- 
ward and  forward  in  a  curve.  Conce}>tiou:  Pelric  curre  followed  by  head  of  child  in 
birth. 

Brother. 

Make  the  sign  for  mustache  in  imitation  of  pulling  the  hair  upon  the  upper  lip 
forward,  followed  by  the  sign  for  man  by  lifting  the  hand,  and  then  the  sign  for 
mine,  clinchin^ij;  the  fist  and  thrusting  it  forcibly  forward  edgewise  toward  the 
ground  toward  the  lower  part  of  the  breast. 


GRAPHIC  ART  OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


949 


HiTRY,To.  (Hiiried.) 

TliiHHigii  niud«t  to  Tullow  tbut  f<>r  iiiuii,  ur  a  man  d«tt«l  or  killed. 

Place  Itoth  hnnda  iiesrly  at  utui'h  length  bufore  tlie  body,  palmH  down,  about  8  or 
10  inches  u|Mirt,  and  IH  inobeH  or  2  feet  froiu  the  groiiutl ;  then  tiraw  them  backward 
HiiniiltuneoiiHly  toward  the  body,  slowly. 

ClIIKK,  HKAI). 

Make  the  bIkh  tor  man  (mustache) ;  then  place  the  flat  right  hand  before  the  face, 
at  some  distance,  tinkers  extended  and  Hi>paratod  and  poiutiUK  upward,  and  touch 
the  tip  of  the  middle  flngor  with  the  uxtunde«<  foretinger  of  the  left  hand.  Concep- 
tion :  The  mont  elevated  of  the  whole  tiHiiiber, 

Ciiibk's  WiKK,  Head 

Make  the  si{i(n  for  chief,  head  (mountain  natives);  then  place  the  flat  hand  at  the 
height  of  the  fucu,  palm  inward,  AugerH  extended  and  Heparatud ;  tlicn  tlex  the  tlinmb 
at  the  first  joint  and  lay  the  tip  of  tl>c  index  upon  it  juHt  back  of  the  thumb  nail; 
conclude  by  passing  the  right  band  downward  over  the  right  side  of  the  head  and 
outward  toward  the  shoulder — hair,  woman. 

COLI>. 

Imitate  shivering  as  from  cold.    Sometimes  the  clinched  hands  are  brought  for- 
ward in  front  of  the  breattt,  as  in  involuntarily  done  when  sutt'ering  from  the  cold. 
COMK,  Tu.    (Influ.)    Camb. 

Bring  the  hand  from  one  side  of  the  body  inward  toward  the  breast,  the  Angers 
pointing  upward  and  nearly  collected  to  a  point. 

Crbrk. 

With  the  palms  facing  and  about  10  or  12  inches  apart,  pass  them  edgewise  for- 
ward to  arm's  length,  then  add  the  sign  for  drink.    Course  and  width  of  water. 

DAI'GIITKU. 

Make  the  sign  for  woman  (hair) ;  designate  height,  and  mine. 
Day. 

Throw  the  head  slightly  upward  with  the  cyebrowH  elevated,  and  throw  the  hands 
upward  and  outward  with  the  iingors  extended  and  separated,  palms  inward  and 
slightly  to  the  front. 
Day. 

Hands  passed  upward  and  outward  toward  their  respective  side  in  a  curve  from 
near  the  front  of  the  breast,  and  terminating  at  a  point  as  high  aH  the  top  of  the 
head,  but  on  either  side  of  it.    The  eyes  follow  an  upward  direction  at  the  same  time. 

Day. 
8ame  sign  as  for  8un, 

Dkai). 

Cross  the  forearmH  upon  the  brcoHt  and  throw  the  head  back,  with  the  eyes  closed. 

Tliis  gesture  is  also  made  by  the  natives  of  the  interior,  who  are  unacquainted 
with  the  customs  or  religion  of  the  Hussiaus. 

Dekk.— BrcK. 

Place  the  hands  with  the  tingers  and  thumbs  extended  and  separated,  palms 
forward,  above  and  on  either  side  of  the  hea<l.     Conception :  Horns. 

Debh.— Doe. 

With  the  hands  scoop-shaped,  fingers  spread  and  extended,  imitating  running, 
with  the  hands  thrown  downward,  the  movement  being  alternately  with  right  and 
left. 
Deity.    (Great  Spirit.) 

The  same  sign  .as  given  by  the  coast  Indians  by  pointing  upward  toward  the 
zenith,  and  then  imitate  the  cross  by  passing  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand  from  the 
forehead  to  the  breast,  and  then  from  the  left  shoulder  to  the  right,  instead  of  the 
right  to  the  left. 


I  n. 


m 


m 

:     if 


^v 


tl 

i  '  .| 

i    ■■.  . 


I 


0i 


950 


REPORT   OP  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  ISftf.. 


DucTOK.     (riiyNii-inii.) 

Make  the  hI^u  Tor  mail ;  iiidirnte  the  oiitliiieH  of  u  B<|imru  by  paRHiiig  the  right  hand 
iidgewlNti  t<»  the  liKht,  the  left  from  th  t  ri^ht  Hide  toward  the  loft,  tlioiiKh  leaving 
the  linos  about » foot  apart;  then  pans  *>otli  handa  Hiinultuueoiialy  from  tho  ft'out  line 
hut-kward  towiird  the  hody^^utlincH  of  a  Itox ;  make  a  dotting  motion  downward 
with  the  hent  tingerH,  pretend  to  grind  HomothinK  'n  a  Nmall  veasol,  then  point  to 
the  south — Hi^ttlemontH  of  tho  StatoH — and  con«dn«lo  by  making  tlie  aigu  for  drink. 
Concoptiou:  ilan,  box,  coulentt,  firindiiiff  in  mortar,  lovatiou,  drink. 

Du<i. 
Repreaented  by  imitating  tho  sound  of  barking — wn'-wA'. 

Dog  Hi.KixiK,  TKAVKMN(i  nv. 

Make  th«  sign  for  dog  by  indicating  tho  orioa,  both  handH  with  Angers  ei tended 
being  hold  to  the  sides  of  tho  houd;  at  tlie  Name  tinio  loan  tho  body  forward,  bond 
tho  arms  at  tho  elbowc,  and  throw  tho  Hat  right  hand  horizontally  forward  as  high 
as  the  shouldor,  and  when  nearly  at  arm's  length  pass  it  downward  in  a  cnrve,  and 
Btraight  backward  on  a  level  with  the  hip  and  to  that  point.  As  the  right  hand  is 
moved  back,  the  left  is  thrown  similarly  forward.  Uoth  are  repeatedly  moved  to 
represent  crawling  over  tho  surface. 

DRIVK  l'-(>ltWARI>,  t'R<tK,  To. 

Close  tho  hands  naturally,  place  them  before  tho  lower  part  of  tho  breast,  then 
throw  them  siiuultanoously  downward  and  forward  and  extend  the  lingers  us  tho 
motion  iirogrosses. 

Eat,  T(». 

Approximate  tho  tips  of  the  fingers  and  thumb  to  a  point,  ))lace  them  near  the 
mouth,  and  move  backward  and  forward  from  tho  mouth  quickly,  but  only  for  a 
short  distance. 

Fatiikk. 

I'lace  both  hands  (slightly  curved,  with  the  tips  of  the  fingers  somewhat  approxi- 
mated  toward  a  point)  a  short  distance  from  tho  cheeks,  pointing  tlowuward  toward 
the  chin  and  nearly  touching  palms  toward  the  point  of  the  chin. 

Fatiikk. 

Make  tho  preceding  sign,  to  which  add  those  for  man — by  elevating  tho  hand — and 
for  mine. 

Fatiikk's  kkotiier. 

Make  tho  sign  (or  father,  i.  e.,  by  indicating  the  board  and  making  the  sign  for 
gesture,  after  whi<-h  height  or  talluoss  is  indicatetl  by  placing  the  hand  forward  in 
front  of  the  body,  when  the  right  hand  is  placed  vertically  in  front  or  to  the  side  of 
the  head  to  indicate  man ;  this  gesture  is  then  followed  by  mustache.  Conception: 
The  beard  and  muataehe  upon  the  tall  man  belonying  to  the  speaker. 

Father's  sistkij. 

Make  the  sign  for  father,  as  before,  and  hin,  by  throwing  the  thumb  only  extended 
outward  a  little  to  the  right;  then  for  young  woman,  which  is  indicated  by  stroking 
the  side  of  the  head,  downward,  as  to  denote  long  hair,  and  then  pinchiag  the  lobe 
of  the  ear  to  designate  earrings. 

Fight,  To. 

Close  the  hands,  leaving  the  extended  thumbs  lying  along  over  the  flex  forefingers; 
then  pass  both  hands  in  irregular  movements,  forward,  downward,  and  backward 
again,  quickly,  as  if  boxing. 

Fish. 

Hold  the  right  hand  edgewise  before  the  right  side  of  the  waist,  fingers  directed 
to  tho  trout,  then  pass  it  forward  and  a  little  toward  the  left,  moving  it  in  a  wav- 
ing manner  from  side  to  side. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF   THE    KSKIMOH. 


9r)i 


Qivm,  To  ANOTIIRIt. 

Place  the  thniiih  upon  the  inner  aiirfaon  of  the  in«U<x,  IhiKurit  extended  and  Joined, 
palm  ui),  and  panH  the  hiind  outward  to  one  Hide,  an  if  giving  a  Nnuill  object  lield  by 
the  thumb  and  index. 

QlVK,  To  MK. 

Place  the  hand  with  the  palm  up,  lliigerii  extentled  and  Joiuod,  about  2  foot  before 
the  body ;  then,  as  it  is  brought  in  toward  the  breiutt,  curve  the  hand  Hlightly,  placing 
the  thuml>  against  tlie  index  us  if  gniHping  some  oltjeet  which  had  been  given. 

OlVK,  Tu,  TO  ANoTiiKit.     (Urnutlug  a  rei|ueHt. ) 

Place  the  tipH  of  the  tingers  agaiuHt  tlie  edge  of  the  thumb,  thus  eloHing  the  hand 
naturally,  and  pasH  it  from  near  the  side  of  the  breast  in  a  curve  outward  and  down- 
ward toward  the  ground,  uk  if  laying  a  gift  at  the  feet  of  tlie  Hupplicant. 

Oooi>. 

Place  the  handH  with  the  palm  downwanl  before  their  r<<Hpeetive  sides  of  the 
breast  and  as  high  uh  the  shoulders,  the  lingerH  naturally  Heparated,  exteiidetl,  and 
slightly  eurved;  then  jtasH  them  rapidly  and  alternately  toward  the  top  of  the  breast, 
at  the  same  tinie  assuming  a  pleased  countenance  with  the  brown  arched. 

GRA88. 

Place  the  backs  of  the  hands  near  th«^  earth,  the  lingerN  soparatiul  and  curved 
upward;  then,  as  the  bunds  are  thrust  up  and  down  (|uici(ly,  they  also  uutve  from 
side  to  side  or  place  to  place.  Conceptions:  Sprouting,  nhorl  regetation,  and  the  una 
thus  fo»'«»-;d. 

Gravk,  Child's. 

(1)  Place  the  tiat  hands  edgewise  before  the  body  as  high  as  the  shoulders,  then 
paM  them  downward  toward  the  ground  forudistance  of  about  l.'i  inches;  then  place 
the  right  hand  edgewise  at  arm's  length  before  tliu  breast,  pointing  toward  the  left, 
the  left  between  it  and  the  breast,  edgewise  and  pointing  toward  the  right,  then 
pass  both  downward  as  far  as  before;  (2)  tlieu  hold  the  separated  and  extended 
index  uud  second  fingers  of  the  right  hand  before  the  face  and  jt'ish  it  upward  a 
short  distance ;  (3)  make  the  sign  for  tvrite;  (t)  place  the  Hat  ham.  or  hands  palm 
down,  pointing  forward  about  18  inches  from  the  grou!ul;  tlien  conclude  with  the 
(5)  sign  for  dead. 
Hauitatiun.     (Medicine  Lodge.     Kacigi.) 

Indicate  a  large  horizontal  square  (exaggerated  sign  for  box);  then  make  tlie  sign 
for  roof  (high)  by  passing  the  Hat  hands,  from  a  point  above  and  in  front  of  tlie  head, 
outward  toward  their  respective  sides  and  us  far  down  as  the  waist,  linger  tips 
pointing  to  place  of  starting;  make  the  Bi<ru  for  man  (mustache),  indicate  one  by 
elevating  the  index,  then  raise  tlio  second  linger — two;  then  the  third — three;  and 
Hnally  the  little  one— /our;  then  maku  the  sign  for  enteiimj  a  house  by  passing  the 
right  flat  hand,  pointing,  forward  and  slightly  downward  under  the  h-ft  ilat  palm, 
forward  nearly  to  arm's  length;  then  make  the  sign  for  man  (niustaclie),  and  that 
for  bow,  indicate  tn-o,  three,  four,  aiul  entering  the  lodge  as  before,  then  place  them  to 
four  corners  of  the  imaginary  building. 

Make  the  signs  for  shaman  (ablireviuted),  four,  and  come,  by  bringing  the  curved 
though  elevated  index  from  the  front  and  right  to  before  the  breast ;  then  ])ass  the 
right  flat  hand  horizontally  forward  under  the  left  palm  also,  to  indicate  entering  the 
Lodge. 

Indicate  a  large  horizontal  circle  with  both  h.inds  from  nearly  at  arm's  length 
backward  toward  the  body;  then  make  the  sign  for  man  (mustache),  and  move  the 
body  up  and  down  and  place  the  hands  to  the  front  and  sides  as  if  dancing  around 
the  circle  just  indicated. 

Hot  (weather). 

Pass  the  slightly  bent  hands,  palms  downward,  from  before  the  cheeks,  upward 
and  outward  as  far  as  the  top  of  the  hmu'i.  At  the  same  time  expel  the  breath 
several  times,  as  in  Ha!  Ha!  but  not  al»ove  a  whisper. 


M 


m 


)« 


'I 

Jiff 


I 


"'*i: 


U' 


952 


REPORT  OF  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1895. 


IllINOKY. 

1.  Make  the  sign  ''or  eal,  tben  rub  tho  hand  dowuward  over  tho  stomach  aud 
abdomen. 

2.  Make  the  sign  for  eat,  then  that  for  nothing. 

Hunt,  To  (for  work  or  game). 

With  the  palm  down  aud  the  fingers  directed  forward,  pass  the  hand  rather  quickly 
from  side  to  side  at  a  distance  of  about  20  incites  before  the  face. 

tlUSIIAND. 

Make  tho  sign  for  man  (muHtach<Oi  for  mine,  aud  Hleep, 
I,  Mu,  My,  Mine.     (Possession.) 

The  tips  of  the  fingers  placed  gently  to  tho  middle  of  the  breast,  and  at  the  same 
time  make  a  slight  inclination  forward  of  the  head. 

Kaiak  (Haidarka). 

Place  the  closed  hands  on  a  level  with  aud  about  15  inches  before  their  respective 
shoulders,  palm  or  sides  to  tho  front.  Tlion  pass  the  left  fist  downward,  backward, 
aud  outward  toward  tho  left,  and  in  a  curve  continue  upward,  forward,  and  back  to 
point  of  starting,  i.  e.,  the  right  follows  the  motion  of  the  left,  maintaining  its  dis- 
tance as  in  comniencemunt.  When  the  left  turns  up  ami  back  on  its  course,  the 
right  begins  a  similar  gesture  on  its  side.  "  Represents  the  manner  of  using  the 
double-blade  oar  (or  paddle)  of  tho  coast  natives," 
KiLi,,  To.    Killed. 

Place  the  right  forearm  horizontally  forward  from  the  elbow,  flat  hand,  palm 
downward ;  the  left  tlat  hand  poiiitiug  upwar<l  aud  forward  from  the  left  side;  then, 
as  the  right  baud  is  rotated  outward  aiul  tho  back  down,  throw  the  left  palm 
straight  across  and  downward  over  the  right  forearm. 

Kill,  To  (with  a  gun). 

Point  the  left  forelinger  forward  at  arm's  length,  the  index  pointing  in  the  same 
direction  from  the  right  eye ;  then  make  the  sign  for  to  kiU,  kiUed. 
Kill,  To  (with  a  knife). 

Make  a  forward  and  downward  thrust  with  tlie  list,  oiitiT  edge  down,  then  con- 
clude instantly  with  the  sign  for  to  kiU, 

Kill,  To  (with  a  knife). 

Thrust  the  right  closed  hand  edgewise  downward  and  toward  the  front,  quickly, 
coming  to  an  abrupt  termination  when  about  as  low  down  as  the  height  of  the 
waist. 
Kill,  To  (with  an  arrow). 

Simulate  shooting  with  an  arrow ;  then  make  the  sigu  to  kill. 
Land  otieu. 

The  flat  hand  edgewise  (or  tho  extended  iudex)  in  a  curve  to  the  front — as  for 
whale,  in  direction  though  not  so  high— and  give  several  quick  whistles  as  if  call- 
ing pigeons. 

Lie.     (Falsehood.) 

Make  the  sign  for  talk;  thou  throw  the  hands  outward  and  forward,  palms  down 
and  slightly  curved,  at  the  same  time  puffing  with  the  mouth — bad. 

Lodge  (Indian). 

Place  the  inner  surfaces  of  the  tips  of  the  extended  fingers  of  both  hands  together, 
the  wrists  being  only  an  inch  or  two  apart. 

Similar  to  a  common  Indian  gesture. 
Lodge  (white  mau's). 

1.  Lay  the  edge  of  the  extended  index  across  the  extended  forelinger,  the  first 
joints  touching. 

2.  In  addition  to  the  preceding,  extend  the  left  thumb  aud  place  on  the  extended 
index. 


GRAPHIC  ART  OF  THE   EBKIMOS. 


953 


3.  With  the  index  iiii«l  Befuntl  tiiiKcrs  of  liuth  hands  extended,  ]»luco  tbeiu  together 
BO  that  they  cross,  about  the  first  jointM,  the  ri);ht  index  above. 
Man. 

1.  Pretend  to  catch  the  ends  of  the  mustache  with  the  hands  and  twist  them  out- 
ward from  the  face  to  right  and  left. 

2.  Pull  the  fingers  and  thumbs  over  the  sides  of  the  upper  !ip  as  if  twisting  and 
pulling  outward  a  long  mustache,  then  throw  the  right  hand,  palm  forward,  before 
the  right  shoulder,  pointing  upward. 

Man  (old). 

Place  the  finger  tips  of  the  slightly  curved  hands  together  before  the  chin,  though 
about  6  inches  from  it,  palms  toward  the  Jaw,  thou  pass  them  upward  toward  their 
respective  sides  of  the  head;  then  imitate  walking  with  a  statf,  I)y  passing  the 
closed  fist  edgewise  Ibrward  and  downward  in  a  circle  several  times. 

Many. 

Slap  the  palms  quickly  toward  one  another  before  tlie  breast,  tingers  pointing 
upward  and  naturally  extended  and  separated.     Refers  to  "many-times  counted- 
fiugers." 
Moon. 

Close  the  eyes  while  indicating  a  circle  with  the  bands  above  and  in  front  of  the 
bead;  then  pass  the  flat  band,  edgowiise,  out  toward  the  front  and  right  from  the 
center  of  the  breast. 
MOTHEIt.  .. 

Close  the  bands,  incline  the  head  forward,  then  pass  the  hands  upward  from  the 
back  of  the  head,  forward,  and  downward  toward  the  forehead,  the  motion  corre- 
sponding to  the  curve  of  the  head,  but  the  bands  about  3  or  4  inches  from  it. 

MOTHEK. 

Make  the  sign  for  woman,  and  to  be  horn. 
Mother's  bkothrk. 

Make  the  sign  mother  [i.  e.  tromcn,  to  bu  horn,  and  mine'],  then  for  tall,  by  indicating 
height  with  the  flat  band  ])alm  down;  man,  by  elevating  the  liand,  and  that  for 
mustache. 
Mother's  sister. 

Make  the  signs  for  mother  [woman,  to  be  horn,  and  mine]  and  young  woman ;  conclude 
by  throwing  the  fist  with  the  thumb  extended  in  a  pointed  manner  a  little  to  the 
right,  indicating  her». 

MUSKRAT. 

Curve  the  left  fingers  and  thumb  and  bring  the  tips  almost  to  a  point,  leaving  a 
slight  opeuing,  palm  down,  and  horizontal,  linger  tips  pointing  toward  the  right; 
then  bring  the  extended  index  pointing  from  tlio  left  side  directly  toward  the  left, 
in  an  upward  curve  first,  thcu  downward  and  forward  into  the  opening  left  at  the  tip 
of  the  left. 
Night. 

Incline  the  head  toward  the  breast  with  the  eyes  closed,  and  ))lacc  the  fiat  and 
slightly  bent  hands  with  the  palms  down  before  the  brows,  the  finger  tips  almost 
touching. 
No. 

Place  the  curved  hands  edgewise  with  the  backs  forward,  the  fingers  touching 
and  pointing  toward  the  breast,  then  throw  them  outward  toward  their  respective 
sides  a  short  distance,  though  rather  smartly. 

Nothing.    (Have  nothing.) 

Throw  the  extended  bands  horizontally  forward  and  outward  toward  their  res]>eo 
tive  sides  from  a  position  before  the  breast. 
Ocean. 

Make  the  sign  for  iig,  broad,  and  that  for  kaiak — indicating  double-bladed  paddle. 


M 


vl;! 


w^ 


954 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


i  i 


Pkoi>lb. 

Move  the  elevated  index  with  the  palmed  Hurface  forward,  from  side  to  side,  before 
the  face.     "  Men  at  various  places." 

The  index  is  an  alibroviation  of  the  general  sign  for  man,  and  this  was  the  only 
instance  in  which  it  was  used. 

PonciiPiNK. 

With  the  palms  directed  toward  and  near  the  ground,  imitate  slow  walking  by 
moving  them  alternately  forward  an«l  backward ;  stoop  over  to  the  front,  throw  the 
separated  fingers  backward  toward  the  hip,  then  throw  the  extended  index  violently 
outward  and  backward. 

"Imitates  slow  movement  of  the  animal,  the  spiny  covering,  and  the  direction 
of  the  spines  thrown  from  the  tail." 

Porpoise. 

Place  the  right  hand  in  the  same  position  as  for  whale,  make  the  motion  to  the 
front  leas  in  extent,  and  accompany  with  a  whistling  bound  from  the  left  corner  of 
the  mouth,  resembling  the  sound  pin. 

Rain. 

Place  the  flat  hands  on  a  level  with  the  face,  palms  down,  fingers  pendent,  and 
move  the  hands  alternately  up  and  down,  blowing  gently  witli  the  mouth  at  the 
same  time. 

RiVKK. 

Make  the  sign  as  for  creek,  the  hands  being  hold  nuieh  farther  apart,  tlien  pass  the 
right  hand  edgewise  forward  to  arm's  length,  in  a  serpentine  manner. 
"Course  and  width  of  water  containing  fish." 

Sea  ottek. 

Flex  both  hands,  jtlacc  the  outer  edges  together  Just  before  the  neck,  palms  toward 
the  face,  throw  the  head  back,  open  tiie  month  to  full  extent  and  imitate  the  gut- 
tural sound  of  X  or  cli  twice  or  three  times,  at  the  same  time  making  a  downward 
pull  with  the  hands. 

Settlement. 

Indicate  a  large  circle,  horizontally,  by  passing  the  hands  in  semicircle,  right  and 
left,  from  nearly  at  arm's  length  backward  to  the  breast;  then  place  the  tips  of  the 
fingers  of  both  hands  together,  leaving  the  hands  and  forearms  leaning  outward 
and  downward  to  their  respective  sides,  the  distance  between  the  elbows  being  about 
24  inches. 

The  large-sized  roof  house  indicates  plurality  in  this  instance. 

Shaman  (complete  sign). 

Make  the  sign  for  graan,  herba,  then  pull  it  from  the  ground  by  grasping  forward 
with  one  hand,  closing  it  and  pulling  it  toward  the  body;  then  the  sign  for  to  boil, 
add  the  sign  for  gire,  and  for  drink,  and  conclude  with  that  for  matt — mustache. 
Conception :  The  mun  who  boils  herba  and  gives  the  liquid  to  drink. 

Shaman.    (Sorcerer,  c«mjurer.) 

Shake  the  hand»<,  with  the  fingers  spread,  violently  on  either  side  of  the  head, 
imitate  the  cawing  of  a  crow  (or  the  barking  of  a  dog)  with  the  mouth,  and  Hap  the 
hands  downward  before  the  shoulders,  then  strike  upward  on  either  side  of  the  face 
and  forward,  and  with  the  scoop-shaped  hand  pretend  to  catch  something  in  the  air, 
and  shake  the  hands  thus  placed,  upward  and  downward,  several  times. 

Note. — "The  bird  spirits  are  good,  the  animal,  bad  ones." 

Shaman  (common,  abreviated  sign). 

Throw  the  hand  upward  from  either  side  of  tlie  head  [the  upper  arms  horizontal] 
and  wave  the  hands,  with  fingers  extended  and  separated  around  in  short  circles, 
horizontally. 

Shamanbss. 
Make  the  sign  fur  tvoman  and  that  for  ahantan. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOS. 


955 


Sick. 

1.  Plaoe  the  flat  right  hand  over  the  left  breast,  and  the  left  over  the  right  side 
below  the  right  forearm ;  at  the  same  time  throw  the  head  to  one  side,  with  eyes 
closed,  and  breathe  heavily — ottering  alight  moans,  if  illness  be  extreme. 

2.  Throw  the  head  and  body  to  one  Hide,  bn^athe  heavily,  and  lay  the  right  arm 
across  the  breast  with  the  hand  over  the  left  breast,  and  lay  the  left  hand  across 
below  the  right,  so  that  the  left  hand  tonches  the  right  forearm  near  the  elbow, 
"  internal  suffering." 

Cnts  and  fractures  are  indicated  panturaimiciUiy,  after  which  the  above  sign  is 
made,  to  illustrate  specifically  the  nature  of  the  sickness. 
Sister. 

Make  the  signs  for  young  woman  and  mine. 
Slkbp. 

Bring  the  palm  of  the  tlat  right  hand  toward  the  head,  and  incline  the  head  to  the 
right  at  the  same  time,  with  the  eyes  closed.  Sometimes  the  palm  touches  the  ear. 
Snow. 

Make  the  "'pi  for  rain;  then  indicate  depth  with  the  flat  right  hand.     This  is  not 
accompanied  by  blowing  round,  as  the  gesture  for  rain. 
Son. 

Indicate  height  with  the  flat  right  hand,  then  make  the  sign  for  mine. 
Stove,  Native. 

Place  the  flat  hands  edgewise  above  and  in  front  of  their  respective  shoulders, 
about  20  inches  apart,  then  pass  them  earthward  ab  far  as  the  hips;  then  pass  the 
flat  right  hand,  palm  down,  from  the  left  side  to  the  right  as  high  as  the  top  of  the 
head,  the  left  baud  at  the  same  time  moving  similarly  from  right  to  left  and  about 
10  inches  below  the  right.  Then  tbruHt  the  curved  index  several  times  toward  the 
partially  opened  mouth.  "  Form  of  house— on  i>oles  and  oblong — and  sign  for  eat — 
food."  Literally /ood  hoH««. 
Summer  shelter.  Temporary. 

Place  the  separated  and  extended  fingers  of  one  band  against  those  of  the  other,  the 
wrists  about  8  inches  apart,  then  draw  the  liaudK  downward  and  outward  a  short 
distance  to  their  respective  sides;  then  pass  the  flat  hands  from  a  position  in  front 
of  the  face,  and  over  the  spot  indicating  the  top  of  the  roof  in  the  preceding  gesture, 
outward  aud  downward  to  their  respective  sides;  indicating  flrst  an  angular  roof  of 
sticks;  second,  covering  of  skins  giving  it  rotundity. 
Sun. 

Place  the  hands,  with  extended  Angers  upward  at  arm's  length  before  the  head  at 
an  angle  of  abont  10° ;  then  pass  them  outward,  downward,  and  inward,  indicating  a 
circle  of  about  12  inches  in  diameter;  then  throw  the  extended  and  separated  fingers 
upward  and  outward  from  the  upj)er  periphery  of  the  imaginary  circle,  with  palms 
to  the  front — rays  of  light.  "  Radiating  sun,"  "  light." 
Talk,  To;  Talked. 

Place  the  tips  of  the  index,  second  finger,  and  thumb  together ;  then  as  they  are 
moved  forward  a  few  times  from  the  same  point  at  a  distance  of  about  0  inches  before 
the  mouth,  open  them  slightly  as  if  letting  fly  that  which  had  been  held  by  them. 
Time,  Ago.    (Past  time.) 

Pass  the  upright  flat  left  hand,  back  first  outward  toward  the  left,  throwing  the 
head  slightly  in  the  same  direction. 
Tobacco  (Coast  sign). 

Indicate  a  small  box  by  passing  the  flat  right  hand  edgewise  to  the  right  arm,  the 
left  toward  the  left,  leaving  a  space  between  them  of  6  inches;  then  pass  both  simul- 
taneously from  front  to  back — same  distance  between  palms ;  then  rub  the  approx- 
imated finger  tips  into  the  left  palm  and  put  left-hand  fingers  into  the  mouth,  asif 
poking  in  a  "quid  of  tobacco." 

"Taking  tobacco  from  a  box."  The  coast  natives  carry  tobacco  in  small  wooden 
or  other  boxes. 


i 


li    -'l 


956 


HEPO&T  OP  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1^95. 


1^ 


II  ;< 


1 1 


i  •  i\ 


Tobacco  ();«;Htare  as  made  by  the  Mountain  or  Kenai  Indians). 

Indicate  a  circle  on  the  ground  by  pasHing  both  hands  from  u  common  point,  out- 
ward, backward,  and  inward,  of  a  diameter  of  about  10  inches,  then  make  the  sign 
tasfire;  then  place  the  tips  of  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand  into  the  palm  of  the 
left,  pretend  to  pick  u)>  ashes  from  the  indicated  fireplace,  and  mix  with  contents  of 
left  hand;  then  take  the  "mixed  preparation"  and  place  into  the  cheek,  so  as  to 
push  it  out  with  the  fingers. 

Tobacco  (juids  are  carried  behind  the  ear,  and  when  wanted  to  chew,  ashes  are 
mixed  with  them,  for  pungency,  etc. 

To-morrow. 
Make  the  sign  for  one,  for  sleep,  and  for  day. 

Trai>  (Marten). 

Place  the  closed  left  hand  before  the  breast,  palm  inward,  fore  and  second  fingers 
extended  and  separated,  then  introduce  the  index  at  right  angles  between  them  and 
snap  them  together.     "Represents  the  trap  used  in  the  capture  of  martens." 
Trap  (mink  and  weasel,  or  for  those  animals). 

Place  the  flat  left  hand  before  the  body,  palm  upward,  finger  tips  directed  down- 
ward; then  place  the  wrist  of  the  fiat  right  hand  upon  that  of  the  left,  the  finger 
tips  pointing  forward  and  upward,  then  slap  the  front  of  the  hands  together. 

"  Represents  the  form  and  fall  of  the  trap  used  in  the  capture  of  these  animals." 
Trkb. 

Pass  the  elevated  and  extended  index  upward  before  the  face  as  high  or  higher 
than  the  top  of  the  head;  then  from  the  point  of  termination  of  the  movement  pass 
the  right  and  left  hands  upward  and  outward  to  their  respective  sides,  fingers 
extended  and  slightly  separated. 

"Stem,  and  branches." 

Tkikal  signs  (Coast  natives  generally). 
Make  the  sign  for  man  [mustache]  and  imitate  paddling  a  boat — on  one  side  only. 
"Canoe  men." 

Tribal  skins.    (Island  people.) 

Indicate  a  large  horizontal  circle  by  drawing  the  hands  outward,  backward,  and 
inward  toward  the  breast  from  a  point  nttarly  at  arm's  length ;  then  add  the  sign  for 
people. 

The  sign  for  inland,  here,  is  the  same  as  the  first  part  of  the  sign  for  settlement. 
The  specific  addition  indicates  the  difi'erence. 

Tribal  sign  (Kiate;i;'amut). 

Make  a  sign  for  vm»  [mits/ac/ie],  then  indicate  a  tiueue  by  drawing  the  extended 
index  downward,  outward,  and  backward  from  the  upper  posterior  portion  of  the 
head. 

"Queue  men,  i.  e.,  the  men  who  wear  (pieues." 
Tribal  signs  (Ko'losh)  [Kol'tsan], 

Make  the  sign  for  man  [mustache],  for  river,  and  for  mountain,  then  place  the 
right  closed  hand  with  the  back  forward  and  downward,  leaving  the  index  slightly 
flexed  so  as  to  point  upward. 

"Mountain-river  men." 
Tribal  signs  (Russian). 

Place  the  right  closed  hand  with  the  palm  up  pointing  downward  and  outward  to 
the  right,  the  index  only  partly  extended  and  curved  upward — pipe  bowl;  then  push 
the  hand  forward  a  short  distance — length ;  then  pretend  to  grasp  a  stick  by  placing 
the  hand  to  the  right  corner  of  the  mouth,  the  index  and  second  fingers  above,  the 
thumb  pressing  from  below — holding  pipe;  then  give  several  vigorous  pus's. 

"The  pipe  smokers." 

NoTK. — It  is  afllrmed  that  "pipes  were  not  smoked  prior  to  the  advent  of  the 
Russians." 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


967 


Tribal  signs  (Tai'-ant)  [Aleutian]. 

Hold  the  hnnds  edgewise  and  about  8  inches  apart,  pointing  horizontally  forward, 
then  pass  the  hands  forward  and  gradually  to  a  point  reprenenting  the  Hharp  bow  of 
uboat;  then  place  the  two  fists,  palms  forward,  ns  high  as  and  forward  from  the 
shoulders,  throw  both  hands  downward,  backward,  and  outward  toward  the  left, 
then  similarly  to  the  right  aide,  retaining  the  relative  distance  between  the  hands 
always — manner  of  using  the  double-blade  paddle. 

Tkikal  signs  (Ti-nai'-na)  [Tenan  Kntchin]. 

Both  hands  Hat  and  edgewise,  pointing  horizontally  forward;  place  the  wrists 
together,  the  fingers  and  palms  directed  outward,  forming  an  angle  of  about  40"^; 
then  pass  the  hands  forward  and  outward  and  inward  again  until  the  finger  tips 
join — outline  of  wooden  boat;  then  imitate  movement  as  if  working  single  paddle, 
as  in  the  sign  for  Kadiak. 
TiUBAL  SIGNS  (Tiai'na). 

Make  the  sign  for  man  [mustache]  ;  then  make  the  sign  foi  fire  as  high  upward, 
from  near  the  ground,  as  the  face. 

"  The  men  who  have  big  fires." 

Whale. 

Bend  the  flat  right  hand  edgewise  toward  the  ulna;  place  it  before  the  right  side 
pointing  upward  and  to  the  front,  allowing  the  thiiiiib  fo  be  erected  slightly  so  that 
the  tip  points  upward ;  then  pass  the  hand  ujtward,  forward,  and  downward,  describ- 
ing >:  curve  with  the  convexity  above.  At  the  same  time,  acconi])any  the  movement 
with  h  sound  represented  by  "pifi'  from  a  higher  to  a  lower  note,  embracing  about 
six  notes. 

"Movement  of  whale  and  sound." 

Wife,  My. 

Make  the  sign  for  woman,  earring — with  both  hands  and  ears — and  conclude  by 
making  that  for  sleep. 

WlNI>. 

Throw  both  palms  altern.itely  forward  from  the  corro8i>onding  sides  of  the  body, 
and  blow  violently  with  the  mouth. 

Winter.  , 

Place  the  flat  hands  with  spread  fingers  as  high  as  the  head  and  about  2  feet  before 
it,  finger  tips  touching,  then  pass  them  in  downward  curves  outward  toward  their 
respective  sides — form  of  hut;  then  hold  the  left  flat  hand  and  forearm  pointing 
horizont.illy  toward  the  right,  and  pass  the  right  hand,  palm  down,  forward,  under 
and  beyond  the  left  arm,  when  the  right  hand  ngain  rises  a  little.  Conception: 
Entering  by  a  deep  channel — underground. 

Wolf. 

Throw  the  right  hand  (or  both  right  and  left)  directly  forward  from  the  face,  with 
the  fingers  spread,  and  as  the  hand  reaches  arm's  length  clinch  the  thumb  and 
fingers;  at  the  same  time  open  the  mouth  to  the  fullest  extent  and  force  out  the 
breath  audibly  and  snap  the  teeth. 

Woman. 

Pass  the  partly  flexed  hands  from  the  top  of  the  head  downward  toward  their 
respective  shoulders.  The  hands  follow  the  outline  of  the  head  and  shoulders,  but 
do  not  touch  them.    Conception :  Long  hair. 

Woman  (old). 

Make  the  sign  for  woman;  then  hold  the  closed  hand  before  the  face,  palm  for- 
ward, the  index  being  raised  and  bent  toward  the  front.     "Curved  and  bent  of 
body  of  an  old  person." 
Yes. 

Nod  the  head  forward  until  the  chin  touches  the  Itreast,  once  or  twice. 


!■ 


958 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1895. 


I  I 


ii.  y 


1  -Mi: 


iii  i 


! 


Ybstkkdat. 

Make  the  sign  for  one,  for  tleep,  and  for  pott  time,  by  passing  the  npright  flat  loft 
hand  slowly  outward  toward  the  left,  leaning  the  head  a,  little  in  the  same  direction. 

YOUNO  MAN. 

Pass  tlie  naturally  closed  hands  from  the  front  of  the  body  backward  around  the 
sidns  ol  the  waist,  then  bend  tbe  elbows  and  move  the  arms  an  if  running.  Con- 
ception :  Belt,  and  activity  and  vvjor. 

Young  woman. 

Make  the  sign  for  woman;  then  gently  grasp  the  lobo  of  the  ear  with  the  thumb 
and  index  and  paHS  tlic  hand  down  slowly  as  far  as  the  front  of  thu  shoulder — 
"longhair"  and  "earring." 

SPEOIMENS  REFERRED   TO  IN   PRESENT  PAPER. 

The  specimens  selected  from  the  collections  of  the  National  Museum, 
upon  which  to  base  the  present  paper,  are  enumerated  below,  and  in 
all  instances,  where  possible,  the  National  Museum  Catalogue  number 
is  attached,  as  well  as  the  nature  of  the  specimen,  the  locality  from 
which  obtained,  and  the  name  of  the  collector.  Other  information  of 
interest  as  to  the  character  of  the  etchings  engraved  therein  is  also 
atlded  in  a  few  examples. 

The  list  is  divided  into  two  general  classes,  the  former  embracing 
the  drill  bows,  bag  handles,  and  other  long  rods;  while  the  second 
comprises  all  other  inscribed  pieces,  such  as  utensils,  weapons,  orna- 
ments, toys,  and  other  undetermined  specim^'us. 

The  leading  word  refers  to  the  article  under  consideration,  which  is 
followed  by  the  locality  where  it  was  obtained.  The  name  of  the  col- 
lector is  next  given,  which,  in  turn,  is  followed  by  the  numbers  under 
which  it  is  placed  in  the  accession  list  of  the  National  Museum. 

The  entire  series  of  numbers,  from  first  to  last,  is  in  order  so  as  to 
facilitate  identification  by  that  means  as  well  as  the  kind  of  object 
referred  to. 

The  list  forms  but  a  small  part  of  the  collections  from  Alaska,  but  is 
sufficiently  comprehensive  for  the  present  paper. 

DRILL  BOWS  AND  BAG  HANDLES. 

Drill  bow.  Anderson  River.  K.  Konnicott.  2171.  Has  a  long  thong  attached. 
The  bow  is  of  ivory,  13  inches  long  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  in  height, 
being  much  heavier  and  rounded  in  form  than  others.    There  is  no  orna.nientation. 

Bag  handle.    Norton  Sound.    L.  M.  Turner.    24412.     Plate  31,  fig.  2. 

Bag  HANDLE.    Norton  Sound.    L.  M.  Turner.     24417.     Plate  31,  fig.  3. 

Bag  HANDLE.    Norton  Sound.     L.  M.  Turner.     24415.     Plate  38,  fig.  1. 

Bag  HANDLE.     St.  Michaels.    L.M.Turner.    24425.     Plate  LH,  fig.  2. 

Bag  handle.  Norton  Sound.  E.  W.  Nelson.  24427.  White  ivory  specimen  with 
characteristic  /ig^'ag  i>atteru  in  parallel-line  space. 

KUNTAG  HANDLE.     St.  Michaels.     [L.M.Turner.?]    24429. 

Drill  bow.  Norton  Sound.  L.  M.  Turner.  24533.  An  old  stained  bow,  with  rude 
figures  representing  a  whale  being  harpooned,  with  float  in  the  air.  Following 
this  is  an  umiak,  and  a  native  behind  a  hillock  watching  some  reindeer.  The 
hillock  is  surmounted  by  a  tree,  though  the  figure  resembles  smoke  issuing  from 
a  hut.  The  opposite  side  has  four  vessels,  one  with  natives,  and  a  man  near  a 
walrus,  behind  a  wolf,  next  a  reindeer,  and  before  this  another  wolf  and  a  goose. 
The  oblique  figures  at  the  end  are  ornamental. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF  THE   ESKIMOS. 


959 


iit  flat  loft 
direction. 

ironnd  the 
ing.    Con- 


the  thumb 
shoulder — 


Museum, 
w,  ami  ill 
le  uuniber 
ility  from 
'mation  of 
}in  is  also 

ambracing 
he  second 
)ons,  orna- 

I,  which  is 
of  the  col- 
bers  under 
iim. 

Br  80  as  to 
of  object 

iska,  but  is 


Dfi  attached, 
ih  iu  height, 
Diiaientation. 


)eciuien  with 


»w,  with  rude 
Following 
Bindeer.  The 
issuing  from 
a  man  near  a 
f  and  a  goose. 


Drill  row.  Norton  Sound.  L.  M.  Turner.  24536.  Hears  upon  one  side  the  figure 
of  a  stem  wheel  steamboat,  an  illustration  of  which  is  given  in  iig.  31.  Upon 
the  reverse  a  few  reindeer,  fox,  wnlf,  a  two-masted  schooner,  and  a  three-deck 
kaiak,  above  the  latter  an  outline  of  tlie  human  figure  with  arms  partly 
extended,  as  in  gesture  for  surprise.  The  upper  edge  t»r  rim  lias  some  decora- 
tion consisting  of  rude  short  liuoa  arranged  diagonally,  though  crossing  at  right 
angles  to  one  another. 

Dkill  Bow.  Norton  Sound.  L.  M.  Turner.  24537.  An  old  bow,  having  on  one  side 
a  number  of  seals,  divided  into  two  divisions  by  eight  upright  whale  flukes. 
Rather  decorative.    Opposite  side  has  men  and  dogs. 

Drill  Bow  of  Horn.    St.  Michaels.    L.  M.  Turner.    24538. 

Drill  Bow.  Norton  Sonnd.  L.  M.  Turner.  24539.  One  side  of  the  three  deco- 
rated faces  bears  figures  of  seals  and  walruses,  with  hunters  armed  with  buws 
and  arrows,  and  with  spear.  A  bear  also  is  shown,  while  on  the  reverse  is  a 
herd  of  i-eindcer  being  hunted. 

Drill  Bow.  Norton  Sound.  L.  M.  Turner.  24543.  But  on(>  side  and  the  bottom 
edge  are  decorated.  The  side  bears  a  hunting  record,  three  human  figures,  at  the 
middle,  being  interested  in  the  result  of  shooting  at  some  reindeer  and  other 
animals.  At  the  left  end  is  a  kaiak,  the  occupant  of  which  is  after  a  large  bird 
and  two  walrus.  Upon  the  bottom  edge  are  four  hunters,  each  in  his  kaiak,  after 
four  whales,  three  of  which  have  been  harpooned.  The  hunters  are  represented 
as  holding  their  paddles  horizontally  above  tlie  head,  the  gesture  or  signal  that 
they  have  cast  the  spear  or  harpoon,  and  also  to  indicate  "iissi.Htanco  wanted" 
in  so  far  that  the  animal  may  bo  kept  sight  of  and  not  permitted  to  escape. 

Drill  Bow.  St.  Michaels.  L.  M.  Turner.  24545.  This  bears  some  of  the  best 
incised  of  the  ordinary  art  work  of  this  locality. 

Drill  Bow.  Norton  Sound.  L.  M.  Turner.  2454(>.  Made  of  reindeer  horn,  and 
bears  upon  the  under  surface  a  row  of  eleven  seals,  one  before  the  other,  head- 
ing toward  the  right. 

Drill  Bow.  St.  Michaels.  L.  M.  Turner.  24548.  Made  of  reindeer,  and  boars 
two  rows  of  these  animals  divided  in  the  middle  by  tliree  persons — one  hunter 
and  two  attendants  making  gestures  of  attention  to  herd  and  indicating  its 
whereabouts. 

Drill  Bow  of  Horn.    St.  Michaels.    L.  M.  Turner.    24551. 

Drill  Bow  of  Horn.    St.  Michaels.    I.    M.  Turner.    245.52. 

Drill  bow.  St.  Michaels.  L.  M.  Turner.  24553.  A  white  piece  ».f  ivory,  with 
record  of  a  man  smoking  while  one  hands  an  arrow  to  tlie  third  who  is  shooting 
a  reindeer.  Other  animals  are  also  portr.tyed  farther  to  the  rigiit.  Dog  sledge 
and  native,  as  well  as  houses,  are  shown  on  next  side,  while  upon  the  third 
face  are  two  longitudinal  border  lines  with  interior  crosspieces  of  ornamenta- 
tion, denoting  the  wavy  or  zigzag  pattern.  See  also  figures  and  accompanying 
references  passim. 

Drill  bow.  St.  Michaels.  L.  M.  Turner.  24556.  Piece  of  four  panels,  two  of 
which  have  umiaks  with  hunters.  Opposite  side  lias  /i^/ag  patterns  by  pairs, 
both  inclosed  between  the  usual  p.arallel  lateral  lines. 

Drill  now.  St.  Michaels.  L.M.Turner.  245.57.  Made  of  reindeer  horn;  is  orna- 
mented on  one  side  with  deeply  cut  and  uncolored  outlines  of  birds,  wolves,  deer, 
men,  and  mythic  animals,  several  ap])earing  like  alligators. 

Drill  BOW.  Sledge  Island.  (?)  28021.  Although  so  marked,  the  record  in  acces- 
sion catalogue  is  not  in  accord  and  the  collector's  name  not  given,  which,  without 
doubt,  should  be  Mr.  Nelson's. 

Drill  bow.  Norton  Sound.  E.  W.  Nelson.  33179.  Bears  on  the  convex  surface 
some  dancers.  At  the  other  end  is  a  well-drawn  umiak,  from  which  an  animal 
is  running.  The  lateral  edges  are  ornamented  with  deeply  incised  blackened 
creases,  while  the  under  side  bears  but  two  human  figures,  in  the  attitude  of 
boxing  or  sparring. 


960 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  189S. 


,  ■!     il 


:     J-    <', 


Dbill  row.  Norton  Sound.  E.  W.  Nelson.  33181.  The  Imw  is  cnrvvd  odgewise, 
plain,  with  the  exception  of  a  heavily  incined  creaHo  at  the  haao  of  either  Hide. 
One  of  these  creases  shows  evidenceH  <'f  repeated  scratchings  with  a  finely 
Iiointed  tool. 

Duiixnow.  Norton  Sound.  E.W.Nelson..  33182.  A  yellowish,  rather  old,  Hpeci- 
inen  with  various  fi^nriis,  nearly  all  of  which  are  characteristic. 

Drill.  HOW.  Norton  Sound.  K.  W.  Nelsun.  3318.3.  A  four  sided  round-edged  pioco 
of  old  ivory,  KH  inches  in  length,  upon  one  side  of  wiiich  only  a  simple  tlgnru 
occurs— that  of  a  man  with  liis  anus  curved  and  hands  leHting  on  his  hips. 

Drill  how.  Norton  Sound.  K.  W.  Nelson.  33184.  Thin  bears  niurginal  lines 
extending  from  end  to  end,  at  one  end  being  a  kaiak  with  a,  singh*  hunter,  while 
at  the  other  are  four  inverted  umiaks;  apparently  not  a  finished  drawing. 

Drill  how.  Norton  Sound.  K.  W.  Nelson.  .33188.  Made  of  reindeer  horn,  and  is 
rather  thin  and  deeply  creased  on  either  edge  by  one  groove,  and  by  two  grooves 
upon  the  upper  and  under  sides.  The  lower  side  bears  sharply  incised  engrav- 
ings of  reindeer  hunting;  tht^  herd  of  animals  is  lying  down,  while  the  hunter 
is  crawling  up  on  all  fours,  being  hidden  by  a  hillock. 

Drill  how.  Norton  Sound.  E.  W.  Nelson.  33189.  A  liow  made  of  reindeer  horn 
and  bears  sharply  defined  characters  of  boats,  sledges,  meat  racks,  etc. 

Drill  how.  Norton  Sound.  K.  W.  Nelson.  33190.  Bears  upon  convex  side  a  herd 
of  reindeer,  with  one  hunter  at  the  right  end  of  the  rod. 

Bao  iiANnLS.     Kogik.    K.  W.  Nelson.    .%375. 

Drill  HOW.  Norton  Sound.  E.W.Nelson.  37178.  A  triangular  bow,  with  figures 
of  conventional  seals  along  the  lower  side;  conventional  T-shaped  whale  flukes 
along  a  horizontal  line  upon  the  one  side  of  the  u])per  surface,  while  on  the 
other  side  ^ru  the  conventional  rear  ends  of  whales,  with  the  fiukcs  projecting. 

Kantao  iiandlr.     Norton  Sound.     E.  W.  Nelson.    37742.     Plate  14,  fig.  3. 

Drill  HOW.  Shaktolik.  E.W.Nelson.  38521.  Bears  upon  one  side  nineteen  rein- 
deer, no  doubt  purely  for  decorative  purpose.  Upon  the  opposite  side  are  also 
twelve  reindeer,  though  heading  in  the  opposite  direction.  These,  too,  are  all 
alike,  or  nearly  so,  and  appear  to  be  intended  rather  for  decorating  the  bow  than 
as  a  record  only. 

Drill  how.  Shaktolik.  E.  W.  Nelson.  38522.  Hunter  partly  oblit«rated,  but 
to  his  right  are  five  whale  fiukes  setting  on  end  T-shaped  and  indicating  that 
number  of  whales  captured.  The  opposite  side — the  bow  being  nuide  to  stand 
edgewis«> — bears  a  reind(>er  which  is  being  shot  at  by  a  hunter.  The  latter  ia 
lying  tiat  and  aiming  with  a  gnn.     At  the  other  end  are  three  granaries. 

Bag  iiandlb.  Shaktolik.  E.  W.  Nelson.  38523.  Six  inches  in  length  and  rather 
stout.  It  is  yellow  with  age,  and  bears  upon  the  upper  side  one  base  line,  to 
which  are  attached  eight  figures  of  concentric  circles  with  deep  central  pits. 

Bag  handle.     Yukon  River.     ( ?)    38539.     Plate  38,  fig.  3. 

Bag  handle.     Location  unknown.     38752.    Plato  31,  fig.  1. 

Bag  handlk.    Norton  Sound.     E.  W.  Nelson.     38776.     Plate  31,  fig.  4. 

Drill  HOW.  Northof  Norton  Sound.  E.W.Nelson,  38781.  Both  upper  and  lower 
sides  decorated  with  nucleated  rings,  the  central  perforations  or  incisions  being 
rather  deep.  The  circles  measure  three-eighths  and  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch  in 
diameter,  arranged  without  any  special  care  or  purpose,  simply  following  the 
general  horizontal  direction  of  the  faces.  One  edge  has  whale  fiukes  and  the 
other  triangular  summer  habitations  in  regular  order  and  apparently  for  dec- 
orative purposes  only. 

Drill  how.  Port  Clarence.  T.  H.  Bean.  40054.  This  bow  bears  hunters  spearing 
seals  through  the  ice,  some  of  which  are  illustrated  elsewhere.  Upon  the  other 
side  are  several  figures  of  mythic  animals.  Upon  one  edge  is  a  village  of  tri- 
angular-8hape<l  dwellings,  with  meat  rack  in  middle. 

Kantag  handle.    St.  Michaels.    E.  W.  Nelson.    43434.    Plate  80,  fig.  2. 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF  THE   E8KIM08. 


961 


ud  odgewiae, 
r  either  Hido. 
irith  a  finely 

ler  old,  Hpeci- 

il-edged  ]iioco 
Biinplo  tlguru 
liis  hipa. 
largiiial  lines 
linuter,  while 
rawing. 
r  horn,  and  ia 
y  two  grooves 
cised  engruv- 
ile  the  hunter 

reindeer  horn 

,  etc. 

ex  Bide  »  herd 


r,  with  figures 
I  whale  tlukes 

while  on  the 
ca  projecting, 
ig.  3. 

nineteen  rein - 
p  aide  are  alao 
le,  too,  are  all 

the  bow  than 

iterated,  bnt 
idicating  that 

ade  to  stand 

The  latter  is 
lariea. 
th  and  rather 

baae  line,  to 
tntral  pita. 


per  and  lower 
icisions  being 
of  an  inch  in 
following  the 
ukes  and  the 
ontly  for  dec- 

itera  apearing 
pon  the  other 
illage  of  tri- 

2. 


Drill  now.  Hhaktolik.  K.  W.  Nelaon.  43810.  Delicate  and  lieautiful  engraving 
marks  this  as  very  superior  to  ino»<t  specimens.  The  reindeer  is  shown  on  one 
side;  delicately  engraved  umiaks  and  a  kaiak  are  on  the  next  adjoining  side, 
while  on  the  reverse  are  partly  obliterated  characters,  shown  and  described  in 
text  in  figures. 

Kantac  iiANhi.R.     Mnalaklect.     K.  W.  Nelson.     i:«^20.     Plate  ."iS,  lig.  3. 

Ditii.i.  HOW.     Nnbninkhchugaluk.     K.  \V.  NcInou.     43031. 

Kantau  iianix.k.     Nubuiakhchugaluk.     K.  \V.  Nclxon.    43!):%. 

DitiM.  now.  Cape  Darby.  K.  \V.  Nelaon.  44206.  Much  curved  and  old  specimen. 
The  length  straight  ucroas  from  point  to  point  is  14  iucliea,  while  the  height  of 
the  curve  ia  4  inchea.  Hoth  aides  are  decorated,  the  narrow  edges  having  only 
parallel  lines,  excepting  one  place  ornamented  with  an  umiak  containing  throe 
persons  The  upper  aide  bcara  a  variety  of  delicately  engraved  figures,  occupied 
with  various  avocations,  and  many  of  them  represented  in  attitudes  to  denote 
actitm  and  gesture.  The  under  aide  bears  a  herd  of  reindeer,  the  animals,  after 
passing  through  a  alough  or  river,  approaching  a  hunter  who  is  armed.  Heyond 
this  person  is  another  engaged  in  cutting  up  a  reindeer  which  is  lying  upon  its 
back.     At  the  right  aide  are  four  other  reindeer  in  various  lifelike  attitudes. 

Drill  bow.  Cape  Darby.  E.  \V.  Nelson.  44207.  Hears  i\  few  coarsely  engraved 
characters,  at  one  end  being  the  upper  line  of  a  whale's  tignre,  to  which  are 
attached  lines  like  iina  or  spines  from  the  head  down  toward  and  nearly  touch- 
ing the  flukes. 

Dhill  now.  Cape  Darby.  K.  W.  Nelson.  44208.  Walrus  hunting  and  scaflTolded 
umiaks  are  shown  on  one  of  the  two  lower  surfaces,  the  upper  Hat  surface  being 
without  any  engravings.  The  work  is  very  graphic,  and  some  of  the  boats  in 
the  water  are  scattered,  to  resemble  tlio  work  of  .lapanese  artists — as  pertains  to 
an  attempt  at  perapective  in  this  inatance.  The  specimen  ia  shown  as  a  text 
figure. 

Dkii-i,  bow.    Cape  Darby.     E.  W.  Nelson.     44209.     Plate  24,  fig.  1. 

Drill  mow.  Cape  Darby.  E.  W.  Nelson.  44210.  Kecunls  on  two  sides  consist 
almost  entirely  of  reindeer  in  various  attitudes,  and  some  very  lifelike.  A  few 
animala  are  drawn  foresliortenetl. 

Drill  BOW.  Cape  Darby.  E.\V.  Nelson.  44212.  Old  yellow  ivory  specimen,  deco- 
rated on  four  faces.  The  dorsal  surface  has  two  figures  incised  to  the  depth  of 
over  ono-sixtcenth  of  an  inch,  the  figures  consisting  of  rudely  drawn  animals 
and  human  beings. 

At  the  aide  is  a  aeries  of  outlines  (»f  the  human  figure,  with  arms  in  various 
attitudes,  as  in  records  portraying  ceremonial  dances,  thougii  in  the  present 
instance  the  fignres  appear  seated  upon  tlie  groinul,  or  base  line.  Hoats  and 
walruses  are  alao  to  be  aeen  nearer  the  right  end,  while  at  tlie  left  is  a  seal  hunt. 
Upon  the  opposite  aide  are  several  umiaks,  going  toward  tlie  right,  in  pursuit 
of  a  whale.  In  the  middle  of  the  record  are  some  indefinite  outlines,  among 
which,  however,  may  be  detected  that  of  a  reindeer. 

The  under  side  bears  upon  it  a  number  of  animal  forms  at  the  left,  while  a 
well-drawn  whale  is  next  portrayed,  followed  by  another,  wlioso  l)ody  is  thrown 
partly  from  the  water,  having  been  liarpooned  by  a  hunter  in  the  pursuing  umiak 
at  the  right.  A  whale  fluke  projects  from  the  water  behind  the  boat,  while  two 
cubs  and  an  adult  boar  are  next  shown,  approaching  three  large  figures,  which 
seem  to  be  intended  for  heavily  robed  or  <lressed  natives. 

Drill  bow.  Cape  Darby.  E.  W.  Nelson.  44213.  Upon  the  dorsum  of  this  piece 
is  a  group  of  ships  a.  d  native  boata.  Rude  engravings  of  ships  occur  on  one 
side,  while  white  men's  houses  are  represented  at  other  ])ortions. 

Drill  BOW.     Cape  Nome      E.  VV.  Nelson.    44300.     Delicate  and  ahari>  engraving 
marks  this  specimen  :     characteristic  of  this  locality. 
The  herd  of  deer  shown  in  fig.  9  are  from  this  piece. 
NAT  MUS  96 61 


-Tf 


'■i 


i  I'^'t 


'"^m^ 


!S  :   ,:■ 


962 


REPORT  OP   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  189B. 


Drim<  now.  Cape  Noino.  K.  VV.  NelHon.  4t:Uj7.  Keprcsenta  u  walriiH  hunt  lund 
harpoon  throwing.  Illuatrationa  havn  bevn  pelected  from  this  rod  and  mpro- 
duced  in  connection  with  hunting  and  flahini;. 

Dao  iiandi.k.  Cape  Nonio.  E.  W.  Ni^laon.  44308.  Thia  fine  liir^e  apocimen  haa 
numoroiiH  iif{iir<>H  of  flyiu);  hirda  and  liniiian  forma  roHflinbling  the  0|il>wa 
thunder  bird.    Whalo  and  other  hnnta  arn  alao  portrayed. 

Drim.  now.  Cape  Nome.  K.  W.  Nolaon.  4I3!)9.  A  atron^  piece  moaHiirinf;  17i 
inches  in  length.     Tlie  two  flat  aidvH  and  one  lateral  edgo  have  been  decorated. 

Hag  IIANDI.K.  ('ape  Nome.  [E.  \V.  NelHon.  ?]  14427.  HearH  ernde  thoiiKh  typical 
characters  of  umiak,  -f -like  hird  ti){uroH,  and  aeveral  human  tigurea.  The  apeci- 
mcn  ia  yellow  and  coimideraldy  worn. 

Dnii.i.  now.  (^apo  Nome.  E.  W.  Nelson.  44400.  A  narrow  Hpecimen,  ineaanring 
13^  inchea  in  length,  live-aixteonthH  of  an  inch  hi^h,  and  one-fourth  of  an  inch 
thick.  The  euKravin^^H  represent  walrua  hunting,  and  two  of  the  kaiaka  are 
unuHually  inti-resting,  the  Hpear  rack  or  ^uiird  being  indicated  in  the  firat  kaiak, 
while  on  the  second  tlie  harpoon  line  ia  ahown  with  the  twista  and  curves  obaerv- 
able  wlu'ii  a  coiled  line  is  caat  out. 

Ditii.i.  now.     Cape  Nome.    E.  W.  Nelson.     44401.     Plate  [23],  tig.  1. 

Diui.i.  now.  Cape  Nome.  (E.  W.  Nelscm.  f)  41464.  I nteroating  from  the  fact  that 
both  alopeaof  the  uiuler  surface  bear  rowi^of  umiaks,  some  with  meats  and  some 
without,  so  ]tlaccd  as  to  suggest  ornamentation  rather  than  an  attempt  to  record 
historic  or  other  information. 

Upon  the  upper  side  the  entire  length  is  also  divided  l>y  u  median  line.  Upon 
either  side  the  apace  is  tilled  with  various  figures,  such  as  camp  scenes,  dancea, 
and  various  avocations. 

The  H)>ecimen  is  rather  yellow  with  age,  and  the  tigurea  ]»artly  tilled  with  a 
brownish  black  substance. 

DitlM.  now.  Cape  Nome.  E.  W.  Nelson.  4446.'>.  A  yellow,  old,  piece  of  ivory, 
with  a  sharp-lined  series  of  small  figures  at  the  end  uptm  tho  upp(>r  edge  of 
the  bow.  There  are  five  swimming  seals,  rather  ('(mveiitional  in  outline,  above 
which  three  birds  are  seen  in  the  forms  of  small  cross  like  characters.  Before 
these  is  a  tiguro  resembling  a  bear(  f )  and  still  farther  forward  a  seal. 

Duii.l.  now.     Cape  Nome.     E.  W.  Nelson.     444t!B.     Tlate  24,  lig.  4. 

Dm  i.i.  now.  Cape  Nome.  ( E.  W.  Turner. )  444«i7.  The  herd  of  deer  upon  the  upper 
curvv>  of  this  specimen  is  shown  as  a  text  figure.  The  lower  side,  and  the  edges 
also,  bear  camp  sct^nes,  while  various  human  figures  in  attitudes  of  geature  are 
ahown  on  the  side. 

Kantag  handle.     Sledge  Island.     E.  W.  Nelson.     44690. 

Hag  IIANDI.K.     Sledge  Island,     p].  VV.  Nelson.     446JU. 

IUg  IIANDI.K.  Sledge  Island.  E.  W.  Nelson.  44716.  Measures  but  6}  inches  in 
length,  and  bears  upon  the  to]>  some  conventional  "trident"  tree  tigurea,  e^f^h 
placed  alternately  facing,  between  parallel  longitudinal  lines. 

Kantag  handlk.     Sledge  Island.     E.  \V.  Nelson.     44717. 

DriM'  now.  Sledge  Island.  E.W.Nelson.  45016.  Parts  of  this  are  reproduced 
in  text  figure.  The  lines  are  sharp  and  cleanly  Micised.  One  pecularity  in  the 
figures  of  humau  beings  on  records  from  Sledge  Island  is  that  the  heads  are  all, 
or  nearly  all,  made  by  boring  Avith  drill.  One  side  of  another  face  bears  an 
umiak  with  harpooned  whale,  following  a  neatly  eng-aved  white  umiak  con- 
taining 3  figures. 

Tho  under  side  beara  some  obscene  figures,  or  rather  those  made  obscene  by 
gesture  and  additional  drawings. 

Drill  now.  Sledge  Island.  E.  W.  Nelson.  45017.  The  figures  of  a  series  of  hab- 
itations, boats  on  racks,  and  umiaks  afloat,  are  all  neatly  and  definitely  incised. 
Upou  the  reverse  is  a  settlement  of  two  winter  haliitations  and  one  scaffold, 
the  five  human  figures  being  portrayed  with  hands  and  anna  elevated,  slightly 
inclined  toward  the  left  end  of  the  bow,  seemingly  as  if  some  further  portion  of 
a  record  had  been  contemplated  but  not  executed.  The  color  employed  in  fill- 
ing the  incision  is  black,  and  the  entire  specimen,  and  engravings,  has  a  modem 
appearance. 


■U 


GRAPHIC   ART   OP   THE   ESKIMOS. 


963 


int  iuid 

I  ropto- 

nen  has 
Ojlhwa 

ring  m 
icorated. 
1  typicul 
be  spec  i- 

leasnriiig 
r  an  inch 
itiiikH  are 
rat  kniiik, 
wobserv- 


)  fact  that 
i  and  Honie 
i  t<»  record 

ne.  I'pon 
OB,  dances, 

Ited  with  a 

e  of  ivory, 
)(!r  edjjo  «'' 
line,  ab<ive 
ra.    Before 


the  upptr 
^l  the  edges 
restnre  are 


inches  in 
;ureB,  eP'^h 

reproinced 
Lrity  in  the 
lids  arc  all, 
|u  hears  an 
limiak  con- 
obscene  by 

lies  of  hab- 
My  incised. 
Ve  scaffold, 
[d,  slightly 
■  portion  of 
lyed  in  fiU- 
Is  a  modem 


DlilM.  now  OF  lioim.     Mledge  Islnnd.     K.W.  Nelson.    4.'i018. 

Dbii.i.  bow.  Sledge  Inland.  K.  W.  NelHon(r).  45010.  The  decorations  on  this 
interesting  specimen  are  reproduced  in  text  tignrc.  The  work  is  characteristic, 
the  dancers  only  reacnilding  tlie  deeply  engraved  lignrcs  imimlly  found  on  the 
apecimens  from  Kot/ebue  Sound. 

DltlM.  now.  Sledue  laland.  K.  W.  N'elNon.  454)20.  TIiIm  old  apeciuicn  preaents  a 
whaling  fleet.  Kpon  the  reverse  is  »  ^roup  of  nativea  fialiing  thmugh  the  ire, 
near  by  bring  their  reaidenre,  granary,  and  votive  otlVriuKa  stuck  up  upon  the 
entrance  to  the  lioiiae. 

Diili.i,  now.  Sledge  laland.  K.W.  Nelson.  4r>()25.  rpjior  side  alightly  rounded, 
while  the  bottom  ia  divi<le<l  in  two  aidea  or  facea.  All  tlieae  are  decorated  with 
sharp,  tine  linea,  characteristic  of  Cape  .Noiue  workmanaliip.  The  specimen  in 
very  yellow  and  haa  ait  ol«l  appearance,  cliiotly  because  of  the  ai^iis  of  long- 
continued  nae. 

Kantao  ilANin.K.     Sledge  laland.     K.  W.  Nelson.     i'AM, 

Duil.l,  now.     Cape  Nome.     K.W.Nelson.     i't'.VM). 

Ditii.r^  HOW.  Cape  Nouie.  E.W.Nelson.  4.');W1.  An  ohl  ]>iecc  of  ivory  with  cnar* 
acteriatic  engravin^'h.  The  tyjte  ia  recognized,  if  any  special  ilitferencc  may  bo 
said  to  exist  between  this  and  other  localities,  by  the  thin,  though  aharply 
inciaed,  linea  and  brown-black  color  ap]ilie(l  to  bring  <nit  the  cavities.  A  great 
deal  of  geaticnlati<m  is  ahvaya  represented  in  connection  with  the  ])ortrayal  of 
the  human  figure. 

One  of  the  two  u|)per  faces  haa  upon  it  a  herd  of  reindeer,  the  other  face  a  seal 
hunt,  while  the  bottom  haa  the  drawings  of  liuildings  anil  storehoiiacs  for  food. 

Dkim.  HOW.  Cape  Nome.  K.  W.  Nelson.  l't'XV2.  A  triangular  aliuhtly  curved  bow, 
m  inches  in  length.  The  specimen  is  yellow  from  .ige  and  beara  the  delicate 
hair-like  inciaiima  or  engravinga  characteristic  of  the  locality  from  which  it 
came.  Oesturea  are  frci|uently  indicated,  though  the  chief  features  of  the  bow 
refer  to  reindeer  and  walrus  hunting.  At  one  en<l  is  a  danci>,  the  pertbrmers 
lieiug  drawn  in  various  attitudes. 

On  the  under  side  are  the  tine  lines  portraying  two  kaiakn  approaching  one 
another,  the  occupants  holding  aloft  their  jiaddles,  while  between  them  are  two 
seals.  A  little  farther  toward  one  side  is  an  niiiiak  with  live  occupants,  whose 
heads  and  faces  resemble  birds'  heads  with  long  sharp  billa. 

Diui.i,  HOW.    Cajio  Nome.     K.  W.  Nelson.     l.'i.'lIW. 

IHiiM.  HOW.  Cajie  Nome.  E.  W.  Nelson.  45;i45.  Hears  herds  of  reindeer,  some 
browsing,  while  others  are  in  various  attitudes  u|>on  the  ground.  The  under 
side  bears  a  herd  of  reindeer  approaching  a  hunter.  At  the  right  end  are  two 
beara,  ap]>arently  a  mother  with  its  cub. 
liii.l.  BOW.  Cape  Nome.  E.  W.  Nelson.  4.")346.  Some  of  these  etchin^jH  embody 
gesture  signs,  and  arc  rejtrodnced  in  connection  with  that  subject. 

Drim.  now.  Port  Clarence.  W.  H.  Dall.  IH0r)6.  Made  of  a  rib,  is  almost  12  inches 
across  from  tip  to  tip,  and  retains  a  thong  of  leather  for  drilling  purjuises. 
There  are  no  decorations  of  any  dca(Ti]»tion. 

Drill  bow.  Fort  Anderson.  R.  MacFarlane.  A  rounded  bow  11.4  inches  long, 
resembling  the  preceding  in  smuothncsa  and  absence  of  tlecoration. 

Ukill  how.  Golovin  Bay.  E.  W.  Nelson.  48080.  A  specimen  yellow  with  age. 
No  decorations  ajtpear  with  the  exception  of  two  parallel  lines  on  both  the  njtper 
and  lower  surfaces.     The  handle  has  been  much  worn  by  long-continued  u.se. 

Drill  BOW.  Cape  Darby.  E.W.Nelson.  48115.  An  old-looking  yellow  specimen, 
npon  which  is  the  whale  being  dragged  from  the  water  and  cut  up,  shown  in 
plate  07,  fig.  3. 

The  opposite  side  has  the  ceremonial  dance,  and  drummer  from  whose  instru- 
ment the  sound  is  represented  as  going  out  over  the  group  of  dancers.  Plate 
72,  fig.  2. 

Kantag  handle.     Cape  Darby.     E.  W.  Nelson.    48137. 


•1-]  • 


964 


REPORT  OP  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1«9B. 


'!   i 


v\^ 


■  f 


I  )  I 


1  • 


*  1 


lit  V   !  i"i- 


1«i  i 


A  dark  yelltiw  np«oimen, 
A  goml  liarptMin  line  iiihI 


Prim.  now.     Kotzebue  Sound.     K.  W.  NolMm.    4851N. 
criidtdy  and  lioavily  enKraved  with  Hhip,  walriiN,  <^tf, 
efl'flct  of  (tiiHt  Ih  nhown. 

Ditii.i,  now.  Cape  Nome.  K.  W.  Nvlnon.  4MH3().  HettrH  nolid  liord  of  reinde«<r 
nearly  !<  inchon  Umg,  while  on  utiier  Hide  are  reindi-er,  and  men  making;  Krntureti 

Ditll.l.  HOW.  Kot/.<>hiio  HoMiid.  K.  W.  NelHon.  18.'>1!*.  An  old  and  v«Ty  yellow 
Hperinion  of  ivory.  Four  nidea  of  the  pit'co  are  derorated  with  Hoveral  diHtiiirt 
ntyleH  of  rccordH.  The  upper  or  convt^x  aide  beam  the  deeply  engraved  IlKiireH 
of  whaling  ahipH  foreHhortened,  and  liahitatioiiH,  |irolial)ly  indirutinK  aonie 
tratlor'H  eNtahliHhnient.  On  one  Hide  \h  a  native,  drawn  len^thwiHe,  next  to  him 
being  portrayed  a  rack  with  meat  (liHh)  Niispended,  while  next  to  thiM  Ih  a  not 
atretfhed  out  tor  drying. 

The  next  characterH  renemble  the  iMirvod  parallel  line^  iiHed  by  the  I'nehlo 
tribeH  and  the  OJibwa  to  denote  the  nky,  beneath  which  are  parallel  vertical 
lineH  running  down  to  the  bano  or  ground  line,  roHembling  the  Hynib<d  for  rain. 
The  preHent  iiuureH  are  bilioved,  however,  to  denote  the  aurora  borealiH,  a  like 
flgure  having  been  drawn  for  the  prcnent  writer  by  NaomoD'  and  verified  by  a 
Malaniut  F.Hkinio  in  ('alit'ornia  at  the  Hanio  time  when  the  inveMtigationn  were 
made  at  the  muHeunt  of  the  Alaska  ('onimerrial  Company. 

A  very  rudely  drawn  lignro  of  a  winter  habitati<ni,  with  Huioke  iHHuing  from 
the  top,  Ih  shown  next  toward  the  right,  the  end  of  the  ro<l  bearing  smaller  iig- 
ureH  of  footl  rark,  hutH,  ete. 

T\n>  under  Hide  of  the  rod  bears,  at  the  left,  two  dog  HietlgeH  lieiiig  dragged 
forward,  and  preceded  by  nine  natives  running  toward  a  largo  winter  habita- 
tion. ThoHo  nativeH  are  in  various  attitudiH  to  reprenent  locomotion,  and  each 
has  a  projection  upon  the  head,  as  if  ornamented  with  a  plume,  though  it  may 
represent  the  top  of  the  furred  hood. 

The  engraving  is  generally  deep,  and  characteristic  of  the  locality  from  whence 
it  was  obtained. 

Diui.i-  HOW.     Kotxebue  Sound.     K.  VV.  Nelson.    48.520. 

DitlLi,  HOW.     Kotzebue  Sound.     K.  W.  Nelson.    48.')21. 

Dkim.  HOW.  Kot/ebue  Sound.  E.  W.  Nelson.  48522.  A  dark  yellow  Hpocimen, 
apparently  very  old,  and  engraved  on  three  sideH.  Figs.  —  are  from  this  piece. 
All  the  engravings  are  deeply  cut  and  blackenotl.  One  side  bears  15  sealH,  14  of 
which  are  b<'ing  dragged,  the  entire  Hcries  resembling  an  attempt  at  decorative 
results  rather  than  historic. 

Dnii.i.  HOW.     Kotzebue  Sound.     K.  W.  Nelson.    48524. 

Dkili.  HOW.  Norton  Sound.  K.  \V.  Nelson.  48.')25.  This  bow  is  tinged  with  age, 
and  is  of  a  decided  orange  along  one  side.  Parts  of  the  engni  vings,  which  cover 
the  four  sides,  have  been  reproduced  in  pl.ite  22,  fig.  3.  Many  parts  of  Home  of 
the  engravings  have  become  so  worn  by  long-(;ontinued  use  as  to  be  too  indistinct 
to  admit  of  interpretation.  The  figures  are,  on  the  whole,  rather  deeply  and 
boldly  incised,  and  show  a  marked  likeness  to  the  rest  of  the  work  from  the 
locality  where  it  was  evidently  made. 

The  coloring  matter  in  the  incisions  has  assumed  a  deep  brown  color,  as  if  the 
original  black  had  become  covered  or  replaced  by  dirt  or  greast;. 

DniLL  HOW.  Kotzebue  Sound.  E.  W.  Nelson.  48526.  Very  deep  and  strong 
engravings  on  old  ivory. 

Drii.i.,  OK  iiANOLK.  Kotzebue  Sonnd.  E.  W.  Nelson.  48527.  This  old  stained 
piece  bears  upon  the  two  upper  sides  a  number  of  animal  forms,  one  row  being 
a  series  of  six  reindeer,  together  with  several  seals  and  whales.  A  native  in  his 
kaiak  is  represented  with  his  arms  uplifted,  and  probably  the  lingers  were  drawn 
spread,  nse  of  specimen  having  worn  the  surface  smooth. 

One  underside  has  a  long  row  of  ten  wolves  and  one  reindeer,  faced  by  a 
hunter  Hbooting  an  arrow,  who  is  accompanied  by  two  other  hunters  and  a  dog. 
The  other  side  shows  a  whale  hunt  and  a  walruH  and  bear  hunt,  the  two  hunt- 
ing scenes  being  divided  by  a  narrow  vertical  line  bearing  delicate  cross- 
hatchings,  and  denotes  the  partition  of  the  two. 


OUAPHIC   ART   OF   THE   ESKIMOH. 


1)66 


i«oiinen, 
Un«  M\A 

reliulewr 
i^cntureii 
y  yellow 

«UH«llHt 

4  llmiruH 
il)^  Hoiiie 
\t  to  him 

[H  Ih  n  not 

ho  I'noblo 
el  vertical 
(1  lor  rain. 

ftllH,  IV  liko 

rllud  hy  ft 
ktionB  were 

HuiiiK  from 
smaller  I'lR- 

nH  (IrivgKe'^ 
nt«Mliii»titft- 
)H,  and  vAc\\ 
mgh  it  nmy 

from  whence 


Kpccimen, 

this  pioce. 

15  sealH,  l-l  "f 

it  decorative 


led  with  age, 
which  cover 
[ts  of  Bome  of 
loo  indistinct 
[r  deeply  and 
lirk  from  the 

|>lor,  as  if  the 

and  strong 

old  stained 
Ine  row  l)eing 
1  native  in  his 
Is  were  drawn 

Ir,  faced  by  a 
Irs  and  a  dog. 
Iho  two  hnnt- 
Llicate  cross- 


DlULMiuw.     Kot/.«>huo  Sound.     K.  W.  NeUon.     4Hr>-'H.     I'latu  21.',  tig.  2. 

Dhiix  how.     Kot/chiie  Suiunl.     10.  W.  NeUun.     48.*>27. 

Dkii.i.  n«»w.  Kot/ebiie  ."^oiiud.  K.  W.  Nelmin.  IWkU).  K|M>ciiiion  dtM<|>  yellow  with 
age  autl  use.  'I'he  charuuterH  are  deeply  iuoiHed  and  reMrmtent  \ery  heavy- 
bodied  reindeer.     Iloth  siden  are  decorated. 

Dkim.  huw.     Kotzebue  Hound.     K.  W.  N'elHon.    iXt'M.     I'lute  I'l,  lig.  1. 

WoUK  iiAt)  KAHTKNKK.  Sahotniiky.  K.  W.  .Nelson.  l8!Ni4i.  Made  «if  a  three^sided 
piece  of  ivory  in  which  the  corners  have  been  roiindetl  and  HUiootlieil.  The 
ornanientationH  are  sets  of  cross-lines,  to  the  center  of  which  are  short  liiteriil 
Hbes,  and  between  each  such  transverse  set  are  snuill  black  spots  an«l  crosses. 

Dm  I.I.  BOW.  Hothaiii  Inlet.  K.  \V.  Nelson.  (>ll.*i,'{.  A  piece  originally  almost  stpiare, 
but  by  perforating  at  the  ends,  from  beneath,  the  specimen  was  r^plit  vertically. 
Both  sitles  are  ornamented,  however,  one  side  with  but  a  few  scratches,  while 
the  other  has  a  very  interesting  whale  and  walrus  hunt. 

l)iui.i.  HOW.  liothum  Inlet.  K.  W.  Nelson.  tS-llIt^.  An  old  specimen  with  four 
sides  crudely  engraved,  .shooting  with  firearms,  dragging  seals,  etc.,  comjirises 
the  subjects  jiortrayed.  Three  whale's  flukes  are  also  erected,  to  denote  that 
animal,  while  a  dog  sletlge,  with  very  rude  drawing  of  the  dog. 

Diui.i.  now.  Diomede  Island.  K.  W.  Nelson.  (kUi^l.  Only  \)  iiiirhes  long  and 
averages  one-fourth  of  an  inch  si|uare;  yet  the  four  sides  are  ornamented; 
three  have  lateral  longitudinal  border  lines,  Itetween  which  are  recorded  numer- 
ous llgnreN  of  umiaks  after  walrus  and  a  ceremonial  «lance  with  one  drummer. 
On  another  side  is  a  village,  showing  summer  habitatiims  or  conical  houses, 
near  meat  racks,  some  boats,  etc.  The  under  side  bears  several  iinimal  forms, 
and  two  mythic  tigures  resembling  the  water  monster,  i.  e.,  an  elongateil  four- 
footed  and  horned  or  crested  serj>ent,  referred  to  by  NaoiuotV  in  connection  with 
lig.  1:^9,  0. 

Dkili.  BOW.  Diomede  Island.  K.  W.  Nelson.  tilUi^ll.  Divrk  ,\  ellosv  or  light  brown 
|)iece  of  ivory.     The  four  engraved  sides  are  shown  in  tt  xt  tigures. 

KANTA(i  iiANDi.K.     I'oiiit  Ilope.     K.  \V.  Nelsou.     »W8()1. 

DliiLL  now.  Point  Mope.  10.  \V.  Nelsju.  (i.'WOL'.  Very  t;rude  though  deeply  incised 
line,  composing  animals,  etc.,  is  shown  on  rather  white  ivory.  An  interesting 
whale  hunt  is  shown ;  the  tlukes  appear  like  «letached  deco'  ttive  ones,  attached 
to  the  rear  end  of  bodies. 

Flukes  are  also  shown  at  one  place;  while  a  native  crawling  along  on  his 
stomach,  to  approach  seals,  is  also  engraved. 
Upon  the  top  edge  are  four  birds,  four  ditl'erent  forms  of  representing  them. 

Ba«)  iiANDLK.  Point  Hope.  E.W.Nelson.  6;iX03.  The  undersurfaee  of  this  stained 
old  specimen  bears  the  tigures  of  eleven  outstretche«l  hides,  at  the  right  being 
a  human  figure.  Upon  the  top  face  is  some  linear  dec«)ration,  while  near  the 
middle  of  the  specimen  are  tigures  of  four  reindeer,  facing  to  the  right.  Portions 
of  the  figures  are  with«>ut  the  brown-black  stain,  the  legs  being  slender  and 
the  hoofs  indicated  by  minute  etchings  made  by  a  sharp-pointed  graver. 

Upon  the  outer  curve  are  a  number  of  nucleateil  rings,  33  in  number,  and 
each  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  The  under  side  bears  a  median 
line,  upon  which  are  ])ortrayed,  in  various  attitudes,  nine  reindeer.  The  tigures 
are  rather  deeply  incised  and  very  black.  The  coloring  matter  in  several  ]>laces 
has  fallen  out,  as  if  it  had  become  hard  or  dry. 

Bag  handlb.    Point  Hope.     E.  VV.  Nelsou.    63809. 

Bow  OK  HANDLK.  "Chilcat."  J.  J.  McLean.  67904.  An  almost  square,  slightly 
curved  specimen,  with  engravings  on  all  sides  excepting  the  under  or  concave 
one.  The  top  or  convex  surface  bears,  among  other  objects,  a  large  umiak,  the 
four  occupants  of  which  are  indicated  by  the  heads,  arms,  and  paddles  only,  the 
vertical  body  line  being  jmrposely  omitted  or  forgotten.  Some  conventional 
trees  are  used  as  ornamental  markings.  The  sides  hear  seal  hunts,  and  most  of 
the  records  have  been  reproduced  in  the  text. 


^Vj; 


966 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


Each  HuUt  in  ornamented  by  two  (l«!cj»ly  incised  grooves,  one  at  either  edjje  of 
the  fae^H  of  the  bow,  and  the  eu^ravingH  are  deeply  and  forcildy  made,  all  being 
filled  in  with  black. 

Though  inarktMl  iih  from  "Chilcat,"  the  H])e('inieu  has  the  characteriHtic  appear- 
ance  of  the  work  done  by  the  natives  of  Norton  Hound. 

BMi  iiANDLK.  I'oint  Barrow.  Lieutenant  1'.  H.  Kay,  I'.  H.  A.  89420.  Measures 
14^  inches  in  length,  the  upper  surface  being  rather  flat,  while  the  under  side  is 
rounded  or  convex.  Upon  the  upper  surface  are  twelve  reindeer,  one  behind  the 
other  and  facing  the  left,  while  at  the  extreme  right  is  a  man  holding  a  bow 
drawn,  l)ut  no  arrow  iii(licate<l ;  while  at  the  extreme  right  is  a  figure  resembling 
an  outstretcheil  bearskin.  The  engravings  are  strongly  incisc<l  and  greatly 
resemble  those  made  at  Norton  Hound  and  Kotzebue  Hound.  There  is  no  coloring 
matter  in  any  ])la('e,  and  it  is  lieliev«!d  that  the  work  was  not  made  by  Point 
Harrow  natives,  but  secured  by  them  by  trattic  or  otherwise  from  some  locality 
farther  south  and  west  tiian  Point  Marrow. 

The  arrangement  of  the  reindeer,  the  Jipparent  similarity  in  all  respects,  and 
their  regular  spacing — between  the  tigures — suggests  that,  although  the  record 
seems  to  l)e  intended  for  a  hunting  score,  it  was  also  made  with  a  view  to  pre- 
senting an  ornamental  and  decorative  api)earanc<«. 

DuiLi.  HOW.     Point  Harrow.     Lieutenant  P.  H.  Kay,  1.  S.  A.     89424.     Plate  3,  tig.  4. 

Honk  nuiLi.  now.  Point  Harrow.  Lieutenant  1'.  II.  Kay,  U.  S.  A.  89r)08.  Madeof 
a  rib,  measurers  12^  inches  across  from  point  to  point,  and  is  rather  rudely  made. 
Hears  no  decoration. 

DuiLi.  BOW.  Point  Harrow.  Lieutenant  P.  II.  Ray,  U.  S.  A.  89777.  Hears  a  ver- 
ti<al  line  with  radiating  lines  from  one  side  only.  The  ivory  is  pieced  near  one 
end  to  lengthen  the  bow;  the  coloring  matter  is  i»ale,  but  consisted  of  a  reddish 
substance  resembling  red  ocher. 

Duii.i.  HOW.  St.  Michaels.  I,.  M.  Turner.  129223.  Ornamented  cm  lower  side  by  a 
'".solid"  herd  of  reindeer,  wolves,  8<ials,  walrus,  and  other  animals.  The  inci- 
sions are  deeply  cut  and  are  left  uncolored,  appearing  light  yellowish  gray  as 
compared  with  the  dark  surrounding  sniface.     Made  of  reindeer  Imrn. 

Dkii.i.  how.  Location  not  given.  M.  M.  Ilazen.  ir)407L  Whaling  ships  in  pur- 
suit of  whales  and  a  walrus.  An  Innuit  village  is  at  the  right.  On  the  other 
side  are  very  dee]dy  engraved  figures  of  habitations,  umiaks  on  scaffold,  etc. 
The  character  of  work  resembles  that  of  Kotzebue  Sound. 


MISCELLANEOrS  AND  VARIED  SPECIMENS. 

The  following  iire  iniscellaiieous  .specimons,  embracing  tools,  iin]v^- 
nients,  uten.sils,  toys,  etc.,  all  of  which  are  variously  marked  with  ett^h- 
ings  of  animals,  villages,  oi'cupations,  and  in  many  instances  only  With 
lines,  dots,  and  circles,  to  illustrate  the  application  of  such  tigures  'for 
the  purpose  of  simple  ornamentation. 


Plate  17,  fig.  2. 
74r)4. 


"Colli)  lU'TTON."     Intrusive  carving. 

Haw.     Anderson  Kiver.     C.P.  Uaudet.     [1304.] 

Bonk  toy.     Yukon  River.     W.  H.  Dall.     "WilO. 

Ivory  si.ah.     Fort  Anderson.     K.  MacFarlane. 

Belt  ci.asi-.     Eskimo  Innuit.     \V.  II.  Dall.     1G140. 

Pendant  iok  kak.     Nuuivak.      E.  W.  Nelson.     1()199.     Magemut  ear  pendant  of 

ivory,  marked  with  spiral  line  from  one  end,  around  the  body  to  the  other 

extremity. 
Round  BOX.     Norton  Sound.     L.M.Turner.    24352.    Plate  34,  fig.  3. 
IvouYCASKKT.    Ht.  Michaels.     L.M.Turner.    24606.    Plate  25,  fig.  1. 
Spkar  straioutkner.    Kowak  River.     Lieutenant  Stoney.    27893. 


"II 

Till 
To( 


IVi 

Till 
Haj 

sciti 

TobI 


GRAPHIC   ART   OF    THE    ESKIMOS. 


967 


lj;«  of 
\)eing 

ppear- 

•  8i«le  19 
lind  tlie 
r  a^o*^ 

greiitly 
coloring 
lay  Point 
s  locality 

)ect9,  and 
ib«  record 
BW  to  pre- 

ite3,  t\g.4. 
(.  Made  of 
dely  made. 

Sears  a  vet- 
ed  near  one 
of  a  rcddi»l> 

iver  Bide  l»y  J^ 
The  inci- 
.visU  gray  hh 
rn. 

On  tbe  otlier 
scaffold,  etc. 


«ol8,  imi:)^- 
\  with  etyU- 
ss  only  With 
iiguies  tor 


Lr  pendant  of 
to  the  other 


Hook.    Location  not  given.    L.  M.  Turner.    29618. 

Thimble  iioldku.    Norton  Sound.     L.  M.  Turner.    2Jt731. 

WooDKN  BOX.     Norton  Sound.     E.W.Nelson.    33077,     Plate  34,  lig.  2. 

Bodkin.     Norton  Sound.     E.W.  Nelson.    33176.    Plate  24,  lig.  5. 

Bodkin.    Norton  Sound.     E.W.  Nelson.    33177.    Plate  24,  tig.  6. 

Snikk  BOX.    Norton  Sound.     E.W.  Nelson.     33197. 

Bone  icK  (JUAUi).     Norton  .Sound.     K.W.Nelson.     3321J).     Used  to  put  over  bow  of 

kuiuk  to  keep  off  i<e,  or  injury  to  vessel.     Plate  41,  lig. 3. 
Bodkin.     Norton  Sound.     E.W.Nelson.    33257. 
Di{A4i  iiANDi.K.     Norton  Sound.     K.  W.  Nelson,     33292. 

E.  \V.  Nelson.     33301>. 
E.W.Nelson.     33310. 
K.W.Nelson.     33311. 
E.  W.  Nelson.     33312. 
E.  W.  Nelson.     33315. 
E.  W.  Nelson. 
E.  W.  Nelson. 


Bow  .STKKNliTllKNKH. 
Bow  8TKEN(iTIIENP:R. 
Bow  .STKEX(iTHENr.l{. 
Bow  HTKENOTIIKNEH. 
OkNAMENTED   BONE. 

Beavek  cauvei)  of  uonk. 

BeLUOA  CAUVEI)  OV    HONK. 


Norton  Sound. 
Norton  Sound. 
Norton  Sound. 
Norton  Sound. 
Norton  Sound. 

Norton  .Sound. 
Norton  Sound. 


Plate  14,  fig.  5. 

Plate  14,  lig.  7. 

Plate  14.  fig.  4. 

Plate  14,  tig.  6. 
Plate  14,  lig.  1. 
3335»5. 
33373. 


36011. 
.361.52. 


Eau  PENDANTS.     St.  Mifbaels.     E.W.Nelson.     33491. 

Gravuno.     Norton  Sound.     E.  W.  Nelson.     .33535. 

Bone  oknamext.     St.  Micbaels.     *    .33640. 

Carvino.     Aleutian  Islands.     L.  M.  Turner.     3.5900. 

SllUTTLK.     Aleutian  Islands.     Ij.  M.  Turner.     3590X. 

Earring  iioi.dki!.     Agaiynkchuguniut.     E.  W.  Nelson. 

Seine  thimble  holder.     Knsliunuk.     E.  W.  Nelson. 

Ivory  ornament.     Kushkunnk.    E.  W.  Nelson.    36-177. 

Earrings.     Askenuk.     K.W.Nelson.    3»586l. 

Hair  ORNAMKNT.     Kushunuk.     E.W.  Nelson.     37003.     Pig.  3  of  plate  42,  and  hears 

diagonal  cross  lines  at  toj),  and  two  concentrii'  rings  at  ty.uh  lower  lol)e. 
Ivory  bl'cklk.     Agaiyiikchuguinut.     K.W.Nelson.    37(H)7. 
"Handle."    Cbalitinut.     E.W.Nelson.     37319. 
Carved  ornament.     Anogoguinut.     E.  W.  Nelson.    37431. 
Speak  GUARD.     Anogoguinut.     E.  W.  Nelson.     37161. 
C'ARVlNii  OF  .SEAL.     I'nulakleet.     E.  W.  Nelson.     37tilO. 
Implement.     Konigunogumnt.    E.W.Nelson.     376(;4. 
Bodkin.     Cbalitinut.     E.  W.  Nelson.     377.52.     An  ivory  ban<llo  with  steel  point  and 

ivory  links.    Ornamented  with  concentric  rings  and  liower  symbols.     Plate  41, 

tig.  6. 
Spear  (iiTARD.    Cbalitinut.     E.W.Nelson.    37759. 
Be.  kle.     Kongigunoguiiiut.     E.  W.  Nelson.     37763. 
E'     PENDANTS.    Spngunuguinnt.     E.W.Nelson.     3X0.52. 
Bo   E  SEINE  NEEDLE.     Lower  Vukou.     E.W.Nelson.    .'K^IS. 
Hai.poon  head.     Shaktolik.     38440. 
BoyE  SEINE  NEEDLE.     Fort  Yukou. 
Hai  ornament.     Kushunuk.     E.W, 
"  Hunting  tally."     Point  Barrow. 

.58,  tig.  1. 
Thimble  guard.     St.  Michaels.     E.  W.  Nelson.     13459.     Plate  I'.o,  lig.  1. 
Toy  FISH.    Captf  Vancouver.     E.W.Nelson.     43593.     Bone  lish  1*  imlies  in  length, 

llattened  with  pictograph  of  wolf  (?)  and  trident  figure,  also  other  ornament 

upon  upper  side,  with  huniau  ligure  below. 
Ivory  wedge.    Nunevak  Island.     K.  W.  Nelson.    43738. 
Thimble  guard.    Unalakleet.     E.  W.  Nelson.    43861.     Plate  35,  li^.  6. 
Harpoon  head.     "Alaska."    E.  W.  Nelson.    43949. 
ScRAPKR.    Cape  Darby.     E.  W.  Nelson.    44180. 
Wooden  box.    Cape  Nome.    E.  W.  Nelson.    44457. 
Tobacco  box.    Sledge  Island.    E.  W.  Nelson.    44766. 


K.W.Nelson.     38.501. 
Nelson.     3H720. 
Lieutenant  P.  11.  Hav, 


IJ.  S.  A.     891H7.     Plate 


U I 


m 


li: 


968 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1895. 


Ivory  gambling  sticks.  81edge  Island.  E.  W.  NelHoii.  45006.  These  have  very 
thin  lines  eugraved  upon  them,  not  with  any  reference  to  the  value  of  the  sticks, 
but  made  probably  during  an  interval  of  idleness  to  wliilu  away  time.  Tlie 
characters  represent  rudely  and  carelo"^  drawn  habitations,  while  in  one 
instance  they  are  the  outlines  of  human  pigmies. 

CicBASER.     Sledge  Island.    E.  \V.  Nelson.    45140. 

Saw.     Port  Clarence.     T.  H.  Bean.     46145.     Plate  17,  tig.  1. 

Comb.    Cape  Printe  of  Wales.     E.  W.  Nelson.     48174. 

Wedge.  Nnnevak  Island.  E.W.Nelson.  48289.  Ivory  '-splitter  or  wedge"  for 
splitting  small  pieceu  of  wood. 

FuNGi!S  ASfi  BOX.     Kotzebne  Sound.     E.  W.  Nelson.    48558. 

Netting  shuttle.     Lower  Yukon.     E.  W.  Nelson.    48715. 

Carving  ok  flol'NDEU.     Unalakleet.     E.  W.  Nelson.     43786. 

Ivory  koi>.  Kotzebuo  Sound.  E.  W.  Nelson.  48532.  This  specimen  is  pointed  at 
one  end  and  has  iterforation  at  the  other.  Three  tsides  are  decorated  in  deep 
black  stained  characters  of  various  marine  animals.  The  spaces  between  some 
of  the  objects  are  tilled  in  with  nucleated  circles. 

Effigy  of  seal.     Kotzebue  Sound.     ( ?)    48642. 

Ornament.  Bristol  Bay.  C.  L.  McKay.  55909.  Effigy  of  seal,  with  rings  and 
bristles  inserted  by  means  of  pegs. 

Ivory  fish.    Point  Barrow.     liieutenaut  P.  H.  Ray,  U.  S.  A.    .56578. 

Thread  cask.     [Locality?)     Lieutenant  P.  H.  Kay,  U.  S.  A.    56615. 

"Mouthpiece.''    Diomede  Islands.     E.W. Nelson.    63666. 

"Mouthpiece."    Diomede  Islands.     E.W.Nelson.    63667. 

Box  for  snuff.     Hothum  Inlet.    E.  W.  Nelson.    64186. 

Effigy  of  walrus.    Nashagak.    E.  L.  McKay.    72904. 

House  HOOK.    Alaska  (?).    C.  L.  McKay.    73034. 

"  Bone  skin  dresser.''    Sitka.    John  J.  McLean.    74954. 

Arrow  straightener.     Kowak  River.    Lieutenant  G.M.  Stoney,  U.S. N.     127893. 

Powder  horn.    St.  Michaels.    L.  M.  Turner.    129221. 

Pictograph  on  bone.    St.  Michaels.     L.  M.  Turner.     129277. 

Ornamented  ivory  rod.     St.  Michaels.    L.  M.  Turner.     129284. 

Thimble  Holder.     St.  Michaels.     E.  W.  Nelson.     129314. 

Money  box  of  bone.     Hupa  Islands.    .1.  Curtln.     131159. 

Ivory  pendant.    Nunevak  Island.    E.  W.  Turner.     16199. 

Bone  skin  DRKSSER.    Thliugit  Islands.    Lieutenant  G!.  F.  Emmons,  U.  S.N.    1()8358. 

Bone  skin  dresser.    Thlingit  Islands.    Lieutenant  G.  F.  Emmons,  U.  S.  N.     168360. 

Bone  ornaments.    Thlinkit.    Lieutenant  G.  F.  Emmons,  U.  S.  N.    168372. 

Dagger  sheath.  Tangier,  Morocco.  Lieutenant  A.  P.  Niblack,  U.  S.  N.  168827. 
Plate  44. 


ave  very 
le  sticks, 
me.  The 
e  in  uue 


Mlge"  for 


pointed  at 
>d  in  deep 
weeu  sowe 


rin^s  and 


N.     127893. 


N.  1(58358. 

,N.  168360. 
2. 

N.  168827. 


r 


1:^ 


-i 


.'■    '   1 


